Mikrotik Routeros™ V2.9: Reference Manual

MikroTik RouterOS™ v2.
9
Reference Manual
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Table Of Contents
Specifications Sheet........................................................................... 1
General Information ............................................................................................................... 1
Device Driver List................................................................................ 5
General Information ............................................................................................................... 6
Ethernet.................................................................................................................................. 6
Wireless................................................................................................................................ 14
Aironet Arlan........................................................................................................................ 16
RadioLAN............................................................................................................................ 16
Synchronous Serial............................................................................................................... 16
Asynchronous Serial............................................................................................................. 17
ISDN..................................................................................................................................... 17
VoIP...................................................................................................................................... 17
xDSL.................................................................................................................................... 18
HomePNA............................................................................................................................ 18
LCD...................................................................................................................................... 18
PCMCIA Adapters............................................................................................................... 18
GPRS Cards.......................................................................................................................... 19
CDMA/EV-DO Cards.......................................................................................................... 19
License Management........................................................................ 20
General Information............................................................................................................. 20
License Management............................................................................................................ 22
Basic Setup Guide............................................................................ 25
General Information ............................................................................................................. 25
Setting up MikroTik RouterOS™........................................................................................ 26
Logging into the MikroTik Router....................................................................................... 29
Adding Software Packages................................................................................................... 30
Navigating The Terminal Console....................................................................................... 30
Basic Configuration Tasks................................................................................................... 33
Setup Command................................................................................................................... 34
Basic Examples.................................................................................................................... 35
Advanced Configuration Tasks............................................................................................ 39
Installing RouterOS with CD-Install................................................. 41
CD-Install............................................................................................................................. 41
Installing RouterOS with Floppies................................................... 45
Floppy Install........................................................................................................................ 45
Installing RouterOS with NetInstall................................................. 49
NetInstall.............................................................................................................................. 49
Configuration Management.............................................................. 55
System Backup..................................................................................................................... 56
The Export Command.......................................................................................................... 56
The Import Command.......................................................................................................... 57
Configuration Reset.............................................................................................................. 58

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Server................................................. 59
File Transfer Protocol Server............................................................................................... 59
MAC Level Access (Telnet and Winbox)......................................... 61
MAC Telnet Server.............................................................................................................. 62
MAC WinBox Server........................................................................................................... 62
Monitoring Active Session List............................................................................................ 63
MAC Telnet Client............................................................................................................... 63
Serial Console and Terminal............................................................ 64
Serial Console Configuration............................................................................................... 65
Configuring Console............................................................................................................ 65
Using Serial Terminal.......................................................................................................... 66
Console Screen..................................................................................................................... 67
Software Package Management...................................................... 68
Installation (Upgrade)........................................................................................................... 69
Uninstallation....................................................................................................................... 71
Downgrading........................................................................................................................ 71
Disabling and Enabling........................................................................................................ 72
Unscheduling........................................................................................................................ 73
System Upgrade................................................................................................................... 73
Adding Package Source........................................................................................................ 75
Software Package List.......................................................................................................... 75
Software Version Management........................................................ 78
System Upgrade................................................................................................................... 78
Adding Package Source........................................................................................................ 80
SSH (Secure Shell) Server and Client............................................. 81
SSH Server........................................................................................................................... 82
SSH Client............................................................................................................................ 82
Telnet Server and Client................................................................... 84
Telnet Server........................................................................................................................ 84
Telnet Client......................................................................................................................... 85
Terminal Console.............................................................................. 86
Common Console Functions................................................................................................ 87
Lists and Item Names........................................................................................................... 88
Quick Typing........................................................................................................................ 89
Additional Information......................................................................................................... 90
General Commands.............................................................................................................. 90
Safe Mode............................................................................................................................. 92
Winbox............................................................................................... 94
ii

General Information............................................................................................................. 94
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 99
IP Addresses and ARP................................................................... 100
General Information ........................................................................................................... 100
IP Addressing..................................................................................................................... 101
Address Resolution Protocol.............................................................................................. 102
Proxy-ARP feature............................................................................................................. 103
Unnumbered Interfaces...................................................................................................... 106
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. 106
OSPF................................................................................................ 107
General Setup..................................................................................................................... 108
Areas................................................................................................................................... 110
Networks............................................................................................................................ 111
Interfaces............................................................................................................................ 112
Virtual Links....................................................................................................................... 113
Neighbours......................................................................................................................... 113
RIP.................................................................................................... 122
General Information........................................................................................................... 122
General Setup..................................................................................................................... 123
Interfaces............................................................................................................................ 124
Networks............................................................................................................................ 125
Neighbors........................................................................................................................... 126
Routes................................................................................................................................. 126
Routes, Equal Cost Multipath Routing, Policy Routing............... 130
Routes................................................................................................................................. 131
Policy Rules........................................................................................................................ 133
BGP Command Reference............................................................. 138
Instances............................................................................................................................. 139
Peers................................................................................................................................... 140
BGP Routing Filters........................................................................ 142
Filter Rules......................................................................................................................... 143
ARLAN 655 Wireless Client Card................................................... 146
Installation.......................................................................................................................... 146
Wireless Interface Configuration....................................................................................... 147
Interface Bonding............................................................................ 150
iii

Bridge............................................................................................... 156
Bridge Interface Setup........................................................................................................ 158
Port Settings....................................................................................................................... 159
Bridge Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 160
Bridge Port Monitoring...................................................................................................... 160
Bridge Host Monitoring..................................................................................................... 161
Bridge Firewall General Description................................................................................. 162
Bridge Packet Filter............................................................................................................ 165
Bridge NAT........................................................................................................................ 166
Bridge Brouting Facility..................................................................................................... 167
CISCO/Aironet 2.4GHz 11Mbps Wireless Interface...................... 169
Application Examples........................................................................................................ 173
Cyclades PC300 PCI Adapters....................................................... 176
Synchronous Interface Configuration................................................................................ 177
RSV/V.35 Synchronous Link Applications....................................................................... 178
Driver Management......................................................................... 180
Loading Device Drivers..................................................................................................... 181
Removing Device Drivers.................................................................................................. 182
Notes on PCMCIA Adapters.............................................................................................. 183
Ethernet Interfaces.......................................................................... 184
Ethernet Interface Configuration........................................................................................ 185
Monitoring the Interface Status.......................................................................................... 186
FarSync X.21 Interface.................................................................... 188
Synchronous Link Applications......................................................................................... 190
FrameRelay (PVC, Private Virtual Circuit) Interface..................... 196
Configuring Frame Relay Interface.................................................................................... 197
Frame Relay Configuration................................................................................................ 197
General Interface Settings.............................................................. 201
Interface Status................................................................................................................... 201
iv

Traffic Monitoring.............................................................................................................. 202
GPRS PCMCIA................................................................................. 203
How to make a GPRS connection...................................................................................... 203
ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Interface.................. 205
ISDN Hardware and Software Installation......................................................................... 206
ISDN Client Interface Configuration................................................................................. 207
ISDN Server Interface Configuration................................................................................. 208
ISDN Examples.................................................................................................................. 209
M3P................................................................................................... 214
Setup................................................................................................................................... 215
MOXA C101 Synchronous Interface.............................................. 217
Synchronous Link Application Examples.......................................................................... 220
MOXA C502 Dual-port Synchronous Interface............................. 223
Synchronous Link Application Examples.......................................................................... 225
PPP and Asynchronous Interfaces............................................... 228
Serial Port Configuration.................................................................................................... 229
PPP Server Setup................................................................................................................ 230
PPP Client Setup................................................................................................................ 231
PPP Application Example.................................................................................................. 232
RadioLAN 5.8GHz Wireless Interface............................................ 233
Wireless Network Applications.......................................................................................... 236
Sangoma Synchronous Cards....................................................... 239
LMC/SBEI Synchronous Interfaces............................................... 241
Wireless Client and Wireless Access Point Manual.................... 244
Nstreme Settings................................................................................................................. 255
Nstreme2 Group Settings................................................................................................... 256
Registration Table.............................................................................................................. 258
v

Connect List....................................................................................................................... 260
Access List......................................................................................................................... 261
Info..................................................................................................................................... 262
Virtual Access Point Interface............................................................................................ 265
WDS Interface Configuration............................................................................................ 266
Align................................................................................................................................... 267
Align Monitor..................................................................................................................... 268
Frequency Monitor............................................................................................................. 269
Manual Transmit Power Table........................................................................................... 270
Network Scan..................................................................................................................... 270
Security Profiles................................................................................................................. 271
Sniffer................................................................................................................................. 274
Sniffer Sniff........................................................................................................................ 275
Sniffer Packets.................................................................................................................... 276
Snooper............................................................................................................................... 276
Xpeed SDSL Interface..................................................................... 292
Xpeed Interface Configuration........................................................................................... 293
Frame Relay Configuration Examples............................................................................... 294
EoIP.................................................................................................. 297
EoIP Setup.......................................................................................................................... 298
EoIP Application Example................................................................................................. 299
IP Security........................................................................................ 303
Policy Settings.................................................................................................................... 306
Peers................................................................................................................................... 308
Remote Peer Statistics........................................................................................................ 310
Installed SAs....................................................................................................................... 310
Flushing Installed SA Table............................................................................................... 311
Counters.............................................................................................................................. 312
IPIP Tunnel Interfaces..................................................................... 319
IPIP Setup........................................................................................................................... 320
L2TP Interface................................................................................. 323
L2TP Client Setup.............................................................................................................. 325
Monitoring L2TP Client..................................................................................................... 326
L2TP Server Setup............................................................................................................. 326
L2TP Server Users............................................................................................................. 327
L2TP Application Examples.............................................................................................. 328
vi

PPPoE.............................................................................................. 334
PPPoE Client Setup............................................................................................................ 336
Monitoring PPPoE Client................................................................................................... 337
PPPoE Server Setup (Access Concentrator)...................................................................... 338
PPPoE Users....................................................................................................................... 339
PPPoE Server User Interfaces............................................................................................ 339
Application Examples........................................................................................................ 340
PPTP................................................................................................. 344
PPTP Client Setup.............................................................................................................. 346
Monitoring PPTP Client..................................................................................................... 347
PPTP Server Setup............................................................................................................. 347
PPTP Users......................................................................................................................... 348
PPTP Server User Interfaces.............................................................................................. 348
PPTP Application Examples.............................................................................................. 349
VLAN................................................................................................ 356
VLAN Setup....................................................................................................................... 358
Application Example.......................................................................................................... 359
Graphing.......................................................................................... 360
General Options.................................................................................................................. 361
Health Graphing................................................................................................................. 361
Interface Graphing.............................................................................................................. 362
Simple Queue Graphing..................................................................................................... 362
Resource Graphing............................................................................................................. 363
HotSpot User AAA.......................................................................... 364
HotSpot User Profiles......................................................................................................... 365
HotSpot Users..................................................................................................................... 366
HotSpot Active Users......................................................................................................... 368
IP accounting................................................................................... 370
Local IP Traffic Accounting............................................................................................... 371
Local IP Traffic Accounting Table.................................................................................... 372
Web Access to the Local IP Traffic Accounting Table...................................................... 373
PPP User AAA................................................................................. 374
Local PPP User Profiles..................................................................................................... 375
Local PPP User Database................................................................................................... 378
Monitoring Active PPP Users............................................................................................ 378
PPP User Remote AAA...................................................................................................... 379
vii

RADIUS client.................................................................................. 381
RADIUS Client Setup........................................................................................................ 382
Connection Terminating from RADIUS............................................................................ 383
Suggested RADIUS Servers............................................................................................... 384
Supported RADIUS Attributes........................................................................................... 384
Router User AAA............................................................................. 392
Router User Groups............................................................................................................ 393
Router Users....................................................................................................................... 394
Monitoring Active Router Users........................................................................................ 395
Router User Remote AAA................................................................................................. 396
Traffic Flow...................................................................................... 397
General Configuration........................................................................................................ 398
Traffic-Flow Target............................................................................................................ 398
SNMP Service.................................................................................. 402
SNMP Setup....................................................................................................................... 403
SNMP Communities.......................................................................................................... 403
Available OIDs................................................................................................................... 404
Available MIBs.................................................................................................................. 405
Tools for SNMP Data Collection and Analysis................................................................. 409
Log Management............................................................................. 411
General Settings................................................................................................................. 412
Actions................................................................................................................................ 412
Log Messages..................................................................................................................... 413
Bandwidth Control.......................................................................... 415
Queue Types....................................................................................................................... 426
Interface Default Queues.................................................................................................... 429
Simple Queues.................................................................................................................... 429
Queue Trees........................................................................................................................ 431
Filter................................................................................................. 438
Firewall Filter..................................................................................................................... 439
Filter Applications.............................................................................................................. 445
Address Lists.................................................................................. 447
Address Lists...................................................................................................................... 447
Mangle.............................................................................................. 449
viii

Mangle................................................................................................................................ 450
NAT................................................................................................... 457
NAT.................................................................................................................................... 458
NAT Applications.............................................................................................................. 463
Packet Flow..................................................................................... 465
Packet Flow........................................................................................................................ 466
Connection Tracking.......................................................................................................... 468
Connection Timeouts......................................................................................................... 470
Service Ports....................................................................................................................... 471
General Firewall Information............................................................................................. 472
Services, Protocols, and Ports...................................................... 475
Modifying Service Settings................................................................................................ 475
List of Services................................................................................................................... 476
DHCP Client and Server................................................................. 479
DHCP Client Setup............................................................................................................ 481
DHCP Server Setup............................................................................................................ 483
Store Leases on Disk.......................................................................................................... 485
DHCP Networks................................................................................................................. 486
DHCP Server Leases.......................................................................................................... 486
DHCP Alert........................................................................................................................ 489
DHCP Option..................................................................................................................... 490
DHCP Relay....................................................................................................................... 490
Question&Answer-Based Setup......................................................................................... 491
DNS Client and Cache.................................................................... 497
Client Configuration and Cache Setup............................................................................... 498
Cache Monitoring............................................................................................................... 499
Static DNS Entries.............................................................................................................. 499
Flushing DNS cache........................................................................................................... 499
HotSpot Gateway............................................................................ 501
Question&Answer-Based Setup......................................................................................... 508
HotSpot Interface Setup..................................................................................................... 509
HotSpot Server Profiles...................................................................................................... 510
HotSpot User Profiles......................................................................................................... 512
HotSpot Users..................................................................................................................... 512
HotSpot Active Users......................................................................................................... 512
HotSpot Cookies................................................................................................................ 512
HTTP-level Walled Garden................................................................................................ 513
IP-level Walled Garden...................................................................................................... 514
One-to-one NAT static address bindings........................................................................... 515
ix

Active Host List.................................................................................................................. 516
Service Port........................................................................................................................ 517
Customizing HotSpot: Firewall Section............................................................................. 517
Customizing HotSpot: HTTP Servlet Pages...................................................................... 519
Possible Error Messages..................................................................................................... 527
HotSpot How-to's............................................................................................................... 528
HTTP Proxy...................................................................................... 529
Setup................................................................................................................................... 531
Access List......................................................................................................................... 532
Direct Access List.............................................................................................................. 533
Cache Management............................................................................................................ 534
Proxy Monitoring............................................................................................................... 535
Connection List.................................................................................................................. 536
Cache inserts....................................................................................................................... 536
Cache Lookups................................................................................................................... 537
Complementary Tools........................................................................................................ 537
HTTP Methods................................................................................................................... 538
IP Pools............................................................................................ 540
Setup................................................................................................................................... 541
Used Addresses from Pool................................................................................................. 541
SOCKS Proxy Server...................................................................... 543
SOCKS Configuration........................................................................................................ 544
Access List......................................................................................................................... 545
Active Connections............................................................................................................ 545
UPnP................................................................................................. 548
Enabling Universal Plug-n-Play......................................................................................... 549
UPnP Interfaces.................................................................................................................. 549
Web Proxy........................................................................................ 552
Setup................................................................................................................................... 554
Access List......................................................................................................................... 555
Direct Access List.............................................................................................................. 557
Cache Management............................................................................................................ 558
Complementary Tools........................................................................................................ 558
Transparent Mode............................................................................................................... 559
HTTP Methods................................................................................................................... 559
Certificate Management.................................................................. 562
Certificates.......................................................................................................................... 563
DDNS Update Tool.......................................................................... 566
Dynamic DNS Update........................................................................................................ 567
x

GPS Synchronization...................................................................... 568
Synchronizing with a GPS Receiver.................................................................................. 569
GPS Monitoring................................................................................................................. 570
LCD Management............................................................................ 571
Configuring the LCD's Settings......................................................................................... 573
LCD Information Display Configuration........................................................................... 574
LCD Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 575
MNDP................................................................................................ 576
Setup................................................................................................................................... 577
Neighbour List.................................................................................................................... 577
System Clock and NTP................................................................... 579
System Clock...................................................................................................................... 579
System Clock DST adjustment.......................................................................................... 580
Client.................................................................................................................................. 582
Server.................................................................................................................................. 582
Time Zone.......................................................................................................................... 583
RouterBoard-specific functions.................................................... 585
BIOS upgrading.................................................................................................................. 586
BIOS Configuration........................................................................................................... 587
System Health Monitoring................................................................................................. 588
LED Management or RB200.............................................................................................. 589
LED Management on RB500............................................................................................. 590
Fan voltage control............................................................................................................. 590
Console Reset Jumper........................................................................................................ 591
Support Output File........................................................................ 592
Generating Support Output File......................................................................................... 592
System Resource Management..................................................... 593
System Resource................................................................................................................ 594
IRQ Usage Monitor............................................................................................................ 595
IO Port Usage Monitor....................................................................................................... 595
USB Port Information........................................................................................................ 596
PCI Information.................................................................................................................. 596
Reboot................................................................................................................................ 597
Shutdown............................................................................................................................ 597
Router Identity.................................................................................................................... 598
Date and Time.................................................................................................................... 598
System Clock Manual Adjustment..................................................................................... 599
Configuration Change History........................................................................................... 599
System Note....................................................................................................................... 600
xi

Bandwidth Test............................................................................... 602
Server Configuration.......................................................................................................... 603
Client Configuration........................................................................................................... 604
ICMP Bandwidth Test..................................................................... 606
ICMP Bandwidth Test........................................................................................................ 606
Packet Sniffer.................................................................................. 608
Packet Sniffer Configuration.............................................................................................. 609
Running Packet Sniffer...................................................................................................... 610
Sniffed Packets................................................................................................................... 611
Packet Sniffer Protocols..................................................................................................... 612
Packet Sniffer Host............................................................................................................. 614
Packet Sniffer Connections................................................................................................ 614
Ping.................................................................................................. 616
The Ping Command............................................................................................................ 617
MAC Ping Server............................................................................................................... 618
Torch (Realtime Traffic Monitor).................................................... 619
The Torch Command.......................................................................................................... 619
Traceroute........................................................................................ 622
The Traceroute Command.................................................................................................. 623
Network Monitor.............................................................................. 624
Network Watching Tool..................................................................................................... 624
Serial Port Monitor.......................................................................... 627
Sigwatch............................................................................................................................. 627
Scripting Host.................................................................................. 630
Console Command Syntax................................................................................................. 631
Expression Grouping.......................................................................................................... 633
Variables............................................................................................................................. 634
Command Substitution and Return Values........................................................................ 634
Operators............................................................................................................................ 635
Data types........................................................................................................................... 638
Command Reference.......................................................................................................... 639
Special Commands............................................................................................................. 644
Additional Features............................................................................................................ 645
Script Repository................................................................................................................ 645
Task Management.............................................................................................................. 646
Script Editor....................................................................................................................... 647
Scheduler......................................................................................... 649
xii

Scheduler Configuration..................................................................................................... 649
Traffic Monitor................................................................................. 652
Traffic Monitor................................................................................................................... 652
IP Telephony.................................................................................... 654
General Voice port settings................................................................................................ 657
Voicetronix Voice Ports..................................................................................................... 658
LineJack Voice Ports.......................................................................................................... 659
PhoneJack Voice Ports....................................................................................................... 661
Zaptel Voice Ports.............................................................................................................. 663
ISDN Voice Ports............................................................................................................... 664
Voice Port for Voice over IP (voip)................................................................................... 666
Numbers............................................................................................................................. 666
Regional Settings................................................................................................................ 669
Audio CODECs.................................................................................................................. 670
AAA................................................................................................................................... 670
Gatekeeper.......................................................................................................................... 672
A simple example............................................................................................................... 675
System Watchdog........................................................................... 682
Hardware Watchdog Management..................................................................................... 682
UPS Monitor..................................................................................... 684
UPS Monitor Setup............................................................................................................ 685
Runtime Calibration........................................................................................................... 686
UPS Monitoring................................................................................................................. 687
VRRP................................................................................................ 689
VRRP Routers.................................................................................................................... 690
Virtual IP addresses............................................................................................................ 691
A simple example of VRRP fail over................................................................................. 692
xiii

Specifications Sheet
Document revision 2.8 (September 7, 2007, 8:36 GMT)
This document applies to MikroTik RouterOS V2.9
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Description
General Information
Description
Major features
• Firewall and NAT - stateful packet filtering; Peer-to-Peer protocol filtering; source and
destination NAT; classification by source MAC, IP addresses (networks or a list of networks)
and address types, port range, IP protocols, protocol options (ICMP type, TCP flags and MSS),
interfaces, internal packet and connection marks, ToS (DSCP) byte, content, matching
sequence/frequency, packet size, time and more...
• Routing - Static routing; Equal cost multi-path routing; Policy based routing (classification
done in firewall); RIP v1 / v2, OSPF v2, BGP v4
• Data Rate Management - Hierarchical HTB QoS system with bursts; per IP / protocol / subnet
/ port / firewall mark; PCQ, RED, SFQ, FIFO queue; CIR, MIR, contention ratios, dynamic
client rate equalizing (PCQ), bursts, Peer-to-Peer protocol limitation
• HotSpot - HotSpot Gateway with RADIUS authentication and accounting; true Plug-and-Play
access for network users; data rate limitation; differentiated firewall; traffic quota; real-time
status information; walled-garden; customized HTML login pages; iPass support; SSL secure
authentication; advertisement support
• Point-to-Point tunneling protocols - PPTP, PPPoE and L2TP Access Concentrators and
clients; PAP, CHAP, MSCHAPv1 and MSCHAPv2 authentication protocols; RADIUS
authentication and accounting; MPPE encryption; compression for PPPoE; data rate limitation;
differentiated firewall; PPPoE dial on demand
• Simple tunnels - IPIP tunnels, EoIP (Ethernet over IP)
• IPsec - IP security AH and ESP protocols; MODP Diffie-Hellman groups 1,2,5; MD5 and
SHA1 hashing algorithms; DES, 3DES, AES-128, AES-192, AES-256 encryption algorithms;
Perfect Forwarding Secrecy (PFS) MODP groups 1,2,5
• Proxy - FTP and HTTP caching proxy server; HTTPS proxy; transparent DNS and HTTP
proxying; SOCKS protocol support; DNS static entries; support for caching on a separate drive;
access control lists; caching lists; parent proxy support
• DHCP - DHCP server per interface; DHCP relay; DHCP client; multiple DHCP networks;
static and dynamic DHCP leases; RADIUS support
• VRRP - VRRP protocol for high availability
• UPnP - Universal Plug-and-Play support
Page 1 of 695
Copyright 1999-2007, MikroTik. All rights reserved. Mikrotik, RouterOS and RouterBOARD are trademarks of Mikrotikls SIA.
Other trademarks and registred trademarks mentioned herein are properties of their respective owners.

• NTP - Network Time Protocol server and client; synchronization with GPS system
• Monitoring/Accounting - IP traffic accounting, firewall actions logging, statistics graphs
accessible via HTTP
• SNMP - read-only access
• M3P - MikroTik Packet Packer Protocol for Wireless links and Ethernet
• MNDP - MikroTik Neighbor Discovery Protocol; also supports Cisco Discovery Protocol
(CDP)
• Tools - ping; traceroute; bandwidth test; ping flood; telnet; SSH; packet sniffer; Dynamic DNS
update tool
TCP/IP protocol suite:
• Wireless - IEEE802.11a/b/g wireless client and access point (AP) modes; Nstreme and
Nstreme2 proprietary protocols; Wireless Distribution System (WDS) support; virtual AP; 40
and 104 bit WEP; WPA pre-shared key authentication; access control list; authentication with
RADIUS server; roaming (for wireless client); AP bridging
• Bridge - spanning tree protocol; multiple bridge interfaces; bridge firewalling, MAC NATting
• VLAN - IEEE802.1q Virtual LAN support on Ethernet and wireless links; multiple VLANs;
VLAN bridging
• Synchronous - V.35, V.24, E1/T1, X.21, DS3 (T3) media types; sync-PPP, Cisco HDLC,
Frame Relay line protocols; ANSI-617d (ANDI or annex D) and Q933a (CCITT or annex A)
Frame Relay LMI types
• Asynchronous - serial PPP dial-in / dial-out; PAP, CHAP, MSCHAPv1 and MSCHAPv2
authentication protocols; RADIUS authentication and accounting; onboard serial ports; modem
pool with up to 128 ports; dial on demand
• ISDN - ISDN dial-in / dial-out; PAP, CHAP, MSCHAPv1 and MSCHAPv2 authentication
protocols; RADIUS authentication and accounting; 128K bundle support; Cisco HDLC, x75i,
x75ui, x75bui line protocols; dial on demand
• SDSL - Single-line DSL support; line termination and network termination modes
Layer 2 connectivity
IA32 Hardware requirements

• CPU and motherboard - advanced 4th generation (core frequency 100MHz or more), 5th
generation (Intel Pentium, Cyrix 6X86, AMD K5 or comparable) or newer uniprocessor
(multi-processor systems are not supported) Intel IA-32 (i386) compatible architecture with PCI
local bus
• RAM - minimum 32 MiB, maximum 1 GiB; 64 MiB or more recommended
• Non-volatile storage medium - standard ATA/IDE interface controller and drive (SCSI and
USB controllers and drives are not supported; RAID controllers that require additional drivers
are not supported; SATA is only supported in legacy access mode) with minimum of 64 Mb
space; Flash and Microdrive devices may be connected using an adapted with ATA interface
MIPS Hardware requirements

• Supported systems - RouterBOARD 500 series (532, 512 and 511)
Page 2 of 695

• RAM - minimum 32 MiB
• Non-volatile storage medium - onboard NAND device, minimum 64Mb
Hardware needed for installation time only

• Floppy-based installation - standard AT floppy controller and 3.5'' disk drive connected as the
first floppy disk drive (A); AT, PS/2 or USB keyboard; VGA-compatible video controller card
and monitor
• CD-based installation - standard ATA/ATAPI interface controller and CD drive supporting
"El Torito" bootable CDs (you might need also to check if the router's BIOS supports booting
from this type of media; if El Torito is not supported by the BIOS, you can still boot up from
the CD using Smart Boot Manager Floppy); AT, PS/2 or USB keyboard; VGA-compatible
video controller card and monitor
• Floppy-based network installation - standard AT floppy controller and 3.5'' disk drive
connected as the first floppy disk drive (A); PCI Ethernet network interface card supported by
MikroTik RouterOS (see the Device Driver List for the list)
• Full network-based installation - PCI Ethernet network interface card supported by MikroTik
RouterOS (see the Device Driver List for the list) with PXE or EtherBoot extension booting
ROM (you might need also to check if the router's BIOS supports booting from network)
Depending on installation method chosen the router must have the following hardware:
Configuration possibilities
RouterOS provides powerful command-line configuration interface. You can also manage the
router through WinBox - the easy-to-use remote configuration GUI for Windows -, which provides
all the benefits of the command-line interface, without the actual "command-line", which may scare
novice users. Web-based configuration is provided for some most popular functionality. Major
features:
• Clean and consistent user interface
• Runtime configuration and monitoring
• Multiple connections
• User policies
• Action history, undo/redo actions
• safe mode operation
• Scripts can be scheduled for executing at certain times, periodically, or on events. All
command-line commands are supported in scripts
• Local teminal console - AT, PS/2 or USB keyboard and VGA-compatible video controller card
with monitor
• Serial console - any (you may choose any one; the first, also known as COM1, is used by
default) RS232 asynchronous serial port, which is by default set to 9600bit/s, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit, no parity, hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control
• Telnet - telnet server is running on 23 TCP port by default
• SSH - SSH (secure shell) server is running on 22 TCP port by default (available only if security
Page 3 of 695

package is installed)
• MAC Telnet - MikroTik MAC Telnet potocol server is by default enabled on all Ethernet-like
interfaces
• Winbox - Winbox is a RouterOS remote administration GUI for Windows, that uses 8291 TCP
port. It may also connect routers by their MAC addresses
Router may be managed through the following interfaces (note that until a valid IP configuration is
enteres, telnet and SSH connections are not possible):
Page 4 of 695

Device Driver List
Document revision 3.9 (September 26, 2007, 12:55 GMT)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Ethernet
Specifications
Description
Notes
Wireless
Specifications
Description
Aironet Arlan
Specifications
Description
RadioLAN
Specifications
Description
Synchronous Serial
Specifications
Description
Asynchronous Serial
Specifications
Description
ISDN
Specifications
Description
VoIP
Specifications
Description
xDSL
Specifications
Description
HomePNA
Specifications
Description
LCD
Specifications
Description
PCMCIA Adapters
Specifications
Description
GPRS Cards
Specifications
Page 5 of 695

Description
CDMA/EV-DO Cards
Specifications
Description
General Information
Summary
The document lists the drivers, included in MikroTik RouterOS and the devices that are tested to
work with MikroTik RouterOS. If a device is not listed here, it does not mean the device is not
supported, it still may work. It just means that the device was not tested.
Ethernet
Packages required: system
Description
3Com 509 Series

Chipset type: 3Com 509 Series ISA 10Base
Compatibility:
• 3Com EtherLink III
3Com FastEtherLink
Chipset type: 3Com 3c590/3c900 (3Com FastEtherLink and FastEtherLink XL) PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• 3c590 Vortex 10BaseT
• 3c592 chip
• 3c595 Vortex 100BaseTX
• 3c595 Vortex 100BaseT4
• 3c595 Vortex 100Base-MII
• 3c597 chip
• 3Com Vortex
• 3c900 Boomerang 10BaseT
• 3c900 Boomerang 10Mbit/s Combo
• 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbit/s Combo
• 3c900B-FL Cyclone 10Base-FL
Page 6 of 695

• 3c905 Boomerang 100BaseTX
• 3c905 Boomerang 100BaseT4
• 3c905B Cyclone 100BaseTX
• 3c905B Cyclone 10/100/BNC
• 3c905B-FX Cyclone 100BaseFX
• 3c905C Tornado
• 3c980 Cyclone
• 3cSOHO100-TX Hurricane
• 3CSOHO100B-TX
• 3c555 Laptop Hurricane
• 3c575 Boomerang CardBus
• 3CCFE575 Cyclone CardBus
• 3CCFE656 Cyclone CardBus
• 3c575 series CardBus
• 3Com Boomerang
ADMtek Pegasus
Chipset type: ADMtek Pegasus/Pegasus II USB 10/100BaseT
Compatibility:
• Planet 10/100Base-TX USB Ethernet Adapter UE-9500
• Linksys Instant EtherFast 10/100 USB Network Adapter USB100TX
AMD PCnet
Chipset type: AMD PCnet/PCnet II ISA/PCI 10BaseT
Compatibility:
• AMD PCnet-ISA
• AMD PCnet-ISA II
• AMD PCnet-PCI II
• AMD 79C960 based cards
AMD PCnet32
Chipset type: AMD PCnet32 PCI 10BaseT and 10/100BaseT
Compatibility:
• AMD PCnet-PCI
Page 7 of 695

• AMD PCnet-32
• AMD PCnet-Fast
Broadcom Tigon3
Chipset type: Broadcom Tigon3 PCI 10/100/1000BaseT
Compatibility:
• Broadcom Tigon3 570x
• Broadcom Tigon3 5782
• Broadcom Tigon3 5901-2
• SysKonnect SK-9Dxx Gigabit Ethernet
• SysKonnect SK-9Mxx Gigabit Ethernet
• Altima AC100x
• Altima AC9100
Davicom DM9102
Chipset type: Davicom DM9102 PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• Davicom DM9102
• Davicom DM9102A
• Davicom DM9102A+DM9801
• Davicom DM9102A+DM9802
DEC 21x4x 'Tulip'

Chipset type: DEC 21x4x "Tulip" PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• Digital DC21040 Tulip
• Digital DC21041 Tulip
• Digital DS21140 Tulip
• 21140A chip
• 21142 chip
• Digital DS21143 Tulip
Page 8 of 695

• D-Link DFE 570TX 4-port
• Lite-On 82c168 PNIC
• Macronix 98713 PMAC
• ASIX AX88140
• Lite-On LC82C115 PNIC-II
• ADMtek AN981 Comet
• Compex RL100-TX
• Intel 21145 Tulip
• IMC QuikNic FX
• Conexant LANfinity
Intel EtherExpressPro
Chipset type: Intel i82557 "Speedo3" (Intel EtherExpressPro) PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• Intel i82557/i82558/i82559ER/i82801BA-7 EtherExpressPro PCI cards
Intel PRO/1000
Chipset type: Intel i8254x (Intel PRO/1000) PCI 10/100/1000Base
Compatibility:
• Intel PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter (i82542, Board IDs: 700262-xxx, 717037-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 F Server Adapter (i82543, Board IDs: 738640-xxx, A38888-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 T Server Adapter (i82543, Board IDs: A19845-xxx, A33948-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 XT Server Adapter (i82544, Board IDs: A51580-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 XF Server Adapter (i82544, Board IDs: A50484-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 T Desktop Adapter (i82544, Board IDs: A62947-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 MT Desktop Adapter (i82540, Board IDs: A78408-xxx, C91016-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 MT Server Adapter (i82545, Board IDs: A92165-xxx, C31527-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Server Adapter (i82546, Board IDs: A92111-xxx, C29887-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 MT Quad Port Server Adapter (i82546, Board IDs: C32199-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (i82545, Board IDs: A91622-xxx, C33915-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 MF Server Adapter (LX) (i82545, Board IDs: A91624-xxx, C33916-xxx)
• Intel PRO/1000 MF Dual Port Server Adapter (i82546, Board IDs: A91620-xxx, C30848-xxx)
Page 9 of 695

• Intel PRO/1000 GT Desktop Adapter (i82541PI)
Marvell Yukon
Chipset type: Marvell Yukon 88E80xx PCI 10/100/1000Base
Compatibility:
• 3Com 3C940 Gigabit LOM Ethernet Adapter
• 3Com 3C941 Gigabit LOM Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2970LX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2970LX/2SC Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2970SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2970SX/2SC Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2970TX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2970TX/2TX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2971SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• Allied Telesyn AT-2971T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• DGE-530T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter
• EG1032 v2 Instant Gigabit Network Adapter
• EG1064 v2 Instant Gigabit Network Adapter
• Marvell 88E8001 Gigabit LOM Ethernet Adapter
• Marvell RDK-80xx Adapter
• Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet 10/100/1000Base-T Adapter
• N-Way PCI-Bus Giga-Card 1000/100/10Mbps(L)
• SK-9521 10/100/1000Base-T Adapter
• SK-98xx Gigabit Ethernet Server Adapter
• SMC EZ Card 1000
• Marvell Yukon 88E8010 based
National Semiconductor DP83810

Chipset type: National Semiconductor DP83810 PCI 10/100BaseT
Compatibility:
• RouterBoard 200 built-in Ethernet
• RouterBoard 24 4-port Ethernet
Page 10 of 695

• NS DP8381x-based cards
National Semiconductor DP83820

Chipset type: National Semiconductor DP83820 PCI 10/100/1000BaseT
Compatibility:
• Planet ENW-9601T
• NS DP8382x-based cards
NE2000 ISA
Chipset type: NE2000 ISA 10Base
Compatibility:
• various ISA cards
NE2000 PCI
Chipset type: NE2000 PCI 10Base
Compatibility:
• RealTek RTL-8029
• Winbond 89C940 and 89C940F
• Compex RL2000
• KTI ET32P2
• NetVin NV5000SC
• Via 86C926
• SureCom NE34
• Holtek HT80232
• Holtek HT80229
• IMC EtherNic/PCI FO
NS8390
Chipset type: NS8390-compatible PCMCIA/CardBus 10Base
Compatibility:
• D-Link DE-660 Ethernet
• NE-2000 Compatible PCMCIA Ethernet
• NS8390-based PCMCIA cards
Page 11 of 695

RealTek RTL8129
Chipset type: RealTek RTL8129 PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• RealTek RTL8129 Fast Ethernet
• RealTek RTL8139 Fast Ethernet
• RTL8139A/B/C/D chip
• RTL8130 chip
• RTL8100B chip
• SMC1211TX EZCard 10/100 (RealTek RTL8139)
• Accton MPX5030 (RealTek RTL8139)
• D-Link DFE 538TX
RealTek RTL8169
Chipset type: RealTek RTL8169 PCI 10/100/1000Base
Compatibility:
• RealTek RTL8169 Gigabit Ethernet
• RouterBOARD 44G
Sundance ST201 'Alta'

Chipset type: Sundance ST201 "Alta" PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• D-Link DFE-550TX Fast Ethernet Adapter
• D-Link DFE-550FX 100Mbps Fiber-optics Adapter
• D-Link DFE-580TX 4-port Server Adapter (not recommended: may lock up the system)
• D-Link DFE-530TXS Fast Ethernet Adapter
• D-Link DL10050-based FAST Ethernet Adapter
• Sundance ST201 "Alta" chip
• Kendin KS8723 chip
TI ThunderLAN
Chipset type: TI ThunderLAN PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
Page 12 of 695

• Compaq Netelligent 10 T
• Compaq Netelligent 10 T/2
• Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX
• Compaq NetFlex-3/P
• Olicom OC-2183
• Olicom OC-2185
• Olicom OC-2325
• Olicom OC-2326
VIA vt612x 'Velocity'

Chipset type: VIA vt612x "Velocity" PCI 10/100/1000Base
Compatibility:
• VIA VT6120
• VIA VT6121
• VIA VT6122
VIA vt86c100 'Rhine'

Chipset type: VIA vt86c100 "Rhine" PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• VIA Rhine (vt3043)
• VIA Rhine II (vt3065 AKA vt86c100)
• VIA VT86C100A Rhine
• VIA VT6102 Rhine-II
• VIA VT6105 Rhine-III
• VIA VT6105M Rhine-III
• RouterBOARD 44 4-port Fast Ethernet card
• D-Link DFE 530TX
Winbond w89c840
Chipset type: Winbond w89c840 PCI 10/100Base
Compatibility:
• Winbond W89c840
• Compex RL100-ATX
Page 13 of 695

Notes
For ISA cards load the driver by specifying the I/O base address. IRQ is not required.
Wireless
Packages required: wireless
Description
Atheros
Chipset type: Atheros AR5001X PCI/CardBUS 11/54Mbit/s IEEE802.11a/b/g (with wireless AP
function)
Compatibility:
• Intel 5000 series
• Dlink DWL-A520
• Dlink DWL-G650
• Ubiquity SR5, SR2, SR9 series
• Atheros AR5000 chipset series based IEEE802.11a (AR5210 MAC plus AR5110 PHY chips)
cards
• Atheros AR5001A chipset series based IEEE802.11a (AR5211 MAC plus AR5111 PHY
chips) cards
• Atheros AR5001X chipset series based IEEE802.11a (AR5211 MAC plus AR5111 PHY
chips), IEEE802.11b/g (AR5211 MAC plus AR2111 PHY chips), IEEE802.11a/b/g (AR5211
MAC plus AR5111 and 2111 PHY chips) cards
• Atheros AR5001X+ chipset series based IEEE802.11a (AR5212 MAC plus AR5111 PHY
chips), IEEE802.11b/g (AR5212 MAC plus AR2111 PHY chips), IEEE802.11a/b/g (AR5212
MAC plus AR5111 and 2111 PHY chips) cards
• Atheros AR5002X+ chipset series based IEEE802.11b/g (AR5212 MAC plus AR2112 PHY
chips), IEEE802.11a/b/g (AR5212 MAC plus AR5112 PHY chips) cards
• Atheros AR5004X+ chipset series based IEEE802.11b/g (AR5213 MAC plus AR2112 PHY
chips), IEEE802.11a/b/g (AR5213 MAC plus AR5112 PHY chips) cards
• Atheros AR5006X chipset series based IEEE802.11a/b/g (AR5413/AR5414 single-chip
devices) cards
• Senao NMP-8602 Series cards
Cisco/Aironet
Chipset type: Cisco/Aironet ISA/PCI/PCMCIA 11Mbit/s IEEE802.11b (wireless station only)
Compatibility:
Page 14 of 695

• Aironet ISA/PCI/PC4800 2.4GHz DS 11Mbit/s Wireless LAN Adapters (100mW)
• Aironet ISA/PCI/PC4500 2.4GHz DS 2Mbit/s Wireless LAN Adapters (100mW)
• CISCO AIR-PCI340 2.4GHz DS 11Mbit/s Wireless LAN Adapters (30mW)
• CISCO AIR-PCI/PC350/352 2.4GHz DS 11Mbit/s Wireless LAN Adapters (100mW)
Intersil Prism II
Chipset type: Intersil Prism II PCI/CardBUS 11Mbit/s IEEE802.11b (with wireless AP feature)
Compatibility:
• Intersil PRISM2 Reference Design 11Mbit/s IEEE802.11b WLAN Card
• GemTek WL-211 Wireless LAN PC Card
• Compaq iPaq HNW-100 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• Samsung SWL2000-N 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• Z-Com XI300 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• ZoomAir 4100 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• Linksys WPC11 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• Addtron AWP-100 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• D-Link DWL-650 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• SMC 2632W 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• BroMax Freeport 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• Intersil PRISM2 Reference Design 11Mbit/s WLAN Card
• Bromax OEM 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card (Prism 2.5)
• corega K.K. Wireless LAN PCC-11
• corega K.K. Wireless LAN PCCA-11
• CONTEC FLEXSCAN/FX-DDS110-PCC
• PLANEX GeoWave/GW-NS110
• Ambicom WL1100 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• LeArtery SYNCBYAIR 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• Intermec MobileLAN 11Mbit/s 802.11b WLAN Card
• NETGEAR MA401 11Mbit/s 802.11 WLAN Card
• Intersil PRISM Freedom 11Mbit/s 802.11 WLAN Card
• OTC Wireless AirEZY 2411-PCC 11Mbit/s 802.11 WLAN Card
• Z-Com XI-325HP PCMCIA 200mW Card
• Z-Com XI-626 Wireless PCI Card
Notes
Page 15 of 695

If planned to use WEP with Prism cards see link for more information: Wireless Security
Prism cards set in client mode will not connect to Access Points (AP) that work with enabled
hide-ssid feature
WaveLAN/ORiNOCO
Chipset type: Lucent/Agere/Proxim WaveLAN/ORiNOCO ISA/PCMCIA 11Mbit/s IEEE802.11b
(wireless station only)
Compatibility:
• WaveLAN Bronze/Gold/Silver ISA/PCMCIA
Aironet Arlan
Packages required: arlan
Description
This is driver for legacy Aironet Arlan cards, not for newer Cisco/Aironet cards.
Chipset type: Aironet Arlan IC2200 ISA 2Mbit/s 2.4GHz
Compatibility:
• Aironet Arlan 655
RadioLAN
Packages required: radiolan
Description
This is driver for legacy RadioLAN cards.
Chipset type: RadioLAN ISA/PCMCIA 10Mbit/s 5.8GHz
Compatibility:
• RadioLAN ISA card (Model 101)
• RadioLAN PCMCIA card
Synchronous Serial
Packages required: synchronous
Description
• FarSync PCI V.35/X.21 (8.448 Mbit/s)

• LMC/SBEI wanPCI-1T1E1 PCI T1/E1 (also known as DS1 or LMC1200P, 1.544 Mbit/s or
Page 16 of 695

2.048 Mbit/s)
• LMC/SBEI wanPCI-1T3 PCI T3 (also known as DS3, 44.736Mbit/s)
• Sangoma S5141 (dual-port) and S5142 (quad-port) PCI RS232/V.35/X.21 (4Mbit/s - primary
port and 512Kbit/s - secondary ones)
Asynchronous Serial
Description
• Standard Communication Ports Com1 and Com2

• Moxa Smartio C104H/PCI, CP-114, CT-114, CP-132, C168H, CP-168H, and CP-168U PCI
2/4/8 port up to 4 cards (up to 32 ports)
• Cyclades Cyclom-Y and Cyclades-Z Series PCI cards up to 64 ports per card, up to 4 cards (up
to 256 ports)
• TCL DataBooster 4 or 8 PCI 4/8 port cards
• Sangoma S514/56 PCI 56 or 64Kbit/s DDS DSU with secondary 128Kbit/s RS232 port (Note:
this card is not for modem pools or serial terminals)
ISDN
Packages required: isdn
Description
PCI ISDN cards:
• Eicon.Diehl Diva PCI
• Sedlbauer Speed Card PCI
• ELSA Quickstep 1000PCI
• Traverse Technologie NETjet PCI S0 card
• Teles PCI
• Dr. Neuhaus Niccy PCI
• AVM Fritz PCI
• Gazel PCI ISDN cards
• HFC-2BS0 based PCI cards (TeleInt SA1)
• Winbond W6692 based PCI cards
VoIP
Packages required: telephony
Page 17 of 695

Description
H.323 Protocol VoIP Analog Gateways
• QuickNet LineJack ISA
• QuickNet PhoneJack ISA
• Voicetronix V4PCI - 4 analog telephone lines cards
• Zaptel X.100P IP telephony card (1 analog line)
xDSL
Description
Xpeed 300 SDSL cards (up to 6.7km twisted pair wire connection, max 2.3Mbit/s)
HomePNA
Description
Linksys HomeLink PhoneLine Network Card (up to 10Mbit/s home network over telephone line)
LCD
Packages required: lcd
Description
• Crystalfontz Intelligent Serial LCD Module 632 (16x2 characters) and 634 (20x4 characters)
• Powertip Character LCD Module PC1602 (16x2 characters), PC1604 (16x4 characters),
PC2002 (20x2 characters), PC2004 (20x4 characters), PC2402 (24x2 characters) and PC2404
(24x4 characters)
PCMCIA Adapters
Description
• Vadem VG-469 PCMCIA-ISA adapter (one or two PCMCIA ports)

• RICOH PCMCIA-PCI Bridge with R5C475 II or RC476 II chip (one or two PCMCIA ports)
• CISCO/Aironet PCMCIA adapter (ISA and PCI versions) for CISCO/Aironet PCMCIA cards
only
Page 18 of 695

GPRS Cards
Description
• NWH 1600 GPRS Modem (Benq M32 chip)
CDMA/EV-DO Cards
Description
• Audiovox PC5220 CDMA Dual Band 1XEV-DO PC Card for VerizonWireless

• Verizon Express Network PC5220 (AirPrime 5220)
• Kyocera KPC650 (Verizon Wireless)
• Novatel Wireless CDMA card
• Novatel U730 (Wireless HSDPA Modem)
• Huawei Mobile Connect Model E620 (3G)
• Novatel Merlin S720 (HSDPA)
• Option G3 PCMCIA card (Vodafone UMTS)
• Sierra Aircard 595 and other Sierra Wireless cards
Page 19 of 695

License Management
Document revision 3.1 (Thu Mar 03 11:06:06 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Description
License Management
Description
Property Description
Command Description
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS software has a licensing system with Software License (Software Key) issued
for each individual installation of the RouterOS.
Specifications
License required: level1
Home menu level: /system license
Hardware usage: Not significant
Description
The Software License can be obtained through the Account Server at www.mikrotik.com after the
MikroTik RouterOS has been installed. The Software ID of the installation is required when
obtaining the Software License. Please read the MikroTik RouterOS Basic Setup Guide for detailed
explanation of the installation and licensing process.
RouterOS allows you to use all its features without registration for about 24 hours from the first
run. Note that if you shut the router down, the countdown is paused, and it is resumed only when
the router is started again. During this period you must get a key, otherwise you will need to
reinstall the system. A purchased license key allows you to use RouterOS features according to the
chosen license level for unlimited time, and gives you rights to freely upgrade and downgrade its
versions for the term of one or three years since the key was purchased depending on license level.
A free registred license key (referred as a DEMO key further on) allows you to use a restricted set
of functions for unlimited period of time, but does not allow upgrading and downgrading versions.
There are 6 licensing levels, each providing some additional features. Level 0 means that there is no
key and all the features are enabled for one day. Level 2 is a transitional license level from versions
Page 20 of 695

prior 2.8, that allows to use all the features were allowed by your original license key for a previus
version.
3 (WISP 6 (Controller
Level number 1 (DEMO) 4 (WISP) 5 (WISP 3Y)
CPE) 3Y)
Upgrade time - 1 year 1 year 3 years 3 years
Initial Config
- - 15 days 30 days 30 days
Support
Wireless
Client and - yes yes yes yes
Bridge
Wireless AP - - yes yes yes
Synchronous
- - yes yes yes
interfaces
EoIP tunnels 1 unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited
PPPoE
1 200 200 500 unlimited
tunnels
PPTP tunnels 1 200 200 unlimited unlimited
L2TP tunnels 1 200 200 unlimited unlimited
VLAN
1 unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited
interfaces
P2P firewall
1 unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited
rules
NAT rules 1 unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited
HotSpot
1 1 200 500 unlimited
active users
RADIUS
- yes yes yes yes
client
Queues 1 30 unlimited unlimited unlimited
Web proxy - yes yes yes yes
RIP, OSPF,
BGP - yes yes yes yes
protocols
Note that Wireless Client and Bridge means that wireless cards can be used in station and bridge
modes. Bridge mode allows one wireless station to connect it.
There is a possibility to upgrade your key (i.e. to extend licensing term) from the console or
WinBox.
Note that the license is kept on hard drive. You can move the hard drive to another system, but you
can not move license on another hard drive. License transfer to another drive is a paid service
(unless your hard drive has crashed). Please contact [email protected] to arrange this. Also
Page 21 of 695

note that you must not use MS-DOS format or fdisk utilities or you may loose the license.
Important: the abovementioned limits depict the limits enforced by the license. The actual number
of concurrent tunnels, rules, queues, users, etc. will vary depending the combination of features
used and the load they place on the MikroTik RouterOS.
License Management
Home menu level: /system license
Description
There are three methods of entering a key to the system console:
• import a file that should be sent to you after you will require a key (you should upload this file
to the router's FTP server)
• simply copy the received key as a text and paste (or type) in to the router's console (no matter
in which submenu)
These methods also apply to WinBox, with the difference that key importing and exporting is
happening through the Windows host PC itself. The options available:
• Paste Key - get a new license from the Windows Clipboard
• Import Key - get a new license from a file stored locally on the Windows PC
• Export Key - save the existing license as a file on the Windows PC
• Upgrade/Get New Key - the same as new-upgrade-key command in system console
• Update Key - the same as update-key command in system console
key ( read-only: text ) - software license key that unlocks the installation
level ( read-only: integer : 0 ..6 ) - license level of the installation
software-id ( read-only: text ) - ID number of the installation
upgradable-until ( read-only: text ) - the date until which the software version can be upgraded or
downgraded
Command Description
import - import a key file ( name ) - file name to use as a key
new-upgrade-key - request a new key ( IP address ) - key server's IP address ( text ) - username to
log into the key server ( text ) - password to log into the key server ( integer : 2 ..6 ) - license level
to request ( credit-card | credit-keys | credit-money | debit-keys | debit-money ) - Payment method to
use ( text ; default: "" ) - script to execute while the command is running ( time ; default: 1s ) - how
frequently to execute the given script - if specified, executes the sctipt once, and then terminates the
command - command's execution status
• Resolving www.mikrotik.com - resolving DNS name
• Failed to resolve www.mikrotik.com, check your dns settings - check whether DNS client is
Page 22 of 695

set up on the router, and that it is allowed to resolve a DNS name on the DNS server set
• Failed to connect, probably no IP address - self-explanatory
• Failed to connect, is your router public? - check whether the router has a default route and is
able to reack the key server
• Connecion failed - connection has timed out
• Bad response from server - try again
• ERROR: You don't have appropriate debit key! - no existing debit keys on your account
matches the requested one
• ERROR: You don't have enought debit money! - self-explanatory
• ERROR: Credit key limit exceeded! - self-explanatory
• ERROR: Your credit limit is exceeded! - self-explanatory
• ERROR: This payment method is not more allowed! Go to www.mikrotik.com, log on and
purchase key there or use other payment methods. - you can not use the selected payment
method from the router anymore due to system changes (for credit cards now)
• ERROR: You must enable this feature in account server (change user information
section)! - you should enable Allow to use my account in netinstall feature on the accout server
(in change user information section
• ERROR: Incorrect username or password! - self-explanatory
• ERROR: You are not allowed to use this service! - please contact [email protected] for
further assistance
• Key upgraded successfully - the upgrade procedure has been completed successfully
output - exports the current key to a key file
update-key - request a free update of your existing key to the version's 2.9 one (this can be done
during your existing key upgrade term) ( IP address ) - key server's IP address ( text ) - username to
log into the key server ( text ) - password to log into the key server ( text ; default: "" ) - script to
execute while the command is running ( time ; default: 1s ) - how frequently to execute the given
script - if specified, executes the sctipt once, and then terminates the command - command's
execution status
• Resolving www.mikrotik.com - resolving DNS name
• Failed to resolve www.mikrotik.com, check your dns settings - check whether DNS client is
set up on the router, and that it is allowed to resolve a DNS name on the DNS server set
• Failed to connect, probably no IP address - self-explanatory
• Failed to connect, is your router public? - check whether the router has a default route and is
able to reack the key server
• Connecion failed - connection has timed out
• Bad response from server - try again
• ERROR: You must enable this feature in account server (change user information
section)! - you should enable Allow to use my account in netinstall feature on the accout server
(in change user information section
• ERROR: Incorrect username or password! - self-explanatory
• ERROR: Someone has already converted this key! - the requested software ID has already
been converted to 2.9 version
• ERROR: Key for specified software ID is expired. You can purchase new key at
Page 23 of 695

www.mikrotik.com website! - you may not update an expired key to the version 2.9, you must
purchase a new one
• ERROR: You are not allowed to use this service! - please contact [email protected] for
further assistance
• Key upgraded successfully - the upgrade procedure has been completed successfully
Page 24 of 695

Basic Setup Guide
Document revision 1.1 (Wed Sep 14 18:08:33 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Related Documents
Description
Setting up MikroTik RouterOS™
Description
Notes
Logging into the MikroTik Router
Description
Adding Software Packages
Description
Navigating The Terminal Console
Description
Notes
Basic Configuration Tasks
Description
Notes
Setup Command
Description
Configure IP address on router, using the Setup command
Basic Examples
Example
Viewing Routes
Adding Default Routes
Testing the Network Connectivity
Advanced Configuration Tasks
Description
Application Example with Masquerading
Example with Bandwidth Management
Example with NAT
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS™ is independent Linux-based Operating System for IA-32 routers and
thinrouters. It does not require any additional components and has no software prerequirements. It
is designed with easy-to-use yet powerful interface allowing network administrators to deploy
network structures and functions, that would require long education elsewhere simply by following
the Reference Manual (and even without it).
Page 25 of 695

Related Documents
• Software Package Management

• Device Driver List
• License Management
• Ping
• Bandwidth Control
•
• WinBox
• Installing RouterOS with NetInstall
• Installing RouterOS with CD-Install
• Installing RouterOS with Floppies
Description
MikroTik RouterOS™ turns a standard PC computer into a powerful network router. Just add
standard network PC interfaces to expand the router capabilities. Remote control with easy
real-time Windows application (WinBox)
• Advanced Quality of Service control with burst support
• Stateful firewall with P2P protocol filtering, tunnels and IPsec
• STP bridging with filtering capabilities
• WDS and Virtual AP features
• HotSpot for Plug-and-Play access
• RIP, OSPF, BGP routing protocols
• Gigabit Ethernet ready
• V.35, X.21, T1/E1 synchronous support
• async PPP with RADUIS AAA
• IP Telephony
• remote winbox GUI admin
• telnet/ssh/serial console admin
• real-time configuration and monitoring
• and much more (please see the Specifications Sheet)
The Guide describes the basic steps of installing and configuring a dedicated PC router running
MikroTik RouterOS™.
Setting up MikroTik RouterOS™
Page 26 of 695

Description
Downloading and Installing the MikroTik RouterOS™

The download and installation process of the MikroTik RouterOS™ is described in the following
diagram:
1. Download the basic installation archieve file.

Depending on the desired media to be used for installing the MikroTik RouterOS™ please
chose one of the following archive types for downloading:
• ISO image - of the installation CD, if you have a CD writer for creating CDs. The ISO image is
in the MTcdimage_v2-9-x_dd-mmm-yyyy_(build_z).zip archive file containing a bootable CD
image. The CD will be used for booting up the dedicated PC and installing the MikroTik
RouterOS™ on its hard-drive or flash-drive.
• Netinstall - if you want to install RouterOS over a LAN with one floppy boot disk, or
alternatively using PXE or EtherBoot option supported by some network interface cards, that
allows truly networked installation. Netinstall program works on Windows 95/98/NT4/2K/XP.
• MikroTik Disk Maker - if you want to create 3.5" installation floppies. The Disk Maker is a
self-extracting archive DiskMaker_v2-9-x_dd-mmm-yyyy_(build_z).exe file, which should be
run on your Windows 95/98/NT4/2K/XP workstation to create the installation floppies. The
installation floppies will be used for booting up the dedicated PC and installing the MikroTik
RouterOS™ on its hard-drive or flash-drive.
Page 27 of 695

2. Create the installation media.
Use the appropriate installation archive to create the Installation CD or floppies.
• For the CD, write the ISO image onto a blank CD.
• For the floppies, run the Disk Maker on your Windows workstation to create the
installation floppies. Follow the instructions and insert the floppies in your FDD as
requested, label them as Disk 1,2,3, etc.
3. Install the MikroTik RouterOS™ software.

Your dedicated PC router hardware should have:
• CPU and motherboard - advanced 4th generation (core frequency 100MHz or more), 5th
generation (Intel Pentium, Cyrix 6X86, AMD K5 or comparable) or newer uniprocessor Intel
IA-32 (i386) compatible (multiple processors are not supported)
• RAM - minimum 64 MiB, maximum 1 GiB; 64 MiB or more recommended
• Hard Drive/Flash - standard ATA interface controller and drive (SCSI and USB controllers
and drives are not supported; RAID controllers that require additional drivers are not supported)
with minimum of 64 Mb space
Hardware needed for installation time only
Depending on installation method chosen the router must have the following hardware:
• Floppy-based installation - standard AT floppy controller and 3.5'' disk drive connected as the
first floppy disk drive (A); AT, PS/2 or USB keyboard; VGA-compatible video controller card
and monitor
• CD-based installation - standard ATA/ATAPI interface controller and CD drive supporting
"El Torito" bootable CDs (you might need also to check if the router's BIOS supports booting
from this type of media; if El Torito is not supported by the BIOS, you can still boot up from
the CD using Smart Boot Manager Floppy); AT, PS/2 or USB keyboard; VGA-compatible
video controller card and monitor
• Floppy-based network installation - standard AT floppy controller and 3.5'' disk drive
connected as the first floppy disk drive (A); PCI Ethernet network interface card supported by
MikroTik RouterOS (see the Device Driver List for the list)
• Full network-based installation - PCI Ethernet network interface card supported by MikroTik
RouterOS (see the Device Driver List for the list) with PXE or EtherBoot extension booting
ROM (you might need also to check if the router's BIOS supports booting from network)
Note that if you use Netinstall, you can license the software during the installation procedure
(the next point of this section describes how to do it).
Boot up your dedicated PC router from the Installation Media you created and follow the
instructions on the console screen while the HDD is reformatted and MikroTik RouterOS
installed on it. After successful installation please remove the installation media from your CD
or floppy disk drive and hit 'Enter' to reboot the router.
4. License the software.
When booted, the software allows you to use all its features for 24 hours (note that you can
pause the countdown by shutting down the router). If the license key will not be entered during
this period of time, the router will become unusable, and will need a complete reinstallation.
RouterOS licensing scheme is based on software IDs. To license the software, you must know
the software ID. It is shown during installation procedures, and also you can get it from system
console or Winbox. To get the software ID from system console, type: /system license print
(note that you must first log in the router; by default there is user admin with no password
Page 28 of 695

(just press [Enter] key when prompted for password)). See sections below on basic
configuration of your router
Once you have the ID, you can obtain a license:
• You should have an account on our account server. If you do not have an account at
www.mikrotik.com, just press the 'New' button on the upper right-hand corner of the
MikroTik's web page to create your account
• Choose the appropriate licence level that meets your needs. Please see the License
Manual or the Software price list . Note that there is a free license with restricted
features (no time limitation)
• There are different methods how to get a license from the account server:
1. Enter the software ID in the account server, and get the license key by e-mail. You
can upload the file received on the router's FTP server, or drag-and-drop it into
opened Winbox window
2. You can open the file with a text editor, and copy the contents. Then paste the text
into system console (in any menu - you just should be logged in), or into
System->License window of Winbox
3. If the router has Internet connection, you can obtain the license directly from
within it. The commands are described in the License Manual . Note that you must
have Allow to use my account in netinstall option enabled for your account. You
can set it by following change user information link on the main screen of the
account server.
Notes
The hard disk will be entirely reformatted during the installation and all data on it will be lost!
You can move the hard drive with MikroTik RouterOS installed to a new hardware without loosing
a license, but you cannot move the RouterOS to a different hard drive without purchasing an
another license (except hardware failure situations). For additional information write to
[email protected] .
Note! Do not use MS-DOS format command or other disk format utilities to reinstall your
MikroTik router! This will cause the Software-ID to change, so you will need to buy another license
in order to get MikroTik RouterOS running.
Logging into the MikroTik Router
Description
Normally you connect to the router by IP addresses with any telnet or SSH client software (a simple
text-mode telnet client is usually called telnet and is distributed together with almost any OS). You
can also use graphical configuration tool for Windows (also can be run in Linux using Wine) called
Winbox. To get Winbox, connect to the router's IP address with a web browser, and follow the link
to download winbox.exe from the router.
MAC-telnet is used to connect to a router when there is no other way to connect to it remotely if the
Page 29 of 695

router has no IP address or in case of misconfigured firewall. MAC-telnet can only be used from the
same broadcast domain (so there should be no routers in between) as any of the router's enabled
interfaces (you can not connect to a disabled interface). MAC-telnet program is a part of the
Neighbor Viewer. Download it from www.mikrotik.com, unpack both files contained in the archive
to the same directory, and run NeighborViewer.exe. A list of MikroTik routers working in the same
broadcast domain will be showed double-click the one you need to connect to. Note that Winbox is
also able to connect to routers by their MAC addresses, and has the discovery tool built-in.
You can also connect to the router using a standard DB9 serial null-modem cable from any PC.
Default settings of the router's serial port are 9600 bits/s (for RouterBOARD 500 series - 115200
bits/s), 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control. Use terminal emulation
program (like HyperTerminal or SecureCRT in Windows, or minicom in UNIX/Linux) to connect
to the router. The router will beep twice when booted up, and you should see the login prompt
shortly before that (check cabling and serial port settings if you do not see anything in the terminal
window).
When logging into the router via terminal console, you will be presented with the MikroTik
RouterOS™ login prompt. Use 'admin' and no password (hit [Enter]) for logging in the router for
the first time, for example:
MikroTik v2.9
Login: admin
Password:
The password can be changed with the /password command.

[admin@MikroTik] > password
old password:
new password: ************
retype new password: ************
[admin@MikroTik] >
Adding Software Packages
Description
The basic installation comes only with the system package. This includes basic IP routing and
router administration. To have additional features such as IP Telephony, OSPF, wireless and so on,
you will need to download additional software packages.
The additional software packages should have the same version as the system package. If not, the
package won't be installed. Please consult the MikroTik RouterOS™ Software Package Installation
and Upgrading Manual for more detailed information about installing additional software packages.
To upgrade the router packages, simply upload the packages to the router via ftp, using the binary
transfer mode. After you have uploaded the packages, reboot the router, and the features that are
provided by those packages will be available (regarding your license type, of course).
Navigating The Terminal Console
Description
Page 30 of 695

Welcome Screen and Command Prompt
After logging into the router you will be presented with the MikroTik RouterOS™ Welcome Screen
and command prompt, for example:
MMM MMM KKK TTTTTTTTTTT KKK

MMMM MMMM KKK TTTTTTTTTTT KKK
MMM MMMM MMM III KKK KKK RRRRRR OOOOOO TTT III KKK KKK
MMM MM MMM III KKKKK RRR RRR OOO OOO TTT III KKKKK
MMM MMM III KKK KKK RRRRRR OOO OOO TTT III KKK KKK
MMM MMM III KKK KKK RRR RRR OOOOOO TTT III KKK KKK
MikroTik RouterOS 2.9 (c) 1999-2004 http://www.mikrotik.com/
Terminal xterm detected, using multiline input mode

[admin@MikroTik] >
The command prompt shows the identity name of the router and the current menu level, for
example:
[admin@MikroTik] >
[admin@MikroTik] interface>
[admin@MikroTik] ip address>
Commands
The list of available commands at any menu level can be obtained by entering the question mark '?',
for example:
[admin@MikroTik] >
log/ -- System logs
quit -- Quit console
radius/ -- Radius client settings
certificate/ -- Certificate management
special-login/ -- Special login users
redo -- Redo previously undone action
driver/ -- Driver management
ping -- Send ICMP Echo packets
setup -- Do basic setup of system
interface/ -- Interface configuration
password -- Change password
undo -- Undo previous action
port/ -- Serial ports
import -- Run exported configuration script
snmp/ -- SNMP settings
user/ -- User management
file/ -- Local router file storage.
system/ -- System information and utilities
queue/ -- Bandwidth management
ip/ -- IP options
tool/ -- Diagnostics tools
ppp/ -- Point to Point Protocol
routing/ -- Various routing protocol settings
export --
[admin@MikroTik] >
[admin@MikroTik] ip>
Page 31 of 695

.. -- go up to root
service/ -- IP services
socks/ -- SOCKS version 4 proxy
arp/ -- ARP entries management
upnp/ -- Universal Plug and Play
dns/ -- DNS settings
address/ -- Address management
accounting/ -- Traffic accounting
the-proxy/ --
vrrp/ -- Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
pool/ -- IP address pools
packing/ -- Packet packing settings
neighbor/ -- Neighbors
route/ -- Route management
firewall/ -- Firewall management
dhcp-client/ -- DHCP client settings
dhcp-relay/ -- DHCP relay settings
dhcp-server/ -- DHCP server settings
hotspot/ -- HotSpot management
ipsec/ -- IP security
web-proxy/ -- HTTP proxy
export --
The list of available commands and menus has short descriptions next to the items. You can move
to the desired menu level by typing its name and hitting the [Enter] key, for example:
[admin@MikroTik] > | Base level menu

[admin@MikroTik] > driver | Enter 'driver' to move to the driver
| level menu
[admin@MikroTik] driver> / | Enter '/' to move to the base level menu
| from any level
[admin@MikroTik] > interface | Enter 'interface' to move to the
| interface level menu
[admin@MikroTik] interface> /ip | Enter '/ip' to move to the IP level menu
| from any level
[admin@MikroTik] ip> |
A command or an argument does not need to be completed, if it is not ambiguous. For example,
instead of typing interface you can type just in or int. To complete a command use the [Tab] key.
Note that the completion is optional, and you can just use short command and parameter names
The commands may be invoked from the menu level, where they are located, by typing its name. If
the command is in a different menu level than the current one, then the command should be invoked
using its full (absolute) or relative path, for example:
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> print | Prints the routing table

[admin@MikroTik] ip route> .. address print | Prints the IP address table
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> /ip address print | Prints the IP address table
The commands may have arguments. The arguments have their names and values. Some
commands, may have a required argument that has no name.
Summary on executing the commands and navigating the menus
Command Action
command [Enter] Executes the command
[?] Shows the list of all available commands
Page 32 of 695

Displays help on the command and the list of
command [?]
arguments
command argument [?] Displays help on the command's argument
Completes the command/word. If the input is
[Tab] ambiguous, a second [Tab] gives possible
options
/ Moves up to the base level
/command Executes the base level command
.. Moves up one level
"" Specifies an empty string
Specifies a string of 2 words that contain a
"word1 word2"
space
You can abbreviate names of levels, commands and arguments.

For the IP address configuration, instead of using the address and netmask arguments, in most
cases you can specify the address together with the number of true bits in the network mask, i.e.,
there is no need to specify the netmask separately. Thus, the following two entries would be
equivalent:
/ip address add address 10.0.0.1/24 interface ether1
/ip address add address 10.0.0.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 interface ether1
Notes
You must specify the size of the network mask in the address argument, even if it is the 32-bit
subnet, i.e., use 10.0.0.1/32 for address=10.0.0.1 netmask=255.255.255.255
Basic Configuration Tasks
Description
Interface Management
Before configuring the IP addresses and routes please check the /interface menu to see the list of
available interfaces. If you have Plug-and-Play cards installed in the router, it is most likely that the
device drivers have been loaded for them automatically, and the relevant interfaces appear on the
/interface print list, for example:
[admin@MikroTik] interface> print
Flags: X - disabled, D - dynamic, R - running
# NAME TYPE RX-RATE TX-RATE MTU
0 R ether1 ether 0 0 1500
2 X wavelan1 wavelan 0 0 1500
3 X prism1 wlan 0 0 1500
The interfaces need to be enabled, if you want to use them for communications. Use the /interface
Page 33 of 695

enable name command to enable the interface with a given name or number, for example:
0 X ether1 ether 0 0 1500
[admin@MikroTik] interface> enable 0
[admin@MikroTik] interface> enable ether2
The interface name can be changed to a more descriptive one by using /interface set command:
[admin@MikroTik] interface> set 0 name=Local; set 1 name=Public
0 R Local ether 0 0 1500
1 R Public ether 0 0 1500
Notes
The device drivers for NE2000 compatible ISA cards need to be loaded using the add command
under the /drivers menu. For example, to load the driver for a card with IO address 0x280 and IRQ
5, it is enough to issue the command:
[admin@MikroTik] driver> add name=ne2k-isa io=0x280
[admin@MikroTik] driver> print
Flags: I - invalid, D - dynamic
# DRIVER IRQ IO MEMORY ISDN-PROTOCOL
0 D RealTek 8139
1 D Intel EtherExpressPro
2 D PCI NE2000
3 ISA NE2000 280
4 Moxa C101 Synchronous C8000
[admin@MikroTik] driver>
There are some other drivers that should be added manually. Please refer to the respective manual
sections for the detailed information on how drivers are to be loaded.
Setup Command
Command name: /setup
Description
The initial setup of the router can be done by using the /setup command which offers the following
configuration:
• reset all router configuration
• load interface driver
• configure ip address and gateway
• setup dhcp client
Page 34 of 695

• setup dhcp server
• setup pppoe client
• setup pptp client
Configure IP address on router, using the Setup command

Execute the /setup command from command line:
[admin@MikroTik] > setup
Setup uses Safe Mode. It means that all changes that are made during setup
are reverted in case of error, or if [Ctrl]+[C] is used to abort setup. To keep
changes exit setup using the [X] key.
[Safe Mode taken]
Choose options by pressing one of the letters in the left column, before
dash. Pressing [X] will exit current menu, pressing Enter key will select the
entry that is marked by an '*'. You can abort setup at any time by pressing
[Ctrl]+[C].
Entries marked by '+' are already configured.
Entries marked by '-' cannot be used yet.
Entries marked by 'X' cannot be used without installing additional packages.
r - reset all router configuration
+ l - load interface driver
* a - configure ip address and gateway
d - setup dhcp client
s - setup dhcp server
p - setup pppoe client
t - setup pptp client
x - exit menu
your choice [press Enter to configure ip address and gateway]: a
To configure IP address and gateway, press a or [Enter], if the a choice is marked with an asterisk
symbol ('*').
* a - add ip address
- g - setup default gateway
x - exit menu
your choice [press Enter to add ip address]: a
Choose a to add an IP address. At first, setup will ask you for an interface to which the address will
be assigned. If the setup offers you an undesirable interface, erase this choice, and press the [Tab]
key twice to see all available interfaces. After the interface is chosen, assign IP address and network
mask on it:
your choice: a
enable interface:
ether1 ether2 wlan1
enable interface: ether1
ip address/netmask: 10.1.0.66/24
#Enabling interface
/interface enable ether1
#Adding IP address
/ip address add address=10.1.0.66/24 interface=ether1 comment="added by setup"
+ a - add ip address
* g - setup default gateway
x - exit menu
your choice: x
Basic Examples
Example
Page 35 of 695

Assume you need to configure the MikroTik router for the following network setup:
In the current example we use two networks:

• The local LAN with network address 192.168.0.0 and 24-bit netmask: 255.255.255.0. The
router's address is 192.168.0.254 in this network
• The ISP's network with address 10.0.0.0 and 24-bit netmask 255.255.255.0. The router's
address is 10.0.0.217 in this network
The addresses can be added and viewed using the following commands:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 10.0.0.217/24 interface Public
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 192.168.0.254/24 interface Local
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> print
Flags: X - disabled, I - invalid, D - dynamic
# ADDRESS NETWORK BROADCAST INTERFACE
0 10.0.0.217/24 10.0.0.217 10.0.0.255 Public
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 Local
Here, the network mask has been specified in the value of the address argument. Alternatively, the
argument 'netmask' could have been used with the value '255.255.255.0'. The network and
broadcast addresses were not specified in the input since they could be calculated automatically.
Please note that the addresses assigned to different interfaces of the router should belong to
different networks.
Page 36 of 695

Viewing Routes
You can see two dynamic (D) and connected (C) routes, which have been added automatically
when the addresses were added in the example above:
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> print
Flags: A - active, X - disabled, I - invalid, D - dynamic, C - connect,
S - static, r - rip, b - bgp, o - ospf, d - dynamic
# DST-ADDRESS G GATEWAY DISTANCE INTERFACE
0 ADC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 Local
1 ADC 10.0.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 Public
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> print detail
Flags: A - active, X - disabled, I - invalid, D - dynamic, C - connect,
S - static, r - rip, b - bgp, o - ospf, d - dynamic
0 ADC dst-address=192.168.0.0/24 prefsrc=192.168.0.254 interface=Local scope=10
1 ADC dst-address=10.0.0.0/24 prefsrc=10.0.0.217 interface=Public scope=10
[admin@MikroTik] ip route>
These routes show, that IP packets with destination to 10.0.0.0/24 would be sent through the
interface Public, whereas IP packets with destination to 192.168.0.0/24 would be sent through the
interface Local. However, you need to specify where the router should forward packets, which have
destination other than networks connected directly to the router.
Adding Default Routes

In the following example the default route (destination 0.0.0.0 (any), netmask 0.0.0.0 (any)) will
be added. In this case it is the ISP's gateway 10.0.0.1, which can be reached through the interface
Public
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add gateway=10.0.0.1
Flags: X - disabled, I - invalid, D - dynamic, J - rejected,
C - connect, S - static, R - rip, O - ospf, B - bgp
0 ADC 192.168.0.0/24 Local
1 ADC 10.0.0.0/24 Public
2 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.0.0.1 0 Public
Here, the default route is listed under #2. As we see, the gateway 10.0.0.1 can be reached through
the interface 'Public'. If the gateway was specified incorrectly, the value for the argument 'interface'
would be unknown.
Notes
Page 37 of 695

You cannot add two routes to the same destination, i.e., destination-address/netmask! It applies to
the default routes as well. Instead, you can enter multiple gateways for one destination. For more
information on IP routes, please read the Routes, Equal Cost Multipath Routing, Policy Routing
manual.
If you have added an unwanted static route accidentally, use the remove command to delete the
unneeded one. You will not be able to delete dynamic (DC) routes. They are added automatically
and represent routes to the networks the router connected directly.
Testing the Network Connectivity

From now on, the /ping command can be used to test the network connectivity on both interfaces.
You can reach any host on both connected networks from the router.
How the /ping command works:
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> /ping 10.0.0.4
10.0.0.4 64 byte ping: ttl=255 time=7 ms
3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 5/5.6/7 ms
The workstation and the laptop can reach (ping) the router at its local address 192.168.0.254, If the
router's address 192.168.0.254 is specified as the default gateway in the TCP/IP configuration of
both the workstation and the laptop, then you should be able to ping the router:
C:\>ping 192.168.0.254
Reply from 192.168.0.254: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=253
Reply from 192.168.0.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=253
C:\>ping 10.0.0.217
Reply from 10.0.0.217: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=253
C:\>ping 10.0.0.4
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Notes
You cannot access anything beyond the router (network 10.0.0.0/24 and the Internet), unless you do
the one of the following:
• Use source network address translation (masquerading) on the MikroTik router to 'hide' your
private LAN 192.168.0.0/24 (see the information below), or
• Add a static route on the ISP's gateway 10.0.0.1, which specifies the host 10.0.0.217 as the
gateway to network 192.168.0.0/24. Then all hosts on the ISP's network, including the server,
will be able to communicate with the hosts on the LAN
Page 38 of 695

To set up routing, it is required that you have some knowledge of configuring TCP/IP networks. We
strongly recommend that you obtain more knowledge, if you have difficulties configuring your
network setups.
Advanced Configuration Tasks
Description
Next will be discussed situation with 'hiding' the private LAN 192.168.0.0/24 'behind' one address
10.0.0.217 given to you by the ISP.
Application Example with Masquerading

If you want to 'hide' the private LAN 192.168.0.0/24 'behind' one address 10.0.0.217 given to you
by the ISP, you should use the source network address translation (masquerading) feature of the
MikroTik router. Masquerading is useful, if you want to access the ISP's network and the Internet
appearing as all requests coming from the host 10.0.0.217 of the ISP's network. The masquerading
will change the source IP address and port of the packets originated from the network
192.168.0.0/24 to the address 10.0.0.217 of the router when the packet is routed through it.
Masquerading conserves the number of global IP addresses required and it lets the whole network
use a single IP address in its communication with the world.
To use masquerading, a source NAT rule with action 'masquerade' should be added to the firewall
configuration:
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall nat> add chain=srcnat action=masquerade
out-interface=Public
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall nat> print
0 chain=srcnat out-interface=Public action=masquerade
Notes
Please consult Network Address Translation for more information on masquerading.
Example with Bandwidth Management

Assume you want to limit the bandwidth to 128kbps on downloads and 64kbps on uploads for all
hosts on the LAN. Bandwidth limitation is done by applying queues for outgoing interfaces
regarding the traffic flow. It is enough to add a single queue at the MikroTik router:
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple> add max-limit=64000/128000 interface=Local
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple> print
0 name="queue1" target-address=0.0.0.0/0 dst-address=0.0.0.0/0
interface=Local queue=default/default priority=8 limit-at=0/0
max-limit=64000/128000 total-queue=default
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple>
Leave all other parameters as set by default. The limit is approximately 128kbps going to the LAN
(download) and 64kbps leaving the client's LAN (upload).
Example with NAT
Page 39 of 695

Assume we have moved the server in our previous examples from the public network to our local
one:
The server's address is now 192.168.0.4, and we are running web server on it that listens to the TCP
port 80. We want to make it accessible from the Internet at address:port 10.0.0.217:80. This can be
done by means of Static Network Address translation (NAT) at the MikroTik Router. The Public
address:port 10.0.0.217:80 will be translated to the Local address:port 192.168.0.4:80. One
destination NAT rule is required for translating the destination address and port:
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall nat> add chain=dstnat action=dst-nat protocol=tcp
dst-address=10.0.0.217/32
dst-port=80 to-addresses=192.168.0.4
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall nat> pr
0 chain=dstnat dst-address=10.0.0.217/32 protocol=tcp dst-port=80
action=dst-nat to-addresses=192.168.0.4 to-ports=0-65535
Notes
Please consult Network Address Translation for more information on Network Address
Translation.
Page 40 of 695

Installing RouterOS with CD-Install
Document revision 1.2 (Tue Jul 13 13:06:16 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
CD-Install
Description
CD-Install
Description
To install the RouterOS using a CD you will need a CD-writer and a blank CD. Burn the CD-image
(an .iso file) to a CD. The archive with image can be downloaded here .
Follow the instructions to install RouterOS using CD-Install:
1. After downloading the CD image from www.mikrotik.com you will have an ISO file on your
computer:
2. Open a CD Writing software, like Ahead NERO as in this example:
3. In the program, choose Burn Image entry from the Recorder menu (there should be similary
named option in all major CD burning programs):
Page 41 of 695

4. Select the recently extracted ISO file and click Open:
5. Finally, click Burn button:
Page 42 of 695

6. Set the first boot device to CDROM in router's BIOS.
7. After booting from CD you will see a menu where to choose packages to install:
Welcome to MikroTik Router Software installation

Move around menu using 'p' and 'n' or arrow keys, select with 'spacebar'.
Select all with 'a', minimum with 'm'. Press 'i' to install locally or 'r' to
install remote router or 'q' to cancel and reboot.
[X] system [ ] isdn [ ] synchronous
[X] ppp [ ] lcd [ ] telephony
[X] dhcp [ ] ntp [ ] ups
[X] advanced-tools [ ] radiolan [ ] web-proxy
[ ] arlan [ ] routerboard [ ] wireless
[ ] gps [X] routing
[ ] hotspot [X] security
Follow the instructions, select needed packages, and press 'i' to install the software.
8. You will be asked for 2 questions:
Warning: all data on the disk will be erased!
Continue? [y/n]
Press [Y] to continue or [N] to abort the installation.

Do you want to keep old configuration? [y/n]:
You should choose whether you want to keep old configuration (press [Y]) or to erase the
configuration permanently (press [N]) and continue without saving it. For a fresh installation,
press [N].
Creating partition...
Formatting disk...
The system will install selected packages. After that you will be prompted to press 'Enter'.
Page 43 of 695

Before doing that, remove the CD from your CD-Drive:
Software installed.
Press ENTER to reboot
Note: after the installation you will have to enter the Software key. See this manual how to do it.
Page 44 of 695

Installing RouterOS with Floppies
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Floppy Install
Description
para
Floppy Install
Description
Another way to install the RouterOS is using floppies. You will need 9 floppies to install the
software (this includes only the system package).
1. Download the archive here . Extract it and run FloppyMaker.exe.
Read the licence agreement and press 'Yes' to continue.
Page 45 of 695

2. After pressing 'Yes', you are introduced to useful information about RouterOS:
Press 'Continue' button to continue or 'Exit' to leave the installation.

3. You are prompted to insert disk #1 into the floppy drive:
Page 46 of 695

Insert a blank floppy into the drive and start the copying process. Pressing 'Skip Floppy' will
skip the process to next floppy (useful in case you already have some floppies copied).
Proceed with next floppies until the following dialog occurs:
Page 47 of 695

4. Set the dedicated computer to boot from floppy device, insert the disk #1 and boot the
computer. When it will process the first floppy, it will ask for the second, until all floppies are
processed.
Note: after the installation you will have to enter the Software key. See this manual how to do it.
Page 48 of 695

Installing RouterOS with NetInstall
Document revision 1.3 (Mon Jul 19 12:58:25 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
NetInstall
Description
NetInstall
Description
NetInstall is a program that allows you to install MikroTiK RouterOS on a dedicated PC or
RouterBoard via Ethernet network. All you need is a blank floppy or an Ethernet device that
supports PXE (like RouterBoard 100, RouterBoard 200 and RouterBoard 500 series), an Ethernet
network between workstation and dedicated computer, and a serial null-modem console cable (for
RouterBoard routers).
NetInstall Program Parameters
Page 49 of 695

The program runs on Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP platforms.
Netinstall parameters:
• Routers/Drives - in this list you can see all the devices waiting for installation.
• Software ID - a unique ID that is generated for licensing purposes.
• Key - a key that is generated for the Software ID. When you purchase a license, you get a key
file. Click the Browse... button next to the key field to select your key file.
• Get Key... - obtain software key from MikroTIK server:
• Software ID - ID for which the key will be generated (depending on the license level).
• Username - client's username in the Account data base.
• Password - client's password.
• Level - license level of RouterOS.
• Debit key - a key that you have paid for, but haven't generated yet.
• Debit money - money that you have on your account. To add money to your account,
use the 'add debit' link in the account server.
• Credit key - a key that you can take now, but pay later.
• Credit money - paying with credit money allows you to get your keys now and pay for
them later.
• Keep old configuration - used for reinstalling the software. If checked, the old configuration
on the router will not be overwritten, otherwise it will be lost.
Page 50 of 695

• IP address/mask - address with subnet mask that will be assigned to ether1 interface after the
packages are installed.
• Gateway - specifies the default gateway (static route).
• Baud rate - this baud rate will be set for serial console (bps).
• Configure script - a RouterOS script to execute after the package installation. Note that not all
the devices (especially, wireless cards) may be discovered at the time this script is run, so it is
suggested to put a delay (about 20 seconds) at the start of the script to be sure that all devices
are up and running.
• Make floppy - make a bootable NetInstall floppy.
• Net booting - opens the Network Booting Settings window. Enter an IP address from your
local network. This address will be temporarily assigned to the computer where RouterOS will
be installed on.
• Install - installs the RouterOS on a computer.
• Cancel - cancel the installation.
• Sets - an entry in this list represents the choice of packages selected to install from a directory.
If you want to make your own set, browse for a folder that contains packages (*.npk files),
select needed packages in the list, and press the Save set button.
• From - type the directory where your packages are stored or press the Browse... button to
select the directory.
• Select all - selects all packages in the list
• Select none - unselects all packages in the list
Note: some of the Get key... parameters could not be available for all account types.
NetInstall Example
This example shows step-by-step instructions how to install the software on a RouterBoard 200.
1. Connect the routerboard to a switch (or a hub) as it is shown in the diagram using ether1
interface (on RouterBoard 230 it is next to the RS-232 interface):
Page 51 of 695

2. Run NetInstall program on your workstation (you can download it here . It is necessary to
extract the packages (*.npk files) on your hard drive.
NetInstall v1.10
Page 52 of 695

3. Enter the Boot Server Client's IP address. Use an address from a network to which belongs
your NIC (in this case 172.16.0.0/24). This IP address will be temporarily assigned to the
routerboard.
4. Set the RouterBoard to boot from Ethernet interface. To do this, enter the RouterBoard BIOS
(press any key when prompted):
RouterBIOS v1.3.0 MikroTik (tm) 2003-2004
RouterBOARD 230 (CPU revision B1)
CPU frequency: 266 MHz
Memory size: 64 MB
Press any key within 1 second to enter setup.
You will see a list of available commands. To set up the boot device, press the 'o' key:
RouterBIOS v1.3.0
What do you want to configure?
d - boot delay
k - boot key
s - serial console
l - debug level
o - boot device
b - beep on boot
v - vga to serial
t - ata translation
p - memory settings
m - memory test
u - cpu mode
f - pci back-off
r - reset configuration
g - bios upgrade through serial port
c - bios license information
x - exit setup
your choice: o - boot device
Press the 'e' key to make the RouterBoard to boot from Ethernet interface:
Select boot device:
* i - IDE
e - Etherboot
1 - Etherboot (timeout 15s), IDE
2 - Etherboot (timeout 1m), IDE
5 - IDE, try Etherboot first on next boot (15s)
6 - IDE, try Etherboot first on next boot (1m)
your choice: e - Etherboot
When this is done, the RouterBoard BIOS will return to the first menu. Press the 'x' key to exit
Page 53 of 695

from BIOS. The router will reboot.
5. When booting up, the RouterBoard will try to boot from its Ethernet device. If successful, the
Workstation will give to this RouterBoard an IP address, specified in Network Booting
Settings. After this process, the RouterBoard will be waiting for installation.
On the workstation, there will appear a new entry in Routers/Drives list:
You can identify the router by MAC address in the list. Click on the desired entry and you will
be able to configure installation parameters .
When done, press the Install button to install RouterOS.
6. When the installation process has finished, press 'Enter' on the console or 'Reboot' button in the
NetInstall program. Remember to set the boot device back to IDE in the RouterBoard BIOS.
Page 54 of 695

Configuration Management
Document revision 1.6 (Mon Sep 19 12:55:52 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Description
System Backup
Description
Command Description
Example
Example
The Export Command
Description
Command Description
Example
The Import Command
Description
Command Description
Example
Configuration Reset
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
This manual introduces you with commands which are used to perform the following functions:
• system backup
• system restore from a backup
• configuration export
• configuration import
• system configuration reset
Description
The configuration backup can be used for backing up MikroTik RouterOS configuration to a binary
file, which can be stored on the router or downloaded from it using FTP. The configuration restore
can be used for restoring the router's configuration from a backup file.
Page 55 of 695

The configuration export can be used for dumping out MikroTik RouterOS configuration to the
console screen or to a text (script) file, which can be downloaded from the router using FTP. The
configuration import can be used to import the router configuration script from a text file.
System reset command is used to erase all configuration on the router. Before doing that, it might
be useful to backup the router's configuration.
Note! In order to be sure that the backup will not fail, system backup load command must be used
on the same computer with the same hardware where system backup save was done.
System Backup
Home menu level: /system backup
Description
The save command is used to store the entire router configuration in a backup file. The file is
shown in the /file submenu. It can be downloaded via ftp to keep it as a backup for your
configuration.
To restore the system configuration, for example, after a /system reset, it is possible to upload that
file via ftp and load that backup file using load command in /system backup submenu.
Command Description
load name=[filename] - Load configuration backup from a file
save name=[filename] - Save configuration backup to a file
Example
To save the router configuration to file test:
[admin@MikroTik] system backup> save name=test
Configuration backup saved
[admin@MikroTik] system backup>
To see the files stored on the router:

[admin@MikroTik] > file print
# NAME TYPE SIZE CREATION-TIME
0 test.backup backup 12567 sep/08/2004 21:07:50
[admin@MikroTik] >
Example
To load the saved backup file test:
[admin@MikroTik] system backup> load name=test
Restore and reboot? [y/N]: y
...
The Export Command

Command name: /export
Page 56 of 695

Description
The export command prints a script that can be used to restore configuration. The command can be
invoked at any menu level, and it acts for that menu level and all menu levels below it. If the
argument from is used, then it is possible to export only specified items. In this case export does
not descend recursively through the command hierarchy. export also has the argument file, which
allows you to save the script in a file on the router to retrieve it later via FTP.
Command Description
file=[filename] - saves the export to a file
from=[number] - specifies from which item to start to generate the export file
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > ip address print
0 10.1.0.172/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 bridge1
1 10.5.1.1/24 10.5.1.0 10.5.1.255 ether1
[admin@MikroTik] >
To make an export file:

[admin@MikroTik] ip address> export file=address
To make an export file from only one item:

[admin@MikroTik] ip address> export file=address1 from=1

0 address.rsc script 315 dec/23/2003 13:21:48
1 address1.rsc script 201 dec/23/2003 13:22:57
[admin@MikroTik] >
To export the setting on the display use the same command without the file argument:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> export from=0,1
# nov/13/2004 13:25:30 by RouterOS 2.9
# software id = MGJ4-MAN
#
/ ip address
add address=10.1.0.172/24 network=10.1.0.0 broadcast=10.1.0.255 \
interface=bridge1 comment="" disabled=no
add address=10.5.1.1/24 network=10.5.1.0 broadcast=10.5.1.255 \
interface=ether1 comment="" disabled=no
The Import Command

Command name: /import
Description
Page 57 of 695

The root level command /import [file_name] restores the exported information from the specified
file. This is used to restore configuration or part of it after a /system reset event or anything that
causes configuration data loss.
Note that it is impossible to import the whole router configuration using this feature. It can only be
used to import a part of configuration (for example, firewall rules) in order to spare you some
typing.
Command Description
file=[filename] - loads the exported configuration from a file to router
Example
To load the saved export file use the following command:
[admin@MikroTik] > import address.rsc
Opening script file address.rsc
Script file loaded successfully
[admin@MikroTik] >
Configuration Reset
Command name: /system reset
Description
The command clears all configuration of the router and sets it to the default including the login
name and password ('admin' and no password), IP addresses and other configuration is erased,
interfaces will become disabled. After the reset command router will reboot.
Command Description
reset - erases router's configuration
Notes
If the router has been installed using netinstall and had a script specified as the initial configuration,
the reset command executes this script after purging the configuration. To stop it doing so, you will
have to reinstall the router.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > system reset
Dangerous! Reset anyway? [y/N]: n
action cancelled
[admin@MikroTik] >
Page 58 of 695

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) Server
Document revision 2.3 (Fri Jul 08 15:52:48 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
File Transfer Protocol Server
Description
Command Description
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS implements File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server feature. It is intended to be
used for software packages uploading, configuration script exporting and importing procedures, as
well as for storing HotSpot servlet pages.
Specifications
Home menu level: /file
Standards and Technologies: FTP (RFC 959)
Related Documents

• Configuration Management
File Transfer Protocol Server

Home menu level: /file
Description
MikroTik RouterOS has an industry standard FTP server feature. It uses ports 20 and 21 for
communication with other hosts on the network.
Uploaded files as well as exported configuration or backup files can be accessed under /file menu.
There you can delete unnecessary files from your router.
Page 59 of 695

Authorization for FTP service uses router's system user account names and passwords.
creation-time ( read-only: time ) - item creation date and time
name ( read-only: name ) - item name
size ( read-only: integer ) - package size in bytes
type ( read-only: file | directory | unknown | script | package | backup ) - item type
Command Description
print - shows a list of files stored - shows contents of files less that 4kb long - offers to edit file's
contents with editor - sets the file's contents to 'content'
Page 60 of 695

MAC Level Access (Telnet and Winbox)
Document revision 2.3 (June 22, 2007, 15:33 GMT)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
MAC Telnet Server
Notes
Example
MAC WinBox Server
Notes
Example
Monitoring Active Session List
Example
MAC Telnet Client
Example
General Information
Summary
MAC telnet is used to provide access to a router that has no IP address set. It works just like IP
telnet. MAC telnet is possible between two MikroTik RouterOS routers only.
Specifications
Home menu level: /tool , /tool mac-server
Standards and Technologies: MAC Telnet
Related Documents

• WinBox
• Ping
• MNDP
Page 61 of 695

MAC Telnet Server
Home menu level: /tool mac-server
interface ( name | all ; default: all ) - interface name to which the mac-server clients will connect
• all - all interfaces
Notes
There is an interface list in this submenu level. If you add some interfaces to this list, you allow
MAC telnet to that interface. Disabled (disabled=yes) item means that interface is not allowed to
accept MAC telnet sessions on that interface.
Example
To enable MAC telnet server on ether1 interface only:
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server> print
Flags: X - disabled
# INTERFACE
0 all
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server> remove 0
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server> add interface=ether1 disabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server> print
Flags: X - disabled
# INTERFACE
0 ether1
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server>
MAC WinBox Server

Home menu level: /tool mac-server mac-winbox
interface ( name | all ; default: all ) - interface name to which it is alowed to connect with Winbox
using MAC-based protocol
• all - all interfaces
Notes
There is an interface list in this submenu level. If you add some interfaces to this list, you allow
MAC Winbox to that interface. Disabled (disabled=yes) item means that interface is not allowed to
accept MAC Winbox sessions on that interface.
Example
To enable MAC Winbox server on ether1 interface only:
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server mac-winbox> print
Page 62 of 695

Flags: X - disabled
# INTERFACE
0 all
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server mac-winbox> remove 0
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server mac-winbox> add interface=ether1 disabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server mac-winbox> print
Flags: X - disabled
# INTERFACE
0 ether1
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server mac-winbox>
Monitoring Active Session List

Home menu level: /tool mac-server sessions
interface ( read-only: name ) - interface to which the client is connected to
src-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - client's MAC address
uptime ( read-only: time ) - how long the client is connected to the server
Example
To see active MAC Telnet sessions:
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server sessions> print
# INTERFACE SRC-ADDRESS UPTIME
0 wlan1 00:0B:6B:31:08:22 00:03:01
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server sessions>
MAC Telnet Client

Command name: /tool mac-telnet [MAC-address]
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > /tool mac-telnet 00:02:6F:06:59:42
Login: admin
Password:
Trying 00:02:6F:06:59:42...
Connected to 00:02:6F:06:59:42
Terminal linux detected, using multiline input mode
[admin@MikroTik] >
Page 63 of 695

Serial Console and Terminal
Document revision 2.1 (Wed Mar 03 16:12:49 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Serial Console Configuration
Description
Configuring Console
Example
Using Serial Terminal
Description
Notes
Example
Console Screen
Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
The Serial Console and Terminal are tools, used to communicate with devices and other systems
that are interconnected via serial port. The serial terminal may be used to monitor and configure
many devices - including modems, network devices (including MikroTik routers), and any device
that can be connected to a serial (asynchronous) port.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system , /system console , /system serial-terminal
Standards and Technologies: RS-232
Related Documents
Page 64 of 695

Description
The Serial Console (managed side) feature allows configuring one serial port of the MikroTik
router for access to the router's Terminal Console over the serial port. A special null-modem cable
is required to connect the router's serial port with the workstation's or laptop's serial (COM) port. A
terminal emulation program, e.g., HyperTerminal, should be run on the workstation. You can also
use MikroTik RouterOS to connect to an another Serial Console (for example, on a Cisco router).
Several customers have described situations where the Serial Terminal (managing side) feature
would be useful:
• in a mountaintop where a MikroTik wireless installation sits next to equipment (including
switches and Cisco routers) that can not be managed in-band (by telnet through an IP network)
• monitoring weather-reporting equipment through a serial-console
• connection to a high-speed microwave modem that needed to be monitored and managed by a
serial-console connection
With the serial-terminal feature of the MikroTik, up to 132 (and, maybe, even more) devices can be
monitored and controlled
Serial Console Configuration
Description
A special null-modem cable should be used for connecting to the serial console. The Serial Console
cabling diagram for DB9 connectors is as follows:
Router Side (DB9f) Signal Direction Side (DB9f)

1, 6 CD, DSR IN 4
2 RxD IN 3
3 TxD OUT 2
4 DTR OUT 1, 6
5 GND - 5
7 RTS OUT 8
8 CTS IN 7
Configuring Console
Home menu level: /system console
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether serial console is enabled or not
free ( read-only: text ) - console is ready for use
Page 65 of 695

port ( name ; default: serial0 ) - which port should the serial terminal listen to
term ( text ) - name for the terminal
used ( read-only: text ) - console is in use
vcno ( read-only: integer ) - number of virtual console - [Alt]+[F1] represents '1', [Alt]+[F2] - '2',
etc.
wedged ( read-only: text ) - console is currently not available
Example
To enable Serial Console with terminal name MyConsole:
[admin@MikroTik] system console> set 0 disabled=no term=MyConsole
[admin@MikroTik] system console> print
Flags: X - disabled, W - wedged, U - used, F - free
# PORT VCNO TERM
0 F serial0 MyConsole
1 W 1 linux
2 W 2 linux
3 W 3 linux
4 W 4 linux
5 W 5 linux
6 W 6 linux
7 W 7 linux
8 W 8 linux
[admin@MikroTik] system console>
To check if the port is available or used (parameter used-by):

[admin@MikroTik] system serial-console> /port print detail
0 name=serial0 used-by=Serial Console baud-rate=9600 data-bits=8 parity=none
stop-bits=1 flow-control=none
1 name=serial1 used-by="" baud-rate=9600 data-bits=8 parity=none stop-bits=1
flow-control=none
[admin@MikroTik] system serial-console>
Using Serial Terminal

Command name: /system serial-terminal
Description
The command is used to communicate with devices and other systems that are connected to router
via serial port.
All keyboard input is forwarded to the serial port and all data from the port is output to the
connected device. After exiting with [Ctrl]+[Q], the control signals of the port are lowered. The
speed and other parameters of serial port may be configured in the /port directory of router console.
No terminal translation on printed data is performed. It is possible to get the terminal in an unusable
state by outputting sequences of inappropriate control characters or random data. Do not connect to
devices at an incorrect speed and avoid dumping binary data.
port ( name ) - port name to use
Page 66 of 695

Notes
[Ctrl]+[Q] and [Ctrl]+[X] have special meaning and are used to provide a possibility of exiting from
nested serial-terminal sessions:
To send [Ctrl]+[X] to to serial port, press [Ctrl]+[X] [Ctrl]+[X]
To send [Ctrl]+[Q] to to serial port, press [Ctrl]+[X] [Ctrl]+[Q]
Example
To connect to a device connected to the serial1 port:
[admin@MikroTik] system> serial-terminal serial1
[Type Ctrl-Q to return to console]
[Ctrl-X is the prefix key]
Console Screen
Home menu level: /system console screen
Description
This facility is created to change line number per screen if you have a monitor connected to router.
line-count ( 25 | 40 | 50 ) - number of lines on monitor
Notes
This parameter is applied only to a monitor, connected to the router.
Example
To set monitor's resolution from 80x25 to 80x40:
[admin@MikroTik] system console screen> set line-count=40
[admin@MikroTik] system console screen> print
line-count: 40
[admin@MikroTik] system console screen>
Page 67 of 695

Software Package Management
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Related Documents
Description
Installation (Upgrade)
Description
Notes
Uninstallation
Description
Notes
Example
Downgrading
Description
Command Description
Example
Disabling and Enabling
Description
Notes
Example
Unscheduling
Description
Notes
Example
System Upgrade
Description
Example
Adding Package Source
Description
Notes
Example
Software Package List
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS is distributed in the form of software packages. The basic functionality of
the router and the operating system itself is provided by the system software package. Other
Page 68 of 695

packages contain additional software features as well as support to various network interface cards.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system package
Standards and Technologies: FTP
Related Documents
• Basic Setup Guide

• Driver Management
• Software Version Management
• Installing RouterOS with NetInstall
• Installing RouterOS with CD-Install
• Installing RouterOS with Floppies
Description
Features
The modular software package system of MikroTik RouterOS has the following features:
• Ability to extend RouterOS functions by installing additional software packages
• Optimal usage of the storage space by employing modular/compressed system
• Unused software packages can be uninstalled
• The RouterOS functions and the system itself can be easily upgraded
• Multiple packages can be installed at once
• The package dependency is checked before installing a software package. The package will not
be installed, if the required software package is missing
• The version of the feature package should be the same as that of the system package
• The packages can be uploaded on the router using ftp and installed only when the router is
going for shutdown during the reboot process
• If the software package file can be uploaded to the router, then the disk space is sufficient for
the installation of the package
• The system can be downgraded to an older version by uploading the needed packages to router
via FTP binary mode. After that, execute command /system package downgrade
Installation (Upgrade)
Page 69 of 695

Description
Installation or upgrade of the MikroTik RouterOS software packages can be done by uploading the
newer version of the software package to the router and rebooting it.
The software package files are compressed binary files, which can be downloaded from the
MikroTik's web page download section. The full name of the software package consists of a
descriptive name, version number and extension .npk, exempli gratia system-2.9.11.npk,
routerboard-2.9.11.npk. Package routeros-x86 contains all necessary packages for RouterOS
installation and upgrading for RouterBOARD 200 and PC. Package routeros-rb500 contains all
necessary packages for RouterOS installation and upgrading for RouterBOARD 500. These
packages are preferred installation and upgrading method.
You should check the available hard disk space prior to downloading the package file by issuing
/system resource print command. If there is not enough free disk space for storing the upgrade
packages, it can be freed up by uninstalling some software packages, which provide functionality
not required for your needs. If you have a sufficient amount of free space for storing the upgrade
packages, connect to the router using ftp. Use user name and password of a user with full access
privileges.
Step-by-Step
• Connect to the router using ftp client

• Select the BINARY mode file transfer
• Upload the software package files to the router
• Check the information about the uploaded software packages using the /file print command
• Reboot the router by issuing the /system reboot command or by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del keys
at the router's console
• After reboot, verify that the packages were installed correctly by issuing /system package
print command
Notes
The packages uploaded to the router should retain the original name and also be in lowercase.
The installation/upgrade process is shown on the console screen (monitor) attached to the router.
The Free Demo License do not allow software upgrades using ftp. You should do a complete
reinstall from floppies, or purchase the license.
Before upgrading the router, please check the current version of the system package and the
additional software packages. The versions of additional packages should match the version number
of the system software package. The version of the MikroTik RouterOS system software (and the
build number) are shown before the console login prompt. Information about the version numbers
and build time of the installed MikroTik RouterOS software packages can be obtained using the
/system package print command.
Do not use routeros-x86 and routeros-rb500 packges to upgrade from version 2.8 or older. To
upgrade use regular packages.
Page 70 of 695

Packages wireless-test, rstp-bridge-test, routing-test are included in routeros-x86 and
routeros-rb500 packages, but disabled by default.
Uninstallation
Command name: /system package uninstall
Description
Usually, you do not need to uninstall software packages. However, if you have installed a wrong
package, or you need additional free space to install a new one, you have to uninstall some unused
packages.
Notes
If a package is marked for uninstallation, but it is required for another (dependent) package, then the
marked package cannot be uninstalled. You should uninstall the dependent package too. For the list
of package dependencies see the 'Software Package List; section below. The system package will
not be uninstalled even if marked for uninstallation.
Example
Suppose we need to uninstall security package from the router:
[admin@MikroTik] system package> print
# NAME VERSION SCHEDULED
0 system 2.9.11
1 routing 2.9.11
2 dhcp 2.9.11
3 hotspot 2.9.11
4 wireless 2.9.11
5 web-proxy 2.9.11
6 advanced-tools 2.9.11
7 security 2.9.11
8 ppp 2.9.11
9 routerboard 2.9.11
[admin@MikroTik] system package> uninstall security
[admin@MikroTik] > .. reboot
Downgrading
Command name: /system package downgrade
Description
Downgrade option allows you to downgrade the software via FTP without losing your license key
or reinstalling the router.
Step-by-Step
• Connect to the router using ftp client

• Select the BINARY mode file transfer
Page 71 of 695

• Upload the software package files to the router
• Check the information about the uploaded software packages using the /file print command
• Execute command /system package downgrade. The router will downgrade and reboot.
• After reboot, verify that the packages were installed correctly by issuing /system package
print command
Command Description
downgrade - this command asks your confirmation and reboots the router. After reboot the
software is downgraded (if all needed packages were uploaded to the router)
Example
To downgrade the RouterOS (assuming that all needed packages are already uploaded):
[admin@MikroTik] system package> downgrade
Router will be rebooted. Continue? [y/N]: y
system will reboot shortly
Disabling and Enabling

Command name: /system package disable , /system package enable
Description
You can disable packages making them invisible for the system and later enable them, bringing the
system back to the previous state. It is useful if you don't want to uninstall a package, but just turn
off its functionality.
Notes
If a package is marked for disabling, but it is required for another (dependent) package, then the
marked package cannot be disabled. You should disable or uninstall the dependent package too. For
the list of package dependencies see the 'Software Package List; section below.
If any of the test packages will be enabled (for example wireless-test and routing-test packages, that
are included in routeros-x86.npk and routeros-rb500.npk) system automaticly will disable regular
packages that conflict with them.
Example
Suppose we need to test wireless-test package features:
[admin@MikroTik] > system package pr
Flags: X - disabled
0 system 2.9.11
2 X wireless-test 2.9.11
3 ntp 2.9.11
4 routeros-rb500 2.9.11
Page 72 of 695

5 X rstp-bridge-test 2.9.11
6 wireless 2.9.11
7 webproxy-test 2.9.11
8 routing 2.9.11
9 X routing-test 2.9.11
10 ppp 2.9.11
11 dhcp 2.9.11
12 hotspot 2.9.11
13 security 2.9.11
[admin@MikroTik] system package> enable wireless-test
[admin@MikroTik] system package> .. reboot
Unscheduling
Command name: /system package unschedule
Description
Unschedule option allows to cancel pending uninstall, disable or enable actions for listed packages.
Notes
packages marked for uninstallation, disabling or enabling on reboot in column "schedule" will have
a note, warning about changes.
Example
Suppose we need to cancel wireless-test package uninstallation action scheduled on reboot:
[admin@MikroTik] > system package pr
Flags: X - disabled
0 system 2.9.11
2 wireless-test 2.9.11 scheduled for uninstall
3 ntp 2.9.11
4 routeros-rb500 2.9.11
5 X rstp-bridge-test 2.9.11
6 wireless 2.9.11
7 webproxy-test 2.9.11
8 routing 2.9.11
9 X routing-test 2.9.11
10 ppp 2.9.11
11 dhcp 2.9.11
12 hotspot 2.9.11
13 security 2.9.11
[admin@MikroTik] system package> unschedule wireless-test
[admin@MikroTik] system package>
System Upgrade
Home menu level: /system upgrade
Description
This submenu gives you the ability to download RouterOS software packages from a remote
RouterOS router.
Page 73 of 695

Step-by-Step
• Upload desired RouterOS packages to a router (not the one that you will upgrade)
• Add this router's IP address, user name and password to /system upgrade
upgrade-package-source
• Refresh available software package list /system upgrade refresh
• See available packages, using /system upgrade print command
• Download selected or all packages from the remote router, using the download or
download-all command
download - download packages from list by specifying their numbers
download-all - download all packages that are needed for the upgrade (packages which are
available in '/system package print' list)
name ( read-only: name ) - package name
refresh - updates currently available package list
source ( read-only: IP address ) - source IP address of the router from which the package list entry
is retrieved
status ( read-only: available | scheduled | downloading | downloaded | installed ) - package status
version ( read-only: text ) - version of the package
Example
See the available packages:
[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade> print
# SOURCE NAME VERSION STATUS COMPLETED
0 192.168.25.8 advanced-tools 2.9.11 available
1 192.168.25.8 dhcp 2.9.11 available
2 192.168.25.8 hotspot 2.9.11 available
3 192.168.25.8 isdn 2.9.11 available
4 192.168.25.8 ntp 2.9.11 available
5 192.168.25.8 ppp 2.9.11 available
6 192.168.25.8 routerboard 2.9.11 available
7 192.168.25.8 routing 2.9.11 available
8 192.168.25.8 security 2.9.11 available
9 192.168.25.8 synchronous 2.9.11 available
10 192.168.25.8 system 2.9.11 available
11 192.168.25.8 telephony 2.9.11 available
12 192.168.25.8 ups 2.9.11 available
13 192.168.25.8 web-proxy 2.9.11 available
14 192.168.25.8 wireless 2.9.11 available
[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade>
To upgrade chosen packages:

[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade> download 0,1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10,13,14
0 192.168.25.8 advanced-tools 2.9.11 downloaded
1 192.168.25.8 dhcp 2.9.11 downloading 16 %
2 192.168.25.8 hotspot 2.9.11 scheduled
3 192.168.25.8 isdn 2.9.11 available
Page 74 of 695

4 192.168.25.8 ntp 2.9.11 available
5 192.168.25.8 ppp 2.9.11 scheduled
6 192.168.25.8 routerboard 2.9.11 scheduled
7 192.168.25.8 routing 2.9.11 scheduled
8 192.168.25.8 security 2.9.11 scheduled
9 192.168.25.8 synchronous 2.9.11 scheduled
10 192.168.25.8 system 2.9.11 scheduled
11 192.168.25.8 telephony 2.9.11 available
12 192.168.25.8 ups 2.9.11 available
13 192.168.25.8 web-proxy 2.9.11 scheduled
14 192.168.25.8 wireless 2.9.11 scheduled

Home menu level: /system upgrade upgrade-package-source
Description
In this submenu you can add remote routers from which to download the RouterOS software
packages.
address ( IP address ) - source IP address of the router from which the package list entry will be
retrieved
password ( text ) - password of the remote router
user ( text ) - username of the remote router
Notes
After specifying a remote router in /system upgrade upgrade-package-source, you can type
/system upgrade refresh to refresh the package list and /system upgrade print to see all available
packages.
Example
To add a router with IP address 192.168.25.8, username admin and no password:
/system upgrade upgrade-package-source add address=192.168.25.8 user=admin
[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade upgrade-package-source> print
# ADDRESS USER
0 192.168.25.8 admin
[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade upgrade-package-source>
Software Package List
Description
System Software Package

The system software package provides the basic functionality of the MikroTik RouterOS, namely:
Page 75 of 695

• IP address management, ARP, static IP routing, policy routing, firewall (packet filtering,
content filtering, masquerading, and static NAT), traffic shaping (queues), IP traffic
accounting, MikroTik Neighbour Discovery, IP Packet Packing, DNS client settings, IP
service (servers)
• Ethernet interface support
• IP over IP tunnel interface support
• Ethernet over IP tunnel interface support
• driver management for Ethernet ISA cards
• serial port management
• local user management
• export and import of router configuration scripts
• backup and restore of the router's configuration
• undo and redo of configuration changes
• network diagnostics tools (ping, traceroute, bandwidth tester, traffic monitor)
• bridge support
• system resource management
• package management
• telnet client and server
• local and remote logging facility
• winbox server as well as winbox executable with some plugins
After installing the MikroTik RouterOS, a free license should be obtained from MikroTik to enable
the basic system functionality.
Additional Software Feature Packages

The table below shows additional software feature packages, extended functionality provided by
them, the required prerequisites and additional licenses, if any.
Name Contents Prerequisites Additional License

email client, pingers,
advanced-tools netwatch and other none none
utilities
support for DSSS
2.4GHz/5GHz
arlan 2.4GHz 2mbps none
Wireless Client
Aironet ISA cards
DHCP server and
dhcp none none
client support
support for GPS
gps none none
devices
hotspot HotSpot gateway none any additional license
Page 76 of 695

support for ISDN
isdn ppp none
devices
support for
lcd informational LCD none none
display
network time
ntp none none
protocol support
support for PPP,
ppp PPTP, L2TP, PPPoE none none
and ISDN PPP
Provides support for
2.4GHz/5GHz
radiolan 5.8GHz RadioLAN none
Wireless Client
cards
support for
routerboard RouterBoard-specific none none
functions and utilities
support for RIP,
routing none none
OSPF and BGP4
support for IPSEC,
security SSH and secure none none
WinBox connections
support for Frame
Relay and Moxa
C101, Moxa C502,
synchronous Farsync, Cyclades none Synchronous
PC300, LMC SBE
and XPeed
synchronous cards
IP telephony support
telephony none none
(H.323)
forces
PCI-to-CardBus
thinrouter-pcipc none none
Bridge to use IRQ 11
as in ThinRouters
APC Smart Mode
ups none none
UPS support
HTTP Web proxy
web-proxy none none
support
Provides support for 2.4GHz/5GHz
Cisco Aironet cards, Wireless Client /
wireless PrismII and Atheros none 2.4GHz/5GHz
wireless stations and Wireless Server
APs (optional)
Page 77 of 695

Software Version Management
Document revision 1.4 (Tue Oct 18 12:24:57 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
System Upgrade
Related Documents
Description
Example
Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
To upgrade RouterOS to a more recent version, you can simply transfer the packages to router via
ftp, using the binary transfer mode, and then just rebooting the router.
This manual discusses a more advanced method how to upgrade a router automatically. If you have
more than one router then this can be useful.
Specifications
Standards and Technologies: None
System Upgrade
Related Documents

Page 78 of 695

Description
In this submenu you can see available packages and are able to choose which to install from a
remote router.
At first you upload new packages to the router via ftp, using the binary data transfer mode. Then
(from another router, which you will upgrade) add the router's IP on which are the packages listed
in the /system upgrade upgrade-package-source list. Afterwards, you type /system upgrade
refresh to update the available package list. To see all available packages, choose /system upgrade
print command.
download - download packages from list by specifying their numbers
download-all - download all packages that are needed for the upgrade (packages which are
available in '/system package print' list)
name ( read-only: name ) - package name
refresh - updates currently available package list
source ( read-only: IP address ) - source IP address of the router from which the package list entry
is retrieved
status ( read-only: available | scheduled | downloading | downloaded | installed ) - package status
version ( read-only: text ) - version of the package
Example
See the available packages:
0 192.168.25.8 advanced-tools 2.9 available
1 192.168.25.8 dhcp 2.9 available
2 192.168.25.8 hotspot 2.9 available
3 192.168.25.8 isdn 2.9 available
4 192.168.25.8 ntp 2.9 available
5 192.168.25.8 ppp 2.9 available
6 192.168.25.8 routerboard 2.9 available
7 192.168.25.8 routing 2.9 available
8 192.168.25.8 security 2.9 available
9 192.168.25.8 synchronous 2.9 available
10 192.168.25.8 system 2.9 available
11 192.168.25.8 telephony 2.9 available
12 192.168.25.8 ups 2.9 available
13 192.168.25.8 web-proxy 2.9 available
14 192.168.25.8 wireless 2.9 available
To upgrade chosen packages:

[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade> download 0,1,2,5,6,7,8,9,10,13,14
0 192.168.25.8 advanced-tools 2.9 downloaded
1 192.168.25.8 dhcp 2.9 downloading 16 %
2 192.168.25.8 hotspot 2.9 scheduled
3 192.168.25.8 isdn 2.9 available
4 192.168.25.8 ntp 2.9 available
5 192.168.25.8 ppp 2.9 scheduled
Page 79 of 695

6 192.168.25.8 routerboard 2.9 scheduled
7 192.168.25.8 routing 2.9 scheduled
8 192.168.25.8 security 2.9 scheduled
9 192.168.25.8 synchronous 2.9 scheduled
10 192.168.25.8 system 2.9 scheduled
11 192.168.25.8 telephony 2.9 available
12 192.168.25.8 ups 2.9 available
13 192.168.25.8 web-proxy 2.9 scheduled
14 192.168.25.8 wireless 2.9 scheduled

Home menu level: /system upgrade upgrade-package-source
Description
Here can you specify IP address, username and password of the remote hosts from which you will
be able to get packages.
address ( IP address ) - source IP address of the router from which the package list entry will be
retrieved
user ( text ) - username of the remote router
Notes
After specifying a remote router in '/system upgrade upgrade-package-source', you can type
'/system upgrade refresh' to refresh the package list and '/system upgrade print' to see all available
packages.
Adding an upgrade source you will be prompted for a password.
Example
To add a router, with username admin and no password, from which the packages will be retrieved:
[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade upgrade-package-source> print
# ADDRESS USER
0 192.168.25.8 admin
[admin@MikroTik] system upgrade upgrade-package-source>
Page 80 of 695

SSH (Secure Shell) Server and Client
Document revision 2.0 (Fri Mar 05 09:09:40 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Additional Documents
SSH Server
Description
Example
SSH Client
Example
General Information
Summary
SSH Client authenticates server and encrypts traffic between the client and server. You can use
SSH just the same way as telnet - you run the client, tell it where you want to connect to, give your
username and password, and everything is the same after that. After that you won't be able to tell
that you're using SSH. The SSH feature can be used with various SSH Telnet clients to securely
connect to and administrate the router.
The MikroTik RouterOS supports:
• SSH 1.3, 1.5, and 2.0 protocol standards
• server functions for secure administration of the router
• telnet session termination with 40 bit RSA SSH encryption is supported
• secure ftp is supported
• preshared key authentication is not supported
The MikroTik RouterOS has been tested with the following SSH telnet terminals:
• PuTTY
• Secure CRT
• OpenSSH GNU/Linux client
Specifications
Packages required: security
Page 81 of 695

Home menu level: /system ssh
Standards and Technologies: SSH
Related Documents
• Package Management
• http://www.freessh.org/
SSH Server
Home menu level: /ip service
Description
SSH Server is already up and running after MikroTik router installation. The default port of the
service is 22. You can set a different port number.
name ( name ) - service name
port ( integer : 1 ..65535 ) - port the service listens to
address ( IP address | netmask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - IP address from which the service is
accessible
Example
Let's change the default SSH port (22) to 65 on which the SSH server listens for requests:
[admin@MikroTik] ip service> set ssh port=65
[admin@MikroTik] ip service> print
Flags: X - disabled, I - invalid
# NAME PORT ADDRESS CERTIFICATE
0 telnet 23 0.0.0.0/0
1 ftp 21 0.0.0.0/0
2 www 80 0.0.0.0/0
3 ssh 65 0.0.0.0/0
4 X www-ssl 443 0.0.0.0/0
[admin@MikroTik] ip service>
SSH Client
Command name: /system ssh
port ( integer ; default: 22 ) - which TCP port to use for SSH connection to a remote host
Page 82 of 695

user ( text ; default: admin ) - username for the SSH login
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > /system ssh 192.168.0.1 user=pakalns port=22
[email protected]'s password:
MikroTik RouterOS 2.9rc7 (c) 1999-2005 http://www.mikrotik.com/
Terminal unknown detected, using single line input mode

[admin@MikroTik] >
Page 83 of 695

Telnet Server and Client
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Telnet Server
Description
Example
Telnet Client
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS has a build-in Telnet server and client features. These two are used to
communicate with other systems over a network.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system , /ip service
Standards and Technologies: Telnet (RFC 854)
Related Documents
• System Resource Management
Telnet Server
Description
Telnet protocol is intended to provide a fairly general, bi-directional, eight-bit byte oriented
communications facility. The main goal is to allow a standard method of interfacing terminal
devices to each other.
Page 84 of 695

MikroTik RouterOS implements industry standard Telnet server. It uses port 23, which must not be
disabled on the router in order to use the feature.
You can enable/disable this service or allow the use of the service to certain IP addresses.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] ip service> print detail
0 name="telnet" port=23 address=0.0.0.0/0
1 name="ftp" port=21 address=0.0.0.0/0
2 name="www" port=80 address=0.0.0.0/0
3 name="hotspot" port=8088 address=0.0.0.0/0
4 name="ssh" port=65 address=0.0.0.0/0
5 X name="hotspot-ssl" port=443 address=0.0.0.0/0 certificate=none
Telnet Client
Command name: /system telnet [IP address] [port]
Description
MikroTik RouterOS telnet client is used to connect to other hosts in the network via Telnet
protocol.
Example
An example of Telnet connection:
[admin@MikroTik] > system telnet 172.16.0.1
Trying 172.16.0.1...
Connected to 172.16.0.1.
Escape character is '^]'.
MikroTik v2.9
Login: admin
Password:
Terminal unknown detected, using single line input mode

[admin@MikroTik] >
Page 85 of 695

Terminal Console
Document revision 1.0 (Mon Nov 8 13:15:54 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Common Console Functions
Description
Example
Lists and Item Names
Description
Notes
Example
Quick Typing
Description
Notes
Additional Information
Description
General Commands
Description
Command Description
Safe Mode
Description
General Information
Summary
The Terminal Console is used for accessing the MikroTik Router's configuration and management
features using text terminals, id est remote terminal clients or locally attached monitor and
keyboard. The Terminal Console is also used for writing scripts. This manual describes the general
console operation principles. Please consult the Scripting Manual on some advanced console
commands and on how to write scripts.
Specifications
Related Documents
• Scripting Host and Complementary Tools
Page 86 of 695

Common Console Functions
Description
The console allows configuration of the router's settings using text commands. Although the
command structure is similar to the Unix shell, you can get additional information about the
command structure in the Scripting Host and Complementary Tools manual. Since there is a lot
of available commands, they are split into groups organized in a way of hierarchical menu levels.
The name of a menu level reflects the configuration information accessible in the relevant section,
exempli gratia /ip hotspot.
In general, all menu levels hold the same commands. The difference is expressed mainly in
command parameters.
Example
For example, you can issue the /ip route print command:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip route print
Flags: A - active, X - disabled, I - invalid, D - dynamic,
C - connect, S - static, r - rip, b - bgp, o - ospf, d - dynamic
0 ADC 1.1.1.0/24 isp2
1 A S 2.2.2.0/24 r 1.1.1.2 0 isp2
2 ADC 3.3.3.0/24 bonding1
3 ADC 10.1.0.0/24 isp1
4 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.1.0.1 0 isp1
[admin@MikroTik] >
Instead of typing ip route path before each command, the path can be typed only once to move into
this particular branch of menu hierarchy. Thus, the example above could also be executed like this:
[admin@MikroTik] > ip route
Flags: A - active, X - disabled, I - invalid, D - dynamic,
C - connect, S - static, r - rip, b - bgp, o - ospf, d - dynamic
0 ADC 1.1.1.0/24 isp2
1 A S 2.2.2.0/24 r 1.1.1.2 0 isp2
2 ADC 3.3.3.0/24 bonding1
3 ADC 10.1.0.0/24 isp1
4 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.1.0.1 0 isp1
Notice that the prompt changes in order to reflect where you are located in the menu hierarchy at
the moment . To move to the top level again, type /:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip route
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> /
[admin@MikroTik] >
To move up one command level, type ..:

[admin@MikroTik] ip route> ..
You can also use / and .. to execute commands from other menu levels without changing the current
level:
Page 87 of 695

10.0.0.1 ping timeout
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall nat> .. service-port print
# NAME PORTS
0 ftp 21
1 tftp 69
2 irc 6667
3 X h323
4 quake3
5 mms
6 gre
7 pptp
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall nat>
Lists and Item Names
Description
Lists
Many of the command levels operate with arrays of items: interfaces, routes, users etc. Such arrays
are displayed in similarly looking lists. All items in the list have an item number followed by its
parameter values.
To change parameters of an item, you have to specify it's number to the set command.
Item Names
Some lists have items that have specific names assigned to each. Examples are interface or user
levels. There you can use item names instead of item numbers.
You do not have to use the print command before accessing items by name. As opposed to
numbers, names are not assigned by the console internally, but are one of the items' properties.
Thus, they would not change on their own. However, there are all kinds of obscure situations
possible when several users are changing router's configuration at the same time. Generally, item
names are more "stable" than the numbers, and also more informative, so you should prefer them to
numbers when writing console scripts.
Notes
Item numbers are assigned by print command and are not constant - it is possible that two
successive print commands will order items differently. But the results of last print commands are
memorized and thus, once assigned, item numbers can be used even after add, remove and move
operations (after move operation item numbers are moved with the items). Item numbers are
assigned on per session basis, they will remain the same until you quit the console or until the next
print command is executed. Also, numbers are assigned separately for every item list, so ip
address print would not change numbers for interface list.
Example
Page 88 of 695

[admin@MikroTik] interface> set 0 mtu=1200
ERROR: item number must be assigned by a print command
use print command before using an item number in a command
2 R wlan1 wlan 0 0 1500
[admin@MikroTik] interface> set 0
disabled mtu name rx-rate tx-rate
[admin@MikroTik] interface> set 0 mtu=1200
[admin@MikroTik] interface> set wlan1 mtu=1300
2 R wlan1 wlan 0 0 1300
Quick Typing
Description
There are two features in the console that help entering commands much quicker and easier - the
[Tab] key completions, and abbreviations of command names. Completions work similarly to the
bash shell in UNIX. If you press the [Tab] key after a part of a word, console tries to find the
command within the current context that begins with this word. If there is only one match, it is
automatically appended, followed by a space:
/inte[Tab]_ becomes /interface _
If there is more than one match, but they all have a common beginning, which is longer than that
what you have typed, then the word is completed to this common part, and no space is appended:
/interface set e[Tab]_ becomes /interface set ether_
If you've typed just the common part, pressing the tab key once has no effect. However, pressing it
for the second time shows all possible completions in compact form:
[admin@MikroTik] > interface set e[Tab]_
[admin@MikroTik] > interface set ether[Tab]_
[admin@MikroTik] > interface set ether[Tab]_
ether1 ether5
[admin@MikroTik] > interface set ether_
The [Tab] key can be used almost in any context where the console might have a clue about
possible values - command names, argument names, arguments that have only several possible
values (like names of items in some lists or name of protocol in firewall and NAT rules).You
cannot complete numbers, IP addresses and similar values.
Another way to press fewer keys while typing is to abbreviate command and argument names. You
can type only beginning of command name, and, if it is not ambiguous, console will accept it as a
full name. So typing:
[admin@MikroTik] > pi 10.1 c 3 si 100
equals to:
[admin@MikroTik] > ping 10.0.0.1 count 3 size 100
Page 89 of 695

Notes
Pressing [Tab] key while entering IP address will do a DNS lookup, instead of completion. If what
is typed before cursor is a valid IP address, it will be resolved to a DNS name (reverse resolve),
otherwise it will be resolved directly (i.e. to an IP address). To use this feature, DNS server must be
configured and working. To avoid input lockups any such lookup will timeout after half a second,
so you might have to press [Tab] several times, before the name is actually resolved.
It is possible to complete not only beginning, but also any distinctive substring of a name: if there is
no exact match, console starts looking for words that have string being completed as first letters of a
multiple word name, or that simply contain letters of this string in the same order. If single such
word is found, it is completed at cursor position. For example:
[admin@MikroTik] > interface x[TAB]_
[admin@MikroTik] > interface export _
[admin@MikroTik] > interface mt[TAB]_

[admin@MikroTik] > interface monitor-traffic _
Additional Information
Description
Built-in Help
The console has a built-in help, which can be accessed by typing ?. General rule is that help shows
what you can type in position where the ? was pressed (similarly to pressing [Tab] key twice, but in
verbose form and with explanations).
Internal Item Numbers

You can specify multiple items as targets to some commands. Almost everywhere, where you can
write the number of item, you can also write a list of numbers:
[admin@MikroTik] > interface print
# NAME TYPE MTU
0 R ether1 ether 1500
[admin@MikroTik] > interface set 0,1,2 mtu=1460
# NAME TYPE MTU
[admin@MikroTik] >
General Commands
Page 90 of 695

Description
There are some commands that are common to nearly all menu levels, namely: print, set, remove,
add, find, get, export, enable, disable, comment, move. These commands have similar behavior
throughout different menu levels.
Command Description
print - shows all information that's accessible from particular command level. Thus, /system clock
print shows system date and time, /ip route print shows all routes etc. If there's a list of items in
current level and they are not read-only, i.e. you can change/remove them (example of read-only
item list is /system history, which shows history of executed actions), then print command also
assigns numbers that are used by all commands that operate with items in this list. - applicable only
to lists of items. The action is performed with all items in this list in the same order in which they
are given. - forces the print command to use tabular output form - forces the print command to use
property=value output form - shows the number of items - prints the contents of the specific
submenu into a file. This file will be available in the router's ftp - shows the output from the print
command for every interval seconds - prints the oid value, which is useful for SNMP - prints the
output without paging, to see printed output which does not fit in the screen, use [Shift]+[PgUp]
key combination
It is possible to sort print output. Like this:
[admin@MikroTik] interface> print type=ether

0 R isp1 ether 0 0 1500
1 R isp2 ether 0 0 1500
set - allows you to change values of general parameters or item parameters. The set command has
arguments with names corresponding to values you can change. Use ? or double [Tab] to see list of
all arguments. If there is a list of items in this command level, then set has one action argument that
accepts the number of item (or list of numbers) you wish to set up. This command does not return
anything.
add - this command usually has all the same arguments as set, except the action number argument.
It adds a new item with values you have specified, usually to the end of list (in places where order is
relevant). There are some values that you have to supply (like the interface for a new route), other
values are set to defaults unless you explicitly specify them. - Copies an existing item. It takes
default values of new item's properties from another item. If you do not want to make exact copy,
you can specify new values for some properties. When copying items that have names, you will
usually have to give a new name to a copy - add command returns internal number of item it has
added - places a new item before an existing item with specified position. Thus, you do not need to
use the move command after adding an item to the list - controls disabled/enabled state of the newly
added item(-s) - holds the description of a newly created item
remove - removes item(-s) from a list - contains number(-s) or name(-s) of item(-s) to remove.
move - changes the order of items in list where one is relevant. Item numbers after move command
are left in a consistent, but hardly intuitive order, so it's better to resync them by using print after
each move command. - first argument. Specifies the item(-s) being moved. - second argument.
Page 91 of 695

Specifies the item before which to place all items being moved (they are placed at the end of the list
if the second argument is omitted).
find - The find command has the same arguments as set, and an additional from argument which
works like the from argument with the print command. Plus, find command has flag arguments like
disabled, invalid that take values yes or no depending on the value of respective flag. To see all
flags and their names, look at the top of print command's output. The find command returns internal
numbers of all items that have the same values of arguments as specified.
edit - this command is in every place that has set command, it can be used to edit values of
properties, exempli gratia: [admin@MikroTik] ip route> print Flags: A - active, X - disabled,
I - invalid, D - dynamic, C - connect, S - static, r - rip, b - bgp, o - ospf, d -
dynamic # DST-ADDRESS G GATEWAY DISTANCE INTERFACE 0 ADC 1.1.1.0/24 isp2 1 A S 2.2.2.0/24
r 1.1.1.2 0 isp2 2 ADC 3.3.3.0/24 bonding1 3 ADC 10.1.0.0/24 isp1 4 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r
10.1.0.1 0 isp1 [admin@MikroTik] ip route> edit 1 gateway
Safe Mode
Description
It is possible to change router configuration in a way that will make it not accessible except from
local console. Usually this is done by accident, but there is no way to undo last change when
connection to router is already cut. Safe mode can be used to minimize such risk.
Safe mode is entered by pressing [Ctrl]+[X]. To quit safe mode, press [Ctrl]+[X] again.
[admin@MikroTik] ip route>[Ctrl]+[X]
[Safe Mode taken]
[admin@MikroTik] ip route<SAFE>
Message Safe Mode taken is displayed and prompt changes to reflect that session is now in safe
mode. All configuration changes that are made (also from other login sessions), while router is in
safe mode, are automatically undone if safe mode session terminates abnormally. You can see all
such changes that will be automatically undone tagged with an F flag in system history:
[Safe Mode taken]
[admin@MikroTik] ip route<SAFE> add
[admin@MikroTik] ip route<SAFE> /system history print
Flags: U - undoable, R - redoable, F - floating-undo
ACTION BY POLICY
F route added admin write
Now, if telnet connection is cut, then after a while (TCP timeout is 9 minutes) all changes that were
made while in safe mode will be undone. Exiting session by [Ctrl]+[D]emphasis> also undoes all
safe mode changes, while /quit does not.
If another user tries to enter safe mode, he's given following message:
[admin@MikroTik] >
Hijacking Safe Mode from someone - unroll/release/don't take it [u/r/d]:
• [u] - undoes all safe mode changes, and puts the current session in safe mode.
• [d] - leaves everything as-is.
• [r] - keeps all current safe mode changes, and puts current session in a safe mode. Previous
Page 92 of 695

owner of safe mode is notified about this:
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall rule input
[Safe mode released by another user]
If too many changes are made while in safe mode, and there's no room in history to hold them all
(currently history keeps up to 100 most recent actions), then session is automatically put out of the
safe mode, no changes are automatically undone. Thus, it is best to change configuration in small
steps, while in safe mode. Pressing [Ctrl]+[X] twice is an easy way to empty safe mode action list.
Page 93 of 695

Winbox
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Description
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS can be configured remotely, using Telnet, SSH, WinBox Console or
Webbox. In this manual we will discuss how to use the interactive WinBox console.
Description
The Winbox console is used for accessing the MikroTik Router configuration and management
features, using graphical user interface (GUI).
All Winbox interface functions are as close as possible to Console functions: all Winbox functions
are exactly in the same hierarchy in Terminal Console and vice versa (except functions that are not
implemented in Winbox). That is why there are no Winbox sections in the manual.
The Winbox Console plugin loader, the winbox.exe program, can be retrieved from the MikroTik
router, the URL is http://router_address/winbox/winbox.exe Use any web browser on Windows
95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP or Linux to retrieve the winbox.exe executable file from Router. If your
router is not specifically configured, you can also type in the web-browser just
http://router_address
The Winbox plugins are cached on the local disk for each MikroTik RouterOS version. The plugins
are not downloaded, if they are in the cache, and the router has not been upgraded since the last
time it has been accessed.
Starting the Winbox Console

When connecting to the MikroTik router via http (TCP port 80 by default), the router's Welcome
Page is displayed in the web browser:
Page 94 of 695

By clicking on the Winbox link you can start the winbox.exe download. Choose Open to start the
Winbox loader program (you can also save this program to your local disk, and run it from there)
The winbox.exe program opens the Winbox login window.
Page 95 of 695

where:
•
discovers and shows MNDP (MikroTik Neighbor Discovery Protocol) or CDP (Cisco
Discovery Protocol) devices.
Page 96 of 695

•
logs on to the router by specified IP address (and the port number if you have changed it from
the default value of 80) or MAC Address (if the router is in the same subnet), user name, and
password.
•
saves the current sessions to the list (to run them, just double-click on an item).
•
removes selected item from the list.

•
removes all items from the list, clears cache on the local disk, imports addresses from wbx file
or exports them to wbx file.
• Secure Mode
provides privacy and data integrity between WinBox and RouterOS by means of TLS
(Transport Layer Security) protocol.
• Keep Password
Saves password as a plain text on a local hard drive. Warning: storing passwords in plain text
allows anybody with access to your files to read the password from there.
The Winbox Console of the router:
Page 97 of 695

The Winbox Console uses TCP port 8291. After logging onto the router you can work with the
MikroTik router's configuration through the Winbox console and perform the same tasks as using
the regular console.
Overview of Common Functions

You can use the menu bar to navigate through the router's configuration menus, open configuration
windows. By double clicking on some list items in the windows you can open configuration
windows for the specific items, and so on.
There are some hints for using the Winbox Console:
• To open the required window, simply click on the corresponding menu item
•
Add a new entry
•
Remove an existing entry
•
Enable an item
•
Disable an item
Page 98 of 695

•
Make or edit a comment
•
Refresh a window
•
Undo an action
•
Redo an action
•
Logout from the Winbox Console
Troubleshooting
Description
• Can I run WinBox on Linux?

• Yes, you can run WinBox and connect to RouterOS, using Wine
• I cannot open the Winbox Console
Check the port and address for www service in /ip service print list. Make sure the address
you are connecting from matches the network you've specified in address field and that you've
specified the correct port in the Winbox loader. The command /ip service set www port=80
address=0.0.0.0/0 will change these values to the default ones so you will be able to connect
specifying just the correct address of the router in the address field of Winbox loader
• The Winbox Console uses TCP port 8291. Make sure you have access to it through the
firewall.
Page 99 of 695

IP Addresses and ARP
Document revision 1.3 (Tue Sep 20 19:02:32 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
IP Addressing
Description
Notes
Example
Address Resolution Protocol
Description
Notes
Example
Proxy-ARP feature
Description
Example
Unnumbered Interfaces
Description
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
The following Manual discusses IP address management and the Address Resolution Protocol
settings. IP addresses serve as identification when communicating with other network devices using
the TCP/IP protocol. In turn, communication between devices in one physical network proceeds
with the help of Address Resolution Protocol and ARP addresses.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip address , /ip arp
Standards and Technologies: IP , ARP
Related Documents
Page 100 of 695


IP Addressing
Home menu level: /ip address
Description
IP addresses serve for a general host identification purposes in IP networks. Typical (IPv4) address
consists of four octets. For proper addressing the router also needs the network mask value, id est
which bits of the complete IP address refer to the address of the host, and which - to the address of
the network. The network address value is calculated by binary AND operation from network mask
and IP address values. It's also possible to specify IP address followed by slash "/" and amount of
bits assigned to a network mask.
In most cases, it is enough to specify the address, the netmask, and the interface arguments. The
network prefix and the broadcast address are calculated automatically.
It is possible to add multiple IP addresses to an interface or to leave the interface without any
addresses assigned to it. Leaving a physical interface without an IP address is not a must when the
bridging between interfaces is used. In case of bridging, the IP address can be assigned to any
interface in the bridge, but actually the address will belong to the bridge interface. You can use /ip
address print detail to see to which interface the address belongs to.
MikroTik RouterOS has following types of addresses:
• Static - manually assigned to the interface by a user
• Dynamic - automatically assigned to the interface by estabilished ppp, ppptp, or pppoe
connections
actual-interface ( read-only: name ) - only applicable to logical interfaces like bridges or tunnels.
Holds the name of the actual hardware interface the logical one is bound to.
address ( IP address ) - IP address
broadcast ( IP address ; default: 255.255.255.255 ) - broadcasting IP address, calculated by default
from an IP address and a network mask
disabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether the address is disabled or not
interface ( name ) - interface name the IP address is assigned to
netmask ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - specifies network address part of an IP address
network ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address for the network. For point-to-point links it
should be the address of the remote end
Notes
You cannot have two different IP addresses from the same network assigned to the router. Exempli
gratia, the combination of IP address 10.0.0.1/24 on the ether1 interface and IP address
10.0.0.132/24 on the ether2 interface is invalid, because both addresses belong to the same network
10.0.0.0/24. Use addresses from different networks on different interfaces, or enable proxy-arp on
Page 101 of 695


ether1 or ether2.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address=10.10.10.1/24 interface=ether2
0 2.2.2.1/24 2.2.2.0 2.2.2.255 ether2
1 10.5.7.244/24 10.5.7.0 10.5.7.255 ether1
2 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.10.0 10.10.10.255 ether2
Address Resolution Protocol

Home menu level: /ip arp
Description
Even though IP packets are addressed using IP addresses, hardware addresses must be used to
actually transport data from one host to another. Address Resolution Protocol is used to map OSI
level 3 IP addreses to OSI level 2 MAC addreses. A router has a table of currently used ARP
entries. Normally the table is built dynamically, but to increase network security, it can be built
statically by means of adding static entries.
address ( IP address ) - IP address to be mapped
interface ( name ) - interface name the IP address is assigned to
mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - MAC address to be mapped to
Notes
Maximal number of ARP entries is 8192.
If arp feature is turned off on the interface, i.e., arp=disabled is used, ARP requests from clients
are not answered by the router. Therefore, static arp entry should be added to the clients as well. For
example, the router's IP and MAC addresses should be added to the Windows workstations using
the arp command:
C:\> arp -s 10.5.8.254 00-aa-00-62-c6-09
If arp property is set to reply-only on the interface, then router only replies to ARP requests.
Neighbour MAC addresses will be resolved using /ip arp statically.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp> add address=10.10.10.10 interface=ether2 mac-address=06 \
\... :21:00:56:00:12
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp> print
Flags: X - disabled, I - invalid, H - DHCP, D - dynamic
# ADDRESS MAC-ADDRESS INTERFACE
0 D 2.2.2.2 00:30:4F:1B:B3:D9 ether2
Page 102 of 695


1 D 10.5.7.242 00:A0:24:9D:52:A4 ether1
2 10.10.10.10 06:21:00:56:00:12 ether2
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp>
If static arp entries are used for network security on an interface, you should set arp to 'reply-only'
on that interface. Do it under the relevant /interface menu:
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp> /interface ethernet set ether2 arp=reply-only
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp> print
Flags: X - disabled, I - invalid, H - DHCP, D - dynamic
# ADDRESS MAC-ADDRESS INTERFACE
0 D 10.5.7.242 00:A0:24:9D:52:A4 ether1
1 10.10.10.10 06:21:00:56:00:12 ether2
Proxy-ARP feature
Description
A router with properly configured proxy ARP feature acts like a transparent ARP proxy between
directly connected networks. Consider the following network diagram:
Page 103 of 695


Suppose the host A needs to communicate to host C. To do this, it needs to know host's C MAC
address. As shown on the diagram above, host A has /24 network mask. That makes host A to
believe that it is directly connected to the whole 192.168.0.0/24 network. When a computer needs to
communicate to another one on a directly connected network, it sends a broadcast ARP request.
Therefore host A sends a broadcast ARP request for the host C MAC address.
Broadcast ARP requests are sent to the broadcast MAC address FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF. Since the ARP
request is a broadcast, it will reach all hosts in the network A, including the router R1, but it will not
reach host C, because routers do not forward broadcasts by default. A router with enabled proxy
ARP knows that the host C is on another subnet and will reply with its own MAC adress. The router
with enabled proxy ARP always answer with its own MAC address if it has a route to the
destination.
Page 104 of 695


This behaviour can be usefull, for example, if you want to assign dial-in (ppp, pppoe, pptp) clients
IP addresses from the same address space as used on the connected LAN.
Example
Consider the following configuration:
The MikroTik Router setup is as follows:

admin@MikroTik] ip arp> /interface ethernet print
Flags: X - disabled, R - running
# NAME MTU MAC-ADDRESS ARP
0 R eth-LAN 1500 00:50:08:00:00:F5 proxy-arp
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp> /interface print
# NAME TYPE MTU
0 eth-LAN ether 1500
1 prism1 prism 1500
2 D pppoe-in25 pppoe-in
3 D pppoe-in26 pppoe-in
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp> /ip address print
0 10.0.0.217/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 eth-LAN
1 D 10.0.0.217/32 10.0.0.230 0.0.0.0 pppoe-in25
2 D 10.0.0.217/32 10.0.0.231 0.0.0.0 pppoe-in26
[admin@MikroTik] ip arp> /ip route print
0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.0.0.1 1 eth-LAN
Page 105 of 695


1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 eth-LAN
2 DC 10.0.0.230/32 r 0.0.0.0 0 pppoe-in25
3 DC 10.0.0.231/32 r 0.0.0.0 0 pppoe-in26
Unnumbered Interfaces
Description
Unnumbered interfaces can be used on serial point-to-point links, e.g., MOXA or Cyclades
interfaces. A private address should be put on the interface with the network being the same as the
address on the router on the other side of the p2p link (there may be no IP on that interface, but
there is an ip for that router).
Example
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address=10.0.0.214/32 network=192.168.0.1 \
\... interface=pppsync
0 10.0.0.214/32 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1 pppsync
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> .. route print detail
0 S dst-address=0.0.0.0/0 preferred-source=0.0.0.0 gateway=192.168.0.1
gateway-state=reachable distance=1 interface=pppsync
1 DC dst-address=192.168.0.1/32 preferred-source=10.0.0.214
gateway=0.0.0.0 gateway-state=reachable distance=0 interface=pppsync
As you can see, a dynamic connected route has been automatically added to the routes list. If you
want the default gateway be the other router of the p2p link, just add a static route for it. It is shown
as 0 in the example above.
Troubleshooting
Description
• Router shows that the IP address is invalid

Check whether the interface exists to which the IP address is assigned. Or maybe it is disabled.
It is also possible that the system has crashed - reboot the router.
• Router shows that the ARP entry is invalid
Check whether the interface exists to which the ARP entry is assigned. Or maybe it is disabled.
Check also for an IP address for the particular interface.
Page 106 of 695


OSPF
Document revision 1.4 (Wed Dec 21 17:26:39 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
General Setup
Description
Notes
Example
Areas
Description
Example
Networks
Description
Notes
Example
Interfaces
Description
Example
Virtual Links
Description
Notes
Example
Neighbours
Description
Notes
Example
OSPF backup without using a tunnel
Routing tables with Revised Link Cost
Functioning of the Backup
General Information
Summary
Page 107 of 695


MikroTik RouterOS implements OSPF Version 2 (RFC 2328). The OSPF protocol is the link-state
protocol that takes care of the routes in the dynamic network structure that can employ different
paths to its subnetworks. It always chooses shortest path to the subnetwork first.
Specifications
Packages required: routing
Home menu level: /routing ospf
Standards and Technologies: OSPF
Related Documents

• IP Addresses and ARP
• Routes, Equal Cost Multipath Routing, Policy Routing
• Log Management
Description
Open Shortest Path First protocol is a link-state routing protocol. It's uses a link-state algorithm to
build and calculate the shortest path to all known destinations. The shortest path is calculated using
the Dijkstra algorithm. OSPF distributes routing information between the routers belonging to a
single autonomous system (AS). An AS is a group of routers exchanging routing information via a
common routing protocol.
In order to deploy the OSPF all routers it will be running on should be configured in a coordinated
manner (note that it also means that the routers should have the same MTU for all the networks
advertized by OSPF protocol).
The OSPF protocol is started after you will add a record to the OSPF network list. The routes
learned by the OSPF protocol are installed in the routes table list with the distance of 110.
General Setup
Home menu level: /routing ospf
Description
In this section you will learn how to configure basic OSPF settings.
distribute-default ( never | if-installed-as-type-1 | if-installed-as-type-2 | always-as-type-1 |
always-as-type-2 ; default: never ) - specifies how to distribute default route. Should be used for
ABR (Area Border router) or ASBR (Autonomous System boundary router) settings
• never - do not send own default route to other routers
Page 108 of 695


• if-installed-as-type-1 - send the default route with type 1 metric only if it has been installed (a
static default route, or route added by DHCP, PPP, etc.)
• if-installed-as-type-2 - send the default route with type 2 metric only if it has been installed (a
static default route, or route added by DHCP, PPP, etc.)
• always-as-type-1 - always send the default route with type 1 metric
• always-as-type-2 - always send the default route with type 2 metric
metric-bgp ( integer ; default: 20 ) - specifies the cost of the routes learned from BGP protocol
metric-connected ( integer ; default: 20 ) - specifies the cost of the routes to directly connected
networks
metric-default ( integer ; default: 1 ) - specifies the cost of the default route
metric-rip ( integer ; default: 20 ) - specifies the cost of the routes learned from RIP protocol
metric-static ( integer ; default: 20 ) - specifies the cost of the static routes
redistribute-bgp ( as-type-1 | as-type-2 | no ; default: no ) - with this setting enabled the router will
redistribute the information about all routes learned by the BGP protocol
redistribute-connected ( as-type-1 | as-type-2 | no ; default: no ) - if set, the router will redistribute
the information about all connected routes, i.e., routes to directly reachable networks
redistribute-rip ( as-type-1 | as-type-2 | no ; default: no ) - with this setting enabled the router will
redistribute the information about all routes learned by the RIP protocol
redistribute-static ( as-type-1 | as-type-2 | no ; default: no ) - if set, the router will redistribute the
information about all static routes added to its routing database, i.e., routes that have been created
using the /ip route add command
router-id ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - OSPF Router ID. If not specified, OSPF uses the largest
IP address configured on the interfaces as its router ID
Notes
Within one area, only the router that is connected to another area (i.e. Area border router) or to
another AS (i.e. Autonomous System boundary router) should have the propagation of the default
route enabled.
OSPF protocol will try to use the shortest path (path with the smallest total cost) if available.
OSPF protocol supports two types of metrics:
• type1 - external metrics are expressed in the same units as OSPF interface cost. In other words
the router expects the cost of a link to a network which is external to AS to be the same order of
magnitude as the cost of the internal links.
• type2 - external metrics are an order of magnitude larger; any type2 metric is considered
greater than the cost of any path internal to the AS. Use of type2 external metric assumes that
routing between AS is the major cost of routing a packet, and climinates the need conversion of
external costs to internal link state metrics.
Both Type 1 and Type 2 external metrics can be used in the AS at the same time. In that event,
Type 1 external metrics always take precedence.
In /ip route you can see routes with Io status. Because router receives routers from itself.
The metric cost can be calculated from line speed by using the formula 10e+8/line speed. The table
Page 109 of 695


contains some examples:
network type cost

ethernet 10
T1 64
64kb/s 1562
Example
To enable the OSPF protocol redisrtibute routes to the connected networks as type1 metrics with
the cost of 1, you need do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf> set redistribute-connected=as-type-1 \
\... metric-connected=1
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf> print
router-id: 0.0.0.0
distribute-default: never
redistribute-connected: as-type-1
redistribute-static: no
redistribute-rip: no
redistribute-bgp: no
metric-default: 1
metric-connected: 1
metric-static: 20
metric-rip: 20
metric-bgp: 20
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf>
Areas
Home menu level: /routing ospf area
Description
OSPF allows collections of routers to be grouped together. Such group is called an area. Each area
runs a separate copy of the basic link-state routing algorithm. This means that each area has its own
link-state database and corresponding graph
The structure of an area is invisible from the outside of the area. This isolation of knowledge
enables the protocol to effect a marked reduction in routing traffic as compared to treating the entire
Autonomous System as a single link-state domain
60-80 routers have to be the maximum in one area
area-id ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - OSPF area identifier. Default area-id=0.0.0.0 is the
backbone area. The OSPF backbone always contains all area border routers. The backbone is
responsible for distributing routing information between non-backbone areas. The backbone must
be contiguous. However, areas do not need to be physical connected to backbone. It can be done
with virtual link. The name and area-id for this area can not be changed
authetication ( none | simple | md5 ; default: none ) - specifies authentication method for OSPF
protocol messages
Page 110 of 695


• none - do not use authentication
• simple - plain text authentication
• md5 - keyed Message Digest 5 authentication
default-cost ( integer ; default: 1 ) - specifies the default cost used for stub areas. Applicable only
to area boundary routers
name ( name ; default: "" ) - OSPF area's name
stub ( yes | no ; default: no ) - a stub area is an area which is out from part with no routers or areas
beyond it. A stub area is configured to avoid AS External Link Advertisements being flooded into
the Stub area. One of the reason to configure a Stub area is that the size of the link state database is
reduced along with the routing table and less CPU cycles are used to process. Any router which is
trying access to a network outside the area sends the packets to the default route
Example
To define additional OSPF area named local_10 with area-id=0.0.10.5, do the following:
[admin@WiFi] routing ospf area> add area-id=0.0.10.5 name=local_10
[admin@WiFi] routing ospf area> print
# NAME AREA-ID STUB DEFAULT-COST AUTHENTICATION
0 backbone 0.0.0.0 none
1 local_10 0.0.10.5 no 1 none
[admin@WiFi] routing ospf area>
Networks
Home menu level: /routing ospf network
Description
There can be Point-to-Point networks or Multi-Access networks. Multi-Access network can be a
broadcast network (a single message can be sent to all routers)
To start the OSPF protocol, you have to define the networks on which it will run and the area ID for
each of those networks
area ( name ; default: backbone ) - the OSPF area to be associated with the specified address range
network ( IP address/mask ; default: 20 ) - the network associated with the area. The network
argument allows defining one or multiple interfaces to be associated with a specific OSPF area.
Only directly connected networks of the router may be specified
Notes
You should set the network address exactly the same as the remote point IP address for
point-to-point links. The right netmask in this case is /32.
Example
Page 111 of 695


To enable the OSPF protocol on the 10.10.1.0/24 network, and include it into the backbone area, do
the following:
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf network> add area=backbone network=10.10.1.0/24
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf network> print
Flags: X - disabled
# NETWORK AREA
0 10.10.1.0/24 backbone
Interfaces
Home menu level: /routing ospf interface
Description
This facility provides tools for additional in-depth configuration of OSPF interface specific
parameters. You do not have to configure interfaces in order to run OSPF
authentication-key ( text ; default: "" ) - authentication key have to be used by neighboring
routers that are using OSPF's simple password authentication
cost ( integer : 1 ..65535 ; default: 1 ) - interface cost expressed as link state metric
dead-interval ( time ; default: 40s ) - specifies the interval after which a neighbor is declared as
dead. The interval is advertised in the router's hello packets. This value must be the same for all
routers and access servers on a specific network
hello-interval ( time ; default: 10s ) - the interval between hello packets that the router sends on the
interface. The smaller the hello-interval, the faster topological changes will be detected, but more
routing traffic will ensue. This value must be the same on each end of the adjancency otherwise the
adjacency will not form
interface ( name ; default: all ) - interface on which OSPF will run
• all - is used for the interfaces not having any specific settings
priority ( integer : 0 ..255 ; default: 1 ) - router's priority. It helps to determine the designated
router for the network. When two routers attached to a network both attempt to become the
designated router, the one with the higher router's priority takes precedence
retransmit-interval ( time ; default: 5s ) - time between retransmitting lost link state
advertisements. When a router sends a link state advertisement (LSA) to its neighbor, it keeps the
LSA until it receives back the acknowledgment. If it receives no acknowledgment in time, it will
retransmit the LSA. The following settings are recommended: for Broadcast network are 5 seconds
and for Point-to-Point network are 10 seconds
transmit-delay ( time ; default: 1s ) - link state transmit delay is the estimated time it takes to
transmit a link state update packet on the interface
Example
To add an entry that specifies that ether2 interface should send Hello packets every 5 seconds, do
the following:
Page 112 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf> interface add interface=ether2 hello-interval=5s
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf> interface print
0 interface=ether2 cost=1 priority=1 authentication-key=""
retransmit-interval=5s transmit-delay=1s hello-interval=5s
dead-interval=40s
Virtual Links
Home menu level: /routing ospf virtual-link
Description
As stated in OSPF RFC, the backbone area must be contiguous. However, it is possible to define
areas in such a way that the backbone is no longer contiguous. In this case the system administrator
must restore backbone connectivity by configuring virtual links. Virtual link can be configured
between two routers through common area called transit area, one of them should have to be
connected with backbone. Virtual links belong to the backbone. The protocol treats two routers
joined by a virtual link as if they were connected by an unnumbered point-to-point network
neighbor-id ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - specifies router-id of the neighbour
transit-area ( name ; default: (unknown) ) - a non-backbone area the two routers have in common
Notes
Virtual links can not be estabilished through stub areas
Example
To add a virtual link with the 10.0.0.201 router through the ex area, do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf virtual-link> add neighbor-id=10.0.0.201 \
\... transit-area=ex
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf virtual-link> print
# NEIGHBOR-ID TRANSIT-AREA
0 10.0.0.201 ex
[admin@MikroTik] routing ospf virtual-link>
Virtual link should be configured on both routers
Neighbours
Home menu level: /routing ospf neigbor
Description
The submenu provides an access to the list of OSPF neighbors, id est the routers adjacent to the
current router, and supplies brief statistics
Page 113 of 695


address ( read-only: IP address ) - appropriate IP address of the neighbour
backup-dr-id ( read-only: IP address ) - backup designated router's router id for this neighbor
db-summaries ( read-only: integer ) - number of records in link-state database advertised by the
neighbour
dr-id ( read-only: IP address ) - designated router's router id for this neighbor
ls-requests ( read-only: integer ) - number of link-state requests
ls-retransmits ( read-only: integer ) - number of link-state retransmits
priority ( read-only: integer ) - the priority of the neigbour which is used in designated router
elections via Hello protocol on this network
router-id ( read-only: IP address ) - the router-id parameter of the neighbour
state ( read-only: Down | Attempt | Init | 2-Way | ExStart | Exchange | Loading | Full ) - the state of
the connection:
• Down - the connection is down
• Attempt - the router is sending Hello protocol packets
• Init - Hello packets are exchanged between routers to create a Neighbour Relationship
• 2-Way - the routers add each other to their Neighbour database and they become neighbours
• ExStart - the DR (Designated Router) and BDR (Backup Designated Router) create an
adjancency with each other and they begin creating their link-state databases using Database
Description Packets
• Exchange - is the process of discovering routes by exchanging Database Description Packets
• Loading - receiving information from the neighbour
• Full - the link-state databases are completely synchronized. The routers are routing traffic and
continue sending each other hello packets to maintain the adjacency and the routing information
state-changes ( read-only: integer ) - number of connection state changes
Notes
The neighbour's list also displays the router itself with 2-Way state
Example
The following text can be observed just after adding an OSPF network:
admin@MikroTik] routing ospf> neighbor print
router-id=10.0.0.204 address=10.0.0.204 priority=1 state="2-Way"
state-changes=0 ls-retransmits=0 ls-requests=0 db-summaries=0
dr-id=0.0.0.0 backup-dr-id=0.0.0.0
General Information
Page 114 of 695


OSPF backup without using a tunnel
Let us assume that the link between the routers OSPF-Main and OSPF-peer-1 is the main one. If it
goes down, we want the traffic switch over to the link going through the router OSPF-peer-2.
This example shows how to use OSPF for backup purposes, if you are controlling all the involved
routers, and you can run OSPF on them
For this:
1. We introduce an OSPF area with area ID=0.0.0.1, which includes all three routers shown on
the diagram
2. Only the OSPF-Main router will have the default route configured. Its interfaces peer1 and
peer2 will be configured for the OSPF protocol. The interface main_gw will not be used for
distributing the OSPF routing information
3. The routers OSPF-peer-1 and OSPF-peer-2 will distribute their connected route information,
and receive the default route using the OSPF protocol
Now let's setup the OSPF_MAIN router.
The router should have 3 NICs:
[admin@OSPF_MAIN] interface> print
# NAME TYPE RX-RATE
TX-RATE MTU
0 R main_gw ether 0
0 1500
1 R to_peer_1 ether 0
0 1500
Page 115 of 695


0 1500
Add all needed ip addresses to interfaces as it is shown here:

[admin@OSPF_MAIN] ip address> print
0 192.168.0.11/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 main_gw
1 10.1.0.2/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 to_peer_1
2 10.2.0.2/24 10.2.0.0 10.2.0.255 to_peer_2
You should set distribute-default as if-installed-as-type-2, redistribute-connected as as-type-1 and

redistribute-static as as-type-2. Metric-connected, metric-static, metric-rip, metric-bgp should be
zero
[admin@OSPF_MAIN] routing ospf> print
router-id: 0.0.0.0
distribute-default: if-installed-as-type-2
redistribute-static: as-type-2
metric-default: 1
metric-connected: 0
metric-static: 0
metric-rip: 0
metric-bgp: 0
Define new OSPF area named local_10 with area-id 0.0.0.1:

[admin@OSPF_MAIN] routing ospf area> print
# NAME AREA-ID STUB DEFAULT-COST
AUTHENTICATION
0 backbone 0.0.0.0
none
1 local_10 0.0.0.1 no 1
none
Add connected networks with area local_10 in ospf network:

[admin@OSPF_MAIN] routing ospf network> print
# NETWORK AREA
0 10.1.0.0/24 local_10
1 10.2.0.0/24 local_10
For main router the configuration is done. Next, you should configure OSPF_peer_1 router
Enable followong interfaces on OSPF_peer_1:
[admin@OSPF_peer_1] interface> print
# NAME TYPE RX-RATE
TX-RATE MTU
0 R backup ether 0
0 1500
1 R to_main ether 0
0 1500
Assign IP addresses to these interfaces:

[admin@OSPF_peer_1] ip address> print
0 10.1.0.1/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 to_main
1 10.3.0.1/24 10.3.0.0 10.3.0.255 backup
Page 116 of 695


Set redistribute-connected as as-type-1. Metric-connected, metric-static, metric-rip, metric-bgp
should be zero.
[admin@OSPF_peer_1] routing ospf> print
router-id: 0.0.0.0
distribute-default: never
metric-default: 1
metric-connected: 0
metric-static: 0
metric-rip: 0
metric-bgp: 0
Add the same area as in main router:

[admin@OSPF_peer_1] routing ospf area> print
AUTHENTICATION
0 backbone 0.0.0.0
none
1 local_10 0.0.0.1 no 1
none
Add connected networks with area local_10:

[admin@OSPF_peer_1] routing ospf network> print
# NETWORK AREA
0 10.3.0.0/24 local_10
1 10.1.0.0/24 local_10
Finally, set up the OSPF_peer_2 router. Enable the following interfaces:

[admin@OSPF_peer_2] interface> print
# NAME TYPE RX-RATE
TX-RATE MTU
0 R to_main ether 0
0 1500
0 1500
Add the needed IP addresses:

[admin@OSPF_peer_2] ip address> print
0 10.2.0.1/24 10.2.0.0 10.2.0.255 to_main
1 10.3.0.2/24 10.3.0.0 10.3.0.255 to_peer_1
Add the same area as in previous routers:

[admin@OSPF_peer_2] routing ospf area> print
AUTHENTICATION
0 backbone 0.0.0.0
none
1 local_10 0.0.0.1 no 1
none
Add connected networks with the same area:

[admin@OSPF_peer_2] routing ospf network> print
Page 117 of 695


# NETWORK AREA
0 10.2.0.0/24 local_10
1 10.3.0.0/24 local_10
After all routers have been set up as described above, and the links between them are operational,
the routing tables of the three routers look as follows:
[admin@OSPF_MAIN] ip route> print
C - connect, S - static, r - rip, o - ospf, b - bgp
0 Io 192.168.0.0/24 110
1 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 main_gw
2 Do 10.3.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.1 110 to_peer_2
r 10.1.0.1 to_peer_1
3 Io 10.2.0.0/24 110
4 DC 10.2.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_2
5 Io 10.1.0.0/24 110
6 DC 10.1.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_1
[admin@OSPF_peer_1] ip route> print

0 Do 192.168.0.0/24 r 10.1.0.2 110 to_main
1 Io 10.3.0.0/24 110
2 DC 10.3.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 backup
3 Do 10.2.0.0/24 r 10.1.0.2 110 to_main
r 10.3.0.2 backup
4 Io 10.1.0.0/24 110
5 DC 10.1.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_main

0 Do 192.168.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.2 110 to_main
1 Io 10.3.0.0/24 110
2 DC 10.3.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_1
3 Io 10.2.0.0/24 110
4 DC 10.2.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_main
5 Do 10.1.0.0/24 r 10.3.0.1 110 to_peer_1
r 10.2.0.2 to_main
Routing tables with Revised Link Cost

This example shows how to set up link cost. Let us assume, that the link between the routers
OSPF_peer_1 and OSPF_peer_2 has a higher cost (might be slower, we have to pay more for the
traffic through it, etc.).
Page 118 of 695


We should change cost value in both routers: OSPF_peer_1 and OSPF_peer_2 to 50. To do this,
we need to add a following interface:
[admin@OSPF_peer_1] routing ospf interface> add interface=backup cost=50
[admin@OSPF_peer_1] routing ospf interface> print
0 interface=backup cost=50 priority=1 authentication-key=""
dead-interval=40s
[admin@OSPF_peer_2] routing ospf interface> add interface=to_peer_1 cost=50
[admin@OSPF_peer_2] routing ospf interface> print
0 interface=to_peer_1 cost=50 priority=1 authentication-key=""
dead-interval=40s
After changing the cost settings, we have only one equal cost multipath route left - to the network
10.3.0.0/24 from OSPF_MAIN router.
Routes on OSPF_MAIN router:
0 Io 192.168.0.0/24 110
1 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 main_gw
2 Do 10.3.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.1 110 to_peer_2
r 10.1.0.1 to_peer_1
3 Io 10.2.0.0/24 110
4 DC 10.2.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_2
5 Io 10.1.0.0/24 110
6 DC 10.1.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_1
On OSPF_peer_1:
[admin@OSPF_peer_1] > ip route pr
Page 119 of 695


0 Do 192.168.0.0/24 r 10.1.0.2 110 to_main
1 Io 10.3.0.0/24 110
2 DC 10.3.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 backup
3 Do 10.2.0.0/24 r 10.1.0.2 110 to_main
4 Io 10.1.0.0/24 110
5 DC 10.1.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_main
On OSPF_peer_2:
[admin@OSPF_peer_2] > ip route print
0 Do 192.168.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.2 110 to_main
1 Io 10.3.0.0/24 110
2 DC 10.3.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_1
3 Io 10.2.0.0/24 110
4 DC 10.2.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_main
5 Do 10.1.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.2 110 to_main
Functioning of the Backup

If the link between routers OSPF_MAIN and OSPF_peer_1 goes down, we have the following
situation:
The OSPF routing changes as follows:

Routes on OSPF_MAIN router:
Page 120 of 695


0 Io 192.168.0.0/24 110
1 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 main_gw
2 Do 10.3.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.1 110 to_peer_2
3 Io 10.2.0.0/24 110
4 DC 10.2.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_2
5 Io 10.1.0.0/24 110
6 DC 10.1.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_1
On OSPF_peer_1:
0 Do 192.168.0.0/24 r 10.3.0.2 110 backup
1 Io 192.168.0.0/24 110
2 DC 10.3.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 backup
3 Do 10.2.0.0/24 r 10.3.0.2 110 backup
4 Io 10.1.0.0/24 110
5 DC 10.1.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_main
On OSPF_peer_2:
0 Do 192.168.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.2 110 to_main
1 Io 10.3.0.0/24 110
2 DC 10.3.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_peer_1
3 Io 10.2.0.0/24 110
4 DC 10.2.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 to_main
5 Do 10.1.0.0/24 r 10.2.0.2 110 to_main
The change of the routing takes approximately 40 seconds (the hello-interval setting). If required,
this setting can be adjusted, but it should be done on all routers within the OSPF area!
Page 121 of 695


RIP
Document revision 1 (Wed Mar 24 12:32:12 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
General Setup
Notes
Example
Interfaces
Description
Notes
Example
Networks
Description
Notes
Example
Neighbors
Description
Example
Routes
Notes
Example
Example
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS implements RIP Version 1 (RFC1058) and Version 2 (RFC 2453). RIP enables
routers in an autonomous system to exchange routing information. It always uses the best path (the
path with the fewest number of hops (i.e. routers)) available.
Specifications
Page 122 of 695


Home menu level: /routing rip
Standards and Technologies: RIPv1 , RIPv2
Related Documents
Description
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is one protocol in a series of routing protocols based on
Bellman-Ford (or distance vector) algorithm. This Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) lets routers
exchange routing information across a single autonomous system in the way of periodic RIP
updates. Routers transmit their own RIP updates to neighboring networks and listen to the RIP
updates from the routers on those neighboring networks to ensure their routing table reflects the
current state of the network and all the best paths are available. Best path considered to be a path
with the fewest hop count (id est that include fewer routers).
The routes learned by RIP protocol are installed in the route list (/ip route print) with the distance
of 120.
• RIPv1 Protocol
• RIPv2 Protocol
• Cisco Systems RIP protocol overview
General Setup
redistribute-static ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether to redistribute static routes to
neighbour routers or not
redistribute-connected ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether to redistribute connected routes
to neighbour routers or not
redistribute-ospf ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether to redistribute routes learned via
OSPF protocol to neighbour routers or not
redistribute-bgp ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether to redistribute routes learned via bgp
protocol to neighbour routers or not
metric-static ( integer ; default: 1 ) - specifies metric (the number of hops) for the static routes
metric-connected ( integer ; default: 1 ) - specifies metric (the number of hops) for the connected
Page 123 of 695


routes
metric-ospf ( integer ; default: 1 ) - specifies metric (the number of hops) for the routes learned via
OSPF protocol
metric-bgp ( integer ; default: 1 ) - specifies metric (the number of hops) for the routes learned via
BGP protocol
update-timer ( time ; default: 30s ) - specifies frequency of RIP updates
timeout-timer ( time ; default: 3m ) - specifies time interval after which the route is considered
invalid
garbage-timer ( time ; default: 2m ) - specifies time interval after which the invalid route will be
dropped from neighbor router table
Notes
The maximum metric of RIP route is 15. Metric higher than 15 is considered 'infinity' and routes
with such metric are considered unreachable. Thus RIP cannot be used on networks with more than
15 hops between any two routers, and using redistribute metrics larger that 1 further reduces this
maximum hop count.
Example
To enable RIP protocol to redistribute the routes to the connected networks:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> set redistribute-connected=yes
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> print
redistribute-connected: yes
redistribute-ospf: no
metric-static: 1
metric-connected: 1
metric-ospf: 1
metric-bgp: 1
update-timer: 30s
timeout-timer: 3m
garbage-timer: 2m
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip>
Interfaces
Home menu level: /routing rip interface
Description
In general you do not have to configure interfaces in order to run RIP. This command level is
provided only for additional configuration of specific RIP interface parameters.
interface ( name ; default: all ) - interface on which RIP runs
• all - sets defaults for interfaces not having any specific settings
send ( v1 | v1-2 | v2 ; default: v2 ) - specifies RIP protocol update versions to distribute
Page 124 of 695


receive ( v1 | v1-2 | v2 ; default: v2 ) - specifies RIP protocol update versions the router will be able
to receive
authentication ( none | simple | md5 ; default: none ) - specifies authentication method to use for
RIP messages
• none - no authentication performed
• md5 - Keyed Message Digest 5 authentication
authentication-key ( text ; default: "" ) - specifies authentication key for RIP messages
prefix-list-in ( name ; default: "" ) - name of the filtering prefix list for received routes
prefix-list-out ( name ; default: "" ) - name of the filtering prefix list for advertised routes
Notes
It is recommended not to use RIP version 1 wherever it is possible due to security issues
Example
To add an entry that specifies that when advertising routes through the ether1 interface, prefix list
plout should be applied:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> interface add interface=ether1 \
\... prefix-list-out=plout
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> interface print
Flags: I - inactive
0 interface=ether1 receive=v2 send=v2 authentication=none
authentication-key="" prefix-list-in=plout prefix-list-out=none
Networks
Home menu level: /routing rip network
Description
To start the RIP protocol, you have to define the networks on which RIP will run.
address ( IP address/mask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - specifies the network on which RIP will run. Only
directly connected networks of the router may be specified
netmask ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - specifies the network part of the address (if it is not
specified in the address argument)
Notes
For point-to-point links you should specify the remote endpoint IP address as the network IP
address. For this case the correct netmask will be /32.
Page 125 of 695


Example
To enable RIP protocol on 10.10.1.0/24 network:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip network> add address=10.10.1.0/24
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip network> print
# ADDRESS
0 10.10.1.0/24
Neighbors
Description
This submenu is used to define a neighboring routers to exchange routing information with.
Normally there is no need to add the neighbors, if multicasting is working properly within the
network. If there are problems with exchanging routing information, neighbor routers can be added
to the list. It will force the router to exchange the routing information with the neighbor using
regular unicast packets.
address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address of neighboring router
Example
To force RIP protocol to exchange routing information with the 10.0.0.1 router:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> neighbor add address=10.0.0.1
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> neighbor print
Flags: I - inactive
# ADDRESS
0 10.0.0.1
Routes
Home menu level: /routing rip route
dst-address ( read-only: IP address/mask ) - network address and netmask of destination
gateway ( read-only: IP address ) - last gateway on the route to destination
metric ( read-only: integer ) - distance vector length to the destination network
from ( IP address ) - specifies the IP address of the router from which the route was received
Notes
This list shows routes learned by all dynamic routing protocols (RIP, OSPF and BGP)
Page 126 of 695


Example
To view the list of the routes:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip route> print
Flags: S - static, R - rip, O - ospf, C - connect, B - bgp
0 O dst-address=0.0.0.0/32 gateway=10.7.1.254 metric=1 from=0.0.0.0
...
33 R dst-address=159.148.10.104/29 gateway=10.6.1.1 metric=2 from=10.6.1.1
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip route>
General Information
Example
Let us consider an example of routing information exchange between MikroTik router, a Cisco
router and the ISP (also MikroTik) routers:
• MikroTik Router Configuration
# NAME TYPE MTU
[admin@MikroTik] > ip address print
0 10.0.0.174/24 10.0.0.174 10.0.0.255 ether1
1 192.168.0.1/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 ether2
[admin@MikroTik] > ip route print
0 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 ether2
1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 ether1
[admin@MikroTik] >
Note, that no default route has been configured. The route will be obtained using the RIP. The
necessary configuration of the RIP general settings is as follows:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> set redistribute-connected=yes
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> print
redistribute-connected: yes
redistribute-ospf: no
metric-static: 1
metric-connected: 1
metric-ospf: 1
metric-bgp: 1
update-timer: 30s
timeout-timer: 3m
garbage-timer: 2m
The minimum required configuration of RIP interface is just enabling the network associated
with the ether1 interface:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip network> add address=10.0.0.0/2
Page 127 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] routing rip network> print
# ADDRESS
0 10.0.0.0/24
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip network>
Note, that there is no need to run RIP on the ether2, as no propagation of RIP information is
required into the Remote network in this example. The routes obtained by RIP can be viewed
in the /routing rip route menu:
[admin@MikroTik] routing rip> route print
Flags: S - static, R - rip, O - ospf, C - connect, B - bgp
1 C dst-address=10.0.0.0/24 gateway=0.0.0.0 metric=1 from=0.0.0.0
2 C dst-address=192.168.0.0/24 gateway=0.0.0.0 metric=1 from=0.0.0.0
The regular routing table is:
[MikroTik] routing rip> /ip route print
0 R 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.0.0.26 120 ether1
1 R 192.168.3.0/24 r 10.0.0.26 120 ether1
2 R 192.168.1.0/24 r 10.0.0.26 120 ether1
3 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 ether2
4 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 ether1
• Cisco Router Configuration

Cisco#show running-config
...
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.0.0.26 255.255.255.0
no ip directed-broadcast
!
interface Serial1
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.252
ip directed-broadcast
!
router rip
version 2
redistribute connected
redistribute static
network 10.0.0.0
network 192.168.1.0
!
ip classless
!
...
The routing table of the Cisco router is:
Cisco#show ip route
Codes: C - connected, S - static, I - IGRP, R - RIP, M - mobile, B - BGP
D - EIGRP, EX - EIGRP external, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, E - EGP
i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, * - candidate default
U - per-user static route, o - ODR
Gateway of last resort is 192.168.1.2 to network 0.0.0.0
10.0.0.0/24 is subnetted, 1 subnets
Page 128 of 695


C 10.0.0.0 is directly connected, Ethernet0
R 192.168.0.0/24 [120/1] via 10.0.0.174, 00:00:19, Ethernet0
192.168.1.0/30 is subnetted, 1 subnets
C 192.168.1.0 is directly connected, Serial1
R 192.168.3.0/24 [120/1] via 192.168.1.2, 00:00:05, Serial1
R* 0.0.0.0/0 [120/1] via 192.168.1.2, 00:00:05, Serial1
Cisco#
As we can see, the Cisco router has learned RIP routes both from the MikroTik router
(192.168.0.0/24), and from the ISP router (0.0.0.0/0 and 192.168.3.0/24).
Page 129 of 695


Routes, Equal Cost Multipath Routing, Policy
Routing
Document revision 2.3 (July 20, 2007, 13:21 GMT)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Routes
Description
Notes
Example
Policy Rules
Notes
Example
Static Equal Cost Multi-Path routing
Standard Policy-Based Routing with Failover
General Information
Summary
The following manual surveys the IP routes management, equal-cost multi-path (ECMP) routing
technique, and policy-based routing.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip route
Standards and Technologies: IP (RFC 791)
Related Documents
••
IP Addresses and ARP
• Filter
• NAT
Page 130 of 695


Description
MikroTik RouterOS has following types of routes:
• dynamic routes - automatically created routes for networks, which are directly accessed
through an interface. They appear automatically, when adding a new IP address. Dynamic
routes are also added by routing protocols.
• static routes - user-defined routes that specify the router which can forward traffic to the
specified destination network. They are useful for specifying the default gateway
ECMP (Equal Cost Multi-Path) Routing

This routing mechanism enables packet routing along multiple paths with equal cost and ensures
load balancing. With ECMP routing, you can use more than one gateway for one destination
network (Note! This approach does not provide failover). With ECMP, a router potentially has
several available next hops towards a given destination. A new gateway is chosen for each new
source/destination IP pair. It means that, for example, one FTP connection will use only one link,
but new connection to a different server will use another link. ECMP routing has another good
feature - single connection packets do not get reordered and therefore do not kill TCP performance.
The ECMP routes can be created by routing protocols (RIP or OSPF), or by adding a static route
with multiple gateways, separated by a comma (e.g., /ip route add
gateway=192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1). The routing protocols may create multipath dynamic routes
with equal cost automatically, if the cost of the interfaces is adjusted properly. For more
information on using routing protocols, please read the corresponding Manual.
Policy-Based Routing
It is a routing approach where the next hop (gateway) for a packet is chosen, based on a policy,
which is configured by the network administrator. In RouterOS the procedure the follwing:
• mark the desired packets, with a routing-mark
• choose a gateway for the marked packets
Note! In routing process, the router decides which route it will use to send out the packet.
Afterwards, when the packet is masqueraded, its source address is taken from the prefsrc field.
Routes
Home menu level: /ip route
Description
In this submenu you can configure Static, Equal Cost Multi-Path and Policy-Based Routing and see
the routes.
as-path ( text ) - manual value of BGP's as-path for outgoing route
Page 131 of 695


atomic-aggregate ( yes | no ) - BGP attribute. An indication to receiver that it cannot "deaggregate"
the prefix
check-gateway ( arp | ping ; default: ping ) - which protocol to use for gateway reachability
distance ( integer : 0 ..255 ) - administrative distance of the route. When forwarding a packet, the
router will use the route with the lowest administrative distance and reachable gateway
dst-address ( IP address | netmask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - destination address and network mask,
where netmask is number of bits which indicate network number. Used in static routing to specify
the destination which can be reached, using a gateway
• 0.0.0.0/0 - any network
gateway ( IP address ) - gateway host, that can be reached directly through some of the interfaces.
You can specify multiple gateways separated by a comma "," for ECMP routes
local-pref ( integer ) - local preference value for a route
med ( integer ) - a BGP attribute, which provides a mechanism for BGP speakers to convey to an
adjacent AS the optimal entry point into the local AS
origin ( incomplete | igp | egp ) - the origin of the route prefix
prefsrc ( IP address ) - source IP address of packets, leaving router via this route
• 0.0.0.0 - prefsrc is determined automatically
prepend ( integer : 0 ..16 ) - number which indicates how many times to prepend AS_NAME to
AS_PATH
routing-mark ( name ) - a mark for packets, defined under /ip firewall mangle. Only those packets
which have the according routing-mark, will be routed, using this gateway. With this parameter we
provide policy based routing
scope ( integer : 0 ..255 ) - a value which is used to recursively lookup the nexthop addresses.
Nexthop is looked up only through routes that have scope <= target-scope of the nexthop
target-scope ( integer : 0 ..255 ) - a value which is used to recursively lookup the next-hop
addresses. Each nexthop address selects smallest value of target-scope from all routes that use this
nexthop address. Nexthop is looked up only through routes that have scope <= target-scope of the
nexthop
Notes
You can specify more than one or two gateways in the route. Moreover, you can repeat some routes
in the list several times to do a kind of cost setting for gateways.
Example
To add two static routes to networks 10.1.12.0/24 and 0.0.0.0/0 (the default destination address) on
a router with two interfaces and two IP addresses:
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add dst-address=10.1.12.0/24 gateway=192.168.0.253
Flags: X - disabled, A - active, D - dynamic,
C - connect, S - static, r - rip, b - bgp, o - ospf
0 A S 10.1.12.0/24 r 192.168.0.253 Local
1 ADC 10.5.8.0/24 Public
2 ADC 192.168.0.0/24 Local
Page 132 of 695


3 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.5.8.1 Public
Policy Rules
Home menu level: /ip route rule
action ( drop | unreachable | lookup ; default: unreachable ) - action to be processed on packets
matched by this rule:
• drop - silently drop packet
• unreachable - reply that destination host is unreachable
• lookup - lookup route in given routing table
dst-address ( IP address/mask ) - destination IP address/mask
interface ( name ; default: "" ) - interface through which the gateway can be reached
routing-mark ( name ; default: "" ) - mark of the packet to be mached by this rule. To add a
routing mark, use '/ip firewall mangle' commands
src-address ( IP address/mask ) - source IP address/mask
table ( name ; default: "" ) - routing table, created by user
Notes
You can use policy routing even if you use masquerading on your private networks. The source
address will be the same as it is in the local network. In previous versions of RouterOS the source
address changed to 0.0.0.0
It is impossible to recognize peer-to-peer traffic from the first packet. Only already established
connections can be matched. That also means that in case source NAT is treating Peer-to-Peer
traffic differently from the regular traffic, Peer-to-Peer programs will not work (general application
is policy-routing redirecting regular traffic through one interface and Peer-to-Peer traffic - through
another). A known workaround for this problem is to solve it from the other side: making not
Peer-to-Peer traffic to go through another gateway, but all other useful traffic go through another
gateway. In other words, to specify what protocols (HTTP, DNS, POP3, etc.) will go through the
gateway A, leaving all the rest (so Peer-to-Peer traffic also) to use the gateway B (it is not
important, which gateway is which; it is only important to keep Peer-to-Peer together with all traffic
except the specified protocols)
Example
To add the rule specifying that all the packets from the 10.0.0.144 host should lookup the mt
routing table:
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle add action=mark-routing new-routing-mark=mt \
\... chain=prerouting
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add gateway=10.0.0.254 routing-mark=mt
[admin@MikroTik] ip route rule> add src-address=10.0.0.144/32 \
\... table=mt action=lookup
[admin@MikroTik] ip route rule> print
Page 133 of 695


0 src-address=192.168.0.144/32 action=lookup table=mt
[admin@MikroTik] ip route rule>
General Information
Static Equal Cost Multi-Path routing

Consider the following situation where we have to route packets from the network 192.168.0.0/24
to 2 gateways - 10.1.0.1 and 10.1.1.1:
Note that the ISP1 gives us 2Mbps and ISP2 - 4Mbps so we want a traffic ratio 1:2 (1/3 of the
source/destination IP pairs from 192.168.0.0/24 goes through ISP1, and 2/3 through ISP2).
IP addresses of the router:
[admin@ECMP-Router] ip address> print
0 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 Local
1 10.1.0.2/28 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.15 Public1
2 10.1.1.2/28 10.1.1.0 10.1.1.15 Public2
[admin@ECMP-Router] ip address>
Add the default routes - one for ISP1 and 2 for ISP2 so we can get the ratio 1:3:
[admin@ECMP-Router] ip route> add gateway=10.1.0.1,10.1.1.1,10.1.1.1
[admin@ECMP-Router] ip route> print
Page 134 of 695


0 ADC 10.1.0.0/28 Public1
1 ADC 10.1.1.0/28 Public2
2 ADC 192.168.0.0/24 Local
3 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.1.0.1 Public1
r 10.1.1.1 Public2
r 10.1.1.1 Public2
[admin@ECMP-Router] ip route>
Standard Policy-Based Routing with Failover

This example will show how to route packets, using an administrator defined policy. The policy for
this setup is the following: route packets from the network 192.168.0.0/24, using gateway 10.0.0.1,
and packets from network 192.168.1.0/24, using gateway 10.0.0.2. If GW_1 does not respond to
pings, use GW_Backup for network 192.168.0.0/24, if GW_2 does not respond to pings, use
GW_Backup also for network 192.168.1.0/24 instead of GW_2.
The setup:
Page 135 of 695


Configuration of the IP addresses:
[admin@PB-Router] ip address> print
0 192.168.0.1/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 Local1
1 192.168.1.1/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 Local2
2 10.0.0.7/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 Public
[admin@PB-Router] ip address>
To achieve the described result, follow these configuration steps:

1. Mark packets from network 192.168.0.0/24 with a new-routing-mark=net1, and packets from
network 192.168.1.0/24 with a new-routing-mark=net2:
[admin@PB-Router] ip firewall mangle> add src-address=192.168.0.0/24 \
\... action=mark-routing new-routing-mark=net1 chain=prerouting
[admin@PB-Router] ip firewall mangle> add src-address=192.168.1.0/24 \
\... action=mark-routing new-routing-mark=net2 chain=prerouting
[admin@PB-Router] ip firewall mangle> print
Page 136 of 695


0 chain=prerouting src-address=192.168.0.0/24 action=mark-routing
new-routing-mark=net1
1chain=prerouting src-address=192.168.1.0/24 action=mark-routing
new-routing-mark=net2
[admin@PB-Router] ip firewall mangle>
2. Route packets from network 192.168.0.0/24 to gateway GW_1 (10.0.0.2), packets from
network 192.168.1.0/24 to gateway GW_2 (10.0.0.3), using the according packet marks. If
GW_1 or GW_2 fails (does not reply to pings), route the respective packets to GW_Main
(10.0.0.1):
[admin@PB-Router] ip route> add gateway=10.0.0.2 routing-mark=net1 \
\... check-gateway=ping
[admin@PB-Router] ip route> add gateway=10.0.0.3 routing-mark=net2 \
\... check-gateway=ping
[admin@PB-Router] ip route> add gateway=10.0.0.1
[admin@PB-Router] ip route> print
# DST-ADDRESS PREFSRC G GATEWAY DISTANCE INTERFACE
0 ADC 10.0.0.0/24 10.0.0.7 Public
1 ADC 192.168.0.0/24 192.168.0.1 Local1
2 ADC 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.1 Local2
3 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.0.0.2 Public
4 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.0.0.3 Public
5 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.0.0.1 Public
[admin@PB-Router] ip route>
Page 137 of 695


BGP Command Reference
Document revision 1.5 (Thu Sep 22 12:50:17 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Instances
Description
Peers
Description
General Information
Summary
The Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) allows setting up an interdomain dynamic routing system that
automatically updates routing tables of devices running BGP in case of network topology changes.
MikroTik RouterOS supports BGP Version 4, as defined in RFC1771.
Starting from version v2.9 MikroTik RouterOS has a brand new BGP implementation, which
provides advanced functionality not available in the previous versions.
Quick Setup Guide

To configure a BGP instance with AS number of 200 and establish a BGP session to the 10.0.11.11
peer from the AS 100, redistributing connected and static routes only, you should do the following:
• Configure default BGP instance:
[admin@rb12] > /routing bgp instance set default as=200 redistribute-static=yes
redistribute-connected=yes [admin@rb12] > /routing bgp instance print Flags: X -
disabled 0 as=200 router-id=0.0.0.0 redistribute-static=yes
redistribute-connected=yes redistribute-rip=no redistribute-ospf=no
redistribute-other-bgp=no name="default" out-filter="" [admin@rb12] >
• Add BGP peer:

[admin@rb12] > /routing bgp peer add remote-address=10.0.11.11 remote-as=100
instance=default [admin@rb12] > /routing bgp peer print Flags: X - disabled 0
Page 138 of 695


remote-address=10.0.11.11 remote-as=100 multihop=no in-filter="" out-filter=""
keepalive-time=0s hold-time=0s ttl=1 [admin@rb12] >
Note, that the peer should be configured accordingly in order BGP to work.
Attention! In this scenario the router has no input or output filters configured. This means that it can
redistribute lots of unnecessary or harmful information to its peers. Always consider configuring
proper routing filters before you configure BGP peering.
Specifications
Packages required: routing-test
Home menu level: /routing bgp
Standards and Technologies: RFC1771
Hardware usage: requires additional RAM for storing routing information (128MB recommended)
Related Documents

• BGP Routing Filters
Description
The Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is the core routing protocol of the Internet. It maintains a table
of routes 'prefixes', which specify network layer reachability information (NLRI) between
autonomous systems (AS). BGP is described as path vector protocol or policy routing protocol,
referring to the way it chooses the best route towards destination. Unlike many other routing
protocols, BGP does not use technical metrics to select the best path but rather administrative
policies. The current version of BGP, Border Gateway Protocol 4, is specified in RFC 1771.
The routes learned by BGP protocol are installed in the route list with the distance of 200 for iBGP
(Internal BGP) routes and of 20 for eBGP (External BGP) routes.
• http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1771.txt
• http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/ics/icsbgp4.htm
• http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/idg4/nd2003.htm
Instances
Description
Page 139 of 695


Home menu level: /routing bgp instance
as ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - BGP autonomous system number
name ( name ; default: "" ) - BGP instance name
out-filter ( name ; default: "" ) - output routing filter used by this BGP instance
redistribute-connected ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if enabled, the router will redistribute the
information about all connected routes, i.e., routes to the networks that can be directly reached
redistribute-ospf ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if enabled, the router will redistribute the information
about all routes learned by the OSPF protocol
redistribute-other-bgp ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether this BGP instance should
redistribute to its peers routes learned by other BGP instances
redistribute-rip ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if enabled, the router will redistribute the information
about all routes learned by RIP protocol
redistribute-static ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if enabled, the router will redistribute the information
about all static routes added to its routing database, i.e., routes that have been created using the /ip
route add command on the router
router-id ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the router identification string in form of an IP address.
If no router-id is specified, it will be selected automatically based on the routing information
Peers
Home menu level: /routing bgp peer
Description
You need to specify the BGP peer with whom you want to exchange the routing information. The
BGP exchanges routing information only if it can establish a TCP connection to its peer. You can
add as many peers as required.
hold-time ( time ) - specifies the BGP Hold Time value to use when negotiating with peers.
According to BGP specifications, if router does not receive successive KEEPALIVE and/or
UPDATE and/or NOTIFICATION messages within the period specified in the Hold Time field of
the OPEN message, then the BGP connection to the peer will be closed
in-filter ( name ; default: "" ) - name of the routing filter that is applied to incoming routing update
messages
keepalive-time ( time ) - specifies the time interval between successive KEEPALIVE messages.
BGP process will negotiate the keepalive time with the neighbour upon connection establishment
multihop ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if enabled, allows BGP sessions, even when the neighbour is
not on a directly connected segment. The multihop session is not established if the only route to the
multi-hop peer's address is the default route (0.0.0.0/0)
out-filter ( name ; default: "" ) - name of the routing filter that is applied to outgoing routing
update messages
Page 140 of 695


remote-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - address of the remote peer
remote-as ( integer ; default: 0 ) - AS number of the remote peer
Page 141 of 695


BGP Routing Filters
Document revision 1.4 (Fri Sep 23 08:43:17 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Filter Rules
General Information
Summary
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Routing filters allow to alter attributes of the route for the NLRI
prefixes or completely exclude particular NLRI prefixes with routes from the BGP routing update
message.
Specifications
Home menu level: /routing filter
Standards and Technologies: RFC1771
Related Documents

• BGP Command Reference
Description
BGP filtering refers to the ability of BGP peer to apply administrative policies to incoming and
outgoing routing update messages. These policies are implemented as rules organized in chains.
The following manual uses terms 'chain' and 'filter' interchengeably. Each rule consists of two parts,
one of them specifies to which prefixes the rule applies to and the other tells the router what to do
Page 142 of 695


with these prefixes. A rule with no arguments applies to all prefixes and implies accept action.
The routing filters may be applied to incoming and outgoing routing update messages for a specific
BGP peer and to outgoing BGP update messages for a particular BGP instance. Note, that in case
both BGP instance and BGP peer outgoing filters are applied, BGP instance filters take precedence.
• http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/ics/icsbgp4.htm
• http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/idg4/nd2003.htm
Filter Rules
action ( accept | discard | jump | none | reject | return ; default: none ) - action to perform on route
or route attributes for the NLRI prefixes that match the rule
• accept - accept the routing information for the matching NLRI prefix
• discard - completely exclude matching prefix from the BGP processing. The route will be
deleted from the incoming BGP routing update message, thus reducing memory usage on the
router. For outgoing BGP update messages the discard action is equal to reject
• jump - pass control to another filter list that should be specified as jump-target parameter
• none - do not perform any action and pass execution to the next rule in chain. The none action
is not displayed by print command
• reject - reject the routing information for matching prefix. The prefix from incoming BGP
routing update message is be shown with R (rejected) flag in the /ip route print command
output. The prefix is suppressed from outgoing routing update message
• return - return to the previous chain from which a jump to the current chain took place
as-path ( text ) - unanchored pattern to be searched inside AS_PATH attribute of the route.
Optional ^ sign preceiding parameter value restricts match to the beginning of AS_PATH attribute,
while $ sign, which follows as-path value, restricts the match to the end of AS_PATH
as-path-length ( integer | integer ) - length of the AS_PATH attribute, representing the number of
ASs that have been traversed. Note that multiple AS_SETs are combined together and counted as 1
AS
atomic-aggregate ( absent | present ) - match for the ATOMIC_AGGREGATE BGP attribute
chain ( text ) - chain name to place this rule in. If a chain with the specified name does not exist it
will be automatically created
distance ( integer | integer ; default: no ) - protocol-independent administrative distance used to
compare routes obtained from different sources
jump-target ( name ) - name of the target chain to jump to, if the action=jump is used
local-pref ( integer | integer ) - match for the LOCAL_PREF BGP attribute
match-chain ( name ) - the name of the chain which is used to evaluate the route. If the chain
Page 143 of 695


accepts the route, match-chain property produces a true match
med ( integer | integer ) - match for the MULTI_EXIT_DISC BGP attribute
origin ( igp | egp | incomplete ) - match for the ORIGIN BGP attribute
prefix ( IP address | netmask | IP address | IP address ) - match for the NLRI prefix
prefix-length ( integer | integer ) - match for the NLRI prefix length
prefsrc ( IP address | netmask | IP address | IP address ) - match for the preferred source IP
address of the route
route-comment ( text ) - match for the route comment
routing-mark ( text ) - match for the routing mark. A routing mark identifies certain routes for
successive processing
scope ( integer : 0 ..255 | integer : 0 ..255 ) - scope and target-scope are used to recursively lookup
next hop address for the route. Routes that are used to lookup the next hop address for a given route
should have scope value equal or less then the target-scope value of this route
set-check-gateway ( ping | arp ) - specifies that the router should check whether the gateway for
the particular route is reachable by using either ping or arp request prior to sending anything using
this route
set-disabled - disables the route. Disabled routes are not considered by BGP best path selection
algorithm
set-distance ( integer : 0 ..255 ) - sets administrative distance for a route. The distance is
protocol-independent and is used to compare routes obtained from different sources
set-localpref ( integer : 0 ..4294967295 ) - specifies LOCAL_PREF BGP attribute value for the
route
set-med ( integer : 0 ..4294967295 ) - sets MULTI_EXIT_DISC BGP attribute
set-nexthop ( IP address ) - sets next hop IP address for the route
set-prefsrc ( IP address ) - sets preffered source address for the route
set-prepend ( integer : 0 ..16 ) - specifies how many times the router should prepend its AS
number to the AS_PATH BGP attribute value for this route
set-route-comment ( text ) - specifies comment for the route
set-routing-mark ( text ) - sets routing mark for the route
set-scope ( integer : 0 ..255 ) - sets scope for the route. Scope and target-scope are used to
recursively lookup next hop address for the route. Routes that are used to lookup the next hop
address for a given route should have scope value equal or less then the target-scope value of this
route
set-target-scope ( integer : 0 ..255 ) - sets target scope for the route. Scope and target-scope are
used to recursively lookup next hop address for the route. Routes that are used to lookup the next
hop address for a given route should have scope value equal or less then the target-scope value of
this route
set-weight ( integer : -2147483648 ..2147483647 ) - specifies weight for the route. Route weight is
used by BGP best path selection algoritm to select the best route towards destination
target-scope ( integer : 0 ..255 | integer : 0 ..255 ) - scope and target-scope are used to recursively
lookup next hop address for the route. Routes that are used to lookup the next hop address for a
given route should have scope value equal or less then the target-scope value of this route
Page 144 of 695


type ( absent | present ) - match for the ATOMIC_AGGREGATE BGP attribute
unset ( multiple choice: prefsrc | routing-mark | check-gateway | disabled ) - unsets specified
parameters of the route
weight ( integer : -2147483648 ..2147483647 ) - match for the weight of the route
Page 145 of 695


ARLAN 655 Wireless Client Card
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Installation
Example
Wireless Interface Configuration
Description
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports Arlan 655 Wireless Interface client cards. This card fits in the
ISA expansion slot and provides transparent wireless communications to other network nodes.
Specifications
Packages required: arlan
Home menu level: /interface arlan
Related Documents
• Log Management
Installation
Example
Page 146 of 695


To add the driver for Arlan 655 adapter, do the following:
[admin@MikroTik]> driver add name=arlan io=0xD000
[admin@MikroTik]> driver print
0 D RealTek 8139
1 Arlan 655 0xD000

Home menu level: /interface arlan
Description
The wireless card status can be obtained from the two LEDs: the Status LED and the Activity
LED.
Status Activity Description

ARLAN 655 is functional but
Amber Amber nonvolatile memory is not
configured
ARLAN 655 not registered to
Blinking Green Don't Care
an AP (ARLAN mode only)
Green Off Normal idle state
Green Green Flash Normal active state
Red Amber Hardware failure
Red Red Radio failure
name ( name ; default: arlanN ) - assigned interface name
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit
mac-address ( MAC address ) - Media Access Control address
frequency ( 2412 | 2427 | 2442 | 2457 | 2465 ; default: 2412 ) - channel frequency in MHz
bitrate ( 1000 | 2000 | 354 | 500 ; default: 2000 ) - data rate in Kbit/s
sid ( integer ; default: 0x13816788 ) - System Identifier. Should be the same for all nodes on the
radio network. Must be an even number with maximum length 31 character
add-name ( text ; default: test ) - card name (optional). Must contain less than 16 characters.
arp ( disabled | enabled | proxy-arp | reply-only ; default: enabled ) - Address Resolution Protocol
setting
tma-mode ( yes | no ; default: no ) - Networking Registration Mode:
• yes - ARLAN
• no - NON ARLAN
Page 147 of 695


Example
# NAME TYPE MTU
0 R outer ether 1500
1 X arlan1 arlan 1500
# NAME TYPE MTU
1 R arlan1 arlan 1500
More configuration and statistics parameters can be found under the /interface arlan menu:
[admin@MikroTik] interface arlan> print
0 R name="arlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:40:96:22:90:C8 arp=enabled
frequency=2412 bitrate=2000 tma-mode=no card-name="test"
sid=0x13816788
[admin@MikroTik] interface arlan>
You can monitor the status of the wireless interface:

[admin@MikroTik] interface arlan> monitor 0
registered: no
access-point: 00:00:00:00:00:00
backbone: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Suppose we want to configure the wireless interface to accomplish registration on the AP with a sid
0x03816788. To do this, it is enough to change the argument value of sid to 0x03816788 and
tma-mode to yes:
[admin@MikroTik] interface arlan> set 0 sid=0x03816788 tma-mode=yes
[admin@MikroTik] interface arlan> monitor 0
registered: yes
access-point: 00:40:88:23:91:F8
backbone: 00:40:88:23:91:F9
Troubleshooting
Description
Keep in mind, that not all combinations of I/O base addresses and IRQs may work on particular
motherboard. It is recommended that you choose an IRQ not used in your system, and then try to
find an acceptable I/O base address setting. As it has been observed, the IRQ 5 and I/O 0x300 or
0x180 will work in most cases.
• The driver cannot be loaded because other device uses the requested IRQ.
Try to set different IRQ using the DIP switches.
• The requested I/O base address cannot be used on your motherboard.
Try to change the I/O base address using the DIP switches.
• The pc interface does not show up under the interfaces list
Page 148 of 695


Obtain the required license for 2.4/5GHz Wireless Client feature.
• The wireless card does not register to the Access Point
Check the cabling and antenna alignment.
Page 149 of 695


Interface Bonding
Document revision 1.1 (oct-26-2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Notes
Bonding two Eoip tunnels
General Information
Summary
Bonding is a technology that allows to aggregate multiple ethernet-like interfaces into a single
virtual link, thus getting higher data rates and providing failover.
Quick Setup Guide

Let us assume that we have 2 NICs in each router (Router1 and Router2) and want to get
maximum data rate between 2 routers. To make this possible, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that you do not have IP addresses on interfaces which will be enslaved for bonding
interface!
2. Add bonding interface on Router1:
[admin@Router1] interface bonding> add slaves=ether1,ether2
And on Router2:
[admin@Router2] interface bonding> add slaves=ether1,ether2
3. Add addresses to bonding interfaces:

[admin@Router1] ip address> add address=172.16.0.1/24 interface=bonding1
[admin@Router2] ip address> add address=172.16.0.2/24 interface=bonding1
4. Test the link from Router1:

[admin@Router1] interface bonding> /pi 172.16.0.2
Note that bonding interface needs a couple of seconds to get connectivity with its peer.
Page 150 of 695


Specifications
Home menu level: /interface bonding
Related Documents
• Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver mini-howto
Description
To provide a proper failover, you should specify link-monitoring parameter. It can be:
• MII (Media Independent Interface) type1 or type2 - Media Independent Interface is an abstract
layer between the operating system and the NIC which detects whether the link is running (it
performs also other functions, but in our case this is the most important).
• ARP - Address Resolution Protocol periodically (for arp-interval time) checks the link status.
link-monitoring is used to check whether the link is up or not.
for the interface
• disabled - the interface will not use ARP
• enabled - the interface will use ARP
• proxy-arp - the interface will use the ARP proxy feature
• reply-only - the interface will only reply to the requests originated to its own IP addresses.
Neighbour MAC addresses will be resolved using /ip arp statically set table only
arp-interval ( time ; default: 00:00:00.100 ) - time in milliseconds which defines how often to
monitor ARP requests
arp-ip-targets ( IP address ; default: "" ) - IP target address which will be monitored if
link-monitoring is set to arp. You can specify multiple IP addresses, separated by comma
down-delay ( time ; default: 00:00:00 ) - if a link failure has been detected, bonding interface is
disabled for down-delay time. Value should be a multiple of mii-interval
lacp-rate ( 1sec | 30secs ; default: 30secs ) - Link Aggregation Control Protocol rate specifies how
often to exchange with LACPDUs between bonding peer. Used to determine whether link is up or
other changes have occured in the network. LACP tries to adapt to these changes providing failover.
link-monitoring ( arp | mii-type1 | mii-type2 | none ; default: none ) - method to use for monitoring
the link (whether it is up or down)
• arp - uses Address Resolution Protocol to determine whether the remote interface is reachable
• mii-type1 - uses Media Independent Interface type1 to determine link status. Link status
Page 151 of 695


determenation relies on the device driver. If bonding shows that the link status is up, when it
should not be, then it means that this card don't support this possibility.
• mii-type2 - uses MII type2 to determine link status (used if mii-type1 is not supported by the
NIC)
• none - no method for link monitoring is used. If a link fails, it is not considered as down (but no
traffic passes through it, thus).
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the bonding interface
mii-interval ( time ; default: 00:00:00.100 ) - how often to monitor the link for failures (parameter
used only if link-monitoring is mii-type1 or mii-type2)
mtu ( integer : 68 ..1500 ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmit Unit in bytes
mode ( 802.3ad | active-backup | balance-alb | balance-rr | balance-tlb | balance-xor | broadcast ;
default: balance-rr ) - interface bonding mode. Can be one of:
• 802.3ad - IEEE 802.3ad dynamic link aggregation. In this mode, the interfaces are aggregated
in a group where each slave shares the same speed. If you use a switch between 2 bonding
routers, be sure that this switch supports IEEE 802.3ad standard. Provides fault tolerance and
load balancing.
• active-backup - provides link backup. Only one slave can be active at a time. Another slave
becomes active only, if first one fails.
• balance-alb - adaptive load balancing. It includes balance-tlb and received traffic is also
balanced. Device driver should support for setting the mac address, then it is active. Otherwise
balance-alb doesn't work. No special switch is required.
• balance-rr - round-robin load balancing. Slaves in bonding interface will transmit and receive
data in sequential order. Provides load balancing and fault tolerance.
• balance-tlb - Outgoing traffic is distributed according to the current load on each slave.
Incoming traffic is received by the current slave. If receiving slave fails, then another slave
takes the MAC address of the failed slave. Doesn't require any special switch support.
• balance-xor - Use XOR policy for transmit. Provides only failover (in very good quality), but
not load balancing, yet.
• broadcast - Broadcasts the same data on all interfaces at once. This provides fault tolerance but
slows down traffic throughput on some slow machines.
name ( name ) - descriptive name of bonding interface
primary ( name ; default: none ) - Interface is used as primary output media. If primary interface
fails, only then others slaves will be used. This value works only with mode=active-backup
slaves ( name ) - at least two ethernet-like interfaces separated by a comma, which will be used for
bonding
up-delay ( time ; default: 00:00:00 ) - if a link has been brought up, bonding interface is disabled
for up-delay time and after this time it is enabled. Value should be a multiple of mii-interval
Notes
Link failure detection and failover is working significantly better with expensive network cards, for
example, made by Intel, then with more cheap ones. For example, on Intel cards failover is taking
place in less than a second after link loss, while on some other cards, it may require up to 20
seconds. Also, the Active load balancing (mode=balance-alb) does not work on some cheap cards.
Page 152 of 695


General Information
Bonding two Eoip tunnels

Assume you need to configure the MikroTik router for the following network setup, where you
have two offices with 2 ISP for each. You want combine links for getting double speed and provide
failover:
We are assuming that connections to Internet through two ISP are configured for both routers.
• Configuration on routers
• on Office1
[admin@office1] > /interface print

0 R isp1 ether 0 0 1500
1 R isp2 ether 0 0 1500
[admin@office1] > /ip address print
0 1.1.1.1/24 1.1.1.0 1.1.1.255 isp2
1 10.1.0.111/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 isp1
• on Office2
[admin@office2] interface> print

0 R isp2 ether 0 0 1500
1 R isp1 ether 0 0 1500
[admin@office2] interface> /ip add print
0 2.2.2.1/24 2.2.2.0 2.2.2.255 isp2
1 10.1.0.112/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 isp1
• Eoip tunnel confguration

• for Office1 through ISP1
Page 153 of 695


[admin@office1] > interface eoip add remote-address=10.1.0.112 tunnel-id=2
\... mac-address=FE:FD:00:00:00:04
[admin@office1] > interface eoip print
0 R name="eoip-tunnel2" mtu=1500 mac-address==FE:FD:00:00:00:04 arp=enabled
\... remote-address=10.1.0.112 tunnel-id=2
• for Office2 through ISP1

[admin@office2] > interface eoip print
0 R name="eoip-tunnel2" mtu=1500 mac-address=FE:FD:00:00:00:02 arp=enabled
\... remote-address=10.1.0.111 tunnel-id=2
• for Office1through ISP2

[admin@office1] interface eoip> print
remote-address=2.2.2.1 tunnel-id=1
• for Office2through ISP2

[admin@office2] interface eoip> print
• Bonding confguration
• for Office1
[admin@office1] interface bonding> add slaves=eoip-tunnel1,eoip-tunnel2

[admin@office1] interface bonding> print
0 R name="bonding1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:03:20:E7 arp=enabled
slaves=eoip-tunnel1,eoip-tunnel2 mode=balance-rr primary=none
link-monitoring=none arp-interval=00:00:00.100 arp-ip-targets=""
mii-interval=00:00:00.100 down-delay=00:00:00 up-delay=00:00:00
lacp-rate=30secs
[admin@office1] ip address> add address=3.3.3.1/24 interface=bonding1
[admin@office1] ip address> print
0 1.1.1.1/24 1.1.1.0 1.1.1.255 isp2
1 10.1.0.111/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 isp1
2 3.3.3.1/24 3.3.3.0 3.3.3.255 bonding1
Page 154 of 695


• for Office2
[admin@office2] interface bonding> add slaves=eoip-tunnel1,eoip-tunnel2

[admin@office2] interface bonding> print
0 R name="bonding1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:03:20:E7 arp=enabled
slaves=eoip-tunnel1,eoip-tunnel2 mode=balance-rr primary=none
link-monitoring=none arp-interval=00:00:00.100 arp-ip-targets=""
mii-interval=00:00:00.100 down-delay=00:00:00 up-delay=00:00:00
lacp-rate=30secs
[admin@office2] ip address> add address=3.3.3.2/24 interface=bonding1
[admin@office2] ip address> print
0 2.2.2.1/24 2.2.2.0 2.2.2.255 isp2
1 10.1.0.112/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 isp1
2 3.3.3.2/24 3.3.3.0 3.3.3.255 bonding1
[admin@office2] ip address> /ping 3.3.3.1
Page 155 of 695


Bridge
Document revision 2.3 (Fri Aug 18 11:56:45 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Bridge Interface Setup
Description
Example
Port Settings
Description
Notes
Example
Bridge Monitoring
Description
Example
Bridge Port Monitoring
Description
Example
Bridge Host Monitoring
Example
Bridge Firewall General Description
Description
Notes
Bridge Packet Filter
Description
Bridge NAT
Description
Bridge Brouting Facility
Description
Page 156 of 695


Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
MAC level bridging of Ethernet, Ethernet over IP (EoIP), Prism, Atheros and RadioLAN interfaces
are supported. All 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g client wireless interfaces (ad-hoc, infrastructure
or station mode) do not support this because of the limitations of 802.11. However, it is possible to
bridge over the Prism and Atheros based links using the WDS feature (for Atheros and Prism
chipset based cards) or Ethernet over IP protocol .
For preventing loops in a network, you can use the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). This protocol is
also used for configurations with backup links.
Main features:
• Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
• Multiple bridge interfaces
• Bridge associations on a per-interface basis
• MAC address table can be monitored in real time
• IP address assignment for router access
• Bridge interfaces can be filtered and NATed
• Support for brouting based on bridge packet filter
Quick Setup Guide

To put interface ether1 and ether2 in a bridge.
1. Add a bridge interface, called MyBridge:
/interface bridge add name="MyBridge" disabled=no
2. Add ether1 and ether2 to MyBridge interface:
/interface bridge port add interface=ether1 bridge=MyBridge

/interface bridge port add interface=ether2 bridge=MyBridge
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface bridge
Standards and Technologies: IEEE801.1D
Related Documents
Page 157 of 695


•
• Filter
Description
Ethernet-like networks (Ethernet, Ethernet over IP, IEEE802.11 in ap-bridge or bridge mode, WDS,
VLAN) can be connected together using MAC bridges. The bridge feature allows the
interconnection of hosts connected to separate LANs (using EoIP, geographically distributed
networks can be bridged as well if any kind of IP network interconnection exists between them) as
if they were attached to a single LAN. As bridges are transparent, they do not appear in traceroute
list, and no utility can make a distinction between a host working in one LAN and a host working in
another LAN if these LANs are bridged (depending on the way the LANs are interconnected,
latency and data rate between hosts may vary).
Network loops may emerge (intentionally or not) in complex topologies. Without any special
treatment, loops would prevent network from functioning normally, as they would lead to
avalanche-like packet multiplication. Each bridge runs an algorithm which calculates how the loop
can be prevented. STP allows bridges to communicate with each other, so they can negotiate a loop
free topology. All other alternative connections that would otherwise form loops, are put to standby,
so that should the main connection fail, another connection could take its place. This algorithm
exchange configuration messages (BPDU - Bridge Protocol Data Unit) periodically, so that all
bridges would be updated with the newest information about changes in network topology. STP
selects root bridge which is responosible for network reconfiguration, such as blocking and opening
ports of the other bridges. The root bridge is the bridge with lowest bridge ID.
http://ebtables.sourceforge.net/
Bridge Interface Setup

Home menu level: /interface bridge
Description
To combine a number of networks into one bridge, a bridge interface should be created (later, all
the desired interfaces should be set up as its ports). One MAC address will be assigned to all the
bridged interfaces (the smallest MAC address will be chosen automatically).
ageing-time ( time ; default: 5m ) - how long a host information will be kept in the bridge database
setting
forward-delay ( time ; default: 15s ) - time which is spent during the initialization phase of the
bridge interface (i.e., after router startup or enabling the interface) in listening/learning state before
Page 158 of 695


the bridge will start functioning normally
garbage-collection-interval ( time ; default: 4s ) - how often to drop old (expired) host entries in
the bridge database. The garbage collection process expurges the entries older than defined by the
ageing-time property
hello-time ( time ; default: 2s ) - how often send hello packets to other bridges
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address for the interface
max-message-age ( time ; default: 20s ) - how long to remember Hello messages received from
other bridges
name ( name ; default: bridgeN ) - a descriptive name of the bridge interface
priority ( integer : 0 ..65535 ; default: 32768 ) - bridge interface priority. The priority argument is
used by Spanning Tree Protocol to determine, which port remains enabled if at least two ports form
a loop
stp ( no | yes ; default: no ) - whether to enable the Spanning Tree Protocol. Bridging loops will
only be prevented if this property is turned on
Example
To add and enable a bridge interface that will forward all the protocols:
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge> add; print
0 R name="bridge1" mtu=1500 arp=enabled mac-address=61:64:64:72:65:73 stp=no
priority=32768 ageing-time=5m forward-delay=15s
garbage-collection-interval=4s hello-time=2s max-message-age=20s
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge> enable 0
Port Settings
Home menu level: /interface bridge port
Description
The submenu is used to enslave interfaces in a particular bridge interface.
bridge ( name ; default: none ) - the bridge interface the respective interface is grouped in
• none - the interface is not grouped in any bridge
interface ( read-only: name ) - interface name, which is to be included in a bridge
path-cost ( integer : 0 ..65535 ; default: 10 ) - path cost to the interface, used by STP to determine
the 'best' path
priority ( integer : 0 ..255 ; default: 128 ) - interface priority compared to other interfaces, which
are destined to the same network
Notes
Starting from version 2.9.9, the ports in this lists should be added, not set, see the following
Page 159 of 695


examples.
Example
To group ether1 and ether2 in the already created bridge1 bridge (versions from 2.9.9):
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge port> add interface=ether1 bridge=bridge1

[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge port> add interface=ether2 bridge=bridge1
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge port> print
# INTERFACE BRIDGE PRIORITY PATH-COST
0 ether1 bridge1 128 10
1 ether2 bridge1 128 10
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge port>
Note that there is no wlan1 interface anymore, as it is not added as bridge port.
Bridge Monitoring
Command name: /interface bridge monitor
Description
Used to monitor the current status of a bridge.
bridge-id ( text ) - the bridge ID, which is in form of bridge-priority.bridge-MAC-address
designated-root ( text ) - ID of the root bridge
path-cost ( integer ) - the total cost of the path to the root-bridge
root-port ( name ) - port to which the root bridge is connected to
Example
To monitor a bridge:
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge> monitor bridge1
bridge-id: 32768.00:02:6F:01:CE:31
designated-root: 32768.00:02:6F:01:CE:31
root-port: ether2
path-cost: 180
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge>
Bridge Port Monitoring

Command name: /interface bridge port monitor
Description
Statistics of an interface that belongs to a bridge
Page 160 of 695


designated-port ( text ) - port of designated-root bridge
designated-root ( text ) - ID of bridge, which is nearest to the root-bridge
port-id ( integer ) - port ID, which represents from port priority and port number, and is unique
status ( disabled | blocking | listening | learning | forwarding ) - the status of the bridge port:
• disabled - the interface is disabled. No frames are forwarded, no Bridge Protocol Data Units
(BPDUs) are heard
• blocking - the port does not forward any frames, but listens for BPDUs
• listening - the port does not forward any frames, but listens to them
• learning - the port does not forward any frames, but learns the MAC addresses
• forwarding - the port forwards frames, and learns MAC addresses
Example
To monitor a bridge port:
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge port> mo 0
status: forwarding
port-id: 28417
designated-root: 32768.00:02:6F:01:CE:31
designated-bridge: 32768.00:02:6F:01:CE:31
designated-port: 28417
designated-cost: 0
-- [Q quit|D dump|C-z pause]
Bridge Host Monitoring

Command name: /interface bridge host
age ( read-only: time ) - the time since the last packet was received from the host
bridge ( read-only: name ) - the bridge the entry belongs to
local ( read-only: flag ) - whether the host entry is of the bridge itself (that way all local interfaces
are shown)
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - host's MAC address
on-interface ( read-only: name ) - which of the bridged interfaces the host is connected to
Example
To get the active host table:
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge host> print
Flags: L - local
BRIDGE MAC-ADDRESS ON-INTERFACE AGE
bridge1 00:00:B4:5B:A6:58 ether1 4m48s
bridge1 00:30:4F:18:58:17 ether1 4m50s
L bridge1 00:50:08:00:00:F5 ether1 0s
L bridge1 00:50:08:00:00:F6 ether2 0s
bridge1 00:60:52:0B:B4:81 ether1 4m50s
bridge1 00:C0:DF:07:5E:E6 ether1 4m46s
bridge1 00:E0:C5:6E:23:25 prism1 4m48s
bridge1 00:E0:F7:7F:0A:B8 ether1 1s
[admin@MikroTik] interface bridge host>
Page 161 of 695


Bridge Firewall General Description
Home menu level: /interface bridge filter , /interface bridge nat , /interface bridge broute
Description
The bridge firewall implements packet filtering and thereby provides security functions that are
used to manage data flow to, from and through bridge
Note that packets between bridged interfaces, just like any other IP traffic, are also passed through
the 'generic' /ip firewall rules (but bridging filters are always applied before IP filters/NAT of the
built-in chain of the same name, except for the output which is executed after IP Firewall Output).
These rules can be used with real, physical receiving/transmitting interfaces, as well as with bridge
interface that simply groups the bridged interfaces.
There are three bridge filter tables:
• filter - bridge firewall with three predefined chains:
• input - filters packets, which destination is the bridge (including those packets that will
be routed, as they are anyway destined to the bridge MAC address)
• output - filters packets, which come from the bridge (including those packets that has
been routed normally)
• forward - filters packets, which are to be bridged (note: this chain is not applied to the
packets that should be routed through the router, just to those that are traversing between
the ports of the same bridge)
• nat - bridge network address translation provides ways for changing source/destination MAC
addresses of the packets traversing a bridge. Has two built-in chains:
• scnat - used for "hiding" a host or a network behind a different MAC address. This chain
is applied to the packets leaving the router through a bridged interface
• dstnat - used for redirecting some pakets to another destinations
• broute - makes bridge a brouter - router that performs routing on some of the packets, and
bridging - on others. Has one predefined chain: brouting, which is traversed right after a
packet enters an enslaved interface (before "Bridging Decision")
Note: the bridge destination NAT is executed before bridging desision
You can put packet marks in bridge firewall (filter, broute and NAT), which are the same as the
packet marks in IP firewall put by mangle. So packet marks put by bridge firewall can be used in IP
firewall, and vice versa
General bridge firewall properties are described in this section. Some parameters that differ between
nat, broute and filter rules are described in further sections.
802.3-sap ( integer ) - DSAP (Destination Service Access Point) and SSAP (Source Service Access
Point) are 2 one byte fields, which identify the network protocol entities which use the link layer
service. These bytes are always equal. Two hexadecimal digits may be specified here to match an
Page 162 of 695


SAP byte
802.3-type ( integer ) - Ethernet protocol type, placed after the IEEE 802.2 frame header. Works
only if 802.3-sap is 0xAA (SNAP - Sub-Network Attachment Point header). For example,
AppleTalk can be indicated by SAP code of 0xAA followed by a SNAP type code of 0x809B
arp-dst-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - ARP destination address
arp-dst-mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - ARP destination MAC
address
arp-hardware-type ( integer ; default: 1 ) - ARP hardware type. This normally Ethernet (Type 1)
arp-opcode ( arp-nak | drarp-error | drarp-reply | drarp-request | inarp-request | reply |
reply-reverse | request | request-reverse ) - ARP opcode (packet type)
• arp-nak - negative ARP reply (rarely used, mostly in ATM networks)
• drarp-error - Dynamic RARP error code, saying that an IP address for the given MAC address
can not be allocated
• drarp-reply - Dynamic RARP reply, with a temporaty IP address assignment for a host
• drarp-request - Dynamic RARP request to assign a temporary IP address for the given MAC
address
• inarp-request -
• reply - standard ARP reply with a MAC address
• reply-reverse - reverse ARP (RARP) reply with an IP address assigned
• request - standard ARP request to a known IP address to find out unknown MAC address
• request-reverse - reverse ARP (RARP) request to a known MAC address to find out unknown
IP address (intended to be used by hosts to find out their own IP address, similarly to DHCP
service)
arp-packet-type ( integer ) -
arp-src-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - ARP source IP address
arp-src-mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - ARP source MAC address
chain ( text ) - bridge firewall chain, which the filter is functioning in (either a built-in one, or a
user defined)
dst-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - destination IP address (only if MAC protocol is set
to IPv4)
dst-mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - destination MAC address
dst-port ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - destination port number or range (only for TCP or UDP protocols)
flow ( text ) - individual packet mark to match
in-bridge ( name ) - bridge interface through which the packet is coming in
in-interface ( name ) - physical interface (i.e., bridge port) through which the packet is coming in
ip-protocol ( ipsec-ah | ipsec-esp | ddp | egp | ggp | gre | hmp | idpr-cmtp | icmp | igmp | ipencap |
encap | ipip | iso-tp4 | ospf | pup | rspf | rdp | st | tcp | udp | vmtp | xns-idp | xtp ) - IP protocol (only if
MAC protocol is set to IPv4)
• ipsec-ah - IPsec AH protocol
• ipsec-esp - IPsec ESP protocol
• ddp - datagram delivery protocol
Page 163 of 695


• egp - exterior gateway protocol
• ggp - gateway-gateway protocol
• gre - general routing encapsulation
• hmp - host monitoring protocol
• idpr-cmtp - idpr control message transport
• icmp - internet control message protocol
• igmp - internet group management protocol
• ipencap - ip encapsulated in ip
• encap - ip encapsulation
• ipip - ip encapsulation
• iso-tp4 - iso transport protocol class 4
• ospf - open shortest path first
• pup - parc universal packet protocol
• rspf - radio shortest path first
• rdp - reliable datagram protocol
• st - st datagram mode
• tcp - transmission control protocol
• udp - user datagram protocol
• vmtp - versatile message transport
• xns-idp - xerox ns idp
• xtp - xpress transfer protocol
jump-target ( name ) - if action=jump specified, then specifies the user-defined firewall chain to
process the packet
limit ( integer | time | integer ) - restricts packet match rate to a given limit. Usefull to reduce the
amount of log messages
• Count - maximum average packet rate, measured in packets per second (pps), unless followed
by Time option
• Time - specifies the time interval over which the packet rate is measured
• Burst - number of packets to match in a burst
log-prefix ( text ) - defines the prefix to be printed before the logging information
mac-protocol ( integer | 802.2 | arp | ip | ipv6 | ipx | rarp | vlan ) - Ethernet payload type
(MAC-level protocol)
mark-flow ( name ) - marks existing flow
packet-type ( broadcast | host | multicast | other-host ) - MAC frame type:
• broadcast - broadcast MAC packet
• host - packet is destined to the bridge itself
• multicast - multicast MAC packet
• other-host - packet is destined to some other unicast address, not to the bridge itself
src-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - source IP address (only if MAC protocol is set to
Page 164 of 695


IPv4)
src-mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - source MAC address
src-port ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - source port number or range (only for TCP or UDP protocols)
stp-flags ( topology-change | topology-change-ack ) - The BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit)
flags. Bridge exchange configuration messages named BPDU peridiocally for preventing from loop
• topology-change - topology change flag is set when a bridge detects port state change, to force
all other bridges to drop their host tables and recalculate network topology
• topology-change-ack - topology change acknowledgement flag is sen in replies to the
notification packets
stp-forward-delay ( time : 0 ..65535 ) - forward delay timer
stp-hello-time ( time : 0 ..65535 ) - stp hello packets time
stp-max-age ( time : 0 ..65535 ) - maximal STP message age
stp-msg-age ( time : 0 ..65535 ) - STP message age
stp-port ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - stp port identifier
stp-root-address ( MAC address ) - root bridge MAC address
stp-root-cost ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - root bridge cost
stp-root-priority ( time : 0 ..65535 ) - root bridge priority
stp-sender-address ( MAC address ) - stp message sender MAC address
stp-sender-priority ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - sender priority
stp-type ( config | tcn ) - the BPDU type
• config - configuration BPDU
• tcn - topology change notification
vlan-encap ( 802.2 | arp | ip | ipv6 | ipx | rarp | vlan ) - the MAC protocol type encapsulated in the
VLAN frame
vlan-id ( integer : 0 ..4095 ) - VLAN identifier field
vlan-priority ( integer : 0 ..7 ) - the user priority field
Notes
stpmatchers are only valid if destination MAC address is 01:80:C2:00:00:00/FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
(Bridge Group address), also stp should be enabled.
ARP matchers are only valid if mac-protocol is arp or rarp
VLAN matchers are only valid for vlan ethernet protocol
IP-related matchers are only valid if mac-protocol is set as ipv4
802.3 matchers are only consulted if the actual frame is compliant with IEEE 802.2 and IEEE 802.3
standards (note: it is not the industry-standard Ethernet frame format used in most networks
worldwide!). These matchers are ignored for other packets.
Bridge Packet Filter

Home menu level: /interface bridge filter
Page 165 of 695


Description
This section describes bridge packet filter specific filtering options, which were omitted in the
general firewall description
action ( accept | drop | jump | log | mark | passthrough | return ; default: accept ) - action to
undertake if the packet matches the rule, one of the:
• accept - accept the packet. No action, i.e., the packet is passed through without undertaking any
action, and no more rules are processed in the relevant list/chain
• drop - silently drop the packet (without sending the ICMP reject message)
• jump - jump to the chain specified by the value of the jump-target argument
• log - log the packet
• mark - mark the packet to use the mark later
• passthrough - ignore this rule and go on to the next one. Acts the same way as a disabled rule,
except for ability to count packets
• return - return to the previous chain, from where the jump took place
out-bridge ( name ) - outgoing bridge interface
out-interface ( name ) - interface via packet is leaving the bridge
Bridge NAT
Home menu level: /interface bridge nat
Description
This section describes bridge NAT options, which were omitted in the general firewall description
action ( accept | arp-reply | drop | dst-nat | jump | log | mark | passthrough | redirect | return |
src-nat ; default: accept ) - action to undertake if the packet matches the rule, one of the:
• accept - accept the packet. No action, i.e., the packet is passed through without undertaking any
action, and no more rules are processed in the relevant list/chain
• arp-reply - send a reply to an ARP request (any other packets will be ignored by this rule) with
the specified MAC address (only valid in dstnat chain)
• dst-nat - change destination MAC address of a packet (only valid in dstnat chain)
Page 166 of 695


• redirect - redirect the packet to the bridge itself (only valid in dstnat chain)
• src-nat - change source MAC address of a packet (only valid in srcnat chain)
out-bridge ( name ) - outgoing bridge interface
out-interface ( name ) - interface via packet is leaving the bridge
to-arp-reply-mac-address ( MAC address ) - source MAC address to put in Ethernet frame and
ARP payload, when action=arp-reply is selected
to-dst-mac-address ( MAC address ) - destination MAC address to put in Ethernet frames, when
action=dst-nat is selected
to-src-mac-address ( MAC address ) - source MAC address to put in Ethernet frames, when
action=src-nat is selected
Bridge Brouting Facility

Home menu level: /interface bridge broute
Description
This section describes broute facility specific options, which were omitted in the general firewall
description
The Brouting table is applied to every packet entering a forwarding enslaved interface (i.e., it does
not work on regular interfaces, which are not included in a bridge)
action ( accept | drop | dst-nat | jump | log | mark | passthrough | redirect | return ; default: accept )
- action to undertake if the packet matches the rule, one of the:
• accept - let the bridging code decide, what to do with this packet
• drop - extract the packet from bridging code, making it appear just like it would come from a
not-bridged interface (no further bridge decisions or filters will be applied to this packet except
if the packet would be router out to a bridged interface, in which case the packet would be
processed normally, just like any other routed packet )
• dst-nat - change destination MAC address of a packet (only valid in dstnat chain), an let
bridging code to decide further actions
• redirect - redirect the packet to the bridge itself (only valid in dstnat chain), an let bridging
code to decide further actions
to-dst-mac-address ( MAC address ) - destination MAC address to put in Ethernet frames, when
action=dst-nat is selected
Page 167 of 695


Troubleshooting
Description
• Router shows that my rule is invalid

• in-interface, in-bridge (or in-bridge-port) is specified, but such an interface does not exist
• there is an action=mark-packet, but no new-packet-mark
• there is an action=mark-connection, but no new-connection-mark
• there is an action=mark-routing, but no new-routing-mark
Page 168 of 695


CISCO/Aironet 2.4GHz 11Mbps Wireless Interface
Document revision 1.2 (Mon May 31 20:18:58 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Example
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
Application Examples
Point-to-Multipoint Wireless LAN
Point-to-Point Wireless LAN
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the following CISCO/Aironet 2.4GHz Wireless ISA/PCI/PC
Adapter hardware:
• Aironet ISA/PCI/PC4800 2.4GHz DS 11Mbps Wireless LAN Adapters (100mW)
• Aironet ISA/PCI/PC4500 2.4GHz DS 2Mbps Wireless LAN Adapters (100mW)
• CISCO AIR-PCI340 2.4GHz DS 11Mbps Wireless LAN Adapters (30mW)
• CISCO AIR-PCI/PC350/352 2.4GHz DS 11Mbps Wireless LAN Adapters (100mW)
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface pc
Standards and Technologies: IEEE802.11b
Related Documents
Page 169 of 695


• Log Management
• CISCO Aironet 350 Series

For more information about the CISCO/Aironet PCI/ISA adapter hardware please see the relevant
User's Guides and Technical Reference Manuals in PDF format:
• 710-003638a0.pdf for PCI/ISA 4800 and 4500 series adapters
• 710-004239B0.pdf for PC 4800 and 4500 series adapters
Documentation about CISCO/Aironet Wireless Bridges and Access Points can be found in archives:
• AP48MAN.exe for AP4800 Wireless Access Point
• BR50MAN.exe for BR500 Wireless Bridge

Home menu level: /interface pc
Description
CISCO/Aironet 2.4GHz card is an interface for wireless networks operating in IEEE 802.11b
standard. If the wireless interface card is not registered to an AP, the green status led is blinking
fast. If the wireless interface card is registered to an AP, the green status led is blinking slow. To set
the wireless interface for working with an access point (register to the AP), typically you should set
the following parameters:
• The service set identifier. It should match the ssid of the AP. Can be blank, if you want the
wireless interface card to register to an AP with any ssid. The ssid will be received from the
AP, if the AP is broadcasting its ssid.
• The data-rate of the card should match one of the supported data rates of the AP. Data rate
'auto' should work in most cases.
Loading the Driver for the Wireless Adapter

PCI and PC (PCMCIA) cards do not require a 'manual' driver loading, since they are recognized
automatically by the system and the driver is loaded at the system startup.
The ISA card requires the driver to be loaded by issuing the following command:
There can be several reasons for a failure to load the driver:
• The requested I/O base address cannot be used on your motherboard
Page 170 of 695


Try to change the I/O base address using the DIP switches
ap1 ( MAC address ) - forces association to the specified access point
beacon-period ( integer : 20 ..976 ; default: 100 ) - Specifies beaconing period (applicable to
ad-hoc mode only)
card-type ( read-only: text ) - your CISCO/Aironet adapter model and type
client-name ( text ; default: "" ) - client name
data-rate ( 1Mbit/s | 2Mbit/s | 5.5Mbit/s | 11Mbit/s | auto ; default: 1Mbit/s ) - data rate in Mbit/s
fragmentation-threshold ( integer : 256 ..2312 ; default: 2312 ) - this threshold controls the packet
size at which outgoing packets will be split into multiple fragments. If a single fragment transmit
error occurs, only that fragment will have to be retransmitted instead of the whole packet. Use a low
setting in areas with poor communication or with a great deal of radio interference
frequency - Channel Frequency in MHz (applicable to ad-hoc mode only)
join-net ( time ; default: 10 ) - an amount of time,during which the interface operating in ad-hoc
mode will try to connect to an existing network rather than create a new one
• 0 - do not create own network
long-retry-limit ( integer : 0 ..128 ; default: 16 ) - specifies the number of times an unfragmented
packet is retried before it is dropped
mode ( infrastructure | ad-hoc ; default: infrastructure ) - operation mode of the card
modulation ( cck | default | mbok ; default: cck ) - modulation mode
• cck - Complementary Code Keying
• mbok - M-ary Bi-Orthogonal Keying
mtu ( integer : 256 ..2048 ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit
name ( name ) - descriptive interface name
rts-threshold ( integer : 0 ..2312 ; default: 2312 ) - determines the packet size at which the
interface issues a request to send (RTS) before sending the packet. A low value can be useful in
areas where many clients are associating with the access point or bridge, or in areas where the
clients are far apart and can detect only the access point or bridge and not each other
rx-antenna ( both | default | left | right ; default: both ) - receive antennas
short-retry-limit ( integer : 0 ..128 ; default: 16 ) - specifies the number of times a fragmented
packet is retried before it is dropped
ssid1 ( text ; default: tsunami ) - establishes the adapter's service set identifier This value must
match the SSID of the system in order to operate in infrastructure mode
ssid2 ( text ; default: "" ) - service set identifier 2
ssid3 ( text ; default: "" ) - service set identifier 3
Page 171 of 695


tx-antenna ( both | default | left | right ; default: both ) - transmit antennas
tx-power ( 1 | 5 | 20 | 50 | 100 ; default: 100 ) - transmit power in mW
world-mode ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if set, client adapter automatically inherit channel
configuration properties directly from the access point to which they associate. This feature enables
a user to use a client adapter around the world while still maintaining regulatory compliance
Example
Interface informational printouts
# NAME TYPE MTU
1 X ether2 ether 1500
2 X pc1 pc 1500
[admin@MikroTik] interface> set 2 name aironet
[admin@MikroTik] interface> enable aironet
# NAME TYPE MTU
1 X ether2 ether 1500
2 R aironet pc 1500
[admin@MikroTik] > interface pc
[admin@MikroTik] interface pc> print
0 R name="aironet" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:40:96:29:2F:80 arp=enabled
client-name="" ssid1="tsunami" ssid2="" ssid3="" mode=infrastructure
data-rate=1Mbit/s frequency=2437MHz modulation=cck tx-power=100
ap1=00:00:00:00:00:00 ap2=00:00:00:00:00:00 ap3=00:00:00:00:00:00
ap4=00:00:00:00:00:00 rx-antenna=right tx-antenna=right beacon-period=100
long-retry-limit=16 short-retry-limit=16 rts-threshold=2312
fragmentation-threshold=2312 join-net=10s card-type=PC4800A 3.65
[admin@MikroTik] interface pc>
Interface status monitoring

[admin@MikroTik] interface pc> monitor 0
synchronized: no
associated: no
error-number: 0
Example
Suppose we want to configure the wireless interface to accomplish registration on the AP with a
ssid 'mt'.
We need to change the value of ssid property to the corresponding value.
To view the results, we can use monitor feature.
[admin@MikroTik] interface pc> set 0 ssid1 mt
synchronized: yes
associated: yes
frequency: 2412MHz
data-rate: 11Mbit/s
ssid: "mt"
access-point: 00:02:6F:01:5D:FE
access-point-name: ""
Page 172 of 695


signal-quality: 132
signal-strength: -82
error-number: 0
Troubleshooting
Description
Keep in mind, that not all combinations of I/O base addresses and IRQs may work on particular
motherboard. It is recommended that you choose an IRQ not used in your system, and then try to
find an acceptable I/O base address setting. As it has been observed, the IRQ 5 and I/O 0x300 or
0x180 will work in most cases.
• The requested I/O base address cannot be used on your motherboard.
Try to change the I/O base address using the DIP switches.
• The pc interface does not show up under the interfaces list
Obtain the required license for 2.4/5GHz Wireless Client feature.
• The wireless card does not register to the Access Point
Check the cabling and antenna alignment.
Point-to-Multipoint Wireless LAN

Let us consider the following network setup with CISCO/Aironet Wireless Access Point as a base
station and MikroTik Wireless Router as a client:
The access point is connected to the wired network's HUB and has IP address from the network
10.1.1.0/24.
The minimum configuration required for the AP is:
1. Setting the Service Set Identifier (up to 32 alphanumeric characters). In our case we use ssid
"mt".
2. Setting the allowed data rates at 1-11Mbps, and the basic rate at 1Mbps.
3. Choosing the frequency, in our case we use 2442MHz.
4. (For CISCO/Aironet Bridges only) Set
Configuration/Radio/Extended/Bridge/mode=access_point. If you leave it to 'bridge_only', it
wont register clients.
5. Setting the identity parameters Configuration/Ident: Inaddr, Inmask, and Gateway. These are
required if you want to access the AP remotely using telnet or http.
The IP addresses assigned to the wireless interface should be from the network 10.1.1.0/24:
Page 173 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 10.1.1.12/24 interface aironet
0 10.1.1.12/24 10.1.1.0 10.1.1.255 aironet
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 Local
The default route should be set to the gateway router 10.1.1.254 (! not the AP 10.1.1.250 !):
0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.1.1.254 1 aironet
1 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 Local
2 DC 10.1.1.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 aironet
Point-to-Point Wireless LAN

Point-to-Point links provide a convenient way to connect a pair of clients on a short distance.
Let us consider the following point-to-point wireless network setup with two MikroTik wireless
routers:
To establish a point-to-point link, the configuration of the wireless interface should be as follows:
• A unique Service Set Identifier should be chosen for both ends, say "mt"
• A channel frequency should be selected for the link, say 2412MHz
• The operation mode should be set to ad-hoc
• One of the units (slave) should have wireless interface property join-net set to 0s (never create
a network), the other unit (master) should be set to 1s or whatever, say 10s. This will enable
the master unit to create a network and register the slave unit to it.
The following command should be issued to change the settings for the pc interface of the master
unit:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pc> set 0 mode=ad-hoc ssid1=mt frequency=2442MHz \
\... bitrate=auto
For 10 seconds (this is set by the property join-net) the wireless card will look for a network to
join. The status of the card is not synchronized, and the green status light is blinking fast. If the card
cannot find a network, it creates its own network. The status of the card becomes synchronized, and
the green status led becomes solid.
The monitor command shows the new status and the MAC address generated:
synchronized: yes
associated: yes
frequency: 2442MHz
data-rate: 11Mbit/s
ssid: "mt"
access-point: 2E:00:B8:01:98:01
signal-quality: 35
Page 174 of 695


error-number: 0
The other router of the point-to-point link requires the operation mode set to ad-hoc, the System
Service Identifier set to 'mt', and the channel frequency set to 2412MHz. If the cards are able to
establish RF connection, the status of the card should become synchronized, and the green status led
should become solid immediately after entering the command:
[admin@wnet_gw] interface pc> set 0 mode=ad-hoc ssid1=b_link frequency=2412MHz \
\... bitrate=auto
[admin@wnet_gw] interface pc> monitor 0
synchronized: yes
associated: no
frequency: 2442MHz
data-rate: 11Mbit/s
ssid: "b_link"
access-point: 2E:00:B8:01:98:01
signal-quality: 131
error-number: 0
[admin@wnet_gw] interface pc>
As we see, the MAC address under the access-point property is the same as on the first router.
If desired, IP addresses can be assigned to the wireless interfaces of the pint-to-point linked routers
using a smaller subnet, say 30-bit one:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 192.168.11.1/30 interface aironet
0 192.168.11.1/30 192.168.11.0 192.168.11.3 aironet
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 Local
The second router will have address 192.168.11.2. The network connectivity can be tested by using
ping or bandwidth test:
[admin@wnet_gw] ip address> add address 192.168.11.2/30 interface aironet
[admin@wnet_gw] ip address> print
0 192.168.11.2/30 192.168.11.0 192.168.11.3 aironet
1 10.1.1.12/24 10.1.1.0 10.1.1.255 Public
[admin@wnet_gw] ip address> /ping 192.168.11.1
192.168.11.1 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
192.168.11.1 pong: ttl=255 time=1 ms
192.168.11.1 pong: ttl=255 time=1 ms
192.168.11.1 pong: ttl=255 ping interrupted
[admin@wnet_gw] interface pc> /tool bandwidth-test 192.168.11.1 protocol tcp
status: running
rx-current: 4.61Mbps
rx-10-second-average: 4.25Mbps
rx-total-average: 4.27Mbps
[admin@wnet_gw] interface pc> /tool bandwidth-test 192.168.11.1 protocol udp size 1500
status: running
[admin@wnet_gw] interface pc>
Page 175 of 695


Cyclades PC300 PCI Adapters
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Synchronous Interface Configuration
Description
Troubleshooting
Description
RSV/V.35 Synchronous Link Applications
Example
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the following Cyclades PC300 Adapter hardware:
• RSV/V.35 (RSV models) with 1 or 2 RS-232/V.35 interfaces on standard DB25/M.34
connector, 5Mbps, internal or external clock
• T1/E1 (TE models) with 1 or 2 T1/E1/G.703 interfaces on standard RJ48C connector,
Full/Fractional, internal or external clock
• X.21 (X21 models) with 1 or 2 X.21 on standard DB-15 connector, 8Mbps, internal or external
clock
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface cyclades
Standards and Technologies: X.21 , X.35 , T1/E1/G.703 , Frame Relay , PPP , Cisco-HDLC
Related Documents
Page 176 of 695


• Log Management

Home menu level: /interface cyclades
Description
You can install up to four Cyclades PC300 PCI Adapters in one PC box, if you have so many
adapter slots and IRQs available.
The Cyclades PC300/RSV Synchronous PCI Adapter comes with a V.35 cable. This cable should
work for all standard modems, which have V.35 connections. For synchronous modems, which
have a DB-25 connection, you should use a standard DB-25 cable.
Connect a communication device, e.g., a baseband modem, to the V.35 port and turn it on. The
MikroTik driver for the Cyclades Synchronous PCI Adapter allows you to unplug the V.35 cable
from one modem and plug it into another modem with a different clock speed, and you do not need
to restart the interface or router.
name ( name ; default: cycladesN ) - descriptive interface name
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit for the interface
line-protocol ( cisco-hdlc | frame-relay | sync-ppp ; default: sync-ppp ) - line protocol
media-type ( E1 | T1 | V24 | V35 | X21 ; default: V35 ) - the hardware media used for this interface
clock-rate ( integer ; default: 64000 ) - internal clock rate in bps
clock-source ( internal | external | tx-internal ; default: external ) - source clock
line-code ( AMI | B8ZS | HDB3 | NRZ ; default: B8ZS ) - for T1/E1 channels only. Line modulation
method:
• AMI - Alternate Mark Inversion
• B8ZS - Binary 8-Zero Substitution
• HDB3 - High Density Bipolar 3 Code (ITU-T)
• NRZ - Non-Return-To-Zero
framing mode ( CRC4 | D4 | ESF | Non-CRC4 | Unframed ; default: ESF ) - for T1/E1 channels
only. The frame mode:
• CRC4 - Cyclic Redundancy Check 4-bit (E1 Signaling, Europe)
• D4 - Fourth Generation Channel Bank (48 Voice Channels on 2 T-1s or 1 T-1c)
• ESF - Extended Superframe Format
• Non-CRC4 - plain Cyclic Redundancy Check
• Unframed - do not check frame integrity
line-build-out ( 0dB | 7.5dB | 15dB | 22.5dB ; default: 0 ) - for T1 channels only. Line Build Out
Signal Level.
rx-sensitivity ( long-haul | short-haul ; default: short-haul ) - for T1/E1 channels only. Numbers of
active channels (up to 32 for E1 and up to 24 for T1)
Page 177 of 695


chdlc-keepalive ( time ; default: 10s ) - Cisco-HDLC keepalive interval in seconds
frame-relay-dce ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether the device operates in Data
Communication Equipment mode. The value yes is suitable only for T1 models
frame-relay-lmi-type ( ansi | ccitt ; default: ansi ) - Frame Relay Line Management Interface
Protocol type
Troubleshooting
Description
• The cyclades interface does not show up under the interfaces list
Obtain the required license for synchronous feature
• The synchronous link does not work
Check the V.35 cabling and the line between the modems. Read the modem manual
RSV/V.35 Synchronous Link Applications
Example
Let us consider the following network setup with MikroTik Router connected to a leased line with
baseband modems and a CISCO router at the other end:
The driver for the Cyclades PC300/RSV Synchronous PCI Adapter should load automatically. The
interface should be enabled according to the instructions given above. The IP addresses assigned to
the cyclades interface should be as follows:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address=1.1.1.1/32 interface=cyclades1
0 10.0.0.219/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 ether1
1 1.1.1.1/32 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 cyclades1
2 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 ether2
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> /ping 1.1.1.2
1.1.1.2 64 byte pong: ttl=255 time=12 ms
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> /tool flood-ping 1.1.1.2 size=1500 count=50
sent: 50
received: 50
min-rtt: 1
avg-rtt: 1
max-rtt: 9
Note that for the point-to-point link the network mask is set to 32 bits, the argument network is set
to the IP address of the other end, and the broadcast address is set to 255.255.255.255. The default
route should be set to gateway router 1.1.1.2:
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add gateway 1.1.1.2 interface cyclades1
Page 178 of 695


0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 1.1.1.2 1 cyclades1
1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 ether1
2 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 ether2
3 DC 1.1.1.2/32 r 0.0.0.0 0 cyclades1
The configuration of the CISCO router at the other end (part of the configuration) is:
CISCO#show running-config
Building configuration...
Current configuration:
...
!
interface Ethernet0
description connected to EthernetLAN
ip address 10.1.1.12 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial0
description connected to MikroTik
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
serial restart-delay 1
!
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.1.1.254
!
...
end
CISCO#
Send ping packets to the MikroTik router:
CISCO#ping 1.1.1.1
Type escape sequence to abort.
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 1.1.1.1, timeout is 2 seconds:
!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 28/32/40 ms
CISCO#
Page 179 of 695


Driver Management
Document revision 2.1.0 (Fri Mar 05 08:05:49 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Related Documents
Loading Device Drivers
Description
Notes
Example
Removing Device Drivers
Description
Notes on PCMCIA Adapters
Description
Notes
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
Device drivers represent the software interface part of installed network devices. Some drivers are
included in the system software package and some in additional feature packages.
For complete list of supported devices and respective device driver names please consult the
'Related Documents' section.
The device drivers for PCI, miniPCI, PC (PCMCIA) and CardBus cards are loaded automatically.
Other network interface cards (most ISA and PCI ISDN cards) require the device drivers to be
loaded manually using the /driver add command.
Users cannot add their own device drivers, only drivers included in the Mikrotik RouterOS software
packages can be used. If you need a support for a device, which hasn't a driver yet, you are
welcome to suggest it at suggestion page on our web site.
Home menu level: /driver
Standards and Technologies: PCI , ISA , PCMCIA , miniPCI , CardBus
Related Documents
Page 180 of 695


Loading Device Drivers

Home menu level: /driver
Description
In order to use network interface card which has a driver that is not loaded automatically, exempli
gratia NE2000 compatible ISA card, you need to add driver manually. This is accomplished by
issuing add command under the driver submenu level.
To see system resources occupied by the installed devices, use the /system resource io print and
/system resource irq print commands.
io ( integer ) - input-output port base address
irq ( integer ) - interrupt request number
isdn-protocol ( euro | german ; default: euro ) - line protocol setting for ISDN cards
memory ( integer ; default: 0 ) - shared memory base address
name ( name ) - driver name
Notes
Not all combinatios of irq and io base addresses might work on your particular system. It is
recommended, that you first find an acceptable irq setting and then try different i/o base addresses.
If you need to specify hexadecimal values instead of decimal for the argument values, put 0x before
the number.
To see the list of available drivers, issue the /driver add name ? command.
The resource list shows only those interfaces, which are enabled.
Typical io values for ISA cards are 0x280, 0x300 and 0x320
Example
To view the list of available drivers, do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] driver> add name ?
3c509 c101 lance ne2k-isa pc-isa
[admin@MikroTik] driver> add name
To see system resources occupied by the devices, use the /system resource io print and /system
resource irq print commands:
[admin@MikroTik] system resource> io print
PORT-RANGE OWNER
0x20-0x3F APIC
0x40-0x5F timer
0x60-0x6F keyboard
Page 181 of 695


0x80-0x8F DMA
0xA0-0xBF APIC
0xC0-0xDF DMA
0xF0-0xFF FPU
0x100-0x13F [prism2_cs]
0x180-0x1BF [orinoco_cs]
0x1F0-0x1F7 IDE 1
0x3D4-0x3D5 [cga]
0x3F6-0x3F6 IDE 1
0x3F8-0x3FF serial port
0xCF8-0xCFF [PCI conf1]
0x1000-0x10FF [National Semiconductor Corporation DP83815 (MacPhyter) Et...
0x1000-0x10FF ether1
0x1400-0x14FF [National Semiconductor Corporation DP83815 (MacPhyter) Et...
0x1400-0x14FF ether2
0x1800-0x18FF [PCI device 100b:0511 (National Semiconductor Corporation)]
0x1C00-0x1C3F [PCI device 100b:0510 (National Semiconductor Corporation)]
0x1C40-0x1C7F [PCI device 100b:0510 (National Semiconductor Corporation)]
0x1C80-0x1CBF [PCI device 100b:0515 (National Semiconductor Corporation)]
0x1CC0-0x1CCF [National Semiconductor Corporation SCx200 IDE]
0x4000-0x40FF [PCI CardBus #01]
0x4C00-0x4CFF [PCI CardBus #05]
[admin@MikroTik] system resource> irq print
Flags: U - unused
IRQ OWNER
1 keyboard
2 APIC
U 3
4 serial port
U 5
U 6
U 7
U 8
9 ether1
10 ether2
11 [Texas Instruments PCI1250 PC card Cardbus Controller]
11 [Texas Instruments PCI1250 PC card Cardbus Controller (#2)]
11 [prism2_cs]
11 [orinoco_cs]
12 [usb-ohci]
U 13
14 IDE 1
[admin@MikroTik] system resource>
Suppose we need to load a driver for a NE2000 compatible ISA card. Assume we had considered
the information above and have checked avalable resources in our system. To add the driver, we
must do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] driver> add name=ne2k-isa io=0x280
[admin@MikroTik] driver> print
0 D RealTek 8139
1 D Intel EtherExpressPro
2 D PCI NE2000
3 ISA NE2000 280
4 Moxa C101 Synchronous C8000
Removing Device Drivers
Description
You can remove only statically loaded drivers, id est those which do not have the D flag before the
Page 182 of 695


driver name. The device drivers can be removed only if the appropriate interface has been disabled.
To remove a device driver use the /driver remove command. Unloading a device driver is useful
when you swap or remove a network device - it saves system resources by avoiding to load drivers
for removed devices.
The device driver needs to be removed and loaded again, if some parameters (memory range, i/o
base address) have been changed for the network interface card.
Notes on PCMCIA Adapters
Description
Currently only the following PCMCIA-ISA and PCMCIA-PCI adapters are tested to comply with
MikroTik RouterOS:
• RICOH PCMCIA-PCI Bridge with R5C475 II or RC476 II chip (one or two PCMCIA ports)
• CISCO/Aironet PCMCIA adapter (ISA and PCI versions) for CISCO/Aironet PCMCIA cards
only
Other PCMCIA-ISA and PCMCIA-PCI adapters might not function properly.
Notes
The Ricoh adapter might not work properly with some older motherboards. When recognized
properly by the BIOS during the boot up of the router, it should be reported under the PCI device
listing as "PCI/CardBus bridge". Try using another motherboard, if the adapter or the PCMCIA card
are not recognized properly.
The maximum number of PCMCIA ports for a single system is equal to 8. If you will try to install 9
or more ports (no matter one-port or two-port adapters), no one will be recognized.
Troubleshooting
Description
• My router shows that the ISA interface is invalid

The system cannot load driver for the card. Try to specify different IO or IRQ number
Page 183 of 695


Ethernet Interfaces
Document revision 1.2 (Fri Apr 16 12:35:37 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Ethernet Interface Configuration
Notes
Example
Monitoring the Interface Status
Notes
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS supports various types of Ethernet Interfaces. The complete list of supported
Ethernet NICs can be found in the Device Driver List .
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface ethernet
Standards and Technologies: IEEE 802.3
Related Documents
• DHCP Client and Server
Page 184 of 695


• http://www.ethermanage.com/ethernet/ethernet.html
• http://www.dcs.gla.ac.uk/~liddellj/nct/ethernet_protocol.html
Ethernet Interface Configuration

Home menu level: /interface ethernet
name ( name ; default: etherN ) - assigned interface name, whrere 'N' is the number of the ethernet
interface
cable-setting ( default | short | standard ; default: default ) - changes the cable length setting (only
applicable to NS DP83815/6 cards)
• default - suport long cables
• short - support short cables
• standard - same as default
disable-running-check ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - disable running check. If this value is set to 'no',
the router automatically detects whether the NIC is connected with a device in the network or not
mac-address ( MAC address ) - set the Media Access Control number of the card
auto-negotiation ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - when enabled, the interface "advertises" its maximum
capabilities to achieve the best connection possible
full-duplex ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - defines whether the transmission of data appears in two
directions simultaneously
speed ( 10 Mbps | 100 Mbps | 1 Gbps ) - sets the data transmission speed of the interface. By
default, this value is the maximal data rate supported by the interface
Notes
For some Ethernet NICs it is possible to blink the LEDs for 10s. Type /interface ethernet blink
ether1 and watch the NICs to see the one which has blinking LEDs.
When disable-running-check is set to no, the router automatically detects whether the NIC is
connected to a device in the network or not. When the remote device is not connected (the leds are
not blinking), the route which is set on the specific interface, becomes invalid.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > interface enable ether1
Page 185 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] > interface ethernet
[admin@MikroTik] interface ethernet> print
0 R ether1 1500 00:0C:42:03:00:F2 enabled
[admin@MikroTik] interface ethernet> print detail
0 R name="ether1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:03:00:F2 arp=enabled
disable-running-check=yes auto-negotiation=yes full-duplex=yes
cable-settings=default speed=100Mbps
[admin@MikroTik] interface ethernet>
Monitoring the Interface Status

Command name: /interface ethernet monitor
status ( link-ok | no-link | unknown ) - status of the interface, one of the:
• link-ok - the card has connected to the network
• no-link - the card has not connected to the network
• unknown - the connection is not recognized
rate ( 10 Mbps | 100 Mbps | 1 Gbps ) - the actual data rate of the connection
auto-negotiation ( done | incomplete ) - fast link pulses (FLP) to the adjacent link station to
negotiate the SPEED and MODE of the link
• done - negotiation done
• incomplete - negotiation failed
full-duplex ( yes | no ) - whether transmission of data occurs in two directions simultaneously
Notes
See the IP Addresses and ARP section of the manual for information how to add IP addresses to
the interfaces.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface ethernet> monitor ether1,ether2
status: link-ok link-ok
auto-negotiation: done done
rate: 100Mbps 100Mbps
full-duplex: yes yes
Troubleshooting
Description
• Interface monitor shows wrong information

In some very rare cases it is possible that the device driver does not show correct information,
Page 186 of 695


but it does not affect the NIC's performance (of course, if your card is not broken)
Page 187 of 695


FarSync X.21 Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
Synchronous Link Applications
MikroTik router to MikroTik router
MikroTik router to MikroTik router P2P using X.21 line
MikroTik router to Cisco router using X.21 line
MikroTik router to MikroTik router using Frame Relay
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports FarSync T-Series X.21 synchronous adapter hardware. These
cards provide versatile high performance connectivity to the Internet or to corporate networks over
leased lines.
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface farsync
Standards and Technologies: X.21 , Frame Relay , PPP
Related Documents
• Log Management
Page 188 of 695


• http://www.farsite.co.uk/

Home menu level: /interface farsync
Description
You can change the interface name to a more descriptive one using the set command. To enable the
interface, use the enable command.
hdlc-keepalive ( time ; default: 10s ) - Cisco HDLC keepalive period in seconds
clock-rate ( integer ; default: 64000 ) - the speed of internal clock
clock-source ( external | internal ; default: external ) - clock source
disabled ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - shows whether the interface is disabled
frame-relay-dce ( yes | no ; default: no ) - operate in Data Communications Equipment mode
frame-relay-lmi-type ( ansi | ccitt ; default: ansi ) - Frame Relay Local Management Interface type
media-type ( V24 | V35 | X21 ; default: V35 ) - type of the media
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmit Unit
name ( name ; default: farsyncN ) - assigned interface name
Example
# NAME TYPE MTU
1 X farsync1 farsync 1500
2 X farsync2 farsync 1500
[admin@MikroTik] interface> enable farsync2
# NAME TYPE MTU
1 farsync1 farsync 1500
2 farsync2 farsync 1500
[admin@MikroTik] interface>farsync
[admin@MikroTik] interface farsync> print
0 name="farsync1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=sync-ppp media-type=V35
clock-rate=64000 clock-source=external chdlc-keepalive=10s
frame-relay-lmi-type=ansi frame-relay-dce=no
1 name="farsync2" mtu=1500 line-protocol=sync-ppp media-type=V35
Page 189 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface farsync>
You can monitor the status of the synchronous interface:

[admin@MikroTik] interface farsync> monitor 0
card-type: T2P FarSync T-Series
state: running
firmware-id: 2
firmware-version: 0.7.0
physical-media: V35
cable: detected
clock: not-detected
input-signals: CTS
output-signals: RTS DTR
Troubleshooting
Description
• The farsync interface does not show up under the interface list
Check the cabling and the line between the modems. Read the modem manual
Synchronous Link Applications
MikroTik router to MikroTik router

Let us consider the following network setup with two MikroTik routers connected to a leased line
with baseband modems:
Page 190 of 695


The interface should be enabled according to the instructions given above. The IP addresses
assigned to the synchronous interface should be as follows:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 1.1.1.1/32 interface farsync1 \
\... network 1.1.1.2 broadcast 255.255.255.255
0 10.0.0.254/24 10.0.0.254 10.0.0.255 ether2
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.254 192.168.0.255 ether1
2 1.1.1.1/32 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.255 farsync1
Note that for the point-to-point link the network mask is set to 32 bits, the argument network is set
to the IP address of the other end, and the broadcast address is set to 255.255.255.255. The default
route should be set to the gateway router 1.1.1.2:
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add gateway 1.1.1.2
0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 1.1.1.2 1 farsync1
Page 191 of 695


1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 10.0.0.254 1 ether2
2 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 192.168.0.254 0 ether1
3 DC 1.1.1.2/32 r 0.0.0.0 0 farsync1
The configuration of the MikroTik router at the other end is similar:

[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 1.1.1.2/32 interface fsync \
0 10.1.1.12/24 10.1.1.12 10.1.1.255 Public
1 1.1.1.2/32 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 fsync
MikroTik router to MikroTik router P2P using X.21 line

Consider the following example:
The default value of the property clock-source must be changed to internal for one of the cards.
Both cards must have media-type property set to X21.
IP address configuration on both routers is as follows (by convention, the routers are named hq
and office respectively):
[admin@hq] ip address> pri
0 192.168.0.1/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 ether1
1 1.1.1.1/32 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.2 farsync1
[admin@hq] ip address>
[admin@office] ip address>
0 10.0.0.112/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 ether1
Page 192 of 695


1 1.1.1.2/32 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 farsync1
[admin@office] ip address>
MikroTik router to Cisco router using X.21 line

Assume we have the following configuration:
The configuration of MT router is as follows:

[admin@MikroTik] interface farsync> set farsync1 line-protocol=cisco-hdlc \
\... media-type=X21 clock-source=internal
[admin@MikroTik] interface farsync> enable farsync1
[admin@MikroTik] interface farsync> print
0 R name="farsync1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=cisco-hdlc media-type=X21
clock-rate=64000 clock-source=internal chdlc-keepalive=10s
1 X name="farsync2" mtu=1500 line-protocol=sync-ppp media-type=V35
Page 193 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface farsync> /ip address add address=1.1.1.1/24 \
\... interface=farsync1
The essential part of the configuration of Cisco router is provided below:

interface Serial0
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
no ip route-cache
no ip mroute-cache
no fair-queue
!
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1
MikroTik router to MikroTik router using Frame Relay

Consider the following example:
The default value of the property clock-source must be changed to internal for one of the cards.
This card also requires the property frame-relay-dce set to yes. Both cards must have media-type
property set to X21 and the line-protocol set to frame-relay.
Now we need to add pvc interfaces:
[admin@hq] interface pvc> add dlci=42 interface=farsync1
[admin@hq] interface pvc> print
# NAME MTU DLCI INTERFACE
0 X pvc1 1500 42 farsync1
[admin@hq] interface pvc>
Similar routine has to be done also on office router:

[admin@office] interface pvc> add dlci=42 interface=farsync1
[admin@office] interface pvc> print
0 X pvc1 1500 42 farsync1
[admin@office] interface pvc>
Page 194 of 695


Finally we need to add IP addresses to pvc interfaces and enable them.
On the hq router:
[admin@hq] interface pvc> /ip addr add address 2.2.2.1/24 interface pvc1
[admin@hq] interface pvc> /ip addr print
0 10.0.0.112/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 ether1
1 192.168.0.1/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 ether2
2 2.2.2.1/24 2.2.2.0 2.2.2.255 pvc1
[admin@hq] interface pvc> enable 0
and on the office router:

[admin@office] interface pvc> /ip addr add address 2.2.2.2/24 interface pvc1
[admin@office] interface pvc> /ip addr print
0 10.0.0.112/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 ether1
1 2.2.2.2/24 2.2.2.0 2.2.2.255 pvc1
[admin@office] interface pvc> enable 0
[admin@office] interface pvc>
Now we can monitor the synchronous link status:

[admin@hq] interface pvc> /ping 2.2.2.2
[admin@hq] interface pvc> /interface farsync monitor 0
card-type: T2P FarSync T-Series
state: running-normally
firmware-id: 2
firmware-version: 1.0.1
physical: X.21
cable: detected
clock: detected
input-signals: CTS
output-signals: RTS,DTR
Page 195 of 695


FrameRelay (PVC, Private Virtual Circuit) Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Description
Configuring Frame Relay Interface
Description
Notes
Frame Relay Configuration
Example with Cyclades Interface
Example with MOXA Interface
Example with MikroTik Router to MikroTik Router
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
Frame Relay is a multiplexed interface to packet switched network and is a simplified form of
Packet Switching similar in principle to X.25 in which synchronous frames of data are routed to
different destinations depending on header information. Frame Relay uses the synchronous HDLC
frame format.
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface pvc
Standards and Technologies: Frame Relay (RFC1490)
Description
To use Frame Relay interface you must have already working synchronous interface. You can read
how to set up synchronous boards supported by MikroTik RouterOS:
• Cyclades PC300 PCI Adapters
• Moxa C101 Synchronous interface
Page 196 of 695


• Moxa C502 Dual Port Synchronous interface
• Frame Relay Forum

• http://www2.rad.com/networks/1994/fram_rel/frame.htm
Configuring Frame Relay Interface

Home menu level: /interface pvc
Description
To configure frame relay, at first you should set up the synchronous interface, and then the PVC
interface.
name ( name ; default: pvcN ) - assigned name of the interface
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit of an interface
dlci ( integer ; default: 16 ) - Data Link Connection Identifier assigned to the PVC interface
interface ( name ) - Frame Relay interface
Notes
A DLCI is a channel number (Data Link Connection Identifier) which is attached to data frames to
tell the network how to route the data. Frame Relay is "statistically multiplexed", which means that
only one frame can be transmitted at a time but many logical connections can co-exist on a single
physical line. The DLCI allows the data to be logically tied to one of the connections so that once it
gets to the network, it knows where to send it.
Frame Relay Configuration
Example with Cyclades Interface

Let us consider the following network setup with MikroTik router with Cyclades PC300 interface
connected to a leased line with baseband modems and a Cisco router at the other end.
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add interface=pvc1 address=1.1.1.1 netmask=255.255.255.0
0 1.1.1.1/24 1.1.1.0 1.1.1.255 pvc1
PVC and Cyclades interface configuration

• Cyclades
[admin@MikroTik] interface cyclades> print
Page 197 of 695


0 R name="cyclades1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=frame-relay media-type=V35
clock-rate=64000 clock-source=external line-code=B8ZS framing-mode=ESF
line-build-out=0dB rx-sensitivity=short-haul frame-relay-lmi-type=ansi
frame-relay-dce=no chdlc-keepalive=10s
[admin@MikroTik] interface cyclades>
• PVC
[admin@MikroTik] interface pvc> print
0 R pvc1 1500 42 cyclades1
[admin@MikroTik] interface pvc>
• Cisco router setup

CISCO# show running-config
Current configuration...
...
!
ip subnet-zero
no ip domain-lookup
frame-relay switching
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.0.0.254 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial0
description connected to Internet
no ip address
encapsulation frame-relay IETF
frame-relay lmi-type ansi
frame-relay intf-type dce
!
interface Serial0.1 point-to-point
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
no arp frame-relay
frame-relay interface-dlci 42
!
...
end.
Send ping to MikroTik router
CISCO#ping 1.1.1.1
!!!!!
CISCO#
Example with MOXA Interface

Let us consider the following network setup with MikroTik router with MOXA C502 synchronous
interface connected to a leased line with baseband modems and a Cisco router at the other end.
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add interface=pvc1 address=1.1.1.1 netmask=255.255.255.0
Page 198 of 695


0 1.1.1.1/24 1.1.1.0 1.1.1.255 pvc1
PVC and Moxa interface configuration

• Moxa
[admin@MikroTik] interface moxa-c502> print
0 R name="moxa1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=frame-relay clock-rate=64000
clock-source=external frame-relay-lmi-type=ansi frame-relay-dce=no
cisco-hdlc-keepalive-interval=10s
1 X name="moxa-c502-2" mtu=1500 line-protocol=sync-ppp clock-rate=64000
[admin@MikroTik] interface moxa-c502>
• PVC
[admin@MikroTik] interface pvc> print
0 R pvc1 1500 42 moxa1
[admin@MikroTik] interface pvc>
CISCO router setup
...
!
ip subnet-zero
no ip domain-lookup
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.0.0.254 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial0
no ip address
!
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
no arp frame-relay
!
...
end.
CISCO#ping 1.1.1.1
!!!!!
CISCO#
Page 199 of 695


Example with MikroTik Router to MikroTik Router
Let us consider the following example:
In this example we will use two Moxa C101 synchronous cards.
Do not forget to set line-protocol for synchronous interfaces to frame-relay. To achieve proper
result, one of the synchronous interfaces must operate in DCE mode:
[admin@r1] interface moxa-c101> set 0 frame-relay-dce=yes
[admin@r1] interface moxa-c101> print
0 R name="moxa-c101-1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=frame-relay clock-rate=64000
clock-source=external frame-relay-lmi-type=ansi frame-relay-dce=yes
cisco-hdlc-keepalive-interval=10s ignore-dcd=no
[admin@r1] interface moxa-c101>
Then we need to add PVC interfaces and IP addresses.

On the R1:
[admin@r1] interface pvc> add dlci=42 interface=moxa-c101-1
[admin@r1] interface pvc> print
0 X pvc1 1500 42 moxa-c101-1
[admin@r1] interface pvc> /ip address add address 4.4.4.1/24 interface pvc1
on the R2:
[admin@r2] interface pvc> add dlci=42 interface=moxa-c101-1
[admin@r2] interface pvc> print
0 X pvc1 1500 42 moxa-c101-1
[admin@r2] interface pvc> /ip address add address 4.4.4.2/24 interface pvc1
Finally, we must enable PVC interfaces:

[admin@r1] interface pvc> enable pvc1
[admin@r1] interface pvc>
[admin@r2] interface pvc> enable pvc1
[admin@r2] interface pvc>
Troubleshooting
Description
• I cannot ping through the synchronous frame relay interface between MikroTik router
and a Cisco router
Frame Relay does not support address resolving and IETF encapsulation should be used.
Please check the configuration on the Cisco router
Page 200 of 695


General Interface Settings
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Description
Interface Status
Example
Traffic Monitoring
Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS supports a variety of Network Interface Cards as well as some virtual
interfaces (like Bonding, Bridge, VLAN etc.). Each of them has its own submenu, but there is also a
list of all interfaces where some common properties can be configured.
Description
The Manual describes general settings of MikroTik RouterOS interfaces.
Interface Status
Home menu level: /interface
name ( text ) - the name of the interface
type ( read-only: arlan | bonding | bridge | cyclades | eoip | ethernet | farsync | ipip | isdn-client |
isdn-server | l2tp-client | l2tp-server | moxa-c101 | moxa-c502 | mtsync | pc | ppp-client | ppp-server |
pppoe-client | pppoe-server | pptp-client | pptp-server | pvc | radiolan | sbe | vlan | wavelan | wireless
| xpeed ) - interface type
mtu ( integer ) - maximum transmission unit for the interface (in bytes)
rx-rate ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximum data rate for receiving data
• 0 - no limits
tx-rate ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximum data rate for transmitting data
Page 201 of 695


• 0 - no limits
Example
To see the list of all available interfaces:
1 R bridge1 bridge 0 0 1500
3 R wlan1 wlan 0 0 1500
Traffic Monitoring
Command name: /interface monitor-traffic
Description
The traffic passing through any interface can be monitored.
received-packets-per-second ( read-only: integer ) - number of packets that interface has received
in one second
received-bits-per-second ( read-only: integer ) - number of bits that interface has received in one
second
sent-packets-per-second ( read-only: integer ) - number of packets that interface has sent in one
second
sent-bits-per-second ( read-only: integer ) - number of bits that interface has sent in one second
Notes
One or more interfaces can be monitored at the same time.
To see overall traffic passing through all interfaces at time, use aggregate instead of interface
name.
Example
Multiple interface monitoring:
/interface monitor-traffic ether1,aggregate
received-packets-per-second: 9 11
received-bits-per-second: 4.39kbps 6.19kbps
sent-packets-per-second: 16 17
sent-bits-per-second: 101kbps 101kbps
Page 202 of 695


GPRS PCMCIA
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
How to make a GPRS connection
Description
Example
How to make a GPRS connection
Description
Let us consider a situation that you are in a place where no internet connection is available, but you
have access to your mobile network provider. In this case you can connect MikroTik router to your
mobile phone provider using GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) and so establish an internet
connection.
Example
• Plug the GPRS PCMCIA card (with your SIM card) into the router, turn on the router and after
it has started, see if a new port has appeared. In this case it is the serial1 port which is our
GPRS device:
[admin@MikroTik] port> print
# NAME USED-BY BAUD-RATE
0 serial0 Serial Console 115200
1 serial1 9600
[admin@MikroTik] port>
• Enter the pin code from serial-terminal (in this case, PIN code is 3663) :
/system serial-terminal serial1
AT+CPIN=”3663”
Now you should see OK on your screen. Wait for about 5 seconds and see if the green led
started to blink. Press Ctrl+Q to quit the serial-terminal.
• Change remote-address in /ppp profile, in this case to 212.93.96.65 (you should obtain it from
your mobile network operator):
/ppp profile set default remote-address=212.93.96.65
• Add a ppp client:

/interface ppp-client add dial-command=ATD phone=*99***1# \
\... modem-init="AT+CGDCONT=1,\"IP\",\"internet\"" port=serial1
• Now enable the interface and see if it is connected:

[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> enable 0
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> mo 0
Page 203 of 695


status: dialing...
status: link established
status: authenticated
uptime: 0s
idle-time: 0s
status: authenticated
uptime: 1s
idle-time: 1s
status: connected
uptime: 2s
idle-time: 2s
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client>
Check the IP addresses:
0 192.168.0.5/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 ether1
1 D 10.40.205.168/32 212.93.96.65 0.0.0.0 ppp-out1
Page 204 of 695


ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network)
Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
ISDN Hardware and Software Installation
Description
ISDN Channels
MSN and EAZ numbers
ISDN Client Interface Configuration
Description
Example
ISDN Server Interface Configuration
Description
Example
ISDN Examples
ISDN Dial-out
ISDN Dial-in
ISDN Backup
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik router can act as an ISDN client for dialing out, or as an ISDN server for accepting
incoming calls. The dial-out connections may be set as dial-on-demand or as permanent
connections (simulating a leased line). The remote IP address (provided by the ISP) can be used as
the default gateway for the router.
Specifications
Packages required: isdn , ppp
Home menu level: /interface isdn-server , /interface isdn-client
Standards and Technologies: PPP (RFC 1661)
Page 205 of 695


Related Documents
• Log Management
• PPP over ISDN

• RFC3057 - ISDN Q.921-User Adaptation Layer
ISDN Hardware and Software Installation

Command name: /driver add
Description
Please install the ISDN adapter into the PC accordingly the instructions provided by the adapter
manufacturer.
Appropriate packages have to be downloaded from MikroTik??????s web page
http://www.mikrotik.com . After all, the ISDN driver should be loaded using the /driver add
command.
MikroTik RouterOS supports passive PCI adapters with Siemens chipset:
• Eicon. Diehl Diva - diva
• Sedlbauer Speed - sedlbauer
• ELSA Quickstep 1000 - quickstep
• NETjet - netjet
• Teles - teles
• Dr. Neuhaus Niccy - niccy
• AVM - avm
• Gazel - gazel
• HFC 2BDS0 based adapters - hfc
• W6692 based adapters - w6692
For example, for the HFC based PCI card, it is enough to use /driver add name=hfc command to
get the driver loaded.
Note! ISDN ISA adapters are not supported!
Page 206 of 695


name ( name ) - name of the driver
isdn-protocol ( euro | german ; default: euro ) - data channel protocol
ISDN Channels
ISDN channels are added to the system automatically when the ISDN card driver is loaded. Each
channel corresponds to one physical 64K ISDN data channel.
The list of available ISDN channels can be viewed using the /isdn-channels print command. The
channels are named channel1, channel2, and so on. E.g., if you have two ISDN channels, and one
of them currently used by an ISDN interface, but the other available, the output should look like
this:
[admin@MikroTik] isdn-channels> print
Flags: X - disabled, E - exclusive
# NAME CHANNEL DIR.. TYPE PHONE
0 channel1 0
1 channel2 1
[admin@MikroTik] isdn-channels>
ISDN channels are very similar to PPP serial ports. Any number of ISDN interfaces can be
configured on a single channel, but only one interface can be enabled for that channel at a time. It
means that every ISDN channel is either available or used by an ISDN interface.
MSN and EAZ numbers

In Euro-ISDN a subscriber can assign more than one ISDN number to an ISDN line. For example,
an ISDN line could have the numbers 1234067 and 1234068. Each of these numbers can be used to
dial the ISDN line. These numbers are referred to as Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSN).
A similar, but separate concept is EAZ numbering, which is used in German ISDN networking.
EAZ number can be used in addition to dialed phone number to specify the required service.
For dial-out ISDN interfaces, MSN/EAZ number specifies the outgoing phone number (the calling
end). For dial-in ISDN interfaces, MSN/EAZ number specifies the phone number that will be
answered. If you are unsure about your MSN/EAZ numbers, leave them blank (it is the default).
For example, if your ISDN line has numbers 1234067 and 1234068, you could configure your
dial-in server to answer only calls to 1234068 by specifying 1234068 as your MSN number. In a
sense, MSN is just your phone number.
ISDN Client Interface Configuration

Home menu level: /interface isdn-client
Description
The ISDN client is used to connect to remote dial-in server (probably ISP) via ISDN. To set up an
ISDN dial-out connection, use the ISDN dial-out configuration menu under the submenu.
name ( name ; default: isdn-outN ) - interface name
Page 207 of 695


mru ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Receive Unit
phone ( integer ; default: "" ) - phone number to dial
msn ( integer ; default: "" ) - MSN/EAZ of ISDN line provided by the line operator
dial-on-demand ( yes | no ; default: no ) - use dialing on demand
l2-protocol ( hdlc | x75i | x75ui | x75bui ; default: hdlc ) - level 2 protocol to be used
user ( text ) - user name that will be provided to the remote server
password ( text ) - password that will be provided to the remote server
allow ( multiple choice: mschap2, mschap1, chap, pap ; default: mschap2, mschap1, chap, pap ) -
the protocol to allow the client to use for authentication
add-default-route ( yes | no ; default: no ) - add default route to remote host on connect
profile ( name ; default: default ) - profile to use when connecting to the remote server
use-peer-dns ( yes | no ; default: no ) - use or not peer DNS
bundle-128K ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - use both channels instead of just one
Example
ISDN client interfaces can be added using the add command:
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-client> add msn="142" user="test" \
\... password="test" phone="144" bundle-128K=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-client> print
0 X name="isdn-out1" mtu=1500 mru=1500 msn="142" user="test"
password="test" profile=default phone="144" l2-protocol=hdlc
bundle-128K=no dial-on-demand=no add-default-route=no use-peer-dns=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-client>
ISDN Server Interface Configuration

Home menu level: /interface isdn-client
Description
ISDN server is used to accept remote dial-in connections form ISDN clients.
name ( name ; default: isdn-inN ) - interface name
phone ( integer ; default: "" ) - phone number to dial
msn ( integer ; default: "" ) - MSN/EAZ of ISDN line provided by the line operator
l2-protocol ( hdlc | x75i | x75ui | x75bui ; default: hdlc ) - level 2 protocol to be used
Page 208 of 695


bundle-128K ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - use both channels instead of just one
authentication ( pap | chap | mschap1 | mschap2 ; default: mschap2, mschap1, chap, pap ) - used
authentication
Example
ISDN server interfaces can be added using the add command:
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-server> add msn="142" bundle-128K=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-server> print
0 X name="isdn-in1" mtu=1500 mru=1500 msn="142"
authentication=mschap2,chap,pap profile=default l2-protocol=x75bui
bundle-128K=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-server>
ISDN Examples
ISDN Dial-out
Dial-out ISDN connections allow a local router to connect to a remote dial-in server (ISP's) via
ISDN.
Let's assume you would like to set up a router that connects your local LAN with your ISP via
ISDN line. First you should load the corresponding ISDN card driver. Supposing you have an ISDN
card with a W6692-based chip:
[admin@MikroTik]> /driver add name=w6692
Now additional channels should appear. Assuming you have only one ISDN card driver loaded, you
should get following:
0 channel1 0
1 channel2 1
Suppose you would like to use dial-on-demand to dial your ISP and automatically add a default
route to it. Also, you would like to disconnect when there is more than 30s of network inactivity.
Your ISP's phone number is 12345678 and the user name for authentication is 'john'. Your ISP
assigns IP addresses automatically. Add an outgoing ISDN interface and configure it in the
following way:
[admin@mikrotik]> /interface isdn-client add name="isdn-isp" phone="12345678"
user="john" password="31337!)" add-default-route=yes dial-on-demand=yes
[admin@MikroTik] > /interface isdn-client print
0 X name="isdn-isp" mtu=1500 mru=1500 msn="" user="john" password="31337!)"
profile=default phone="12345678" l2-protocol=hdlc bundle-128K=no
dial-on-demand=yes add-default-route=yes use-peer-dns=no
Configure PPP profile.

[admin@MikroTik] ppp profile> print
Flags: * - default
0 * name="default" local-address=0.0.0.0 remote-address=0.0.0.0
Page 209 of 695


session-timeout=0s idle-timeout=0s use-compression=no
use-vj-compression=yes use-encryption=no require-encryption=no only-one=no
tx-bit-rate=0 rx-bit-rate=0 incoming-filter="" outgoing-filter=""
[admin@Mikrotik] ppp profile> set default idle-timeout=30s
If you would like to remain connected all the time, i.e., as a leased line, then set the idle-timeout to
0s.
All that remains is to enable the interface:
[admin@MikroTik] /interface set isdn-isp disabled=no
You can monitor the connection status with the following command:
[admin@MikroTik] /interface isdn-client monitor isdn-isp
ISDN Dial-in
Dial-in ISDN connections allow remote clients to connect to your router via ISDN.
Let us assume you would like to configure a router for accepting incoming ISDN calls from remote
clients. You have an Ethernet card connected to the LAN, and an ISDN card connected to the ISDN
line. First you should load the corresponding ISDN card driver. Supposing you have an ISDN card
with an HFC chip:
[admin@MikroTik] /driver add name=hfc
Now additional channels should appear. Assuming you have only one ISDN card driver loaded, you
should get the following:
0 channel1 0
1 channel2 1
Add an incoming ISDN interface and configure it in the following way:

[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-server> add msn="7542159" \
\... authentication=chap,pap bundle-128K=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-server> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 X name="isdn-in1" mtu=1500 mru=1500 msn="7542159" authentication=chap,pap
profile=default l2-protocol=hldc bundle-128K=no
Configure PPP settings and add users to router's database.

[admin@MikroTik] ppp profile> print
Flags: * - default
0 * name="default" local-address=0.0.0.0 remote-address=0.0.0.0
session-timeout=0s idle-timeout=0s use-compression=no
use-vj-compression=yes use-encryption=no require-encryption=no only-one=no
tx-bit-rate=0 rx-bit-rate=0 incoming-filter="" outgoing-filter=""
[admin@Mikrotik] ppp profile> set default idle-timeout=5s local-address=10.99.8.1 \
\... remote-address=10.9.88.1
Add user 'john' to the router's user database. Assuming that the password is '31337!)':
[admin@MikroTik] ppp secret> add name=john password="31337!)" service=isdn
[admin@MikroTik] ppp secret> print
Flags: X - disabled
# NAME SERVICE CALLER-ID PASSWORD PROFILE
Page 210 of 695


0 john isdn 31337!) default
[admin@MikroTik] ppp secret>
Check the status of the ISDN server interface and wait for the call:
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-server> monitor isdn-in1
status: Waiting for call...
ISDN Backup
Backup systems are used in specific cases, when you need to maintain a connection, even if a fault
occurs. For example, if someone cuts the wires, the router can automatically connect to a different
interface to continue its work. Such a backup is based on an utility that monitors the status of the
connection - netwatch, and a script, which runs the netwatch.
This is an example of how to make simple router backup system. In this example we'll use an ISDN
connection for purpose to backup a standard Ethernet connection. You can, however, use instead of
the ISDN connection anything you need - PPP, for example. When the Ethernet fail (the router nr.1
cannot ping the router nr.2 to 2.2.2.2 (see picture) the router nr.1 will establish an ISDN connection,
so-called backup link, to continue communicating with the nr. 2.
You must keep in mind, that in our case there are just two routers, but this system can be extended
to support more different networks.
The backup system example is shown in the following picture:
Page 211 of 695


In this case the backup interface is an ISDN connection, but in real applications it can be
substituted by a particular connection. Follow the instructions below on how to set up the backup
link:
• At first, you need to set up ISDN connection. To use ISDN, the ISDN card driver must be
loaded:
[admin@MikroTik] driver> add name=hfc
The PPP connection must have a new user added to the routers one and two:
[admin@Mikrotik] ppp secret> add name=backup password=backup service=isdn
An ISDN server and PPP profile must be set up on the second router:
[admin@MikroTik] ppp profile> set default local-address=3.3.3.254
remote-address=3.3.3.1
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-server> add name=backup msn=7801032
An ISDN client must be added to the first router:
[admin@MikroTik] interface isdn-client>
add name=backup user="backup" password="backup" phone=7801032 msn=7542159
• Then, you have to set up static routes

Use the /ip route add command to add the required static routes and comments to them.
Comments are required for references in scripts.
The first router:
Page 212 of 695


[admin@Mikrotik] ip route> add gateway 2.2.2.2 comment "route1"
The second router:
[admin@Mikrotik] ip route> add gateway 2.2.2.1 comment "route1" dst-address 1.1.1.0/24
• And finally, you have to add scripts.

Add scripts in the submenu /system script using the following commands:
The first router:
[admin@Mikrotik] system script> add name=connection_down \
\... source={/interface enable backup; /ip route set route1 gateway 3.3.3.254}
[admin@Mikrotik] system script> add name=connection_up \
\... source={/interface disable backup; /ip route set route1 gateway 2.2.2.2}
The second router:
[admin@Mikrotik] system script> add name=connection_down \
\... source={/ip route set route1 gateway 3.3.3.1}
[admin@Mikrotik] system script> add name=connection_up \
\... source={/ip route set route1 gateway 2.2.2.1}
• To get all above listed to work, set up Netwatch utility. To use netwatch, you need the
advanced tools feature package installed. Please upload it to the router and reboot. When
installed, the advanced-tools package should be listed under the /system package print list.
Add the following settings to the first router:
[admin@Mikrotik] tool netwatch> add host=2.2.2.1 interval=5s \
\... up-script=connection_up down-script=connection_down
Add the following settings to the second router:
[admin@Mikrotik] tool netwatch> add host=2.2.2.2 interval=5s \
\... up-script=connection_up down-script=connection_down
Page 213 of 695


M3P
Document revision 0.3.0 (Wed Mar 03 16:07:55 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Setup
Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik Packet Packer Protocol (M3P) optimizes the data rate usage of links using protocols
that have a high overhead per packet transmitted. The basic purpose of this protocol is to better
enable wireless networks to transport VoIP traffic and other traffic that uses small packet sizes of
around 100 bytes.
M3P features:
• enabled by a per interface setting
• other routers with MikroTik Discovery Protocol enabled will broadcast M3P settings
• significantly increases bandwidth availability over some wireless links by approximately four
times
• offer configuration settings to customize this feature
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip packing
Standards and Technologies: M3P
Related Documents
• MNDP
Page 214 of 695


Description
The wireless protocol IEEE 802.11 and, to a lesser extent, Ethernet protocol have a high overhead
per packet as for each packet it is necessary to access the media, check for errors, resend in case of
errors occured, and send network maintenance messages (network maintenance is applicable only
for wireless). The MikroTik Packet Packer Protocol improves network performance by aggregating
many small packets into a big packet, thereby minimizing the network per packet overhead cost.
The M3P is very effective when the average packet size is 50-300 bytes the common size of VoIP
packets.
Features:
• may work on any Ethernet-like media
• is disabled by default for all interfaces
• when older version on the RouterOS are upgraded from a version without M3P to a version
with discovery, current wireless interfaces will not be automatically enabled for M3P
• small packets going to the same MAC level destination (regardless of IP destination) are
collected according to the set configuration and aggregated into a large packet according to the
set size
• the packet is sent as soon as the maximum aggregated-packet packet size is reached or a
maximum time of 15ms (+/-5ms)
Setup
Home menu level: /ip packing
Description
M3P is working only between MikroTik routers, which are discovered with MikroTik Neighbor
Discovery Protocol (MNDP). When M3P is enabled router needs to know which of its neighbouring
hosts have enabled M3P. MNDP is used to negotiate unpacking settings of neighbours, therefore it
has to be enabled on interfaces you wish to enable M3P. Consult MNDP manual on how to do it.
aggregated-size ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - the maximum aggregated packet's size
interface ( name ) - interface to enable M3P on
packing ( none | simple | compress-all | compress-headers ; default: simple ) - specifies the packing
mode
• none - no packing is applied to packets
• simple - aggregate many small packets into one large packet, minimizing network overhead per
packet
• compress-headers - further increase network performance by compressing IP packet header
(consumes more CPU resources)
• compress-all - increase network performance even more by using header and data compression
(extensive CPU usage)
Page 215 of 695


unpacking ( none | simple | compress-all | compress-headers ; default: simple ) - specifies the
unpacking mode
• none - accept only usual packets
• simple - accept usual packets and aggregated packets without compression
• compress-headers - accept all packets except those with payload compression
• compress-all - accept all packets
Notes
Level of packet compression increases like this: none -> simple -> compress-headers ->
compress-all.
When router has to send a packet it choses minimum level of packet compression from what its own
packing type is set and what other router's unpacking type is set. Same is with aggregated-size
setting - minimum value of both ends is actual maximum size of aggregated packet used.
aggregated-size can be bigger than interface MTU if network device allows it to be (i.e., it supports
sending and receiving frames bigger than 1514 bytes)
Example
To enable maximal compression on the ether1 interface:
[admin@MikroTik] ip packing> add interface=ether1 packing=compress-all \
\... unpacking=compress-all
[admin@MikroTik] ip packing> print
Flags: X - disabled
# INTERFACE PACKING UNPACKING AGGREGATED-SIZE
0 ether1 compress-all compress-all 1500
[admin@MikroTik] ip packing>
Page 216 of 695


MOXA C101 Synchronous Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Description
Notes
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
Synchronous Link Application Examples
MikroTik Router to MikroTik Router
MikroTik Router to Cisco Router
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports MOXA C101 Synchronous 4Mb/s Adapter hardware. The V.35
synchronous interface is the standard for VSAT and other satellite modems. However, you must
check with the satellite system supplier for the modem interface type.
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface moxa-c101
Standards and Technologies: Cisco/HDLC-X.25 (RFC 1356) , Frame Relay (RFC1490) , PPP
(RFC-1661) , PPP (RFC-1662)
Related Documents
Page 217 of 695


• Log Management
Description
You can install up to four MOXA C101 synchronous cards in one PC box, if you have so many
slots and IRQs available. Assuming you have all necessary packages and licenses installed, in most
cases it should to be done nothing at that point (all drivers are loaded automatically). However, if
you have a non Plug-and-Play ISA card, the corresponding driver requires to be loaded.
MOXA C101 PCI variant cabling

The MOXA C101 PCI requires different from MOXA C101 ISA cable. It can be made using the
following table:
DB25f Signal Direction V.35m

4 RTS OUT C
5 CTS IN D
6 DSR IN E
7 GND - B
8 DCD IN F
10 TxDB OUT S
11 TxDA OUT P
12 RxDB IN T
13 RxDA IN R
14 TxCB IN AA
16 TxCA IN Y
20 DTR OUT H
22 RxCB IN X
23 RxCA IN V
short 9 and 25 pin
For more information about the MOXA C101 synchronous 4Mb/s adapter hardware please see:
• http://www.moxa.com/product/sync/C101.htm - the product on-line documentation
• C101 SuperSync Board User's Manual the user's manual in PDF format

Page 218 of 695


Description
Moxa c101 synchronous interface is shown under the interfaces list with the name moxa-c101-N
name ( name ; default: moxa-c101-N ) - interface name
cisco-hdlc-keepalive-interval ( time ; default: 10s ) - keepalive period in seconds
clock-rate ( integer ; default: 64000 ) - speed of internal clock
clock-source ( external | internal | tx-from-rx | tx-internal ; default: external ) - clock source
frame-relay-dce ( yes | no ; default: no ) - operate or not in DCE mode
frame-relay-lmi-type ( ansi | ccitt ; default: ansi ) - Frame-relay Local Management Interface type:
• ansi - set LMI type to ANSI-617d (also known as Annex A)
• ccitt - set LMI type to CCITT Q933a (also known as Annex A)
ignore-dcd ( yes | no ; default: no ) - ignore or not DCD
line-protocol ( cisco-hdlc | frame-relay | sync-ppp ; default: sync-ppp ) - line protocol name
Notes
If you purchased the MOXA C101 Synchronous card from MikroTik, you have received a V.35
cable with it. This cable should work for all standard modems, which have V.35 connections. For
synchronous modems, which have a DB-25 connection, you should use a standard DB-25 cable.
The MikroTik driver for the MOXA C101 Synchronous adapter allows you to unplug the V.35
cable from one modem and plug it into another modem with a different clock speed, and you do not
need to restart the interface or router.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface> moxa-c101
0 R name="moxa-c101-1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=sync-ppp clock-rate=64000
cisco-hdlc-keepalive-interval=10s ignore-dcd=no

[admin@MikroTik] interface moxa-c101> monitor 0
dtr: yes
rts: yes
cts: no
dsr: no
dcd: no
Connect a communication device, e.g., a baseband modem, to the V.35 port and turn it on. If the
link is working properly the status of the interface is:
Page 219 of 695


dtr: yes
rts: yes
cts: yes
dsr: yes
dcd: yes
Troubleshooting
Description
• The synchronous interface does not show up under the interfaces list

Let us consider the following network setup with two MikroTik Routers connected to a leased line
The driver for MOXA C101 card should be loaded and the interface should be enabled according to
the instructions given above. The IP addresses assigned to the synchronous interface should be as
follows:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 1.1.1.1/32 interface wan \
0 10.0.0.254/24 10.0.0.254 10.0.0.255 ether2
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.254 192.168.0.255 ether1
2 1.1.1.1/32 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.255 wan
The default route should be set to the gateway router 1.1.1.2:

0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 1.1.1.2 1 wan
1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 10.0.0.254 1 ether2
2 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 192.168.0.254 0 ether1
3 DC 1.1.1.2/32 r 0.0.0.0 0 wan
Page 220 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 1.1.1.2/32 interface moxa \
0 10.1.1.12/24 10.1.1.12 10.1.1.255 Public
1 1.1.1.2/32 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 moxa

follows:
0 10.0.0.254/24 10.0.0.254 10.0.0.255 ether2
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.254 192.168.0.255 ether1
2 1.1.1.1/32 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.255 wan

0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 1.1.1.2 1 wan
1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 10.0.0.254 0 ether2
2 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 192.168.0.254 0 ether1
3 DC 1.1.1.2/32 r 1.1.1.1 0 wan
The configuration of the Cisco router at the other end (part of the configuration) is:
...
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.1.1.12 255.255.255.0
!
Page 221 of 695


interface Serial0
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
!
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.1.1.254
!
...
end
CISCO#

CISCO#ping 1.1.1.1
!!!!!
CISCO#
Note! Keep in mind that for the point-to-point link the network mask is set to 32 bits, the argument
network is set to the IP address of the other end, and the broadcast address is set to
255.255.255.255.
Page 222 of 695


MOXA C502 Dual-port Synchronous Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Description
Notes
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the MOXA C502 PCI Dual-port Synchronous 8Mb/s Adapter
hardware. The V.35 synchronous interface is the standard for VSAT and other satellite modems.
However, you must check with the satellite system supplier for the modem interface type.
Specifications
Standards and Technologies: Cisco/HDLC-X.25 (RFC 1356) , Frame Relay (RFC1490) , PPP
(RFC-1661) , PPP (RFC-1662)
Related Documents
Page 223 of 695


• Log Management
Description
You can install up to four MOXA C502 synchronous cards in one PC box, if you have so many PCI
slots available. Assuming you have all necessary packages and licences installed, in most cases it
should to be done nothing at that point (all drivers are loaded automatically).
For more information about the MOXA C502 Dual-port Synchronous 8Mb/s Adapter hardware
please see:
• http://www.moxa.com/product/sync/C502.htm - the product on-line documentation
• C502 Dual Port Sync Board User's Manuall the user's manual in PDF format

Description
Moxa c502 synchronous interface is shown under the interfaces list with the name moxa-c502-N
name ( name ; default: moxa-c502-N ) - interface name
cisco-hdlc-keepalive-interval ( time ; default: 10s ) - keepalive period in seconds
clock-rate ( integer ; default: 64000 ) - speed of internal clock
clock-source ( external | internal | tx-from-rx | tx-internal ; default: external ) - clock source
frame-relay-dce ( yes | no ; default: no ) - operate or not in DCE mode
frame-relay-lmi-type ( ansi | ccitt ; default: ansi ) - Frame-relay Local Management Interface type:
• ansi - set LMI type to ANSI-617d (also known as Annex A)
• ccitt - set LMI type to CCITT Q933a (also known as Annex A)
ignore-dcd ( yes | no ; default: no ) - ignore or not DCD
line-protocol ( cisco-hdlc | frame-relay | sync-ppp ; default: sync-ppp ) - line protocol name
Notes
There will be TWO interfaces for each MOXA C502 card since the card has TWO ports.
The MikroTik driver for the MOXA C502 Dual Synchronous adapter allows you to unplug the
V.35 cable from one modem and plug it into another modem with a different clock speed, and you
do not need to restart the interface or router.
Page 224 of 695


Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface> moxa-c502

dtr: yes
rts: yes
cts: no
dsr: no
dcd: no
Connect a communication device, e.g., a baseband modem, to the V.35 port and turn it on. If the
link is working properly the status of the interface is:
dtr: yes
rts: yes
cts: yes
dsr: yes
dcd: yes
Troubleshooting
Description
• The synchronous interface does not show up under the interfaces list

Let us consider the following network setup with two MikroTik Routers connected to a leased line
follows:
Page 225 of 695


0 10.0.0.254/24 10.0.0.254 10.0.0.255 ether2
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.254 192.168.0.255 ether1
2 1.1.1.1/32 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.255 wan

[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add gateway 1.1.1.2 interface wan
0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 1.1.1.2 1 wan
1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 10.0.0.254 1 ether2
2 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 192.168.0.254 0 ether1
3 DC 1.1.1.2/32 r 0.0.0.0 0 wan

[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address 1.1.1.2/32 interface moxa \
0 10.1.1.12/24 10.1.1.12 10.1.1.255 Public
1 1.1.1.2/32 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.255 moxa

follows:
0 10.0.0.254/24 10.0.0.254 10.0.0.255 ether2
1 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.254 192.168.0.255 ether1
2 1.1.1.1/32 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.255 wan
Page 226 of 695



0 S 0.0.0.0/0 r 1.1.1.2 1 wan
1 DC 10.0.0.0/24 r 10.0.0.254 0 ether2
2 DC 192.168.0.0/24 r 192.168.0.254 0 ether1
3 DC 1.1.1.2/32 r 1.1.1.1 0 wan
The configuration of the Cisco router at the other end (part of the configuration) is:
...
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.1.1.12 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial0
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.252
!
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.1.1.254
!
...
end
CISCO#

CISCO#ping 1.1.1.1
!!!!!
CISCO#
Note! Keep in mind that for the point-to-point link the network mask is set to 32 bits, the argument
network is set to the IP address of the other end, and the broadcast address is set to
255.255.255.255.
Page 227 of 695


PPP and Asynchronous Interfaces
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Serial Port Configuration
Notes
Example
PPP Server Setup
Description
Example
PPP Client Setup
Description
Notes
Example
PPP Application Example
Client - Server Setup
General Information
Summary
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) provides a method for transmitting datagrams over serial
point-to-point links. Physically it relies on com1 and com2 ports from standard PC hardware
configurations. These appear as serial0 and serial1 automatically. You can add more serial ports to
use the router for a modem pool using these adapters:
• MOXA ( http://www.moxa.com ) Smartio CP-132 2-port PCI multiport asynchronous board
with maximum of 8 ports (4 cards)
• MOXA ( http://www.moxa.com ) Smartio C104H, CP-114 or CT-114 4-port PCI multiport
asynchronous board with maximum of 16 ports (4 cards)
• MOXA ( http://www.moxa.com ) Smartio C168H, CP-168H or CP-168U 8-port PCI multiport
• Cyclades ( http://www.cyclades.com ) Cyclom-Y Series 4 to 32 port PCI multiport
Page 228 of 695


• Cyclades ( http://www.cyclades.com ) Cyclades-Z Series 16 to 64 port PCI multiport
• TCL ( http://www.thetcl.com ) DataBooster 4 or 8 port High Speed Buffered PCI
Communication Controllers
Specifications
Packages required: ppp
Home menu level: /interface ppp-client , /interface ppp-server
Standards and Technologies: PPP (RFC 1661)
Related Documents
• Log Management
• AAA
• http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2138.txt?number=2138
Serial Port Configuration

Home menu level: /port
name ( name ; default: serialN ) - port name
used-by ( read-only: text ) - shows the user of the port. Only free ports can be used in PPP setup
baud-rate ( integer ; default: 9600 ) - maximal data rate of the port
data-bits ( 7 | 8 ; default: 8 ) - number of bits per character transmitted
parity ( none | even | odd ; default: none ) - character parity check method
stop-bits ( 1 | 2 ; default: 1 ) - number of stop bits after each character transmitted
flow-control ( none | hardware | xon-xoff ; default: hardware ) - flow control method
Notes
Keep in mind that baud-rate, data-bits, parity, stop-bits and flow control parameters must be the
same for both communicating sides.
Page 229 of 695


Example
[admin@MikroTik] > /port print
1 databooster1 9600
2 databooster2 9600
3 databooster3 9600
4 databooster4 9600
5 databooster5 9600
6 databooster6 9600
7 databooster7 9600
8 databooster8 9600
9 cycladesA1 9600
10 cycladesA2 9600
11 cycladesA3 9600
12 cycladesA4 9600
13 cycladesA5 9600
14 cycladesA6 9600
15 cycladesA7 9600
16 cycladesA8 9600
[admin@MikroTik] > set 9 baud-rate=38400
[admin@MikroTik] >
PPP Server Setup

Home menu level: /interface ppp-server
Description
PPP server provides a remode connection service for users. When dialing in, the users can be
authenticated locally using the local user database in the /user menu, or at the RADIUS server
specified in the /ip ppp settings.
port ( name ; default: (unknown) ) - serial port
authentication ( multiple choice: mschap2, mschap1, chap, pap ; default: mschap2, mschap1,
chap, pap ) - authentication protocol
profile ( name ; default: default ) - profile name used for the link
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit. Maximum packet size to be
transmitted
null-modem ( no | yes ; default: no ) - enable/disable null-modem mode (when enabled, no modem
initialization strings are sent)
modem-init ( text ; default: "" ) - modem initialization string. You may use "s11=40" to improve
dialing speed
ring-count ( integer ; default: 1 ) - number of rings to wait before answering phone
name ( name ; default: ppp-inN ) - interface name for reference
Example
You can add a PPP server using the add command:
Page 230 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server> add name=test port=serial1
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server> print
0 X name="test" mtu=1500 mru=1500 port=serial1
authentication=mschap2,chap,pap profile=default modem-init=""
ring-count=1 null-modem=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server> enable 0
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server> monitor test
status: "waiting for call..."
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server>
PPP Client Setup

Home menu level: /interface ppp-client
Description
The section describes PPP clients configuration routines.
port ( name ; default: (unknown) ) - serial port
user ( text ; default: "" ) - P2P user name on the remote server to use for dialout
password ( text ; default: "" ) - P2P user password on the remote server to use for dialout
profile ( name ; default: default ) - local profile to use for dialout
phone ( integer ; default: "" ) - phone number for dialout
tone-dial ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - defines whether use tone dial or pulse dial
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit. Maximum packet size to be
transmitted
null-modem ( no | yes ; default: no ) - enable/disable null-modem mode (when enabled, no modem
initialization strings are sent)
modem-init ( text ; default: "" ) - modem initialization strings. You may use "s11=40" to improve
dialing speed
dial-on-demand ( yes | no ; default: no ) - enable/disable dial on demand
add-default-route ( yes | no ; default: no ) - add PPP remote address as a default route
use-peer-dns ( yes | no ; default: no ) - use DNS server settings from the remote server
Notes
Additional client profiles must be configured on the server side for clients to accomplish logon
procedure. For more information see Related Documents section.
PPP client profiles must match at least partially (local-address and values related to encryption
should match) with corresponding remote server values.
Page 231 of 695


Example
You can add a PPP client using the add command:
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> add name=test user=test port=serial1 \
\... add-default-route=yes
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> print
0 X name="test" mtu=1500 mru=1500 port=serial1 user="test" password=""
profile=default phone="" tone-dial=yes modem-init="" null-modem=no
dial-on-demand=no add-default-route=yes use-peer-dns=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> monitor test
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> monitor 0
status: "dialing out..."
PPP Application Example
Client - Server Setup

In this example we will consider the following network setup:
For a typical server setup we need to add one user to the R1 and configure the PPP server.
[admin@MikroTik] ppp secret> add name=test password=test local-address=3.3.3.1 \
[admin@MikroTik] ppp secret> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="test" service=any caller-id="" password="test" profile=default
local-address=3.3.3.1 remote-address=3.3.3.2 routes=""
[admin@MikroTik] ppp secret> /int ppp-server
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server> add port=serial1 disabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server> print
0 name="ppp-in1" mtu=1500 mru=1500 port=serial1
authentication=mschap2,mschap1,chap,pap profile=default modem-init=""
ring-count=1 null-modem=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-server>
Now we need to setup the client to connect to the server:

[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> add port=serial1 user=test password=test \
\... phone=132
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> print
0 X name="ppp-out1" mtu=1500 mru=1500 port=serial1 user="test"
password="test" profile=default phone="132" tone-dial=yes
modem-init="" null-modem=no dial-on-demand=no add-default-route=no
use-peer-dns=no
After a short duration of time the routers will be able to ping each other:
[admin@MikroTik] interface ppp-client> /ping 3.3.3.1
Page 232 of 695


RadioLAN 5.8GHz Wireless Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Description
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
Wireless Network Applications
Point-to-Point Setup with Routing
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the following RadioLAN 5.8GHz Wireless Adapter hardware:
• RadioLAN ISA card (Model 101)
• RadioLAN PCMCIA card
For more information about the RadioLAN adapter hardware please see the relevant User???s
Guides and Technical Reference Manuals.
Specifications
Packages required: radiolan
Home menu level: /interface radiolan
Related Documents
• Log Management
Page 233 of 695


Description
Installing the Wireless Adapter

These installation instructions apply to non-Plug-and-Play ISA cards. If You have a Plug-and-Play
compliant system AND PnP OS Installed option in system BIOS is set to Yes AND you have a
Plug-and-Play compliant ISA or PCI card (using PCMCIA or CardBus card with Plug-and-Play
compliant adapter), the driver should be loaded automatically. If it is not, these instructions may
also apply to your system.
The basic installation steps of the wireless adapter should be as follows:
1. Check the system BIOS settings for peripheral devices, like, Parallel or Serial communication
ports. Disable them, if you plan to use IRQ's assigned to them by the BIOS.
2. Use the RLProg.exe to set the IRQ and Base Port address of the RadioLAN ISA card (Model
101). RLProg must not be run from a DOS window. Use a separate computer or a bootable
floppy to run the RLProg utility and set the hardware parameters. The factory default values of
I/O 0x300 and IRQ 10 might conflict with other devices.
Please note, that not all combinations of I/O base addresses and IRQs may work on your
motherboard. As it has been observed, the IRQ 5 and I/O 0x300 work in most cases.

Home menu level: /interface ratiolan
Description
To set the wireless interface for working with another wireless card in a point-to-point link, you
should set the following parameters:
• The Service Set Identifier. It should match the sid of the other card.
• The Distance should be set to that of the link. For example, if you have 6 km link, use distance
4.7 km - 6.6 km.
All other parameters can be left as default. You can monitor the list of neighbors having the same
sid and being within the radio range.
name ( name ; default: radiolanN ) - assigned interface name
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address
distance ( 0-150m | 10.2km-13.0km | 2.0km-2.9km | 4.7km-6.6km | 1.1km-2.0km | 150m-1.1km |
2.9km-4.7km | 6.6km-10.2km ; default: 0-150m ) - distance setting for the link
rx-diversity ( enabled | disabled ; default: disabled ) - receive diversity
tx-diversity ( enabled | disabled ; default: disabled ) - transmit diversity
Page 234 of 695


default-destination ( ap | as-specified | first-ap | first-client | no-destination ; default: first-client )
- default destination. It sets the destination where to send the packet if it is not for a client in the
radio network
default-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - MAC address of a host in the
radio network where to send the packet, if it is for none of the radio clients
max-retries ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - maximum retries before dropping the packet
sid ( text ) - Service Identifier
card-name ( text ) - card name
arp ( disabled | enabled | proxy-arp | reply-only ; default: enabled ) - Address Resolution Protocol,
one of the:
• disabled - the interface will not use ARP protocol
• enabled - the interface will use ARP protocol
• proxy-arp - the interface will be an ARP proxy (see corresponding manual)
• reply-only - the interface will only reply to the requests originated to its own IP addresses, but
neighbor MAC addresses will be gathered from /ip arp statically set table only.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan> print
0 R name="radiolan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:A0:D4:20:4B:E7 arp=enabled
card-name="00A0D4204BE7" sid="bbbb" default-destination=first-client
default-address=00:00:00:00:00:00 distance=0-150m max-retries=15
tx-diversity=disabled rx-diversity=disabled
[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan>
You can monitor the status of the wireless interface:

[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan> monitor radiolan1
default: 00:00:00:00:00:00
valid: no
Here, the wireless interface card has not found any neighbor.
[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan> set 0 sid ba72 distance 4.7km-6.6km
[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan> print
0 R name="radiolan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:A0:D4:20:4B:E7 arp=enabled
card-name="00A0D4204BE7" sid="ba72" default-destination=first-client
default-address=00:00:00:00:00:00 distance=4.7km-6.6km max-retries=15
tx-diversity=disabled rx-diversity=disabled
[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan> monitor 0
default: 00:A0:D4:20:3B:7F
valid: yes
Now we'll monitor other cards with the same sid within range:
[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan> neighbor radiolan1 print
Flags: A - access-point, R - registered, U - registered-to-us,
D - our-default-destination
NAME ADDRESS ACCESS-POINT
D 00A0D4203B7F 00:A0:D4:20:3B:7F
Page 235 of 695


You can test the link by pinging the neighbor by its MAC address:
[admin@MikroTik] interface radiolan> ping 00:a0:d4:20:3b:7f radiolan1 \
\... size=1500 count=50
sent: 1
successfully-sent: 1
max-retries: 0
average-retries: 0
min-retries: 0
sent: 11
max-retries: 0
average-retries: 0
min-retries: 0
sent: 21
max-retries: 0
average-retries: 0
min-retries: 0
sent: 31
max-retries: 0
average-retries: 0
min-retries: 0
sent: 41
max-retries: 0
average-retries: 0
min-retries: 0
sent: 50
max-retries: 0
average-retries: 0
min-retries: 0
Troubleshooting
Description
• The radiolan interface does not show up under the interfaces list
Obtain the required license for RadioLAN 5.8GHz wireless feature
• The wireless card does not obtain the MAC address of the default destination
Check the cabling and antenna alignment
Wireless Network Applications
Point-to-Point Setup with Routing

Let us consider the following network setup:
Page 236 of 695


The minimum configuration required for the RadioLAN interfaces of both routers is:
1. Setting the Service Set Identifier (up to alphanumeric characters). In our case we use SSID
"ba72"
2. Setting the distance parameter, in our case we have 6km link.
The IP addresses assigned to the wireless interface of Router#1 should be from the network
10.1.0.0/30, e.g.:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address=10.1.0.1/30 interface=radiolan1
0 10.1.1.12/24 10.1.1.0 10.1.1.255 ether1
1 10.1.0.1/30 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.3 radiolan1
The default route should be set to the gateway router 10.1.1.254. A static route should be added for
the network 192.168.0.0/24:
comment copy-from disabled distance dst-address netmask preferred-source
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add gateway=10.1.1.254 preferred-source=10.1.0.1
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> add dst-address=192.168.0.0/24 gateway=10.1.0.2 \
\... preferred-source=10.1.0.1
0 S 0.0.0.0/0 u 10.1.1.254 1 radiolan1
1 S 192.168.0.0/24 r 10.1.0.2 1 radiolan1
2 DC 10.1.0.0/30 r 0.0.0.0 0 radiolan1
3 DC 10.1.1.0/24 r 0.0.0.0 0 ether1
The Router#2 should have addresses 10.1.0.2/30 and 192.168.0.254/24 assigned to the radiolan and
Page 237 of 695


Ethernet interfaces respectively. The default route should be set to 10.1.0.1
Page 238 of 695


Sangoma Synchronous Cards
Document revision 0.4 (Wed Oct 13 11:47:29 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the following Sangoma Technologies WAN adapters:
• Sangoma S5141 (dual-port) and S5142 (quad-port) PCI RS232/V.35/X.21 (4Mbit/s - primary
port and 512Kbit/s - secondary ones)
• Sangoma S5148 (single-port) and S5147 (dual-port) PCI E1/T1
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface sangoma
Standards and Technologies: X.21 , V.35 , T1/E1/G.703 , Frame Relay , PPP , Cisco-HDLC
Related Documents
• Log Management

Home menu level: /interface sangoma
Description
Page 239 of 695


With the introduction of 2.8 release, MikroTik RouterOS supports wide range of Sangoma
Technologies WANPIPE cards. These cards provide a router with the ability to communicate over
T1, E1, RS232, V.35 and X.21 links directly, without the need of external CSU/DSU equipment.
active-channels ( all | integer ; default: all ) - for T1/E1 channels only. Specifies active E1/T1
channel set
chdlc-keepalive ( time ; default: 10s ) - Cisco-HDLC keepalive interval in seconds
clock-source ( internal | external ; default: external ) - specifies whether the card should rely on
supplied clock or generate its own
Protocol type
framing mode ( CRC4 | D4 | ESF | ESF-JAPAN | Non-CRC4 | Unframed ; default: ESF ) - for
T1/E1 channels only. The frame mode:
• CRC4 - Cyclic Redundancy Check 4-bit (E1 Signaling, Europe)
• D4 - Fourth Generation Channel Bank (48 Voice Channels on 2 T-1s or 1 T-1c)
• ESF - Extended Superframe Format
• Non-CRC4 - plain Cyclic Redundancy Check
• Unframed - do not check frame integrity
line-build-out ( 0dB | 7.5dB | 15dB | 22.5dB | 110ft | 220ft | 330ft | 440ft | 550ft | 660ft | E1-75 |
E1-120 ; default: 0dB ) - for T1/E1 channels only. Line Build Out Signal Level.
line-code ( AMI | B8ZS | HDB3 ; default: B8ZS ) - for T1/E1 channels only. Line modulation
method:
• AMI - Alternate Mark Inversion
• B8ZS - Binary 8-Zero Substitution
• HDB3 - High Density Bipolar 3 Code (ITU-T)
media-type ( E1 | T1 | RS232 | V35 ; default: V35 ) - the hardware media used for this interface
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit for the interface
name ( name ; default: sangomaN ) - descriptive interface name
Page 240 of 695


LMC/SBEI Synchronous Interfaces
Document revision 0.3 (Wed Oct 13 13:18:32 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Connecting two MT routers via T1 crossover
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the following Lanmedia Corp (LMC)/SBE Inc interfaces:
• LMC/SBEI wanPCI-1T3 PCI T3 (also known as DS3, 44.736Mbps)
• LMC/SBEI wanPCI-1T1E1 PCI T1/E1 (also known as DS1 or LMC1200P, 1.544 Mbps or
2.048 Mbps)
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface sbe
Standards and Technologies: T1/E1/T3/G.703 , Frame Relay , PPP , Cisco-HDLC
Related Documents
• Log Management

Home menu level: /interface sbe
Page 241 of 695


Description
With the introduction of 2.8 release, MikroTik RouterOS supports popular SBEI wanPCI-1T3 and
wanPCI-1T1E1 cards. These cards provide a router with the ability to communicate over T1, E1
and T3 links directly, without the need of external CSU/DSU equipment.
chdlc-keepalive ( time ; default: 10s ) - specifies the keepalive interval for Cisco HDLC protocol
circuit-type ( e1 | e1-cas | e1-plain | e1-unframed | t1 | t1-unframed ; default: e1 ) - the circuit type
particular interface is connected to
clock-source ( internal | external ; default: external ) - specifies whether the card should rely on
supplied clock or generate its own
crc32 ( yes | no ; default: no ) - Specifies whether to use CRC32 error correction algorithm or not
Protocol type
line-protocol ( cisco-hdlc | frame-relay | sync-ppp ; default: sync-ppp ) - encapsulated line protocol
long-cable ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether to use signal phase shift for very long links
mtu ( integer : 68 ..1500 ; default: 1500 ) - IP protocol Maximum Transmission Unit
name ( name ; default: sbeN ) - unique interface name.
scrambler ( yes | no ; default: no ) - when enabled, makes the card unintelligible to anyone without
a special receiver
General Information
Connecting two MT routers via T1 crossover

In the following example we will configure two routers to talk to each other via T1 link. The routers
are named R1 and R2 with the addresses of 10.10.10.1/24 and 10.10.10.2/24, respectively. Cisco
HDLC will be used as incapsulation protocol and circuit type will be regular T1.
First, we need to configure synchronous interfaces on both routers. Keep in mind, that one of the
interfaces needs to be set to use its internal clock.
• On R1 router:
[admin@MikroTik] > /interface sbe set sbe1 line-protocol=cisco-hdlc \ \...
clock-source=internal circuit-type=t1 disabled=no [admin@R1] > /interface sbe print
Flags: X - disabled, R - running 0 R name="sbe1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=cisco-hdlc
clock-rate=64000 clock-source=internal crc32=no long-cable=no scrambler=no
circuit-type=t1 frame-relay-lmi-type=ansi frame-relay-dce=no chdlc-keepalive=10s
[admin@R1] >
• On R2 router:
Page 242 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] > /interface sbe set sbe1 line-protocol=cisco-hdlc \ \...
circuit-type=t1 disabled=no [admin@R2] > /interface sbe print Flags: X - disabled, R
- running 0 R name="sbe1" mtu=1500 line-protocol=cisco-hdlc clock-rate=64000
clock-source=external crc32=no long-cable=no scrambler=no circuit-type=t1
frame-relay-lmi-type=ansi frame-relay-dce=no chdlc-keepalive=10s [admin@R2] >
Then, we should assign IP addresses to both interfaces.

• On R1 router:
[admin@R1] > /ip address add address 10.10.10.1/24 interface=sbe1
• On R2 router:
[admin@R1] > /ip address add address 10.10.10.2/24 interface=sbe1
Finally, we could test connection by issuing ping command from R1 router:

[admin@R1] > /ping 10.10.10.2
[admin@R2] >
Page 243 of 695


Wireless Client and Wireless Access Point Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Description
Notes
Example
Nstreme Settings
Description
Notes
Example
Nstreme2 Group Settings
Description
Notes
Example
Registration Table
Description
Example
Connect List
Description
Access List
Description
Notes
Example
Info
Description
Notes
Example
Virtual Access Point Interface
Description
Page 244 of 695


Notes
WDS Interface Configuration
Description
Notes
Example
Align
Description
Notes
Example
Align Monitor
Description
Example
Frequency Monitor
Description
Example
Manual Transmit Power Table
Description
Example
Network Scan
Description
Example
Security Profiles
Description
Notes
Sniffer
Description
Sniffer Sniff
Description
Command Description
Sniffer Packets
Description
Example
Snooper
Description
Command Description
Example
Station and AccessPoint
Page 245 of 695


WDS Station
Virtual Access Point
Nstreme
Dual Nstreme
WEP Security
WPA Security
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
This manual discusses management of Atheros and Prism chipset based wireless NICs that comply
with IEEE 802.11 set of standards. These interfaces use radio waves as a physical signal carrier and
are capable of data transmission with speeds up to 108 Mbps (in 5GHz turbo-mode).
MikroTik RouterOS supports the Intersil Prism II PC/PCI, Atheros AR5000, AR5001X,
AR5001X+, AR5002X+, AR5004X+ and AR5006 chipset based cards for working as wireless
clients (station mode), wireless bridges (bridge mode), wireless access points (ap-bridge mode),
and for antenna positioning (alignment-only mode). For furher information about supported
wireless adapters, see Device Driver List
MikroTik RouterOS provides a complete support for IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g wireless
networking standards. There are several additional features implemented for the wireless
networking in RouterOS - WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy),
software and hardware AES encryption, WDS (Wireless Distribution System), DFS (Dynamic
Frequency Selection), Alignment mode (for positioning antennas and monitoring wireless signal),
VAP (Virtual Access Point), ability to disable packet forwarding among clients, Nstreme wireless
transmission protocol and others. You can see the table of features supported by different cards.
The Nstreme protocol is MikroTik proprietary (i.e., incompatible with other vendors) wireless
protocol aimed to improve point-to-point and point-to-multipoint wireless links. Advanced version
of Nstreme, called Nstreme2 works with a pair of wireless cards (Atheros AR5210 and newer MAC
chips only) - one for transmitting data and one for receiving.
Benefits of Nstreme protocol:
• Client polling. Polling reduces media access times, because the card does not need to ensure
the air is "free" each time it needs to transmit data (the polling mechanism takes care of it)
• Very low protocol overhead per frame allowing super-high data rates
• No implied protocol limits on link distance
• No implied protocol speed degradation for long link distances
• Dynamic protocol adjustment depending on traffic type and resource usage
Quick Setup Guide

Let's consider that you have a wireless interface, called wlan1.
Page 246 of 695


• To set it as an Access Point, working in 802.11g standard, using frequency 2442 MHz and
Service Set Identifier test, do the following configuration:
/interface wireless set wlan1 ssid=test frequency=2442 band=2.4ghz-b/g \
mode=ap-bridge disabled=no
Now your router is ready to accept wireless clients.
• To make a point-to-point connection, using 802.11a standard, frequency 5805 MHz and
Service Set Identifier p2p, write:
/interface wireless set wlan1 ssid="p2p" frequency=5805 band=5ghz \
mode=bridge disabled=no
The remote interface should be configured to station as showed below.
• To make the wireless interface as a wireless station, working in 802.11a standard and Service
Set Identifier p2p:
/interface wireless set wlan1 ssid="p2p" band=5ghz mode=station disabled=no
Specifications
License required: level4 (station and bridge mode) , level5 (station, bridge and AP mode) ,
levelfreq (more frequencies)
Home menu level: /interface wireless
Standards and Technologies: IEEE802.11a , IEEE802.11b , IEEE802.11g
Related Documents

• Log Management
Description
The Atheros card has been tested for distances up to 20 km providing connection speed up to
17Mbit/s. With appropriate antennas and cabling the maximum distance should be as far as 50 km.
These values of ack-timeout were approximated from the tests done by us, as well as by some of
our customers:
ack-timeout
range
5GHz 5GHz-turbo 2.4GHz-G
0km default default default
5km 52 30 62
10km 85 48 96
15km 121 67 133
Page 247 of 695


20km 160 89 174
25km 203 111 219
30km 249 137 368
35km 298 168 320
40km 350 190 375
45km 405 - -
Please note that these are not the precise values. Depending on hardware used and many other
factors they may vary up to +/- 15 microseconds.
You can also use dynamic ack-timeout value - the router will determine ack-timeout setting
automatically by sending periodically packets with a different ack-timeout. Ack-timeout values by
which ACK frame was received are saved and used later to determine the real ack-timeout.
The Nstreme protocol may be operated in three modes:
• Point-to-Point mode - controlled point-to-point mode with one radio on each side
• Dual radio Point-to-Point mode (Nstreme2) - the protocol will use two radios on both sides
simultaneously (one for transmitting data and one for receiving), allowing superfast
point-to-point connection
• Point-to-Multipoint - controlled point-to-multipoint mode with client polling (like
AP-controlled TokenRing)
Hardware Notes
The MikroTik RouterOS supports as many Atheros chipset based cards as many free adapter slots
are on your system. One license is valid for all cards on your system. Note that maximal number of
PCMCIA sockets is 8.
Some chipsets are not stable with Atheros cards and cause radio to stop working. MikroTik
RouterBoard 200, RouterBoard 500 series, and systems based on Intel i815 and i845 chipsets are
tested and work stable with Atheros cards. There might be many other chipsets that are working
stable, but it has been reported that some older chipsets, and some systems based on AMD Duron
CPU are not stable.
Only AR5212 and newer Atheros MAC chips are stable with RouterBOARD200 connected via
RouterBOARD14 four-port MiniPCI-to-PCI adapter. This note applies only to the
RouterBOARD200 platform with Atheros-based cards.

Description
In this section we will discuss the most important part of the configuration.
Page 248 of 695


ack-timeout ( integer | dynamic | indoors ) - acknowledgement code timeout (transmission
acceptance timeout) in microseconds for acknowledgement messages. Can be one of these:
• dynamic - ack-timeout is chosen automatically
• indoors - standard constant for indoor usage
antenna-gain ( integer ; default: 0 ) - antenna gain in dBi. This parameter will be used to calculate
whether your system meets regulatory domain's requirements in your country
antenna-mode ( ant-a | ant-b | rxa-txb | txa-rxb ; default: ant-a ) - which antenna to use for
transmit/receive data:
• ant-a - use only antenna a
• ant-b - use only antenna b
• rxa-txb - use antenna a for receiving packets, use antenna b for transmitting packets
• txa-rxb - use antenna a for transmitting packets, antenna b for receiving packets
area ( text ; default: "" ) - string value that is used to describe an Access Point. Connect List on the
Clients side comparing this string value with area-prefix string value makes decision whether allow
a Client connect to the AP. If area-prefix match the entire area string or only the beginning of it the
Client is allowed to connect to the AP
setting
band - operating band
• 2.4ghz-b - IEEE 802.11b
• 2.4ghz-b/g - IEEE 802.11g (supports also IEEE 802.11b)
• 2.4ghz-g-turbo - IEEE 802.11g using double channel, providing air rate of up to 108 Mbit
• 2.4ghz-onlyg - only IEEE 802.11g
• 5ghz - IEEE 802.11a up to 54 Mbit
• 5ghz-turbo - IEEE 802.11a using double channel, providing air rate of up to 108Mbit
• 2ghz-10mhz - variation of IEEE 802.11g with half the band, and, accordingly, twice lower
speed (air rate of up to 27Mbit)
• 2ghz-5mhz - variation of IEEE 802.11g with quarter the band, and, accordingly, four times
lower speed (air rate of up to 13.5Mbit)
• 5ghz-10mhz - variation of IEEE 802.11a with half the band, and, accordingly, twice lower
speed (air rate of up to 27Mbit)
• 5ghz-5mhz - variation of IEEE 802.11a with quarter the band, and, accordingly, four times
lower speed (air rate of up to 13.5Mbit)
basic-rates-a/g ( multiple choice: 6Mbps, 9Mbps, 12Mbps, 18Mbps, 24Mbps, 36Mbps, 48Mbps,
54Mbps ; default: 6Mbps ) - basic rates in 802.11a or 802.11g standard (this should be the minimal
speed all the wireless network nodes support). It is recommended to leave this as default
basic-rates-b ( multiple choice: 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps ; default: 1Mbps ) - basic rates
in 802.11b mode (this should be the minimal speed all the wireless network nodes support). It is
recommended to leave this as default
burst-time ( time ; default: disabled ) - time in microseconds which will be used to send data
without stopping. Note that other wireless cards in that network will not be able to transmit data for
burst-time microseconds. This setting is available only for AR5000, AR5001X, and AR5001X+
Page 249 of 695


chipset based cards
compression ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if enabled on AP (in ap-bridge or bridge mode), it advertizes
that it is capable to use hardware data compression. If a client, connected to this AP also supports
and is configured to use the hardware data compression, it requests the AP to use compression. This
property does not affect clients which do not support compression.
country ( albania | algeria | argentina | armenia | australia | austria | azerbaijan | bahrain | belarus
| belgium | belize | bolvia | brazil | brunei darussalam | bulgaria | canada | chile | china | colombia |
costa rica | croatia | cyprus | czech republic | denmark | dominican republic | ecuador | egypt | el
salvador | estonia | finland | france | france_res | georgia | germany | greece | guatemala | honduras |
hong kong | hungary | iceland | india | indonesia | iran | ireland | israel | italy | japan | japan1 |
japan2 | japan3 | japan4 | japan5 | jordan | kazakhstan | korea republic | korea republic2 | kuwait |
latvia | lebanon | liechtenstein | lithuania | luxemburg | macau | macedonia | malaysia | mexico |
monaco | morocco | netherlands | new zealand | no_country_set | north korea | norway | oman |
pakistan | panama | peru | philippines | poland | portugal | puerto rico | qatar | romania | russia |
saudi arabia | singapore | slovak republic | slovenia | south africa | spain | sweden | switzerland |
syria | taiwan | thailand | trinidad & tobago | tunisia | turkey | ukraine | united arab emirates | united
kingdom | united states | uruguay | uzbekistan | venezuela | viet nam | yemen | zimbabwe ; default:
no_country_set ) - limits wireless settings (frequency and transmit power) to those which are
allowed in the respective country
• no_country_set - no regulatory domain limitations
default-ap-tx-limit ( integer ; default: 0 ) - limits data rate for each wireless client (in bps)
• 0 - no limits
default-authentication ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - specifies the default action on the clients side for
APs that are not in connect list or on the APs side for clients that are not in access list
• yes - enables AP to register a client even if it is not in access list. In turn for client it allows to
associate with AP not listed in client's connect list
default-client-tx-limit ( integer ; default: 0 ) - limits each client's transmit data rate (in bps). Works
only if the client is also a MikroTik Router
• 0 - no limits
default-forwarding ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - to use data forwarding by default or not. If set to
'no', the registered clients will not be able to communicate with each other
dfs-mode ( none | radar-detect | no-radar-detect ; default: none ) - used for APs to dynamically
select frequency at which this AP will operate
• none - do not use DFS
• no-radar-detect - AP scans channel list from "scan-list" and chooses the frequency which is
with the lowest amount of other networks detected
• radar-detect - AP scans channel list from "scan-list" and chooses the frequency which is with
the lowest amount of other networks detected, if no radar is detected in this channel for 60
seconds, the AP starts to operate at this channel, if radar is detected, the AP continues searching
for the next available channel which is with the lowest amount of other networks detected
disable-running-check ( yes | no ; default: no ) - disable running check. If value is set to 'no', the
router determines whether the card is up and running - for AP one or more clients have to be
registered to it, for station, it should be connected to an AP. This setting affects the records in the
routing table in a way that there will be no route for the card that is not running (the same applies to
dynamic routing protocols). If set to 'yes', the interface will always be shown as running
Page 250 of 695


disconnect-timeout ( time ; default: 3s ) - only above this value the client device is considered as
disconnected
frequency ( integer ) - operating frequency of the card
frequency-mode ( regulatory-domain | manual-tx-power | superchannel ; default: superchannel ) -
defines which frequency channels to allow
• regulatory-domain - channels in configured country only are allowed, and transmit power is
limited to what is allowed in that channel in configured country minus configured antenna-gain.
Also note that in this mode card will never be configured to higher power than allowed by the
respective regulatory domain
• manual-tx-power - channels in configured country only are allowed, but transmit power is
taken from tx-power setting
• superchannel - only possible with superchannel license. In this mode all hardware supported
channels are allowed
hide-ssid ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to hide ssid or not in the beacon frames:
• yes - ssid is not included in the beacon frames. AP replies only to probe-requests with the given
ssid
• no - ssid is included in beacon frames. AP replies to probe-requests with the given ssid ant to
'broadcast ssid' (empty ssid)
interface-type ( read-only: text ) - adapter type and model
mac-address ( MAC address ) - Media Access Control (MAC) address of the interface
master-interface ( name ) - physical wireless interface name that will be used by Virtual Access
Point (VAP) interface
max-station-count ( integer : 1 ..2007 ; default: 2007 ) - maximal number of clients allowed to
connect to AP. Real life experiments (from our customers) show that 100 clients can work with one
AP, using traffic shaping
mode ( alignment-only | ap-bridge | bridge | nstreme-dual-slave | station | station-wds | wds-slave ;
default: station ) - operating mode:
• alignment-only - this mode is used for positioning antennas (to get the best direction)
• ap-bridge - the interface is operating as an Access Point
• bridge - the interface is operating as a bridge. This mode acts like ap-bridge with the only
difference being it allows only one client
• nstreme-dual-slave - the interface is used for nstreme-dual mode
• station - the interface is operating as a client
• station-wds - the interface is working as a station, but can communicate with a WDS peer
• wds-slave - the interface is working as it would work in ap-bridge mode, but it adapts to its
WDS peer's frequency if it is changed
name ( name ; default: wlanN ) - assigned interface name
noise-floor-threshold ( integer | default : -128 ..127 ; default: default ) - value in dBm below
which we say that it is rather noise than a normal signal
on-fail-retry-time ( time ; default: 100ms ) - time, after which we repeat to communicate with a
wireless device, if a data transmission has failed
Page 251 of 695


periodic-calibration ( default | disabled | enabled ; default: default ) - to ensure performance of
chipset over temperature and environmental changes, the software performs periodic calibration
periodic-calibration-interval ( integer ; default: 60 ) - interfal between periodic recalibrations, in
seconds
preamble-mode ( both | long | short ; default: both ) - sets the synchronization field in a wireless
packet
• long - has a long synchronization field in a wireless packet (128 bits). Is compatible with
802.11 standard
• short - has a short synchronization field in a wireless packet (56 bits). Is not compatible with
802.11 standard. With short preamble mode it is possible to get slightly higher data rates
• both - supports both - short and long preamble
prism-cardtype ( 30mW | 100mW | 200mW ) - specify the output of the Prism chipset based card
proprietary-extensions ( pre-2.9.25 | post-2.9.25 ; default: post-2.9.25 ) - the method to insert
additional information (MikroTik proprietary extensions) into the wireless frames. This option is
needed to workaround incompatibility between the old (pre-2.9.25) method and new Intel Centrino
PCI-Express cards
• pre-2.9.25 - include extensions in the form accepted by older RouterOS versions. This will
include the new format as well, so this mode is compatiblewith all RouterOS versions. This
mode is incompatible with wireless clients built on the new Centrino wireless chipset and may
as well be incompatible with some other stations
• post-2.9.25 - include extensions in the form accepted by MikroTik RouterOS starting from
veriosn 2.9.25, and compatible with all known wireless clients
radio-name ( name ) - descriptive name of the card. Only for MikroTik devices
rate-set ( default | configured ) - which rate set to use:
• default - basic and supported-rates settings are not used, instead default values are used.
• configured - basic and supported-rates settings are used as configured
scan-list ( multiple choice: integer | default ; default: default ) - the list of channels to scan
• default - represents all frequencies, allowed by the regulatory domain (in the respective
country). If no country is set, these frequencies are used - for 2.4GHz mode: 2412, 2417, 2422,
2427, 2432, 2437, 2442, 2447, 2452, 2457, 2462; for 2.4GHz-g-turbo mode: 2437; for 5GHz
mode: 5180, 5200, 5220, 5240, 5260, 5280, 5300, 5320, 5745, 5765, 5785, 5805, 5825; for
5GHz-turbo: 5210, 5250, 5290, 5760, 5800
security-profile ( text ; default: default ) - which security profile to use. Define security profiles
under /interface wireless security-profiles where you can setup WPA or WEP wireless security, for
further details, see the Security Profiles section of this manual
ssid ( text ; default: MikroTik ) - Service Set Identifier. Used to separate wireless networks
supported-rates-a/g ( multiple choice: 6Mbps, 9Mbps, 12Mbps, 18Mbps, 24Mbps, 36Mbps,
48Mbps, 54Mbps ) - rates to be supported in 802.11a or 802.11g standard
supported-rates-b ( multiple choice: 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps ) - rates to be supported in
802.11b standard
tx-power ( integer : -30 ..30 ; default: 17 ) - manually sets the transmit power of the card (in dBm),
if tx-power-mode is set to manual, card rates or all-rates-fixed (see tx-power-mode description
below)
Page 252 of 695


tx-power-mode ( all-rates-fixed | card-rates | default | manual-table ; default: default ) - choose
the transmit power mode for the card:
• all-rates-fixed - use one transmit power value for all rates, as configured in tx-power
• card-rates - use transmit power, that for different rates is calculated according the cards
transmit power algorithm, which as an argument takes tx-power value
• default - use the default tx-power
• manual-table - use the transmit powers as defined in /interface wireless manual-tx-power-table
update-stats-interval ( time ) - how often to update statistics in /interface wireless
registration-table
wds-default-bridge ( name ; default: none ) - the default bridge for WDS interface. If you use
dynamic WDS then it is very useful in cases when wds connection is reset - the newly created
dynamic WDS interface will be put in this bridge
wds-ignore-ssid ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if set to 'yes', the AP will create WDS links with any
other AP in this frequency. If set to 'no' the ssid values must match on both APs
wds-mode ( disabled | dynamic | static ) - WDS mode:
• disabled - WDS interfaces are disabled
• dynamic - WDS interfaces are created 'on the fly'
• static - WDS interfaces are created manually
Notes
The IEEE 802.11 standard limitation makes it impossible for wireless cards in station mode to work
as expected when bridged. That means that if you need to create a bridge, you should not use station
mode on that machine. In case you need a bridge on a wireless station, use station-wds mode (may
only be used in the AP supports WDS). Bridging on the AP side works fine.
It is strongly suggested to leave basic rates at the lowest setting possible.
Using compression, the AP can serve approximately 50 clients with compression enabled!
Compression is supported only by Atheros wireless cards.
If disable-running-check value is set to no, the router determines whether the network interface is
up and running - in order to show flag R for AP, one or more clients have to be registered to it, for
station, it should be connected to an AP. If the interface does not appear as running (R), its route in
the routing table is shown as invalid! If set to yes, the interface will always be shown as running.
On Atheros-based cards, encryption (WEP, WPA, etc.) does not work when compression is
enabled.
The tx-power default setting is the maximum tx-power that the card can use. If you want to use
larger tx-rates, you are able to set them, but do it at your own risk! Usually, you can use this
parameter to reduce the tx-power.
In general tx-power controlling properties should be left at the default settings. Changing the default
setting may help with some cards in some situations, but without testing, the most common result is
degradation of range and throughput. Some of the problems that may occur are: (1) overheating of
the power amplifier chip and the card which will cause lower efficiency and more data errors; (2)
overdriving the amplifier which will cause more data errors; (3) excessive power usage for the card
Page 253 of 695


and this may overload the 3.3V power supply of the board that the card is located on resulting in
voltage drop and reboot or excessive temperatures for the board.
For different versions of Atheros chipset there are different value range of ack-timeout property:
5ghz 5ghz-turbo 2ghz-b 2ghz-g

Chipset version
default max default max default max default max
5000 (5.2GHz only) 30 204 22 102 N/A N/A N/A N/A
5211 (802.11a/b) 30 409 22 204 109 409 N/A N/A
5212 (802.11a/b/g) 25 409 22 204 30 409 52 409
If the wireless interfaces are put in nstreme-dual-slave mode, all configuration will take place in
/interface wireless nstreme-dual submenu, described further on in this manual. In that case,
configuration made in this submenu will be partially ignored. WDS cannot be used together with
the Nstreme-dual.
Example
This example shows how configure a wireless client.
To see current interface settings:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> print
0 name="wlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:34:54:FB arp=enabled
disable-running-check=no interface-type=Atheros AR5213
radio-name="000B6B3454FB" mode=station ssid="MikroTik"
frequency-mode=superchannel country=no_country_set antenna-gain=0
frequency=2412 band=2.4ghz-b scan-list=default rate-set=default
supported-rates-b=1Mbps,2Mbps,5.5Mbps,11Mbps
supported-rates-a/g=6Mbps,9Mbps,12Mbps,18Mbps,24Mbps,36Mbps,48Mbps,
54Mbps
basic-rates-b=1Mbps basic-rates-a/g=6Mbps max-station-count=2007
ack-timeout=dynamic tx-power=default tx-power-mode=default
noise-floor-threshold=default periodic-calibration=default
burst-time=disabled fast-frames=no dfs-mode=none antenna-mode=ant-a
wds-mode=disabled wds-default-bridge=none wds-ignore-ssid=no
update-stats-interval=disabled default-authentication=yes
default-forwarding=yes default-ap-tx-limit=0 default-client-tx-limit=0
hide-ssid=no security-profile=default disconnect-timeout=00:00:03
on-fail-retry-time=00:00:00.100 preamble-mode=both
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless>
Set the ssid to mmt, band to 2.4-b/g and enable the interface. Use the monitor command to see the
connection status.
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> set 0 ssid=mmt disabled=no \
band=2.4ghz-b/g
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> monitor wlan1
status: connected-to-ess
band: 2.4ghz-g
frequency: 2432MHz
tx-rate: 36Mbps
rx-rate: 36Mbps
ssid: "mmt"
bssid: 00:0B:6B:34:5A:91
radio-name: "000B6B345A91"
signal-strength: -77dBm
tx-signal-strength: -76dBm
tx-ccq: 21%
Page 254 of 695


rx-ccq: 21%
current-ack-timeout: 56
current-distance: 56
wds-link: no
nstreme: no
framing-mode: none
routeros-version: "2.9beta16"
last-ip: 25.25.25.2
current-tx-powers: 1Mbps:28,2Mbps:28,5.5Mbps:28,11Mbps:28,6Mbps:27,
9Mbps:27,12Mbps:27,18Mbps:27,24Mbps:27,36Mbps:26,
48Mbps:25,54Mbps:24
The 'ess' stands for Extended Service Set (IEEE 802.11 wireless networking).
Nstreme Settings
Home menu level: /interface wireless nstreme
Description
You can switch a wireless card to the nstreme mode. In that case the card will work only with
nstreme clients.
enable-nstreme ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to switch the card into the nstreme mode
enable-polling ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to use polling for clients
framer-limit ( integer ; default: 3200 ) - maximal frame size
framer-policy ( none | best-fit | exact-size | dynamic-size ; default: none ) - the method how to
combine frames (like fast-frames setting in interface configuration). A number of frames may be
combined into a bigger one to reduce the amount of protocol overhead (and thus increase speed).
The card is not waiting for frames, but in case a number of packets are queued for transmitting, they
can be combined. There are several methods of framing:
• none - do nothing special, do not combine packets
• best-fit - put as much packets as possible in one frame, until the framer-limit limit is met, but
do not fragment packets
• exact-size - put as much packets as possible in one frame, until the framer-limit limit is met,
even if fragmentation will be needed (best performance)
• dynamic-size - choose the best frame size dynamically
name ( name ) - reference name of the interface
Notes
Such settings as enable-polling, framer-policy and framer-limit are relevant only on Access
Point, they are ignored for client devices! The client automatically adapts to AP settings.
WDS for Nstreme protocol requires using station-wds mode on one of the peers. Configurations
with WDS between AP modes (bridge and ap-bridge) will not work.
Page 255 of 695


Example
To enable the nstreme protocol on the wlan1 radio with exact-size framing:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless nstreme> print

0 name="wlan1" enable-nstreme=no enable-polling=yes framer-policy=none
framer-limit=3200
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless nstreme> set wlan1 enable-nstreme=yes \
\... framer-policy=exact-size
Nstreme2 Group Settings

Home menu level: /interface wireless nstreme-dual
Description
Two radios in nstreme-dual-slave mode can be grouped together to make nstreme2 Point-to-Point
connection. To put wireless interfaces into a nstreme2 group, you should set their mode to
nstreme-dual-slave. Many parameters from /interface wireless menu are ignored, using the
nstreme2, except:
• frequency-mode
• country
• antenna-gain
• tx-power
• tx-power-mode
• antenna-mode
setting
disable-running-check ( yes | no ) - whether the interface should always be treated as running even
if there is no connection to a remote peer
framer-limit ( integer ; default: 2560 ) - maximal frame size
framer-policy ( none | best-fit | exact-size ; default: none ) - the method how to combine frames
(like fast-frames setting in interface configuration). A number of frames may be combined into one
bigger one to reduce the amout of protocol overhead (and thus increase speed). The card are not
waiting for frames, but in case a number packets are queued for transmitting, they can be combined.
There are several methods of framing:
• none - do nothing special, do not combine packets
• best-fit - put as much packets as possible in one frame, until the framer-limit limit is met, but
do not fragment packets
• exact-size - put as much packets as possible in one frame, until the framer-limit limit is met,
even if fragmentation will be needed (best performance)
Page 256 of 695


mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the transmitting wireless card in the
set
name ( name ) - reference name of the interface
rates-a/g ( multiple choice: 6Mbps, 9Mbps, 12Mbps, 18Mbps, 24Mbps, 36Mbps, 48Mbps, 54Mbps
) - rates to be supported in 802.11a or 802.11g standard
rates-b ( multiple choice: 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps ) - rates to be supported in 802.11b
standard
remote-mac ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - which MAC address to connect to
(this would be the remote receiver card's MAC address)
rx-band - operating band of the receiving radio
• 2.4ghz-b - IEEE 802.11b
• 2.4ghz-g - IEEE 802.11g
• 2.4ghz-g-turbo - IEEE 802.11g in Atheros proprietary turbo mode (up to 108Mbit)
• 5ghz-turbo - IEEE 802.11a in Atheros proprietary turbo mode (up to 108Mbit)
rx-frequency ( integer ; default: 5320 ) - Frequency to use for receiving frames
rx-radio ( name ) - which radio should be used for receiving frames
tx-band - operating band of the transmitting radio
• 2.4ghz-b - IEEE 802.11b
• 2.4ghz-g - IEEE 802.11g
• 2.4ghz-g-turbo - IEEE 802.11g in Atheros proprietary turbo mode (up to 108Mbit)
• 5ghz-turbo - IEEE 802.11a in Atheros proprietary turbo mode (up to 108Mbit)
tx-frequency ( integer ; default: 5180 ) - Frequency to use for transmitting frames
tx-radio ( name ) - which radio should be used for transmitting frames
Notes
WDS cannot be used on Nstreme-dual links.
The difference between tx-freq and rx-freq should be about 200MHz (more is recommended)
because of the interference that may occur!
You can use different bands for rx and tx links. For example, transmit in 2.4ghz-g-turbo and
receive data, using 2.4ghz-b band.
Example
To enable the nstreme2 protocol on a router:
1. Having two Atheros AR5212 based cards which are not used for anything else, to group them
into a nstreme interface, switch both of them into nstreme-dual-slave mode:
Page 257 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> print
0 name="wlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:31:02:4F arp=enabled
radio-name="000B6B31024F" mode=station ssid="MikroTik" frequency=5180
band=5GHz scan-list=default-ism
54Mbps
ack-timeout=dynamic tx-power=default noise-floor-threshold=default
wds-mode=disabled wds-default-bridge=none
default-forwarding=yes hide-ssid=no 802.1x-mode=none
1 name="wlan2" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:30:B4:A4 arp=enabled
radio-name="000B6B30B4A4" mode=station ssid="MikroTik" frequency=5180
band=5GHz scan-list=default-ism
54Mbps
ack-timeout=dynamic tx-power=default noise-floor-threshold=default
wds-mode=disabled wds-default-bridge=none
default-forwarding=yes hide-ssid=no 802.1x-mode=none
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> set 0,1 mode=nstreme-dual-slave
2. Then add nstreme2 interface with exact-size framing:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless nstreme-dual> add \

\... framer-policy=exact-size
3. Configure which card will be receiving and which - transmitting and specify remote receiver
card's MAC address:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless nstreme-dual> print

0 X name="n-streme1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:00:00:00:00:00 arp=enabled
disable-running-check=no tx-radio=(unknown) rx-radio=(unknown)
remote-mac=00:00:00:00:00:00 tx-band=5GHz tx-frequency=5180
rates-b=1Mbps,2Mbps,5.5Mbps,11Mbps
rates-a/g=6Mbps,9Mbps,12Mbps,18Mbps,24Mbps,36Mbps,48Mbps,54Mbps
rx-band=5GHz rx-frequency=5320 framer-policy=exact-size
framer-limit=4000
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless nstreme-dual> set 0 disabled=no \
\... tx-radio=wlan1 rx-radio=wlan2 remote-mac=00:0C:42:05:0B:12
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless nstreme-dual> print
0 X name="n-streme1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:30:B4:A4 arp=enabled
disable-running-check=no tx-radio=wlan1 rx-radio=wlan2
remote-mac=00:0C:42:05:0B:12 tx-band=5GHz tx-frequency=5180
rates-b=1Mbps,2Mbps,5.5Mbps,11Mbps
rx-band=5GHz rx-frequency=5320 framer-policy=exact-size
framer-limit=4000
Registration Table
Home menu level: /interface wireless registration-table
Page 258 of 695


Description
In the registration table you can see various information about currently connected clients. It is used
only for Access Points.
ap ( read-only: no | yes ) - whether the connected device is an Access Point or not
bytes ( read-only: integer, integer ) - number of sent and received packet bytes
frame-bytes ( read-only: integer, integer ) - number of sent and received data bytes excluding
header information
frames ( read-only: integer, integer ) - number of sent and received 802.11 data frames excluding
retransmitted data frames
framing-current-size ( read-only: integer ) - current size of combined frames
framing-limit ( read-only: integer ) - maximal size of combined frames
framing-mode ( read-only: none | best-fit | exact-size ; default: none ) - the method how to
combine frames
hw-frame-bytes ( read-only: integer, integer ) - number of sent and received data bytes including
header information
hw-frames ( read-only: integer, integer ) - number of sent and received 802.11 data frames
including retransmitted data frames
interface ( read-only: name ) - interface that client is registered to
last-activity ( read-only: time ) - last interface data tx/rx activity
last-ip ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address found in the last IP packet received from the
registered client
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the registered client
packets ( read-only: integer, integer ) - number of sent and received network layer packets
packing-size ( read-only: integer ) - maximum packet size in bytes
parent ( read-only: MAC address ) - parent access point's MAC address, if forwarded from another
access point
routeros-version ( read-only: name ) - RouterOS version of the registered client
rx-ccq ( read-only: integer : 0 ..100 ) - Client Connection Quality - a value in percent that shows
how effective the receive bandwidth is used regarding the theoretically maximum available
bandwidth. Mostly it depends from an amount of retransmited wireless frames.
rx-packed ( read-only: integer ) - number of received packets in form of received-packets/number
of packets, which were packed into a larger ones, using fast-frames
rx-rate ( read-only: integer ) - receive data rate
signal-strength ( read-only: integer ) - average strength of the client signal recevied by the AP
tx-ccq ( read-only: integer : 0 ..100 ) - Client Connection Quality - a value in percent that shows
how effective the transmit bandwidth is used regarding the theoretically maximum available
bandwidth. Mostly it depends from an amount of retransmited wireless frames.
tx-packed ( read-only: integer ) - number of sent packets in form of sent-packets/number of
Page 259 of 695


packets, which were packed into a larger ones, using fast-frames
tx-rate ( read-only: integer ) - transmit data rate
tx-signal-strength ( read-only: integer ) - average power of the AP transmit signal as received by
the client device
type ( read-only: name ) - type of the client
uptime ( read-only: time ) - time the client is associated with the access point
wds ( read-only: no | yes ) - whether the connected client is using wds or not
Example
To see registration table showing all clients currently associated with the access point:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless registration-table> print
# INTERFACE RADIO-NAME MAC-ADDRESS AP SIGNAL... TX-RATE
0 wireless1 000124705304 00:01:24:70:53:04 no -38dBm... 9Mbps
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless registration-table>
To get additional statistics:

[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> registration-table print stats
0 interface=dfaewad radio-name="000C42050436" mac-address=00:0C:42:05:04:36
ap=yes wds=no rx-rate=54Mbps tx-rate=54Mbps packets=597,668
bytes=48693,44191 frames=597,673 frame-bytes=48693,44266 hw-frames=597,683
hw-frame-bytes=63021,60698 uptime=45m28s last-activity=0s
signal-strength=-66dBm@54Mbps
strength-at-rates=-59dBm@1Mbps 13s120ms,-61dBm@6Mbps 7s770ms,-61dBm@9Mbps
40m43s970ms,-60dBm@12Mbps 40m43s760ms,-61dBm@18Mbps
40m43s330ms,-60dBm@24Mbps 40m43s,-61dBm@36Mbps
33m10s230ms,-62dBm@48Mbps 33m9s760ms,-66dBm@54Mbps 10ms
tx-signal-strength=-65dBm tx-ccq=24% rx-ccq=20% ack-timeout=28 distance=28
nstreme=no framing-mode=none routeros-version="2.9rc5"
last-ip=192.168.63.8
Connect List
Home menu level: /interface wireless connect-list
Description
The Connect List is a list of rules (order is important), that determine to which AP the station
should connect to.
At first, the station is searching for APs all frequencies (from scan-list) in the respective band and
makes a list of Access Points. If the ssid is set under /interface wireless, the router removes all
Access Points from its AP list which do not have such ssid
If a rule is matched and the parameter connect is set to yes, the station will connect to this AP. If
the parameter says connect=no or the rule is not matched, we jump to the next rule.
If we have gone through all rules and haven't connected to any AP, yet. The router chooses an AP
with the best signal and ssid that is set under /interface wireless.
In case when the station has not connected to any AP, this process repeats from beginning.
Page 260 of 695


area-prefix ( text ) - a string that indicates the beginning from the area string of the AP. If the AP's
area begins with area-prefix, then this parameter returns true
connect ( yes | no ) - whether to connect to AP that matches this rule
interface ( name ) - name of the wireless interface
mac-address ( MAC address ) - MAC address of the AP. If set to 00:00:00:00:00:00, all APs are
accepted
min-signal-strength ( integer ) - signal strength in dBm. Rule is matched, if the signal from AP is
stronger than this
security-profile ( name ; default: none ) - name of the security profile, used to connect to the AP.
If none, then those security profile is used which is configured for the respective interface
ssid ( text ) - the ssid of the AP. If none set, all ssid's are accepted. Different ssids will be
meaningful, if the ssid for the respective interface is set to ""
Access List
Home menu level: /interface wireless access-list
Description
The access list is used by the Access Point to restrict associations of clients. This list contains MAC
addresses of clients and determines what action to take when client attempts to connect. Also, the
forwarding of frames sent by the client is controlled.
The association procedure is as follows: when a new client wants to associate to the AP that is
configured on interface wlanN, an entry with client's MAC address and interface wlanN is looked
up in the access-list. If such entry is found, action specified in the access list is performed, else
default-authentication and default-forwarding arguments of interface wlanN are taken.
ap-tx-limit ( integer ; default: 0 ) - limits data rate for this wireless client (in bps)
• 0 - no limits
authentication ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to accept or to reject this client when it tries to
connect
client-tx-limit ( integer ; default: 0 ) - limits this client's transmit data rate (in bps). Works only if
the client is also a MikroTik Router
• 0 - no limits
forwarding ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to forward the client's frames to other wireless
clients
interface ( name ) - name of the respective interface
mac-address ( MAC address ) - MAC address of the client
private-algo ( 104bit-wep | 40bit-wep | none ) - which encryption algorithm to use
private-key ( text ; default: "" ) - private key of the client. Used for private-algo
skip-802.1x ( yes | no ) - not implemented, yet
Page 261 of 695


Notes
If you have default authentication action for the interface set to yes, you can disallow this node to
register at the AP's interface wlanN by setting authentication=no for it. Thus, all nodes except this
one will be able to register to the interface wlanN.
If you have default authentication action for the interface set to no, you can allow this node to
register at the AP's interface wlanN by setting authentication=yes for it. Thus, only the specified
nodes will be able to register to the interface wlanN.
Example
To allow authentication and forwarding for the client 00:01:24:70:3A:BB from the wlan1 interface
using WEP 40bit algorithm with the key 1234567890:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless access-list> add mac-address= \
\... 00:01:24:70:3A:BB interface=wlan1 private-algo=40bit-wep private-key=1234567890
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless access-list> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 mac-address=00:01:24:70:3A:BB interface=wlan1 authentication=yes
forwarding=yes ap-tx-limit=0 client-tx-limit=0 private-algo=40bit-wep
private-key="1234567890"
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless access-list>
Info
Home menu level: /interface wireless info
Description
This facility provides you with general wireless interface information.
2ghz-b-channels ( multiple choice, read-only: 2312, 2317, 2322, 2327, 2332, 2337, 2342, 2347,
2352, 2357, 2362, 2367, 2372, 2412, 2417, 2422, 2427, 2432, 2437, 2442, 2447, 2452, 2457, 2462,
2467, 2472, 2484, 2512, 2532, 2552, 2572, 2592, 2612, 2632, 2652, 2672, 2692, 2712, 2732 ) - the
list of 2GHz IEEE 802.11b channels (frequencies are given in MHz)
2ghz-g-channels ( multiple choice, read-only: 2312, 2317, 2322, 2327, 2332, 2337, 2342, 2347,
2352, 2357, 2362, 2367, 2372, 2412, 2417, 2422, 2427, 2432, 2437, 2442, 2447, 2452, 2457, 2462,
2467, 2472, 2512, 2532, 2552, 2572, 2592, 2612, 2632, 2652, 2672, 2692, 2712, 2732, 2484 ) - the
list of 2GHz IEEE 802.11g channels (frequencies are given in MHz)
5ghz-channels ( multiple choice, read-only: 4920, 4925, 4930, 4935, 4940, 4945, 4950, 4955,
4960, 4965, 4970, 4975, 4980, 4985, 4990, 4995, 5000, 5005, 5010, 5015, 5020, 5025, 5030, 5035,
5040, 5045, 5050, 5055, 5060, 5065, 5070, 5075, 5080, 5085, 5090, 5095, 5100, 5105, 5110, 5115,
5120, 5125, 5130, 5135, 5140, 5145, 5150, 5155, 5160, 5165, 5170, 5175, 5180, 5185, 5190, 5195,
5200, 5205, 5210, 5215, 5220, 5225, 5230, 5235, 5240, 5245, 5250, 5255, 5260, 5265, 5270, 5275,
5280, 5285, 5290, 5295, 5300, 5305, 5310, 5315, 5320, 5325, 5330, 5335, 5340, 5345, 5350, 5355,
5360, 5365, 5370, 5375, 5380, 5385, 5390, 5395, 5400, 5405, 5410, 5415, 5420, 5425, 5430, 5435,
5440, 5445, 5450, 5455, 5460, 5465, 5470, 5475, 5480, 5485, 5490, 5495, 5500, 5505, 5510, 5515,
5520, 5525, 5530, 5535, 5540, 5545, 5550, 5555, 5560, 5565, 5570, 5575, 5580, 5585, 5590, 5595,
Page 262 of 695


5600, 5605, 5610, 5615, 5620, 5625, 5630, 5635, 5640, 5645, 5650, 5655, 5660, 5665, 5670, 5675,
5680, 5685, 5690, 5695, 5700, 5705, 5710, 5715, 5720, 5725, 5730, 5735, 5740, 5745, 5750, 5755,
5760, 5765, 5770, 5775, 5780, 5785, 5790, 5795, 5800, 5805, 5810, 5815, 5820, 5825, 5830, 5835,
5840, 5845, 5850, 5855, 5860, 5865, 5870, 5875, 5880, 5885, 5890, 5895, 5900, 5905, 5910, 5915,
5920, 5925, 5930, 5935, 5940, 5945, 5950, 5955, 5960, 5965, 5970, 5975, 5980, 5985, 5990, 5995,
6000, 6005, 6010, 6015, 6020, 6025, 6030, 6035, 6040, 6045, 6050, 6055, 6060, 6065, 6070, 6075,
6080, 6085, 6090, 6095, 6100 ) - the list of 5GHz channels (frequencies are given in MHz)
5ghz-turbo-channels ( multiple choice, read-only: 4920, 4925, 4930, 4935, 4940, 4945, 4950,
4955, 4960, 4965, 4970, 4975, 4980, 4985, 4990, 4995, 5000, 5005, 5010, 5015, 5020, 5025, 5030,
5035, 5040, 5045, 5050, 5055, 5060, 5065, 5070, 5075, 5080, 5085, 5090, 5095, 5100, 5105, 5110,
5115, 5120, 5125, 5130, 5135, 5140, 5145, 5150, 5155, 5160, 5165, 5170, 5175, 5180, 5185, 5190,
5195, 5200, 5205, 5210, 5215, 5220, 5225, 5230, 5235, 5240, 5245, 5250, 5255, 5260, 5265, 5270,
5275, 5280, 5285, 5290, 5295, 5300, 5305, 5310, 5315, 5320, 5325, 5330, 5335, 5340, 5345, 5350,
5355, 5360, 5365, 5370, 5375, 5380, 5385, 5390, 5395, 5400, 5405, 5410, 5415, 5420, 5425, 5430,
5435, 5440, 5445, 5450, 5455, 5460, 5465, 5470, 5475, 5480, 5485, 5490, 5495, 5500, 5505, 5510,
5515, 5520, 5525, 5530, 5535, 5540, 5545, 5550, 5555, 5560, 5565, 5570, 5575, 5580, 5585, 5590,
5595, 5600, 5605, 5610, 5615, 5620, 5625, 5630, 5635, 5640, 5645, 5650, 5655, 5660, 5665, 5670,
5675, 5680, 5685, 5690, 5695, 5700, 5705, 5710, 5715, 5720, 5725, 5730, 5735, 5740, 5745, 5750,
5755, 5760, 5765, 5770, 5775, 5780, 5785, 5790, 5795, 5800, 5805, 5810, 5815, 5820, 5825, 5830,
5835, 5840, 5845, 5850, 5855, 5860, 5865, 5870, 5875, 5880, 5885, 5890, 5895, 5900, 5905, 5910,
5915, 5920, 5925, 5930, 5935, 5940, 5945, 5950, 5955, 5960, 5965, 5970, 5975, 5980, 5985, 5990,
5995, 6000, 6005, 6010, 6015, 6020, 6025, 6030, 6035, 6040, 6045, 6050, 6055, 6060, 6065, 6070,
6075, 6080, 6085, 6090, 6095, 6100 ) - the list of 5GHz-turbo channels (frequencies are given in
MHz)
ack-timeout-control ( read-only: yes | no ) - provides information whether this device supports
transmission acceptance timeout control
alignment-mode ( read-only: yes | no ) - is the alignment-only mode supported by this interface
burst-support ( yes | no ) - whether the interface supports data bursts (burst-time)
chip-info ( read-only: text ) - information from EEPROM
default-periodic-calibration ( read-only: yes | no ) - whether the card supports periodic-calibration
firmware ( read-only: text ) - current firmware of the interface (used only for Prism chipset based
cards)
interface-type ( read-only: text ) - shows the hardware interface type
noise-floor-control ( read-only: yes | no ) - does this interface support noise-floor-thershold
detection
nstreme-support ( read-only: yes | no ) - whether the card supports n-streme protocol
scan-support ( yes | no ) - whether the interface supports scan function ('/interface wireless scan')
supported-bands ( multiple choice, read-only: 2ghz-b, 5ghz, 5ghz-turbo, 2ghz-g ) - the list of
supported bands
tx-power-control ( read-only: yes | no ) - provides information whether this device supports
transmission power control
virtual-aps ( read-only: yes | no ) - whether this interface supports Virtual Access Points
('/interface wireless add')
Notes
Page 263 of 695


There is a special argument for the print command - print count-only. It forces the print command
to print only the count of information topics.
/interface wireless info print command shows only channels supported by a particular card.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless info> print
0 interface-type=Atheros AR5413
chip-info="mac:0xa/0x5, phy:0x61, a5:0x63, a2:0x0, eeprom:0x5002"
tx-power-control=yes ack-timeout-control=yes alignment-mode=yes
virtual-aps=yes noise-floor-control=yes scan-support=yes burst-support=yes
nstreme-support=yes default-periodic-calibration=enabled
supported-bands=2ghz-b,5ghz,5ghz-turbo,2ghz-g,2ghz-g-turbo
2ghz-b-channels=2312:0,2317:0,2322:0,2327:0,2332:0,2337:0,2342:0,2347:0,
2352:0,2357:0,2362:0,2367:0,2372:0,2377:0,2382:0,2387:0,
2392:0,2397:0,2402:0,2407:0,2412:0,2417:0,2422:0,2427:0,
2432:0,2437:0,2442:0,2447:0,2452:0,2457:0,2462:0,2467:0,
2472:0,2477:0,2482:0,2487:0,2492:0,2497:0,2314:0,2319:0,
2324:0,2329:0,2334:0,2339:0,2344:0,2349:0,2354:0,2359:0,
2364:0,2369:0,2374:0,2379:0,2384:0,2389:0,2394:0,2399:0,
2404:0,2409:0,2414:0,2419:0,2424:0,2429:0,2434:0,2439:0,
2444:0,2449:0,2454:0,2459:0,2464:0,2469:0,2474:0,2479:0,
2484:0,2489:0,2494:0,2499:0
5ghz-channels=4920:0,4925:0,4930:0,4935:0,4940:0,4945:0,4950:0,4955:0,
4960:0,4965:0,4970:0,4975:0,4980:0,4985:0,4990:0,4995:0,
5000:0,5005:0,5010:0,5015:0,5020:0,5025:0,5030:0,5035:0,
5040:0,5045:0,5050:0,5055:0,5060:0,5065:0,5070:0,5075:0,
5080:0,5085:0,5090:0,5095:0,5100:0,5105:0,5110:0,5115:0,
5120:0,5125:0,5130:0,5135:0,5140:0,5145:0,5150:0,5155:0,
5160:0,5165:0,5170:0,5175:0,5180:0,5185:0,5190:0,5195:0,
5200:0,5205:0,5210:0,5215:0,5220:0,5225:0,5230:0,5235:0,
5240:0,5245:0,5250:0,5255:0,5260:0,5265:0,5270:0,5275:0,
5280:0,5285:0,5290:0,5295:0,5300:0,5305:0,5310:0,5315:0,
5320:0,5325:0,5330:0,5335:0,5340:0,5345:0,5350:0,5355:0,
5360:0,5365:0,5370:0,5375:0,5380:0,5385:0,5390:0,5395:0,
5400:0,5405:0,5410:0,5415:0,5420:0,5425:0,5430:0,5435:0,
5440:0,5445:0,5450:0,5455:0,5460:0,5465:0,5470:0,5475:0,
5480:0,5485:0,5490:0,5495:0,5500:0,5505:0,5510:0,5515:0,
5520:0,5525:0,5530:0,5535:0,5540:0,5545:0,5550:0,5555:0,
5560:0,5565:0,5570:0,5575:0,5580:0,5585:0,5590:0,5595:0,
5600:0,5605:0,5610:0,5615:0,5620:0,5625:0,5630:0,5635:0,
5640:0,5645:0,5650:0,5655:0,5660:0,5665:0,5670:0,5675:0,
5680:0,5685:0,5690:0,5695:0,5700:0,5705:0,5710:0,5715:0,
5720:0,5725:0,5730:0,5735:0,5740:0,5745:0,5750:0,5755:0,
5760:0,5765:0,5770:0,5775:0,5780:0,5785:0,5790:0,5795:0,
5800:0,5805:0,5810:0,5815:0,5820:0,5825:0,5830:0,5835:0,
5840:0,5845:0,5850:0,5855:0,5860:0,5865:0,5870:0,5875:0,
5880:0,5885:0,5890:0,5895:0,5900:0,5905:0,5910:0,5915:0,
5920:0,5925:0,5930:0,5935:0,5940:0,5945:0,5950:0,5955:0,
5960:0,5965:0,5970:0,5975:0,5980:0,5985:0,5990:0,5995:0,
6000:0,6005:0,6010:0,6015:0,6020:0,6025:0,6030:0,6035:0,
6040:0,6045:0,6050:0,6055:0,6060:0,6065:0,6070:0,6075:0,
6080:0,6085:0,6090:0,6095:0,6100:0
5ghz-turbo-channels=4920:0,4925:0,4930:0,4935:0,4940:0,4945:0,4950:0,4955:0,
4960:0,4965:0,4970:0,4975:0,4980:0,4985:0,4990:0,4995:0,
5000:0,5005:0,5010:0,5015:0,5020:0,5025:0,5030:0,5035:0,
5040:0,5045:0,5050:0,5055:0,5060:0,5065:0,5070:0,5075:0,
5080:0,5085:0,5090:0,5095:0,5100:0,5105:0,5110:0,5115:0,
5120:0,5125:0,5130:0,5135:0,5140:0,5145:0,5150:0,5155:0,
5160:0,5165:0,5170:0,5175:0,5180:0,5185:0,5190:0,5195:0,
5200:0,5205:0,5210:0,5215:0,5220:0,5225:0,5230:0,5235:0,
5240:0,5245:0,5250:0,5255:0,5260:0,5265:0,5270:0,5275:0,
5280:0,5285:0,5290:0,5295:0,5300:0,5305:0,5310:0,5315:0,
5320:0,5325:0,5330:0,5335:0,5340:0,5345:0,5350:0,5355:0,
5360:0,5365:0,5370:0,5375:0,5380:0,5385:0,5390:0,5395:0,
5400:0,5405:0,5410:0,5415:0,5420:0,5425:0,5430:0,5435:0,
5440:0,5445:0,5450:0,5455:0,5460:0,5465:0,5470:0,5475:0,
5480:0,5485:0,5490:0,5495:0,5500:0,5505:0,5510:0,5515:0,
5520:0,5525:0,5530:0,5535:0,5540:0,5545:0,5550:0,5555:0,
5560:0,5565:0,5570:0,5575:0,5580:0,5585:0,5590:0,5595:0,
Page 264 of 695


5600:0,5605:0,5610:0,5615:0,5620:0,5625:0,5630:0,5635:0,
5640:0,5645:0,5650:0,5655:0,5660:0,5665:0,5670:0,5675:0,
5680:0,5685:0,5690:0,5695:0,5700:0,5705:0,5710:0,5715:0,
5720:0,5725:0,5730:0,5735:0,5740:0,5745:0,5750:0,5755:0,
5760:0,5765:0,5770:0,5775:0,5780:0,5785:0,5790:0,5795:0,
5800:0,5805:0,5810:0,5815:0,5820:0,5825:0,5830:0,5835:0,
5840:0,5845:0,5850:0,5855:0,5860:0,5865:0,5870:0,5875:0,
5880:0,5885:0,5890:0,5895:0,5900:0,5905:0,5910:0,5915:0,
5920:0,5925:0,5930:0,5935:0,5940:0,5945:0,5950:0,5955:0,
5960:0,5965:0,5970:0,5975:0,5980:0,5985:0,5990:0,5995:0,
6000:0,6005:0,6010:0,6015:0,6020:0,6025:0,6030:0,6035:0,
6040:0,6045:0,6050:0,6055:0,6060:0,6065:0,6070:0,6075:0,
6080:0,6085:0,6090:0,6095:0,6100:0
2ghz-g-channels=2312:0,2317:0,2322:0,2327:0,2332:0,2337:0,2342:0,2347:0,
2352:0,2357:0,2362:0,2367:0,2372:0,2377:0,2382:0,2387:0,
2392:0,2397:0,2402:0,2407:0,2412:0,2417:0,2422:0,2427:0,
2432:0,2437:0,2442:0,2447:0,2452:0,2457:0,2462:0,2467:0,
2472:0,2477:0,2482:0,2487:0,2492:0,2497:0,2314:0,2319:0,
2324:0,2329:0,2334:0,2339:0,2344:0,2349:0,2354:0,2359:0,
2364:0,2369:0,2374:0,2379:0,2384:0,2389:0,2394:0,2399:0,
2404:0,2409:0,2414:0,2419:0,2424:0,2429:0,2434:0,2439:0,
2444:0,2449:0,2454:0,2459:0,2464:0,2469:0,2474:0,2479:0,
2484:0,2489:0,2494:0,2499:0
2ghz-g-turbo-channels=2312:0,2317:0,2322:0,2327:0,2332:0,2337:0,2342:0,
2347:0,2352:0,2357:0,2362:0,2367:0,2372:0,2377:0,
2382:0,2387:0,2392:0,2397:0,2402:0,2407:0,2412:0,
2417:0,2422:0,2427:0,2432:0,2437:0,2442:0,2447:0,
2452:0,2457:0,2462:0,2467:0,2472:0,2477:0,2482:0,
2487:0,2492:0,2497:0,2314:0,2319:0,2324:0,2329:0,
2334:0,2339:0,2344:0,2349:0,2354:0,2359:0,2364:0,
2369:0,2374:0,2379:0,2384:0,2389:0,2394:0,2399:0,
2404:0,2409:0,2414:0,2419:0,2424:0,2429:0,2434:0,
2439:0,2444:0,2449:0,2454:0,2459:0,2464:0,2469:0,
2474:0,2479:0,2484:0,2489:0,2494:0,2499:0
Virtual Access Point Interface

Description
Virtual Access Point (VAP) interface is used to have an additional AP. You can create a new AP
with different ssid and mac-address. It can be compared with a VLAN where the ssid from VAP is
the VLAN tag and the hardware interface is the VLAN switch.
You can add up to 128 VAP interfaces for each hardware interface.
RouterOS supports VAP feature for Atheros AR5212 and newer.
arp ( disabled | enabled | proxy-arp | reply-only ) - ARP mode
default-authentication ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to accept or reject a client that wants to
associate, but is not in the access-list
default-forwarding ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to forward frames to other AP clients or not
disabled ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to disable the interface or not
disable-running-check ( yes | no ; default: no ) - disable running check. For 'broken' cards it is a
good idea to set this value to 'yes'
hide-ssid ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to hide ssid or not in the beacon frames:
Page 265 of 695


• yes - ssid is not included in the beacon frames. AP replies only to probe-requests with the given
ssid
• no - ssid is included in beacon frames. AP replies to probe-requests with the given ssid and to
'broadcast ssid'
mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 02:00:00:AA:00:00 ) - MAC address of VAP. You can
define your own value for mac-address
master-interface ( name ) - hardware interface to use for VAP
max-station-count ( integer ; default: 2007 ) - number of clients that can connect to this AP
simultaneously
name ( name ; default: wlanN ) - interface name
ssid ( text ; default: MikroTik ) - the service set identifier
Notes
The VAP MAC address is set by default to the same address as the physical interface has, with the
second bit of the first byte set (i.e., the MAC address would start with 02). If that address is already
used by some other wireless or VAP interface, it is increased by 1 until a free spot is found. When
manually assigning MAC address, keep in mind that it should have the first bit of the first byte
unset (so it should not be like 01, or A3). Note also that it is recommended to keep the MAC adress
of VAP as similar (in terms of bit values) to the MAC address of the physical interface it is put
onto, as possible, because the more different the addresses are, the more it affects performance.
WDS Interface Configuration

Home menu level: /interface wireless wds
Description
WDS (Wireless Distribution System) allows packets to pass from one wireless AP (Access Point) to
another, just as if the APs were ports on a wired Ethernet switch. APs must use the same standard
(802.11a, 802.11b or 802.11g) and work on the same frequencies in order to connect to each other.
There are two possibilities to create a WDS interface:
• dynamic - is created 'on the fly' and appers under wds menu as a dynamic interface
• static - is created manually
• disabled - the interface will not use ARP
• enabled - the interface will use ARP
• proxy-arp - the interface will use the ARP proxy feature
• reply-only - the interface will only reply to the requests originated to its own IP addresses.
Neighbour MAC addresses will be resolved using /ip arp statically set table only
Page 266 of 695


disable-running-check ( yes | no ; default: no ) - disable running check. For 'broken' wireless cards
it is a good idea to set this value to 'yes'
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - MAC address of the
master-interface. Specifying master-interface, this value will be set automatically
master-interface ( name ) - wireless interface which will be used by WDS
name ( name ; default: wdsN ) - WDS interface name
wds-address ( MAC address ) - MAC address of the remote WDS host
Notes
When the link between WDS devices, using wds-mode=dynamic, goes down, the dynamic WDS
interfaces disappear and if there are any IP addresses set on this interface, their 'interface' setting
will change to (unknown). When the link comes up again, the 'interface' value will not change - it
will remain as (unknown). That's why it is not recommended to add IP addresses to dynamic WDS
interfaces.
If you want to use dynamic WDS in a bridge, set the wds-default-bridge value to desired bridge
interface name. When the link will go down and then it comes up, the dynamic WDS interface will
be put in the specified bridge automatically.
As the routers which are in WDS mode have to communicate at equal frequencies, it is not
recommended to use WDS and DFS simultaneously - it is most probable that these routers will not
connect to each other.
WDS significantly faster than EoIP (up to 10-20% on RouterBOARD 500 systems), so it is
recommended to use WDS whenever possible.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless wds> add master-interface=wlan1 \
\... wds-address=00:0B:6B:30:2B:27 disabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless wds> print
Flags: X - disabled, R - running, D - dynamic
0 R name="wds1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:30:2B:23 arp=enabled
disable-running-check=no master-inteface=wlan1
wds-address=00:0B:6B:30:2B:27
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless wds>
Align
Home menu level: /interface wireless align
Description
This feature is created to position wireless links. The align submenu describes properties which are
used if /interface wireless mode is set to alignment-only. In this mode the interface 'listens' to
those packets which are sent to it from other devices working on the same channel. The interface
also can send special packets which contains information about its parameters.
Page 267 of 695


active-mode ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether the interface will receive and transmit 'alignment'
packets or it will only receive them
audio-max ( integer ; default: -20 ) - signal-strength at which audio (beeper) frequency will be the
highest
audio-min ( integer ; default: -100 ) - signal-strength at which audio (beeper) frequency will be the
lowest
audio-monitor ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - MAC address of the remote host
which will be 'listened'
filter-mac ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - in case if you want to receive packets
from only one remote host, you should specify here its MAC address
frame-size ( integer : 200 ..1500 ; default: 300 ) - size of 'alignment' packets that will be
transmitted
frames-per-second ( integer : 1 ..100 ; default: 25 ) - number of frames that will be sent per second
(in active-mode)
receive-all ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the interface gathers packets about other 802.11
standard packets or it will gather only 'alignment' packets
ssid-all ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether you want to accept packets from hosts with other ssid
than yours
test-audio ( integer ) - test the beeper for 10 seconds
Notes
If you are using the command /interface wireless align monitor then it will automatically change
the wireless interface's mode from station, bridge or ap-bridge to alignment-only.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless align> print
frame-size: 300
active-mode: yes
receive-all: yes
audio-monitor: 00:00:00:00:00:00
filter-mac: 00:00:00:00:00:00
ssid-all: no
frames-per-second: 25
audio-min: -100
audio-max: -20
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless align>
Align Monitor
Command name: /interface wireless align monitor
Description
This command is used to monitor current signal parameters to/from a remote host.
Page 268 of 695


address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the remote host
avg-rxq ( read-only: integer ) - average signal strength of received packets since last display
update on screen
correct ( read-only: percentage ) - how many undamaged packets were received
last-rx ( read-only: time ) - time in seconds before the last packet was received
last-tx ( read-only: time ) - time in seconds when the last TXQ info was received
rxq ( read-only: integer ) - signal strength of last received packet
ssid ( read-only: text ) - service set identifier
txq ( read-only: integer ) - the last received signal strength from our host to the remote one
Example
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless align> monitor wlan2
# ADDRESS SSID RXQ AVG-RXQ LAST-RX TXQ LAST-TX CORRECT
0 00:01:24:70:4B:FC wirelesa -60 -60 0.01 -67 0.01 100 %
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless align>
Frequency Monitor
Description
Aproximately shows how loaded are the wireless channels.
freq ( read-only: integer ) - shows current channel
use ( read-only: percentage ) - shows usage in current channel
Example
Monitor 802.11b network load:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> frequency-monitor wlan1
FREQ USE
2412MHz 3.8%
2417MHz 9.8%
2422MHz 2%
2427MHz 0.8%
2432MHz 0%
2437MHz 0.9%
2442MHz 0.9%
2447MHz 2.4%
2452MHz 3.9%
2457MHz 7.5%
2462MHz 0.9%
To monitor other bands, change the the band setting for the respective wireless interface.
Page 269 of 695


Manual Transmit Power Table
Home menu level: /interface wireless manual-tx-power-table
Description
In this submenu you can define signal strength for each rate. You should be aware that you can
damage your wireless card if you set higher output power than it is allowed. Note that the values in
this table are set in dBm! NOT in mW! Therefore this table is used mainly to reduce the transmit
power of the card.
manual-tx-powers ( text ) - define tx-power in dBm for each rate, separate by commas
Example
To set the following transmit powers at each rates: 1Mbps@10dBm, 2Mbps@10dBm,
5.5Mbps@9dBm, 11Mbps@7dBm, do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless manual-tx-power-table> print
0 name="wlan1" manual-tx-powers=1Mbps:17,2Mbps:17,5.5Mbps:17,11Mbps:17,6Mbps:17
,
9Mbps:17,12Mbps:17,18Mbps:17,24Mbps:17,
36Mbps:17,48Mbps:17,54Mbps:17
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless manual-tx-power-table> set 0 \
manual-tx-powers=1Mbps:10,2Mbps:10,5.5Mbps:9,11Mbps:7
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless manual-tx-power-table> print
0 name="wlan1" manual-tx-powers=1Mbps:10,2Mbps:10,5.5Mbps:9,11Mbps:7
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless manual-tx-power-table>
Network Scan
Command name: /interface wireless scan interface_name
Description
This is a feature that allows you to scan all avaliable wireless networks. While scanning, the card
unregisters itself from the access point (in station mode), or unregisters all clients (in bridge or
ap-bridge mode). Thus, network connections are lost while scanning.
address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the AP
band ( read-only: text ) - in which standard does the AP operate
bss ( read-only: yes | no ) - basic service set
freeze-time-interval ( time ; default: 1s ) - time in seconds to refresh the displayed data
freq ( read-only: integer ) - the frequency of AP
interface_name ( name ) - the name of interface which will be used for scanning APs
Page 270 of 695


privacy ( read-only: yes | no ) - whether all data is encrypted or not
signal-strength ( read-only: integer ) - signal strength in dBm
ssid ( read-only: text ) - service set identifier of the AP
Example
Scan the 5GHz band:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> scan wlan1
Flags: A - active, B - bss, P - privacy, R - routeros-network, N - nstreme
ADDRESS SSID BAND FREQ SIG RADIO-NAME
AB R 00:0C:42:05:00:28 test 5ghz 5180 -77 000C42050028
AB R 00:02:6F:20:34:82 aap1 5ghz 5180 -73 00026F203482
AB 00:0B:6B:30:80:0F www 5ghz 5180 -84
AB R 00:0B:6B:31:B6:D7 www 5ghz 5180 -81 000B6B31B6D7
AB R 00:0B:6B:33:1A:D5 R52_test_new 5ghz 5180 -79 000B6B331AD5
AB R 00:0B:6B:33:0D:EA short5 5ghz 5180 -70 000B6B330DEA
AB R 00:0B:6B:31:52:69 MikroTik 5ghz 5220 -69 000B6B315269
AB R 00:0B:6B:33:12:BF long2 5ghz 5260 -55 000B6B3312BF
Security Profiles
Home menu level: /interface wireless security-profiles
Description
This section provides WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) and WPA/WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access)
functions to wireless interfaces.
WPA
The Wi-Fi Protected Access is a combination of 802.1X, EAP, MIC, TKIP and AES. This is a easy
to configure and secure wireless mechanism. It has been later updated to version 2, to provide
greater security.
WEP
The Wired Equivalent Privacy encrypts data only between 802.11 devices, using static keys. It is
not considered a very secure wireless data encryption mechanism, though it is better than no
encryption at all.
The configuration of WEP is quite simple, using MikroTik RouterOS security profiles.
authentication-types ( multiple choice: wpa-psk | wpa2-psk | wpa-eap | wpa2-eap ; default: "" ) -
the list of accepted authentication types. APs will advertise the listed types. Stations will choose the
AP, which supports the "best" type from the list (WPA2 is always preferred to WPA1; EAP is
preferred to PSK)
eap-methods ( multiple choice: eap-tls | passthrough ) - the ordered list of EAP methods. APs will
to propose to the stations one by one (if first method listed is rejected, the next one is tried). Stations
Page 271 of 695


will accept first proposed method that will be on the list
• eap-tls - Use TLS certificates for authentication
• passthrough - relay the authentication process to the RADIUS server (not used by the stations)
group-ciphers ( multiple choice: tkip | aes-ccm ) - a set of ciphers used to encrypt frames sent to all
wireless station (broadcast transfers) in the order of preference
• tkip - Temporal Key Integrity Protocol - encryption protocol, compatible with lagacy WEP
equipment, but enhanced to correct some of WEP flaws
• aes-ccm - more secure WPA encryption protocol, based on the reliable AES (Advanced
Encryption Standard). Networks free of WEP legacy should use only this
group-key-update ( time ; default: 5m ) - how often to update group key. This parameter is used
only if the wireless card is configured as an Access Point
mode ( none | static-keys-optional | static-keys-required | dynamic-keys ; default: none ) - security
mode:
• none - do not encrypt packets and do not accept encrypted packets
• static-keys-optional - if there is a static-sta-private-key set, use it. Otherwise, if the interface is
set in an AP mode, do not use encryption, if the the interface is in station mode, use encryption
if the static-transmit-key is set
• static-keys-required - encrypt all packets and accept only encrypted packets
• dynamic-keys - generate encryptioon keys dynamically
name ( name ) - descriptive name for the security profile
radius-mac-authentication ( no | yes ; default: no ) - whether to use Radius server for MAC
authentication
static-algo-0 ( none | 40bit-wep | 104bit-wep | aes-ccm | tkip ; default: none ) - which encryption
algorithm to use:
• none - do not use encryption and do not accept encrypted packets
• 40bit-wep - use the 40bit encryption (also known as 64bit-wep) and accept only these packets
• 104bit-wep - use the 104bit encryption (also known as 128bit-wep) and accept only these
packets
• aes-ccm - use the AES-CCM (Advanced Encryption Standard in Counter with CBC-MAC)
encryption algorithm and accept only these packets
• tkip - use the TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and accept only these packets
algorithm to use:
packets
algorithm to use:
Page 272 of 695


packets
algorithm to use:
packets
static-key-0 ( text ) - hexadecimal key which will be used to encrypt packets with the 40bit-wep or
104bit-wep algorithm (algo-0). If AES-CCM is used, the key must consist of even number of
characters and must be at least 32 characters long. For TKIP, the key must be at least 64 characters
long and also must consist of even number characters
static-sta-private-algo ( none | 40bit-wep | 104bit-wep | aes-ccm | tkip ) - algorithm to use if the
static-sta-private-key is set. Used to commumicate between 2 devices
static-sta-private-key ( text ) - if this key is set in station mode, use this key for encryption. In AP
mode you have to specify static-private keys in the access-list or use the Radius server using
radius-mac-authentication. Used to commumicate between 2 devices
static-transmit-key ( static-key-0 | static-key-1 | static-key-2 | static-key-3 ; default: static-key-0 ) -
which key to use for broadcast packets. Used in AP mode
tls-certificate ( name ) - select the certificate for this device from the list of imported certificates
tls-mode ( no-certificates | dont-verify-certificate | verify-certificate ; default: no-certificates ) -
TLS certificate mode
• no-certificates - certificates are negotiated dynamically using anonymous Diffie-Hellman
MODP 2048 bit algorithm
Page 273 of 695


• dont-verify-certificate - require a certificate, but do not chack, if it has been signed by the
available CA certificate
• verify-certificate - require a certificate and verify that it has been signed by the available CA
certificate
unicast-ciphers ( multiple choice: tkip | aes-ccm ) - a set of ciphers used to encrypt frames sent to
individual wireless station (unicast transfers) in the order of preference
• tkip - Temporal Key Integrity Protocol - encryption protocol, compatible with lagacy WEP
equipment, but enhanced to correct some of WEP flaws
• aes-ccm - more secure WPA encryption protocol, based on the reliable AES (Advanced
Encryption Standard). Networks free of WEP legacy should use only this
wpa2-pre-shared-key ( text ; default: "" ) - string, which is used as the WPA2 Pre Shared Key. It
must be the same on AP and station to communicate
wpa-group-ciphers ( aes-ccm | tkip ; default: "" ) - which algorithms to use for WPA group
communications (for multicast and broadcast packets). If the interface is an Access Point, it will use
the "strongest" algorithm from AES and TKIP (AES is "stronger"). If the interface acts as a station,
it will connect to Access Points which support at least one of selected algorithms
wpa-pre-shared-key ( text ; default: "" ) - string, which is used as the WPA Pre Shared Key. It
must be the same on AP and station to communicate
wpa-unicast-ciphers ( aes-ccm | tkip ; default: "" ) - which algorithms are allowed to use for
unicast communications. If the interface is an Access Point, then it sends these algorithms as
supported. If it is a station, then it will connect only to APs which support any of these algorithms
Notes
The keys used for encryption are in hexadecimal form. If you use 40bit-wep, the key has to be 10
characters long, if you use 104bit-wep, the key has to be 26 characters long.
Prism card doesn't report that the use of WEP is required for all data type frames, which means that
some clients will not see that access point uses encryption and will not be able to connect to such
AP. This is a Prism hardware problem and can not be fixed. Use Atheros-based cards (instead of
Prism) on APs if you want to provide WEP in your wireless network.
Wireless encryption cannot work together with wireless compression.
Sniffer
Home menu level: /interface wireless sniffer
Description
With wireless sniffer you can sniff packets from wireless networks.
channel-time ( time ; default: 200ms ) - how long to sniff each channel, if multiple-channels is set
to yes
file-limit ( integer ; default: 10 ) - limits file-name's file size (measured in kilobytes)
Page 274 of 695


file-name ( text ; default: "" ) - name of the file where to save packets in PCAP format. If
file-name is not defined, packets are not saved into a file
memory-limit ( integer ; default: 1000 ) - how much memory to use (in kilobytes) for sniffed
packets
multiple-channels ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to sniff multiple channels or a single channel
• no - wireless sniffer sniffs only one channel in frequency that is configured in /interface
wireless
• yes - sniff in all channels that are listed in the scan-list in /interface wireless
only-headers ( yes | no ; default: no ) - sniff only wireless packet heders
receive-errors ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to receive packets with CRC errors
streaming-enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to send packets to server in TZSP format
streaming-max-rate ( integer ; default: 0 ) - how many packets per second the router will accept
• 0 - no packet per second limitation
streaming-server ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - streaming server's IP address
Sniffer Sniff
Home menu level: /interface wireless sniffer sniff
Description
Wireless Sniffer Sniffs packets
file-over-limit-packets ( read-only: integer ) - how many packets are dropped because of
exceeding file-limit
file-saved-packets ( read-only: integer ) - number of packets saved to file
file-size ( read-only: integer ) - current file size (kB)
memory-over-limit-packets ( read-only: integer ) - number of packets that are dropped because of
exceeding memory-limit
memory-saved-packets ( read-only: integer ) - how many packets are stored in mermory
memory-size ( read-only: integer ) - how much memory is currently used for sniffed packets (kB)
processed-packets ( read-only: integer ) - number of sniffed packets
real-file-limit ( read-only: integer ) - the real file size limit. It is calculated from the beginning of
sniffing to reserve at least 1MB free space on the disk
real-memory-limit ( read-only: integer ) - the real memory size limit. It is calculated from the
beginning of sniffing to reserve at least 1MB of free space in the memory
stream-dropped-packets ( read-only: integer ) - number of packets that are dropped because of
exceeding streaming-max-rate
stream-sent-packets ( read-only: integer ) - number of packets that are sent to the streaming server
Command Description
Page 275 of 695


save - saves sniffed packets from the memory to file-name in PCAP format
Sniffer Packets
Description
Wireless Sniffer sniffed packets. If packets Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) field detects error, it
will be displayed by crc-error flag.
dst ( read-only: MAC address ) - the receiver's MAC address
freq ( read-only: integer ) - frequency
interface ( read-only: text ) - wireless interface that captures packets
signal@rate ( read-only: text ) - at which signal-strength and rate was the packet received
src ( read-only: MAC address ) - the sender's MAC address
time ( read-only: time ) - time when the packet was received, starting from the beginning of
sniffing
type ( read-only: assoc-req | assoc-resp | reassoc-req | reassoc-resp | probe-req | probe-resp |
beacon | atim | disassoc | auth | deauth | ps-poll | rts | cts | ack | cf-end | cf-endack | data | d-cfack |
d-cfpoll | d-cfackpoll | data-null | nd-cfack | nd-cfpoll | nd-cfackpoll ) - type of the sniffed packet
Example
Sniffed packets:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless sniffer packet> pr
Flags: E - crc-error
# FREQ SIGNAL@RATE SRC DST TYPE
0 2412 -73dBm@1Mbps 00:0B:6B:31:00:53 FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF beacon
1 2412 -91dBm@1Mbps 00:02:6F:01:CE:2E FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF beacon
2 2412 -45dBm@1Mbps 00:02:6F:05:68:D3 FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF beacon
3 2412 -72dBm@1Mbps 00:60:B3:8C:98:3F FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF beacon
4 2412 -65dBm@1Mbps 00:01:24:70:3D:4E FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF probe-req
Snooper
Home menu level: /interface wireless snooper
Description
With wireless snooper you can monitor the traffic load on each channel.
channel-time ( time ; default: 200ms ) - how long to snoop each channel, if multiple-channels is set
to yes
Page 276 of 695


multiple-channels ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to snoop multiple channels or a single
channel
• no - wireless snooper snoops only one channel in frequency that is configured in /interface
wireless
• yes - snoop in all channels that are listed in the scan-list in /interface wireless
receive-errors ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to receive packets with CRC errors
Command Description
snoop - starts monitoring wireless channels
• wireless interface name - interface that monitoring is performed on
• BAND - operating band
Example
Snoop 802.11b network:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless snooper> snoop wlan1
BAND FREQ USE BW NET-COUNT STA-COUNT
2.4ghz-b 2412MHz 1.5% 11.8kbps 2 2
2.4ghz-b 2417MHz 1.3% 6.83kbps 0 1
2.4ghz-b 2422MHz 0.6% 4.38kbps 1 1
2.4ghz-b 2427MHz 0.6% 4.43kbps 0 0
2.4ghz-b 2432MHz 0.3% 2.22kbps 0 0
2.4ghz-b 2437MHz 0% 0bps 0 0
2.4ghz-b 2442MHz 1% 8.1kbps 0 0
2.4ghz-b 2447MHz 1% 8.22kbps 1 1
2.4ghz-b 2452MHz 1% 8.3kbps 0 0
2.4ghz-b 2457MHz 0% 0bps 0 0
2.4ghz-b 2462MHz 0% 0bps 0 0
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless snooper>
General Information
Station and AccessPoint

This example shows how to configure 2 MikroTik routers - one as Access Point and the other one
as a station on 5GHz (802.11a standard).
Page 277 of 695


• On Access Point:
• mode=ap-bridge
• frequency=5805
• band=5ghz
• ssid=test
• disabled=no
On client (station):
• mode=station
• band=5ghz
• ssid=test
• disabled=no
• Configure the Access Point and add an IP address (10.1.0.1) to it:

[admin@AccessPoint] interface wireless> set 0 mode=ap-bridge frequency=5805 \
band=5ghz disabled=no ssid=test name=AP
[admin@AccessPoint] interface wireless> print
0 name="AP" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:00:22 arp=enabled
radio-name="000C42050022" mode=ap-bridge ssid="test" area=""
frequency=5805 band=5ghz scan-list=default rate-set=default
54Mbps
hide-ssid=no security-profile=default disconnect-timeout=3s
Page 278 of 695


on-fail-retry-time=100ms preamble-mode=both
[admin@AccessPoint] interface wireless> /ip add
[admin@AccessPoint] ip address> add address=10.1.0.1/24 interface=AP
[admin@AccessPoint] ip address> print
0 10.1.0.1/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 AP
[admin@AccessPoint] ip address>
• Configure the station and add an IP address (10.1.0.2) to it:

[admin@Station] interface wireless> set wlan1 name=To-AP mode=station \
ssid=test band=5ghz disabled=no
[admin@Station] interface wireless> print
0 R name="To-AP" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:34:5A:91 arp=enabled
radio-name="000B6B345A91" mode=station ssid="test" area=""
54Mbps
[admin@Station] interface wireless> /ip address
[admin@Station] ip address> add address=10.1.0.2/24 interface=To-AP
[admin@Station] ip address> print
0 172.16.0.2/24 172.16.0.0 172.16.0.255 To-AP
1 192.168.2.3/24 192.168.2.0 192.168.2.255 To-AP
2 10.1.0.2/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 To-AP
[admin@Station] ip address>
• Check whether you can ping the Access Point from Station:
[admin@Station] > ping 10.1.0.1
[admin@Station] >
WDS Station
Using 802.11 set of standards you cannot simply bridge wireless stations. To solve this problem, the
wds-station mode was created - it works just like a station, but connects only to APs that support
WDS.
This example shows you how to make a transparent network, using the Station WDS feature:
Page 279 of 695


On WDS Access Point:
• Configure AP to support WDS connections
• Set wds-default-bridge to bridge1
On WDS station:
• Configure it as a WDS Station, using mode=station-wds
Configure the WDS Access Point. Configure the wireless interface and put it into a bridge, and
define that the dynamic WDS links should be automatically put into the same bridge:
[admin@WDS_AP] > interface bridge
[admin@WDS_AP] interface bridge> add
[admin@WDS_AP] interface bridge> print
0 R name="bridge1" mtu=1500 arp=enabled mac-address=B0:62:0D:08:FF:FF stp=no
[admin@WDS_AP] interface bridge> port
Page 280 of 695


[admin@WDS_AP] interface bridge port> print
0 Public none 128 10
1 wlan1 none 128 10
[admin@WDS_AP] interface bridge port> set 0 bridge=bridge1
[admin@WDS_AP] interface bridge port> /in wireless
[admin@WDS_AP] interface wireless> set wlan1 mode=ap-bridge ssid=wds-sta-test \
wds-mode=dynamic wds-default-bridge=bridge1 disabled=no band=2.4ghz-b/g \
frequency=2437
[admin@WDS_AP] interface wireless> print
0 name="wlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:00:22 arp=enabled
radio-name="000C42050022" mode=ap-bridge ssid="wds-sta-test" area=""
frequency=2437 band=2.4ghz-b/g scan-list=default rate-set=default
54Mbps
wds-mode=dynamic wds-default-bridge=bridge1 wds-ignore-ssid=no
[admin@WDS_AP] interface wireless>
Now configure the WDS station and put the wireless (wlan1) and ethernet (Local) interfaces into a
bridge:
[admin@WDS_Station] > interface bridge
[admin@WDS_Station] interface bridge> add
[admin@WDS_Station] interface bridge> print
[admin@WDS_Station] interface bridge> port
[admin@WDS_Station] interface bridge port> print
0 Local none 128 10
1 wlan1 none 128 10
[admin@WDS_Station] interface bridge port> set 0,1 bridge=bridge1
[admin@WDS_Station] interface bridge port> /interface wireless
[admin@WDS_Station] interface wireless> set wlan1 mode=station-wds disabled=no \
\... ssid=wds-sta-test band=2.4ghz-b/g
[admin@WDS_Station] interface wireless> print
0 R name="wlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:34:5A:91 arp=enabled
radio-name="000B6B345A91" mode=station-wds ssid="wds-sta-test" area=""
54Mbps
[admin@WDS_Station] interface wireless>
Virtual Access Point
Page 281 of 695


Virtual Access Point (VAP) enables you to create multiple Access Points with different Service Set
Identifier, WDS settings, and even different MAC address, using the same hardware interface. You
can create up to 7 VAP interfaces from a single physical interface. To create a Virtual Access Point,
simply add a new interface, specifying a master-interface which is the physical interface that will
do the hardware function to VAP.
This example will show you how to create a VAP:
[admin@VAP] interface wireless> print
54Mbps
[admin@VAP] interface wireless> add master-interface=wlan1 ssid=virtual-test \
\... mac-address=00:0C:42:12:34:56 disabled=no name=V-AP
[admin@VAP] interface wireless> print
54Mbps
1 name="V-AP" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:12:34:56 arp=enabled
disable-running-check=no interface-type=virtual-AP
master-interface=wlan1 ssid="virtual-test" area=""
max-station-count=2007 wds-mode=disabled wds-default-bridge=none
wds-ignore-ssid=no default-authentication=yes default-forwarding=yes
default-ap-tx-limit=0 default-client-tx-limit=0 hide-ssid=no
security-profile=default
[admin@VAP] interface wireless>
When scanning from another router for an AP, you will see that you have 2 Access Points instead of
one:
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> scan Station
Flags: A - active, B - bss, P - privacy, R - routeros-network, N - nstreme
ADDRESS SSID BAND FREQ SIG RADIO-NAME
AB R 00:0C:42:12:34:56 virtual-test 2.4ghz-g 2437 -72 000C42050022
AB R 00:0C:42:05:00:22 test 2.4ghz-g 2437 -72 000C42050022
Note that the master-interface must be configured as an Access Point (ap-bridge or bridge
Page 282 of 695


mode)!
Nstreme
This example shows you how to configure a point-to-point Nstreme link.
The setup of Nstreme is similar to usual wireless configuration, except that you have to do some
changes under /interface wireless nstreme.
• Set the Nstreme-AP to bridge mode and enable Nstreme on it:
[admin@Nstreme-AP] interface wireless> set 0 mode=bridge ssid=nstreme \
\... band=5ghz frequency=5805 disabled=no
[admin@Nstreme-AP] interface wireless> print
radio-name="000C42050022" mode=bridge ssid="nstreme" area=""
54Mbps
[admin@Nstreme-AP] interface wireless> nstreme
[admin@Nstreme-AP] interface wireless nstreme> set wlan1 enable-nstreme=yes
[admin@Nstreme-AP] interface wireless nstreme> print
0 name="wlan1" enable-nstreme=yes enable-polling=yes framer-policy=none
framer-limit=3200
[admin@Nstreme-AP] interface wireless nstreme>
• Configure Nstreme-Client wireless settings and enable Nstreme on it:

[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless> set wlan1 mode=station ssid=nstreme \
band=5ghz frequency=5805 disabled=no
[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless> print
0 name="wlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:34:5A:91 arp=enabled
radio-name="000B6B345A91" mode=station ssid="nstreme" area=""
Page 283 of 695


54Mbps
[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless> nstreme
[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless nstreme> set wlan1 enable-nstreme=yes
[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless nstreme> print
0 name="wlan1" enable-nstreme=yes enable-polling=yes framer-policy=none
framer-limit=3200
[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless nstreme>
And monitor the link:
[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless> monitor wlan1
status: connected-to-ess
band: 5ghz
frequency: 5805MHz
tx-rate: 24Mbps
rx-rate: 18Mbps
ssid: "nstreme"
bssid: 00:0C:42:05:00:22
radio-name: "000C42050022"
signal-strength: -70dBm
tx-signal-strength: -68dBm
tx-ccq: 0%
rx-ccq: 3%
wds-link: no
nstreme: yes
polling: yes
framing-mode: none
routeros-version: "2.9rc2"
current-tx-powers: 1Mbps:11,2Mbps:11,5.5Mbps:11,11Mbps:11,6Mbps:28,
9Mbps:28,12Mbps:28,18Mbps:28,24Mbps:28,36Mbps:25,
48Mbps:23,54Mbps:22
[admin@Nstreme-Client] interface wireless>
Dual Nstreme
The purpose of Nstreme2 (Dual Nstreme) is to make superfast point-to-point links, using 2 wireless
cards on each router - one for receiving and the other one for transmitting data (you can use
different bands for receiving and transmitting). This example will show you how to make a
point-to-point link, using Dual Nstreme.
Page 284 of 695


Configure DualNS-1:
[admin@DualNS-1] interface wireless> set 0,1 mode=nstreme-dual-slave
[admin@DualNS-1] interface wireless> print
radio-name="000C42050436" mode=nstreme-dual-slave ssid="MikroTik"
area="" frequency-mode=superchannel country=no_country_set
antenna-gain=0 frequency=5180 band=5ghz scan-list=default
rate-set=default supported-rates-b=1Mbps,2Mbps,5.5Mbps,11Mbps
54Mbps
54Mbps
[admin@DualNS-1] interface wireless> nstreme-dual
[admin@DualNS-1] interface wireless nstreme-dual> add rx-radio=wlan1 \
tx-radio=wlan2 rx-frequency=5180 tx-frequency=5805 disabled=no
[admin@DualNS-1] interface wireless nstreme-dual> print
0 R name="nstreme1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:04:36 arp=enabled
remote-mac=00:00:00:00:00:00 tx-band=5ghz tx-frequency=5805
rx-band=5ghz rx-frequency=5180 rates-b=1Mbps,2Mbps,5.5Mbps,11Mbps
Page 285 of 695


framer-policy=none framer-limit=4000
[admin@DualNS-1] interface wireless nstreme-dual>
Note the MAC address of the interface nstreme1. You will need it to configure the remote
(DualNS-2) router. As we have not configured the DualNS-2 router, we cannot define the
remote-mac parameter on DualNS-1. We will do it after configuring DualNS-2!
The configuration of DualNS-2:
[admin@DualNS-2] interface wireless> set 0,1 mode=nstreme-dual-slave
[admin@DualNS-2] interface wireless> print
54Mbps
1 name="wlan2" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:06:B2 arp=enabled
radio-name="000C420506B2" mode=nstreme-dual-slave ssid="MikroTik"
54Mbps
[admin@DualNS-2] interface wireless> nstreme-dual
[admin@DualNS-2] interface wireless nstreme-dual> add rx-radio=wlan1 \
\... tx-radio=wlan2 rx-frequency=5805 tx-frequency=5180 disabled=no \
\... remote-mac=00:0C:42:05:04:36
remote-mac=00:0C:42:05:04:36 tx-band=5ghz tx-frequency=5180
Now complete the configuration for DualNS-1:

[admin@DualNS-1] interface wireless nstreme-dual> set 0 remote-mac=00:0C:42:05:00:22
remote-mac=00:0C:42:05:00:22 tx-band=5ghz tx-frequency=5805
Page 286 of 695


WEP Security
This example shows how to configure WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) on Access Point and
Clients. In example we will configure an Access Point which will use 104bit-wep for one station
and 40bit-wep for other clients. The configuration of stations is also present.
The key, used for connection between WEP_AP and WEP_Station1 will be
65432109876543210987654321, key for WEP_AP and WEP_StationX will be 1234567890!
Configure the Access Point:
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless security-profiles> add \
\... name=Station1 mode=static-keys-required static-sta-private-algo=104bit-wep \
\... static-sta-private-key=65432109876543210987654321
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless security-profiles> add name=StationX \
\... mode=static-keys-required static-algo-1=40bit-wep static-key-1=1234567890 \
\... static-transmit-key=key-1
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless security-profiles> print
0 name="default" mode=none wpa-unicast-ciphers="" wpa-group-ciphers=""
pre-shared-key="" static-algo-0=none static-key-0="" static-algo-1=none
static-key-1="" static-algo-2=none static-key-2="" static-algo-3=none
static-key-3="" static-transmit-key=key-0 static-sta-private-algo=none
static-sta-private-key="" radius-mac-authentication=no group-key-update=5m
1 name="Station1" mode=static-keys-required wpa-unicast-ciphers=""
wpa-group-ciphers="" pre-shared-key="" static-algo-0=none static-key-0=""
static-algo-1=none static-key-1="" static-algo-2=none static-key-2=""
static-algo-3=none static-key-3="" static-transmit-key=key-0
static-sta-private-algo=104bit-wep
static-sta-private-key="65432109876543210987654321"
radius-mac-authentication=no group-key-update=5m
2 name="StationX" mode=static-keys-required wpa-unicast-ciphers=""
Page 287 of 695


static-algo-1=40bit-wep static-key-1="1234567890" static-algo-2=none
static-key-2="" static-algo-3=none static-key-3=""
static-transmit-key=key-1 static-sta-private-algo=none
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless security-profiles> ..
[admin@MikroTik] interface wireless> set 0 name=WEP-AP mode=ap-bridge \
\... ssid=mt_wep frequency=5320 band=5ghz disabled=no security-profile=StationX
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless> print
0 name="WEP-AP" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:04:36 arp=enabled
radio-name="000C42050436" mode=ap-bridge ssid="mt_wep" area=""
54Mbps
hide-ssid=no security-profile=StationX disconnect-timeout=3s
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless> access-list
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless access-list> add private-algo=104bit-wep \
\... private-key=65432109876543210987654321 interface=WEP-AP forwarding=yes \
\... mac-address=00:0C:42:05:00:22
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless access-list> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:00:22 interface=WEP-AP authentication=yes
forwarding=yes ap-tx-limit=0 client-tx-limit=0 private-algo=104bit-wep
private-key="65432109876543210987654321"
[admin@WEP_AP] interface wireless access-list>
Configure WEP_StationX:
[admin@WEP_Station1] interface wireless security-profiles> add name=Station1 \
\... mode=static-keys-required static-sta-private-algo=104bit-wep \
\... static-sta-private-key=65432109876543210987654321
[admin@WEP_Station1] interface wireless security-profiles> print
1 name="Station1" mode=static-keys-required wpa-unicast-ciphers=""
static-algo-3=none static-key-3="" static-transmit-key=key-0
static-sta-private-algo=104bit-wep
static-sta-private-key="65432109876543210987654321"
radius-mac-authentication=no group-key-update=5m
[admin@WEP_Station1] interface wireless security-profiles> ..
[admin@WEP_Station1] interface wireless> set wlan1 mode=station ssid=mt_wep \
\... band=5ghz security-profile=Station1 name=WEP-STA1 disabled=no
[admin@WEP_Station1] interface wireless> print
0 R name="WEP-STA1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:00:22 arp=enabled
radio-name="000C42050022" mode=station ssid="mt_wep" area=""
54Mbps
Page 288 of 695


hide-ssid=no security-profile=Station1 disconnect-timeout=3s
[admin@WEP_Station1] interface wireless>
Config of StationX:
[admin@WEP_StationX] interface wireless security-profiles> add name=StationX \
\... mode=static-keys-required static-algo-1=40bit-wep static-key-1=1234567890 \
\... static-transmit-key=key-1
[admin@WEP_StationX] interface wireless security-profiles> print
1 name="StationX" mode=static-keys-required wpa-unicast-ciphers=""
static-algo-1=40bit-wep static-key-1="1234567890" static-algo-2=none
static-key-2="" static-algo-3=none static-key-3=""
[admin@WEP_StationX] interface wireless security-profiles> ..
[admin@WEP_StationX] interface wireless> set wlan1 name=WEP-STAX ssid=mt_wep \
\... band=5ghz security-profile=StationX mode=station disabled=no
[admin@WEP_StationX] interface wireless> print
0 R name="WEP-STAX" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0C:42:05:06:B2 arp=enabled
radio-name="000C420506B2" mode=station ssid="mt_wep" area=""
54Mbps
hide-ssid=no security-profile=StationX disconnect-timeout=3s
[admin@WEP_StationX] interface wireless>
WPA Security
This example shows WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) configuration on Access Point and Client to
secure all data which will be passed between AP and Client
Page 289 of 695


On the AP in default or in your own made profile as an encryption algorithm choose wpa-psk.
Specify the pre-shared-key, wpa-unicast-ciphers and wpa-group-cipher
[admin@WPA_AP] interface wireless security-profiles> set default mode=wpa-psk\
\... pre-shared-key=1234567890 wpa-unicast-ciphers=aes-ccm,tkip
wpa-group-ciphers=aes-ccm,tkip
[admin@WPA_AP] interface wireless security-profiles> pr
0 name="default" mode=wpa-psk wpa-unicast-ciphers=tkip,aes-ccm
wpa-group-ciphers=tkip,aes-ccm pre-shared-key="1234567890"
[admin@WPA_AP] interface wireless security-profiles>
On the Client do the same. Encryption algorithm, wpa-group-cipher and pre-shared-key must be
the same as specified on AP, wpa-unicast-cipher must be one of the ciphers supported by Access
Point
[admin@WPA_Station] interface wireless security-profiles> set default mode=wpa-psk\
\... pre-shared-key=1234567890 wpa-unicast-ciphers=tkip wpa-group-ciphers=aes-ccm,tkip
[admin@WPA_Station] interface wireless security-profiles> pr
0 name="default" mode=wpa-psk wpa-unicast-ciphers=tkip
wpa-group-ciphers=tkip,aes-ccm pre-shared-key="1234567890"
[admin@WPA_Station] interface wireless security-profiles>
Test the link between Access point and the client

[admin@WPA_Station] interface wireless > print
0 R name="wlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:0B:6B:35:E5:5C arp=enabled
radio-name="000B6B35E55C" mode=station ssid="MikroTik" area=""
Page 290 of 695


54Mbps
ack-timeout=dynamic tx-power-mode=default noise-floor-threshold=default
periodic-calibration=default burst-time=disabled dfs-mode=none
antenna-mode=ant-a wds-mode=disabled wds-default-bridge=none
wds-ignore-ssid=no update-stats-interval=disabled
default-authentication=yes default-forwarding=yes default-ap-tx-limit=0
default-client-tx-limit=0 hide-ssid=no security-profile=default
disconnect-timeout=3s on-fail-retry-time=100ms preamble-mode=both
compression=no allow-sharedkey=no
[admin@WPA_Station] interface wireless >
Troubleshooting
Description
• If I use WDS and DFS, the routers do not connect to each other!
As the WDS routers must operate at the same frequency, it is very probable that DFS will not
select the frequency that is used by the peer router.
• MikroTik RouterOS does not send any traffic through Cisco Wireless Access Point or
Wireless Bridge
If you use CISCO/Aironet Wireless Ethernet Bridge or Access Point, you should set the
Configuration/Radio/I80211/Extended (Allow proprietary extensions) to off, and the
Configuration/Radio/I80211/Extended/Encapsulation (Default encapsulation method) to
RFC1042. If left to the default on and 802.1H, respectively, you won't be able to pass traffic
through the bridge.
• Prism wireless clients don't connect to AP after upgrade to 2.9
Prism wireless card's primary firmware version has to be at least 1.0.7 in order to boot wireless
card's secondary firmware, which allows Prism card correctly operate under RouterOS. Check
the log file to see whether the wireless card's secondary firmware was booted.
• Prism wireless clients don't connect to AP
Prism wireless clients do not connect to AP that work with enabled hide-ssid feature
Page 291 of 695


Xpeed SDSL Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Xpeed Interface Configuration
Example
Frame Relay Configuration Examples
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the Xpeed 300 SDSL PCI Adapter hardware with speeds up to
2.32Mbps. This device can operate either using Frame Relay or PPP type of connection. SDSL
(Single-line Digital Subscriber Line or Symmetric Digital Subscriber Line) stands for the type of
DSL that uses only one of the two cable pairs for transmission. SDSL allows residential or small
office users to share the same telephone for data transmission and voice or fax telephony.
Specifications
Home menu level: /interface xpeed
Standards and Technologies: PPP (RFC 1661) , Frame Relay (RFC 1490)
Related Documents
• Xpeed SDSL Interface
Page 292 of 695


• Xpeed homepage
Xpeed Interface Configuration

Home menu level: /interface xpeed
name ( name ) - interface name
mac-address ( MAC address ) - MAC address of the card
• proxy-arp - the interface will be an ARP proxy
neighbor MAC addresses will be gathered from /ip arp statically set table only
mode ( network-termination | line-termination ; default: line-termination ) - interface mode, either
line termination (LT) or network termination (NT)
sdsl-speed ( integer ; default: 2320 ) - SDSL connection speed
sdsl-invert ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the clock is phase inverted with respect to the
Transmitted Data interchange circuit. This configuration option is useful when long cable lengths
between the Termination Unit and the DTE are causing data errors
sdsl-swap ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether or not the Xpeed 300 SDSL Adapter performs bit
swapping. Bit swapping can maximize error performance by attempting to maintain an acceptable
margin for each bin by equalizing the margin across all bins through bit reallocation
bridged-ethernet ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - if the adapter operates in bridged Ethernet mode
dlci ( integer ; default: 16 ) - defines the DLCI to be used for the local interface. The DLCI field
identifies which logical circuit the data travels over
lmi-mode ( off | line-termination | network-termination | network-termination-bidirectional ;
default: off ) - defines how the card will perform LMI protocol negotiation
• off - no LMI will be used
• line-termination - LMI will operate in LT (Line Termination) mode
• network-termination - LMI will operate in NT (Network Termination) mode
• network-termination-bidirectional - LMI will operate in bidirectional NT mode
cr ( 0 | 2 ; default: 0 ) - a special mask value to be used when speaking with certain buggy vendor
equipment. Can be 0 or 2
Example
To enable interface:
Page 293 of 695


[admin@r1] interface> print
# NAME TYPE MTU
1 R inner ether 1500
2 X xpeed1 xpeed 1500
[admin@r1] interface> enable 2
[admin@r1] interface> print
# NAME TYPE MTU
1 R inner ether 1500
2 R xpeed1 xpeed 1500
[admin@r1] interface>
Frame Relay Configuration Examples

Consider the following network setup with MikroTik router connected via SDSL line using Xpeed
interface to another MikroTik router with Xpeed 300 SDSL adapter. SDSL line can refer a common
patch cable included with the Xpeed 300 SDSL adapter (such a connection is called Back-to-Back).
Lets name the first router r1 and the second r2.
Router r1 setup
The following setup is identical to one in the first example:
[admin@r1] ip address> add inter=xpeed1 address 1.1.1.1/24
[admin@r1] ip address> pri
0 1.1.1.1/24 1.1.1.0 1.1.1.255 xpeed1
[admin@r1] interface xpeed> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="xpeed1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:05:7A:00:00:08 arp=enabled
mode=network-termination sdsl-speed=2320 sdsl-invert=no sdsl-swap=no
bridged-ethernet=yes dlci=16 lmi-mode=off cr=0
[admin@r1] interface xpeed>
Router r2 setup
First, we need to add a suitable IP address:
0 1.1.1.2/24 1.1.1.0 1.1.1.255 xpeed1
Then, some changes in xpeed interface configuration should be done:

Flags: X - disabled
[admin@r2] interface xpeed> set 0 mode=line-termination
Now r1 and r2 can ping each other.
Page 294 of 695


Let us consider the following network setup with MikroTik Router with Xpeed interface connected
to a leased line with a CISCO router at the other end.
MikroTik router setup:
0 1.1.1.1/24 1.1.1.0 1.1.1.255 xpeed1
Flags: X - disabled
Cisco router setup

...
!
ip subnet-zero
no ip domain-lookup
!
interface Ethernet0
ip address 10.0.0.254 255.255.255.0
!
interface Serial0
no ip address
!
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
no arp frame-relay
!
...
end.
CISCO#ping 1.1.1.1
!!!!!
CISCO#
Troubleshooting
Description
Page 295 of 695


• I tried to connect two routers as shown in MT-to-MT, but nothing happens
The link indicators on both cards must be on. If it's not, check the cable or interface
configuration. One adapter should use LT mode and the other NT mode. You can also change
sdsl-swap and sdsl-invert parameters on the router running LT mode if you have a very long
line
Page 296 of 695


EoIP
Document revision 1.4 (Fri Nov 04 20:53:13 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Notes
EoIP Setup
Notes
Example
EoIP Application Example
Description
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
Ethernet over IP (EoIP) Tunneling is a MikroTik RouterOS protocol that creates an Ethernet tunnel
between two routers on top of an IP connection. The EoIP interface appears as an Ethernet
interface. When the bridging function of the router is enabled, all Ethernet traffic (all Ethernet
protocols) will be bridged just as if there where a physical Ethernet interface and cable between the
two routers (with bridging enabled). This protocol makes multiple network schemes possible.
Network setups with EoIP interfaces:
• Possibility to bridge LANs over the Internet
• Possibility to bridge LANs over encrypted tunnels
• Possibility to bridge LANs over 802.11b 'ad-hoc' wireless networks
Quick Setup Guide

To make an EoIP tunnel between 2 routers which have IP addresses 10.5.8.1 and 10.1.0.1:
1. On router with IP address 10.5.8.1, add an EoIP interface and set its MAC address:
/interface eoip add remote-address=10.1.0.1 tunnel-id=1 mac-address=00-00-5E-80-00-01 \
\... disabled=no
Page 297 of 695


2. On router with IP address 10.1.0.1, add an EoIP interface and set its MAC address::
/interface eoip add remote-address=10.5.8.1 tunnel-id=1 mac-address=00-00-5E-80-00-02 \
\... disabled=no
Now you can add IP addresses to the created EoIP interfaces from the same subnet.
Specifications
License required: level1 (limited to 1 tunnel) , level3
Home menu level: /interface eoip
Standards and Technologies: GRE (RFC1701)
Related Documents

• Bridge
• PPTP
Description
An EoIP interface should be configured on two routers that have the possibility for an IP level
connection. The EoIP tunnel may run over an IPIP tunnel, a PPTP 128bit encrypted tunnel, a
PPPoE connection, or any connection that transports IP.
Specific Properties:
• Each EoIP tunnel interface can connect with one remote router which has a corresponding
interface configured with the same 'Tunnel ID'.
• The EoIP interface appears as an Ethernet interface under the interface list.
• This interface supports all features of an Ethernet interface. IP addresses and other tunnels may
be run over the interface.
• The EoIP protocol encapsulates Ethernet frames in GRE (IP protocol number 47) packets (just
like PPTP) and sends them to the remote side of the EoIP tunnel.
• Maximal count of EoIP tunnels is 65536.
Notes
WDS significantly faster than EoIP (up to 10-20% on RouterBOARD 500 systems), so it is
recommended to use WDS whenever possible.
EoIP Setup
Home menu level: /interface eoip
Page 298 of 695


mac-address ( MAC address ) - MAC address of the EoIP interface. You can freely use MAC
addresses that are in the range from 00-00-5E-80-00-00 to 00-00-5E-FF-FF-FF
mtu ( integer ; default: 1500 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit. The default value provides maximal
compatibility
name ( name ; default: eoip-tunnelN ) - interface name for reference
remote-address - the IP address of the other side of the EoIP tunnel - must be a MikroTik router
tunnel-id ( integer ) - a unique tunnel identifier
Notes
tunnel-id is method of identifying tunnel. There should not be tunnels with the same tunnel-id on
the same router. tunnel-id on both participant routers must be equal.
mtu should be set to 1500 to eliminate packet refragmentation inside the tunnel (that allows
transparent bridging of Ethernet-like networks, so that it would be possible to transport full-sized
Ethernet frame over the tunnel).
When bridging EoIP tunnels, it is highly recommended to set unique MAC addresses for each
tunnel for the bridge algorithms to work correctly. For EoIP interfaces you can use MAC addresses
that are in the range from 00-00-5E-80-00-00 to 00-00-5E-FF-FF-FF, which IANA has reserved
for such cases. Alternatively, you can set the second bit of the first byte to mark the address as
locally administered address, assigned by network administrator, and use any MAC address, you
just need to ensure they are unique between the hosts connected to one bridge.
Example
To add and enable an EoIP tunnel named to_mt2 to the 10.5.8.1 router, specifying tunnel-id of 1:
[admin@MikroTik] interface eoip> add name=to_mt2 remote-address=10.5.8.1 \
\... tunnel-id 1
[admin@MikroTik] interface eoip> print
0 X name="to_mt2" mtu=1500 arp=enabled remote-address=10.5.8.1 tunnel-id=1
[admin@MikroTik] interface eoip> enable 0
[admin@MikroTik] interface eoip> print
0 R name="to_mt2" mtu=1500 arp=enabled remote-address=10.5.8.1 tunnel-id=1
[admin@MikroTik] interface eoip>
EoIP Application Example
Description
Let us assume we want to bridge two networks: 'Office LAN' and 'Remote LAN'. The networks are
connected to an IP network through the routers [Our_GW] and [Remote]. The IP network can be a
private intranet or the Internet. Both routers can communicate with each other through the IP
Page 299 of 695


network.
Example
Our goal is to create a secure channel between the routers and bridge both networks through it. The
network setup diagram is as follows:
To make a secure Ethernet bridge between two routers you should:

1. Create a PPTP tunnel between them. Our_GW will be the pptp server:
[admin@Our_GW] interface pptp-server> /ppp secret add name=joe service=pptp \
\... password=top_s3 local-address=10.0.0.1 remote-address=10.0.0.2
[admin@Our_GW] interface pptp-server> add name=from_remote user=joe
[admin@Our_GW] interface pptp-server> server set enable=yes
[admin@Our_GW] interface pptp-server> print
# NAME USER MTU CLIENT-ADDRESS UPTIME ENC...
0 from_remote joe
[admin@Our_GW] interface pptp-server>
The Remote router will be the pptp client:
[admin@Remote] interface pptp-client> add name=pptp user=joe \
\... connect-to=192.168.1.1 password=top_s3 mtu=1500 mru=1500
[admin@Remote] interface pptp-client> enable pptp
[admin@Remote] interface pptp-client> print
0 R name="pptp" mtu=1500 mru=1500 connect-to=192.168.1.1 user="joe"
password="top_s2" profile=default add-default-route=no
[admin@Remote] interface pptp-client> monitor pptp
status: "connected"
uptime: 39m46s
Page 300 of 695


encoding: "none"
[admin@Remote] interface pptp-client>
See the PPTP Interface Manual for more details on setting up encrypted channels.
2. Configure the EoIP tunnel by adding the eoip tunnel interfaces at both routers. Use the ip
addresses of the pptp tunnel interfaces when specifying the argument values for the EoIP
tunnel:
[admin@Our_GW] interface eoip> add name="eoip-remote" tunnel-id=0 \
[admin@Our_GW] interface eoip> enable eoip-remote
[admin@Our_GW] interface eoip> print
0 name=eoip-remote mtu=1500 arp=enabled remote-address=10.0.0.2 tunnel-id=0
[admin@Our_GW] interface eoip>
[admin@Remote] interface eoip> add name="eoip" tunnel-id=0 \
[admin@Remote] interface eoip> enable eoip-main
[admin@Remote] interface eoip> print
0 name=eoip mtu=1500 arp=enabled remote-address=10.0.0.1 tunnel-id=0
[Remote] interface eoip>
3. Enable bridging between the EoIP and Ethernet interfaces on both routers.
On the Our_GW:
[admin@Our_GW] interface bridge> add
[admin@Our_GW] interface bridge> print
[admin@Our_GW] interface bridge> add bridge=bridge1 interface=eoip-remote
[admin@Our_GW] interface bridge> add bridge=bridge1 interface=office-eth
[admin@Our_GW] interface bridge> port print
Flags: X - disabled, I - inactive, D - dynamic
0 eoip-remote bridge1 128 10
1 office-eth bridge1 128 10
[admin@Our_GW] interface bridge>
And the same for the Remote:
[admin@Remote] interface bridge> add
[admin@Remote] interface bridge> print
[admin@Remote] interface bridge> add bridge=bridge1 interface=ether
[admin@Remote] interface bridge> add bridge=bridge1 interface=eoip-main
[admin@Remote] interface bridge> port print
Flags: X - disabled, I - inactive, D - dynamic
0 ether bridge1 128 10
1 eoip-main bridge1 128 10
[admin@Remote] interface bridge> port print
4. Addresses from the same network can be used both in the Office LAN and in the Remote
LAN.
Troubleshooting
Page 301 of 695


Description
• The routers can ping each other but EoIP tunnel does not seem to work!
Check the MAC addresses of the EoIP interfaces - they should not be the same!
Page 302 of 695


IP Security
Document revision 3.4 (Tue Nov 22 14:19:15 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Policy Settings
Description
Notes
Example
Peers
Description
Notes
Example
Remote Peer Statistics
Description
Example
Installed SAs
Description
Example
Flushing Installed SA Table
Description
Example
Counters
Example
IPsec Between two Masquerading MikroTik Routers
MikroTik router to CISCO Router
MikroTik Router and Linux FreeS/WAN
General Information
Specifications
Packages required: security
Home menu level: /ip ipsec
Page 303 of 695


Standards and Technologies: IPsec
Hardware usage: consumes a lot of CPU time (Intel Pentium MMX or AMD K6 suggested as a
minimal configuration)
Related Documents

•
Description
IPsec (IP Security) supports secure (encrypted) communications over IP networks.
Encryption
After packet is src-natted, but before putting it into interface queue, IPsec policy database is
consulted to find out if packet should be encrypted. Security Policy Database (SPD) is a list of rules
that have two parts:
• Packet matching - packet source/destination, protocol and ports (for TCP and UDP) are
compared to values in policy rules, one after another
• Action - if rule matches action specified in rule is performed:
• • accept - continue with packet as if there was no IPsec
• drop - drop packet
• encrypt - encrypt packet
Each SPD rule can be associated with several Security Associations (SA) that determine packet
encryption parameters (key, algorithm, SPI).
Note that packet can only be encrypted if there is usable SA for policy rule. By setting SPD rule
security "level" user can control what happens when there is no valid SA for policy rule:
• use - if there is no valid SA, send packet unencrypted (like accept rule)
• acquire - send packet unencrypted, but ask IKE daemon to establish new SA
• require - drop packet, and ask IKE daemon to establish new SA.
Decryption
When encrypted packet is received for local host (after dst-nat and input filter), the appropriate SA
is looked up to decrypt it (using packet source, destination, security protocol and SPI value). If no
SA is found, the packet is dropped. If SA is found, packet is decrypted. Then decrypted packet's
fields are compared to policy rule that SA is linked to. If the packet does not match the policy rule it
is dropped. If the packet is decrypted fine (or authenticated fine) it is "received once more" - it goes
through dst-nat and routing (which finds out what to do - either forward or deliver locally) again.
Note that before forward and input firewall chains, a packet that was not decrypted on local host is
compared with SPD reversing its matching rules. If SPD requires encryption (there is valid SA
associated with matching SPD rule), the packet is dropped. This is called incoming policy check.
Page 304 of 695


Internet Key Exchange
The Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is a protocol that provides authenticated keying material for
Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP) framework. There are
other key exchange schemes that work with ISAKMP, but IKE is the most widely used one.
Together they provide means for authentication of hosts and automatic management of security
associations (SA).
Most of the time IKE daemon is doing nothing. There are two possible situations when it is
activated:
• There is some traffic caught by a policy rule which needs to become encrypted or
authenticated, but the policy doesn't have any SAs. The policy notifies IKE daemon about that,
and IKE daemon initiates connection to remote host.
• IKE daemon responds to remote connection.
In both cases, peers establish connection and execute 2 phases:
• Phase 1 - The peers agree upon algorithms they will use in the following IKE messages and
authenticate. The keying material used to derive keys for all SAs and to protect following
ISAKMP exchanges between hosts is generated also.
• Phase 2 - The peers establish one or more SAs that will be used by IPsec to encrypt data. All
SAs established by IKE daemon will have lifetime values (either limiting time, after which SA
will become invalid, or amount of data that can be encrypted by this SA, or both).
There are two lifetime values - soft and hard. When SA reaches it's soft lifetime treshold, the IKE
daemon receives a notice and starts another phase 2 exchange to replace this SA with fresh one. If
SA reaches hard lifetime, it is discarded.
IKE can optionally provide a Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), whish is a property of key exchanges,
that, in turn, means for IKE that compromising the long term phase 1 key will not allow to easily
gain access to all IPsec data that is protected by SAs established through this phase 1. It means an
additional keying material is generated for each phase 2.
Generation of keying material is computationally very expensive. Exempli gratia, the use of
modp8192 group can take several seconds even on very fast computer. It usually takes place once
per phase 1 exchange, which happens only once between any host pair and then is kept for long
time. PFS adds this expensive operation also to each phase 2 exchange.
Diffie-Hellman MODP Groups

Diffie-Hellman (DH) key exchange protocol allows two parties without any initial shared secret to
create one securely. The following Modular Exponential (MODP) Diffie-Hellman (also known as
"Oakley") Groups are supported:
Diffie-Hellman Group Modulus Reference

Group 1 768 bits RFC2409
Page 305 of 695


IKE Traffic
To avoid problems with IKE packets hit some SPD rule and require to encrypt it with not yet
established SA (that this packet perhaps is trying to establish), locally originated packets with UDP
source port 500 are not processed with SPD. The same way packets with UDP destination port 500
that are to be delivered locally are not processed in incoming policy check.
Setup Procedure
To get IPsec to work with automatic keying using IKE-ISAKMP you will have to configure policy,
peer and proposal (optional) entries.
For manual keying you will have to configure policy and manual-sa entries.
Policy Settings
Home menu level: /ip ipsec policy
Description
Policy table is needed to determine whether encryption should be applied to a packet.
action ( accept | drop | encrypt ; default: accept ) - specifies what action to undertake with a packet
that matches the policy
• accept - pass the packet
• drop - drop the packet
• encrypt - apply transformations specified in this policy and it's SA
decrypted ( integer ) - how many incoming packets were decrypted by the policy
dont-fragment ( clear | inherit | set ; default: clear ) - The state of the don't fragment IP header
field
• clear - clear (unset) the fields, so that packets previously marked as don't fragment got
fragmented
• inherit - do not change the field
• set - set the field, so that each packet matching the rule will not be fragmented
dst-address ( IP address | netmask | port ; default: 0.0.0.0/32:any ) - destination IP address
encrypted ( integer ) - how many outgoing packets were encrypted by the policy
in-accepted ( integer ) - how many incoming packets were passed through by the policy without an
attempt to decrypt
in-dropped ( integer ) - how many incoming packets were dropped by the policy without an
attempt to decrypt
ipsec-protocols ( multiple choice: ah | esp ; default: esp ) - specifies what combination of
Authentication Header and Encapsulating Security Payload protocols you want to apply to matched
traffic. AH is applied after ESP, and in case of tunnel mode ESP will be applied in tunnel mode and
Page 306 of 695


AH - in transport mode
level ( acquire | require | use ; default: require ) - specifies what to do if some of the SAs for this
policy cannot be found:
• use - skip this transform, do not drop packet and do not acquire SA from IKE daemon
• acquire - skip this transform, but acquire SA for it from IKE daemon
• require - drop packet but acquire SA
manual-sa ( name ; default: none ) - name of manual-sa template that will be used to create SAs
for this policy
• none - no manual keys are set
not-decrypted ( integer ) - how many incoming packets the policy attempted to decrypt. but
discarded for any reason
not-encrypted ( integer ) - how many outgoing packets the policy attempted to encrypt. but
discarded for any reason
out-accepted ( integer ) - how many outgoing packets were passed through by the policy without
an attempt to encrypt
out-dropped ( integer ) - how many outgoing packets were dropped by the policy without an
attempt to encrypt
ph2-state ( read-only: expired | no-phase2 | established ) - indication of the progress of key
establishing
• expired - there are some leftovers from previous phase2. In general it is similar to no-phase2
• no-phase2 - no keys are estabilished at the moment
• estabilished - Appropriate SAs are in place and everything should be working fine
proposal ( name ; default: default ) - name of proposal information that will be sent by IKE
daemon to establish SAs for this policy
protocol ( name | integer ; default: all ) - protocol name or number
sa-dst-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - SA destination IP address
sa-src-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - SA source IP address
src-address ( IP address | netmask | port ; default: 0.0.0.0/32:any ) - source IP address
tunnel ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether to use tunnel mode
Notes
All packets are IPIP encapsulated in tunnel mode, and their new IP header src-address and
dst-address are set to sa-src-address and sa-dst-address values of this policy. If you do not use
tunnel mode (id est you use transport mode), then only packets whose source and destination
addresses are the same as sa-src-address and sa-dst-address can be processed by this policy.
Transport mode can only work with packets that originate at and are destined for IPsec peers (hosts
that established security associations). To encrypt traffic between networks (or a network and a
host) you have to use tunnel mode.
It is good to have dont-fragment cleared because encrypted packets are always bigger than original
and thus they may need fragmentation.
If you are using IKE to establish SAs automatically, then policies on both routers must exactly
Page 307 of 695


match each other, id est src-address=1.2.3.0/27 on one router and dst-address=1.2.3.0/28 on
another would not work. Source address values on one router MUST be equal to destination address
values on the other one, and vice versa.
Example
To add a policy to encrypt all the traffic between two hosts (10.0.0.147 and 10.0.0.148), we need do
the following:
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec policy> add sa-src-address=10.0.0.147 \
\... sa-dst-address=10.0.0.148 action=encrypt
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec policy> print
Flags: X - disabled, D - dynamic, I - invalid
0 src-address=10.0.0.147/32:any dst-address=10.0.0.148/32:any protocol=all
action=encrypt level=require ipsec-protocols=esp tunnel=no
sa-src-address=10.0.0.147 sa-dst-address=10.0.0.148 proposal=default
manual-sa=none dont-fragment=clear
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec policy>
to view the policy statistics, do the following:

[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec policy> print stats
Flags: X - disabled, D - dynamic, I - invalid
0 src-address=10.0.0.147/32:any dst-address=10.0.0.148/32:any
protocol=all ph2-state=no-phase2 in-accepted=0 in-dropped=0
out-accepted=0 out-dropped=0 encrypted=0 not-encrypted=0 decrypted=0
not-decrypted=0
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec policy>
Peers
Home menu level: /ip ipsec peer
Description
Peer configuration settings are used to establish connections between IKE daemons (phase 1
configuration). This connection then will be used to negotiate keys and algorithms for SAs.
address ( IP address | netmask | port ; default: 0.0.0.0/32:500 ) - address prefix. If remote peer's
address matches this prefix, then this peer configuration is used while authenticating and
establishing phase 1. If several peer's addresses matches several configuration entries, the most
specific one (i.e. the one with largest netmask) will be used
dh-group ( multiple choice: modp768 | modp1024 | modp1536 ; default: esp ) - Diffie-Hellman
MODP group (cipher strength)
enc-algorithm ( multiple choice: des | 3des | aes-128 | aes-192 | aes-256 ; default: 3des ) -
encryption algorithm. Algorithms are named in strength increasing order
exchange-mode ( multiple choice: main | aggressive | base ; default: main ) - different ISAKMP
phase 1 exchange modes according to RFC 2408.DO not use other modes then main unless you
know what you are doing
generate-policy ( yes | no ; default: no ) - allow this peer to establish SA for non-existing policies.
Page 308 of 695


Such policies are created dynamically for the lifetime of SA. This way it is possible, for example, to
create IPsec secured L2TP tunnels, or any other setup where remote peer's IP address is not known
at configuration time
hash-algorithm ( multiple choice: md5 | sha ; default: md5 ) - hashing algorithm. SHA (Secure
Hash Algorithm) is stronger, but slower
lifebytes ( integer ; default: 0 ) - phase 1 lifetime: specifies how much bytes can be transferred
before SA is discarded
• 0 - SA expiration will not be due to byte count excess
lifetime ( time ; default: 1d ) - phase 1 lifetime: specifies how long the SA will be valid; SA will be
discarded after this time
proposal-check ( multiple choice: claim | exact | obey | strict ; default: strict ) - phase 2 lifetime
check logic:
• claim - take shortest of proposed and configured lifetimes and notify initiator about it
• exact - require lifetimes to be the same
• obey - accept whatever is sent by an initiator
• strict - If proposed lifetime IS longer than default then reject proposal otherwise accept
proposed lifetime
secret ( text ; default: "" ) - secret string. If it starts with '0x', it is parsed as a hexadecimal value
send-initial-contact ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - specifies whether to send initial IKE information or
wait for remote side
Notes
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption algorithms are much faster than DES, so it is
recommended to use this algorithm class whenever possible. But, AES's speed is also its drawback
as it potentially can be cracked faster, so use AES-256 when you need security or AES-128 when
speed is also important.
Both peers MUST have the same encryption and authentication algorithms, DH group and
exchange mode. Some legacy hardware may support only DES and MD5.
You should set generate-policy flag to yes only for trusted peers, because there is no verification
done for the established policy. To protect yourself against possible unwanted events, add policies
with action=accept for all networks you don't want to be encrypted at the top of policy list. Since
dynamic policies are added at the bottom of the list, they will not be able to override your
configuration.
Example
To define new peer configuration for 10.0.0.147 peer with secret=gwejimezyfopmekun:
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec peer>add address=10.0.0.147/32 \
\... secret=gwejimezyfopmekun
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec peer> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 address=10.0.0.147/32:500 secret="gwejimezyfopmekun" generate-policy=no
exchange-mode=main send-initial-contact=yes proposal-check=obey
hash-algorithm=md5 enc-algorithm=3des dh-group=modp1024 lifetime=1d
lifebytes=0
Page 309 of 695


[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec peer>
Remote Peer Statistics

Home menu level: /ip ipsec remote-peers
Description
This submenu provides you with various statistics about remote peers that currently have
established phase 1 connections with this router. Note that if peer doesn't show up here, it doesn't
mean that no IPsec traffic is being exchanged with it. For example, manually configured SAs will
not show up here.
estabilished ( read-only: text ) - shows date and time when phase 1 was established with the peer
local-address ( read-only: IP address ) - local ISAKMP SA address
ph2-active ( read-only: integer ) - how many phase 2 negotiations with this peer are currently
taking place
ph2-total ( read-only: integer ) - how many phase 2 negotiations with this peer took place
remote-address ( read-only: IP address ) - peer's IP address
side ( multiple choice, read-only: initiator | responder ) - shows which side initiated the connection
• initiator - phase 1 negotiation was started by this router
• responder - phase 1 negotiation was started by peer
state ( read-only: text ) - state of phase 1 negotiation with the peer
• estabilished - normal working state
Example
To see currently estabilished SAs:
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec> remote-peers print
0 local-address=10.0.0.148 remote-address=10.0.0.147 state=established
side=initiator established=jan/25/2003 03:34:45 ph2-active=0 ph2-total=1
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec>
Installed SAs
Home menu level: /ip ipsec installed-sa
Description
This facility provides information about installed security associations including the keys
add-lifetime ( read-only: time ) - soft/hard expiration time counted from installation of SA
Page 310 of 695


auth-algorithm ( multiple choice, read-only: none | md5 | sha1 ) - authentication algorithm used in
SA
auth-key ( read-only: text ) - authentication key presented in form of hex string
current-addtime ( read-only: text ) - time when this SA was installed
current-bytes ( read-only: integer ) - amount of data processed by this SA's crypto algorithms
current-usetime ( read-only: text ) - time when this SA was first used
direction ( multiple choice, read-only: in | out ) - SA direction
dst-address ( read-only: IP address ) - destination address of SA taken from respective policy
enc-algorithm ( multiple choice, read-only: none | des | 3des | aes ) - encryption algorithm used in
SA
enc-key ( read-only: text ) - encryption key presented in form of hex string (not applicable to AH
SAs)
lifebytes ( read-only: integer ) - soft/hard expiration threshold for amount of processed data
replay ( read-only: integer ) - size of replay window presented in bytes. This window protects the
receiver against replay attacks by rejecting old or duplicate packets.
spi ( read-only: integer ) - SPI value of SA, represented in hexadecimal form
src-address ( read-only: IP address ) - source address of SA taken from respective policy
state ( multiple choice, read-only: larval | mature | dying | dead ) - SA living phase
use-lifetime ( read-only: time ) - soft/hard expiration time counted from the first use of SA
Example
Sample printout looks as follows:
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec> installed-sa print
Flags: A - AH, E - ESP, P - pfs, M - manual
0 E spi=E727605 direction=in src-address=10.0.0.148
dst-address=10.0.0.147 auth-algorithm=sha1 enc-algorithm=3des
replay=4 state=mature
auth-key="ecc5f4aee1b297739ec88e324d7cfb8594aa6c35"
enc-key="d6943b8ea582582e449bde085c9471ab0b209783c9eb4bbd"
add-lifetime=24m/30m use-lifetime=0s/0s lifebytes=0/0
current-addtime=jan/28/2003 20:55:12
current-usetime=jan/28/2003 20:55:23 current-bytes=128
1 E spi=E15CEE06 direction=out src-address=10.0.0.147
dst-address=10.0.0.148 auth-algorithm=sha1 enc-algorithm=3des
auth-key="8ac9dc7ecebfed9cd1030ae3b07b32e8e5cb98af"
enc-key="8a8073a7afd0f74518c10438a0023e64cc660ed69845ca3c"
add-lifetime=24m/30m use-lifetime=0s/0s lifebytes=0/0
current-addtime=jan/28/2003 20:55:12
current-usetime=jan/28/2003 20:55:12 current-bytes=512
Flushing Installed SA Table

Command name: /ip ipsec installed-sa flush
Description
Sometimes after incorrect/incomplete negotiations took place, it is required to flush manually the
Page 311 of 695


installed SA table so that SA could be renegotiated. This option is provided by the flush command.
sa-type ( multiple choice: ah | all | esp ; default: all ) - specifies SA types to flush
• ah - delete AH protocol SAs only
• esp - delete ESP protocol SAs only
• all - delete both ESP and AH protocols SAs
Example
To flush all the SAs installed:
[admin@MikroTik] ip ipsec installed-sa> flush
[admin@MikroTik] ip ipsec installed-sa> print
[admin@MikroTik] ip ipsec installed-sa>
Counters
Home menu level: /ip ipsec counters
in-accept ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many incoming packets were matched by accept
policy
in-accept-isakmp ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many incoming UDP packets on port 500
were let through without matching a policy
in-decrypted ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many incoming packets were successfully
decrypted
in-drop ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many incoming packets were matched by drop policy
(or encrypt policy with level=require that does not have all necessary SAs)
in-drop-encrypted-expected ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many incoming packets were
matched by encrypt policy and dropped because they were not encrypted
out-accept ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many outgoing packets were matched by accept
policy (including the default "accept all" case)
out-accept-isakmp ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many locally originated UDP packets on
source port 500 (which is how ISAKMP packets look) were let through without policy matching
out-drop ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many outgoing packets were matched by drop policy
(or encrypt policy with level=require that does not have all necessary SAs)
out-encrypt ( read-only: integer ) - shows how many outgoing packets were encrypted
successfully
Example
To view current statistics:
[admin@WiFi] ip ipsec> counters print
out-accept: 6
Page 312 of 695


out-accept-isakmp: 0
out-drop: 0
out-encrypt: 7
in-accept: 12
in-accept-isakmp: 0
in-drop: 0
in-decrypted: 7
in-drop-encrypted-expected: 0
General Information
• transport mode example using ESP with automatic keying

• for Router1
[admin@Router1] > ip ipsec policy add sa-src-address=1.0.0.1 sa-dst-address=1.0.0.2 \
\... action=encrypt
[admin@Router1] > ip ipsec peer add address=1.0.0.2 \
\... secret="gvejimezyfopmekun"
• for Router2
\... action=encrypt
• transport mode example using ESP with automatic keying and automatic policy generating on
Router 1 and static policy on Router 2
Page 313 of 695


• for Router1
[admin@Router1] > ip ipsec peer add address=1.0.0.0/24 \
\... secret="gvejimezyfopmekun" generate-policy=yes
• for Router2
\... action=encrypt
• tunnel mode example using AH with manual keying

• for Router1
[admin@Router1] > ip ipsec manual-sa add name=ah-sa1 \
\... ah-spi=0x101/0x100 ah-key=abcfed
[admin@Router1] > ip ipsec policy add src-address=10.1.0.0/24 \
\... dst-address=10.2.0.0/24 action=encrypt ipsec-protocols=ah \
\... tunnel=yes sa-src=1.0.0.1 sa-dst=1.0.0.2 manual-sa=ah-sa1
• for Router2
[admin@Router2] > ip ipsec manual-sa add name=ah-sa1 \
\... ah-spi=0x100/0x101 ah-key=abcfed
\... dst-address=10.1.0.0/24 action=encrypt ipsec-protocols=ah \
\... tunnel=yes sa-src=1.0.0.2 sa-dst=1.0.0.1 manual-sa=ah-sa1
IPsec Between two Masquerading MikroTik Routers
1. Add accept and masquerading rules in SRC-NAT
Page 314 of 695


• for Router1
[admin@Router1] > ip firewall nat add chain=srcnat src-address=10.1.0.0/24 \

\... dst-address=10.2.0.0/24
[admin@Router1] > ip firewall nat add chain=srcnat out-interface=public \
\... action=masquerade
• for Router2
[admin@Router2] > ip firewall nat chain=srcnat add src-address=10.2.0.0/24 \

\... dst-address=10.1.0.0/24
[admin@Router2] > ip firewall nat chain=srcnat add out-interface=public \
\... action=masquerade
2. configure IPsec
• for Router1
\... dst-address=10.2.0.0/24 action=encrypt tunnel=yes \
\... sa-src-address=1.0.0.1 sa-dst-address=1.0.0.2
\... exchange-mode=aggressive secret="gvejimezyfopmekun"
• for Router2
\... dst-address=10.1.0.0/24 action=encrypt tunnel=yes \
\... sa-src-address=1.0.0.2 sa-dst-address=1.0.0.1
\... exchange-mode=aggressive secret="gvejimezyfopmekun"
MikroTik router to CISCO Router
We will configure IPsec in tunnel mode in order to protect traffic between attached subnets.
Page 315 of 695


1. Add peer (with phase1 configuration parameters), DES and SHA1 will be used to protect IKE
traffic
• for MikroTik router
[admin@MikroTik] > ip ipsec peer add address=10.0.1.2 \
\... secret="gvejimezyfopmekun" enc-algorithm=des
• for CISCO router
! Configure ISAKMP policy (phase1 config, must match configuration

! of "/ip ipsec peer" on RouterOS). Note that DES is default
! encryption algorithm on Cisco. SHA1 is default authentication
! algorithm
crypto isakmp policy 9
encryption des
authentication pre-share
group 2
hash md5
exit
! Add preshared key to be used when talking to RouterOS
crypto isakmp key gvejimezyfopmekun address 10.0.1.1 255.255.255.255
2. Set encryption proposal (phase2 proposal - settings that will be used to encrypt actual data) to
use DES to encrypt data
[admin@MikroTik] > ip ipsec proposal set default enc-algorithms=des
! Create IPsec transform set - transformations that should be applied to

! traffic - ESP encryption with DES and ESP authentication with SHA1
! This must match "/ip ipsec proposal"
crypto ipsec transform-set myset esp-des esp-sha-hmac
mode tunnel
exit
3. Add policy rule that matches traffic between subnets and requires encryption with ESP in
tunnel mode
[admin@MikroTik] > ip ipsec policy add \
\... src-address=10.0.0.0/24 dst-address=10.0.2.0/24 action=encrypt \
\... tunnel=yes sa-src=10.0.1.1 sa-dst=10.0.1.2
! Create access list that matches traffic that should be encrypted

access-list 101 permit ip 10.0.2.0 0.0.0.255 10.0.0.0 0.0.0.255
! Create crypto map that will use transform set "myset", use peer 10.0.1.1
! to establish SAs and encapsulate traffic and use access-list 101 to
! match traffic that should be encrypted
crypto map mymap 10 ipsec-isakmp
set peer 10.0.1.1
set transform-set myset
set pfs group2
match address 101
exit
! And finally apply crypto map to serial interface:
interface Serial 0
crypto map mymap
exit
Page 316 of 695


4. Testing the IPsec tunnel
• on MikroTik router we can see installed SAs
[admin@MikroTik] ip ipsec installed-sa> print
Flags: A - AH, E - ESP, P - pfs, M - manual
0 E spi=9437482 direction=out src-address=10.0.1.1
dst-address=10.0.1.2 auth-algorithm=sha1 enc-algorithm=des
auth-key="9cf2123b8b5add950e3e67b9eac79421d406aa09"
enc-key="ffe7ec65b7a385c3" add-lifetime=24m/30m use-lifetime=0s/0s
lifebytes=0/0 current-addtime=jul/12/2002 16:13:21
current-usetime=jul/12/2002 16:13:21 current-bytes=71896
1 E spi=319317260 direction=in src-address=10.0.1.2
dst-address=10.0.1.1 auth-algorithm=sha1 enc-algorithm=des
auth-key="7575f5624914dd312839694db2622a318030bc3b"
enc-key="633593f809c9d6af" add-lifetime=24m/30m use-lifetime=0s/0s
lifebytes=0/0 current-addtime=jul/12/2002 16:13:21
current-usetime=jul/12/2002 16:13:21 current-bytes=0
[admin@MikroTik] ip ipsec installed-sa>
• on CISCO router
cisco# show interface Serial 0
interface: Serial1
Crypto map tag: mymap, local addr. 10.0.1.2
local ident (addr/mask/prot/port): (10.0.2.0/255.255.255.0/0/0)
remote ident (addr/mask/prot/port): (10.0.0.0/255.255.255.0/0/0)
current_peer: 10.0.1.1
PERMIT, flags={origin_is_acl,}
#pkts encaps: 1810, #pkts encrypt: 1810, #pkts digest 1810
#pkts decaps: 1861, #pkts decrypt: 1861, #pkts verify 1861
#pkts compressed: 0, #pkts decompressed: 0
#pkts not compressed: 0, #pkts compr. failed: 0, #pkts decompress failed: 0
#send errors 0, #recv errors 0
local crypto endpt.: 10.0.1.2, remote crypto endpt.: 10.0.1.1
path mtu 1500, media mtu 1500
current outbound spi: 1308650C
inbound esp sas:
spi: 0x90012A(9437482)
transform: esp-des esp-sha-hmac ,
in use settings ={Tunnel, }
slot: 0, conn id: 2000, flow_id: 1, crypto map: mymap
sa timing: remaining key lifetime (k/sec): (4607891/1034)
IV size: 8 bytes
replay detection support: Y
inbound ah sas:
inbound pcp sas:
outbound esp sas:
spi: 0x1308650C(319317260)
transform: esp-des esp-sha-hmac ,
in use settings ={Tunnel, }
slot: 0, conn id: 2001, flow_id: 2, crypto map: mymap
sa timing: remaining key lifetime (k/sec): (4607893/1034)
IV size: 8 bytes
replay detection support: Y
outbound ah sas:
outbound pcp sas:
MikroTik Router and Linux FreeS/WAN

In the test scenario we have 2 private networks: 10.0.0.0/24 connected to the MT and
192.168.87.0/24 connected to Linux. MT and Linux are connected together over the "public"
network 192.168.0.0/24:
Page 317 of 695


• FreeS/WAN configuration:
config setup
interfaces="ipsec0=eth0"
klipsdebug=none
plutodebug=all
plutoload=%search
plutostart=%search
uniqueids=yes
conn %default
keyingtries=0
disablearrivalcheck=no
authby=rsasig
conn mt
left=192.168.0.108
leftsubnet=192.168.87.0/24
right=192.168.0.155
rightsubnet=10.0.0.0/24
authby=secret
pfs=no
auto=add
• ipsec.secrets config file:

192.168.0.108 192.168.0.155 : PSK "gvejimezyfopmekun"
• MikroTik Router configuration:

[admin@MikroTik] > /ip ipsec peer add address=192.168.0.108 \
\... secret="gvejimezyfopmekun" hash-algorithm=md5 enc-algorithm=3des \
\... dh-group=modp1024 lifetime=28800s
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip ipsec proposal auth-algorithms=md5 \
\... enc-algorithms=3des pfs-group=none
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip ipsec policy add sa-src-address=192.168.0.155 \
\... sa-dst-address=192.168.0.108 src-address=10.0.0.0/24 \
\... dst-address=192.168.87.0/24 tunnel=yes
Page 318 of 695


IPIP Tunnel Interfaces
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
IPIP Setup
Description
Notes
Description
General Information
Summary
The IPIP tunneling implementation on the MikroTik RouterOS is RFC 2003 compliant. IPIP tunnel
is a simple protocol that encapsulates IP packets in IP to make a tunnel between two routers. The
IPIP tunnel interface appears as an interface under the interface list. Many routers, including Cisco
and Linux based, support this protocol. This protocol makes multiple network schemes possible.
IP tunneling protocol adds the following possibilities to a network setups:
• to tunnel Intranets over the Internet
• to use it instead of source routing
Quick Setup Guide

To make an IPIP tunnel between 2 MikroTik routers with IP addresses 10.5.8.104 and 10.1.0.172,
using IPIP tunnel addresses 10.0.0.1 and 10.0.0.2, follow the next steps.
• Configuration on router with IP address 10.5.8.104:
1. Add an IPIP interface (by default, its name will be ipip1):
[[email protected]] interface ipip> add local-address=10.5.8.104 \
remote-address=10.1.0.172 disabled=no
2. Add an IP address to created ipip1 interface:

[[email protected]] ip address> add address=10.0.0.1/24 interface=ipip1
• Configuration on router with IP address 10.1.0.172:
Page 319 of 695


1. Add an IPIP interface (by default, its name will be ipip1):
[[email protected]] interface ipip> add local-address=10.1.0.172 \
remote-address=10.5.8.104 disabled=no
2. Add an IP address to created ipip1 interface:

[[email protected]] ip address> add address=10.0.0.2/24 interface=ipip1
Specifications
License required: level1 (limited to 1 tunnel) , level3 (200 tunnels) , level5 (unlimited)
Home menu level: /interface ipip
Standards and Technologies: IPIP (RFC 2003)
Related Documents
• Log Management
IPIP Setup
Home menu level: /interface ipip
Description
An IPIP interface should be configured on two routers that have the possibility for an IP level
connection and are RFC 2003 compliant. The IPIP tunnel may run over any connection that
transports IP. Each IPIP tunnel interface can connect with one remote router that has a
corresponding interface configured. An unlimited number of IPIP tunnels may be added to the
router. For more details on IPIP tunnels, see RFC 2003 .
name ( name ; default: ipipN ) - interface name for reference
mtu ( integer ; default: 1480 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit. Should be set to 1480 bytes to avoid
fragmentation of packets. May be set to 1500 bytes if mtu path discovery is not working properly
Page 320 of 695


on links
local-address ( IP address ) - local address on router which sends IPIP traffic to the remote host
remote-address ( IP address ) - the IP address of the remote host of the IPIP tunnel - may be any
RFC 2003 compliant router
Notes
Use /ip address add command to assign an IP address to the IPIP interface.
There is no authentication or 'state' for this interface. The bandwidth usage of the interface may be
monitored with the monitor feature from the interface menu.
MikroTik RouterOS IPIP implementation has been tested with Cisco 1005. The sample of the Cisco
1005 configuration is given below:
interface Tunnel0
ip address 10.3.0.1 255.255.255.0
tunnel source 10.0.0.171
tunnel destination 10.0.0.204
tunnel mode ipip
General Information
Description
Suppose we want to add an IPIP tunnel between routers R1 and R2:
At first, we need to configure IPIP interfaces and then add IP addresses to them.
The configuration for router R1 is as follows:
[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> add
local-address: 10.0.0.1
remote-address: 22.63.11.6
[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> print
# NAME MTU LOCAL-ADDRESS REMOTE-ADDRESS
0 X ipip1 1480 10.0.0.1 22.63.11.6
[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> en 0
[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> /ip address add address 1.1.1.1/24 interface=ipip1
The configuration of the R2 is shown below:

[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> add local-address=22.63.11.6 remote-address=10.
0.0.1
[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> print
# NAME MTU LOCAL-ADDRESS REMOTE-ADDRESS
0 X ipip1 1480 22.63.11.6 10.0.0.1
[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> enable 0
[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> /ip address add address 1.1.1.2/24 interface=ipip1
Now both routers can ping each other:

[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip> /ping 1.1.1.2
Page 321 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface ipip>
Page 322 of 695


L2TP Interface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
L2TP Client Setup
Example
Monitoring L2TP Client
Example
L2TP Server Setup
Description
Example
L2TP Server Users
Description
Example
L2TP Application Examples
Router-to-Router Secure Tunnel Example
Connecting a Remote Client via L2TP Tunnel
L2TP Setup for Windows
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol) supports encrypted tunnels over IP. The MikroTik RouterOS
implementation includes support for both L2TP client and server.
General applications of L2TP tunnels include:
• secure router-to-router tunnels over the Internet
• linking (bridging) local Intranets or LANs (in cooperation with EoIP)
• extending PPP user connections to a remote location (for example, to separate authentication
and Internet access points for ISP)
Page 323 of 695


• accessing an Intranet/LAN of a company for remote (mobile) clients (employees)
Each L2TP connection is composed of a server and a client. The MikroTik RouterOS may function
as a server or client or, for various configurations, it may be the server for some connections and
client for other connections.
Quick Setup Guide

To make a L2TP tunnel between 2 MikroTik routers with IP addresses 10.5.8.104 (L2TP server)
and 10.1.0.172 (L2TP client), follow the next steps.
• Configuration on L2TP server router:
1. Add a L2TP user:
[admin@L2TP-Server] ppp secret> add name=james password=pass \
\... local-address=10.0.0.1 remote-address=10.0.0.2
2. Enable the L2TP server

[admin@L2TP-Server] interface l2tp-server server> set enabled=yes
• Configuration on L2TP client router:

1. Add a L2TP client:
[admin@L2TP-Client] interface l2tp-client> add user=james password=pass \
\... connect-to=10.5.8.104
Specifications
License required: level1 (limited to 1 tunnel) , level3 (limited to 200 tunnels) , level5
Home menu level: /interface l2tp-server , /interface l2tp-client
Standards and Technologies: L2TP (RFC 2661)
Related Documents
• PPP AAA
• EoIP Tunnel Interface
• IP Security
Description
L2TP is a secure tunnel protocol for transporting IP traffic using PPP. L2TP encapsulates PPP in
virtual lines that run over IP, Frame Relay and other protocols (that are not currently supported by
MikroTik RouterOS). L2TP incorporates PPP and MPPE (Microsoft Point to Point Encryption) to
make encrypted links. The purpose of this protocol is to allow the Layer 2 and PPP endpoints to
Page 324 of 695


reside on different devices interconnected by a packet-switched network. With L2TP, a user has a
Layer 2 connection to an access concentrator - LAC (e.g., modem bank, ADSL DSLAM, etc.), and
the concentrator then tunnels individual PPP frames to the Network Access Server - NAS. This
allows the actual processing of PPP packets to be divorced from the termination of the Layer 2
circuit. From the user's perspective, there is no functional difference between having the L2 circuit
terminate in a NAS directly or using L2TP.
It may also be useful to use L2TP just as any other tunneling protocol with or without encryption.
The L2TP standard says that the most secure way to encrypt data is using L2TP over IPsec (Note
that it is default mode for Microsoft L2TP client) as all L2TP control and data packets for a
particular tunnel appear as homogeneous UDP/IP data packets to the IPsec system.
L2TP includes PPP authentication and accounting for each L2TP connection. Full authentication
and accounting of each connection may be done through a RADIUS client or locally.
MPPE 40bit RC4 and MPPE 128bit RC4 encryption are supported.
L2TP traffic uses UDP protocol for both control and data packets. UDP port 1701 is used only for
link establishment, further traffic is using any available UDP port (which may or may not be 1701).
This means that L2TP can be used with most firewalls and routers (even with NAT) by enabling
UDP traffic to be routed through the firewall or router.
L2TP Client Setup

Home menu level: /interface l2tp-client
name ( name ; default: l2tp-outN ) - interface name for reference
mtu ( integer ; default: 1460 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit. The optimal value is the MTU of the
interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 40 (so, for 1500-byte Ethernet link, set the MTU
to 1460 to avoid fragmentation of packets)
mru ( integer ; default: 1460 ) - Maximum Receive Unit. The optimal value is the MRU of the
interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 40 (so, for 1500-byte Ethernet link, set the MRU
connect-to ( IP address ) - The IP address of the L2TP server to connect to
user ( text ) - user name to use when logging on to the remote server
password ( text ; default: "" ) - user password to use when logging to the remote server
add-default-route ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to use the server which this client is connected
to as its default router (gateway)
Example
To set up L2TP client named test2 using username john with password john to connect to the
10.1.1.12 L2TP server and use it as the default gateway:
Page 325 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-client> add name=test2 connect-to=10.1.1.12 \
\... user=john add-default-route=yes password=john
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-client> print
0 X name="test2" mtu=1460 mru=1460 connect-to=10.1.1.12 user="john"
password="john" profile=default add-default-route=yes
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-client> enable 0
Monitoring L2TP Client

Command name: /interface l2tp-client monitor
status ( text ) - status of the client
• Dialing - attempting to make a connection
• Verifying password... - connection has been established to the server, password verification in
progress
• Connected - self-explanatory
• Terminated - interface is not enabled or the other side will not establish a connection uptime
(time) - connection time displayed in days, hours, minutes and seconds
encoding ( text ) - encryption and encoding (if asymmetric, separated with '/') being used in this
connection
Example
Example of an established connection
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-client> monitor test2
status: "connected"
uptime: 4m27s
encoding: "MPPE128 stateless"
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-client>
L2TP Server Setup

Home menu level: /interface l2tp-server server
Description
The L2TP server creates a dynamic interface for each connected L2TP client. The L2TP connection
count from clients depends on the license level you have. Level1 license allows 1 L2TP client,
Level3 or Level4 licenses up to 200 clients, and Level5 or Level6 licenses do not have L2TP client
limitations.
To create L2TP users, you should consult the PPP secret and PPP Profile manuals. It is also
possible to use the MikroTik router as a RADIUS client to register the L2TP users, see the manual
how to do it.
Page 326 of 695


enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - defines whether L2TP server is enabled or not
interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 40 (so, for 1500-byte Ethernet link, set the MTU
interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 40 (so, for 1500-byte Ethernet link, set the MRU
authentication ( multiple choice: pap | chap | mschap1 | mschap2 ; default: mschap2 ) -
authentication algorithm
default-profile - default profile to use
Example
To enable L2TP server:
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-server server> set enabled=yes
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-server server> print
enabled: yes
mtu: 1460
mru: 1460
authentication: mschap2
default-profile: default
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-server server>
L2TP Server Users

Home menu level: /interface l2tp-server
Description
There are two types of items in L2TP server configuration - static users and dynamic connections.
A dynamic connection can be established if the user database or the default-profile has its
local-address and remote-address set correctly. When static users are added, the default profile
may be left with its default values and only PPP user (in /ppp secret) should be configured. Note
that in both cases PPP users must be configured properly.
user ( text ) - the name of the user that is configured statically or added dynamically
mtu - shows client's MTU
client-address - shows the IP of the connected client
uptime - shows how long the client is connected
connection
Example
To add a static entry for ex1 user:
Page 327 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-server> add user=ex1
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-server> print
0 DR <l2tp-ex> ex 1460 10.0.0.202 6m32s none
1 l2tp-in1 ex1
[admin@MikroTik] interface l2tp-server>
In this example an already connected user ex is shown besides the one we just added.
L2TP Application Examples
There are two routers in this example:

• [HomeOffice]
Interface LocalHomeOffice 10.150.2.254/24
Interface ToInternet 192.168.80.1/24
• [RemoteOffice]
Interface LocalRemoteOffice 10.150.1.254/24
Each router is connected to a different ISP. One router can access another router through the
Internet.
Page 328 of 695


On the L2TP server a user must be set up for the client:
[admin@HomeOffice] ppp secret> add name=ex service=l2tp password=lkjrht
local-address=10.0.103.1 remote-address=10.0.103.2
[admin@HomeOffice] ppp secret> print detail
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="ex" service=l2tp caller-id="" password="lkjrht" profile=default
local-address=10.0.103.1 remote-address=10.0.103.2 routes==""
[admin@HomeOffice] ppp secret>
Then the user should be added in the L2TP server list:

[admin@HomeOffice] interface l2tp-server> add user=ex
[admin@HomeOffice] interface l2tp-server> print
0 l2tp-in1 ex
[admin@HomeOffice] interface l2tp-server>
And finally, the server must be enabled:

[admin@HomeOffice] interface l2tp-server server> set enabled=yes
[admin@HomeOffice] interface l2tp-server server> print
enabled: yes
mtu: 1460
mru: 1460
[admin@HomeOffice] interface l2tp-server server>
Add a L2TP client to the RemoteOffice router:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-client> add connect-to=192.168.80.1 user=ex \
\... password=lkjrht disabled=no
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-client> print
0 R name="l2tp-out1" mtu=1460 mru=1460 connect-to=192.168.80.1 user="ex"
password="lkjrht" profile=default add-default-route=no
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-client>
Thus, a L2TP tunnel is created between the routers. This tunnel is like an Ethernet point-to-point
connection between the routers with IP addresses 10.0.103.1 and 10.0.103.2 at each router. It
enables 'direct' communication between the routers over third party networks.
Page 329 of 695


To route the local Intranets over the L2TP tunnel you need to add these routes:
[admin@HomeOffice] > ip route add dst-address 10.150.1.0/24 gateway 10.0.103.2
[admin@RemoteOffice] > ip route add dst-address 10.150.2.0/24 gateway 10.0.103.1
On the L2TP server it can alternatively be done using routes parameter of the user configuration:
Flags: X - disabled
[admin@HomeOffice] ppp secret> set 0 routes="10.150.1.0/24 10.0.103.2 1"
Flags: X - disabled
routes="10.150.1.0/24 10.0.103.2 1"
Test the L2TP tunnel connection:

[admin@RemoteOffice]> /ping 10.0.103.1
10.0.103.1 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.0.103.1 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.0.103.1 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
ping interrupted
Test the connection through the L2TP tunnel to the LocalHomeOffice interface:
Page 330 of 695


10.150.2.254 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.150.2.254 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.150.2.254 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
ping interrupted
To bridge a LAN over this secure tunnel, please see the example in the 'EoIP' section of the manual.
To set the maximum speed for traffic over this tunnel, please consult the 'Queues' section.
Connecting a Remote Client via L2TP Tunnel

The following example shows how to connect a computer to a remote office network over L2TP
encrypted tunnel giving that computer an IP address from the same network as the remote office has
(without need of bridging over EoIP tunnels).
Please, consult the respective manual on how to set up a L2TP client with the software you are
using.
The router in this example:

• [RemoteOffice]
Interface Office 10.150.1.254/24
The client computer can access the router through the Internet.
Page 331 of 695


On the L2TP server a user must be set up for the client:
[admin@RemoteOffice] ppp secret> add name=ex service=l2tp password=lkjrht
[admin@RemoteOffice] ppp secret> print detail
Flags: X - disabled
[admin@RemoteOffice] ppp secret>
Then the user should be added in the L2TP server list:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-server> add name=FromLaptop user=ex
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-server> print
0 FromLaptop ex
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-server>
And the server must be enabled:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-server server> set enabled=yes
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-server server> print
enabled: yes
mtu: 1460
mru: 1460
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface l2tp-server server>
Finally, the proxy APR must be enabled on the 'Office' interface:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface ethernet> set Office arp=proxy-arp
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface ethernet> print
0 R ToInternet 1500 00:30:4F:0B:7B:C1 enabled
1 R Office 1500 00:30:4F:06:62:12 proxy-arp
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface ethernet>
L2TP Setup for Windows

Microsoft provides L2TP client support for Windows XP, 2000, NT4, ME and 98. Windows 2000
and XP include support in the Windows setup or automatically install L2TP. For 98, NT and ME,
installation requires a download from Microsoft (L2TP/IPsec VPN Client).
For more information, see:
Microsoft L2TP/IPsec VPN Client Microsoft L2TP/IPsec VPN Client
On Windows 2000, L2TP setup without IPsec requires editing registry:
Disabling IPsec for the Windows 2000 Client
Disabling IPSEC Policy Used with L2TP
Troubleshooting
Description
Page 332 of 695


• I use firewall and I cannot establish L2TP connection
Make sure UDP connections can pass through both directions between your sites.
• My Windows L2TP/IPsec VPN Client fails to connect to L2TP server with "Error 789"
or "Error 781"
The error messages 789 and 781 occur when IPsec is not configured properly on both ends.
See the respective documentation on how to configure IPsec in the Microsoft L2TP/IPsec VPN
Client and in the MikroTik RouterOS. If you do not want to use IPsec, it can be easily
switched off on the client side. Note: if you are using Windows 2000, you need to edit system
registry using regedt32.exe or regedit.exe. Add the following registry value to
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Rasman\Parameters:
Value Name: ProhibitIpSec
Data Type: REG_DWORD
Value: 1
You must restart the Windows 2000 for the changes to take effect
For more information on configuring Windows 2000, see:
• Configuring Cisco IOS and Windows 2000 Clients for L2TP Using Microsoft IAS
• Disabling IPSEC Policy Used with L2TP
• How to Configure a L2TP/IPsec Connection Using Pre-shared Key Authentication
Page 333 of 695


PPPoE
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
PPPoE Client Setup
Description
Example
Monitoring PPPoE Client
Example
PPPoE Server Setup (Access Concentrator)
Description
Notes
Example
PPPoE Users
Description
PPPoE Server User Interfaces
Description
Example
PPPoE in a multipoint wireless 802.11g network
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
The PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) protocol provides extensive user management,
network management and accounting benefits to ISPs and network administrators. Currently PPPoE
is used mainly by ISPs to control client connections for xDSL and cable modems as well as plain
Ethernet networks. PPPoE is an extension of the standard Point to Point Protocol (PPP). The
difference between them is expressed in transport method: PPPoE employs Ethernet instead of
modem connection.
Page 334 of 695


Generally speaking, PPPoE is used to hand out IP addresses to clients based on the user (and
workstation, if desired) authentication as opposed to workstation only authentication, when static IP
addresses or DHCP are used. It is adviced not to use static IP addresses or DHCP on the same
interfaces as PPPoE for obvious security reasons.
MikroTik RouterOS can act as a RADIUS client - you can use a RADIUS server to authenticate
PPPoE clients and use accounting for them.
A PPPoE connection is composed of a client and an access concentrator (server). The client may be
any computer that has the PPPoE client protocol support installed. The MikroTik RouterOS
supports both - client and access concentrator implementations of PPPoE. The PPPoE client and
server work over any Ethernet level interface on the router - wireless 802.11 (Aironet, Cisco,
WaveLan, Prism, Atheros), 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet, RadioLan and EoIP (Ethernet over IP
tunnel). No encryption, MPPE 40bit RSA and MPPE 128bit RSA encryption is supported.
Note that when RADIUS server is authenticating a user with CHAP, MS-CHAPv1 or
MS-CHAPv2, the RADIUS protocol does not use shared secret, it is used only in authentication
reply. So if you have a wrong shared secret, RADIUS server will accept the request. You can use
/radius monitor command to see bad-replies parameter. This value should increase whenever a
client tries to connect.
Supported connections
• MikroTik RouterOS PPPoE client to any PPPoE server (access concentrator)
• MikroTik RouterOS server (access concentrator) to multiple PPPoE clients (clients are
avaliable for almost all operating systems and most routers)
Quick Setup Guide
• To configure MikroTik RouterOS to be a PPPoE client

1. Just add a pppoe-client:
/interface pppoe-client add name=pppoe-user-mike user=mike password=123 \

\... interface=wlan1 service-name=internet disabled=no
• To configure MikroTik RouterOS to be an Access Concentrator (PPPoE Server)

1. Add an address pool for the clients from 10.1.1.62 to 10.1.1.72, called pppoe-pool:
/ip pool add name="pppoe-pool" ranges=10.1.1.62-10.1.1.72
2. Add PPP profile, called pppoe-profile where local-address will be the router's address
and clients will have an address from pppoe-pool:
/ppp profile add name="pppoe-profile" local-address=10.1.1.1 remote-address=pppoe-pool
3. Add a user with username mike and password 123:

/ppp secret add name=mike password=123 service=pppoe profile=pppoe-profile
4. Now add a pppoe server:

/interface pppoe-server server add service-name=internet interface=wlan1 \
\... default-profile=pppoe-profile
Page 335 of 695


Specifications
License required: level1 (limited to 1 interface) , level3 (limited to 200 interfaces) , level4 (limited
to 200 interfaces) , level5 (limited to 500 interfaces) , level6 (unlimited)
Home menu level: /interface pppoe-server , /interface pppoe-client
Standards and Technologies: PPPoE (RFC 2516)
Hardware usage: PPPoE server may require additional RAM (uses approx. 9KiB (plus extra 10KiB
for packet queue, if data rate limitation is used) for each connection) and CPU power. Maximum of
65535 connections is supported.
Related Documents

• RADIUS client
• PPP User AAA
• Log Management
Links for PPPoE documentation:
• http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2516.html
PPPoE Clients:
• RASPPPoE for Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT4, 2000, XP, .NET
http://www.raspppoe.com/
PPPoE Client Setup

Home menu level: /interface pppoe-client
Description
The PPPoE client supports high-speed connections. It is fully compatible with the MikroTik PPPoE
server (access concentrator).
Note for Windows. Some connection instructions may use the form where the "phone number",
such as "MikroTik_AC\mt1", to indicate that "MikroTik_AC" is the access concentrator name and
"mt1" is the service name.
ac-name ( text ; default: "" ) - this may be left blank and the client will connect to any access
concentrator that offers the "service" name selected
add-default-route ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to add a default route automatically
Page 336 of 695


dial-on-demand ( yes | no ; default: no ) - connects to AC only when outbound traffic is generated
and disconnects when there is no traffic for the period set in the idle-timeout value
interface ( name ) - interface the PPPoE server can be connected through
mru ( integer ; default: 1480 ) - Maximum Receive Unit. The optimal value is the MTU of the
interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 20 (so, for 1500-byte ethernet link, set the MTU
name ( name ; default: pppoe-out1 ) - name of the PPPoE interface
password ( text ; default: "" ) - a user password used to connect the PPPoE server
profile ( name ) - default profile for the connection
service-name ( text ; default: "" ) - specifies the service name set on the access concentrator.
Leave it blank unless you have many services and need to specify the one you need to connect to
use-peer-dns ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to set the router's default DNS to the PPP peer DNS
(i.e. whether to get DNS settings from the peer)
user ( text ; default: "" ) - a user name that is present on the PPPoE server
Example
To add and enable PPPoE client on the gig interface connecting to the AC that provides testSN
service using user name john with the password password:
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pppoe-client> add interface=gig \
\... service-name=testSN user=john password=password disabled=no
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pppoe-client> print
0 R name="pppoe-out1" mtu=1480 mru=1480 interface=gig user="john"
password="password" profile=default service-name="testSN" ac-name=""
add-default-route=no dial-on-demand=no use-peer-dns=no
Monitoring PPPoE Client

Command name: /interface pppoe-client monitor
ac-mac ( MAC address ) - MAC address of the access concentrator (AC) the client is connected to
ac-name ( text ) - name of the AC the client is connected to
connection
service-name ( text ) - name of the service the client is connected to
Page 337 of 695


progress
uptime ( time ) - connection time displayed in days, hours, minutes and seconds
Example
To monitor the pppoe-out1 connection:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-client> monitor pppoe-out1
status: "connected"
uptime: 10s
encoding: "none"
service-name: "testSN"
ac-name: "10.0.0.1"
ac-mac: 00:C0:DF:07:5E:E6
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-client>
PPPoE Server Setup (Access Concentrator)

Home menu level: /interface pppoe-server server
Description
The PPPoE server (access concentrator) supports multiple servers for each interface - with differing
service names. Currently the throughput of the PPPoE server has been tested to 160 Mb/s on a
Celeron 600 CPU. Using higher speed CPUs, throughput should increase proportionately.
The access concentrator name and PPPoE service name are used by clients to identity the access
concentrator to register with. The access concentrator name is the same as the identity of the
router displayed before the command prompt. The identity may be set within the /system identity
submenu.
PPPoE users are created in /ppp secret menu, see the AAA manual for further information.
Note that if no service name is specified in WindowsXP, it will use only service with no name. So
if you want to serve WindowsXP clients, leave your service name empty.
authentication ( multiple choice: mschap2 | mschap1 | chap | pap ; default: mschap2, mschap1,
chap, pap ) - authentication algorithm
default-profile ( name ; default: default ) - default profile to use
interface ( name ) - interface to which the clients will connect to
keepalive-timeout ( time ; default: 10 ) - defines the time period (in seconds) after which the router
is starting to send keepalive packets every second. If no traffic and no keepalive responses has came
for that period of time (i.e. 2 * keepalive-timeout), not responding client is proclaimed
disconnected.
max-mru ( integer ; default: 1480 ) - Maximum Receive Unit. The optimal value is the MTU of
the interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 20 (so, for 1500-byte Ethernet link, set the
Page 338 of 695


MTU to 1480 to avoid fragmentation of packets)
max-mtu ( integer ; default: 1480 ) - Maximum Transmission Unit. The optimal value is the MTU
of the interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 20 (so, for 1500-byte Ethernet link, set the
MTU to 1480 to avoid fragmentation of packets)
max-sessions ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximum number of clients that the AC can serve
• 0 - unlimited
one-session-per-host ( yes | no ; default: no ) - allow only one session per host (determined by
MAC address). If a host will try to establish a new session, the old one will be closed
service-name ( text ) - the PPPoE service name
Notes
The default keepalive-timeout value of 10 is OK in most cases. If you set it to 0, the router will not
disconnect clients until they log out or router is restarted. To resolve this problem, the
one-session-per-host property can be used.
Security issue: do not assign an IP address to the interface you will be receiving the PPPoE
requests on.
Example
To add PPPoE server on ether1 interface providing ex service and allowing only one connection
per host:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server server> add interface=ether1 \
\... service-name=ex one-session-per-host=yes
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server server> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 X service-name="ex" interface=ether1 mtu=1480 mru=1480
authentication=mschap2,mschap,chap,pap keepalive-timeout=10
one-session-per-host=yes default-profile=default
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server server>
PPPoE Users
Description
The PPPoE users are authenticated through a RADIUS server (if configured), and if RADIUS fails,
then the local PPP user databese is used. See the respective manual sections for more information:
• RADIUS client
• PPP User AAA
PPPoE Server User Interfaces

Home menu level: /interface pppoe-server
Description
Page 339 of 695


This menu allows you to see all the connected users, as well as to set static interface names to be
used in different configurations, where unchangable interface needs to be specified (and, thus,
dynamic names cannot be used)
encoding ( read-only: text ) - encryption and encoding (if asymmetric, separated with '/') being
used in this connection
remote-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the connected client
service-name ( name ) - name of the service the user is connected to
uptime ( time ) - shows how long the client is connected
user ( name ) - the name of the connected user (must be present in the user darabase anyway)
Example
To view the currently connected users:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server> print
Flags: R - running
# NAME SERVICE REMOTE-ADDRESS USER ENCO... UPTIME
0 R <pppoe-ex> ex 00:C0:CA:16:16:A5 ex 12s
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server>
To disconnect the user ex:

[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server> remove [find user=ex]
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server> print
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server>
PPPoE in a multipoint wireless 802.11g network

In a wireless network, the PPPoE server may be attached to an Access Point (as well as to a regular
station of wireless infrastructure). Either our RouterOS client or Windows PPPoE clients may
connect to the Access Point for PPPoE authentication. Further, for RouterOS clients, the radio
interface may be set to MTU 1600 so that the PPPoE interface may be set to MTU 1500. This
optimizes the transmission of 1500 byte packets and avoids any problems associated with MTUs
lower than 1500. It has not been determined how to change the MTU of the Windows wireless
interface at this moment.
Let us consider the following setup where the MikroTik Wireless AP offers wireless clients
transparent access to the local network with authentication:
Page 340 of 695


First of all, the wireless interface should be configured:
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface wireless> set 0 mode=ap-bridge \
frequency=2442 band=2.4ghz-b/g ssid=mt disabled=no
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface wireless> print
0 name="wlan1" mtu=1500 mac-address=00:01:24:70:53:04 arp=enabled
radio-name="000124705304" mode=station ssid="mt" area=""
frequency=2412 band=2.4ghz-b scan-list=default rate-set=default
54Mbps
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface wireless>
Now, configure the Ethernet interface, add the IP address and set the default route:
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip address> add address=10.1.0.3/24 interface=Local
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip address> print
Page 341 of 695


0 10.1.0.3/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 Local
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip address> /ip route
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip route> add gateway=10.1.0.1
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip route> print
0 ADC 10.1.0.0/24 Local
1 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.1.0.1 1 Local
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip route> /interface ethernet
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface ethernet> set Local arp=proxy-arp
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface ethernet> print
0 R Local 1500 00:0C:42:03:25:53 proxy-arp
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface ethernet>
We should add PPPoE server to the wireless interface:

[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface pppoe-server server> add interface=wlan1 \
service-name=mt one-session-per-host=yes disabled=no
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface pppoe-server server> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 service-name="mt" interface=wlan1 max-mtu=1480 max-mru=1480
authentication=pap,chap,mschap1,mschap2 keepalive-timeout=10
one-session-per-host=yes max-sessions=0 default-profile=default
[admin@PPPoE-Server] interface pppoe-server server>
Finally, we can set up PPPoE clients:

[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip pool> add name=pppoe ranges=10.1.0.100-10.1.0.200
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip pool> print
# NAME RANGES
0 pppoe 10.1.0.100-10.1.0.200
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ip pool> /ppp profile
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ppp profile> set default use-encryption=yes \
local-address=10.1.0.3 remote-address=pppoe
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ppp profile> print
Flags: * - default
0 * name="default" local-address=10.1.0.3 remote-address=pppoe
use-compression=no use-vj-compression=no use-encryption=yes only-one=no
change-tcp-mss=yes
1 * name="default-encryption" use-compression=default
use-vj-compression=default use-encryption=yes only-one=default
change-tcp-mss=default
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ppp profile> .. secret
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ppp secret> add name=w password=wkst service=pppoe
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ppp secret> add name=l password=ltp service=pppoe
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ppp secret> print
Flags: X - disabled
# NAME SERVICE CALLER-ID PASSWORD PROFILE REMOTE-ADDRESS
0 w pppoe wkst default 0.0.0.0
1 l pppoe ltp default 0.0.0.0
[admin@PPPoE-Server] ppp secret>
Thus we have completed the configuration and added two users: w and l who are able to connect to
Internet, using PPPoE client software.
Note that Windows XP built-in client supports encryption, but RASPPPOE does not. So, if it is
planned not to support Windows clients older than Windows XP, it is recommended to switch
require-encryption to yes value in the default profile configuration. In other case, the server will
accept clients that do not encrypt data.
Troubleshooting
Page 342 of 695


Description
• I can connect to my PPPoE server. The ping goes even through it, but I still cannot open
web pages
Make sure that you have specified a valid DNS server in the router (in /ip dns or in /ppp
profile the dns-server parameter).
• The PPPoE server shows more than one active user entry for one client, when the clients
disconnect, they are still shown and active
Set the keepalive-timeout parameter (in the PPPoE server configuration) to 10 if You want
clients to be considered logged off if they do not respond for 10 seconds.
Note that if the keepalive-timeout parameter is set to 0 and the only-one parameter (in PPP
profile settings) is set to yes then the clients might be able to connect only once. To resolve
this problem one-session-per-host parameter in PPPoE server configuration should be set to
yes
• I can get through the PPPoE link only small packets (eg. pings)
You need to change mss of all the packets passing through the PPPoE link to the value of
PPPoE link's MTU-40 at least on one of the peers. So for PPPoE link with MTU of 1480:
[admin@MT] interface pppoe-server server> set 0 max-mtu=1440 max-mru=1440
[admin@MT] interface pppoe-server server> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 service-name="mt" interface=wlan1 max-mtu=1440 max-mru=1440
authentication=pap,chap,mschap1,mschap2 keepalive-timeout=10
one-session-per-host=yes max-sessions=0 default-profile=default
[admin@MT] interface pppoe-server server>
• My windows PPPoE client obtains IP address and default gateway from the MikroTik
PPPoE server, but it cannot ping beyond the PPPoE server and use the Internet
PPPoE server is not bridging the clients. Configure masquerading for the PPPoE client
addresses, or make sure you have proper routing for the address space used by the clients, or
you enable Proxy-ARP on the Ethernet interface (See the IP Addresses and Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) Manual)
• My Windows XP client cannot connect to the PPPoE server
You have to specify the "Service Name" in the properties of the XP PPPoE client. If the
service name is not set, or it does not match the service name of the MikroTik PPPoE server,
you get the "line is busy" errors, or the system shows "verifying password - unknown error"
• I want to have logs for PPPoE connection establishment
Configure the logging feature under the /system logging facility and enable the PPP type logs
Page 343 of 695


PPTP
Document revision 1.4 (Tue Aug 09 12:01:21 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
PPTP Client Setup
Example
Monitoring PPTP Client
Example
PPTP Server Setup
Description
Example
PPTP Users
Description
PPTP Server User Interfaces
Description
Example
PPTP Application Examples
Connecting a Remote Client via PPTP Tunnel
PPTP Setup for Windows
Sample instructions for PPTP (VPN) installation and client setup - Windows 98SE
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
PPTP (Point to Point Tunnel Protocol) supports encrypted tunnels over IP. The MikroTik RouterOS
implementation includes support for PPTP client and server.
General applications of PPTP tunnels:
Page 344 of 695


• For secure router-to-router tunnels over the Internet
• To link (bridge) local Intranets or LANs (when EoIP is also used)
• For mobile or remote clients to remotely access an Intranet/LAN of a company (see PPTP
setup for Windows for more information)
Each PPTP connection is composed of a server and a client. The MikroTik RouterOS may function
as a server or client - or, for various configurations, it may be the server for some connections and
client for other connections. For example, the client created below could connect to a Windows
2000 server, another MikroTik Router, or another router which supports a PPTP server.
Quick Setup Guide

To make a PPTP tunnel between 2 MikroTik routers with IP addresses 10.5.8.104 (PPTP server)
and 10.1.0.172 (PPTP client), follow the next steps.
• Setup on PPTP server:
1. Add a user:
[admin@PPTP-Server] ppp secret> add name=jack password=pass \
\... local-address=10.0.0.1 remote-address=10.0.0.2
2. Enable the PPTP server:

[admin@PPTP-Server] interface pptp-server server> set enabled=yes
• Setup on PPTP client:

1. Add the PPTP client:
[admin@PPTP-Client] interface pptp-client> add user=jack password=pass \
\... connect-to=10.5.8.104 disabled=no
Specifications
License required: level1 (limited to 1 tunnel) , level3 (limited to 200 tunnels) , level5
Home menu level: /interface pptp-server , /interface pptp-client
Standards and Technologies: PPTP (RFC 2637)
Related Documents

• PPP User AAA
• EoIP
Description
PPTP is a secure tunnel for transporting IP traffic using PPP. PPTP encapsulates PPP in virtual lines
Page 345 of 695


that run over IP. PPTP incorporates PPP and MPPE (Microsoft Point to Point Encryption) to make
encrypted links. The purpose of this protocol is to make well-managed secure connections between
routers as well as between routers and PPTP clients (clients are available for and/or included in
almost all OSs including Windows).
PPTP includes PPP authentication and accounting for each PPTP connection. Full authentication
and accounting of each connection may be done through a RADIUS client or locally.
MPPE 40bit RC4 and MPPE 128bit RC4 encryption are supported.
PPTP traffic uses TCP port 1723 and IP protocol GRE (Generic Routing Encapsulation, IP protocol
ID 47), as assigned by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA). PPTP can be used with
most firewalls and routers by enabling traffic destined for TCP port 1723 and protocol 47 traffic to
be routed through the firewall or router.
PPTP connections may be limited or impossible to setup though a masqueraded/NAT IP
connection. Please see the Microsoft and RFC links at the end of this section for more information.
• http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/backgrnd/html/understanding_pptp.htm
• http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/q162/8/47.asp
PPTP Client Setup

Home menu level: /interface pptp-client
add-default-route ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to use the server which this client is connected
to as its default router (gateway)
connect-to ( IP address ) - The IP address of the PPTP server to connect to
interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 40 (so, for 1500-byte ethernet link, set the MRU
name ( name ; default: pptp-outN ) - interface name for reference
password ( text ; default: "" ) - user password to use when logging to the remote server
user ( text ) - user name to use when logging on to the remote server
Page 346 of 695


Example
To set up PPTP client named test2 using unsername john with password john to connect to the
10.1.1.12 PPTP server and use it as the default gateway:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-client> add name=test2 connect-to=10.1.1.12 \
\... user=john add-default-route=yes password=john
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-client> print
0 X name="test2" mtu=1460 mru=1460 connect-to=10.1.1.12 user="john"
password="john" profile=default add-default-route=yes
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-client> enable 0
Monitoring PPTP Client

Command name: /interface pptp-client monitor
encoding ( text ) - encryption and encoding (if asymmetric, seperated with '/') being used in this
connection
progress
uptime ( time ) - connection time displayed in days, hours, minutes and seconds
Example
Example of an established connection:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-client> monitor test2
uptime: 4h35s
encoding: MPPE 128 bit, stateless
status: Connected
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-client>
PPTP Server Setup

Home menu level: /interface pptp-server server
Description
The PPTP server creates a dynamic interface for each connected PPTP client. The PPTP connection
count from clients depends on the license level you have. Level1 license allows 1 PPTP client,
Level3 or Level4 licenses up to 200 clients, and Level5 or Level6 licenses do not have PPTP client
limitations.
Page 347 of 695


To create PPTP users, you should consult the PPP secret and PPP Profile manuals. It is also
possible to use the MikroTik router as a RADIUS client to register the PPTP users, see the manual
how to do it.
authentication ( multiple choice: pap | chap | mschap1 | mschap2 ; default: mschap2 ) -
authentication algorithm
default-profile - default profile to use
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - defines whether PPTP server is enabled or not
keepalive-timeout ( time ; default: 30 ) - defines the time period (in seconds) after which the router
is starting to send keepalive packets every second. If no traffic and no keepalive responses has came
for that period of time (i.e. 2 * keepalive-timeout), not responding client is proclaimed disconnected
interface the tunnel is working over decreased by 40 (so, for 1500-byte ethernet link, set the MRU
Example
To enable PPTP server:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-server server> set enabled=yes
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-server server> print
enabled: yes
mtu: 1460
mru: 1460
authentication: mschap2,mschap1
keepalive-timeout: 30
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-server server>
PPTP Users
Description
The PPTP users are authenticated through a RADIUS server (if configured), and if RADIUS fails,
then the local PPP user databese is used. See the respective manual sections for more information:
• RADIUS client
• PPP User AAA
PPTP Server User Interfaces

Home menu level: /interface pptp-server
Description
Page 348 of 695


There are two types of items in PPTP server configuration - static users and dynamic connections.
A dynamic connection can be established if the user database or the default-profile has its
local-address and remote-address set correctly. When static users are added, the default profile
may be left with its default values and only PPP user (in /ppp secret) should be configured. Note
that in both cases PPP users must be configured properly.
client-address ( IP address ) - shows (cannot be set here) the IP address of the connected client
connection
mtu ( integer ) - (cannot be set here) client's MTU
uptime ( time ) - shows how long the client is connected
user ( name ) - the name of the user that is configured statically or added dynamically
Example
To add a static entry for ex1 user:
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-server> add user=ex1
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-server> print
0 DR <pptp-ex> ex 1460 10.0.0.202 6m32s none
1 pptp-in1 ex1
[admin@MikroTik] interface pptp-server>
In this example an already connected user ex is shown besides the one we just added.
PPTP Application Examples

The following is an example of connecting two Intranets using an encrypted PPTP tunnel over the
Internet.
Page 349 of 695


There are two routers in this example:
• [HomeOffice]
Interface LocalHomeOffice 10.150.2.254/24
• [RemoteOffice]
Interface LocalRemoteOffice 10.150.1.254/24
Each router is connected to a different ISP. One router can access another router through the
Internet.
On the Preforma PPTP server a user must be set up for the client:
[admin@HomeOffice] ppp secret> add name=ex service=pptp password=lkjrht
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="ex" service=pptp caller-id="" password="lkjrht" profile=default
Then the user should be added in the PPTP server list:

[admin@HomeOffice] interface pptp-server> add user=ex
[admin@HomeOffice] interface pptp-server> print
Page 350 of 695


0 pptp-in1 ex
[admin@HomeOffice] interface pptp-server>
And finally, the server must be enabled:

[admin@HomeOffice] interface pptp-server server> set enabled=yes
[admin@HomeOffice] interface pptp-server server> print
enabled: yes
mtu: 1460
mru: 1460
[admin@HomeOffice] interface pptp-server server>
Add a PPTP client to the RemoteOffice router:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-client> add connect-to=192.168.80.1 user=ex \
\... password=lkjrht disabled=no
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-client> print
0 R name="pptp-out1" mtu=1460 mru=1460 connect-to=192.168.80.1 user="ex"
password="lkjrht" profile=default add-default-route=no
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-client>
Thus, a PPTP tunnel is created between the routers. This tunnel is like an Ethernet point-to-point
connection between the routers with IP addresses 10.0.103.1 and 10.0.103.2 at each router. It
enables 'direct' communication between the routers over third party networks.
To route the local Intranets over the PPTP tunnel you need to add these routes:
Page 351 of 695


[admin@HomeOffice] > ip route add dst-address 10.150.1.0/24 gateway 10.0.103.2
[admin@RemoteOffice] > ip route add dst-address 10.150.2.0/24 gateway 10.0.103.1
On the PPTP server it can alternatively be done using routes parameter of the user configuration:
Flags: X - disabled
[admin@HomeOffice] ppp secret> set 0 routes="10.150.1.0/24 10.0.103.2 1"
Flags: X - disabled
routes="10.150.1.0/24 10.0.103.2 1"
Test the PPTP tunnel connection:

10.0.103.1 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.0.103.1 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.0.103.1 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
ping interrupted
Test the connection through the PPTP tunnel to the LocalHomeOffice interface:
10.150.2.254 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.150.2.254 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
10.150.2.254 pong: ttl=255 time=3 ms
ping interrupted
To bridge a LAN over this secure tunnel, please see the example in the 'EoIP' section of the manual.
To set the maximum speed for traffic over this tunnel, please consult the 'Queues' section.
Connecting a Remote Client via PPTP Tunnel

The following example shows how to connect a computer to a remote office network over PPTP
encrypted tunnel giving that computer an IP address from the same network as the remote office has
(without need of bridging over EoIP tunnels)
Please, consult the respective manual on how to set up a PPTP client with the software You are
using.
Page 352 of 695


The router in this example:
• [RemoteOffice]
Interface Office 10.150.1.254/24
The client computer can access the router through the Internet.
On the PPTP server a user must be set up for the client:
[admin@RemoteOffice] ppp secret> add name=ex service=pptp password=lkjrht
[admin@RemoteOffice] ppp secret> print detail
Flags: X - disabled
[admin@RemoteOffice] ppp secret>
Then the user should be added in the PPTP server list:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-server> add name=FromLaptop user=ex
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-server> print
0 FromLaptop ex
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-server>
And the server must be enabled:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-server server> set enabled=yes
Page 353 of 695


[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-server server> print
enabled: yes
mtu: 1460
mru: 1460
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface pptp-server server>
Finally, the proxy APR must be enabled on the 'Office' interface:

[admin@RemoteOffice] interface ethernet> set Office arp=proxy-arp
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface ethernet> print
0 R ToInternet 1500 00:30:4F:0B:7B:C1 enabled
1 R Office 1500 00:30:4F:06:62:12 proxy-arp
[admin@RemoteOffice] interface ethernet>
PPTP Setup for Windows

Microsoft provides PPTP client support for Windows NT, 2000, ME, 98SE, and 98. Windows
98SE, 2000, and ME include support in the Windows setup or automatically install PPTP. For 95,
NT, and 98, installation requires a download from Microsoft. Many ISPs have made help pages to
assist clients with Windows PPTP installation.
• http://www.real-time.com/Customer_Support/PPTP_Config/pptp_config.html
• http://www.microsoft.com/windows95/downloads/contents/WUAdminTools/S_WUNetworkingTools/W95Winsock
Sample instructions for PPTP (VPN) installation and client setup -

Windows 98SE
If the VPN (PPTP) support is installed, select 'Dial-up Networking' and 'Create a new connection'.
The option to create a 'VPN' should be selected. If there is no 'VPN' options, then follow the
installation instructions below. When asked for the 'Host name or IP address of the VPN server',
type the IP address of the router. Double-click on the 'new' icon and type the correct user name and
password (must also be in the user database on the router or RADIUS server used for
authentication).
The setup of the connections takes nine seconds after selection the 'connect' button. It is suggested
that the connection properties be edited so that 'NetBEUI', 'IPX/SPX compatible', and 'Log on to
network' are unselected. The setup time for the connection will then be two seconds after the
'connect' button is selected.
To install the 'Virtual Private Networking' support for Windows 98SE, go to the 'Setting' menu from
the main 'Start' menu. Select 'Control Panel', select 'Add/Remove Program', select the 'Windows
setup' tab, select the 'Communications' software for installation and 'Details'. Go to the bottom of
the list of software and select 'Virtual Private Networking' to be installed.
Troubleshooting
Description
• I use firewall and I cannot establish PPTP connection
Page 354 of 695


Make sure the TCP connections to port 1723 can pass through both directions between your
sites. Also, IP protocol 47 should be passed through
Page 355 of 695


VLAN
Document revision 1.2 (Mon Sep 19 13:46:34 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
VLAN Setup
Notes
Example
Application Example
VLAN example on MikroTik Routers
General Information
Summary
VLAN is an implementation of the 802.1Q VLAN protocol for MikroTik RouterOS. It allows you
to have multiple Virtual LANs on a single ethernet or wireless interface, giving the ability to
segregate LANs efficiently. It supports up to 4095 vlan interfaces, each with a unique VLAN ID,
per ethernet device. Many routers, including Cisco and Linux based, and many Layer 2 switches
also support it.
A VLAN is a logical grouping that allows end users to communicate as if they were physically
connected to a single isolated LAN, independent of the physical configuration of the network.
VLAN support adds a new dimension of security and cost savings permitting the sharing of a
physical network while logically maintaining separation among unrelated users.
Specifications
License required: level1 (limited to 1 vlan) , level3
Home menu level: /interface vlan
Standards and Technologies: VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q)
Related Documents

Page 356 of 695


Description
VLANs are simply a way of grouping a set of switch ports together so that they form a logical
network, separate from any other such group. Within a single switch this is straightforward local
configuration. When the VLAN extends over more than one switch, the inter-switch links have to
become trunks, on which packets are tagged to indicate which VLAN they belong to.
You can use MikroTik RouterOS (as well as Cisco IOS and Linux) to mark these packets as well as
to accept and route marked ones.
As VLAN works on OSI Layer 2, it can be used just as any other network interface without any
restrictions. And VLAN successfully passes through Ethernet bridges (for MikroTik RouterOS
bridges you should set forward-protocols to ip, arp and other; for other bridges there should be
analogical settings).
You can also transport VLANs over wireless links and put multiple VLAN interfaces on a single
wireless interface. Note that as VLAN is not a full tunnel protocol (i.e., it does not have additional
fields to transport MAC addresses of sender and recipient), the same limitation applies to bridging
over VLAN as to bridging plain wireless interfaces. In other words, while wireless clients may
participate in VLANs put on wireless interfaces, it is not possible to have VLAN put on a wireless
interface in station mode bridged with any other interface.
Currently supported Ethernet interfaces

This is a list of network interfaces on which VLAN was tested and worked. Note that there might be
many other interfaces that support VLAN, but they just were not checked.
• Realtek 8139
• Intel PRO/100
• Intel PRO1000 server adapter
• National Semiconductor DP83816 based cards (RouterBOARD200 onboard Ethernet,
RouterBOARD 24 card)
• National Semiconductor DP83815 (Soekris onboard Ethernet)
• VIA VT6105M based cards (RouterBOARD 44 card)
• VIA VT6105
• VIA VT6102 (VIA EPIA onboard Ethernet)
This is a list of network interfaces on which VLAN was tested and worked, but WITHOUT
LARGE PACKET (>1496 bytes) SUPPORT:
• 3Com 3c59x PCI
• DEC 21140 (tulip)
• http://www.csd.uwo.ca/courses/CS457a/reports/handin/jpbojtos/A2/trunking.htm
• http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/software/ios121/121newft/121t/121t3/dtbridge.htm#xtocid1
Page 357 of 695


• http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/473/27.html#tagging
• http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/538/7.html
• http://www.nwfusion.com/news/tech/2001/0305tech.html
• http://www.intel.com/network/connectivity/resources/doc_library/tech_brief/virtual_lans.htm
VLAN Setup
Home menu level: /interface vlan
setting
• proxy-arp - the interface will be an ARP proxy
neighbor MAC addresses will be gathered from /ip arp statically set table only
interface ( name ) - physical interface to the network where are VLANs
name ( name ) - interface name for reference
vlan-id ( integer ; default: 1 ) - Virtual LAN identifier or tag that is used to distinguish VLANs.
Must be equal for all computers in one VLAN.
Notes
MTU should be set to 1500 bytes as on Ethernet interfaces. But this may not work with some
Ethernet cards that do not support receiving/transmitting of full size Ethernet packets with VLAN
header added (1500 bytes data + 4 bytes VLAN header + 14 bytes Ethernet header). In this situation
MTU 1496 can be used, but note that this will cause packet fragmentation if larger packets have to
be sent over interface. At the same time remember that MTU 1496 may cause problems if path
MTU discovery is not working properly between source and destination.
Example
To add and enable a VLAN interface named test with vlan-id=1 on interface ether1:
[admin@MikroTik] interface vlan> add name=test vlan-id=1 interface=ether1
[admin@MikroTik] interface vlan> print
# NAME MTU ARP VLAN-ID INTERFACE
0 X test 1500 enabled 1 ether1
[admin@MikroTik] interface vlan> enable 0
0 R test 1500 enabled 1 ether1
[admin@MikroTik] interface vlan>
Page 358 of 695


Application Example
VLAN example on MikroTik Routers

Let us assume that we have two or more MikroTik RouterOS routers connected with a hub.
Interfaces to the physical network, where VLAN is to be created is ether1 for all of them (it is
needed only for example simplification, it is NOT a must).
To connect computers through VLAN they must be connected physically and unique IP addresses
should be assigned them so that they could ping each other. Then on each of them the VLAN
interface should be created:
[admin@MikroTik] interface vlan> add name=test vlan-id=32 interface=ether1
0 R test 1500 enabled 32 ether1
[admin@MikroTik] interface vlan>
If the interfaces were successfully created, both of them will be running. If computers are
connected incorrectly (through network device that does not retransmit or forward VLAN packets),
either both or one of the interfaces will not be running.
When the interface is running, IP addresses can be assigned to the VLAN interfaces.
On the Router 1:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address=10.10.10.1/24 interface=test
0 10.0.0.204/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 ether1
1 10.20.0.1/24 10.20.0.0 10.20.0.255 pc1
2 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.10.0 10.10.10.255 test
On the Router 2:
[admin@MikroTik] ip address> add address=10.10.10.2/24 interface=test
0 10.0.0.201/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 ether1
1 10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.0 10.10.10.255 test
If it set up correctly, then it is possible to ping Router 2 from Router 1 and vice versa:
round-trip min/avg/max = 10/11/13 ms
Page 359 of 695


Graphing
Document revision 1.1 (Wed Mar 15 09:46:17 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Description
General Options
Example
Health Graphing
Description
Interface Graphing
Description
Example
Simple Queue Graphing
Description
Example
Resource Graphing
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
Graphing is a tool which is used for monitoring various RouterOS parameters over a period of time.
Specifications
Packages required: system , routerboard (optional)
Home menu level: /tool graphing
Description
The Graphing tool can display graphics for:
Page 360 of 695


• Routerboard health (voltage and temperature)
• Resource usage (CPU, Memory and Disk usage)
• Traffic which is passed through interfaces
• Traffic which is passed through simple queues
Graphing consists of two parts - first part collects information and other part displays data in a Web
page. To access the graphics, type http://[Router_IP_address]/graphs/ and choose a graphic to
display in your Web browser.
Data from the router is gathered every 5 minutes, but saved on the system drive every store-every
time. After rebooting the router, graphing will display information that was last time saved on the
disk before the reboot.
RouterOS generates four graphics for each item:
• "Daily" Graph (5 Minute Average)
• "Weekly" Graph (30 Minute Average)
• "Monthly" Graph (2 Hour Average)
• "Yearly" Graph (1 Day Average)
To access each graphic from a network, specify this network in allow-address parameter for the
respective item.
General Options
Home menu level: /tool graphing
store-every ( 5min | hour | 24hours ; default: 5min ) - how often to store information on system
drive
Example
To store information on system drive every hour:
/tool graphing set store-every=hour
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing> print
store-every: hour
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing>
Health Graphing
Home menu level: /tool graphing health
Description
This submenu provides information about RouterBoard's 'health' - voltage and temperature. For this
option, you have to install the routerboard package:
Page 361 of 695


allow-address ( IP address | netmask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - network which is allowed to view
graphs of router health
store-on-disk ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to store information about traffic on system drive
or not. If not, the information will be stored in RAM and will be lost after a reboot
Interface Graphing
Home menu level: /tool graphing interface
Description
Shows how much traffic is passed through an interface over a period of time.
allow-address ( IP address | netmask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - IP address range which is allowed to
view information about the interface. If a client PC not belonging to this IP address range tries to
open http://[Router_IP_address]/graphs/, it will not see this entry
interface ( name ; default: all ) - name of the interface which will be monitored
store-on-disk ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to store information about traffic on system drive
or not. If not, the information will be stored in RAM and will be lost after a reboot
Example
To monitor traffic which is passed through interface ether1 only from local network
192.168.0.0/24, and write information on disk:
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing interface> add interface=ether1 \
\... allow-address=192.168.0.0/24 store-on-disk=yes
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing interface> print
Flags: X - disabled
# INTERFACE ALLOW-ADDRESS STORE-ON-DISK
0 ether1 192.168.0.0/24 yes
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing interface>
Graph for interface ether1:
Simple Queue Graphing

Home menu level: /tool graphing queue
Description
In this submenu you can specify a queue from the /queue simple list to make a graphic for it.
Page 362 of 695


view information about the queue. If a client PC not belonging to this IP address range tries to open
http://[Router_IP_address]/graphs/, it will not see this entry
allow-target ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to allow access to web graphing from IP range that
is specified in /queue simple target-address
simple-queue ( name ; default: all ) - name of simple queue which will be monitored
store-on-disk ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to store information about traffic on hard drive or
not. If not, the information will be stored in RAM and will be lost after a reboot
Example
Add a simple queue to Grapher list with simple-queue name queue1, allow limited clients to access
Grapher from web, store information about traffic on disk:
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing queue> add simple-queue=queue1 allow-address=yes \
\... store-on-disk=yes
"Daily" graphic for queue1:
Resource Graphing
Home menu level: /tool graphing resource
Description
Provides with router resource usage information over a period of time:
• CPU usage
• Memory usage
• Disk usage
view information about the resource usage. If a client PC not belonging to this IP address range
tries to open http://[Router_IP_address]/graphs/, it will not see this entry
store-on-disk ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to store information about traffic on hard drive or
not. If not, the information will be stored in RAM and will be lost after a reboot
Example
Add IP range 192.168.0.0/24 from which users are allowed to monitor Grapher's resource usage:
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing resource> add allow-address=192.168.0.0/24 \
\... store-on-disk=yes
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing resource> print
Flags: X - disabled
# ALLOW-ADDRESS STORE-ON-DISK
0 192.168.0.0/24 yes
[admin@MikroTik] tool graphing resource>
Page 363 of 695


HotSpot User AAA
Document revision 2.3 (Tue Sep 27 14:30:17 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
HotSpot User Profiles
Description
Notes
Example
HotSpot Users
Notes
Example
HotSpot Active Users
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
This document provides information on authentication, authorization and accounting parameters
and configuration for HotSpot gateway system.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip hotspot user
Standards and Technologies: RADIUS
Hardware usage: Local traffic accounting requires additional memory
Related Documents
• HotSpot Gateway
••
PPP User AAA
• Router User AAA
Page 364 of 695


• RADIUS client
Description

Home menu level: /ip hotspot user profile
Description
HotSpot User profiles are used for common user settings. Profiles are like user groups, they are
grouping users with the same limits.
address-pool ( name | none ; default: none ) - the IP poll name which the users will be given IP
addresses from. This works like dhcp-pool method in earlier versions of MikroTik RouterOS,
except that it does not use DHCP, but rather the embedded one-to-one NAT
• none - do not reassign IP addresses to the users of this profile
advertise ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to enable forced advertisement popups for this profile
advertise-interval ( multiple choice: time ; default: 30m,10m ) - set of intervals between showing
advertisement popups. After the list is done, the last value is used for all further advertisements
advertise-timeout ( time | immediately | never ; default: 1m ) - how long to wait for advertisement
to be shown, before blocking network access with walled-garden
advertise-url ( multiple choice: text ; default:
http://www.mikrotik.com/,http://www.routerboard.com/ ) - list of URLs to show as
advertisement popups. The list is cyclic, so when the last item reached, next time the first is shown
idle-timeout ( time | none ; default: none ) - idle timeout (maximal period of inactivity) for
authorized clients. It is used to detect, that client is not using outer networks (e.g. Internet), i.e.,
there is NO TRAFFIC coming from that client and going through the router. Reaching the timeout,
user will be logged out, dropped of the host list, the address used by the user will be freed, and the
session time accounted will be decreased by this value
• none - do not timeout idle users
incoming-filter ( name ) - name of the firewall chain applied to incoming packets from the users of
this profile
incoming-packet-mark ( name ) - packet mark put on all the packets from every user of this
profile automatically
keepalive-timeout ( time | none ; default: 00:02:00 ) - keepalive timeout for authorized clients.
Used to detect, that the computer of the client is alive and reachable. If check will fail during this
period, user will be logged out, dropped of the host list, the address used by the user will be freed,
and the session time accounted will be decreased by this value
• none - do not timeout unreachable users
Page 365 of 695


name ( name ) - profile reference name
on-login ( text ; default: "" ) - script name to launch after a user has logged in
on-logout ( text ; default: "" ) - script name to launch after a user has logged out
open-status-page ( always | http-login ; default: always ) - whether to show status page also for
users authenticated using mac login method. Useful if you want to put some information (for
example, banners or popup windows) in the alogin.html page so that all users would see it
• http-login - open status page only in case of http login (including cookie and https login
methods)
• always - open http status page in case of mac login as well
outgoing-filter ( name ) - name of the firewall chain applied to outgoing packets to the users of this
profile
outgoing-packet-mark ( name ) - packet mark put on all the packets to every user of this profile
automatically
rate-limit ( text ; default: "" ) - Rate limitation in form of rx-rate[/tx-rate]
[rx-burst-rate[/tx-burst-rate] [rx-burst-threshold[/tx-burst-threshold] [rx-burst-time[/tx-burst-time]
[priority] [rx-rate-min[/tx-rate-min]]]] from the point of view of the router (so "rx" is client upload,
and "tx" is client download). All rates should be numbers with optional 'k' (1,000s) or 'M'
(1,000,000s). If tx-rate is not specified, rx-rate is as tx-rate too. Same goes for tx-burst-rate and
tx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-time. If both rx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-threshold are not
specified (but burst-rate is specified), rx-rate and tx-rate is used as burst thresholds. If both
rx-burst-time and tx-burst-time are not specified, 1s is used as default. Priority takes values 1..8,
where 1 implies the highest priority, but 8 - the lowest. If rx-rate-min and tx-rate-min are not
specified rx-rate and tx-rate values are used. The rx-rate-min and tx-rate-min values can not exceed
rx-rate and tx-rate values.
session-timeout ( time ; default: 0s ) - session timeout (maximal allowed session time) for client.
After this time, the user will be logged out unconditionally
• 0 - no timeout
shared-users ( integer ; default: 1 ) - maximal number of simultaneously logged in users with the
same username
status-autorefresh ( time | none ; default: none ) - HotSpot servlet status page autorefresh interval
transparent-proxy ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to use transparent HTTP proxy for the
authorized users of this profile
Notes
When idle-timeout or keepalive is reached, session-time for that user is reduced by the actual period
of inactivity in order to prevent the user from being overcharged.
Example
HotSpot Users
Page 366 of 695


address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - static IP address. If not 0.0.0.0, client will always get the
same IP address. It implies, that only one simultaneous login for that user is allowed. Any existing
address will be replaced with this one using the embedded one-to-one NAT
bytes-in ( read-only: integer ) - total amount of bytes received from user
bytes-out ( read-only: integer ) - total amount of bytes sent to user
limit-bytes-in ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximum amount of bytes user can transmit (i.e., bytes
received from the user)
• 0 - no limit
limit-bytes-out ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximum amount of bytes user can receive (i.e., bytes sent
to the user)
• 0 - no limit
limit-uptime ( time ; default: 0s ) - total uptime limit for user (pre-paid time)
• 0s - no limit
mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - static MAC address. If not
00:00:00:00:00:00, client is allowed to login only from that MAC address
name ( name ) - user name. If authentication method is trial, then user name will be set automaticly
after following pattern "T-MAC_adress", where MAC_address is trial user Mac address
packets-in ( read-only: integer ) - total amount of packets received from user (i.e., packets received
from the user)
packets-out ( read-only: integer ) - total amount of packets sent to user (i.e., packets sent to the
user)
password ( text ) - user password
profile ( name ; default: default ) - user profile
routes ( text ) - routes that are to be registered on the HotSpot gateway when the client is
connected. The route format is: "dst-address gateway metric" (for example, "10.1.0.0/24 10.0.0.1
1"). Several routes may be specified separated with commas
server ( name | all ; default: all ) - which server is this user allowed to log in to
uptime ( read-only: time ) - total time user has been logged in
Notes
In case of mac authentication method, clients' MAC addresses can be used as usernames (without
password)
The byte limits are total limits for each user (not for each session as at /ip hotspot active). So, if a
user has already downloaded something, then session limit will show the total limit - (minus)
already downloaded. For example, if download limit for a user is 100MB and the user has already
downloaded 30MB, then session download limit after login at /ip hotspot active will be 100MB -
30MB = 70MB.
Should a user reach his/her limits (bytes-in >= limit-bytes-in or bytes-out >= limit-bytes-out),
he/she will not be able to log in anymore.
Page 367 of 695


The statistics is updated if a user is authenticated via local user database each time he/she logs out.
It means, that if a user is currently logged in, then the statistics will not show current total values.
Use /ip hotspot active submenu to view the statistics on the current user sessions.
If the user has IP address specified, only one simultaneous login is allowed. If the same credentials
are used again when the user is still active, the active one will be automatically logged off.
Example
To add user ex with password ex that is allowed to log in only with 01:23:45:67:89:AB MAC
address and is limited to 1 hour of work:
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot user> add name=ex password=ex \

\... mac-address=01:23:45:67:89:AB limit-uptime=1h
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot user> print
Flags: X - disabled
# SERVER NAME ADDRESS PROFILE UPTIME
0 ex default 00:00:00
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot user> print detail
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="ex" password="ex" mac-address=01:23:45:67:89:AB profile=default
limit-uptime=01:00:00 uptime=00:00:00 bytes-in=0 bytes-out=0
packets-in=0 packets-out=0
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot user>

Home menu level: /ip hotspot active
Description
The active user list shows the list of currently logged in users. Nothing can be changed here, except
user can be logged out with the remove command
address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address of the user
blocked ( read-only: flag ) - whether the user is blocked by advertisement (i.e., usual due
advertisement is pending)
bytes-in ( read-only: integer ) - how many bytes did the router receive from the client
bytes-out ( read-only: integer ) - how many bytes did the router send to the client
domain ( read-only: text ) - domain of the user (if split from username)
idle-time ( read-only: time ) - the amount of time has the user been idle
idle-timeout ( read-only: time ) - the exact value of idle-timeout that applies to this user. This
property shows how long should the user stay idle for it to be logged off automatically
keepalive-timeout ( read-only: time ) - the exact value of keepalive-timeout that applies to this
user. This property shows how long should the user's computer stay out of reach for it to be logged
off automatically
limit-bytes-in ( read-only: integer ) - maximal amount of bytes the user is allowed to send to the
router
Page 368 of 695


limit-bytes-out ( read-only: integer ) - maximal amount of bytes the router is allowed to send to
the client
login-by ( multiple choice, read-only: cookie | http-chap | http-pap | https | mac | trial ) -
authentication method used by user
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - actual MAC address of the user
packets-in ( read-only: integer ) - how many packets did the router receive from the client
packets-out ( read-only: integer ) - how many packets did the router send to the client
radius ( read-only: yes | no ) - whether the user was authenticated via RADIUS
server ( read-only: name ) - the particular server the used is logged on at.
session-time-left ( read-only: time ) - the exact value of session-time-left that applies to this user.
This property shows how long should the user stay logged-in (see uptime) for it to be logged off
automatically
uptime ( read-only: time ) - current session time of the user (i.e., how long has the user been
logged in)
user ( read-only: name ) - name of the user
Example
To get the list of active users:
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot active> print

Flags: R - radius, B - blocked
# USER ADDRESS UPTIME SESSION-TIMEOUT IDLE-TIMEOUT
0 ex 10.0.0.144 4m17s 55m43s
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot active>
Page 369 of 695


IP accounting
Document revision 2.1 (Fri Dec 17 18:28:01 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Local IP Traffic Accounting
Description
Notes
Example
Example
Local IP Traffic Accounting Table
Description
Notes
Example
Web Access to the Local IP Traffic Accounting Table
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting feature provides a possibility of local and/or remote
(on RADIUS server) Point-to-Point and HotSpot user management and traffic accounting (all IP
traffic passing the router is accounted; local traffic acocunting is an option).
Specifications
Home menu level: /user , /ppp , /ip accounting , /radius
Hardware usage: Traffic accounting requires additional memory
Related Documents
•• Package Management
Page 370 of 695


• HotSpot Gateway
• PPP and Asynchronous Interfaces
• PPPoE
• PPTP
• L2TP
• ISDN
Local IP Traffic Accounting

Home menu level: /ip accounting
Description
As each packet passes through the router, the packet source and destination addresses are matched
against an IP pair in the accounting table and the traffic for that pair is increased. The traffic of PPP,
PPTP, PPPoE, ISDN and HotSpot clients can be accounted on per-user basis too. Both the number
of packets and the number of bytes are accounted.
If no matching IP or user pair exists, a new entry will be added to the table
Only the packets that enter and leave the router are accounted. Packets that are dropped in the router
are not counted. Packets that are NATted on the router will be accounted for with the actual IP
addresses on each side. Packets that are going through bridged interfaces (i.e. inside the bridge
interface) are also accounted correctly.
Traffic, generated by the router itself, and sent to it, may as well be accounted.
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether local IP traffic accounting is enabled
account-local-traffic ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to account the traffic to/from the router
itself
threshold ( integer ; default: 256 ) - maximum number of IP pairs in the accounting table (maximal
value is 8192)
Notes
For bidirectional connections two entries will be created.
Each IP pair uses approximately 100 bytes
When the threshold limit is reached, no new IP pairs will be added to the accounting table. Each
packet that is not accounted in the accounting table will then be added to the uncounted counter!
Example
Enable IP accounting:
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting> set enabled=yes
Page 371 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting> print
enabled: yes
account-local-traffic: no
threshold: 256
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting>
Example
See the uncounted packets:
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting uncounted> print
packets: 0
bytes: 0
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting uncounted>
Local IP Traffic Accounting Table

Home menu level: /ip accounting snapshot
Description
When a snapshot is made for data collection, the accounting table is cleared and new IP pairs and
traffic data are added. The more frequently traffic data is collected, the less likelihood that the IP
pairs thereshold limit will be reached.
bytes ( read-only: integer ) - total number of bytes, matched by this entry
dst-address ( read-only: IP address ) - destination IP address
dst-user ( read-only: text ) - recipient's name (if aplicable)
packets ( read-only: integer ) - total number of packets, matched by this entry
src-address ( read-only: IP address ) - source IP address
src-user ( read-only: text ) - sender's name (if aplicable)
Notes
Usernames are shown only if the users are connected to the router via a PPP tunnel or are
authenticated by HotSpot.
Before the first snapshot is taken, the table is empty.
Example
To take a new snapshot:
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting snapshot> take
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting snapshot> print
# SRC-ADDRESS DST-ADDRESS PACKETS BYTES SRC-USER DST-USER
0 192.168.0.2 159.148.172.197 474 19130
1 192.168.0.2 10.0.0.4 3 120
2 192.168.0.2 192.150.20.254 32 3142
3 192.150.20.254 192.168.0.2 26 2857
4 10.0.0.4 192.168.0.2 2 117
Page 372 of 695


5 159.148.147.196 192.168.0.2 2 136
6 192.168.0.2 159.148.147.196 1 40
7 159.148.172.197 192.168.0.2 835 1192962
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting snapshot>
Web Access to the Local IP Traffic Accounting Table

Home menu level: /ip accounting web-access
Description
The web page report make it possible to use the standard Unix/Linux tool wget to collect the traffic
data and save it to a file or to use MikroTik shareware Traffic Counter to display the table. If the
web report is enabled and the web page is viewed, the snapshot will be made when connection is
initiated to the web page. The snapshot will be displayed on the web page. TCP protocol, used by
http connections with the wget tool guarantees that none of the traffic data will be lost. The
snapshot image will be made when the connection from wget is initiated. Web browsers or wget
should connect to URL: http://routerIP/accounting/ip.cgi
accessible-via-web ( yes | no ; default: no ) - wheather the snapshot is available via web
address ( IP address | netmask ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address range that is allowed to access the
snapshot
Example
To enable web access from 10.0.0.1 server only:
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting web-access> set accessible-via-web=yes \
\... address=10.0.0.1/32
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting web-access> print
accessible-via-web: yes
address: 10.0.0.1/32
[admin@MikroTik] ip accounting web-access>
Page 373 of 695


PPP User AAA
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Local PPP User Profiles
Description
Notes
Example
Local PPP User Database
Description
Example
Monitoring Active PPP Users
Example
PPP User Remote AAA
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
This documents provides summary, configuration reference and examples on PPP user
management. This includes asynchronous PPP, PPTP, PPPoE and ISDN users.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ppp
Related Documents
••
HotSpot User AAA
• Router User AAA
• RADIUS client
Page 374 of 695


• PPP and Asynchronous Interfaces
• PPPoE
• PPTP
• L2TP
• ISDN Interfaces
Description
The MikroTik RouterOS provides scalable Authentication, Athorization and Accounting (AAA)
functionality.
Local authentication is performed using the User Database and the Profile Database. The actual
configuration for the given user is composed using respective user record from the User Database,
associated item from the Profile Database and the item in the Profile database which is set as default
for a given service the user is authenticating to. Default profile settings from the Profile database
have lowest priority while the user access record settings from the User Database have highest
priority with the only exception being particular IP addresses take precedence over IP pools in the
local-address and remote-address settings, which described later on.
Support for RADIUS authentication gives the ISP or network administrator the ability to manage
PPP user access and accounting from one server throughout a large network. The MikroTik
RouterOS has a RADIUS client which can authenticate for PPP, PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP and ISDN
connections. The attributes received from RADIUS server override the ones set in the default
profile, but if some parameters are not received they are taken from the respective default profile.
Local PPP User Profiles

Home menu level: /ppp profile
Description
PPP profiles are used to define default values for user access records stored under /ppp secret
submenu. Settings in /ppp secret User Database override corresponding /ppp profile settings
except that single IP addresses always take precedence over IP pools when specified as
local-address or remote-address parameters.
change-tcp-mss ( yes | no | default ; default: default ) - modifies connection MSS settings
• yes - adjust connection MSS value
• no - do not atjust connection MSS value
• default - derive this value from the interface default profile; same as no if this is the interface
default profile
dns-server ( IP address ) - IP address of the DNS server to supply to clients
Page 375 of 695


idle-timeout ( time ) - specifies the amount of time after which the link will be terminated if there
was no activity present. There is no timeout set by default
• 0s - no link timeout is set
incoming-filter ( name ) - firewall chain name for incoming packets. Specified chain gets control
for each packet coming from the client. The ppp chain should be manually added and rules with
action=jump jump-target=ppp should be added to other relevant chains in order for this feature to
work. For more information look at the Examples section
local-address ( IP address | name ) - IP address or IP address pool name for PPP server
name ( name ) - PPP profile name
only-one ( yes | no | default ; default: default ) - defines whether a user is allowed to have more
then one connection at a time
• yes - a user is not allowed to have more than one connection at a time
• no - the user is allowed to have more than one connection at a time
default profile
outgoing-filter ( name ) - firewall chain name for outgoing packets. Specified chain gets control
for each packet going to the client. The ppp chain should be manually added and rules with
action=jump jump-target=ppp should be added to other relevant chains in order for this feature to
work. For more information look at the Examples section
rate-limit ( text ; default: "" ) - rate limitation in form of rx-rate[/tx-rate]
[rx-burst-rate[/tx-burst-rate] [rx-burst-threshold[/tx-burst-threshold] [rx-burst-time[/tx-burst-time]
[priority] [rx-rate-min[/tx-rate-min]]]] from the point of view of the router (so "rx" is client upload,
and "tx" is client download). All rates are measured in bits per second, unless followed by optional
'k' suffix (kilobits per second) or 'M' suffix (megabits per second). If tx-rate is not specified, rx-rate
serves as tx-rate too. The same applies for tx-burst-rate, tx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-time. If both
rx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-threshold are not specified (but burst-rate is specified), rx-rate and
tx-rate are used as burst thresholds. If both rx-burst-time and tx-burst-time are not specified, 1s is
used as default. Priority takes values 1..8, where 1 implies the highest priority, but 8 - the lowest. If
rx-rate-min and tx-rate-min are not specified rx-rate and tx-rate values are used. The rx-rate-min
and tx-rate-min values can not exceed rx-rate and tx-rate values.
remote-address ( IP address | name ) - IP address or IP address pool name for PPP clients
session-timeout ( time ) - maximum time the connection can stay up. By default no time limit is set
• 0s - no connection timeout
use-compression ( yes | no | default ; default: default ) - specifies whether to use data compression
or not
• yes - enable data compression
• no - disable data compression
default profile
use-encryption ( yes | no | default ; default: default ) - specifies whether to use data encryption or
not
• yes - enable data encryption
• no - disable data encryption
Page 376 of 695


default profile
use-vj-compression ( yes | no | default ; default: default ) - specifies whether to use Van Jacobson
header compression algorithm
• yes - enable Van Jacobson header compression
• no - disable Van Jacobson header compression
default profile
wins-server ( IP address ) - IP address of the WINS server to supply to Windows clients
Notes
There are two default profiles that cannot be removed:
[admin@rb13] ppp profile> print
Flags: * - default
0 * name="default" use-compression=no use-vj-compression=no use-encryption=no
only-one=no
change-tcp-mss=yes
1 * name="default-encryption" use-compression=default use-vj-compression=default
use-encryption=yes
only-one=default change-tcp-mss=default
[admin@rb13] ppp profile>
Use Van Jacobson compression only if you have to because it may slow down the communications
on bad or congested channels.
incoming-filter and outgoing-filter arguments add dynamic jump rules to chain ppp, where the
jump-target argument will be equal to incoming-filter or outgoing-filter argument in /ppp
profile. Therefore, chain ppp should be manually added before changing these arguments.
only-one parameter is ignored if RADIUS authentication is used.
If there are more that 10 simultaneous PPP connections planned, it is recommended to turn the
change-mss property off, and use one general MSS changing rule in mangle table instead, to reduce
CPU utilization.
Example
To add the profile ex that assigns the router itself the 10.0.0.1 address, and the addresses from the
ex pool to the clients, filtering traffic coming from clients through mypppclients chain:
[admin@rb13] ppp profile> add name=ex local-address=10.0.0.1 remote-address=ex
incoming-filter=mypppclients
[admin@rb13] ppp profile> print
Flags: * - default
0 * name="default" use-compression=no use-vj-compression=no use-encryption=no
only-one=no
change-tcp-mss=yes
1 name="ex" local-address=10.0.0.1 remote-address=ex use-compression=default
use-vj-compression=default use-encryption=default only-one=default
change-tcp-mss=default
incoming-filter=mypppclients
2 * name="default-encryption" use-compression=default use-vj-compression=default
use-encryption=yes
only-one=default change-tcp-mss=default
[admin@rb13] ppp profile>
Page 377 of 695


Local PPP User Database
Home menu level: /ppp secret
Description
PPP User Database stores PPP user access records with PPP user profile assigned to each user.
caller-id ( text ; default: "" ) - for PPTP and L2TP it is the IP address a client must connect from.
For PPPoE it is the MAC address (written in CAPITAL letters) a client must connect from. For
ISDN it is the caller's number (that may or may not be provided by the operator) the client may
dial-in from
• "" - no restrictions on where clients may connect from
limit-bytes-in ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximal amount a client can upload, in bytes, for a session
limit-bytes-out ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximal amount a client can download, in bytes, for a
session
local-address ( IP address | name ) - IP address or IP address pool name for PPP server
name ( name ) - user's name used for authentication
password ( text ; default: "" ) - user's password used for authentication
profile ( name ; default: default ) - profile name to use together with this access record for user
authentication
remote-address ( IP address | name ) - IP address or IP address pool name for PPP clients
routes ( text ) - routes that appear on the server when the client is connected. The route format is:
dst-address gateway metric (for example, 10.1.0.0/ 24 10.0.0.1 1). Several routes may be specified
separated with commas
service ( any | async | isdn | l2tp | pppoe | pptp ; default: any ) - specifies the services available to a
particular user
Example
To add the user ex with password lkjrht and profile ex available for PPTP service only, enter the
following command:
[admin@rb13] ppp secret> add name=ex password=lkjrht service=pptp profile=ex
[admin@rb13] ppp secret> print
Flags: X - disabled
# NAME SERVICE CALLER-ID PASSWORD PROFILE
REMOTE-ADDRESS
0 ex pptp lkjrht ex
0.0.0.0
[admin@rb13] ppp secret>
Monitoring Active PPP Users

Command name: /ppp active print
Page 378 of 695


address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address the client got from the server
bytes ( read-only: integer | integer ) - amount of bytes transfered through tis connection. First
figure represents amount of transmitted traffic from the router's point of view, while the second one
shows amount of received traffic
caller-id ( read-only: text ) - for PPTP and L2TP it is the IP address the client connected from. For
PPPoE it is the MAC address the client connected from. For ISDN it is the caller's number the client
dialed-in from
• "" - no restrictions on where clients may connect from
encoding ( read-only: text ) - shows encryption and encoding (separated with '/' if asymmetric)
being used in this connection
limit-bytes-in ( read-only: integer ) - maximal amount of bytes the user is allowed to send to the
router
limit-bytes-out ( read-only: integer ) - maximal amount of bytes the router is allowed to send to
the client
name ( read-only: name ) - user name supplied at authentication stage
packets ( read-only: integer | integer ) - amount of packets transfered through tis connection. First
figure represents amount of transmitted traffic from the router's point of view, while the second one
shows amount of received traffic
service ( read-only: async | isdn | l2tp | pppoe | pptp ) - the type of service the user is using
session-id ( read-only: text ) - shows unique client identifier
uptime ( read-only: time ) - user's uptime
Example
[admin@rb13] > /ppp active print
Flags: R - radius
# NAME SERVICE CALLER-ID ADDRESS UPTIME ENCODING
0 ex pptp 10.0.11.12 10.0.0.254 1m16s MPPE128...
[admin@rb13] > /ppp active print detail
Flags: R - radius
0 name="ex" service=pptp caller-id="10.0.11.12" address=10.0.0.254
uptime=1m22s encoding="MPPE128 stateless" session-id=0x8180002B
limit-bytes-in=200000000 limit-bytes-out=0
[admin@rb13] > /ppp active print stats
Flags: R - radius
# NAME BYTES PACKETS
0 ex 10510/159690614 187/210257
[admin@rb13] >
PPP User Remote AAA

Home menu level: /ppp aaa
accounting ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - enable RADIUS accounting
interim-update ( time ; default: 0s ) - Interim-Update time interval
Page 379 of 695


use-radius ( yes | no ; default: no ) - enable user authentication via RADIUS
Notes
RADIUS user database is consulted only if the required username is not found in local user
database.
Example
To enable RADIUS AAA:
[admin@MikroTik] ppp aaa> set use-radius=yes
[admin@MikroTik] ppp aaa> print
use-radius: yes
accounting: yes
interim-update: 0s
[admin@MikroTik] ppp aaa>
Page 380 of 695


RADIUS client
Document revision 1.6 (February 14, 2007, 12:00 GMT)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
RADIUS Client Setup
Description
Notes
Example
Connection Terminating from RADIUS
Description
Notes
Suggested RADIUS Servers
Description
Supported RADIUS Attributes
Description
Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
This document provides information about RouterOS built-in RADIUS client configuration,
supported RADIUS attributes and recommendations on RADIUS server selection.
Specifications
Home menu level: /radius
Related Documents
•• HotSpot User AAA

• Router User AAA
• PPP User AAA
Page 381 of 695


Description
RADIUS, short for Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, is a remote server that provides
authentication and accounting facilities to various network apliances. RADIUS authentication and
accounting gives the ISP or network administrator ability to manage PPP user access and
accounting from one server throughout a large network. The MikroTik RouterOS has a RADIUS
client which can authenticate for HotSpot, PPP, PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP and ISDN connections. The
attributes received from RADIUS server override the ones set in the default profile, but if some
parameters are not received they are taken from the respective default profile.
The RADIUS server database is consulted only if no matching user acces record is found in router's
local database.
Traffic is accounted locally with MikroTik Traffic Flow and Cisco IP pairs and snapshot image can
be gathered using Syslog utilities. If RADIUS accounting is enabled, accounting information is also
sent to the RADIUS server default for that service.
RADIUS Client Setup

Home menu level: /radius
Description
This facility allows you to set RADIUS servers the router will use to authenticate users.
accounting-backup ( yes | no ; default: no ) - this entry is a backup RADIUS accounting server
accounting-port ( integer ; default: 1813 ) - RADIUS server port used for accounting
address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address of the RADIUS server
authentication-port ( integer ; default: 1812 ) - RADIUS server port used for authentication
called-id ( text ; default: "" ) - value depends on Point-to-Point protocol:
• ISDN - phone number dialled (MSN)
• PPPoE - service name
• PPTP - server's IP address
• L2TP - server's IP address
domain ( text ; default: "" ) - Microsoft Windows domain of client passed to RADIUS servers that
require domain validation
realm ( text ) - explicitly stated realm (user domain), so the users do not have to provide proper ISP
domain name in user name
secret ( text ; default: "" ) - shared secret used to access the RADIUS server
service ( multiple choice: hotspot | login | ppp | telephony | wireless | dhcp ; default: "" ) - router
services that will use this RADIUS server
Page 382 of 695


• hotspot - HotSpot authentication service
• login - router's local user authentication
• ppp - Point-to-Point clients authentication
• telephony - IP telephony accounting
• wireless - wireless client authentication (client's MAC address is sent as User-Name)
• dhcp - DHCP protocol client authentication (client's MAC address is sent as User-Name)
timeout ( time ; default: 100ms ) - timeout after which the request should be resend
Notes
The order of the items in this list is significant.
Microsoft Windows clients send their usernames in form domain\username
When RADIUS server is authenticating user with CHAP, MS-CHAPv1, MS-CHAPv2, it is not
using shared secret, secret is used only in authentication reply, and router is verifying it. So if you
have wrong shared secret, RADIUS server will accept request, but router won't accept reply. You
can see that with /radius monitor command, "bad-replies" number should increase whenever
somebody tries to connect.
Example
To set a RADIUS server for HotSpot and PPP services that has 10.0.0.3 IP address and ex shared
secret, you need to do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] radius> add service=hotspot,ppp address=10.0.0.3 secret=ex
[admin@MikroTik] radius> print
Flags: X - disabled
# SERVICE CALLED-ID DOMAIN ADDRESS SECRET
0 ppp,hotspot 10.0.0.3 ex
[admin@MikroTik] radius>
AAA for the respective services should be enabled too:
[admin@MikroTik] radius> /ppp aaa set use-radius=yes
[admin@MikroTik] radius> /ip hotspot profile set default use-radius=yes
To view some statistics for a client:
[admin@MikroTik] radius> monitor 0
pending: 0
requests: 10
accepts: 4
rejects: 1
resends: 15
timeouts: 5
bad-replies: 0
last-request-rtt: 0s
[admin@MikroTik] radius>
Connection Terminating from RADIUS

Home menu level: /radius incoming
Description
This facility supports unsolicited messages sent from RADIUS server. Unsolicited messages extend
RADIUS protocol commands, that allow to terminate a session which has already been connected
from RADIUS server. For this purpose DM (Disconnect-Messages) are used. Disconnect messages
Page 383 of 695


cause a user session to be terminated immediately
accept ( yes | no ; default: no ) - Whether to accept the unsolicited messages
port ( integer ; default: 1700 ) - The port number to listen for the requests on
Notes
RouterOS doesn't support POD (Packet of Disconnect) the other RADIUS access request packet
that performs a similar function as Disconnect Messages
Suggested RADIUS Servers
Description
MikroTik RouterOS RADIUS Client should work well with all RFC compliant servers. It has been
tested with:
• FreeRADIUS
• XTRadius (does not currently support MS-CHAP)
• Steel-Belted Radius
Supported RADIUS Attributes
Description
MikroTik RADIUS Dictionaries

Here you can download MikroTik reference dictionary , which incorporates all the needed
RADIUS attributes. This dictionary is the minimal dictionary, which is enough to support all
features of MikroTik RouterOS. It is designed for FreeRADIUS, but may also be used with many
other UNIX RADIUS servers (eg. XTRadius).
Note that it may conflict with the default configuration files of RADIUS server, which have
references to the Attributes, absent in this dictionary. Please correct the configuration files, not the
dictionary, as no other Attributes are supported by MikroTik RouterOS.
There is also dictionary.mikrotik that can be included in an existing dictionary to support MikroTik
vendor-specific Attributes.
Definitions
• PPPs - PPP, PPTP, PPPoE and ISDN
• default configuration - settings in default profile (for PPPs) or HotSpot server settings (for
HotSpot)
Page 384 of 695


Access-Request
• Service-Type - always is "Framed" (only for PPPs)
• Framed-Protocol - always is "PPP" (only for PPPs)
• NAS-Identifier - router identity
• NAS-IP-Address - IP address of the router itself
• NAS-Port - unique session ID
• Acct-Session-Id - unique session ID
• NAS-Port-Type - async PPP - "Async"; PPTP and L2TP - "Virtual"; PPPoE - "Ethernet";
ISDN - "ISDN Sync"; HotSpot - "Ethernet | Cable | Wireless-802.11" (according to the value of
nas-port-type parameter in /ip hotspot profile
• Calling-Station-Id - PPPoE and HotSpot- client MAC address in capital letters; PPTP and
L2TP - client public IP address; ISDN - client MSN
• Called-Station-Id - PPPoE - service name; PPTP and L2TP - server IP address; ISDN -
interface MSN; HotSpot - name of the HotSpot server
• NAS-Port-Id - async PPP - serial port name; PPPoE - ethernet interface name on which server
is running; HotSpot - name of the physical HotSpot interface (if bridged, the bridge port name
is showed here); not present for ISDN, PPTP and L2TP
• Framed-IP-Address - IP address of HotSpot client after Universal Client translation
• Mikrotik-Host-IP - IP address of HotSpot client before Universal Client translation (the
original IP address of the client)
• User-Name - client login name
• MS-CHAP-Domain - User domain, if present
• Mikrotik-Realm - If it is set in /radius menu, it is included in every RADIUS request as
Mikrotik-Realm attribute. If it is not set, the same value is sent as in MS-CHAP-Domain
attribute (if MS-CHAP-Domain is missing, Realm is not included neither)
• WISPr-Location-ID - text string specified in radius-location-id property of the HotSpot server
• WISPr-Location-Name - text string specified in radius-location-name property of the HotSpot
server
• WISPr-Logoff-URL - full link to the login page (for example, http://10.48.0.1/lv/logout)
• User-Password - encrypted password (used with PAP authentication)
• CHAP-Password, CHAP-Challenge - encrypted password and challenge (used with CHAP
authentication)
• MS-CHAP-Response, MS-CHAP-Challenge - encrypted password and challenge (used with
MS-CHAPv1 authentication)
• MS-CHAP2-Response, MS-CHAP-Challenge - encrypted password and challenge (used with
MS-CHAPv2 authentication)
Depending on authentication methods (NOTE: HotSpot uses CHAP by default and may use also
PAP if unencrypted passwords are enabled, it can not use MSCHAP):
Access-Accept
Page 385 of 695


• Framed-IP-Address - IP address given to client. If address belongs to 127.0.0.0/8 or
224.0.0.0/3 networks, IP pool is used from the default profile to allocate client IP address. If
Framed-IP-Address is specified, Framed-Pool is ignored
• Framed-IP-Netmask - client netmask. PPPs - if specified, a route will be created to the
network Framed-IP-Address belongs to via the Framed-IP-Address gateway; HotSpot - ignored
by HotSpot
• Framed-Pool - IP pool name (on the router) from which to get IP address for the client. If
Framed-IP-Address is specified, this attribute is ignored
NOTE: if Framed-IP-Address or Framed-Pool is specified it overrides remote-address in default
configuration
• Idle-Timeout - overrides idle-timeout in the default configuration
• Session-Timeout - overrides session-timeout in the default configuration
• Port-Limit - maximal mumber of simultaneous connections using the same username
(overrides te shared-users property of the HotSpot user profile)
• Class - cookie, will be included in Accounting-Request unchanged
• Framed-Route - routes to add on the server. Format is specified in RFC2865 (Ch. 5.22), can be
specified as many times as needed
• Filter-Id - firewall filter chain name. It is used to make a dynamic firewall rule. Firewall chain
name can have suffix .in or .out, that will install rule only for incoming or outgoing traffic.
Multiple Filter-id can be provided, but only last ones for incoming and outgoing is used. For
PPPs - filter rules in ppp chain that will jump to the specified chain, if a packet has come
to/from the client (that means that you should first create a ppp chain and make jump rules that
would put actual traffic to this chain). The same applies for HotSpot, but the rules will be
created in hotspot chain
• Mikrotik-Mark-Id - firewall mangle chain name (HotSpot only). The MikroTik RADIUS
client upon receiving this attribute creates a dynamic firewall mangle rule with action=jump
chain=hotspot and jump-target equal to the atribute value. Mangle chain name can have suffixes
.in or .out, that will install rule only for incoming or outgoing traffic. Multiple Mark-id
attributes can be provided, but only last ones for incoming and outgoing is used.
• Acct-Interim-Interval - interim-update for RADIUS client. PPP - if 0 uses the one specified in
RADIUS client; HotSpot - only respected if radius-interim-update=received in HotSpot server
profile
• MS-MPPE-Encryption-Policy - require-encryption property (PPPs only)
• MS-MPPE-Encryption-Types - use-encryption property, non-zero value means to use
encryption (PPPs only)
• Ascend-Data-Rate - tx/rx data rate limitation if multiple attributes are provided, first limits tx
data rate, second - rx data rate. If used together with Ascend-Xmit-Rate, specifies rx rate. 0 if
unlimited. Ignored if Rate-Limit attribute is present
• Ascend-Xmit-Rate - tx data rate limitation. It may be used to specify tx limit only instead of
sending two sequental Ascend-Data-Rate attributes (in that case Ascend-Data-Rate will specify
the receive rate). 0 if unlimited. Ignored if Rate-Limit attribute is present
• MS-CHAP2-Success - auth. response if MS-CHAPv2 was used (for PPPs only)
• MS-MPPE-Send-Key, MS-MPPE-Recv-Key - encryption keys for encrypted PPPs provided
by RADIUS server only is MS-CHAPv2 was used as authentication (for PPPs only)
Page 386 of 695


• Ascend-Client-Gateway - client gateway for DHCP-pool HotSpot login method (HotSpot
only)
• Mikrotik-Recv-Limit - total receive limit in bytes for the client
• Mikrotik-Recv-Limit-Gigawords - 4G (2^32) bytes of total receive limit (bits 32..63, when
bits 0..31 are delivered in Mikrotik-Recv-Limit)
• Mikrotik-Xmit-Limit - total transmit limit in bytes for the client
• Mikrotik-Xmit-Limit-Gigawords - 4G (2^32) bytes of total transmit limit (bits 32..63, when
bits 0..31 are delivered in Mikrotik-Recv-Limit)
• Mikrotik-Wireless-Forward - not forward the client's frames back to the wireless
infrastructure if this attribute is set to "0" (Wireless only)
• Mikrotik-Wireless-Skip-Dot1x - disable 802.1x authentication for the particulat wireless
client if set to non-zero value (Wireless only)
• Mikrotik-Wireless-Enc-Algo - WEP encryption algorithm: 0 - no encryption, 1 - 40-bit WEP,
2 - 104-bit WEP (Wireless only)
• Mikrotik-Wireless-Enc-Key - WEP encruption key for the client (Wireless only)
• Mikrotik-Rate-Limit - Datarate limitation for clients. Format is: rx-rate[/tx-rate]
[rx-burst-rate[/tx-burst-rate] [rx-burst-threshold[/tx-burst-threshold]
[rx-burst-time[/tx-burst-time] [priority] [rx-rate-min[/tx-rate-min]]]] from the point of view of
the router (so "rx" is client upload, and "tx" is client download). All rates should be numbers
with optional 'k' (1,000s) or 'M' (1,000,000s). If tx-rate is not specified, rx-rate is as tx-rate too.
Same goes for tx-burst-rate and tx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-time. If both rx-burst-threshold
and tx-burst-threshold are not specified (but burst-rate is specified), rx-rate and tx-rate is used
as burst thresholds. If both rx-burst-time and tx-burst-time are not specified, 1s is used as
default. Priority takes values 1..8, where 1 implies the highest priority, but 8 - the lowest. If
rx-rate-min and tx-rate-min are not specified rx-rate and tx-rate values are used. The
rx-rate-min and tx-rate-min values can not exceed rx-rate and tx-rate values.
• Mikrotik-Group - Router local user group name (defines in /user group) for local users.
HotSpot default profile for HotSpot users.
• Mikrotik-Advertise-URL - URL of the page with advertisements that should be displayed to
clients. If this attribute is specified, advertisements are enabled automatically, including
transparent proxy, even if they were explicitly disabled in the corresponding user profile.
Multiple attribute instances may be send by RADIUS server to specify additional URLs which
are choosen in round robin fashion.
• Mikrotik-Advertise-Interval - Time interval between two adjacent advertisements. Multiple
attribute instances may be send by RADIUS server to specify additional intervals. All interval
values are threated as a list and are taken one-by-one for each successful advertisement. If end
of list is reached, the last value is continued to be used.
• WISPr-Redirection-URL - URL, which the clients will be redirected to after successfull login
• WISPr-Bandwidth-Min-Up - minimal datarate (CIR) provided for the client upload
• WISPr-Bandwidth-Min-Down - minimal datarate (CIR) provided for the client download
• WISPr-Bandwidth-Max-Up - maxmal datarate (MIR) provided for the client upload
• WISPr-Bandwidth-Max-Down - maxmal datarate (MIR) provided for the client download
• WISPr-Session-Terminate-Time - time, when the user should be disconnected; in
"YYYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssTZD" form, where Y - year; M - month; D - day; T - separator
symbol (must be written between date and time); h - hour (in 24 hour format); m - minute; s -
Page 387 of 695


second; TZD - time zone in one of these forms: "+hh:mm", "+hhmm", "-hh:mm", "-hhmm"
Note that the received attributes override the default ones (set in the default profile), but if an
attribute is not received from RADIUS server, the default one is to be used.
Rate-Limit takes precedence over all other ways to specify data rate for the client. Ascend data rate
attributes are considered second; and WISPr attributes takes the last precedence.
Here are some Rate-Limit examples:
• 128k - rx-rate=128000, tx-rate=128000 (no bursts)
• 64k/128M - rx-rate=64000, tx-rate=128000000
• 64k 256k - rx/tx-rate=64000, rx/tx-burst-rate=256000, rx/tx-burst-threshold=64000,
rx/tx-burst-time=1s
• 64k/64k 256k/256k 128k/128k 10/10 - rx/tx-rate=64000, rx/tx-burst-rate=256000,
rx/tx-burst-threshold=128000, rx/tx-burst-time=10s
Accounting-Request
The accounting request carries the same attributes as Access Request, plus these ones:
• Acct-Status-Type - Start, Stop, or Interim-Update
• Acct-Authentic - either authenticated by the RADIUS or Local authority (PPPs only)
• Class - RADIUS server cookie, as received in Access-Accept
• Acct-Delay-Time - how long does the router try to send this Accounting-Request packet
Stop and Interim-Update Accounting-Request

Additionally to the accounting start request, the following messages will contain the following
attributes:
• Acct-Session-Time - connection uptime in seconds
• Acct-Input-Octets - bytes received from the client
• Acct-Input-Gigawords - 4G (2^32) bytes received from the client (bits 32..63, when bits 0..31
are delivered in Acct-Input-Octets)
• Acct-Input-Packets - nubmer of packets received from the client
• Acct-Output-Octets - bytes sent to the client
• Acct-Output-Gigawords - 4G (2^32) bytes sent to the client (bits 32..63, when bits 0..31 are
delivered in Acct-Output-Octets)
• Acct-Output-Packets - number of packets sent to the client
Stop Accounting-Request
These packets will, additionally to the Interim Update packets, have:
• Acct-Terminate-Cause - session termination cause (see RFC2866 ch. 5.10)
Change of Authorization
Page 388 of 695


RADIUS disconnect and Change of Authorization (according to RFC3576) are supported as well.
These attributes may be changed by a CoA request from the RADIUS server:
• Mikrotik-Group
• Mikrotik-Recv-Limit
• Mikrotik-Xmit-Limit
• Mikrotik-Rate-Limit
• Ascend-Data-Rate (only if Mikrotik-Rate-Limit is not present)
• Ascend-XMit-Rate (only if Mikrotik-Rate-Limit is not present)
• Mikrotik-Mark-Id
• Filter-Id
• Mikrotik-Advertise-Url
• Mikrotik-Advertise-Interval
• Session-Timeout
• Idle-Timeout
• Port-Limit
Note that it is not possible to change IP address, pool or routes that way - for such changes a user
must be disconnected first.
Attribute Numeric Values
RFC where it is
Name VendorID Value
defined
Acct-Authentic 45 RFC2866
Acct-Delay-Time 41 RFC2866
Acct-Input-Gigawords 52 RFC2869
Acct-Input-Octets 42 RFC2866
Acct-Input-Packets 47 RFC2866
Acct-Interim-Interval 85 RFC2869
Acct-Output-Gigawords 53 RFC2869
Acct-Output-Octets 43 RFC2866
Acct-Output-Packets 48 RFC2866
Acct-Session-Id 44 RFC2866
Acct-Session-Time 46 RFC2866
Acct-Status-Type 40 RFC2866
Acct-Terminate-Cause 49 RFC2866
Ascend-Client-Gateway 529 132
Page 389 of 695


Ascend-Data-Rate 529 197
Ascend-Xmit-Rate 529 255
Called-Station-Id 30 RFC2865
Calling-Station-Id 31 RFC2865
CHAP-Challenge 60 RFC2866
CHAP-Password 3 RFC2865
Class 25 RFC2865
Filter-Id 11 RFC2865
Framed-IP-Address 8 RFC2865
Framed-IP-Netmask 9 RFC2865
Framed-Pool 88 RFC2869
Framed-Protocol 7 RFC2865
Framed-Route 22 RFC2865
Idle-Timeout 28 RFC2865
Mikrotik-Advertise-Interval 14988 13
Mikrotik-Advertise-URL 14988 12
Mikrotik-Group 14988 3
Mikrotik-Host-IP 14988 10
Mikrotik-Mark-Id 14988 11
Mikrotik-Rate-Limit 14988 8
Mikrotik-Realm 14988 9
Mikrotik-Recv-Limit 14988 1
Mikrotik-Recv-Limit-Gigawords 14988 14
Mikrotik-Wireless-Enc-Algo 14988 6
Mikrotik-Wireless-Enc-Key 14988 7
Mikrotik-Wireless-Forward 14988 4
Mikrotik-Wireless-Skip-Dot1x 14988 5
Mikrotik-Xmit-Limit 14988 2
Mikrotik-Xmit-Limit-Gigawords 14988 15
MS-CHAP-Challenge 311 11 RFC2548
MS-CHAP-Domain 311 10 RFC2548
MS-CHAP-Response 311 1 RFC2548
MS-CHAP2-Response 311 25 RFC2548
MS-CHAP2-Success 311 26 RFC2548
Page 390 of 695


MS-MPPE-Encryption-Policy 311 7 RFC2548
MS-MPPE-Encryption-Types 311 8 RFC2548
MS-MPPE-Recv-Key 311 17 RFC2548
MS-MPPE-Send-Key 311 16 RFC2548
NAS-Identifier 32 RFC2865
NAS-Port 5 RFC2865
NAS-IP-Address 4 RFC2865
NAS-Port-Id 87 RFC2869
NAS-Port-Type 61 RFC2865
Port-Limit 62 RFC2865
Service-Type 6 RFC2865
Session-Timeout 27 RFC2865
User-Name 1 RFC2865
User-Password 2 RFC2865
WISPr-Bandwidth-Max-Down 14122 8 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Bandwidth-Max-Up 14122 7 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Bandwidth-Min-Down 14122 6 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Bandwidth-Min-Up 14122 5 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Location-Id 14122 1 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Location-Name 14122 2 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Logoff-URL 14122 3 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Redirection-URL 14122 4 wi-fi.org
WISPr-Session-Terminate-Time 14122 9 wi-fi.org
Troubleshooting
Description
• My radius server accepts authentication request from the client with "Auth: Login
OK:...", but the user cannot log on. The bad replies counter is incrementing under radius
monitor
This situation can occur, if the radius client and server have high delay link between them. Try
to increase the radius client's timeout to 600ms or more instead of the default 300ms! Also,
double check, if the secrets match on client and server!
Page 391 of 695


Router User AAA
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Router User Groups
Description
Notes
Example
Router Users
Description
Notes
Example
Monitoring Active Router Users
Description
Example
Router User Remote AAA
Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
This documents provides summary, configuration reference and examples on router user
management.
Specifications
Home menu level: /user
Related Documents
Page 392 of 695


•
•• PPP User AAA
•
Description
MikroTik RouterOS router user facility manage the users connecting the router from the local
console, via serial terminal, telnet, SSH or Winbox. The users are authenticated using either local
database or designated RADIUS server.
Each user is assigned to a user group, which denotes the rights of this user. A group policy is a
combination of individual policy items.
In case the user authentication is performed using RADIUS, the RADIUS client should be
previously configured under the /radius submenu.
Router User Groups

Home menu level: /user group
Description
The router user groups provide a convenient way to assign different permissions and access rights
to different user classes.
name ( name ) - the name of the user group
policy ( multiple choice: local | telnet | ssh | ftp | reboot | read | write | policy | test | web ; default:
!local,!telnet,!ssh,!ftp,!reboot,!read,!write,!policy,!test,!web ) - group policy item set
• local - policy that grants rights to log in locally via console
• telnet - policy that grants rights to log in remotely via telnet
• ssh - policy that grants rights to log in remotely via secure shell protocol
• ftp - policy that grants remote rights to log in remotely via FTP and to transfer files from and to
the router
• reboot - policy that allows rebooting the router
• read - policy that grants read access to the router's configuration. All console commands that
do not alter router's configuration are allowed
• write - policy that grants write access to the router's configuration, except for user management.
This policy does not allow to read the configuration, so make sure to enable read policy as well
• policy - policy that grants user management rights. Should be used together with write policy
• test - policy that grants rights to run ping, traceroute, bandwidth-test and wireless scan, sniffer
and snooper commands
• web - policy that grants rights to log in remotely via WebBox
• winbox - policy that grants rights to log in remotely via WinBox
Page 393 of 695


• password - policy that grants rights to change the password
Notes
There are three system groups which cannot be deleted:
[admin@rb13] > /user group print
0 name="read"
policy=local,telnet,ssh,reboot,read,test,winbox,password,web,!ftp,!write,!policy
1 name="write"
policy=local,telnet,ssh,reboot,read,write,test,winbox,password,web,!ftp,!policy
2 name="full"
policy=local,telnet,ssh,ftp,reboot,read,write,policy,test,winbox,password,web
3 name="test"
policy=ssh,read,policy,!local,!telnet,!ftp,!reboot,!write,!test,!winbox,!password,!web
[admin@rb13] >
Exclamation sign '!' just before policy item name means NOT.
Example
To add reboot group that is allowed to reboot the router locally or using telnet, as well as read the
router's configuration, enter the following command:
[admin@rb13] user group> add name=reboot policy=telnet,reboot,read,local
[admin@rb13] user group> print
0 name="read"
policy=local,telnet,ssh,reboot,read,test,winbox,password,web,!ftp,!write,!policy
1 name="write"
policy=local,telnet,ssh,reboot,read,write,test,winbox,password,web,!ftp,!policy
2 name="full"
policy=local,telnet,ssh,ftp,reboot,read,write,policy,test,winbox,password,web
3 name="reboot"
policy=local,telnet,reboot,read,!ssh,!ftp,!write,!policy,!test,!winbox,!password,!web
[admin@rb13] user group>
Router Users
Home menu level: /user
Description
Router user database stores the information such as username, password, allowed access addresses
and group about router management personnel.
address ( IP address | netmask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - host or network address from which the user
is allowed to log in
group ( name ) - name of the group the user belongs to
name ( name ) - user name. Although it must start with an alphanumeric character, it may contain
"*", "_", "." and "@" symbols
Page 394 of 695


password ( text ; default: "" ) - user password. If not specified, it is left blank (hit [Enter] when
logging in). It conforms to standard Unix characteristics of passwords and may contain letters,
digits, "*" and "_" symbols
Notes
There is one predefined user with full access rights:
[admin@MikroTik] user> print

Flags: X - disabled
# NAME GROUP ADDRESS
0 ;;; system default user
admin full 0.0.0.0/0
[admin@MikroTik] user>
There always should be at least one user with fulls access rights. If the user with full access rights is
the only one, it cannot be removed.
Example
To add user joe with password j1o2e3 belonging to write group, enter the following command:
[admin@MikroTik] user> add name=joe password=j1o2e3 group=write

[admin@MikroTik] user> print
Flags: X - disabled
name="admin" group=full address=0.0.0.0/0
1 name="joe" group=write address=0.0.0.0/0
[admin@MikroTik] user>
Monitoring Active Router Users

Command name: /user active print
Description
This command shows the currently active users along with respective statisics information.
address ( read-only: IP address ) - host IP address from which the user is accessing the router
• 0.0.0.0 - the user is logged in locally from the console
name ( read-only: name ) - user name
via ( read-only: console | telnet | ssh | winbox ) - user's access method
• console - user is logged in locally
• telnet - user is logged in remotely via telnet
• ssh - user is logged in remotely via secure shell protocol
• winbox - user is logged in remotely via WinBox tool
Page 395 of 695


when ( read-only: date ) - log in date and time
Example
To print currently active users, enter the following command:
[admin@rb13] user> active print
Flags: R - radius
# WHEN NAME ADDRESS
VIA
0 feb/27/2004 00:41:41 admin 1.1.1.200
ssh
1 feb/27/2004 01:22:34 admin 1.1.1.200
winbox
[admin@rb13] user>
Router User Remote AAA

Home menu level: /user aaa
Description
Router user remote AAA enables router user authentication and accounting via RADIUS server.
accounting ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - specifies whether to use RADIUS accounting
default-group ( name ; default: read ) - user group used by default for users authenticated via
RADIUS server
interim-update ( time ; default: 0s ) - RADIUS Interim-Update interval
use-radius ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether a user database on a RADIUS server should
be consulted
Notes
The RADIUS user database is consulted only if the required username is not found in the local user
database
Example
To enable RADIUS AAA, enter the following command:
[admin@MikroTik] user aaa> set use-radius=yes
[admin@MikroTik] user aaa> print
use-radius: yes
accounting: yes
interim-update: 0s
default-group: read
[admin@MikroTik] user aaa>
Page 396 of 695


Traffic Flow
Document revision 1.0 (30-jun-2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
General Configuration
Description
Traffic-Flow Target
Description
Traffic-Flow Example
General Information
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip traffic-flow
Related Documents
• Cisco NetFlow
• NTop
• Integrating ntop with NetFlow
Description
MikroTik Traffic-Flow is a system that provides statistic information about packets which pass
through the router. Besides network monitoring and accounting, system administrators can identify
various problems that may occur in the network. With help of Traffic-Flow, it is possible to analyze
and optimize the overall network performance. As Traffic-Flow is compatible with Cisco NetFlow,
it can be used with various utilities which are designed for Cisco's NetFlow.
Traffic-Flow supports the following NetFlow formats:
• version 1 - the first version of NetFlow data format, do not use it, unless you have to
• version 5 - in addition to version 1, version 5 has the BGP AS and flow sequence number
Page 397 of 695


information included
• version 9 - a new format which can be extended with new fields and record types thank's to its
template-style design
General Configuration
Description
This section describes the basic configuration of Traffic-Flow.
enabled ( yes | no ) - whether to enable traffic-flow service or not
interfaces ( name ) - names of those interfaces which will be used to gather statistics for
traffic-flow. To specify more than one interface, separate them with a comma (",")
cache-entries ( 1k | 2k | 4k | 8k | 16k | 32k | 64k | 128k | 256k | 512k ; default: 1k ) - number of flows
which can be in router's memory simultaneously
active-flow-timeout ( time ; default: 30m ) - maximum life-time of a flow
inactive-flow-timeout ( time ; default: 15s ) - how long to keep the flow active, if it is idle
Traffic-Flow Target
Description
With Traffic-Flow targets we specify those hosts which will gather the Traffic-Flow information
from router.
address ( IP address | port ) - IP address and port (UDP) of the host which receives Traffic-Flow
statistic packets from the router
v9-template-refresh ( integer ; default: 20 ) - number of packets after which the template is sent to
the receiving host (only for NetFlow version 9)
v9-template-timeout - after how long to send the template, if it has not been sent
version ( 1 | 5 | 9 ) - which version format of NetFlow to use
General Information
Traffic-Flow Example
Page 398 of 695


This example shows how to configure Traffic-Flow on a router
1. Enable Traffic-Flow on the router:
[admin@MikroTik] ip traffic-flow> set enabled=yes
[admin@MikroTik] ip traffic-flow> print
enabled: yes
interfaces: all
cache-entries: 1k
active-flow-timeout: 30m
inactive-flow-timeout: 15s
[admin@MikroTik] ip traffic-flow>
2. Specify IP address and port of the host, which will receive Traffic-Flow packets:
[admin@MikroTik] ip traffic-flow target> add address=192.168.0.2:2055 \
\... version=9
[admin@MikroTik] ip traffic-flow target> print
Flags: X - disabled
# ADDRESS VERSION
0 192.168.0.2:2055 9
[admin@MikroTik] ip traffic-flow target>
Now the router starts to send packets with Traffic-Flow information.
Some screenshots from NTop program, which has gathered Traffic-Flow information from our
router and displays it in nice graphs and statistics. For example, where what kind of traffic has
flown:
Top three hosts by upload and download each minute:
Page 399 of 695


Overall network load each minute:
Traffic usage by each protocol:
Page 400 of 695


Page 401 of 695

SNMP Service
Document revision 1.7 (Wen Sep 15 11:00:38 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
SNMP Setup
Description
Example
SNMP Communities
Description
Example
Available OIDs
Description
Example
Available MIBs
Description
Tools for SNMP Data Collection and Analysis
Description
An example of using MRTG with MikroTik SNMP
General Information
Summary
SNMP is an application layer protocol. It is called simple because it works that way - the
management station makes a request, and the managed device (SNMP agent) replies to this request.
In SNMPv1 there are three main actions - Get, Set, and Trap. RouterOS supports only Get, which
means that you can use this implementation only for network monitoring.
Hosts receive SNMP generated messages on UDP port 161 (except the trap messages, which are
received on UDP port 162).
The MikroTik RouterOS supports:
• SNMPv1 only
• Read-only access is provided to the NMS (network management system)
• User defined communities are supported
• Get and GetNext actions
Page 402 of 695


• No Set support
• No Trap support
Specifications
Packages required: system , ppp (optional)
Home menu level: /snmp
Standards and Technologies: SNMP (RFC 1157)
Related Documents
• http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/cisintwk/ito_doc/snmp.htm
• http://www.david-guerrero.com/papers/snmp/
SNMP Setup
Home menu level: /snmp
Description
This section shows you how to enable the SNMP agent on MikroTik RouterOS.
enabled ( yes | no ) - whether the SNMP service is enabled
contact ( text ; default: "" ) - contact information for the NMS
location ( text ; default: "" ) - location information for the NMS
Example
To enable the service, specifying some info:
[admin@MikroTik] snmp> set contact="admin@riga-2" location="3rd floor" enabled="yes"
[admin@MikroTik] snmp> print
enabled: yes
contact: admin@riga-2
location: 3rd floor
[admin@MikroTik] snmp>
SNMP Communities
Page 403 of 695

Home menu level: /snmp community
Description
The community name is a value in SNMPv1 header. It is like a 'username' for connecting to the
SNMP agent. The default community for SNMP is public.
name ( name ) - community name
address ( IP address/mask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - allow requests only from these addresses
• 0.0.0.0/0 - allow access for any address
read-access ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether the read access is enabled for the community
Example
To view existing communities:
[admin@MikroTik] snmp community> print
# NAME ADDRESS READ-ACCESS
0 public 0.0.0.0/0 yes
[admin@MikroTik] snmp community>
You can disable read access for the community public:

[admin@MikroTik] snmp community> set 0 read-access=no
0 public 0.0.0.0/0 no
To add the community called communa, that is only accessible from the 159.148.116.0/24
network:
[admin@MikroTik] snmp community> add name=communa address=159.148.116.0/24
0 public 0.0.0.0/0 no
1 communa 159.148.116.0/24 no
Available OIDs
Description
OID stands for an object identifier, which is a data type specifying an authoritatively named object.
An object identifier is a sequence of integers separated by decimal points. These integers traverse a
tree structure, similar to the DNS or a Unix filesystem. There is an unnamed root at the top of the
tree where the object identifiers start. All variables in the MIB start with the object identifier
1.3.6.1.2.1. Each node in the tree is also given a textual name. The names of the MIB variables are
the numeric object identifiers, all of which begin with 1.3.6.1.2.1. You can use the SNMP protocol
to get statistics from the router in these submenus:
• /interface
Page 404 of 695


• /interface pc
• /interface wavelan
• /interface wireless
• /interface wireless registration-table
• /queue simple
• /queue tree
• /system identity
• /system license
• /system resource
Example
To see available OID values, just type print oid. For example, to see available OIDs in /system
resource:
[admin@motors] system resource> print oid
uptime: .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0
total-hdd-space: .1.3.6.1.2.1.25.2.3.1.5.1
used-hdd-space: .1.3.6.1.2.1.25.2.3.1.6.1
total-memory: .1.3.6.1.2.1.25.2.3.1.5.2
used-memory: .1.3.6.1.2.1.25.2.3.1.6.2
cpu-load: .1.3.6.1.2.1.25.3.3.1.2.1
[admin@motors] system resource>
Available MIBs
Description
The Management Information Base, or MIB, is the database of information maintained by the agent
that the manager can query. You can download MikroTik MIB file
MikroTik RouterOS OID: enterprises.14988.1
RFC1493
dot1dBridge.dot1dBase.dot1dBaseBridgeAddress
dot1dBridge.dot1dStp.dot1dStpProtocolSpecification
dot1dBridge.dot1dStp.dot1dStpPriority
dot1dBridge.dot1dTp.dot1dTpFdbTable.dot1dTpFdbEntry.dot1dTpFdbAddress
dot1dBridge.dot1dTp.dot1dTpFdbTable.dot1dTpFdbEntry.dot1dTpFdbPort
dot1dBridge.dot1dTp.dot1dTpFdbTable.dot1dTpFdbEntry.dot1dTpFdbStatus
RFC2863
Page 405 of 695


ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifName
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCInOctets
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCInUcastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCOutOctets
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCOutUcastPkts
RFC1213
interfaces.ifNumber
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifIndex
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifDescr
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifType
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifMtu
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifSpeed
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifPhysAddress
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifAdminStatus
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifOperStatus
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifLastChange
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifInOctets
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifInUcastPkts
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifInNUcastPkts
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifInDiscards
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifInErrors
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifInUnknownProtos
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifOutOctets
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifOutUcastPkts
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifOutNUcastPkts
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifOutDiscards
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifOutErrors
interfaces.ifTable.ifEntry.ifOutQLen
RFC2011
ip.ipForwarding
Page 406 of 695


ip.ipDefaultTTL
ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntAddr
ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntIfIndex
ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntNetMask
ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntBcastAddr
ip.ipAddrTable.ipAddrEntry.ipAdEntReasmMaxSize
ip.ipNetToMediaTable.ipNetToMediaEntry.ipNetToMediaIfIndex
ip.ipNetToMediaTable.ipNetToMediaEntry.ipNetToMediaPhysAddress
ip.ipNetToMediaTable.ipNetToMediaEntry.ipNetToMediaNetAddress
ip.ipNetToMediaTable.ipNetToMediaEntry.ipNetToMediaType
RFC2096
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteNumber
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteDest
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteMask
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteTos
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteNextHop
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteIfIndex
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteType
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteProto
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteAge
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteInfo
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteNextHopAS
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteMetric1
ip.ipForward.ipCidrRouteTable.ipCidrRouteEntry.ipCidrRouteStatus
Note that obsolete ip.ipRouteTable is also supported
RFC1213
Page 407 of 695


system.sysDescr
system.sysObjectID
system.sysUpTime
system.sysContact
system.sysName
system.sysLocation
system.sysServices
RFC2790
host.hrSystem.hrSystemUptime
host.hrSystem.hrSystemDate
host.hrStorage.hrMemorySize
host.hrStorage.hrStorageTable.hrStorageEntry.hrStorageIndex
host.hrStorage.hrStorageTable.hrStorageEntry.hrStorageType
host.hrStorage.hrStorageTable.hrStorageEntry.hrStorageDescr
host.hrStorage.hrStorageTable.hrStorageEntry.hrStorageAllocationUnits
host.hrStorage.hrStorageTable.hrStorageEntry.hrStorageSize
host.hrStorage.hrStorageTable.hrStorageEntry.hrStorageUsed
CISCO-AAA-SESSION-MIB
Note that this MIB is supported only when ppp package is installed. It reports both ppp and
hotspot active users
enterprises.cisco.ciscoMgmt.ciscoAAASessionMIB.casnMIBObjects.casnActive.casnActiveTableEntries
enterprises.cisco.ciscoMgmt.ciscoAAASessionMIB.casnMIBObjects.casnActive.casnActiveTable.casnActiveEntry.casn
RFC2863
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifInMulticastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifInBroadcastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifOutMulticastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifOutBroadcastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCInMulticastPkts
Page 408 of 695


ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCInBroadcastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCOutMulticastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHCOutBroadcastPkts
ifMIB.ifMIBObjects.ifXTable.ifXEntry.ifHighSpeed
RFC2790
host.hrStorage.hrStorageTable.hrStorageEntry.hrStorageAllocationFailures
Tools for SNMP Data Collection and Analysis
Description
MRTG (Multi Router Traffic Grapher) is the most commonly used SNMP monitor. For further
information, see this link: http://people.ee.ethz.ch/~oetiker/webtools/mrtg/
An example of using MRTG with MikroTik SNMP

Here is a example configuration file for MRTG to monitor a network interface traffic on Mikrotik
RouterOS. This is only an example file.
######################################################################
# Multi Router Traffic Grapher -- Sample Configuration File
######################################################################
# This file is for use with mrtg-2.5.4c
# Global configuration
WorkDir: /var/www/mrtg
WriteExpires: Yes
RunAsDaemon: Yes
Interval: 6
Refresh: 300
######################################################################
# System: RouterBOARD
# Description: RouterOS v2.9
# Contact: [email protected]
# Location: Mikrotik main office
######################################################################
### Interface 'RemOffice'

Target[RouterBOARD]: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.8&1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.8:[email protected]
#SetEnv[RouterBOARD]: MRTG_INT_IP="1.1.1.3" MRTG_INT_DESCR="ether1"
MaxBytes[RouterBOARD]: 1250000
Title[RouterBOARD]: Traffic Analysis for RouterBOARD(1)
PageTop[RouterBOARD]: <H1>Traffic Analysis for RouterBOARD(1)</H1>
<TABLE>
<TR>
<TD>System:</TD> <TD>RouterBOARD</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>Maintainer:</TD> <TD>MicroTik Support</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>Description:</TD><TD>An Embedded Board</TD>
Page 409 of 695


</TR>
<TR>
<TD>ifType:</TD> <TD>ethernetCSMACD(6)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>ifName:</TD> <TD>RemOffice</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>Max Speed:</TD> <TD>1250.0 kBytes/s</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>IP:</TD> <TD>10.10.2.1</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
### Queue 'queue1'
Target[RouterBOARD_queue]:
1.3.6.1.4.1.14988.1.1.2.1.1.8.1&1.3.6.1.4.1.14988.1.1.2.1.1.9.1:[email protected]
#SetEnv[RouterBOARD_queue]: MRTG_INT_IP="1.1.1.3" MRTG_INT_DESCR="ether1"
MaxBytes[RouterBOARD_queue]: 100000
Title[RouterBOARD_queue]: Traffic Analysis for RouterBOARD(1_1)
PageTop[RouterBOARD_queue]: <H1>Traffic Analysis for RouterBOARD(1_1)</H1>
<TABLE>
<TR>
<TD>System:</TD> <TD>RouterBOARD</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>Maintainer:</TD> <TD>MicroTik Support</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>Description:</TD><TD>An Embedded Board</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>ifType:</TD> <TD>ethernetCSMACD(6)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>ifName:</TD> <TD>RemOffice</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>queueName:</TD> <TD>queue1</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>Max Speed:</TD> <TD>64.0 kBytes/s</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>IP:</TD> <TD>10.10.2.1</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
The output page of MRTG (interface part) should look like this: Example MRTG Output
For more information read the MRTG documentation: Configuration Reference
Page 410 of 695


Log Management
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
General Settings
Example
Actions
Notes
Example
Log Messages
Description
Command Description
Example
General Information
Summary
Various system events and status information can be logged. Logs can be saved in local routers file,
displayed in console, sent to an email or to a remote server running a syslog daemon. MikroTik
provides a shareware Windows Syslog daemon, which can be downloaded from www.mikrotik.com
Specifications
Home menu level: /system logging , /log
Standards and Technologies: Syslog
Related Documents
Description
Logs have different groups or topics. Logs from each topic can be configured to be discarded,
Page 411 of 695


logged locally or remotely. Locally log files can be stored in memory (default; logs are lost on
reboot) or on hard drive (not enabled by default as is harmful for flash disks).
General Settings
Home menu level: /system logging
topics ( info | critical | firewall | keepalive | packet | read | timer | write | ddns | hotspot | l2tp | ppp |
route | update | account | debug | ike | manager | pppoe | script | warning | async | dhcp | info |
notification | pptp | state | watchdog | bgp | error | ipsec | open | radius | system | web-proxy | calc |
event | isdn | ospf | raw | telephony | wireless ; default: info ) - specifies log group or log message
type
action ( disk | echo | memory | remote ; default: memory ) - specifies one of the system actions or
user specified action listed in /system logging action
prefix ( name ) - local log prefix
Example
To logg messages that are generated by firewall by saving them in local buffer
[admin@MikroTik] system logging> add topics=firewall action=memory
[admin@MikroTik] system logging> print
# TOPICS ACTION PREFIX
0 info memory
1 error memory
2 warning memory
3 critical echo
4 firewall memory
[admin@MikroTik] system logging>
Actions
Home menu level: /system logging action
disk-lines ( integer ; default: 100 ) - Used when target is set to type disk. Specifies the number of
records in log file
disk-stop-on-full ( yes | no ; default: no ) - Used when target is set to type disk. Specifies whether
to stop to save log messages on disk after the specified disk-lines number is reached
email-to ( name ) - Used when target is set to type email, sets email address logs are sent to
memory-lines ( integer ; default: 100 ) - Used when target is set to type memory. Specifies the
number of records in local buffer.
memory-stop-on-full ( yes | no ; default: no ) - Used when target is set to type memory. Specifies
whether to stop to save log messages in local buffer after the specified memory-lines number is
reached
name ( name ) - name of an action
Page 412 of 695


remember ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - Used when target is set to type echo. Specifies whether to
keep log messages, which have not yet been displayed in console
remote ( IP address | port | IP address | integer : 0 ..65535 ; default: 0.0.0.0:514 ) - Used when
target is set to type remote. Remote log server's IP address and UDP port
target ( disk | echo | email | memory | remote ; default: memory ) - Specifies how to treat logs
• disk - logs are saved to hard drive
• echo - logs are displayed in console
• email - logs are sent by email
• memory - logs are saved to local buffer. They can be viewed using the '/log print' command
• remote - logs are sent to remote host
Notes
You cannot delete or rename default actions.
Example
To add a new action with name short, that will save logs in local buffer, if number of records in
buffer are less than 50:
[admin@MikroTik] system logging action> add name=short \

\... target=memory memory-lines=50 memory-stop-on-full=yes
[admin@MikroTik] system logging action> print
# FACILITY LOCAL REMOTE PREFIX REMOTE-ADDRESS REMOTE-PORT ECHO
Flags: * - default
# NAME TARGET REMOTE
0 * memory memory
1 * disk disk
2 * echo echo
3 * remote remote 0.0.0.0:514
4 short memory
[admin@MikroTik] system logging action>
Log Messages
Home menu level: /log
Description
Displays locally stored log messages
message ( text ) - message text
time ( text ) - date and time of the event
Command Description
print - shows log messages
• buffer - prints log messages that were saved in specified local buffer
Page 413 of 695


• follow - monitor system logs
• without-paging - prints logs without paging
• file - saves the log information on local ftp server with a specified file name
Example
To view the local logs:
[admin@MikroTik] > log print
TIME MESSAGE
dec/24/2003 08:20:36 log configuration changed by admin
-- [Q quit|D dump]
To monitor the system log:

[admin@MikroTik] > log print follow
TIME MESSAGE
dec/24/2003 08:35:56 system started
dec/24/2003 08:35:57 isdn-out1: initializing...
dec/24/2003 08:35:57 isdn-out1: dialing...
dec/24/2003 08:35:58 Prism firmware loading: OK
dec/24/2003 08:37:48 user admin logged in from 10.1.0.60 via telnet
-- Ctrl-C to quit. New entries will appear at bottom.
Page 414 of 695


Bandwidth Control
Document revision 1.5 (Fri Feb 03 15:15:03 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Queue Types
Description
Interface Default Queues
Description
Example
Simple Queues
Description
Queue Trees
Description
Example of emulating a 128Kibps/64Kibps Line
Queue Tree Example With Masquerading
Equal bandwidth sharing among users
General Information
Summary
Bandwidth Control is a set of mechanisms that control data rate allocation, delay variability, timely
delivery, and delivery reliability. The MikroTik RouterOS supports the following queuing
disciplines:
• PFIFO - Packets First-In First-Out
• BFIFO - Bytes First-In First-Out
• SFQ - Stochastic Fairness Queuing
• RED - Random Early Detect
• PCQ - Per Connection Queue
• HTB - Hierarchical Token Bucket
Specifications
Page 415 of 695


License required: level1 (limited to 1 queue) , level3
Home menu level: /queue
Hardware usage: significant
Related Documents

• Mangle
Description
Quality of Service (QoS) means that the router should prioritize and shape network traffic. QoS is
not so much about limiting, it is more about providing quality. Below are listed the some features of
MikroTik RouterOS Bandwidth Control mechanism:
• limit data rate for certain IP adresses, subnets, protocols, ports, and other parameters
• limit peer-to-peer traffic
• prioritize some packet flows over others
• use queue bursts for faster WEB browsing
• apply queues on fixed time intervals
• share available traffic among users equally, or depending on the load of the channel
The queuing is applied on packets leaving the router through a real interface (i.e., the queues are
applied on the outgoing interface, regarding the traffic flow), or any of the 3 additional virtual
interfaces (global-in, global-out, global-total).
The QoS is performed by means of dropping packets. In case of TCP protocol, the dropped packets
will be resent so there is no need to worry that with shaping we lose some TCP information.
The main terms used to describe the level of QoS for network applications, are:
• queuing discipline (qdisc) - an algorithm that holds and maintains a queue of packets. It
specifies the order of the outgoing packets (it means that queuing discipline can reorder
packets) and which packets to drop if there is no space for them
• CIR (Committed Information Rate) - the guaranteed data rate. It means that traffic rate, not
exceeding this value should always be delivered
• MIR (Maximal Information Rate) - the maximal data rate router will provide
• Priority - the order of importance in what traffic will be processed. You can give priority to
some traffic in order it to be handeled before some other traffic
• Contention Ratio - the ratio to which the defined data rate is shared among users (when data
rate is allocated to a number of subscribers). It is the number of subscribers that have a single
speed limitation, applied to all of them together. For example, the contention ratio of 1:4 means
that the allocated data rate may be shared between no more than 4 users
Before sending data over an interface, it is processed with a queuing discipline. By default, queuing
Page 416 of 695


disciplines are set under /queue interface for each physical interface (there is no default queuing
discipline for virtual interfaces). Once we add a queue (in /queue tree) to a physical interface, the
interface default queue, defined in /queue interface, for that particular interface gets ignored. It
means - when a packet does not match any filter, it is sent through the interface with the highest
priority.
Scheduler and Shaper qdiscs

We can classify queuing disciplines by their influence to packet flow:
• schedulers - queuing disciplines only reschedule packets regarding their algorithm and drop
packets which 'do not fit in the queue'. Scheduler queuing disciplines are: PFIFO, BFIFO, SFQ,
PCQ, RED
• shapers - queuing disciplines that also perform the limitation. Shapers are PCQ and HTB
Virtual Interfaces
There are 3 virtual interfaces in RouterOS, in addition to real interfaces:
• global-in - represents all the input interfaces in general (INGRESS queue). Please note that
queues attached to global-in apply to traffic that is received by the router, before the packet
filtering. global-in queueing is executed just after mangle and dst-nat
• global-out - represents all the output interfaces in general. Queues attached to it apply before
the ones attached to a specific interface
• global-total - represents a virtual interface through which all the data, going through the router,
is passing. When attaching a qdisc to global-total, the limitation is done in both directions. For
example, if we set a total-max-limit to 256000, we will get upload+download=256kbps
(maximum)
Introduction to HTB
HTB (Hierarchical Token Bucket) is a classful queuing discipline that is useful for applying
different handling for different kinds of traffic. Generally, we can set only one queue for an
interface, but in RouterOS queues are attached to the main Hierarchical Token Bucket (HTB) and
thus have some properties derived from that parent queue. For example, we can set a maximum data
rate for a workgroup and then distribute that amount of traffic between the members of that
workgroup.
HTB qdisc in detail:
Page 417 of 695


HTB terms:
• queuing discipline (qdisc) - an algorithm that holds and maintains a queue of packets. It
specifies the order of the outgoing packets (it means that queuing discipline can reorder
packets). Qdisc also decides which packets to drop if there is no space for them
• filter - a procedure that classifies packets. The filter is responsible for classifying packets so
that they are put in the corresponding qdiscs
• level - position of a class in the hierarchy
• inner class - a class that has one or more child-classes attached to it. Inner classes do not store
any packets, but they do traffic shaping. The class also does not have its own priority
• leaf class - a class that has a parent but does not have any child-classes. Leaf classes are always
located at level 0 of the hierarchy. Each leaf class has a qdisc, attached to it
• self feed - an object that represents the exit for the packets from all the classes active at its level
of the hierarchy. It consists of 8 self slots
• self slot - an element of a self feed that corresponds to each particular priority. All classes,
active at the same level, of one priority are attached to one self slot that they are using to send
packets out through
• active class (at a particular level) - a class that is attached to a self slot at the given level
• inner feed - similar to self feed object, which consists of inner self slots, present on each inner
class
• inner feed slot - similar to self slot. Each inner feed consists of inner slots which represent a
priority
Each class has a parent and may have one or more children. Classes that do not have children, are
put at level 0, where queues are maintained, and are called 'leaf classes'
Each class in the hierarchy can prioritize and shape traffic. There are 2 main parameters in
RouterOS which refer to shaping and one - to prioritizing:
Page 418 of 695


• limit-at - data rate that is guaranteed to a class (CIR)
• max-limit - maximal data rate that is allowed for a class to reach (MIR)
• priority - order in which classes are served at the same level (8 is the lowest priority, 1 is the
highest)
Each HTB class can be in one of 3 states, depending on data rate that it consumes:
• green - a class the actual rate of which is equal or less than limit-at. At this state, the class is
attached to self slot at the corresponding priority at its level, and is allowed to satisfy its limit-at
limitation regardless of what limitations its parents have. For example, if we have a leaf class
with limit-at=512000 and its parent has max-limit=limit-at=128000, the class will get its
512kbps!
• yellow - a class the actual rate of which is greater than limit-at and equal or less than max-limit.
At this state, the class is attached to the inner slot of the corresponding priority of its parent's
inner feed, which, in turn, may be attached to either its parent's inner slot of the same priority
(in case the parent is also yellow), or to its own level self slot of the same priority (in case the
parent is green). Upon the transition to this state, the class 'disconnects' from self feed of its
level, and 'connects' to its parent's inner feed
• red - a class the actual rate of which exceeds max-limit. This class cannot borrow rate from its
parent class
Priorities
When a leaf class wants to send some traffic (as they are the only classes that hold packets), HTB
checks its priority. It will begin with the highest priority and the lowest level and proceed until the
lowest priority at highest level is reached:
As you can see from the picture, leaf-classes which are at the green state, will always have a higher
priority than those which are borrowing because their priority is at a lower level (level0). In this
picture, Leaf1 will be served only after Leaf2, although it has a higher priority (7) than Leaf1 (8).
In case of equal priorities and equal states, HTB serves these classes, using round robin algorithm.
HTB Examples
Page 419 of 695


Here are some examples on how the HTB works.
Imagine the following scenario - we have 3 different kinds of traffic, marked in /ip firewall mangle
(packet_mark1, packet_mark2 and packet_mark3), and now have bulit a HTB hierarchy:
Now let us describe some scenarios, using this HTB hierarchy.
1. Imagine a situation when there have packets arrived at Leaf1 and Leaf2. Because of this, Leaf1
attaches itself to this level's (Level 0) self slot with priority=8 and Leaf2 attaches to self slot
with priority=7. Leaf3 has nothing to send, so it does nothing.
This is a simple situation: there are active classes (Leaf1 and Leaf2) at Level 0, and as they
both are in green state, they are processed in order of their priorities - at first, we serve Leaf2,
then Leaf1.
2. Now assume that Leaf2 has to send more than 256kbps, for this reason, it attaches itself to its
parent's (ClassB) inner feed, which recursively attaches itself to Level1 self slot at priority=7.
Leaf1 continues to be at green state - it has to send packets, but not faster than 1Mbps. Leaf3
still has nothing to send.
Page 420 of 695


This is a very interesting situation because Leaf1 gets a higher priority than Leaf2 (when it is
in the green state), although we have configured it for a lower priority (8) than Leaf2. It is
because Leaf2 has disconnected itself from self feed at Level 0 and now is borrowing from its
parent (ClassB) which has attached to self feed at Level 1. And because of this, the priority of
Leaf2 'has traveled to Level1'. Remember that at first, we serve those classes which are at the
lowest level with the highest priority, then continuing with the next level, and so on.
3. Consider that Leaf1 has reached its max-limit and changed its state to red, and Leaf2 now uses
more than 1Mbps (and less than 2Mbps), so its parent ClassB has to borrow from ClassA and
becomes yellow. Leaf3 still has no packets to send.
Page 421 of 695


This scenario shows that Leaf1 has reached its max-limit, and cannot even borrow from its
parent (ClassA). Leaf2 has hierarchical reached Level2 and borrows from ClassB which
recursively must borrow from ClassA because it has not enough rate available. As Leaf3 has
no packets to send, the only one class who sends them, is Leaf2.
4. Assume that Leaf2 is borrowing from ClassB, ClassB from ClassA, but ClassA reaches its
max-limit (2Mbps).
Page 422 of 695


In this situation Leaf2 is in yellow state, but it cannot borrow (as Class B cannot borrow from
Class A).
5. Finally, let's see what happens, if Leaf1, Leaf2, Leaf3 and ClassB are in the yellow state, and
ClassA is green.
Page 423 of 695


Leaf1 borrows from ClassA, Leaf2 and Leaf3 from ClassB, and ClassB also borrows from
ClassA. Now all the priorities have 'moved' to Level2. So Leaf2 is on the highest priority and
is served at first. As Leaf1 and Leaf3 are at the same priority (8) on the same level (2), they are
served, using the round robin algorithm.
Bursts
Bursts are used to allow higher data rates for a short period of time. Every 1/16 part of the
burst-time, the router calculates the average data rate of each class over the last burst-time
seconds. If this average data rate is less than burst-threshold, burst is enabled and the actual data
rate reaches burst-limit bps, otherwise the actual data rate falls to max-limit or limit-at.
Let us consider that we have a setup, where max-limit=256000, burst-time=8,
burst-threshold=192000 and burst-limit=512000. When a user is starting to download a file via
HTTP, we can observe such a situation:
Page 424 of 695


At the beginning the average data rate over the last 8 seconds is 0bps because before applying the
queue rule no traffic was passed, using this rule. Since this average data rate is less than
burst-threshold (192kbps), burst is allowed. After the first second, the average data rate is
(0+0+0+0+0+0+0+512)/8=64kbps, which is under burst-threshold. After the second second,
average data rate is (0+0+0+0+0+0+512+512)/8=128kbps. After the third second comes the
breakpoint when the average data rate becomes larger than burst-threshold. At this moment burst
is disabled and the current data rate falls down to max-limit (256kbps).
HTB in RouterOS
There are 4 HTB trees maintained by RouterOS:
• global-in
• global-total
• global-out
• interface queue
When adding a simple queue, it creates 3 HTB classes (in global-in, global-total and global-out),
but it does not add any classes in interface queue.
Queue tree is more flexible - you can add it to any of these HTB's.
When packet travels through the router, it passesall 4 HTB trees - global-in, global-total, global-out
and interface queue. If it is directed to the router, it passes global-in and global-total HTB queues. If
packets are sent from the router, they are traversing global-total, global-out and interface queues
• http://linux-ip.net/articles/Traffic-Control-HOWTO/overview.html
• http://luxik.cdi.cz/~devik/qos/htb/
Page 425 of 695


• http://www.docum.org/docum.org/docs/
Queue Types
Home menu level: /queue type
Description
In this submenu you can create your custom queue types. Afterwards, you will be able to use them
in /queue tree, /queue simple or /queue interface.
PFIFO and BFIFO

These queuing disciplines are based on the FIFO algorithm (First-In First-Out). The difference
between PFIFO and BFIFO is that one is measured in packets and the other one in bytes. There is
only one parameter called pfifo-limit (bfifo-limit) which defines how much data a FIFO queue can
hold. Every packet that cannot be enqueued (if the queue is full), is dropped. Large queue sizes can
increase latency.
Use FIFO queuing disciplines if you haven't a congested link
SFQ
Stochastic Fairness Queuing (SFQ) cannot limit traffic at all. Its main idea is to equalize traffic
flows (TCP sessions or UDP streams) when your link is completely full.
The fairness of SFQ is ensured by hashing and round-robin algorithms. Hashing algorithm divides
the session traffic over a limited number of subqueues. After sfq-perturb seconds the hashing
algorithm changes and divides the session traffic to other subqueues. The round-robin algorithm
dequeues pcq-allot bytes from each subqueue in a turn.
Page 426 of 695


The whole SFQ queue can contain 128 packets and there are 1024 subqueues available for these
packets.
Use SFQ for congested links to ensure that some connections do not starve
PCQ
To solve some SFQ imperfectness, Per Connection Queuing (PCQ) was created. It is the only
classless queuing type that can do limitation. It is an improved version of SFQ without its stohastic
nature. PCQ also creates subqueues, regarding the pcq-classifier parameter. Each subqueue has a
data rate limit of pcq-rate and size of pcq-limit packets. The total size of a PCQ queue cannot be
greater than pcq-total-limit packets.
The following example demonstrates the usage of PCQ with packets, classified by their source
address.
If you classify the packets by src-address then all packets with different source IP addresses will be
grouped into different subqueues. Now you can do the limitation or equalization for each subqueue
with the pcq-rate parameter. Perhaps, the most significant part is to decide to which interface
should we attach this queue. If we will attach it to the Local interface, all traffic from the Public
interface will be grouped by src-address (probably it's not what we want), but if we attach it to the
Public interface, all traffic from our clients will be grouped by src-address - so we can easily limit
Page 427 of 695


or equalize upload for clients.
To equalize rate among subqueues, classified by the pcq-classifier, set the pcq-rate to 0!
PCQ can be used to dynamically equalize or shape traffic for multiple users, using little
administration.
RED
Random Early Detection is a queuing mechanism which tries to avoid network congestion by
controlling the average queue size. When the average queue size reaches red-min-threshold, RED
randomly chooses which arriving packet to drop. The probability how many packets will be
dropped increases when the average queue size becomes larger. If the average queue size reaches
red-max-threshold, the packets are dropped. However, there may be cases when the real queue
size (not average) is much greater than red-max-threshold, then all packets which exceed
red-limit are dropped.
Mainly, RED is used on congested links with high data rates. Works well with TCP protocol, but
not so well with UDP.
bfifo-limit ( integer ; default: 15000 ) - maximum number of bytes that the BFIFO queue can hold
kind ( bfifo | pcq | pfifo | red | sfq ) - which queuing discipline to use
• bfifo - Bytes First-In, First-Out
• pcq - Per Connection Queue
• pfifo - Packets First-In, First-Out
• red - Random Early Detection
• sfq - Stohastic Fairness Queuing
name ( name ) - associative name of the queue type
pcq-classifier ( dst-address | dst-port | src-address | src-port ; default: "" ) - a classifier by which
PCQ will group its subqueues. Can be used several classifiers at once, e.g., src-address,src-port will
group all packets with different source address and source-ports into separate subqueues
pcq-limit ( integer ; default: 50 ) - number of packets that can hold a single PCQ sub-queue
pcq-rate ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximal data rate allowed for each PCQ sub-queue. Value 0
means that there is no limitation set
pcq-total-limit ( integer ; default: 2000 ) - number of packets that can hold the whole PCQ queue
Page 428 of 695


pfifo-limit ( integer ) - maximum number of packets that the PFIFO queue can hold
red-avg-packet ( integer ; default: 1000 ) - used by RED for average queue size calculations
red-burst ( integer ) - value in bytes which is used for determining how fast the average queue size
will be influenced by the real queue size. Larger values will slow down the calculation by RED -
longer bursts will be allowed
red-limit ( integer ) - value in bytes. If the real queue size (not average) exceeds this value then all
packets above this value are dropped
red-max-threshold ( integer ) - value in bytes. It is the average queue size at which packet
marking probability is the highest
red-min-threshold ( integer ) - average queue size in bytes. When average RED queue size reaches
this value, packet marking becomes possible
sfq-allot ( integer ; default: 1514 ) - amount of bytes that a subqueue is allowed to send before the
next subqueue gets a turn (amount of bytes which can be sent from a subqueue in a single
round-robin turn)
sfq-perturb ( integer ; default: 5 ) - time in seconds. Specifies how often to change SFQ's hashing
algorithm
Interface Default Queues

Home menu level: /queue interface
Description
In order to send packets over an interface, they have to be enqueued in a queue even if you do not
want to limit traffic at all. Here you can specify the queue type which will be used for transmitting
data.
Note that if other queues are applied for a particular packet, then these settings are not used!
interface ( read-only: name ; default: name of the interface ) - name of the interface
queue ( name ; default: default ) - queue type which will be used for the interface
Example
Set the wireless interface to use wireless-default queue:
[admin@MikroTik] queue interface> set 0 queue=wireless-default
[admin@MikroTik] queue interface> print
# INTERFACE QUEUE
0 wlan1 wireless-default
[admin@MikroTik] queue interface>
Simple Queues
Description
Page 429 of 695


The simpliest way to limit data rate for specific IP addresses and/or subnets, is to use simple
queues.
You can also use simple queues to build advanced QoS applications. They have useful integrated
features:
• Peer-to-peer traffic queuing
• Applying queue rules on chosen time intervals
• Priorities
• Using multiple packet marks from /ip firewall mangle
• Shaping of bidirectional traffic (one limit for the total of upload + download)
burst-limit ( integer | integer ) - maximum data rate which can be reached while the burst is active
in form of in/out (target upload/download)
burst-threshold ( integer | integer ) - used to calculate whether to allow burst. If the average data
rate over the last burst-time seconds is less than burst-threshold, the actual data rate may reach
burst-limit. set in form of in/out (target upload/download)
burst-time ( integer | integer ) - used to calculate average data rate, in form of in/out (target
upload/download)
direction ( none | both | upload | download ) - traffic flow directions, affected by this queue
• none - the queue is effectively inactive
• both - the queue limits both target upload and target download
• upload - the queue limits only target upload, leaving the download rates unlimited
• download - the queue limits only target download, leaving the upload rates unlimited
dst-address ( IP address | netmask ) - destination address to match
dst-netmask ( netmask ) - netmask for dst-address
interface ( text ) - interface, this queue applies to (i.e., the interface the target is connected to)
limit-at ( integer | integer ) - guaranteed data rate to this queue in form of in/out (target
upload/download)
max-limit ( integer | integer ) - data rate which can be reached if there is enough bandwidth
available, in form of in/out (target upload/download)
name ( text ) - descriptive name of the queue
p2p ( any | all-p2p | bit-torrent | blubster | direct-connect | edonkey | fasttrack | gnutella | soulseek |
winmx ) - which type of P2P traffic to match
• all-p2p - match all P2P traffic
• any - match any packet (i.e., do not check this property)
packet-marks ( name ; default: "" ) - packet mark to match from /ip firewall mangle. More packet
marks are separated by a comma (",").
parent ( name ) - name of the parent queue in the hierarchy. Can be only other simple queue
priority ( integer : 1 ..8 ) - priority of the queue. 1 is the highest, 8 - the lowest
Page 430 of 695


queue ( name | name ; default: default/default ) - name of the queue from /queue type in form of
in/out
target-addresses ( IP address | netmask ) - limitation target IP addresses (source addresses). To use
multiple addresses, separate them with comma
time ( time | time | sat | fri | thu | wed | tue | mon | sun ; default: "" ) - limit queue effect to a
specified time period
total-burst-limit ( integer ) - burst limit for global-total queue
total-burst-threshold ( integer ) - burst threshold for global-total queue
total-burst-time ( time ) - burst time for global-total queue
total-limit-at ( integer ) - limit-at for global-total queue (limits cumulative upload + download to
total-limit-at bps)
total-max-limit ( integer ) - max-limit for global-total queue (limits cumulative upload + download
to total-max-limit bps)
total-queue ( name ) - queuing discipline to use for global-total queue
Queue Trees
Home menu level: /queue tree
Description
The queue trees should be used when you want to use sophisticated data rate allocation based on
protocols, ports, groups of IP addresses, etc. At first you have to mark packet flows with a mark
under /ip firewall mangle and then use this mark as an identifier for packet flows in queue trees.
burst-limit ( integer ) - maximum data rate which can be reached while the burst is active
burst-threshold ( integer ) - used to calculate whether to allow burst. If the average data rate over
the last burst-time seconds is less than burst-threshold, the actual data rate may reach burst-limit
burst-time ( time ) - used to calculate average data rate
flow ( text ) - packet flow which is marked in /ip firewall mangle. Current queue parameters apply
only to packets which are marked with this flow mark
limit-at ( integer ) - guaranteed data rate to this queue
max-limit ( integer ) - data rate which can be reached if there is enough bandwidth available
name ( text ) - descriptive name for the queue
parent ( text ) - name of the parent queue. The top-level parents are the available interfaces
(actually, main HTB). Lower level parents can be other queues
priority ( integer : 1 ..8 ) - priority of the queue. 1 is the highest, 8 - the lowest
queue ( text ) - name of the queue type. Types are defined under /queue type. This parameter
applies only to the leaf queues in the tree hierarchy
General Information
Page 431 of 695


Example of emulating a 128Kibps/64Kibps Line
Assume, we want to emulate a 128Kibps download and 64Kibps upload line, connecting IP
network 192.168.0.0/24. The network is served through the Local interface of customer's router.
The basic network setup is in the following diagram:
To solve this situation, we will use simple queues.

IP addresses on MikroTik router:
0 192.168.0.254/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 Local
1 10.5.8.104/24 10.5.8.0 10.5.8.255 Public
And routes:
Page 432 of 695


0 ADC 10.5.8.0/24 Public
1 ADC 192.168.0.0/24 Local
2 A S 0.0.0.0/0 r 10.5.8.1 Public
Add a simple queue rule, which will limit the download traffic to 128Kib/s and upload to 64Kib/s
for clients on the network 192.168.0.0/24, served by the interface Local:
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple> add name=Limit-Local interface=Local \
\... target-address=192.168.0.0/24 max-limit=65536/131072
0 name="Limit-Local" target-addresses=192.168.0.0/24 dst-address=0.0.0.0/0
interface=Local parent=none priority=8 queue=default/default
limit-at=0/0 max-limit=65536/131072 total-queue=default
The max-limit parameter cuts down the maximum available bandwidth. From the clients' point of
view, the value 65536/131072 means that they will get maximum of 131072bps for download and
65536bps for upload. The target-addresses parameter defines the target network (or networks,
separated by a comma) to which the queue rule will be applied.
Now see the traffic load:
[admin@MikroTik] interface> monitor-traffic Local
received-packets-per-second: 7
received-bits-per-second: 68kbps
sent-packets-per-second: 13
sent-bits-per-second: 135kbps
Probably, you want to exclude the server from being limited, if so, add a queue for it without any
limitation (max-limit=0/0 which means no limitation) and move it to the beginning of the list:
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple> add name=Server target-addresses=192.168.0.1/32 \
\... interface=Local
1 name="Server" target-addresses=192.168.0.1/32 dst-address=0.0.0.0/0
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple> mo 1 0
0 name="Server" target-addresses=192.168.0.1/32 dst-address=0.0.0.0/0
Queue Tree Example With Masquerading

In the previous example we dedicated 128Kib/s download and 64Kib/s upload traffic for the local
network. In this example we will guarantee 256Kib/s download (128Kib/s for the server, 64Kib/s
for the Workstation and also 64Kib/s for the Laptop) and 128Kib/s for upload (64/32/32Kib/s,
respectivelly) for local network devices. Additionally, if there is spare bandwidth, share it among
users equally. For example, if we turn off the laptop, share its 64Kib/s download and 32Kib/s
Page 433 of 695


upload to the Server and Workstation.
When using masquerading, you have to mark the outgoing connection with new-connection-mark
and take the mark-connection action. When it is done, you can mark all packets which belong to
this connection with the new-packet-mark and use the mark-packet action.
1. At first, mark the Server's download and upload traffic. With the first rule we will mark the
outgoing connection and with the second one, all packets, which belong to this connection:
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> add src-address=192.168.0.1/32 \
\... action=mark-connection new-connection-mark=server-con chain=prerouting
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> add connection-mark=server-con \
\... action=mark-packet new-packet-mark=server chain=prerouting
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> print
0 chain=prerouting src-address=192.168.0.1 action=mark-connection
new-connection-mark=server-con
1chain=prerouting connection-mark=server-con action=mark-packet
new-packet-mark=server
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle>
2. The same for Laptop and Workstation:

[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> add src-address=192.168.0.2 \
Page 434 of 695


\... action=mark-connection new-connection-mark=lap_works-con chain=prerouting
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> add src-address=192.168.0.3 \
\... action=mark-connection new-connection-mark=lap_works-con chain=prerouting
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> add connection-mark=lap_works-con \
\... action=mark-packet new-packet-mark=lap_work chain=prerouting
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> print
new-connection-mark=server-con
1 chain=prerouting connection-mark=server-con action=mark-packet
new-packet-mark=server
new-connection-mark=lap_works-con
new-connection-mark=lap_works-con
4chain=prerouting connection-mark=lap_works-con action=mark-packet
new-packet-mark=lap_work
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle>
As you can see, we marked connections that belong for Laptop and Workstation with the same
flow.
3. In /queue tree add rules that will limit Server's download and upload:
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree> add name=Server-Download parent=Local \
\... limit-at=131072 packet-mark=server max-limit=262144
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree> add name=Server-Upload parent=Public \
\... limit-at=65536 packet-mark=server max-limit=131072
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree> print
0 name="Server-Download" parent=Local packet-mark=server limit-at=131072
queue=default priority=8 max-limit=262144 burst-limit=0
burst-threshold=0 burst-time=0s
1name="Server-Upload" parent=Public packet-mark=server limit-at=65536
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree>
And similar config for Laptop and Workstation:
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree> add name=Laptop-Wkst-Down parent=Local \
\... packet-mark=lap_work limit-at=65535 max-limit=262144
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree> add name=Laptop-Wkst-Up parent=Public \
\... packet-mark=lap_work limit-at=32768 max-limit=131072
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree> print
0 name="Server-Download" parent=Local packet-mark=server limit-at=131072
1 name="Server-Upload" parent=Public packet-mark=server limit-at=65536
2 name="Laptop-Wkst-Down" parent=Local packet-mark=lap_work limit-at=65535
3name="Laptop-Wkst-Up" parent=Public packet-mark=lap_work limit-at=32768
[admin@MikroTik] queue tree>
Equal bandwidth sharing among users

This example shows how to equally share 10Mibps download and 2Mibps upload among active
Page 435 of 695


users in the network 192.168.0.0/24. If Host A is downloading 2 Mibps, Host B gets 8 Mibps and
vice versa. There might be situations when both hosts want to use maximum bandwidth (10 Mibps),
then they will receive 5 Mibps each, the same goes for upload. This setup is also valid for more than
2 users.
At first, mark all traffic, coming from local network 192.168.0.0/24 with a mark users:
/ip firewall mangle add chain=forward src-address=192.168.0.0/24 \
action=mark-connection new-connection-mark=users-con
/ip firewall mangle add connection-mark=users-con action=mark-packet \
new-packet-mark=users chain=forward
Now we will add 2 new PCQ types. The first, called pcq-download will group all traffic by
destination address. As we will attach this queue type to the Local interface, it will create a
dynamic queue for each destination address (user) which is downloading to the network
192.168.0.0/24. The second type, called pcq-upload will group the traffic by source address. We
will attach this queue to the Public interface so it will make one dynamic queue for each user who
is uploading to Internet from the local network 192.168.0.0/24.
/queue type add name=pcq-download kind=pcq pcq-classifier=dst-address
/queue type add name=pcq-upload kind=pcq pcq-classifier=src-address
Finally, make a queue tree for download traffic:

/queue tree add name=Download parent=Local max-limit=10240000
/queue tree add parent=Download queue=pcq-download packet-mark=users
Page 436 of 695


And for upload traffic:
/queue tree add name=Upload parent=Public max-limit=2048000
/queue tree add parent=Upload queue=pcq-upload packet-mark=users
Note! If your ISP cannot guarantee you a fixed amount of traffic, you can use just one queue for
upload and one for download, attached directly to the interface:
/queue tree add parent=Local queue=pcq-download packet-mark=users
/queue tree add parent=Public queue=pcq-upload packet-mark=users
Page 437 of 695


Filter
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Firewall Filter
Description
Notes
Filter Applications
Protect your RouterOS router
Protecting the Customer's Network
General Information
Summary
The firewall implements packet filtering and thereby provides security functions that are used to
manage data flow to, from and through the router. Along with the Network Address Translation it
serve as a tool for preventing unauthorized access to directly attached networks and the router itself
as well as a filter for outgoing traffic.
Quick Setup Guide
• To add a firewall rule which drops all TCP packets that are destined to port 135 and going
through the router, use the following command:
/ip firewall filter add chain=forward dst-port=135 protocol=tcp action=drop
• To deny acces to the router via Telnet (protocol TCP, port 23), type the following command:
/ip firewall filter add chain=input protocol=tcp dst-port=23 action=drop
• To only allow not more than 5 simultaneous connections from each of the clients, do the
following:
/ip firewall filter add chain=forward protocol=tcp tcp-flags=syn connection-limit=6,32
action=drop
Specifications
License required: level1 (P2P filters limited to 1) , level3
Page 438 of 695


Home menu level: /ip firewall filter
Standards and Technologies: IP , RFC2113
Hardware usage: Increases with filtering rules count
Related Documents

• NAT
• Mangle
• Packet Flow
Firewall Filter
Home menu level: /ip firewall filter
Description
Network firewalls keep outside threats away from sensitive data available inside the network.
Whenever different networks are joined together, there is always a threat that someone from outside
of your network will break into your LAN. Such break-ins may result in private data being stolen
and distributed, valuable data being altered or destroyed, or entire hard drives being erased.
Firewalls are used as a means of preventing or minimizing the security risks inherent in connecting
to other networks. Properly configured firewall plays a key role in efficient and secure network
infrastrure deployment.
MikroTik RouterOS has very powerful firewall implementation with features including:
• stateful packet filtering
• peer-to-peer protocols filtering
• traffic classification by:
• source MAC address
• IP addresses (network or list) and address types (broadcast, local, multicast, unicast)
• port or port range
• IP protocols
• protocol options (ICMP type and code fields, TCP flags, IP options and MSS)
• interface the packet arrived from or left through
• internal flow and connection marks
• ToS (DSCP) byte
• packet content
• rate at which packets arrive and sequence numbers
• packet size
Page 439 of 695


• packet arrival time
• and much more!
General Filtering Principles

The firewall operates by means of firewall rules. A rule is a definitive form expression that tells the
router what to do with a particular IP packet. Each rule consists of two parts that are the matcher
which matches traffic flow against given conditions and the action which defines what to do with
the mathched packets. Rules are organized in chains for better management.
The filter facility has three default chains: input, forward and output that are responsible for
traffic coming from, throurh and to the router, respectively. New user-defined chains can be added,
as necessary. Since these chains have no default traffic to match, rules with action=jump and
relevant jump-target should be added to one or more of the three default chains.
Filter Chains
As mentioned before, the firewall filtering rules are grouped together in chains. It allows a packet to
be matched against one common criterion in one chain, and then passed over for processing against
some other common criteria to another chain. For example a packet should be matched against the
IP address:port pair. Of course, it could be achieved by adding as many rules with IP
address:port match as required to the forward chain, but a better way could be to add one rule that
matches traffic from a particular IP address, e.g.: /ip firewall filter add
src-address=1.1.1.2/32 jump-target="mychain" and in case of successfull match passes control
over the IP packet to some other chain, id est mychain in this example. Then rules that perform
matching against separate ports can be added to mychain chain without specifying the IP addresses.
• input - used to process packets entering the router through one of the interfaces with the
destination IP address which is one of the router's addresses. Packets passing through the router
are not processed against the rules of the input chain
• forward - used to process packets passing through the router
• output - used to process packets originated from the router and leaving it through one of the
interfaces. Packets passing through the router are not processed against the rules of the output
chain
There are three predefined chains, which cannot be deleted:
When processing a chain, rules are taken from the chain in the order they are listed there from top to
bottom. If a packet matches the criteria of the rule, then the specified action is performed on it, and
no more rules are processed in that chain (the exception is the passthrough action). If a packet has
not matched any rule within the chain, then it is accepted.
action ( accept | add-dst-to-address-list | add-src-to-address-list | drop | jump | log | passthrough |
reject | return | tarpit ; default: accept ) - action to undertake if the packet matches the rule
• accept - accept the packet. No action is taken, i.e. the packet is passed through and no more
rules are applied to it
Page 440 of 695


• add-dst-to-address-list - adds destination address of an IP packet to the address list specified
by address-list parameter
• add-src-to-address-list - adds source address of an IP packet to the address list specified by
address-list parameter
• jump - jump to the chain specified by the value of the jump-target parameter
• log - each match with this action will add a message to the system log
• passthrough - ignores this rule and goes on to the next one
• reject - reject the packet and send an ICMP reject message
• return - passes control back to the chain from where the jump took place
• tarpit - captures and holds incoming TCP connections (replies with SYN/ACK to the inbound
TCP SYN packet)
address-list ( name ) - specifies the name of the address list to collect IP addresses from rules
having action=add-dst-to-address-list or action=add-src-to-address-list actions. These address lists
could be later used for packet matching
address-list-timeout ( time ; default: 00:00:00 ) - time interval after which the address will be
removed from the address list specified by address-list parameter. Used in conjunction with
add-dst-to-address-list or add-src-to-address-list actions
• 00:00:00 - leave the address in the address list forever
chain ( forward | input | output | name ) - specifies the chain to put a particular rule into. As the
different traffic is passed through different chains, always be careful in choosing the right chain for
a new rule. If the input does not match the name of an already defined chain, a new chain will be
created
comment ( text ) - a descriptive comment for the rule. A comment can be used to identify rules
form scripts
connection-bytes ( integer | integer ) - matches packets only if a given amount of bytes has been
transfered through the particular connection
• 0 - means infinity, exempli gratia: connection-bytes=2000000-0 means that the rule matches if
more than 2MB has been transfered through the relevant connection
connection-limit ( integer | netmask ) - restrict connection limit per address or address block
connection-mark ( name ) - matches packets marked via mangle facility with particular connection
mark
connection-state ( estabilished | invalid | new | related ) - interprets the connection tracking
analysis data for a particular packet
• estabilished - a packet which belongs to an existing connection, exempli gratia a reply packet
or a packet which belongs to already replied connection
• invalid - a packet which could not be identified for some reason. This includes out of memory
condition and ICMP errors which do not correspond to any known connection. It is generally
advised to drop these packets
• new - a packet which begins a new TCP connection
• related - a packet which is related to, but not part of an existing connection, such as ICMP
errors or a packet which begins FTP data connection (the later requires enabled FTP connection
tracking helper under /ip firewall service-port)
Page 441 of 695


connection-type ( ftp | gre | h323 | irc | mms | pptp | quake3 | tftp ) - matches packets from related
connections based on information from their connection tracking helpers. A relevant connection
helper must be enabled under /ip firewall service-port
content ( text ) - the text packets should contain in order to match the rule
dst-address ( IP address | netmask | IP address | IP address ) - specifies the address range an IP
packet is destined to. Note that console converts entered address/netmask value to a valid network
address, i.e.:1.1.1.1/24 is converted to 1.1.1.0/24
dst-address-list ( name ) - matches destination address of a packet against user-defined address list
dst-address-type ( unicast | local | broadcast | multicast ) - matches destination address type of the
IP packet, one of the:
• unicast - IP addresses used for one point to another point transmission. There is only one
sender and one receiver in this case
• local - matches addresses assigned to router's interfaces
• broadcast - the IP packet is sent from one point to all other points in the IP subnetwork
• multicast - this type of IP addressing is responsible for transmission from one or more points to
a set of other points
dst-limit ( integer | time | integer | dst-address | dst-port | src-address | time ) - limits the packet per
second (pps) rate on a per destination IP or per destination port base. As opposed to the limit match,
every destination IP address / destination port has it's own limit. The options are as follows (in order
of appearance):
by Time option
• Mode - the classifier(-s) for packet rate limiting
• Expire - specifies interval after which recorded IP addresses / ports will be deleted
dst-port ( integer : 0 ..65535 | integer : 0 ..65535 ) - destination port number or range
hotspot ( multiple choice: from-client | auth | local-dst | http ) - matches packets received from
clients against various Hot-Spot. All values can be negated
• from-client - true, if a packet comes from HotSpot client
• auth - true, if a packet comes from authenticted client
• local-dst - true, if a packet has local destination IP address
• hotspot - true, if it is a TCP packet from client and either the transparent proxy on port 80 is
enabled or the client has a proxy address configured and this address is equal to the address:port
pair of the IP packet
icmp-options ( integer | integer ) - matches ICMP Type:Code fields
in-interface ( name ) - interface the packet has entered the router through
ipv4-options ( any | loose-source-routing | no-record-route | no-router-alert | no-source-routing |
no-timestamp | none | record-route | router-alert | strict-source-routing | timestamp ) - match ipv4
header options
• any - match packet with at least one of the ipv4 options
• loose-source-routing - match packets with loose source routing option. This option is used to
Page 442 of 695


route the internet datagram based on information supplied by the source
• no-record-route - match packets with no record route option. This option is used to route the
internet datagram based on information supplied by the source
• no-router-alert - match packets with no router alter option
• no-source-routing - match packets with no source routing option
• no-timestamp - match packets with no timestamp option
• record-route - match packets with record route option
• router-alert - match packets with router alter option
• strict-source-routing - match packets with strict source routing option
• timestamp - match packets with timestamp
jump-target ( forward | input | output | name ) - name of the target chain to jump to, if the
action=jump is used
by Time option
log-prefix ( text ) - all messages written to logs will contain the prefix specified herein. Used in
conjunction with action=log
nth ( integer | integer : 0 ..15 | integer ) - match a particular Nth packet received by the rule. One of
16 available counters can be used to count packets
• Every - match every Every+1th packet. For example, if Every=1 then the rule matches every
2nd packet
• Counter - specifies which counter to use. A counter increments each time the rule containing
nth match matches
• Packet - match on the given packet number. The value by obvious reasons must be between 0
and Every. If this option is used for a given counter, then there must be at least Every+1 rules
with this option, covering all values between 0 and Every inclusively.
out-interface ( name ) - interface the packet will leave the router through
p2p ( all-p2p | bit-torrent | blubster | direct-connect | edonkey | fasttrack | gnutella | soulseek | warez
| winmx ) - matches packets from various peer-to-peer (P2P) protocols
packet-mark ( text ) - matches packets marked via mangle facility with particular packet mark
packet-size ( integer : 0 ..65535 | integer : 0 ..65535 ) - matches packet of the specified size or size
range in bytes
• Min - specifies lower boundary of the size range or a standalone value
• Max - specifies upper boundary of the size range
phys-in-interface ( name ) - matches the bridge port physical input device added to a bridge
device. It is only useful if the packet has arrived through the bridge
phys-out-interface ( name ) - matches the bridge port physical output device added to a bridge
device. It is only useful if the packet will leave the router through the bridge
protocol ( ddp | egp | encap | ggp | gre | hmp | icmp | idrp-cmtp | igmp | ipencap | ipip | ipsec-ah |
Page 443 of 695


ipsec-esp | iso-tp4 | ospf | pup | rdp | rspf | st | tcp | udp | vmtp | xns-idp | xtp | integer ) - matches
particular IP protocol specified by protocol name or number. You should specify this setting if you
want to specify ports
psd ( integer | time | integer | integer ) - attempts to detect TCP and UDP scans. It is advised to
assign lower weight to ports with high numbers to reduce the frequency of false positives, such as
from passive mode FTP transfers
• WeightThreshold - total weight of the latest TCP/UDP packets with different destination ports
coming from the same host to be treated as port scan sequence
• DelayThreshold - delay for the packets with different destination ports coming from the same
host to be treated as possible port scan subsequence
• LowPortWeight - weight of the packets with privileged (<=1024) destination port
• HighPortWeight - weight of the packet with non-priviliged destination port
random ( integer : 1 ..99 ) - matches packets randomly with given propability
reject-with ( icmp-admin-prohibited | icmp-echo-reply | icmp-host-prohibited |
icmp-host-unreachable | icmp-net-prohibited | icmp-network-unreachable | icmp-port-unreachable |
icmp-protocol-unreachable | tcp-reset | integer ) - alters the reply packet of reject action
routing-mark ( name ) - matches packets marked by mangle facility with particular routing mark
src-address ( IP address | netmask | IP address | IP address ) - specifies the address range an IP
packet is originated from. Note that console converts entered address/netmask value to a valid
network address, i.e.:1.1.1.1/24 is converted to 1.1.1.0/24
src-address-list ( name ) - matches source address of a packet against user-defined address list
src-address-type ( unicast | local | broadcast | multicast ) - matches source address type of the IP
packet, one of the:
src-mac-address ( MAC address ) - source MAC address
src-port ( integer : 0 ..65535 | integer : 0 ..65535 ) - source port number or range
tcp-flags ( ack | cwr | ece | fin | psh | rst | syn | urg ) - tcp flags to match
• ack - acknowledging data
• cwr - congestion window reduced
• ece - ECN-echo flag (explicit congestion notification)
• fin - close connection
• psh - push function
• rst - drop connection
• syn - new connection
• urg - urgent data
tcp-mss ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - matches TCP MSS value of an IP packet
Page 444 of 695


time ( time | time | sat | fri | thu | wed | tue | mon | sun ) - allows to create filter based on the packets'
arrival time and date or, for locally generated packets, departure time and date
tos ( max-reliability | max-throughput | min-cost | min-delay | normal ) - specifies a match for the
value of Type of Service (ToS) field of an IP header
• max-reliability - maximize reliability (ToS=4)
• max-throughput - maximize throughput (ToS=8)
• min-cost - minimize monetary cost (ToS=2)
• min-delay - minimize delay (ToS=16)
• normal - normal service (ToS=0)
Notes
Because the NAT rules are applied first, it is important to hold this in mind when setting up firewall
rules, since the original packets might be already modified by the NAT
Filter Applications
Protect your RouterOS router

To protect your router, you should not only change admin's password but also set up packet
filtering. All packets with destination to the router are processed against the ip firewall input chain.
Note, that the input chain does not affect packets which are being transferred through the router.
/ ip firewall filter
add chain=input connection-state=invalid action=drop \
comment="Drop Invalid connections"
add chain=input connection-state=established action=accept \
comment="Allow Established connections"
add chain=input protocol=udp action=accept \
comment="Allow UDP"
add chain=input protocol=icmp action=accept \
comment="Allow ICMP"
add chain=input src-address=192.168.0.0/24 action=accept \
comment="Allow access to router from known network"
add chain=input action=drop comment="Drop anything else"
Protecting the Customer's Network

To protect the customer's network, we should check all traffic which goes through router and block
unwanted. For icmp, tcp, udp traffic we will create chains, where will be droped all unwanted
packets:
/ip firewall filter

add chain=forward protocol=tcp connection-state=invalid \
action=drop comment="drop invalid connections"
add chain=forward connection-state=established action=accept \
comment="allow already established connections"
add chain=forward connection-state=related action=accept \
comment="allow related connections"
Block IP addreses called "bogons":
Page 445 of 695


add chain=forward src-address=0.0.0.0/8 action=drop
add chain=forward dst-address=0.0.0.0/8 action=drop
Make jumps to new chains:
add chain=forward protocol=tcp action=jump jump-target=tcp

add chain=forward protocol=udp action=jump jump-target=udp
add chain=forward protocol=icmp action=jump jump-target=icmp
Create tcp chain and deny some tcp ports in it:
add chain=tcp protocol=tcp dst-port=69 action=drop \

comment="deny TFTP"
comment="deny RPC portmapper"
comment="deny RPC portmapper"
add chain=tcp protocol=tcp dst-port=137-139 action=drop \
comment="deny NBT"
comment="deny cifs"
add chain=tcp protocol=tcp dst-port=2049 action=drop comment="deny NFS"
add chain=tcp protocol=tcp dst-port=12345-12346 action=drop comment="deny NetBus"
add chain=tcp protocol=tcp dst-port=20034 action=drop comment="deny NetBus"
add chain=tcp protocol=tcp dst-port=3133 action=drop comment="deny BackOriffice"
add chain=tcp protocol=tcp dst-port=67-68 action=drop comment="deny DHCP"
Deny udp ports in udp chain:
add chain=udp protocol=udp dst-port=69 action=drop comment="deny TFTP"

add chain=udp protocol=udp dst-port=111 action=drop comment="deny PRC portmapper"
add chain=udp protocol=udp dst-port=135 action=drop comment="deny PRC portmapper"
add chain=udp protocol=udp dst-port=137-139 action=drop comment="deny NBT"
add chain=udp protocol=udp dst-port=2049 action=drop comment="deny NFS"
add chain=udp protocol=udp dst-port=3133 action=drop comment="deny BackOriffice"
Allow only needed icmp codes in icmp chain:
add chain=icmp protocol=icmp icmp-options=0:0 action=accept \

comment="drop invalid connections"
comment="allow established connections"
comment="allow already established connections"
comment="allow source quench"
comment="allow echo request"
comment="allow time exceed"
comment="allow parameter bad"
add chain=icmp action=drop comment="deny all other types"
Page 446 of 695


Address Lists
Document revision 2.7 (Mon May 02 10:18:10 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Address Lists
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
Firewall address lists allow to create a list of IP addresses to be used for packet matching.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip firewall address-list
Standards and Technologies: IP
Related Documents

••
• NAT
• Filter
• Packet Flow
• Packet Flow
Address Lists
Description
Firewall address lists allow user to create lists of IP addresses grouped together. Firewall filter,
mangle and NAT facilities can use address lists to match packets against them.
Page 447 of 695


The address list records could be updated dynamically via the action=add-src-to-address-list or
action=add-dst-to-address-list items found in NAT mangle and filter facilities.
list ( name ) - specify the name of the address list to add IP address to
address ( IP address | netmask | IP address | IP address ) - specify the IP address or range to be
added to the address list. Note that console converts entered address/netmask value to a valid
Example
The following example creates an address list of people thet are connecting to port 23 (telnet) on the
router and drops all further traffic from them. Additionaly, the address list will contain one static
entry of address=192.0.34.166/32 (www.example.com):
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall address-list add list=drop_traffic
address=192.0.34.166/32
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall address-list print
Flags: X - disabled, D - dynamic
# LIST ADDRESS
0 drop_traffic 192.0.34.166
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall mangle add chain=prerouting protocol=tcp dst-port=23 \
\... action=add-src-to-address-list address-list=drop_traffic
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall filter add action=drop chain=input
src-address-list=drop_traffic
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall address-list print
# LIST ADDRESS
0 drop_traffic 192.0.34.166
1 D drop_traffic 1.1.1.1
2 D drop_traffic 10.5.11.8
[admin@MikroTik] >
As seen in the output of the last print command, two new dynamic entries appeared in the address
list. Hosts with these IP addresses tried to initialize a telnet session to the router.
Page 448 of 695


Mangle
Document revision 3 (Fri Nov 04 19:22:14 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Mangle
Description
Notes
Description
Peer-to-Peer Traffic Marking
Mark by MAC address
Change MSS
General Information
Summary
The mangle facility allows to mark IP packets with special marks. These marks are used by various
other router facilities to identify the packets. Additionaly, the mangle facility is used to modify
some fields in the IP header, like TOS (DSCP) and TTL fields.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip firewall mangle
Hardware usage: Increases with count of mangle rules
Related Documents

• NAT
• Filter
• Packet Flow
Page 449 of 695


Mangle
Home menu level: /ip firewall mangle
Description
Mangle is a kind of 'marker' that marks packets for future processing with special marks. Many
other facilities in RouterOS make use of these marks, e.g. queue trees and NAT. They identify a
packet based on its mark and process it accordingly. The mangle marks exist only within the router,
they are not transmitted across the network.
action ( accept | add-dst-to-address-list | add-src-to-address-list | change-mss | change-tos |
change-ttl | jump | log | mark-connection | mark-packet | mark-routing | passthrough | return |
strip-ipv4-options ; default: accept ) - action to undertake if the packet matches the rule
• accept - accept the packet. No action, i.e., the packet is passed through and no more rules are
applied to it
• add-dst-to-address-list - add destination address of an IP packet to the address list specified by
• add-src-to-address-list - add source address of an IP packet to the address list specified by
• change-mss - change Maximum Segment Size field value of the packet to a value specified by
the new-mss parameter
• change-tos - change Type of Service field value of the packet to a value specified by the
new-tos parameter
• change-ttl - change Time to Live field value of the packet to a value specified by the new-ttl
parameter
• mark-connection - place a mark specified by the new-connection-mark parameter on the entire
connection that matches the rule
• mark-packet - place a mark specified by the new-packet-mark parameter on a packet that
matches the rule
• mark-routing - place a mark specified by the new-routing-mark parameter on a packet. This
kind of marks is used for policy routing purposes only
• passthrough - ignore this rule go on to the next one
• return - pass control back to the chain from where the jump took place
• strip-ipv4-options - strip IPv4 option fields from the IP packet
address-list ( name ) - specify the name of the address list to collect IP addresses from rules having
action=add-dst-to-address-list or action=add-src-to-address-list actions. These address lists could be
later used for packet matching
Page 450 of 695


chain ( forward | input | output | postrouting | prerouting ) - specify the chain to put a particular rule
into. As the different traffic is passed through different chains, always be careful in choosing the
right chain for a new rule. If the input does not match the name of an already defined chain, a new
chain will be created
comment ( text ) - free form textual comment for the rule. A comment can be used to refer the
particular rule from scripts
connection-bytes ( integer | integer ) - match packets only if a given amount of bytes has been
connection-mark ( name ) - match packets marked via mangle facility with particular connection
mark
connection-type ( ftp | gre | h323 | irc | mms | pptp | quake3 | tftp ) - match packets from related
dst-address ( IP address | netmask | IP address | IP address ) - specify the address range an IP
dst-address-list ( name ) - match destination address of a packet against user-defined address list
dst-address-type ( unicast | local | broadcast | multicast ) - match destination address type of the IP
packet, one of the:
• local - match addresses assigned to router's interfaces
dst-limit ( integer | time | integer | dst-address | dst-port | src-address | time ) - limit the packet per
of appearance):
by Time option
Page 451 of 695


hotspot ( multiple choice: from-client | auth | local-dst | http ) - match packets received from clients
against various Hot-Spot. All values can be negated
• hotspot - true, if it is a TCP packet from client and either the transparent proxy on port 80 is
enabled or the client has a proxy address configured and this address is equal to the address:port
pair of the IP packet
icmp-options ( integer | integer ) - match ICMP Type:Code fields
header options
jump-target ( forward | input | output | postrouting | prerouting | name ) - name of the target chain
to jump to, if the action=jump is used
limit ( integer | time | integer ) - restrict packet match rate to a given limit. Usefull to reduce the
by Time option
• Time - specify the time interval over which the packet rate is measured
new-connection-mark ( name ) - specify the new value of the connection mark to be used in
conjunction with action=mark-connection
new-mss ( integer ) - specify MSS value to be used in conjunction with action=change-mss
new-packet-mark ( name ) - specify the new value of the packet mark to be used in conjunction
with action=mark-packet
new-routing-mark ( name ) - specify the new value of the routing mark used in conjunction with
action=mark-routing
Page 452 of 695


new-tos ( max-reliability | max-throughput | min-cost | min-delay | normal | integer ) - specify TOS
value to be used in conjunction with action=change-tos
new-ttl ( decrement | increment | set | integer ) - specify the new TTL field value used in
conjunction with action=change-ttl
• decrement - the value of the TTL field will be decremented for value
• increment - the value of the TTL field will be incremented for value
• set: - the value of the TTL field will be set to value
2nd packet
nth match matches
out-interface ( name ) - match the interface name a packet left the router through
p2p ( all-p2p | bit-torrent | direct-connect | edonkey | fasttrack | gnutella | soulseek | warez | winmx )
- match packets belonging to connections of the above P2P protocols
packet-mark ( name ) - match the packets marked in mangle with specific packet mark
range in bytes
passthrough ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to let the packet to pass further (like action
passthrough) after marking it with a given mark (property only valid if action is mark packet,
connection or routing mark)
Page 453 of 695


random ( integer : 1 ..99 ) - matches packets randomly with given propability
routing-mark ( name ) - matches packets marked with the specified routing mark
packet, one of the:
tcp-flags ( multiple choice: ack | cwr | ece | fin | psh | rst | syn | urg ) - tcp flags to match
• ack - acknowledging data
• cwr - congestion window reduced
• ece - ECN-echo flag (explicit congestion notification)
• fin - close connection
• psh - push function
• rst - drop connection
• syn - new connection
• urg - urgent data
tos ( max-reliability | max-throughput | min-cost | min-delay | normal ) - specifies a match for the
value of Type of Service (ToS) field of an IP header
Page 454 of 695


Notes
Instead of making two rules if you want to mark a packet, connection or routing-mark and finish
mangle table processing on that event (in other words, mark and simultaneously accept the packet),
you may disable the set by default passthrough property of the marking rule.
Usually routing-mark is not used for P2P, since P2P traffic always is routed over a default getaway.
General Information
Description
The following section discusses some examples of using the mangle facility.
Peer-to-Peer Traffic Marking

To ensure the quality of service for network connection, interactive traffic types such as VoIP and
HTTP should be prioritized over non-interactive, such as peer-to-peer network traffic. RouterOS
QOS implementation uses mangle to mark different types of traffic first, and then place them into
queues with different limits.
The following example enforces the P2P traffic will get no more than 1Mbps of the total link
capacity when the link is heavily used by other traffic otherwice expanding to the full link capacity:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall mangle add chain=forward \
\... p2p=all-p2p action=mark-connection new-connection-mark=p2p_conn
\... connection-mark=p2p_conn action=mark-packet new-packet-mark=p2p
\... connection-mark=!p2p_conn action=mark-packet new-packet-mark=other
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall mangle print
0 chain=forward p2p=all-p2p action=mark-connection new-connection-mark=p2p_conn
1 chain=forward connection-mark=p2p_conn action=mark-packet new-packet-mark=p2p
2 chain=forward packet-mark=!p2p_conn action=mark-packet new-packet-mark=other
[admin@MikroTik] >
[admin@MikroTik] > /queue tree add parent=Public packet-mark=p2p limit-at=1000000 \
\... max-limit=100000000 priority=8
[admin@MikroTik] > /queue tree add parent=Local packet-mark=p2p limit-at=1000000 \
[admin@MikroTik] > /queue tree add parent=Public packet-mark=other limit-at=1000000 \
[admin@MikroTik] > /queue tree add parent=Local packet-mark=other limit-at=1000000 \
Mark by MAC address

To mark traffic from a known MAC address which goes to the router or through it, do the
following:
[admin@MikroTik] > / ip firewall mangle add chain=prerouting \
\... src-mac-address=00:01:29:60:36:E7 action=mark-connection
new-connection-mark=known_mac_conn
[admin@MikroTik] > / ip firewall mangle add chain=prerouting \
\... connection-mark=known_mac_conn action=mark-packet new-packet-mark=known_mac
Page 455 of 695


Change MSS
It is a well known fact that VPN links have smaller packet size due to incapsulation overhead. A
large packet with MSS that exceeds the MSS of the VPN link should be fragmented prior to sending
it via that kind of connection. However, if the packet has DF flag set, it cannot be fragmented and
should be discarded. On links that have broken path MTU discovery (PMTUD) it may lead to a
number of problems, including problems with FTP and HTTP data transfer and e-mail services.
In case of link with broken PMTUD, a decrease of the MSS of the packets coming through the VPN
link solves the problem. The following example demonstrates how to decrease the MSS value via
mangle:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall mangle add out-interface=pppoe-out \

\... protocol=tcp tcp-flags=syn action=change-mss new-mss=1300 chain=forward
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall mangle print
0 chain=forward out-interface=pppoe-out protocol=tcp tcp-flags=syn
action=change-mss new-mss=1300
[admin@MikroTik] >
Page 456 of 695


NAT
Document revision 2.8 (Tue Feb 28 15:15:00 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
NAT
Description
NAT Applications
Description
Example of Source NAT (Masquerading)
Example of Destination NAT
Example of 1:1 mapping
General Information
Summary
Network Address Translation (NAT) is a router facility that replaces source and (or) destination IP
addresses of the IP packet as it pass through thhe router. It is most commonly used to enable
multiple host on a private network to access the Internet using a single public IP address.
Specifications
License required: level1 (number of rules limited to 1) , level3
Home menu level: /ip firewall nat
Standards and Technologies: IP , RFC1631 , RFC2663
Hardware usage: Increases with the count of rules
Related Documents

• Filter
• Mangle
• Packet Flow
Page 457 of 695


NAT
Description
Network Address Translation is an Internet standard that allows hosts on local area networks to use
one set of IP addresses for internal communications and another set of IP addresses for external
communications. A LAN that uses NAT is referred as natted network. For NAT to function, there
should be a NAT gateway in each natted network. The NAT gateway (NAT router) performs IP
address rewriting on the way a packet travel from/to LAN.
There are two types of NAT:
• source NAT or srcnat. This type of NAT is performed on packets that are originated from a
natted network. A NAT router replaces the private source address of an IP packet with a new
public IP address as it travels through the router. A reverse operation is applied to the reply
packets travelling in the other direction.
• destination NAT or dstnat. This type of NAT is performed on packets that are destined to the
natted network. It is most comonly used to make hosts on a private network to be acceesible
from the Internet. A NAT router performing dstnat replaces the destination IP address of an IP
packet as it travel through the router towards a private network.
NAT Drawbacks
Hosts behind a NAT-enabled router do not have true end-to-end connectivity. Therefore some
Internet protocols might not work in scenarios with NAT. Services that require the initiation of TCP
connection from outside the private network or stateless protocols such as UDP, can be disrupted.
Moreover, some protocols are inherently incompatible with NAT, a bold example is AH protocol
from the IPsec suite.
RouterOS includes a number of so-called NAT helpers, that enable NAT traversal for various
protocols.
Redirect and Masquerade

Redirect and masquerade are special forms of destination NAT and source NAT, respectively.
Redirect is similar to the regular destination NAT in the same way as masquerade is similar to the
source NAT - masquerade is a special form of source NAT without need to specify to-addresses -
outgoing interface address is used automatically. The same is for redirect - it is a form of
destination NAT where to-addresses is not used - incoming interface address is used instead. Note
that to-ports is meaningful for redirect rules - this is the port of the service on the router that will
handle these requests (e.g. web proxy).
When packet is dst-natted (no matter - action=nat or action=redirect), dst address is changed.
Information about translation of addresses (including original dst address) is kept in router's internal
tables. Transparent web proxy working on router (when web requests get redirected to proxy port
on router) can access this information from internal tables and get address of web server from them.
If you are dst-natting to some different proxy server, it has no way to find web server's address from
IP header (because dst address of IP packet that previously was address of web server has changed
to address of proxy server). Starting from HTTP/1.1 there is special header in HTTP request which
Page 458 of 695


tells web server address, so proxy server can use it, instead of dst address of IP packet. If there is no
such header (older HTTP version on client), proxy server can not determine web server address and
therefore can not work.
It means, that it is impossible to correctly transparently redirect HTTP traffic from router to some
other transparent-proxy box. Only correct way is to add transparent proxy on the router itself, and
configure it so that your "real" proxy is parent-proxy. In this situation your "real" proxy does not
have to be transparent any more, as proxy on router will be transparent and will forward proxy-style
requests (according to standard; these requests include all necessary information about web server)
to "real" proxy.
action ( accept | add-dst-to-address-list | add-src-to-address-list | dst-nat | jump | log | masquerade |
netmap | passthrough | redirect | return | same | src-nat ; default: accept ) - action to undertake if
the packet matches the rule
• accept - accepts the packet. No action is taken, i.e. the packet is passed through and no more
rules are applied to it
• add-dst-to-address-list - adds destination address of an IP packet to the address list specified
by address-list parameter
• add-src-to-address-list - adds source address of an IP packet to the address list specified by
• dst-nat - replaces destination address of an IP packet to values specified by to-addresses and
to-ports parameters
• masquerade - replaces source address of an IP packet to an automatically determined by the
routing facility IP address
• netmap - creates a static 1:1 mapping of one set of IP addresses to another one. Often used to
distribute public IP addresses to hosts on private networks
• passthrough - ignores this rule goes on to the next one
• redirect - replaces destination address of an IP packet to one of the router's local addresses
• return - passes control back to the chain from where the jump took place
• same - gives a particular client the same source/destination IP address from supplied range for
each connection. This is most frequently used for services that expect the same client address
for multiple connections from the same client
• src-nat - replaces source address of an IP packet to values specified by to-addresses and
to-ports parameters
address-list ( name ) - specifies the name of the address list to collect IP addresses from rules
having action=add-dst-to-address-list or action=add-src-to-address-list actions. These address lists
could be later used for packet matching
Page 459 of 695


chain ( dstnat | srcnat | name ) - specifies the chain to put a particular rule into. As the different
traffic is passed through different chains, always be careful in choosing the right chain for a new
rule. If the input does not match the name of an already defined chain, a new chain will be created
• dstnat - a rule placed in this chain is applied before routing. The rules that replace destination
addresses of IP packets should be placed there
• srcnat - a rule placed in this chain is applied after routing. The rules that replace the source
addresses of IP packets should be placed there
comment ( text ) - a descriptive comment for the rule. A comment can be used to identify rules
form scripts
connection-bytes ( integer | integer ) - matches packets only if a given amount of bytes has been
connection-mark ( name ) - matches packets marked via mangle facility with particular connection
mark
connection-type ( ftp | gre | h323 | irc | mms | pptp | quake3 | tftp ) - matches packets from related
dst-address ( IP address | netmask | IP address | IP address ) - specifies the address range an IP
dst-address-list ( name ) - matches destination address of a packet against user-defined address list
dst-address-type ( unicast | local | broadcast | multicast ) - matches destination address type of the
IP packet, one of the:
dst-limit ( integer | time | integer | dst-address | dst-port | src-address | time ) - limits the packet per
of appearance):
by Time option
Page 460 of 695


hotspot ( multiple choice: from-client | auth | local-dst ) - matches packets received from clients
against various Hot-Spot. All values can be negated
icmp-options ( integer | integer ) - matches ICMP Type:Code fields
header options
jump-target ( dstnat | srcnat | name ) - name of the target chain to jump to, if the action=jump is
used
by Time option
2nd packet
nth match matches
Page 461 of 695


out-interface ( name ) - interface the packet is leaving the router through
packet-mark ( text ) - matches packets marked via mangle facility with particular packet mark
range in bytes
phys-out-interface ( name ) - matches the bridge port physical output device added to a bridge
device. It is only useful if the packet will leave the router through the bridge
random ( integer ) - match packets randomly with given propability
routing-mark ( name ) - matches packets marked by mangle facility with particular routing mark
same-not-by-dst ( yes | no ) - specifies whether to account or not to account for destination IP
address when selecting a new source IP address for packets matched by rules with action=same
packet, one of the:
Page 462 of 695


to-addresses ( IP address | IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - address or address range to replace
original address of an IP packet with
to-ports ( integer : 0 ..65535 | integer : 0 ..65535 ) - port or port range to replace original port of an
IP packet with
tos ( max-reliability | max-throughput | min-cost | min-delay | normal ) - specifies a match to the
value of Type of Service (ToS) field of IP header
NAT Applications
Description
In this section some NAT applications and examples of them are discussed.
Basic NAT configuration

Assume we want to create router that:
• "hides" the private LAN "behind" one address
• provides Public IP to the Local server
• creates 1:1 mapping of network addresses
Example of Source NAT (Masquerading)

If you want to "hide" the private LAN 192.168.0.0/24 "behind" one address 10.5.8.109 given to you
by the ISP, you should use the source network address translation (masquerading) feature of the
MikroTik router. The masquerading will change the source IP address and port of the packets
originated from the network 192.168.0.0/24 to the address 10.5.8.109 of the router when the packet
is routed through it.
To use masquerading, a source NAT rule with action 'masquerade' should be added to the firewall
configuration:
/ip firewall nat add chain=srcnat action=masquerade out-interface=Public
All outgoing connections from the network 192.168.0.0/24 will have source address 10.5.8.109 of
the router and source port above 1024. No access from the Internet will be possible to the Local
addresses. If you want to allow connections to the server on the local network, you should use
destination Network Address Translation (NAT).
Page 463 of 695


Example of Destination NAT
If you want to link Public IP 10.5.8.200 address to Local one 192.168.0.109, you should use
destination address translation feature of the MikroTik router. Also if you want allow Local server
to talk with outside with given Public IP you should use source address translation, too
Add Public IP to Public interface:
/ip address add address=10.5.8.200/32 interface=Public
Add rule allowing access to the internal server from external networks:
/ip firewall nat add chain=dstnat dst-address=10.5.8.200 action=dst-nat \

to-addresses=192.168.0.109
Add rule allowing the internal server to talk to the outer networks having its source address
translated to 10.5.8.200:
/ip firewall nat add chain=srcnat src-address=192.168.0.109 action=src-nat \

to-addresses=10.5.8.200
Example of 1:1 mapping

If you want to link Public IP subnet 11.11.11.0/24 to local one 2.2.2.0/24, you should use
destination address translation and source address translation features with action=netmap.
/ip firewall nat add chain=dstnat dst-address=11.11.11.1-11.11.11.254 \

action=netmap to-addresses=2.2.2.1-2.2.2.254
/ip firewall nat add chain=srcnat src-address=2.2.2.1-2.2.2.254 \
action=netmap to-addresses=11.11.11.1-11.11.11.254
Page 464 of 695


Packet Flow
Document revision 2.7 (Mon Jun 05 12:04:15 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Packet Flow
Description
Connection Tracking
Description
Connection Timeouts
Description
Notes
Service Ports
Description
General Firewall Information
Description
General Information
Summary
This manual describes the order in which an IP packet traverses various internal facilities of the
router and some general information regarding packet handling, common IP protocols and protocol
options.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip firewall
Hardware usage: Increases with NAT, mangle and filter rules count
Related Documents

Page 465 of 695


• NAT
• Mangle
• Filter
Packet Flow
Description
MikroTik RouterOS is designed to be easy to operate in various aspects, including IP firewall.
Therefore regular firewall policies can be created and deployed without the knowledge about how
the packets are processed in the router. For example, if all that required is just natting internal
clients to a public address, the following command can be issued (assuming the interface to the
Internet in named Public):
/ip firewall nat add action=masquerade out-interface=Public chain=srcnat
Regular packet filtering, bandwith management or packet marking can be configured with ease in a
similar manner. However, a more complicated configuration could be deployed only with a good
understanding of the underlying processes in the router.
The packet flow through the router is depicted in the following diagram:
Page 466 of 695


As can be seen on the diagram, there are five chains in the processing pipeline. These are
prerouting, input, forward, output and postrouting. The actions performed on a packet in each
chain are discussed later in this chapter.
Additional arrows from IPsec boxes shows the processing of encrypted packets (they need to be
encrypted / decrypted first and then processed as usual, id est from the point an ordinal packet
enters the router).
A paket can enter processing conveyer of the router in two ways. First, a packet can come from one
of the interfaces present in the roter (then the interface is referred as input interface). Second, it
can be originated from a local process, like web proxy, VPN or others. Alike, there are two ways for
Page 467 of 695


a packet to leave the processing pipeline. A packet can leave through the one of the router's
interfaces (in this case the interface is referred as output interface) or it can end up in the local
process. In general, traffic can be destined to one of the router's IP addresses, it can originate from
the router or simply should be passed through. To further complicate things the traffic can be
bridged or routed one, which is determined during the Bridge Decision stage.
Routed traffic
The traffic received for the router's MAC address on the respective port, is passed to the routing
procedures and can be of one of these four types:
• the traffic which is destined to the router itself. The IP packets has destination address equal to
one of the router's IP addresses. A packet enters the router through the input interface,
sequentially traverses prerouting and input chains and ends up in the local process.
Consequently, a packet can be filtered in the input chain filter and mangled in two places: the
input and the prerouting chain filters.
• the traffic is originated from the router. In this case the IP packets have their source addresses
identical to one of the router's IP addresses. Such packets travel through the output chain, then
they are passed to the routing facility where an appropriate routing path for each packet is
determined and leave through the postrouting chain.
• routable traffic, which is received at the router's MAC address, has an IP address different
from any of the router's own addresses, and its destination can be found in the routing tables.
These packets go through the prerouting, forward and postrouting chains.
• unroutable traffic, which is received at the router's MAC address, has an IP address different
from any of the router's own addresses, but its destination can not be found in the routing
tables. These packets go through the prerouting and stop in the routing recision.
The actions imposed by various router facilities are sequentially applied to a packet in each of the
default chains. The exact order they are applied is pictured in the bottom of the flow diagram.
Exempli gratia, for a packet passing postrouting chain the mangle rules are applied first, two types
of queuing come in second place and finally source NAT is performed on packets that need to be
natted.
Note, that any given packet can come through only one of the input, forward or output chains.
Bridged Traffic
In case the incoming traffic needs to be bridged (do not confuse it with the traffic coming to the
bridge interface at the router's own MAC address and, thus, classified as routed traffic) it is first
determined whether it is an IP traffic or not. After that, IP traffic goes through the prerouting,
forward and postrouting chains, while non-IP traffic bypasses all IP firewall rules and goes
directly to the interface queue. Both types of traffic, however, undergo the full set of bridge firewall
chains anyway, regardless of the protocol.
Connection Tracking
Home menu level: /ip firewall connection
Description
Page 468 of 695


Connection tracking refers to the ability to maintain the state information about connections, such
as source and destination IP address and ports pairs, connection states, protocol types and timeouts.
Firewalls that do connection tracking are known as "stateful" and are inherently more secure that
those who do only simple "stateless" packet processing.
The state of a particular connection could be estabilished meaning that the packet is part of already
known connection, new meaning that the packet starts a new connection or belongs to a connection
that has not seen packets in both directions yet, related meaning that the packet starts a new
connection, but is associated with an existing connection, such as FTP data transfer or ICMP error
message and, finally, invalid meaning that the packet does not belong to any known connection
and, at the same time, does not open a valid new connection.
Connection tracking is done in the prerouting chain, or the output chain for locally generated
packets.
Another function of connection tracking which cannot be overestimated is that it is needed for
NAT. You should be aware that no NAT can be performed unless you have connection tracking
enabled, the same applies for p2p protocols recognition. Connection tracking also assembles IP
packets from fragments before further processing.
The maximum number of connections the /ip firewall connection state table can contain is
determined initially by the amount of physical memory present in the router. Thus, for example, a
router with 64 MB of RAM can hold the information about up to 65536 connections, but a router
with 128 MB RAM increases this value to more than 130000.
Please ensure that your router is equipped with sufficient amount of physical memory to properly
handle all connections.
assured ( read-only: true | false ) - shows whether replay was seen for the last packet matching this
entry
connection-mark ( read-only: text ) - Connection mark set in mangle
dst-address ( read-only: IP address | port ) - the destination address and port the connection is
established to
icmp-id ( read-only: integer ) - contains the ICMP ID. Each ICMP packet gets an ID set to it when
it is sent, and when the receiver gets the ICMP message, it sets the same ID within the new ICMP
message so that the sender will recognize the reply and will be able to connect it with the
appropriate ICMP request
icmp-option ( read-only: integer ) - the ICMP type and code fields
p2p ( read-only: text ) - peer to peer protocol
protocol ( read-only: text ) - IP protocol name or number
reply-dst-address ( read-only: IP address | port ) - the destination address and port the reply
connection is established to
reply-icmp-id ( read-only: integer ) - contains the ICMP ID of received packet
reply-icmp-option ( read-only: integer ) - the ICMP type and code fields of received packet
reply-src-address ( read-only: IP address | port ) - the source address and port the reply
connection is established from
Page 469 of 695


src-address ( read-only: IP address | port ) - the source address and port the connection is
established from
tcp-state ( read-only: text ) - the state of TCP connection
timeout ( read-only: time ) - the amount of time until the connection will be timed out
unreplied ( read-only: true | false ) - shows whether the request was unreplied
Connection Timeouts
Home menu level: /ip firewall connection tracking
Description
Connection tracking provides several timeouts. When particular timeout expires the according entry
is removed from the connection state table. The following diagram depicts typical TCP connection
establishment and termination and tcp timeouts that take place during these processes:
enable ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to allow or disallow connection tracking
generic-timeout ( time ; default: 10m ) - maximal amount of time connection state table entry that
keeps tracking of packets that are neither TCP nor UDP (for instance GRE) will survive after
having seen last packet matching this entry. Creating PPTP connection this value will be increased
automaticly
icmp-timeout ( time ; default: 10s ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry will
survive after having seen ICMP request
max-entries ( read-only: integer ) - the maximum number of connections the connection state table
can contain, depends on an amount of total memory
tcp-close-timeout ( time ; default: 10s ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry will
survive after having seen connection reset request (RST) or an acknowledgment (ACK) of the
connection termination request from connection release initiator
tcp-close-wait-timeout ( time ; default: 10s ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry
Page 470 of 695


will survive after having seen an termination request (FIN) from responder
tcp-established-timeout ( time ; default: 1d ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry
will survive after having seen an acknowledgment (ACK) from connection initiator
tcp-fin-wait-timeout ( time ; default: 10s ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry
will survive after having seen connection termination request (FIN) from connection release
initiator
tcp-syncookie ( yes | no ; default: no ) - enable TCP SYN cookies for connections destined to the
router itself (this may be useful for HotSpot and tunnels)
tcp-syn-received-timeout ( time ; default: 1m ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking
entry will survive after having seen a matching connection request (SYN)
tcp-syn-sent-timeout ( time ; default: 1m ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry
will survive after having seen a connection request (SYN) from connection initiator
tcp-time-wait-timeout ( time ; default: 10s ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry
will survive after having seen connection termination request (FIN) just after connection request
(SYN) or having seen another termination request (FIN) from connection release initiator
total-entries ( read-only: integer ) - number of connections currently recorded in the connection
state table
udp-stream-timeout ( time ; default: 3m ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry
will survive after replay is seen for the last packet matching this entry (connection tracking entry is
assured). It is used to increase timeout for such connections as H323, VoIP, etc.
udp-timeout ( time ; default: 10s ) - maximal amount of time connection tracking entry will
survive after having seen last packet matching this entry
Notes
The maximum timeout value depends on amount of entries in connection state table. If amount of
entries in the table is more than:
• 1/16 of maximum number of entries the maximum timeout value will be 1 day
• 3/16 of maximum number of entries the maximum timeout value will be 1 hour
• 1/2 of maximum number of entries the maximum timeout value will be 10 minute
• 13/16 of maximum number of entries the maximum timeout value will be 1 minute
The shortest timeout will always be choden between the configured timeout and the value listed
above.
If connection tracking timeout value is less than the normal interval between the data packets rate
(timeout expires before the next packet arives), NAT and statefull-firewalling stop working.
Service Ports
Home menu level: /ip firewall service-port
Description
Some network protocols are not compatible with network address translation, for example due to
Page 471 of 695


some additional infomation about the actual addresses or ports is present in the packet payload,
which is not known for the NAT procedures, as they only look at the IP, UDP and TCP headers, not
inside the packets. For these protocols to work correctly, a connection tracking helper is needed to
work around such design issues. You may enable and disable helpers here (you may want to disable
some of them to increase performance or if you are experiencing problems with some protocols
detected incorrectly). Note that you can not add or remove the helpers, just enable or disable the
existing ones.
name - protocol name
ports ( integer ) - port range that is used by the protocol (only some helpers need this)
General Firewall Information
Description
ICMP TYPE:CODE values

In order to protect your router and attached private networks, you need to configure firewall to drop
or reject most of ICMP traffic. However, some ICMP packets are vital to maintain network
reliability or provide troubleshooting services.
The following is a list of ICMP TYPE:CODE values found in good packets. It is generally
suggested to allow these types of ICMP traffic.
• • 8:0 - echo request
• 0:0 - echo reply
Ping
• • 11:0 - TTL exceeded

• 3:3 - Port unreachable
Trace
• • 3:4 - Fragmentation-DF-Set
Path MTU discovery
General suggestion to apply ICMP filtering

• Allow ping—ICMP Echo-Request outbound and Echo-Reply messages inbound
• Allow traceroute—TTL-Exceeded and Port-Unreachable messages inbound
• Allow path MTU—ICMP Fragmentation-DF-Set messages inbound
• Block everything else
Page 472 of 695


Type of Service
Internet paths vary in quality of service they provide. They can differ in cost, reliability, delay and
throughput. This situation imposes some tradeoffs, exempli gratia the path with the lowest delay
may be among the ones with the smallest throughput. Therefore, the "optimal" path for a packet to
follow through the Internet may depend on the needs of the application and its user.
As the network itself has no knowledge on how to optimize path choosing for a particular
application or user, the IP protocol provides a method for upper layer protocols to convey hints to
the Internet Layer about how the tradeoffs should be made for the particular packet. This method is
implemented with the help of a special field in the IP protocol header, the "Type of Service" field.
The fundamental rule is that if a host makes appropriate use of the TOS facility, its network service
should be at least as good as it would have been if the host had not used this facility.
Type of Service (ToS) is a standard field of IP packet and it is used by many network applications
and hardware to specify how the traffic should be treated by the gateway.
MikroTik RouterOS works with the full ToS byte. It does not take account of reserverd bits in this
byte (because they have been redefined many times and this approach provides more flexibility). It
means that it is possible to work with DiffServ marks (Differentiated Services Codepoint, DSCP as
defined in RFC2474) and ECN codepoints (Explicit Congestion Notification, ECN as defined in
RFC3168), which are using the same field in the IP protocol header. Note that it does not mean that
RouterOS supports DiffServ or ECN, it is just possible to access and change the marks used by
these protocols.
RFC1349 defines these standard values:
• low-cost - minimize monetary cost (ToS=2)
• low-delay - minimize delay (ToS=16)
Peer-to-Peer protocol filtering

Peer-to-peer protocols also known as p2p provide means for direct distributed data transfer between
individual network hosts. While this technology powers many brilliant applications (like Skype), it
is widely abused for unlicensed software and media destribution. Even when it is used for legal
purposes, p2p may heavily disturb other network traffic, such as http and e-mail. RouterOS is able
to recognize connections of the most popular P2P protocols and filter or enforce QOS on them.
The protocols which can be detected, are:
• Fasttrack (Kazaa, KazaaLite, Diet Kazaa, Grokster, iMesh, giFT, Poisoned, mlMac)
• Gnutella (Shareaza, XoLoX, , Gnucleus, BearShare, LimeWire (java), Morpheus, Phex,
Swapper, Gtk-Gnutella (linux), Mutella (linux), Qtella (linux), MLDonkey, Acquisition (Mac
OS), Poisoned, Swapper, Shareaza, XoloX, mlMac)
• Gnutella2 (Shareaza, MLDonkey, Gnucleus, Morpheus, Adagio, mlMac)
Page 473 of 695


• DirectConnect (DirectConnect (AKA DC++), MLDonkey, NeoModus Direct Connect,
BCDC++, CZDC++ )
• eDonkey (eDonkey2000, eMule, xMule (linux), Shareaza, MLDonkey, mlMac, Overnet)
• Soulseek (Soulseek, MLDonkey)
• BitTorrent (BitTorrent, BitTorrent++, Shareaza, MLDonkey, ABC, Azureus, BitAnarch,
SimpleBT, BitTorrent.Net, mlMac)
• Blubster (Blubster, Piolet)
• WPNP (WinMX)
• Warez (Warez, Ares; starting from 2.8.18) - this protocol can only be dropped, speed limiting
is impossible
Page 474 of 695


Services, Protocols, and Ports
Document revision 1.0.0 (Fri Mar 05 08:38:56 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Related Documents
Modifying Service Settings
Example
List of Services
Description
General Information
Summary
This document lists protocols and ports used by various MikroTik RouterOS services. It helps you
to determine why your MikroTik router listens to certain ports, and what you need to block/allow in
case you want to prevent or grant access to the certain services. Please see the relevant sections of
the Manual for more explanations.
Related Documents
• Firewall Filters
• Packet Marking (Mangle)
• Certificate Management
Modifying Service Settings

name - service name
port ( integer : 1 ..65535 ) - the port particular service listens on
address ( IP address/mask ; default: 0.0.0.0/0 ) - IP address(-es) from which the service is
accessible
certificate ( name | none ; default: none ) - the name of the certificate used by particular service
(absent for the services that do not need certificates)
Example
Page 475 of 695


To set www service to use 8081 port accesible from the 10.10.10.0/24 network:
0 telnet 23 0.0.0.0/0
1 ftp 21 0.0.0.0/0
2 www 80 0.0.0.0/0
3 ssh 22 0.0.0.0/0
4 www-ssl 443 0.0.0.0/0 none
[admin@MikroTik] ip service> set www port=8081 address=10.10.10.0/24
0 telnet 23 0.0.0.0/0
1 ftp 21 0.0.0.0/0
2 www 8081 10.10.10.0/24
3 ssh 22 0.0.0.0/0
4 www-ssl 443 0.0.0.0/0 none
List of Services
Description
Below is the list of protocols and ports used by MikoTik RouterOS services. Some services require
additional package to be installed, as well as to be enabled by administrator, exempli gratia
bandwidth server.
Port/Protocol Description
File Transfer Protocol FTP [Data
20/tcp
Connection]
File Transfer Protocol FTP [Control
21/tcp
Connection]
Secure Shell SSH remote Login Protocol
22/tcp
(Only with security package)
23/tcp Telnet protocol
53/tcp Domain Name Server DNS
53/udp Domain Name Server DNS
Bootstrap Protocol or DHCP Server (only
67/udp
with dhcp package)
Bootstrap Protocol or DHCP Client (only
68/udp
with dhcp package)
80/tcp World Wide Web HTTP
Network Time Protocol NTP (Only with ntp
123/udp
package)
Simple Network Menagment Protocol SNMP
161/udp
(Only with snmp package)
Secure Socket Layer SSL encrypted
443/tcp
HTTP(Only with hotspot package)
Page 476 of 695


Internet Key Exchange IKE protocol (Only
500/udp
with ipsec package)
Routing Information Protocol RIP (Only
520/udp
with routing package)
Routing Information Protocol RIP (Only
521/udp
with routing package)
Border Gateway Protocol BGP (Only with
179/tcp
routing package)
1080/tcp SOCKS proxy protocol
Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol L2TP (Only with
1701/udp
ppp package)
H.323 Gatekeeper Discovery (Only with
1718/udp
telephony package)
H.323 Gatekeeper RAS (Only with telephony
1719/tcp
package)
H.323 Call Setup (Only with telephony
1720/tcp
package)
Point-to-Point Tuneling Protocol PPTP (Only
1723/tcp
with ppp package)
H.323 Audio Call Control (Only with
1731/tcp
telephony package)
1900/udp Universal Plug and Play uPnP
2828/tcp Universal Plug and Play uPnP
2000/tcp Bandwidth-test server
3986/tcp Proxy for winbox
SSL proxy for secure winbox (Only with
3987/tcp
security package)
5678/udp MikroTik Neighbor Discovery Protocol
HTTP Web proxy (Only with web-proxy
8080/tcp
package)
8291/tcp Winbox
20561/udp MAC winbox
H.323 RTP Audio Streem (Only with
5000+/udp
telephony package)
/1 ICMP - Internet Control Message Protocol
/4 IP - IP in IP (encapsulation)
GRE - General Routing Encapsulation (Only
/47
for PPTP and EoIP)
/50 ESP - Encapsulating Security Payload for
Page 477 of 695


IPv4 (Only with security package)
AH - Authentication Header for IPv4 (Only
/51
with security package)
/89 OSPFIGP - OSPF Interior Gateway Protocol
/112 VRRP - Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Page 478 of 695


DHCP Client and Server
Document revision 2.7 (Mon Apr 18 22:24:18 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Description
DHCP Client Setup
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
DHCP Server Setup
Description
Notes
Example
Store Leases on Disk
Description
DHCP Networks
Notes
DHCP Server Leases
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
DHCP Alert
Description
Notes
DHCP Option
Description
Notes
Example
DHCP Relay
Description
Page 479 of 695


Notes
Example
Question&Answer-Based Setup
Command Description
Notes
Example
Dynamic Addressing, using DHCP-Relay
IP Address assignment, using FreeRADIUS Server
General Information
Summary
The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is needed for easy distribution of IP addresses
in a network. The MikroTik RouterOS implementation includes both - server and client parts and is
compliant with RFC2131.
General usage of DHCP:
• IP assignment in LAN, cable-modem, and wireless systems
• Obtaining IP settings on cable-modem systems
IP addresses can be bound to MAC addresses using static lease feature.
DHCP server can be used with MikroTik RouterOS HotSpot feature to authenticate and account
DHCP clients. See the HotSpot Manual for more information.
Quick Setup Guide

This example will show you how to setup DHCP-Server and DHCP-Client on MikroTik RouterOS.
• Setup of a DHCP-Server.
1. Create an IP address pool
/ip pool add name=dhcp-pool ranges=172.16.0.10-172.16.0.20
2. Add a DHCP network which will concern to the network 172.16.0.0/12 and will
distribute a gateway with IP address 172.16.0.1 to DHCP clients:
/ip dhcp-server network add address=172.16.0.0/12 gateway=172.16.0.1
3. Finally, add a DHCP server:

/ip dhcp-server add interface=wlan1 address-pool=dhcp-pool
• Setup of the DHCP-Client (which will get a lease from the DHCP server, configured above).
1. Add the DHCP client:
/ip dhcp-client add interface=wlan1 use-peer-dns=yes \
add-default-route=yes disabled=no
2. Check whether you have obtained a lease:

[admin@Server] ip dhcp-client> print detail
Page 480 of 695


0 interface=wlan1 add-default-route=yes use-peer-dns=yes status=bound
address=172.16.0.20/12 gateway=172.16.0.1 dhcp-server=192.168.0.1
primary-dns=159.148.147.194 expires-after=2d23:58:52
[admin@Server] ip dhcp-client>
Specifications
Packages required: dhcp
Home menu level: /ip dhcp-client , /ip dhcp-server , /ip dhcp-relay
Standards and Technologies: DHCP
Description
The DHCP protocol gives and allocates IP addresses to IP clients. DHCP is basically insecure and
should only be used in trusted networks. DHCP server always listens on UDP 67 port, DHCP client
- on UDP 68 port. The initial negotiation involves communication between broadcast addresses (on
some phases sender will use source address of 0.0.0.0 and/or destination address of
255.255.255.255). You should be aware of this when building firewall.
• ISC Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

• DHCP mini-HOWTO
• ISC DHCP FAQ
DHCP Client Setup

Home menu level: /ip dhcp-client
Description
The MikroTik RouterOS DHCP client may be enabled on any Ethernet-like interface at a time. The
client will accept an address, netmask, default gateway, and two dns server addresses. The received
IP address will be added to the interface with the respective netmask. The default gateway will be
added to the routing table as a dynamic entry. Should the DHCP client be disabled or not renew an
address, the dynamic default route will be removed. If there is already a default route installed prior
the DHCP client obtains one, the route obtained by the DHCP client would be shown as invalid.
address ( IP address | netmask ) - IP address and netmask, which is assigned to DHCP Client from
the Server
add-default-route ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to add the default route to the gateway
specified by the DHCP server
client-id ( text ) - corresponds to the settings suggested by the network administrator or ISP.
Commonly it is set to the client's MAC address, but it may as well be any test string
Page 481 of 695


dhcp-server ( IP address ) - IP address of the DHCP Server
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the DHCP client is enabled
expires-after ( time ) - time, which is assigned by the DHCP Server, after which the lease expires
gateway ( IP address ) - IP address of the gateway which is assigned by DHCP Server
host-name ( text ) - the host name of the client as sent to a DHCP server
interface ( name ) - any Ethernet-like interface (this includes wireless and EoIP tunnels) on which
the DHCP Client searches the DHCP Server
primary-dns ( IP address ) - IP address of the primary DNS server, assigned by the DHCP Server
secondary-dns ( IP address ) - IP address of the secondary DNS server, assigned by DHCP Server
primary-ntp - IP address of the primary NTP server, assigned by the DHCP Server
secondary-ntp - IP address of the secondary NTP server, assigned by the DHCP Server
status ( bound | error | rebinding... | renewing... | requesting... | searching... | stopped ) - shows the
status of DHCP Client
use-peer-dns ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to accept the DNS settings advertized by DHCP
server (they will be ovverriden in /ip dns submenu)
use-peer-ntp ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to accept the NTP settings advertized by DHCP
server (they will override the settings put in the /system ntp client submenu)
Command Description
release - release current binding and restart DHCP client
renew - renew current leases. If the renew operation was not successful, client tries to reinitialize
lease (i.e. it starts lease request procedure (rebind) as if it had not received an IP address yet)
Notes
If host-name property is not specified, client's system identity will be sent in the respective field of
DHCP request.
If client-id property is not specified, client's MAC address will be sent in the respective field of
DHCP request.
If use-peer-dns property is enabled, the DHCP client will unconditionally rewrite the settings in /ip
dns submenu. In case two or more DNS servers were received, first two of them are set as primary
and secondary servers respectively. In case one DNS server was received, it is put as primary
server, and the secondary server is left intact.
Example
To add a DHCP client on ether1 interface:
/ip dhcp-client add interface=ether1 disabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-client> print detail
0 interface=ether1 add-default-route=no use-peer-dns=no status=bound
address=192.168.25.100/24 dhcp-server=10.10.10.1 expires-after=2d21:25:12
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-client>
Page 482 of 695


DHCP Server Setup
Home menu level: /ip dhcp-server
Description
The router supports an individual server for each Ethernet-like interface. The MikroTik RouterOS
DHCP server supports the basic functions of giving each requesting client an IP address/netmask
lease, default gateway, domain name, DNS-server(s) and WINS-server(s) (for Windows clients)
information (set up in the DHCP networks submenu)
In order DHCP server to work, you must set up also IP pools (do not include the DHCP server's IP
address into the pool range) and DHCP networks.
It is also possible to hand out leases for DHCP clients using the RADIUS server, here are listed the
parameters for used in RADIUS server.
Access-Request:
• NAS-Identifier - router identity
• NAS-IP-Address - IP address of the router itself
• NAS-Port - unique session ID
• NAS-Port-Type - Ethernet
• Calling-Station-Id - client identifier (active-client-id)
• Framed-IP-Address - IP address of the client (active-address)
• Called-Station-Id - name of DHCP server
• User-Name - MAC address of the client (active-mac-address)
• Password - ""
Access-Accept:
• Framed-IP-Address - IP address that will be assigned to client
• Framed-Pool - ip pool from which to assign ip address to client
• Rate-Limit - Datarate limitation for DHCP clients. Format is: rx-rate[/tx-rate]
[rx-burst-rate[/tx-burst-rate] [rx-burst-threshold[/tx-burst-threshold]
[rx-burst-time[/tx-burst-time][priority] [rx-rate-min[/tx-rate-min]]]]. All rates should be
numbers with optional 'k' (1,000s) or 'M' (1,000,000s). If tx-rate is not specified, rx-rate is as
tx-rate too. Same goes for tx-burst-rate and tx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-time. If both
rx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-threshold are not specified (but burst-rate is specified), rx-rate
and tx-rate are used as burst thresholds. If both rx-burst-time and tx-burst-time are not
specified, 1s is used as default. Priority takes values 1..8, where 1 implies the highest priority,
but 8 - the lowest. If rx-rate-min and tx-rate-min are not specified rx-rate and tx-rate values are
used. The rx-rate-min and tx-rate-min values can not exceed rx-rate and tx-rate values.
• Ascend-Data-Rate - tx/rx data rate limitation if multiple attributes are provided, first limits tx
data rate, second - rx data rate. If used together with Ascend-Xmit-Rate, specifies rx rate. 0 if
unlimited
• Ascend-Xmit-Rate - tx data rate limitation. It may be used to specify tx limit only instead of
sending two sequental Ascend-Data-Rate attributes (in that case Ascend-Data-Rate will specify
Page 483 of 695


the receive rate). 0 if unlimited
• Session-Timeout - max lease time (lease-time)
add-arp ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to add dynamic ARP entry:
• no - either ARP mode should be enabled on that interface or static ARP entries should be
administratively defined in /ip arp submenu
address-pool ( name | static-only ; default: static-only ) - IP pool, from which to take IP addresses
for clients
• static-only - allow only the clients that have a static lease (i.e. no dynamic addresses will be
given to clients, only the ones added in lease submenu)
always-broadcast ( yes | no ; default: no ) - always send replies as broadcasts
authoritative ( after-10sec-delay | after-2sec-delay | no | yes ; default: after-2sec-delay ) - whether
the DHCP server is the only one DHCP server for the network
• after-10sec-delay - to clients request for an address, dhcp server will wait 10 seconds and if
there is another request from the client after this period of time, then dhcp server will offer the
address to the client or will send DHCPNAK, if the requested address is not available from this
server
• after-2sec-delay - to clients request for an address, dhcp server will wait 2 seconds and if there
is another request from the client after this period of time, then dhcp server will offer the
address to the client or will send DHCPNAK, if the requested address is not available from this
server
• no - dhcp server ignores clients requests for addresses that are not available from this server
• yes - to clients request for an address that is not available from this server, dhcp server will send
negative acknowledgment (DHCPNAK)
bootp-support ( none | static | dynamic ; default: static ) - support for BOOTP clients
• none - do not respond to BOOTP requests
• static - offer only static leases to BOOTP clients
• dynamic - offer static and dynamic leases for BOOTP clients
delay-threshold ( time ; default: none ) - if secs field in DHCP packet is smaller than
delay-threshold, then this packet is ignored
• none - there is no threshold (all DHCP packets are processed)
interface ( name ) - Ethernet-like interface name
lease-time ( time ; default: 72h ) - the time that a client may use an address. The client will try to
renew this address after a half of this time and will request a new address after time limit expires
name ( name ) - reference name
ntp-server ( text ) - the DHCP client will use these as the default NTP servers. Two
comma-separated NTP servers can be specified to be used by DHCP client as primary and
secondary NTP servers
relay ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the IP address of the relay this DHCP server should process
requests from:
• 0.0.0.0 - the DHCP server will be used only for direct requests from clients (no DHCP really
Page 484 of 695


allowed)
• 255.255.255.255 - the DHCP server should be used for any incomming request from a DHCP
relay except for those, which are processed by another DHCP server that exists in the /ip
dhcp-server submenu
src-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the address which the DHCP client must send
requests to in order to renew an IP address lease. If there is only one static address on the DHCP
server interface and the source-address is left as 0.0.0.0, then the static address will be used. If there
are multiple addresses on the interface, an address in the same subnet as the range of given
addresses should be used
use-radius ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to use RADIUS server for dynamic leases
Notes
If using both - Universal Client and DHCP Server on the same interface, client will only receive a
DHCP lease in case it is directly reachable by its MAC address through that interface (some
wireless bridges may change client's MAC address).
If authoritative property is set to yes, the DHCP server is sending rejects for the leases it cannot
bind or renew. It also may (although not always) help to prevent the users of the network to run
illicitly their own DHCP servers disturbing the proper way this network should be functioning.
If relay property of a DHCP server is not set to 0.0.0.0 the DHCP server will not respond to the
direct requests from clients.
Example
To add a DHCP server to interface ether1, lending IP addresses from dhcp-clients IP pool for 2
hours:
/ip dhcp-server add name=dhcp-office disabled=no address-pool=dhcp-clients \
interface=ether1 lease-time=2h
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server> print
# NAME INTERFACE RELAY ADDRESS-POOL LEASE-TIME ADD-ARP
0 dhcp-office ether1 dhcp-clients 02:00:00
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server>
Store Leases on Disk

Home menu level: /ip dhcp-server config
Description
Leases are always stored on disk on graceful shutdown and reboot. If on every lease change it is
stored on disk, a lot of disk writes happen. There are no problems if it happens on a hard drive, but
is very bad on Compact Flash (especially, if lease times are very short). To minimize writes on disk,
all changes are flushed together every store-leases-disk seconds. If this time will be very short
(immediately), then no changes will be lost even in case of hard reboots and power losts. But, on
CF there may be too many writes in case of short lease times (as in case of hotspot). If this time will
be very long (never), then there will be no writes on disk, but information about active leases may
be lost in case of power loss. In these cases dhcp server may give out the same ip address to another
Page 485 of 695


client, if first one will not respond to ping requests.
store-leases-disk ( time-interval | immediately | never ; default: 5min ) - how frequently lease
changes should be stored on disk
DHCP Networks
Home menu level: /ip dhcp-server network
address ( IP address | netmask ) - the network DHCP server(s) will lend addresses from
boot-file-name ( text ) - Boot file name
dhcp-option ( text ) - add additional DHCP options from /ip dhcp-server option list. You cannot
redefine parameters which are already defined in this submenu:
• Subnet-Mask (code 1) - netmask
• Router (code 3) - gateway
• Domain-Server (code 6) - dns-server
• Domain-Name (code 15) - domain
• NETBIOS-Name-Server - wins-server
dns-server ( text ) - the DHCP client will use these as the default DNS servers. Two
comma-separated DNS servers can be specified to be used by DHCP client as primary and
secondary DNS servers
domain ( text ) - the DHCP client will use this as the 'DNS domain' setting for the network adapter
gateway ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the default gateway to be used by DHCP clients
netmask ( integer : 0 ..32 ; default: 0 ) - the actual network mask to be used by DHCP client
• 0 - netmask from network address is to be used
next-server ( IP address ) - IP address of next server to use in bootstrap
wins-server ( text ) - the Windows DHCP client will use these as the default WINS servers. Two
comma-separated WINS servers can be specified to be used by DHCP client as primary and
secondary WINS servers
Notes
The address field uses netmask to specify the range of addresses the given entry is valid for. The
actual netmask clients will be using is specified in netmask property.
DHCP Server Leases

Home menu level: /ip dhcp-server lease
Description
Page 486 of 695


DHCP server lease submenu is used to monitor and manage server's leases. The issued leases are
showed here as dynamic entries. You can also add static leases to issue the definite client
(determined by MAC address) the specified IP address.
Generally, the DHCP lease it allocated as follows:
1. an unused lease is in waiting state
2. if a client asks for an IP address, the server chooses one
3. if the client will receive statically assigned address, the lease becomes offered, and then
bound with the respective lease time
4. if the client will receive a dynamic address (taken from an IP address pool), the router sends a
ping packet and waits for answer for 0.5 seconds. During this time, the lease is marked testing
5. in case, the address does not respond, the lease becomes offered, and then bound with the
respective lease time
6. in other case, the lease becomes busy for the lease time (there is a command to retest all busy
addresses), and the client's request remains unanswered (the client will try again shortly)
A client may free the leased address. When the dynamic lease is removed, and the allocated address
is returned to the address pool. But the static lease becomes busy until the client will reacquire the
address.
Note that the IP addresses assigned statically are not probed.
active-address ( read-only: IP address ) - actual IP address for this lease
active-client-id ( read-only: text ) - actual client-id of the client
active-mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - actual MAC address of the client
active-server ( read-only: ) - actual dhcp server, which serves this client
address ( IP address ) - specify ip address (or ip pool) for static lease
• 0.0.0.0 - use pool from server
agent-circuit-id ( read-only: text ) - circuit ID of DHCP relay agent
agent-remote-id ( read-only: text ) - Remote ID, set by DHCP relay agent
block-access ( yes | no ; default: no ) - block access for this client (drop packets from this client)
client-id ( text ; default: "" ) - if specified, must match DHCP 'client identifier' option of the
request
expires-after ( read-only: time ) - time until lease expires
host-name ( read-only: text ) - shows host name option from last received DHCP request
lease-time ( time ; default: 0s ) - time that the client may use an address
• 0s - lease will never expire
mac-address ( MAC address ; default: 00:00:00:00:00:00 ) - if specified, must match MAC
address of the client
radius ( read-only: yes | no ) - shows, whether this dynamic lease is authenticated by RADIUS or
not
Page 487 of 695


rate-limit ( read-only: text ; default: "" ) - sets rate limit for active lease. Format is:
rx-rate[/tx-rate] [rx-burst-rate[/tx-burst-rate] [rx-burst-threshold[/tx-burst-threshold]
[rx-burst-time[/tx-burst-time]]]]. All rates should be numbers with optional 'k' (1,000s) or 'M'
(1,000,000s). If tx-rate is not specified, rx-rate is as tx-rate too. Same goes for tx-burst-rate and
tx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-time. If both rx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-threshold are not
specified (but burst-rate is specified), rx-rate and tx-rate is used as burst thresholds. If both
rx-burst-time and tx-burst-time are not specified, 1s is used as default.
rx-rate ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximal receive bitrate to the client (for users it is upload bitrate))
• 0 - no limitation
server ( read-only: name ) - server name which serves this client
status ( read-only: waiting | testing | authorizing | busy | offered | bound ) - lease status:
• waiting - not used static lease
• testing - testing whether this address is used or not (only for dynamic leases) by pinging it with
timeout of 0.5s
• authorizing - waiting for response from radius server
• busy - this address is assigned statically to a client or already exists in the network, so it can not
be leased
• offered - server has offered this lease to a client, but did not receive confirmation from the
client
• bound - server has received client's confirmation that it accepts offered address, it is using it
now and will free the address not later, than the lease time will be over
tx-rate ( integer ; default: 0 ) - maximal transmit bitrate to the client (for users it is download
bitrate))
• 0 - no limitation
Command Description
check-status - Check status of a given busy dynamic lease, and free it in case of no response
make-static - convert a dynamic lease to static one
Notes
If rate-limit is specified, a simple queue is added with corresponding parameters when lease enters
bound state. Arp entry is added right after adding of queue is done (only if add-arp is enabled for
dhcp server). To be sure, that client cannot use his ip address without getting dhcp lease and thus
avoiding rate-limit, reply-only mode must be used on that ethernet interface.
Even though client address may be changed (with adding a new item) in lease print list, it will not
change for the client. It is true for any changes in the DHCP server configuration because of the
nature of the DHCP protocol. Client tries to renew assigned IP address only when half a lease time
is past (it tries to renew several times). Only when full lease time is past and IP address was not
renewed, new lease is asked (rebind operation).
the deault mac-address value will never work! You should specify a correct MAC address there.
Example
Page 488 of 695


To assign 10.5.2.100 static IP address for the existing DHCP client (shown in the lease table as item
#0):
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server lease> print

Flags: X - disabled, H - hotspot, D - dynamic
# ADDRESS MAC-ADDRESS EXPIRES-AFTER SERVER STATUS
0 D 10.5.2.90 00:04:EA:C6:0E:40 1h48m59s switch bound
1 D 10.5.2.91 00:04:EA:99:63:C0 1h42m51s switch bound
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server lease> add copy-from=0 address=10.5.2.100
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server lease> print
Flags: X - disabled, H - hotspot, D - dynamic
# ADDRESS MAC-ADDRESS EXPIRES-AFTER SERVER STATUS
1 D 10.5.2.91 00:04:EA:99:63:C0 1h42m18s switch bound
2 10.5.2.100 00:04:EA:C6:0E:40 1h48m26s switch bound
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server lease>
DHCP Alert
Home menu level: /ip dhcp-server alert
Description
To find any rogue DHCP servers as soon as they appear in your network, DHCP Alert tool can be
used. It will monitor ethernet for all DHCP replies and check, whether this reply comes from a valid
DHCP server. If reply from unknown DHCP server is detected, alert gets triggered:
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server alert>/log print
00:34:23 dhcp,critical,error,warning,info,debug dhcp alert on Public:
discovered unknown dhcp server, mac 00:02:29:60:36:E7, ip 10.5.8.236
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server alert>
When the system alerts about a rogue DHCP server, it can execute a custom script.
As DHCP replies can be unicast, rogue dhcp detector may not receive any offer to other dhcp
clients at all. To deal with this, rogue dhcp server acts as a dhcp client as well - it sends out dhcp
discover requests once a minute
alert-timeout ( none | time ; default: none ) - time, after which alert will be forgotten. If after that
time the same server will be detected, new alert will be generated
• none - infinite time
interface ( name ) - interface, on which to run rogue DHCP server finder
invalid-server ( read-only: text ) - list of MAC addresses of detected unknown DHCP servers.
Server is removed from this list after alert-timeout
on-alert ( text ) - script to run, when an unknown DHCP server is detected
valid-server ( text ) - list of MAC addresses of valid DHCP servers
Notes
All alerts on an interface can be cleared at any time using command: /ip dhcp-server alert
reset-alert <interface>
Page 489 of 695


Note, that e-mail can be sent, using /system logging action add target=email
DHCP Option
Home menu level: /ip dhcp-server option
Description
With help of DHCP Option, it is possible to define additional custom options for DHCP Server.
code ( integer : 1 ..254 ) - dhcp option code. All codes are available at
http://www.iana.org/assignments/bootp-dhcp-parameters
name ( name ) - descriptive name of the option
value ( text ) - parameter's value in form of a string. If the string begins with "0x", it is assumed as
a hexadecimal value
Notes
The defined options you can use in /ip dhcp-server network submenu
According to the DHCP protocol, a parameter is returned to the DHCP client only if it requests this
parameter, specifying the respective code in DHCP request Parameter-List (code 55) attribute. If the
code is not included in Parameter-List attribute, DHCP server will not send it to the DHCP client.
Example
This example shows how to set DHCP server to reply on DHCP client's Hostname request (code
12) with value Host-A.
Add an option named Option-Hostname with code 12 (Hostname) and value Host-A:
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server option> add name=Hostname code=12 \

value="Host-A"
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server option> print
# NAME CODE VALUE
0 Option-Hostname 12 Host-A
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server option>
Use this option in DHCP server network list:

[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server network> add address=10.1.0.0/24 \
\... gateway=10.1.0.1 dhcp-option=Option-Hostname dns-server=159.148.60.20
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server network> print detail
0 address=10.1.0.0/24 gateway=10.1.0.1 dns-server=159.148.60.20
dhcp-option=Option-Hostname
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server network>
Now the DHCP server will reply with its Hostname Host-A to DHCP client (if requested)
DHCP Relay
Page 490 of 695


Home menu level: /ip dhcp-relay
Description
DHCP Relay is just a proxy that is able to receive a DHCP request and resend it to the real DHCP
server
dhcp-server ( text ) - list of DHCP servers' IP addresses which should the DHCP requests be
forwarded to
delay-threshold ( time ; default: none ) - if secs field in DHCP packet is smaller than
delay-threshold, then this packet is ignored
interface ( name ) - interface name the DHCP relay will be working on
local-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the unique IP address of this DHCP relay needed
for DHCP server to distinguish relays:
• 0.0.0.0 - the IP address will be chosen automatically
name ( name ) - descriptive name for relay
Notes
DHCP relay does not choose the particular DHCP server in the dhcp-server list, it just sent to all the
listed servers.
Example
To add a DHCP relay named relay on ether1 interface resending all received requests to the
10.0.0.1 DHCP server:
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-relay> add name=relay interface=ether1 \

\... dhcp-server=10.0.0.1 disabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-relay> print
# NAME INTERFACE DHCP-SERVER LOCAL-ADDRESS
0 relay ether1 10.0.0.1 0.0.0.0
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-relay>
Command name: /ip dhcp-server setup
Command Description
addresses to give out ( text ) - the pool of IP addresses DHCP server should lease to the clients
dhcp address space ( IP address | netmask ; default: 192.168.0.0/24 ) - network the DHCP server
will lease to the clients
dhcp relay ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the IP address of the DHCP relay between the DHCP
server and the DHCP clients
Page 491 of 695


dhcp server interface ( name ) - interface to run DHCP server on
dns servers ( IP address ) - IP address of the appropriate DNS server to be propagated to the
DHCP clients
gateway ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the default gateway of the leased network
lease time ( time ; default: 3d ) - the time the lease will be valid
Notes
Depending on current settings and answers to the previous questions, default values of following
questions may be different. Some questions may disappear if they become redundant (for example,
there is no use of asking for 'relay' when the server will lend the directly connected network)
Example
To configure DHCP server on ether1 interface to lend addresses from 10.0.0.2 to 10.0.0.254 which
belong to the 10.0.0.0/24 network with 10.0.0.1 gateway and 159.148.60.2 DNS server for the time
of 3 days:
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server> setup

Select interface to run DHCP server on
dhcp server interface: ether1
Select network for DHCP addresses
dhcp address space: 10.0.0.0/24
Select gateway for given network
gateway for dhcp network: 10.0.0.1
Select pool of ip addresses given out by DHCP server
addresses to give out: 10.0.0.2-10.0.0.254
Select DNS servers
dns servers: 159.148.60.20
Select lease time
lease time: 3d
The wizard has made the following configuration based on the answers above:
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server> print

0 dhcp1 ether1 0.0.0.0 dhcp_pool1 3d no
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server> network print
# ADDRESS GATEWAY DNS-SERVER WINS-SERVER DOMAIN
0 10.0.0.0/24 10.0.0.1 159.148.60.20
[admin@MikroTik] ip dhcp-server> /ip pool print
# NAME RANGES
0 dhcp_pool1 10.0.0.2-10.0.0.254
General Information
Page 492 of 695


Dynamic Addressing, using DHCP-Relay
Let us consider that you have several IP networks 'behind' other routers, but you want to keep all
DHCP servers on a single router. To do this, you need a DHCP relay on your network which relies
DHCP requests from clients to DHCP server.
This example will show you how to configure a DHCP server and a DHCP relay which serve 2 IP
networks - 192.168.1.0/24 and 192.168.2.0/24 that are behind a router DHCP-Relay.
IP addresses of DHCP-Server:
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip address> print
0 192.168.0.1/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 To-DHCP-Relay
1 10.1.0.2/24 10.1.0.0 10.1.0.255 Public
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip address>
Page 493 of 695


IP addresses of DHCP-Relay:
[admin@DHCP-Relay] ip address> print
0 192.168.0.1/24 192.168.0.0 192.168.0.255 To-DHCP-Server
1 192.168.1.1/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 Local1
2 192.168.2.1/24 192.168.2.0 192.168.2.255 Local2
[admin@DHCP-Relay] ip address>
To setup 2 DHCP Servers on DHCP-Server router add 2 pools. For networks 192.168.1.0/24 and
192.168.2.0:
/ip pool add name=Local1-Pool ranges=192.168.1.11-192.168.1.100
/ip pool add name=Local1-Pool ranges=192.168.2.11-192.168.2.100
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip pool> print

# NAME RANGES
0 Local1-Pool 192.168.1.11-192.168.1.100
1 Local2-Pool 192.168.2.11-192.168.2.100
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip pool>
Create DHCP Servers:

/ip dhcp-server add interface=To-DHCP-Relay relay=192.168.1.1 \
address-pool=Local1-Pool name=DHCP-1 disabled=no
/ip dhcp-server add interface=To-DHCP-Relay relay=192.168.2.1 \
address-pool=Local2-Pool name=DHCP-2 disabled=no
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip dhcp-server> print

0 DHCP-1 To-DHCP-Relay 192.168.1.1 Local1-Pool 3d00:00:00
1 DHCP-2 To-DHCP-Relay 192.168.2.1 Local2-Pool 3d00:00:00
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip dhcp-server>
Configure respective networks:

/ip dhcp-server network add address=192.168.1.0/24 gateway=192.168.1.1 \
dns-server=159.148.60.20
dns-server 159.148.60.20
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip dhcp-server network> print

# ADDRESS GATEWAY DNS-SERVER WINS-SERVER DOMAIN
0 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.1 159.148.60.20
1 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.2.1 159.148.60.20
[admin@DHCP-Server] ip dhcp-server network>
Configuration of DHCP-Server is done. Now let's configure DHCP-Relay:

/ip dhcp-relay add name=Local1-Relay interface=Local1 \
dhcp-server=192.168.0.1 local-address=192.168.1.1 disabled=no
/ip dhcp-relay add name=Local2-Relay interface=Local2 \
dhcp-server=192.168.0.1 local-address=192.168.2.1 disabled=no
[admin@DHCP-Relay] ip dhcp-relay> print

# NAME INTERFACE DHCP-SERVER LOCAL-ADDRESS
0 Local1-Relay Local1 192.168.0.1 192.168.1.1
1 Local2-Relay Local2 192.168.0.1 192.168.2.1
[admin@DHCP-Relay] ip dhcp-relay>
IP Address assignment, using FreeRADIUS Server

Let us consider that we want to assign IP addresses for clients, using the RADIUS server.
Page 494 of 695


We assume that you already have installed FreeRADIUS. Just add these lines to specified files:
users file:
00:0B:6B:31:02:4B Auth-Type := Local, Password == ""
Framed-IP-Address = 192.168.0.55
clients.conf file
client 172.16.0.1 {
secret = MySecret
shortname = Server
}
Configure Radius Client on RouterOS:

/radius add service=dhcp address=172.16.0.2 secret=MySecret
[admin@DHCP-Server] radius> print detail

Flags: X - disabled
0 service=dhcp called-id="" domain="" address=172.16.0.2 secret="MySecret"
authentication-port=1812 accounting-port=1813 timeout=00:00:00.300
accounting-backup=no realm=""
[admin@DHCP-Server] radius>
Setup DHCP Server:

1. Create an address pool:
/ip pool add name=Radius-Clients ranges=192.168.0.11-192.168.0.100
2. Add a DHCP server:

/ip dhcp-server add address-pool=Radius-Clients use-radius=yes interface=Local \
disabled=no
3. Configure DHCP networks:
Page 495 of 695


dns-server=159.148.147.194,159.148.60.20
Now the client with MAC address 00:0B:6B:31:02:4B will always receive IP address
192.168.0.55.
Page 496 of 695


DNS Client and Cache
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Client Configuration and Cache Setup
Description
Notes
Example
Cache Monitoring
Static DNS Entries
Description
Example
Flushing DNS cache
Command Description
Example
General Information
Summary
DNS cache is used to minimize DNS requests to an external DNS server as well as to minimize
DNS resolution time. This is a simple recursive DNS server with local items.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip dns
Standards and Technologies: DNS
Related Documents

• HotSpot Gateway
Page 497 of 695


•
Description
The MikroTik router with DNS cache feature enabled can be set as a primary DNS server for any
DNS-compliant clients. Moreover, MikroTik router can be specified as a primary DNS server under
its dhcp-server settings. When the DNS cache is enabled, the MikroTik router responds to DNS
TCP and UDP requests on port 53.
• http://www.freesoft.org/CIE/Course/Section2/3.htm
• http://www.networksorcery.com/enp/protocol/dns.htm
• RFC1035
Client Configuration and Cache Setup

Home menu level: /ip dns
Description
DNS client is used to provide domain name resolution for router itself as well as for the P2P clients
connected to the router.
allow-remote-requests ( yes | no ) - specifies whether to allow network requests
cache-max-ttl ( time ; default: 1w ) - specifies maximum time-to-live for cahce records. In other
words, cache records will expire after cache-max-ttl time.
cache-size ( integer : 512 ..10240 ; default: 2048KiB ) - specifies the size of DNS cache in KiB
cache-used ( read-only: integer ) - displays the currently used cache size in KiB
primary-dns ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - primary DNS server
secondary-dns ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - secondary DNS server
Notes
If the property use-peer-dns under /ip dhcp-client is set to yes then primary-dns under /ip dns
will change to a DNS address given by DHCP Server.
Example
To set 159.148.60.2 as the primary DNS server and allow the router to be used as a DNS server, do
the following:
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns> set primary-dns=159.148.60.2 \

\... allow-remote-requests=yes
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns> print
primary-dns: 159.148.60.2
Page 498 of 695


secondary-dns: 0.0.0.0
allow-remote-requests: yes
cache-size: 2048KiB
cache-max-ttl: 1w
cache-used: 17KiB
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns>
Cache Monitoring
Home menu level: /ip dns cache
address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address of the host
name ( read-only: name ) - DNS name of the host
ttl ( read-only: time ) - remaining time-to-live for the record
Static DNS Entries

Home menu level: /ip dns static
Description
The MikroTik RouterOS has an embedded DNS server feature in DNS cache. It allows you to link
the particular domain names with the respective IP addresses and advertize these links to the DNS
clients using the router as their DNS server.
address ( IP address ) - IP address to resolve domain name with
name ( text ) - DNS name to be resolved to a given IP address
ttl ( time ) - time-to-live of the DNS record
Example
To add a static DNS entry for www.example.com to be resolved to 10.0.0.1 IP address:
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns static> add name www.example.com address=10.0.0.1
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns static> print
# NAME ADDRESS TTL
0 aaa.aaa.a 123.123.123.123 1d
1 www.example.com 10.0.0.1 1d
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns static>
Flushing DNS cache

Command name: /ip dns cache flush
Command Description
flush - clears internal DNS cache
Page 499 of 695


Example
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns> cache flush
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns> print
primary-dns: 159.148.60.2
secondary-dns: 0.0.0.0
allow-remote-requests: yes
cache-size: 2048 KiB
cache-max-ttl: 1w
cache-used: 10 KiB
[admin@MikroTik] ip dns>
Page 500 of 695


HotSpot Gateway
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
HotSpot Interface Setup
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
HotSpot Server Profiles
Notes
Example
Description
HotSpot Users
Description
Description
HotSpot Cookies
Description
Notes
Example
HTTP-level Walled Garden
Description
Notes
Example
IP-level Walled Garden
Description
Example
One-to-one NAT static address bindings
Page 501 of 695


Description
Notes
Active Host List
Description
Command Description
Service Port
Description
Example
Customizing HotSpot: Firewall Section
Description
Customizing HotSpot: HTTP Servlet Pages
Description
Notes
Example
Possible Error Messages
Description
HotSpot How-to's
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik HotSpot Gateway enables providing of public network access for clients using
wireless or wired network connections.
HotSpot Gateway features:
• authentication of clients using local client database, or RADIUS server
• accounting using local database, or RADIUS server
• Walled-garden system (accessing some web pages without authorization)
Quick Setup Guide

The most noticeable difference in user experience setting up HotSpot system in version 2.9 from the
previous RouterOS versions is that it has become in order of magnitude easier to set up a correctly
working HotSpot system.
Given a router with two interfaces: Local (where HotSpot clients are connected to) and Public,
which is connected to the Internet. To set up HotSpot on the Local interface:
1. first, a valid IP config is required on both interfaces. This can be done with /setup command.
In this example we will assume the configuration with DHCP server on the Local interface
2. valid DNS configuration must be set up in the /ip dns submenu
3. To put HotSpot on the Local interface, using the same IP address pool as DHCP server uses
Page 502 of 695


for that interface: /ip hotspot add interface=local address-pool=dhcp-pool-1
4. and finally, add at least one HotSpot user: /ip hotspot user add name=admin
These simple steps should be sufficient to enable HotSpot system

Please find many HotSpot How-to's, which will answer most of your questions about configuring a
HotSpot gateway, at the end of this manual. It is still recommended that you read and understand all
the Description section below before deploying a HotSpot system.
If this does not work:
• check that /ip dns contains valid DNS servers, try to /ping www.mikrotik.com to see, that
DNS resolving works
• make sure that connection tracking is enabled: /ip firewall connection tracking set
enabled=yes
Specifications
Packages required: hotspot , dhcp (optional)
License required: level1 (Limited to 1 active user) , level3 (Limited to 1 active user) , level4
(Limited to 200 active users) , level5 (Limited to 500 active users) , level6
Home menu level: /ip hotspot
Standards and Technologies: ICMP , DHCP
Description
MikroTik HotSpot Gateway should have at least two network interfaces:
1. HotSpot interface, which is used to connect HotSpot clients
2. LAN/WAN interface, which is used to access network resources. For example, DNS and
RADIUS server(s) should be accessible
The diagram below shows a sample HotSpot setup.
Page 503 of 695


The HotSpot interface should have an IP address assigned to it. Physical network connection has to
be established between the HotSpot user's computer and the gateway. It can be wireless (the
wireless card should be registered to AP), or wired (the NIC card should be connected to a hub or a
switch).
Note that the most noticeable difference in user experience setting up HotSpot system in version 2.9
from the previous RouterOS versions is that it has become in order of magnitude easier to set up a
correctly working HotSpot system.
Introduction to HotSpot
HotSpot is a way to authorize users to access some network resources. It does not provide traffic
encryption. To log in, users may use almost any web browser (either HTTP or HTTPS protocol), so
they are not required to install additional software. The gateway is accounting the uptime and
amount of traffic each of its clients have used, and also can send this information to a RADIUS
server. The HotSpot system may limit each particular user's bitrate, total amount of traffic, uptime
and some other parameters mentioned further in this document.
The HotSpot system is targeted to provide authentication within a local network (to access the
Internet), but may as well be used to authorize access from outer networks to access local resources.
Configuring Walled Garden feature, it is possible to allow users to access some web pages without
the need of prior authentication.
Getting Address
Page 504 of 695


First of all, a client must get an IP address. It may be set on the client statically, or leased from a
DHCP server. The DHCP server may provide ways of binding lent IP addresses to clients MAC
addresses, if required. The HotSpot system does not care how did a client get an address before
he/she gets to the HotSpot login page.
Moreover, HotSpot server may automatically and transparently change any IP address (yes,
meaning really any IP address) of a client to a valid unused address from the selected IP pool. This
feature gives a possibility to provide a network access (for example, Internet access) to mobile
clients that are not willing (or are disallowed, not qualified enough or otherwise unable) to change
their networking settings. The users will not notice the translation (i.e., there will not be any
changes in the users' config), but the router itself will see completely different (from what is
actually set on each client) source IP addresses on packets sent from the clients (even firewall
mangle table will 'see' the translated addresses). This technique is called one-to-one NAT, but is
also known as "Universal Client" as that is how it was called in the RouterOS version 2.8.
One-to-one NAT accepts any incoming address from a connected network interface and performs a
network address translation so that data may be routed through standard IP networks. Clients may
use any preconfigured addresses. If the one-to-one NAT feature is set to translate a client's address
to a public IP address, then the client may even run a server or any other service that requires a
public IP address. This NAT is changing source address of each packet just after it is received by
the router (it is like source NAT that is performed earlier, so that even firewall mangle table, which
normally 'sees' received packets unaltered, can only 'see' the translated address).
Note also that arp mode must be enabled on the interface you use one-to-one NAT on.
Before the authentication

When enabling HotSpot on an interface, the system automatically sets up everything needed to
show login page for all clients that are not logged in. This is done by adding dynamic destination
NAT rules, which you can observe on a working HotSpot system. These rules are needed to redirect
all HTTP and HTTPS requests from unauthorized users to the HotSpot servlet (i.e., the
authentication procedure, e.g., the login page). Other rules that are also inserted, we will describe
later in a special section of this manual.
In most common setup, opening any HTTP page will bring up the HotSpot servlet login page
(which can be customized extensively, as will be described later on). As normal user behavior is to
open web pages by their DNS names, a valid DNS configuration should be set up on the HotSpot
gateway itself (it is possible to reconfigure the gateway so that it will not require local DNS
configuration, but such a configuration is impractical and thus not recommended).
Walled Garden
You may wish not to require authorization for some services (for example to let clients access the
web server of your company without registration), or even to require authorization only to a number
of services (for example, for users to be allowed to access an internal file server or another
restricted area). This can be done by setting up Walled Garden system.
When a not logged-in user requests a service allowed in the Walled Garden configuration, the
HotSpot gateway does not intercept it, or in case of HTTP, simply redirects the request to the
original destination (or to a specified parent proxy). When a user is logged in, there is no effect of
this table on him/her.
Page 505 of 695


To implement the Walled Garden feature for HTTP requests, an embedded web proxy server has
been designed, so all the requests from not authorized users are really going through this proxy.
Note that the embedded proxy server does not have caching function yet. Also note that this
embedded proxy server is in the system software package and does not require web-proxy package.
It is configurable under /ip proxy
Authentication
• HTTP PAP - simplest method, which shows the HotSpot login page and expect to get the
authentication info (i.e. username and password) in plain text. Note that passwords are not
being encrypted when transferred over the network. An another use of this method is the
possibility of hard-coded authentication information in the servlet's login page simply creating
the appropriate link.
• HTTP CHAP - standard method, which includes CHAP challenge in the login page. The
CHAP MD5 hash challenge is to be used together with the user's password for computing the
string which will be sent to the HotSpot gateway. The hash result (as a password) together with
username is sent over network to HotSpot service (so, password is never sent in plain text over
IP network). On the client side, MD5 algorithm is implemented in JavaScript applet, so if a
browser does not support JavaScript (like, for example, Internet Explorer 2.0 or some PDA
browsers), it will not be able to authenticate users. It is possible to allow unencrypted
passwords to be accepted by turning on HTTP PAP authentication method, but it is not
recommended (because of security considerations) to use that feature.
• HTTPS - the same as HTTP PAP, but using SSL protocol for encrypting transmissions.
HotSpot user just send his/her password without additional hashing (note that there is no need
to worry about plain-text password exposure over the network, as the transmission itself is
encrypted). In either case, HTTP POST method (if not possible, then - HTTP GET method) is
used to send data to the HotSpot gateway.
• HTTP cookie - after each successful login, a cookie is sent to web browser and the same
cookie is added to active HTTP cookie list. Next time the same user will try to log in, web
browser will send http cookie. This cookie will be compared with the one stored on the HotSpot
gateway and only if source MAC address and randomly generated ID match the ones stored on
the gateway, user will be automatically logged in using the login information (username and
password pair) was used when the cookie was first generated. Otherwise, the user will be
prompted to log in, and in the case authentication is successful, old cookie will be removed
from the local HotSpot active cookie list and the new one with different random ID and
expiration time will be added to the list and sent to the web browser. It is also possible to erase
cookie on user manual logoff (not in the default server pages). This method may only be used
together with HTTP PAP, HTTP CHAP or HTTPS methods as there would be nothing to
generate cookies in the first place otherwise.
• MAC address - try to authenticate clients as soon as they appear in the hosts list (i.e., as soon
as they have sent any packet to the HotSpot server), using client's MAC address as username
There are currently 5 different authentication methods. You can use one or more of them
simultaneously:
HotSpot can authenticate users consulting the local user database or a RADIUS server (local
database is consulted first, then - a RADIUS server). In case of HTTP cookie authentication via
RADIUS server, the router will send the same information to the server as was used when the
cookie was first generated. If authentication is done locally, profile corresponding to that user is
Page 506 of 695


used, otherwise (in case RADIUS reply did not contain the group for that user) the default profile is
used to set default values for parameters, which are not set in RADIUS access-accept message. For
more information on how the interaction with a RADIUS server works, see the respective manual
section.
The HTTP PAP method also makes it possible to authenticate by requesting the page
/login?username=username&password=password . In case you want to log in using telnet connection,
the exact HTTP request would look like that: GET
/login?username=username&password=password HTTP/1.0 (note that the request is
case-sensitive)
Authorization
After authentication, user gets access to the Internet, and receives some limitations (which are user
profile specific). HotSpot may also perform a one-to-one NAT for the client, so that a particular
user would always receive the same IP address regardless of what PC is he/she working at.
The system will automatically detect and redirect requests to a proxy server a client is using (if any;
it may be set in his/her settings to use an unknown to us proxy server) to the proxy server embedded
in the router.
Authorization may be delegated to a RADIUS server, which delivers similar configuration options
as the local database. For any user requiring authorization, a RADIUS server gets queried first, and
if no reply received, the local database is examined. RADIUS server may send a Change of
Authorization request according to standards to alter the previously accepted parameters.
Advertisement
The same proxy used for unauthorized clients to provide Walled-Garden facility, may also be used
for authorized users to show them advertisement popups. Transparent proxy for authorized users
allows to monitor http requests of the clients and to take some action if required. It enables the
possibility to open status page even if client is logged in by mac address, as well as to show
advertisements time after time
When time has come to show an advertisement, the server redirects client's web browser to the
status page. Only requests, which provide html content, are redirected (images and other content
will not be affected). The status page displays the advertisement and next advertise-interval is used
to schedule next advertisement. If status page is unable to display an advertisement for configured
timeout starting from moment, when it is scheduled to be shown, client access is blocked within
walled-garden (as unauthorized clients are). Client is unblocked when the scheduled page is finally
shown. Note that if popup windows are blocked in the browser, the link on the status page may be
used to open the advertisement manually.
While client is blocked, FTP and other services will not be allowed. Thus requiring client to open
an advertisement for any Internet activity not especially allowed by the Walled-Garden.
Accounting
The HotSpot system implement accounting internally, you are not required to do anything special
for it to work. The accounting information for each user may be sent to a RADIUS server.
Page 507 of 695


Configuration menus
• /ip hotspot - HotSpot servers on particular interfaces (one server per interface). HotSpot server
must be added in this menu in order for HotSpot system to work on an interface
• /ip hotspot profile - HotSpot server profiles. Settings, which affect login procedure for
HotSpot clients are configured here. More than one HotSpot servers may use the same profile
• /ip hotspot host - dynamic list of active network hosts on all HotSpot interfaces. Here you can
also find IP address bindings of the one-to-one NAT
• /ip hotspot ip-binding - rules for binding IP addresses to hosts on hotspot interfaces
• /ip hotspot service-port - address translation helpers for the one-to-one NAT
• /ip hotspot walled-garden - Walled Garden rules at HTTP level (DNS names, HTTP request
substrings)
• /ip hotspot walled-garden ip - Walled Garden rules at IP level (IP addresses, IP protocols)
• /ip hotspot user - local HotSpot system users
• /ip hotspot user profile - local HotSpot system users profiles (user groups)
• /ip hotspot active - dynamic list of all authenticated HotSpot users
• /ip hotspot cookie - dynamic list of all valid HTTP cookies
Command name: /ip hotspot setup
Command Description
address pool of network ( name ) - IP address pool for the HotSpot network
dns name ( text ) - DNS domain name of the HotSpot gateway (will be statically configured on the
local DNS proxy
dns servers ( IP address | IP address ) - DNS servers for HotSpot clients
hotspot interface ( name ) - interface to run HotSpot on
ip address of smtp server ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address of the SMTP server to
redirect SMTP requests (TCP port 25) to
• 0.0.0.0 - no redirect
local address of network ( IP address ; default: 10.5.50.1/24 ) - HotSpot gateway address for the
interface
masquerade network ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to masquerade the HotSpot network
name of local hotspot user ( text ; default: admin ) - username of one automatically created user
passphrase ( text ) - the passphrase of the certificate you are importing
password for the user ( text ) - password for the automatically created user
select certificate ( name | none | import-other-certificate ) - choose SSL certificate from the list of
the imported certificates
• none - do not use SSL
• import-other-certificate - setup the certificates not imported yet, and ask this question again
Page 508 of 695


Notes
Depending on current settings and answers to the previous questions, default values of following
questions may be different. Some questions may disappear if they become redundant
Example
To configure HotSpot on ether1 interface (which is already configured with address of
192.0.2.1/25), and adding user admin with password rubbish:
[admin@MikroTik] > ip hotspot setup

hotspot interface: ether1
local address of network: 192.0.2.1/24
masquerade network: yes
address pool of network: 192.0.2.2-192.0.2.126
select certificate: none
ip address of smtp server: 0.0.0.0
dns servers: 192.0.2.254
dns name: hs.example.net
name of local hotspot user: admin
password for the user: rubbish
[admin@MikroTik] >
HotSpot Interface Setup

Home menu level: /ip hotspot
Description
HotSpot system is put on individual interfaces. You can run completely different HotSpot
configurations on different interfaces
addresses-per-mac ( integer | unlimited ; default: 2 ) - number of IP addresses allowed to be bind
with any particular MAC address (it is a small chance to reduce denial of service attack based on
taking over all free IP addresses)
• unlimited - number of IP addresses per one MAC address is not limited
address-pool ( name | none ; default: none ) - IP address pool name for performing one-to-one
NAT. You can choose not to use the one-to-one NAT
• none - do not perform one-to-one NAT for the clients of this HotSpot interface
HTTPS ( read-only: flag ) - whether the HTTPS service is actually running on the interface (i.e., it
is set up in the server profile, and a valid certificate is imported in the router)
idle-timeout ( time | none ; default: 00:05:00 ) - idle timeout (maximal period of inactivity) for
unauthorized clients. It is used to detect, that client is not using outer networks (e.g. Internet), i.e.,
there is NO TRAFFIC coming from that client and going through the router. Reaching the timeout,
user will be dropped of the host list, and the address used buy the user will be freed
• none - do not timeout idle users
interface ( name ) - interface to run HotSpot on
Page 509 of 695


ip-of-dns-name ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address of the HotSpot gateway's DNS name set in
the HotSpot interface profile
keepalive-timeout ( time | none ; default: none ) - keepalive timeout for unauthorized clients. Used
to detect, that the computer of the client is alive and reachable. If check will fail during this period,
user will be dropped of the host list, and the address used buy the user will be freed
• none - do not timeout unreachable users
profile ( name ; default: default ) - default HotSpot profile for the interface
Command Description
reset-html ( name ) - overwrite the existing HotSpot servlet with the original HTML files. It is
used if you have changed the servlet and it is not working after that
Notes
addresses-per-mac property works only if address pool is defined. Also note that in case you are
authenticating users connected through a router, than all the IP addresses will seem to have come
from one MAC address.
Example
To add HotSpot system to the local interface, allowing the system to do one-to-one NAT for each
client (addresses from the HS-real address pool will be used for the NAT):
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot> add interface=local address-pool=HS-real

[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot> print
Flags: X - disabled, I - invalid, S - HTTPS
# NAME INTERFACE ADDRESS-POOL PROFILE IDLE-TIMEOUT
0 hs-local local HS-real default 00:05:00
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot>
HotSpot Server Profiles

Home menu level: /ip hotspot profile
dns-name ( text ) - DNS name of the HotSpot server. This is the DNS name used as the name of
the HotSpot server (i.e., it appears as the location of the login page). This name will automatically
be added as a static DNS entry in the DNS cache
hotspot-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address for HotSpot service
html-directory ( text ; default: "" ) - name of the directory (accessible with FTP), which stores the
HTML servlet pages (when changed, the default pages are automatically copied into specified
directory if it does not exist already)
http-cookie-lifetime ( time ; default: 3d ) - validity time of HTTP cookies
http-proxy ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the address of the proxy server the HotSpot service
will use as a proxy server for all those requests intercepted by Universal Proxy system and not
defined in the /ip proxy direct list. If not specified, the address defined in parent-proxy parameter of
Page 510 of 695


/ip proxy. If that is absent too, the request will be resolved by the local proxy
login-by ( multiple choice: cookie | http-chap | http-pap | https | mac | trial ; default:
cookie,http-chap ) - which authentication methods to use
• cookie - use HTTP cookies to authenticate, without asking user credentials. Other method will
be used in case the client does not have cookie, or the stored username and password pair are
not valid anymore since the last authentication. May only be used together with other HTTP
authentication methods (HTTP-PAP, HTTP-CHAP or HTTPS), as in the other case there would
be no way for the cookies to be generated in the first place
• http-chap - use CHAP challenge-response method with MD5 hashing algorithm for hashing
passwords. This way it is possible to avoid sending clear-text passwords over an insecure
network. This is the default authentication method
• http-pap - use plain-text authentication over the network. Please note that in case this method
will be used, your user passwords will be exposed on the local networks, so it will be possible
to intercept them
• https - use encrypted SSL tunnel to transfer user communications with the HotSpot server.
Note that in order this to work, a valid certificate must be imported into the router (see a
separate manual on certificate management)
• mac - try to use client's MAC address first as its username. If the matching MAC address exists
in the local user database or on the RADIUS server, the client will be authenticated without
asking to fill the login form
• trial - does not require authentication for a certain amount of time
radius-accounting ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to send RADIUS server accounting
information on each user once in a while (the "while" is defined in the radius-interim-update
property)
radius-default-domain ( text ; default: "" ) - default domain to use for RADIUS requests. It
allows to select different RADIUS servers depending on HotSpot server profile, but may be handful
for single RADIUS server as well.
radius-interim-update ( time | received ; default: received ) - how often to sent cumulative
accounting reports.
• 0s - same as received
• received - use whatever value received from the RADIUS server
rate-limit ( text ; default: "" ) - Rate limitation in form of rx-rate[/tx-rate]
[rx-burst-rate[/tx-burst-rate] [rx-burst-threshold[/tx-burst-threshold] [rx-burst-time[/tx-burst-time]]]]
from the point of view of the router (so "rx" is client upload, and "tx" is client download). All rates
should be numbers with optional 'k' (1,000s) or 'M' (1,000,000s). If tx-rate is not specified, rx-rate is
as tx-rate too. Same goes for tx-burst-rate and tx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-time. If both
rx-burst-threshold and tx-burst-threshold are not specified (but burst-rate is specified), rx-rate and
tx-rate is used as burst thresholds. If both rx-burst-time and tx-burst-time are not specified, 1s is
used as default
smtp-server ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - default SMTP server to be used to redirect
unconditionally all user SMTP requests to
split-user-domain ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to split username from domain name when
the username is given in "user@domain" or in "domain\user" format
ssl-certificate ( name | none ; default: none ) - name of the SSL certificate to use for HTTPS
authentication. Not used for other authentication methods
Page 511 of 695


trial-uptime ( time | time ; default: 30m/1d ) - is used only when authentication method is trial.
Specifies the amount of time the user identified by MAC address can use hotspot services without
authentication and the time, that has to pass that the user is allowed to use hotspot services again
trial-user-profile ( name ; default: default ) - is used only only when authentication method is
trial. Specifies user profile, that trial users will use
use-radius ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to use RADIUS to authenticate HotSpot users
Notes
If dns-name property is not specified, hotspot-address is used instead. If hotspot-address is also
absent, then both are to be detected automatically.
In order to use RADIUS authentication, the /radius menu must be set up accordingly.
Trial authentication method should allways be used together with one of the other authentication
methods.
Example

Home menu level: /ip hotspot user profile
Description
Article moved to: HotSpot AAA section
HotSpot Users
Description

Home menu level: /ip hotspot active
Description
HotSpot Cookies
Home menu level: /ip hotspot cookie
Description
Page 512 of 695


Cookies can be used for authentication in the Hotspot service
domain ( read-only: text ) - domain name (if split from username)
expires-in ( read-only: time ) - how long the cookie is valid
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - user's MAC address
user ( read-only: name ) - username
Notes
There can be multiple cookies with the same MAC address. For example, there will be a separate
cookie for each web browser on the same computer.
Cookies can expire - that's the way how it is supposed to be. Default validity time for cookies is 3
days (72 hours), but it can be changed for each individual HotSpot server profile, for example :
/ip hotspot profile set default http-cookie-lifetime=1d
Example
To get the list of valid cookies:
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot cookie> print

# USER DOMAIN MAC-ADDRESS EXPIRES-IN
0 ex 01:23:45:67:89:AB 23h54m16s
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot cookie>
HTTP-level Walled Garden

Home menu level: /ip hotspot walled-garden
Description
Walled garden is a system which allows unauthorized use of some resources, but requires
authorization to access other resources. This is useful, for example, to give access to some general
information about HotSpot service provider or billing options.
This menu only manages Walled Garden for HTTP and HTTPS protocols. Other protocols can also
be included in Walled Garden, but that is configured elsewhere (in /ip hotspot walled-garden ip;
see the next section of this manual for details)
action ( allow | deny ; default: allow ) - action to undertake if a packet matches the rule:
• allow - allow the access to the page without prior authorization
• deny - the authorization is required to access this page
dst-address ( IP address ) - IP address of the destination web server
Page 513 of 695


dst-host ( wildcard ; default: "" ) - domain name of the destination web server (this is a wildcard)
dst-port ( integer ; default: "" ) - the TCP port a client has send the request to
method ( text ) - HTTP method of the request
path ( text ; default: "" ) - the path of the request (this is a wildcard)
server ( name ) - name of the HotSpot server this rule applied to
src-address ( IP address ) - IP address of the user sending the request
Notes
Wildcard properties (dst-host and dst-path) match a complete string (i.e., they will not match
"example.com" if they are set to "example"). Available wildcards are '*' (match any number of any
characters) and '?' (match any one character). Regular expressions are also accepted here, but if the
property should be treated as a regular expression, it should start with a colon (':').
Small hits in using regular expressions:
• \\ symbol sequence is used to enter \ character in console
• \. pattern means . only (in regular expressions single dot in pattern means any symbol)
• to show that no symbols are allowed before the given pattern, we use ^ symbol at the
beginning of the pattern
• to specify that no symbols are allowed after the given pattern, we use $ symbol at the end of
the pattern
You can not use path property for HTTPS requests as router can not (and should not - that is what
the HTTPS protocol was made for!) decrypt the request.
Example
To allow unauthorized requests to the www.example.com domain's /paynow.html page:
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot walled-garden> add path="/paynow.html" \

\... dst-host="www.example.com"
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot walled-garden> print
0 dst-host="www.example.com" path="/paynow.html" action=allow
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot walled-garden>
IP-level Walled Garden

Home menu level: /ip hotspot walled-garden ip
Description
This menu is manages Walled Garden for generic IP requests. See the previous section for
managing HTTP and HTTPS protocol specific properties (like the actual DNS name, HTTP method
and path used in requests).
Page 514 of 695


action ( accept | drop | reject ; default: accept ) - action to undertake if a packet matches the rule:
• accept - allow the access to the page without prior authorization
• drop - the authorization is required to access this page
• reject - the authorization is required to access this page, in case the page will be accsessed
withot authorization ICMP reject message host-unreachable will be generated
dst-address ( IP address ) - IP address of the destination web server
dst-host ( text ; default: "" ) - domain name of the destination web server (this is not a regular
expression or a wildcard of any kind). The DNS name specified is resolved to a list of IP addresses
when the rule is added, and all those IP addresses are used
dst-port ( integer ; default: "" ) - the TCP or UDP port (protocol MUST be specified explicitly in
the protocol property) a client has send the request to
protocol ( integer | ddp | egp | encap | ggp | gre | hmp | icmp | idpr-cmtp | igmp | ipencap | ipip |
ipsec-ah | ipsec-esp | iso-tp4 | ospf | pup | rdp | rspf | st | tcp | udp | vmtp | xns-idp | xtp ) - IP protocol
name
server ( name ) - name of the HotSpot server this rule applied to
src-address ( IP address ) - IP address of the user sending the request
Example
One-to-one NAT static address bindings

Home menu level: /ip hotspot ip-binding
Description
You can setup NAT translations statically based on either the original IP address (or IP network), or
the original MAC address. You can also allow some addresses to bypass HotSpot authentication
(i.e., they will be able work without having to log in to the network first) and completely block
some addresses.
address ( IP address | netmask ; default: "" ) - the original IP address or network of the client
mac-address ( MAC address ; default: "" ) - the source MAC address of the client
server ( name | all ; default: all ) - the name of the server the client is connecting to
to-address ( IP address ; default: "" ) - IP address to translate the original client address to. If
address property is given as network, this is the starting address for the translation (i.e., the first
address is translated to to-address, address + 1 to to-address + 1, and so on)
type ( regular | bypassed | blocked ) - type of the static binding entry
• regular - perform a one-to-one NAT translation according to the values set in this entry
• bypassed - perform the translation, but exclude the client from having to log in to the HotSpot
system
• blocked - the translation will not be preformed, and all packets from the host will be dropped
Page 515 of 695


Notes
This is an ordered list, so you can put more specific entries on the top of the list for them to override
the more common that appear lower.
Active Host List

Home menu level: /ip hotspot host
Description
This menu shows all active network hosts that are connected to the HotSpot gateway. This list
includes all one-to-one NAT translations
address ( read-only: IP address ) - the original IP address of the client
authorized ( read-only: flag ) - whether the client is successfully authenticated by the HotSpot
system
blocked ( read-only: flag ) - true, if access is blocked within walled-garden because of expired
advertisement timeout
bridge-port ( read-only: name ) - the actual physical interface, which the host is connected to. This
is used when HotSpot service is put on a bridge interface to determine the host's actual port within
the bridge.
bypass-hotspot ( read-only: flag ) - whether the client does not need to be authorized by the
HotSpot system
bytes-in ( read-only: integer ) - how many bytes did the router receive from the client
bytes-out ( read-only: integer ) - how many bytes did the router send to the client
host-dead-time ( read-only: time ) - how long has the router not received any packets (including
ARP replies, keepalive replies and user traffic) from this host
idle-time ( read-only: time ) - the amount of time has the user been idle
idle-timeout ( read-only: time ) - the exact value of idle-timeout that applies to this user. This
property shows how long should the user stay idle for it to be logged off automatically
keepalive-timeout ( read-only: time ) - the exact value of keepalive-timeout that applies to this
user. This property shows how long should the user's computer stay out of reach for it to be logged
off automatically
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - the actual MAC address of the user
packets-in ( read-only: integer ) - how many packets did the router receive from the client
packets-out ( read-only: integer ) - how many packets did the router send to the client
server ( read-only: name ) - name of the server, which the host is connected to
static ( read-only: flag ) - whether this translation has been taken from the static IP binding list
to-address ( read-only: IP address ) - what address is the original IP address of the host translated
to
Page 516 of 695


uptime ( read-only: time ) - current session time of the user (i.e., how long has the user been in the
active host list)
Command Description
make-binding - copy a dynamic entry from this list to the static IP bindings list ( name ) - item
number ( text ) - custom comment to the static entry to be created ( regular | bypassed | blocked ) -
the type of the static entry
Service Port
Home menu level: /ip hotspot service-port
Description
Just like for classic NAT, the HotSpot embedded one-to-one NAT 'breaks' some protocols that are
incompatible with address translation. To leave these protocols consistent, helper modules must be
used. For the one-to-one NAT the only such a module is for FTP protocol.
name ( read-only: name ) - protocol name
ports ( read-only: integer ) - list of the ports on which the protocol is working
Example
To set the FTP protocol uses both 20 and 21 TCP port:
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot service-port> print

Flags: X - disabled
# NAME PORTS
0 ftp 21
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot service-port> set ftp ports=20,21
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot service-port> print
Flags: X - disabled
# NAME PORTS
0 ftp 20
21
[admin@MikroTik] ip hotspot service-port>
Customizing HotSpot: Firewall Section
Description
Apart from the obvious dynamic entries in the /ip hotspot submenu itself (like hosts and active
users), some additional rules are added in the firewall tables when activating a HotSpot service.
Unlike RouterOS version 2.8, there are relatively few firewall rules added in the firewall as the
main job is made by the one-to-one NAT algorithm.
NAT rules
Page 517 of 695


From /ip firewall nat print dynamic command, you can get something like this (comments follow
after each of the rules):
Putting all HotSpot-related tasks for packets from all HotSpot clients into a separate chain
Redirect all DNS requests to the HotSpot service. The 64872 port provides DNS service for all
HotSpot users. If you want HotSpot server to listen also to another port, add rules here the same
way, changing dst-port property
Redirect all HTTP login requests to the HTTP login servlet. The 64873 is HotSpot HTTP servlet
port.
Redirect all HTTPS login requests to the HTTPS login servlet. The 64875 is HotSpot HTTPS
servlet port.
All other packets except DNS and login requests from unauthorized clients should pass through the
hs-unauth chain
And packets from the authorized clients - through the hs-auth chain
First in the hs-unauth chain is put everything that affects TCP protocol in the /ip hotspot
walled-garden ip submenu (i.e., everything where either protocol is not set, or set to TCP). Here
we are excluding www.mikrotik.com from being redirected to the login page.
All other HTTP requests are redirected to the Walled Garden proxy server which listens the 64874
port. If there is an allow entry in the /ip hotspot walled-garden menu for an HTTP request, it is
being forwarded to the destination. Otherwise, the request will be automatically redirected to the
HotSpot login servlet (port 64873).
HotSpot by default assumes that only these ports may be used for HTTP proxy requests. These two
entries are used to "catch" client requests to unknown proxies. I.e., to make it possible for the
clients with unknown proxy settings to work with the HotSpot system. This feature is called
"Universal Proxy". If it is detected that a client is using some proxy server, the system will
automatically mark that packets with the http hotspot mark to work around the unknown proxy
problem, as we will see later on. Note that the port used (64874) is the same as for HTTP requests
in the rule #8 (so both HTTP and HTTP proxy requests are processed by the same code).
HTTPS proxy is listening on the 64875 port
Redirect for SMTP protocol may also be defined in the HotSpot configuration. In case it is, a
redirect rule will be put in the hs-smtp chain. This is done so that users with unknown SMTP
configuration would be able to send their mail through the service provider's (your) SMTP server
instead of going to [possibly unavailable outside their network of origin] the SMTP server users
have configured in their computers.
Providing HTTP proxy service for authorized users. Authenticated user requests may need to be
subject to the transparent proxying (the "Universal Proxy" technique and for the advertisement
feature). This http mark is put automatically on the HTTP proxy requests to the servers detected by
the HotSpot HTTP proxy (the one that is listening on the 64874 port) to be HTTP proxy requests to
unknown proxy servers. This is done so that users that have some proxy settings would use the
HotSpot gateway instead of the [possibly unavailable outside their network of origin] proxy server
users have configured in their computers. The mark is as well put on any HTTP requests done form
the users whoose profile is configured to transparently proxy their requests.
Providing SMTP proxy for authorized users (the same as in rule #12)
Page 518 of 695


Packet filter rules
From /ip firewall filter print dynamic command, you can get something like this (comments
follow after each of the rules):
Any packet that traverse the router from unauthorized client will be sent to the hs-unauth chain.
The hs-unauth implements the IP-based Walled Garden filter.
Everything that comes to clients through the router, gets redirected to another chain, called
hs-unauth-to. This chain should reject unauthorized requests to the clients
Everything that comes from clients to the router itself, gets to another chain, called hs-input.
Allow client access to the local authentication and proxy services (as described earlier)
All other traffic from unauthorized clients to the router itself will be treated the same way as the
traffic traversing the routers
Unlike NAT table where only TCP-protocol related Walled Garden entries were added, in the
packet filter hs-unauth chain is added everything you have set in the /ip hotspot walled-garden ip
menu. That is why although you have seen only one entry in the NAT table, there are two rules
here.
Everything else that has not been while-listed by the Walled Garden will be rejected. Note usage of
TCP Reset for rejecting TCP connections.
Reject all packets to the clients with ICMP reject message
Customizing HotSpot: HTTP Servlet Pages
Description
You can create a completely different set of servlet pages for each HotSpot server you have,
specifying the directory it will be stored in html-directory property of a HotSpot server profile (/ip
hotspot profile). The default servlet pages are copied in the directory of your choice right after you
create the profile. This directory can be accessed by connecting to the router with an FTP client.
You can modify the pages as you like using the information from this section of the manual.
Available Servlet Pages

Main HTML servlet pages, which are shown to user:
• redirect.html - redirects user to another url (for example, to login page)
• login.html - login page shown to a user to ask for username and password. This page may take
the following parameters:
• username - username
• password - either plain-text password (in case of PAP authentication) or MD5 hash of chap-id
variable, password and CHAP challenge (in case of CHAP authentication)
• dst - original URL requested before the redirect. This will be opened on successfull login
• popup - whether to pop-up a status window on successfull login
Page 519 of 695


• radius<id> - send the attribute identified with <id> in text string form to the RADIUS server
(in case RADIUS authentication is used; lost otherwise)
• radius<id>u - send the attribute identified with <id> in unsigned form to the RADIUS server
(in case RADIUS authentication is used; lost otherwise)
• radius<id>-<vnd-id> - send the attribute identified with <id> and vendor ID <vnd-id> in text
string form to the RADIUS server (in case RADIUS authentication is used; lost otherwise)
• radius<id>-<vnd-id>u - send the attribute identified with <id> and vendor ID <vnd-id> in
unsigned form to the RADIUS server (in case RADIUS authentication is used; lost otherwise)
• md5.js - JavaScript for MD5 password hashing. Used together with http-chap login method
• alogin.html - page shown after client has logged in. It pops-up status page and redirects
browser to originally requested page (before he/she was redirected to the HotSpot login page)
• status.html - status page, shows statistics for the client
• logout.html - logout page, shown after user is logged out. Shows final statistics about the
finished session. This page may take the folllowing additional parameters:
• erase-cookie - whether to erase cookies from the HotSpot server on logout (makes impossible
to log in with cookie next time from the same browser, might be useful in multiuser
environments)
• error.html - error page, shown on fatal errors only

• rlogin.html - page, which redirects client from some other URL to the login page, if
authorization of the client is required to access that URL
• rstatus.html - similarly to rlogin.html, only in case if the client is already logged in and the
original URL is not known
• flogin.html - shown instead of login.html, if some error has happened (invalid username or
password, for example)
• fstatus.html - shown instead of redirect, if status page is requested, but client is not logged in
• flogout.html - shown instead of redirect, if logout page is requested, but client is not logged in
Some other pages are available as well, if more control is needed:
Serving Servlet Pages

The HotSpot servlet recognizes 5 different request types:
1. request for a remote host
• if user is logged in, the requested page is served
• if user is not logged in, but the destination host is allowed by walled garden, then the
request is also served
• if user is not logged in, and the destination host is disallowed by walled garden,
rlogin.html is displayed; if rlogin.html is not found, redirect.html is used to redirect to
the login page
2. request for "/" on the HotSpot host

• if user is logged in, rstatus.html is displayed; if rstatus.html is not found,
Page 520 of 695


redirect.html is used to redirect to the status page
• if user is not logged in, rlogin.html is displayed; if rlogin.html is not found,
redirect.html is used to redirect to the login page
3. request for "/login" page

• if user has successfully logged in (or is already logged in), alogin.html is displayed; if
alogin.html is not found, redirect.html is used to redirect to the originally requested
page or the status page (in case, original destination page was not given)
• if user is not logged in (username was not supplied, no error message appeared),
login.html is showed
• if login procedure has failed (error message is supplied), flogin.html is displayed; if
flogin.html is not found, login.html is used
• in case of fatal errors, error.html is showed
4. request for "/status" page

• if user is logged in, status.html is displayed
• if user is not logged in, fstatus.html is displayed; if fstatus.html is not found,
5. request for '/logout' page

• if user is logged in, logout.html is displayed
• if user is not logged in, flogout.html is displayed; if flogout.html is not found,
Note that if it is not possible to meet a request using the pages stored on the router's FTP server,
Error 404 is displayed
There are many possibilities to customize what the HotSpot authentication pages look like:
• The pages are easily modifiable. They are stored on the router's FTP server in the directory you
choose for the respective HotSpot server profile.
• By changing the variables, which client sends to the HotSpot servlet, it is possible to reduce
keyword count to one (username or password; for example, the client's MAC address may be
used as the other value) or even to zero (License Agreement; some predefined values general
for all users or client's MAC address may be used as username and password)
• Registration may occur on a different server (for example, on a server that is able to charge
Credit Cards). Client's MAC address may be passed to it, so that this information need not be
written in manually. After the registration, the server may change RADIUS database enabling
client to log in for some amount of time.
To insert variable in some place in HTML file, the $(var_name) syntax is used, where the
"var_name" is the name of the variable (without quotes). This construction may be used in any
HotSpot HTML file accessed as '/', '/login', '/status' or '/logout', as well as any text or HTML file
stored on the HotSpot server. For example, to show a link to the login page, following construction
can be used:
Page 521 of 695


Variables
All of the Servlet HTML pages use variables to show user specific values. Variable names appear
only in the HTML source of the servlet pages - they are automatically replaced with the respective
values by the HotSpot Servlet. For each variable there is an example of its possible value included
in brackets. All the described variables are valid in all servlet pages, but some of them just might be
empty at the time they are accesses (for example, there is no uptime before a user has logged in).
• Common server variables:
• hostname - DNS name or IP address (if DNS name is not given) of the HotSpot Servlet
("hotspot.example.net")
• identity - RouterOS identity name ("MikroTik")
• login-by - authentication method used by user
• plain-passwd - a "yes/no" representation of whether HTTP-PAP login method is allowed
("no")
• server-address - HotSpot server address ("10.5.50.1:80")
• server-name - name of hotspot server
• ssl-login - a "yes/no" representation of whether HTTPS method was used to access that servlet
page ("no")
• server-name - HotSpot server name (set in the /ip hotspot menu, as the name property)
• interface-name - physical HotSpot interface name (in case of bridged interfaces, this will
return the actual bridge port name)
• Links:
• link-login - link to login page including original URL requested
("http://10.5.50.1/login?dst=http://www.example.com/")
• link-login-plain - link to login page, not including original URL requested
("http://10.5.50.1/login")
• link-logout - link to logout page ("http://10.5.50.1/logout")
• link-status - link to status page ("http://10.5.50.1/status")
• link-orig - original URL requested ("http://www.example.com/")
• General client information

• domain - domain name of the user ("mt.lv")
• interface-name - name of the physical interface, on which client is connected (in case of
bridge, it will contain the name of bridge port)
• ip - IP address of the client ("10.5.50.2")
• logged-in - "yes" if the user is logged in, otherwise - "no" ("yes")
• mac - MAC address of the user ("01:23:45:67:89:AB")
• trial - a "yes/no" representation of whether the user has access to trial time. If users trial time
has expired, the value is "no"
• username - the name of the user ("John")
• User status information:
Page 522 of 695


• idle-timeout - idle timeout ("20m" or "" if none)
• idle-timeout-secs - idle timeout in seconds ("88" or "0" if there is such timeout)
• limit-bytes-in - byte limit for send ("1000000" or "---" if there is no limit)
• limit-bytes-out - byte limit for receive ("1000000" or "---" if there is no limit)
• refresh-timeout - status page refresh timeout ("1m30s" or "" if none)
• refresh-timeout-secs - status page refresh timeout in seconds ("90s" or "0" if none)
• session-timeout - session time left for the user ("5h" or "" if none)
• session-timeout-secs - session time left for the user, in seconds ("3475" or "0" if there is such
timeout)
• session-time-left - session time left for the user ("5h" or "" if none)
• session-time-left-secs - session time left for the user, in seconds ("3475" or "0" if there is such
timeout)
• uptime - current session uptime ("10h2m33s")
• uptime-secs - current session uptime in seconds ("125")
• Traffic counters, which are available only in status page:

• bytes-in - number of bytes received from the user ("15423")
• bytes-in-nice - user-friendly form of number of bytes received from the user ("15423")
• bytes-out - number of bytes sent to the user ("11352")
• bytes-out-nice - user-friendly form of number of bytes sent to the user ("11352")
• packets-in - number of packets received from the user ("251")
• packets-out - number of packets sent to the user ("211")
• remain-bytes-in - remaining bytes until limit-bytes-in will be reached ("337465" or "---" if
there is no limit)
• remain-bytes-out - remaining bytes until limit-bytes-out will be reached ("124455" or "---" if
there is no limit)
• Miscellaneous variables
• session-id - value of 'session-id' parameter in the last request
• var - value of 'var' parameter in the last request
• error - error message, if something failed ("invalid username or password")
• error-orig - original error message (without translations retrieved from errors.txt), if something
failed ("invalid username or password")
• chap-id - value of chap ID ("\371")
• chap-challenge - value of chap challenge
("\357\015\330\013\021\234\145\245\303\253\142\246\133\175\375\316")
• popup - whether to pop-up checkbox ("true" or "false")
• advert-pending - whether an advertisement is pending to be displayed ("yes" or "no")
• RADIUS-related variables
• radius<id> - show the attribute identified with <id> in text string form (in case RADIUS
authentication was used; "" otherwise)
Page 523 of 695


• radius<id>u - show the attribute identified with <id> in unsigned form (in case RADIUS
authentication was used; "0" otherwise)
• radius<id>-<vnd-id> - show the attribute identified with <id> and vendor ID <vnd-id> in text
string form (in case RADIUS authentication was used; "" otherwise)
• radius<id>-<vnd-id>u - show the attribute identified with <id> and vendor ID <vnd-id> in
unsigned form (in case RADIUS authentication was used; "0" otherwise)
Working with variables

$(if <var_name>) statements can be used in theses pages. Following content will be included, if
value of <var_name> will not be an empty string. It is an equivalent to $(if <var_name> != "") It
is possible to compare on equivalence as well: $(if <var_name> == <value>) These statements
have effect until $(elif <var_name>), $(else) or $(endif). In general case it looks like this:
Only one of those expressions will be shown. Which one - depends on values of those variables for
each client.
Customizing Error Messages

All error messages are stored in the errors.txt file within the respective HotSpot servlet directory.
You can change and translate all these messages to your native language. To do so, edit the
errors.txt file. You can also use variables in the messages. All instructions are given in that file.
Multiple Versions of HotSpot Pages

Multiple hotspot page sets for the same hotspot server are supported. They can be chosen by user
(to select language) or automatically by JavaScript (to select PDA/regular version of HTML pages).
To utilize this feature, create subdirectories in HotSpot HTML directory, and place those HTML
files, which are different, in that subdirectory. For example, to translate everything in Latvian,
subdirectory "lv" can be created with login.html, logout.html, status.html, alogin.html, radvert.html
and errors.txt files, which are translated into Latvian. If the requested HTML page can not be found
in the requested subdirectory, the corresponding HTML file from the main directory will be used.
Then main login.html file would contain link to "/lv/login?dst=$(link-orig-esc)", which then
displays Latvian version of login page: <a href="/lv/login?dst=$(link-orig-esc)">Latviski</a>
. And Latvian version would contain link to English version: <a
href="/login?dst=$(link-orig-esc)">English</a>
Another way of referencing directories is to specify 'target' variable:

After preferred directory has been selected (for example, "lv"), all links to local HotSpot pages will
contain that path (for example, $(link-status) = "http://hotspot.mt.lv/lv/status"). So, if all
hotspot pages reference links using "$(link-xxx)" variables, then no more changes are to be made -
each client will stay within the selected directory all the time.
Notes
If you want to use HTTP-CHAP authentication method it is supposed that you include the
doLogin() function (which references to the md5.js which must be already loaded) before the
Page 524 of 695


Submit action of the login form. Otherwise, CHAP login will fail.
The resulting password to be sent to the HotSpot gateway in case of HTTP-CHAP method, is
formed MD5-hashing the concatenation of the following: chap-id, the password of the user and
chap-challenge (in the given order)
In case if variables are to be used in link directly, then they must be escaped accordingly. For
example, in login page, <a
href="https://login.example.com/login?mac=$(mac)&user=$(username)">link</a> will not work as
intended, if username will be "123&456=1 2". In this case instead of $(user), its escaped version
must be used: $(user-esc): <a
href="https://login.server.serv/login?mac=$(mac-esc)&user=$(user-esc)">link</a>. Now the same
username will be converted to "123%26456%3D1+2", which is the valid representation of
"123&456=1 2" in URL. This trick may be used with any variables, not only with $(username).
There is a boolean parameter "erase-cookie" to the logout page, which may be either "on" or "true"
to delete user cookie on logout (so that the user would not be automatically logged on when he/she
opens a browser next time.
Example
With basic HTML language knowledge and the examples below it should be easy to implement the
ideas described above.
• To provide predefined value as username, in login.html change:
<type="text" value="$(username)>
to this line:
<input type="hidden" name="user" value="hsuser">
(where hsuser is the username you are providing)
• To provide predefined value as password, in login.html change:
<input type="password">
to this line:
<input type="hidden" name="password" value="hspass">
(where hspass is the password you are providing)
• To send client's MAC address to a registration server in form of:
https://www.server.serv/register.html?mac=XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
change the Login button link in login.html to:
https://www.server.serv/register.html?mac=$(mac)
(you should correct the link to point to your server)
• To show a banner after user login, in alogin.html after
$(if popup == 'true')
add the following line:
open('http://your.web.server/your-banner-page.html', 'my-banner-name','');
(you should correct the link to point to the page you want to show)
• To choose different page shown after login, in login.html change:
Page 525 of 695


<input type="hidden" name="dst" value="$(link-orig)">
to this line:
<input type="hidden" name="dst" value="http://your.web.server">
(you should correct the link to point to your server)
• To erase the cookie on logoff, in the page containing link to the logout (for example, in
status.html) change:
open('$(link-logout)', 'hotspot_logout', ...
to this:
open('$(link-logout)?erase-cookie=on', 'hotspot_logout', ...
or alternatively add this line:
<input type="hidden" name="erase-cookie" value="on">
before this one:
<input type="submit" value="log off">
An another example is making HotSpot to authenticate on a remote server (which may, for
example, perform creditcard charging):
• Allow direct access to the external server in walled-garden (either HTTP-based, or IP-based)
• Modify login page of the HotSpot servlet to redirect to the external authentication server. The
external server should modify RADIUS database as needed
Here is an example of such a login page to put on the HotSpot router (it is redirecting to
https://auth.example.com/login.php, replace with the actual address of an external
authentication server):
<html> <title>...</title> <body> <form name="redirect"
action="https://auth.example.com/login.php" method="post"> <input type="hidden"
name="mac" value="$(mac)"> <input type="hidden" name="ip" value="$(ip)"> <input
type="hidden" name="user" value="$(username)"> <input type="hidden"
name="link-login" value="$(link-login)"> <input type="hidden" name="link-orig"
value="$(link-orig)"> <input type="hidden" name="error" value="$(error)"> </form>
<script language="JavaScript">  </script>
</body> </html>
• The external server can log in a HotSpot client by redirecting it back to the original HotSpot
servlet login page, specifying the correct username and password
Here is an example of such a page (it is redirecting to https://hotspot.example.com/login,
replace with the actual address of a HotSpot router; also, it is displaying www.mikrotik.com
after successful login, replace with what needed):
<html> <title>Hotspot login page</title> <body> <form name="login"
action="https://hotspot.example.com/login" method="post"> <input type="text"
name="username" value="demo"> <input type="password" name="password" value="none">
<input type="hidden" name="domain" value=""> <input type="hidden" name="dst"
value="http://www.mikrotik.com/"> <input type="submit" name="login" value="log in">
</form> </body> </html>
• Hotspot will ask RADIUS server whether to allow the login or not. If not allowed, alogin.html
page will be displayed (it can be modified to do anything!). If not allowed, flogin.html (or
login.html) page will be displayed, which will redirect client back to the external
Page 526 of 695


authentication server.
• Note: as shown in these examples, HTTPS protocol and POST method can be used to secure
communications.
Possible Error Messages
Description
There are two kinds of errors: fatal non-fatal. Fatal errors are shown on a separate HTML page
called error.html. Non-fatal errors are basically indicating incorrect user actions and are shown on
the login form.
General non-fatal errors:
• You are not logged in - trying to access the status page or log off while not logged in.
Solution: log in
• already authorizing, retry later - authorization in progress. Client already has issued an
authorization request which is not yet complete. Solution: wait for the current request to be
completed, and then try again
• chap-missing = web browser did not send challenge response (try again, enable
JavaScript) - trying to log in with HTTP-CHAP method using MD5 hash, but HotSpot server
does not know the challenge used for the hash. This may happen if you use BACK buttons in
browser; if JavaScript is not enabled in web browser; if login.html page is not valid; or if
challenge value has expired on server (more than 1h of inactivity). Solution: instructing browser
to reload (refresh) the login page usually helps if JavaScript is enabled and login.html page is
valid
• invalid username ($(username)): this MAC address is not yours - trying to log in using a
MAC address username different from the actual user's MAC address. Solution: no - users with
usernames that look like a MAC address (eg., 12:34:56:78:9a:bc) may only log in from the
MAC address specified as their user name
• session limit reached ($(error-orig)) - depending on licence number of active hotspot clients
is limited to some number. The error is displayed when this limit is reached. Solution: try to log
in later when there will be less concurrent user sessions, or buy an another license that allows
more simultaneous sessions
• hotspot service is shutting down - RouterOS is currently being restarted or shut down.
Solution: wait until the service will be available again
General fatal errors:
• internal error ($(error-orig)) - this should never happen. If it will, error page will be shown
displaying this error message (error-orig will describe what has happened). Solution: correct the
error reported
• configuration error ($(error-orig)) - the HotSpot server is not configured properly (error-orig
will describe what has happened). Solution: correct the error reported
• cannot assign ip address - no more free addresses from pool - unable to get an IP address
from an IP pool as there is no more free IP addresses in that pool. Solution: make sure there is a
sufficient amount of free IP addresses in IP pool
Page 527 of 695


Local HotSpot user database non-fatal errors:
• invalid username or password - self-explanatory
• user $(username) is not allowed to log in from this MAC address - trying to log in from a
MAC address different from specified in user database. Solution: log in from the correct MAC
address or take out the limitation
• user $(username) has reached uptime limit - self-explanatory
• user $(username) has reached traffic limit - either limit-bytes-in or limit-bytes-out limit is
reached
• no more sessions are allowed for user $(username) - the shared-users limit for the user's
profile is reached. Solution: wait until someone with this username logs out, use different login
name or extend the shared-users limit
RADIUS client non-fatal errors:
• invalid username or password - RADIUS server has rejected the username and password sent
to it without specifying a reason. Cause: either wrong username and/or password, or other error.
Solution: should be clarified in RADIUS server's log files
• <error_message_sent_by_radius_server> - this may be any message (any text string) sent
back by RADIUS server. Consult with your RADIUS server's documentation for further
information
RADIUS client fatal errors:
• RADIUS server is not responding - user is being authenticated by RADIUS server, but no
response is received from it. Solution: check whether the RADIUS server is running and is
reachable from the HotSpot router
HotSpot How-to's
Description
This section will focus on some simple examples of how to use your HotSpot system, as well as
give some useful ideas.
Setting up https authorization

At first certificate must be present with decrypted private key:
Then we can use that certificate for hotspot:
After that we can see, that HTTPS is running on hotspot interface:
Bypass hotspot for some devices in hotspot network

All IP binding entries with type property set to bypassed, will not be asked to authorize - it means
that they will have login-free access:
If all fields has been filled in the ip-binding table and type has been set to bypassed, then the IP
address of this entry will be accessible from public interfaces immediately:
Page 528 of 695


HTTP Proxy
Document revision 1.2 (Tue May 23 14:34:47 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Setup
Notes
Example
Access List
Description
Notes
Direct Access List
Description
Notes
Cache Management
Description
Proxy Monitoring
Description
Connection List
Description
Cache inserts
Description
Cache Lookups
Description
Complementary Tools
Description
Command Description
HTTP Methods
Description
General Information
Page 529 of 695


Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS implements the following proxy server features:
• Regular HTTP proxy
• Transparent proxy. Can be transparent and regular at the same time
• Access list by source, destination, URL and requested method
• Cache access list (specifies which objects to cache, and which not)
• Direct Access List (specifies, which resources should be accessed directly, and which -
through another proxy server)
• Logging facility
Quick Setup Guide

To enable HTTP proxy, do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] ip proxy> set enabled=yes

[admin@MikroTik] ip proxy> print
enabled: yes
src-address: 0.0.0.0
port: 8080
parent-proxy: 0.0.0.0:0
cache-drive: system
cache-administrator: "webmaster"
max-disk-cache-size: none
max-ram-cache-size: 100000KiB
cache-only-on-disk: yes
maximal-client-connections: 1000
maximal-server-connections: 1000
max-object-size: 2000KiB
max-fresh-time: 3d
[admin@MikroTik] ip proxy>
Remember to secure your proxy by preventing unauthorized access to it, otherwise it may be used
as an open proxy. Also you need to setup destination NAT in order to utilize transparent proxying
facility:
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall nat> add chain=dstnat protocol=tcp dst-port=80

action=redirect to-ports=8080
0 chain=dstnat protocol=tcp dst-port=80 action=redirect to-ports=8080
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip proxy
Standards and Technologies: HTTP/1.0 , HTTP/1.1 , FTP
Related Documents
Page 530 of 695


•
• Log Management
Description
This service performs proxying of HTTP and HTTP-proxy (for FTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols)
requests. Web proxy performs Internet object cache function by storing requested Internet objects,
i.e., data available via HTTP and FTP protocols on a system positioned closer to the recipient than
the site the data is originated from. Here 'closer' means increased path reliability, speed or both.
Web browsers can then use the local proxy cache to speed up access and reduce bandwidth
consumption.
When setting up proxy service, make sure it serves only your clients, and is not misused as relay.
Please read the security notice in the Access List Section!
Note that it may be useful to have Web proxy running even with no cache when you want to use it
only as something like HTTP and FTP firewall (for example, denying access to mp3 files) or to
redirect requests to external proxy (possibly, to a proxy with caching functions) transparently.
Setup
cache-administrator ( text ; default: webmaster ) - administrator's e-mail displayed on proxy error
page
cache-drive ( system | name ; default: system ) - specifies the target disk drive to be used for
storing cached objects. You can use console completion to see the list of available drives
cache-only-on-disk ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to create database in memory that describes
cache contents on disk. This will minimize memory consumption, but may affect speed
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the proxy server is enabled
max-disk-cache-size ( none | unlimited | integer : 0 ..4294967295 ; default: none ) - specifies the
maximal disk cache size, measured in kibibytes
max-fresh-time ( time ; default: 3d ) - maximal time to store a cached object. The validity period
of an object is is usually defined by the object itself, but in case it is set too high, you can override
the maximal value
maximal-client-connecions ( integer ; default: 1000 ) - maximal number of connections accepted
from clients (any further connections will be rejected)
maximal-server-connectons ( integer ; default: 1000 ) - maximal number of connections made to
servers (any further connections from clients will be put on hold until some server connections will
terminate)
max-object-size ( integer ; default: 2000KiB ) - objects larger than the size specified will not be
saved on disk. The value is measured in kibibytes. If you wish to get a high bytes hit ratio, you
should probably increase this (one 2 MiB object hit counts for 2048 1KiB hits). If you wish to
Page 531 of 695


increase speed more than your want to save bandwidth you should leave this low
max-ram-cache-size ( none | unlimited | integer : 0 ..4294967295 ; default: none ) - specifies the
maximal RAM cache size, measured in kibibytes
parent-proxy ( IP address | port ; default: 0.0.0.0:0 ) - IP address and port of another HTTP proxy
to redirect all requests to (exceptions may be defined in the "direct access" list
• 0.0.0.0:0 - no parent proxy is used
port ( port ; default: 8080 ) - TCP port the proxy server will be listening on. This is to be specified
on all clients that want to use the server as HTTP proxy. Transparent (with zero configuration for
clients) proxy setup can be made by redirecting HTTP requests to this port in IP firewall using
destination NAT feature
src-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the web-proxy will use this address connecting to the
parent proxy or web site.
• 0.0.0.0 - appropriate src-address will be automatically taken from the routing table
Notes
The web proxy listens to all IP addresses that the router has in its IP address list.
Example
To enable the proxy on port 8000:
[admin@MikroTik] ip proxy> set enabled=yes port=8000
[admin@MikroTik] ip proxy> print
enabled: yes
port: 8000
cache-drive: system
cache-administrator: "[email protected]"
max-disk-cache-size: none
max-ram-cache-size: 100000KiB
cache-only-on-disk: yes
maximal-client-connections: 1000
maximal-server-connections: 1000
max-object-size: 2000KiB
max-fresh-time: 3d
[admin@MikroTik] ip proxy>
Access List
Home menu level: /ip proxy access
Description
Access list is configured like a regular firewall rules. Rules are processed from the top to the
bottom. First matching rule specifies decision of what to do with this connection. There is a total of
6 classifiers that specify matching constraints. If none of these classifiers is specified, the particular
rule will match every connection.
If connection is matched by a rule, action property of this rule specifies whether connection will be
allowed or not. If the particular connection does not match any rule, it will be allowed.
Page 532 of 695


action ( allow | deny ; default: allow ) - specifies whether to pass or deny matched packets
dst-address ( IP address | netmask ) - destination address of the IP packet
dst-host ( wildcard ) - IP address or DNS name used to make connection the target server (this is
the string user wrote in his/her browser before specifying port and path to a particular web page)
dst-port ( port ) - a list or range of ports the packet is destined to
hits ( read-only: integer ) - the number of requests that were policed by this rule
local-port ( port ) - specifies the port of the web proxy via which the packet was received. This
value should match one of the ports web proxy is listening on.
method ( any | connect | delete | get | head | options | post | put | trace ) - HTTP method used in the
request (see HTTP Methods section in the end of this document)
path ( wildcard ) - name of the requested page within the target server (i.e. the name of a particular
web page or document without the name of the server it resides on)
redirect-to ( text ) - in case access is denied by this rule, the user shall be redirected to the URL
specified here
src-address ( IP address | netmask ) - source address of the IP packet
Notes
Wildcard properties (dst-host and dst-path) match a complete string (i.e., they will not match
"example.com" if they are set to "example"). Available wildcards are '*' (match any number of any
characters) and '?' (match any one character). Regular expressions are also accepted here, but if the
property should be treated as a regular expression, it should start with a colon (':').
the pattern
• to enter [ or ] symbols, you should escape them with backslash \.
It is strongly recommended to deny all IP addresses except those behind the router as the proxy still
may be used to access your internal-use-only (intranet) web servers. Also, consult examples in
Firewall Manual on how to protect your router.
Direct Access List

Home menu level: /ip proxy direct
Description
Page 533 of 695


If parent-proxy property is specified, it is possible to tell proxy server whether to try to pass the
request to the parent proxy or to resolve it connecting to the requested server directly. Direct Access
List is managed just like Proxy Access List described in the previous chapter except the action
argument.
action ( allow | deny ; default: allow ) - specifies the action to perform on matched packets
• allow - always resolve matched requests directly bypassing the parent router
• deny - resolve matched requests through the parent proxy. If no one is specified this has the
same effect as allow
Notes
Unlike the access list, the direct proxy access list has default action equal to deny. It takes place
when no rules are specified or a particular request did not match any rule.
Cache Management
Home menu level: /ip web-proxy cache
Description
Cache access list specifies, which requests (domains, servers, pages) have to be cached locally by
web proxy, and which not. This list is implemented exactly the same way as web proxy access list.
Default action is to cache object (if no matching rule is found).
• allow - cache objects from matched request
• deny - do not cache objects from matched request
Page 534 of 695


Proxy Monitoring
Command name: /ip proxy monitor
Description
This command displays some stats of the proxy server
cache-used ( read-only: integer ) - disk space used for the cache
hits ( read-only: integer ) - number of requests found in cache and served from there
hits-sent-to-clients ( read-only: integer ) - amount of data served from the cache
ram-cache-used ( read-only: integer ) - RAM space used to store the cache
received-from-servers ( read-only: integer ) - amount of data received from other servers
requests ( read-only: integer ) - number of requests handled
sent-to-clients ( read-only: integer ) - amount of data sent to the clients of this proxy server
status ( read-only: text ; default: stopped ) - display status information of the proxy server
• stopped - proxy is disabled and is not running
• rebuilding-cache - proxy is enabled and running, existing cache is being verified
• running - proxy is enabled and running
• stopping - proxy is shutting down (max 10s)
• clearing-cache - proxy is stopped, cache files are being removed
• creating-cache - proxy is stopped, cache directory structure is being created
• dns-missing - proxy is enabled, but not running because of unknown DNS server (you should
specify it under /ip dns)
• invalid-address - proxy is enabled, but not running because of invalid address (you should
change address or port)
• invalid-cache-administrator - proxy is enabled, but not running because of invalid
cache-administrator's e-mail address
• invalid-hostname - proxy is enabled, but not running because of invalid hostname (you should
Page 535 of 695


set a valid hostname value)
• error-logged - proxy is not running because of unknown error. This error is logged as
System-Error. Please, send us this error and some description, how it happened
• reserved-for-cache (integer) - maximal cache size, that is accessible to web-proxy
total-ram-used ( read-only: integer ) - total amount of RAM used for the proxy
uptime ( read-only: time ) - the time since the proxy has been started last time
Connection List
Home menu level: /ip proxy connections
Description
This menu conntains the list of current connections the proxy is serving
dst-address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address of the connection
protocol ( read-only: text ) - protocol name
rx-bytes ( read-only: integer ) - the amount of bytes received by the client
src-address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address of the connection originator
state ( read-only: closing | connecting | converting | hotspot | idle | resolving | rx-header | tx-body |
tx-eof | tx-header | waiting ) - opened connection state
• closing - the data transfer is finished, and the connection is being finalized
• connecting - establishing toe connection
• converting - replacing header and footer fields in response or request paket
• hotspot - check if hotspot authentication allows to continue (for hotspot proxy)
• idle - staying idle
• resolving - resolving server's DNS name
• rx-header - receiving HTTP header
• tx-body - transmitting HTTP body to the client
• tx-eof - writing chunk-end (when converting to chunked response)
• tx-header - transmitting HTTP header to the client
• waiting - waiting for transmission form a peer
tx-bytes ( read-only: integer ) - the amount of bytes sent by the client
Cache inserts
Home menu level: /ip proxy inserts
Description
This menu shows statistics on objects stored in cache (cache inserts)
Page 536 of 695


denied ( read-only: integer ) - number of inserts denied by the caching list
errors ( read-only: integer ) - number of disk or other system-related errors
no-memory ( read-only: integer ) - number of objects not stored because there was not enough
memory
successes ( read-only: integer ) - number of successfull cache inserts
too-large ( read-only: integer ) - number of objects too large to store
Cache Lookups
Home menu level: /ip proxy lookups
Description
This menu shows statistics on objects read from cache (cache lookups)
denied ( read-only: integer ) - number of requests denied by the access list
expired ( read-only: integer ) - number of requests found in cache, but expired, and, thus,
requested from an external server
no-expiration-info ( read-only: integer ) - conditional request received for a page that does not
have the information to compare the request with
non-cacheable ( read-only: integer ) - number of requests requested from the external servers
unconditionally (as their caching is denied by the cache access list)
not-found ( read-only: integer ) - number of requests not found in the cache, and, thus, requested
from an external server (or parent proxy if configured accordingly)
successes ( read-only: integer ) - number of requests found in the cache
Complementary Tools
Description
Web proxy has additional commands to handle non-system drive used for caching purposes and to
recover the proxy from severe file system errors.
Command Description
check-drive - checks non-system cache drive for errors
clear-cache - deletes existing cache and creates new cache directories
format-drive - formats non-system cache drive and prepairs it for holding the cache
Page 537 of 695


HTTP Methods
Description
OPTIONS
This method is a request of information about the communication options available on the chain
between the client and the server identified by the Request-URI. The method allows the client to
determine the options and (or) the requirements associated with a resource without initiating any
resource retrieval
GET
This method retrieves whatever information identified by the Request-URI. If the Request-URI
refers to a data processing process than the response to the GET method should contain data
produced by the process, not the source code of the process procedure(-s), unless the source is the
result of the process.
The GET method can become a conditional GET if the request message includes an
If-Modified-Since, If-Unmodified-Since, If-Match, If-None-Match, or If-Range header field.
The conditional GET method is used to reduce the network traffic specifying that the transfer of the
entity should occur only under circumstances described by conditional header field(-s).
The GET method can become a partial GET if the request message includes a Range header field.
The partial GET method intends to reduce unnecessary network usage by requesting only parts of
entities without transferring data already held by client.
The response to a GET request is cacheable if and only if it meets the requirements for HTTP
caching.
HEAD
This method shares all features of GET method except that the server must not return a
message-body in the response. This retrieves the metainformation of the entity implied by the
request which leads to a wide usage of it for testing hypertext links for validity, accessibility, and
recent modification.
The response to a HEAD request may be cacheable in the way that the information contained in the
response may be used to update previously cached entity identified by that Request-URI.
POST
This method requests that the origin server accept the entity enclosed in the request as a new
subordinate of the resource identified by the Request-URI.
The actual action performed by the POST method is determined by the origin server and usually is
Request-URI dependent.
Responses to POST method are not cacheable, unless the response includes appropriate
Page 538 of 695


Cache-Control or Expires header fields.
PUT
This method requests that the enclosed entity be stored under the supplied Request-URI. If another
entity exists under specified Request-URI, the enclosed entity should be considered as updated
(newer) version of that residing on the origin server. If the Request-URI is not pointing to an
existing resource, the origin server should create a resource with that URI.
If the request passes through a cache and the Request-URI identifies one or more currently cached
entities, those entries should be treated as stale. Responses to this method are not cacheable.
TRACE
This method invokes a remote, application-layer loop-back of the request message. The final
recipient of the request should reflect the message received back to the client as the entity-body of a
200 (OK) response. The final recipient is either the origin server or the first proxy or gateway to
receive a Max-Forwards value of 0 in the request. A TRACE request must not include an entity.
Responses to this method MUST NOT be cached.
Page 539 of 695


IP Pools
Document revision 0.0 (Thu Mar 04 20:47:26 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Notes
Setup
Example
Used Addresses from Pool
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
IP pools are used to define range of IP addresses that is used for DHCP server and Point-to-Point
servers
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip pool
Standards and Technologies: none
Related Documents
• AAA
• DHCP Client and Server
• HotSpot Gateway
• Universal Client Interface
Page 540 of 695


Description
IP pools simply group IP addresses for further usage. It is a single configuration point for all
features that assign IP addresses to clients.
Notes
Whenever possible, the same ip address is given out to each client (OWNER/INFO pair).
Setup
Home menu level: /ip pool
name ( name ) - the name of the pool
next-pool ( name ) - when address is acquired from pool that has no free addresses, and next-pool
property is set to another pool, then next IP address will be acquired from next-pool
ranges ( IP address ) - IP address list of non-overlapping IP address ranges in form of:
from1-to1,from2-to2,...,fromN-toN. For example, 10.0.0.1-10.0.0.27,10.0.0.32-10.0.0.47
Example
To define a pool named ip-pool with the 10.0.0.1-10.0.0.125 address range excluding gateway's
address 10.0.0.1 and server's address 10.0.0.100, and the other pool dhcp-pool, with the
10.0.0.200-10.0.0.250 address range:
[admin@MikroTik] ip pool> add name=ip-pool ranges=10.0.0.2-10.0.0.99,10.0.0.101

10.0.0.126
[admin@MikroTik] ip pool> add name=dhcp-pool ranges=10.0.0.200-10.0.0.250
[admin@MikroTik] ip pool> print
# NAME RANGES
0 ip-pool 10.0.0.2-10.0.0.99
10.0.0.101-10.0.0.126
1 dhcp-pool 10.0.0.200-10.0.0.250
[admin@MikroTik] ip pool>
Used Addresses from Pool

Home menu level: /ip pool used
Description
Here you can see all used IP addresses from IP pools.
pool ( read-only: name ) - name of the IP pool
address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address that is assigned to client form the pool
Page 541 of 695


owner ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the client
info ( read-only: name ) - name of the interface to which the client is connected to
Example
See used addresses from pool:
[admin@MikroTik] ip pool used> print
POOL ADDRESS OWNER INFO
local 192.168.0.100 00:0C:42:03:1F:60 test
local 192.168.0.99 00:0C:42:03:21:0F test
Page 542 of 695


SOCKS Proxy Server
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Notes
SOCKS Configuration
Description
Example
Access List
Description
Active Connections
Description
Example
FTP service through SOCKS server
General Information
Summary
This manual discusses the SOCKS proxy server which is implemented in RouterOS. MikroTik
RouterOS supports SOCKS version 4.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip socks
Standards and Technologies: SOCKS version 4
Related Documents
••
Web Proxy
• NAT
Page 543 of 695


Description
SOCKS is a proxy server that allows TCP based application data to relay across the firewall, even if
the firewall would block the packets. The SOCKS protocol is independent from application
protocols, so it can be used for many services, e.g, WWW, FTP, TELNET, and others.
At first, an application client connects to the SOCKS proxy server, then the proxy server looks in its
access list to see whether the client is permited to access the remote application server or not, if it is
permitted, the proxy server relies the packet to the application server and creates a connection
between the application server and client.
Notes
Remember to configure your application client to use SOCKS version 4.
You should secure the SOCKS proxy using its access list and/or firewall to disallow access from
outisde. Failing to secure the proxy server may introduce security issues to your network, and may
provide a way for spammers to send junk mail through the router.
• Information about SOCKS
SOCKS Configuration
Description
In this section you will learn how to enable the SOCKS proxy server and do its configuration.
connection-idle-timeout ( time ; default: 2m ) - time after which idle connections are terminated
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to enable or no the SOCKS proxy
max-connections ( integer : 1 ..500 ; default: 200 ) - maxumum number of simultaneous
connections
port ( integer : 1 ..65535 ; default: 1080 ) - TCP port on which the SOCKS server listens for
connections
Example
To enable SOCKS:
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks> set enabled=yes
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks> print
enabled: yes
port: 1080
connection-idle-timeout: 2m
max-connections: 200
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks>
Page 544 of 695


Access List
Home menu level: /ip socks access
Description
In the SOCKS access list you can add rules which will control access to SOCKS server. This list is
similar to firewall lists.
action ( allow | deny ; default: allow ) - action to be performed for this rule
• allow - allow packets, matching this rule to be forwarded for further processing
• deny - deny access for packets, matching this rule
dst-address ( IP address | netmask | port ) - destination (server's) address
src-address ( IP address | netmask | port ) - source (client's) address for a packet
Active Connections
Home menu level: /ip socks connections
Description
The Active Connection list shows all established TCP connections, which are maintained through
the SOCKS proxy server.
dst-address ( read-only: IP address ) - destination (application server) IP address
RX ( read-only: integer ) - bytes received
src-address ( read-only: IP address ) - source (application client) IP address
TX ( read-only: integer ) - bytes sent
Example
To see current TCP connections:
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks connections> print
# SRC-ADDRESS DST-ADDRESS TX RX
0 192.168.0.2:3242 159.148.147.196:80 4847 2880
1 192.168.0.2:3243 159.148.147.196:80 3408 2127
2 192.168.0.2:3246 159.148.95.16:80 10172 25207
3 192.168.0.2:3248 194.8.18.26:80 474 1629
4 192.168.0.2:3249 159.148.95.16:80 6477 18695
5 192.168.0.2:3250 159.148.95.16:80 4137 27568
6 192.168.0.2:3251 159.148.95.16:80 1712 14296
7 192.168.0.2:3258 80.91.34.241:80 314 208
8 192.168.0.2:3259 80.91.34.241:80 934 524
9 192.168.0.2:3260 80.91.34.241:80 930 524
10 192.168.0.2:3261 80.91.34.241:80 312 158
11 192.168.0.2:3262 80.91.34.241:80 312 158
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks connections>
Page 545 of 695


General Information
FTP service through SOCKS server

Let us consider that we have a network 192.168.0.0/24 which is masqueraded, using a router with a
public IP 10.1.0.104/24 and a private IP 192.168.0.1/24. Somewhere in the network is an FTP
server with IP address 10.5.8.8. We want to allow access to this FTP server for a client in our local
network with IP address 192.168.0.2/24.
We have already masqueraded our local network:

0 chain=srcnat src-address=192.168.0.0/24 action=masquerade
And the access to public FTP servers is denied in firewall:
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall filter> print

0 chain=forward src-address=192.168.0.0/24 dst-address=:21 action=drop
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall filter>
We need to enable the SOCKS server:
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks> set enabled=yes

[admin@MikroTik] ip socks> print
enabled: yes
port: 1080
connection-idle-timeout: 2m
max-connections: 200
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks>
Add access to a client with an IP address 192.168.0.2/32 to SOCKS access list, allow data transfer
from FTP server to client (allow destionation ports from 1024 to 65535 for any IP address), and
drop everything else:
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks access> add src-address=192.168.0.2/32 dst-address=:21

action=allow
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks access> add dst-address=:1024-65535 action=allow
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks access> add action=deny
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks access> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 src-address=192.168.0.2/32 dst-address=:21 action=allow
1 dst-address=:1024-65535 action=allow
2 action=deny
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks access>
That's all - the SOCKS server is configured. To see active connections and data transmitted and
received:
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks connections> print

# SRC-ADDRESS DST-ADDRESS TX RX
0 192.168.0.2:1238 10.5.8.8:21 1163 4625
1 192.168.0.2:1258 10.5.8.8:3423 0 3231744
[admin@MikroTik] ip socks connections>
Note! In order to use SOCKS proxy server, you have to specify its IP address and port in your FTP
Page 546 of 695


client. In this case IP address would be 192.168.0.1 (router's/SOCKS server's local IP) and port
1080.
Page 547 of 695


UPnP
Document revision 2.2 (Tue Mar 08 19:21:08 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Description
Enabling Universal Plug-n-Play
Example
UPnP Interfaces
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS supports Universal Plug and Play architecture for transparent peer-to-peer
network connectivity of personal computers and network-enabled intelligent devices or appliances.
UPnP builds enables these devices to automatically connect with one another and work together to
make networking possible for more people.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip upnp
Standards and Technologies: TCP/IP , HTTP , XML , IGD
Description
UPnP enables data communication between any two devices under the command of any control
device on the network. Universal Plug and Play is completely independent of any particular
physical medium. It supports networking with automatic discovery without any initial
configuration, whereby a device can dynamically join a network. DHCP and DNS servers are
optional and will be used if available on the network. UPnP implements simple yet powerfull NAT
traversal solution, that enables the client to get full peer-to-peer network support from behind the
NAT.
There are two interface types for UPnP: internal (the one local clients are connected to) and external
(the one the Internet is connected to). A router may only have one external interface with a 'public'
Page 548 of 695


IP address on it, and as many internal IP addresses as needed, all with source-NATted 'internal' IP
addresses.
The UPnP protocol is used for most of DirectX games as well as for various Windows Messenger
features (remote asisstance, application sharing, file transfer, voice, video) from behind a firewall.
Enabling Universal Plug-n-Play

Home menu level: /ip upnp
allow-disable-external-interface ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether or not should the users be
allowed to disable router's external interface. This functionality (for users to be able to turn the
router's external interface off without any authentication procedure) is required by the standard, but
as it is sometimes not expected or unwanted in UPnP deployments which the standard was not
designed for (it was designed mostly for home users to establish their local networks), you can
disable this behavior
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether UPnP feature is enabled
show-dummy-rule ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - this is to enable a workaround for some broken
implementations, which are handling the absense of UPnP rules inincorrectly (for example, popping
up error messages). This option will instruct the server to install a dummy (meaningless) UPnP rule
that can be observed by the clients, which refuse to work correctly otherwise
Example
To enable UPnP feature:
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp> set enable=yes

[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp> print
enabled: yes
allow-disable-external-interface: yes
show-dummy-rule: yes
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp>
UPnP Interfaces
Home menu level: /ip upnp interfaces
interface ( name ) - interface name UPnP will be run on
type ( external | internal ) - interface type, one of the:
• external - the interface global IP address is assigned to
• internal - router's local interface
Page 549 of 695


Notes
It is highly recommended to upgrade DirectX runtime libraries to version DirectX 9.0c or higher
and Windows Messenger to version Windows Messenger 5.0 or higher in order to get UPnP to
work properly.
Example
We have masquerading already enabled on our router:
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces> /ip firewall src-nat print

0 src-address=0.0.0.0/0:0-65535 dst-address=0.0.0.0/0:0-65535
out-interface=ether1 protocol=all icmp-options=any:any flow=""
connection="" content="" limit-count=0 limit-burst=0 limit-time=0s
action=masquerade to-src-address=0.0.0.0 to-src-port=0-65535
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces>
Now all we have to do is to add interfaces and enable UPnP:
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces> add interface=ether1 type=external

[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces> add interface=ether2 type=internal
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces> print
Flags: X - disabled
Page 550 of 695


# INTERFACE TYPE
0 X ether1 external
1 X ether2 internal
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces> enable 0,1
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces> .. set enabled=yes
[admin@MikroTik] ip upnp interfaces>
Page 551 of 695


Web Proxy
Document revision 1.2 (Tue May 16 14:04:40 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Quick Setup Guide
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Setup
Notes
Example
Access List
Description
Notes
Example
Direct Access List
Description
Notes
Cache Management
Description
Complementary Tools
Description
Command Description
Transparent Mode
Description
Notes
Example
HTTP Methods
Description
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS implements the following proxy server features:
• Regular HTTP proxy
• Transparent proxy. Can be transparent and regular at the same time
Page 552 of 695


• Access list by source, destination, URL and requested method
• Cache access list (specifies which objects to cache, and which not)
• Direct Access List (specifies which resources should be accessed directly, and which - through
another proxy server)
• Logging facility
Quick Setup Guide

To set up a 1 GiB large web cache which will listen on port 8000, do the following:
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy> set enabled=yes port=8000 max-cache-size=1048576
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy> print
enabled: yes
port: 8000
hostname: proxy
transparent-proxy: no
cache-administrator: webmaster
max-object-size: 4096 KiB
cache-drive: system
max-cache-size: 1048576 KiB
max-ram-cache-size: unlimited
status: rebuilding-cache
reserved-for-cache: 9216 KiB
reserved-for-ram-cache: 2048 KiB
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy>
Remember to secure your proxy by preventing unauthorized access to it, otherwise it may be used
as an open proxy.
Specifications
Packages required: web-proxy
Home menu level: /ip web-proxy
Standards and Technologies: HTTP/1.0 , HTTP/1.1 , FTP
Hardware usage: uses memory and disk space, if available (see description below)
Related Documents

••
Log Management
Description
Web proxy performs Internet object cache function by storing requested Internet objects, i.e., data
available via HTTP and FTP protocols on a system positioned closer to the recipient than the site
the data is originated from. Here 'closer' means increased path reliability, speed or both. Web
browsers can then use the local proxy cache to speed up access and reduce bandwidth consumption.
When setting up Web proxy, make sure it serves only your clients, and is not misused as relay.
Page 553 of 695


Please read the security notice in the Access List Section!
Note that it may be useful to have Web proxy running even with no cache when you want to use it
as something like HTTP and FTP firewall (for example, denying access to mp3 files) or to redirect
requests to external proxy transparently.
Setup
Home menu level: /ip web-proxy
cache-administrator ( text ; default: webmaster ) - administrator's e-mail displayed on proxy error
page
cache-drive ( system | name ; default: system ) - specifies the target disk drive to be used for
storing cached objects. You can use console completion to see the list of available drives
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether the web proxy is enabled
hostname ( text ; default: proxy ) - hostname (DNS or IP address) of the web proxy
max-cache-size ( none | unlimited | integer : 0 ..4294967295 ; default: none ) - specifies the
maximal disk cache size, measured in kibibytes
max-object-size ( integer ; default: 4096 ) - objects larger than the size specified will not be saved
on disk. The value is measured in kibibytes. If you wish to get a high bytes hit ratio, you should
probably increase this (one 2 MiB object hit counts for 2048 1KiB hits). If you wish to increase
speed more than your want to save bandwidth you should leave this low
max-ram-cache-size ( none | unlimited | integer : 0 ..4294967295 ; default: unlimited ) - specifies
the maximal memory cache size, measured in kibibytes
parent-proxy ( IP address | port ; default: 0.0.0.0:0 ) - specifies upper-level (parent) proxy
port ( port ; default: 3128 ) - specifies the port(s) the web proxy will be listening on
reserved-for-cache ( read-only: integer ; default: 0 ) - specifies allocated memory cache size,
measured in kibibytes
reserved-for-ram-cache ( read-only: integer ; default: 2048 ) - specifies allocated memory cache
size, measured in kibibytes
src-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - the web-proxy will use this address connecting to the
parent proxy or web site.
• 0.0.0.0 - appropriate src-address will be automatically taken from the routing table
status ( read-only: text ; default: stopped ) - display status information of the proxy server
• stopped - proxy is disabled and is not running
• rebuilding-cache - proxy is enabled and running, existing cache is being verified
• running - proxy is enabled and running
• stopping - proxy is shutting down (max 10s)
• clearing-cache - proxy is stopped, cache files are being removed
• creating-cache - proxy is stopped, cache directory structure is being created
• dns-missing - proxy is enabled, but not running because of unknown DNS server (you should
specify it under /ip dns)
Page 554 of 695


• invalid-address - proxy is enabled, but not running because of invalid address (you should
change address or port)
• invalid-cache-administrator - proxy is enabled, but not running because of invalid
cache-administrator's e-mail address
• invalid-hostname - proxy is enabled, but not running because of invalid hostname (you should
set a valid hostname value)
• error-logged - proxy is not running because of unknown error. This error is logged as
System-Error. Please, send us this error and some description, how it happened
• reserved-for-cache (integer) - maximal cache size, that is accessible to web-proxy
transparent-proxy ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether the proxy uses transparent mode or
not
Notes
By default the proxy cache can use as much disk space as there is allocated for it. When the system
allocates the space for the proxy cache, 1/7th of the total partition (disk) size is reserved for the
system, but not less than 50MB. The rest is left for the proxy cache. The system RAM size is
considered as well when allocating the cache size. The cache size is limited so, that there are at least
15MB of RAM per 1GB of cache plus 55MB of RAM is reserved for the system. max-cache-size is
also taken in account, so the cache will not occupy more than it is specified in this property. The
effective limit is calculated as a minimum of all three limits. Note also that RouterOS supports up to
950MB of memory.
Considering the previous note, you should be aware that you will not be able to enable web proxy,
if you have less than 60MB of RAM on your router
Expire time of cache entries can be different for each HTML page (specified in headers). But, if
there is no such header, the entry will be considered fresh for not more than 72 hours.
The web proxy listens to all IP addresses that the router has in its IP address list.
Example
To enable the proxy on port 8080:
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy> set enabled=yes port=8080
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy> print
enabled: yes
port: 8080
hostname: proxy
transparent-proxy: no
cache-administrator: webmaster
max-object-size: 4096 KiB
cache-drive: system
max-cache-size: none
max-ram-cache-size: unlimited
status: running
reserved-for-cache: 0 KiB
reserved-for-ram-cache: 2048 KiB
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy>
Access List
Page 555 of 695


Home menu level: /ip web-proxy access
Description
Access list is configured in the same way as MikroTik RouterOS firewall rules. Rules are processed
from the top to the bottom. First matching rule specifies decision of what to do with this connection.
There is a total of 6 classifiers that specify matching constraints. If none of these classifiers is
specified, the particular rule will match every connection.
If connection is matched by a rule, action property of this rule specifies whether connection will be
allowed or not. If the particular connection does not match any rule, it will be allowed.
By default, there is one rule, which prevents connect requests to ports other then 443 and 563.
action ( allow | deny ; default: allow ) - specifies whether to pass or deny matched packets
request (see HTTP Methods section at the end of this document)
url ( wildcard ) - the URL of the HTTP request
Notes
There is one rule by default, that disallows connect method connections to ports other than 443
(https) and 563 (snews). connect method is a security hole that allows connections (transparent
tunneling) to any computer using any protocol. It is used mostly by spammers, as they found it very
convenient to use others' mail (SMTP) servers as anonymous mail relay to send spam over the
Internet.
It is strongly recommended to deny all IP addresses except those behind the router as the proxy still
may be used to access your internal-use-only (intranet) web servers. Also, consult examples in
Firewall Manual on how to protect your router.
Wildcard property url matches a complete string (i.e., they will not match "example.com" if they
are set to "example"). Available wildcards are '*' (match any number of any characters) and '?'
(match any one character). Regular expressions are also accepted here, but if the property should be
treated as a regular expression, it should start with a colon (':').
Page 556 of 695


the pattern
• to enter [ or ] symbols, you should escape them with backslash \.
Example
The default rule:
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy access> print
0 ;;; allow CONNECT only to SSL ports 443 [https] and 563 [snews]
dst-port=!443,563 method=connect action=deny
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy access>
To disallow download of .MP3 and .MPG files and FTP connections other than from the 10.0.0.1
server:
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy access> add url=":\\.mp\[3g\]$" action=deny
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy access> add src-address=10.0.0.1/32 action=allow
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy access> add url="ftp://*" action=deny
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy access> print
0 ;;; allow CONNECT only to SSL ports 443 [https] and 563 [snews]
dst-port=!443,563 method=connect action=deny
1 url=":\.mp[3g]$" action=deny
2 src-address=10.0.0.1/32 action=allow
3 url="ftp://*" action=deny
[admin@MikroTik] ip web-proxy access>
Direct Access List

Home menu level: /ip web-proxy direct
Description
If parent-proxy property is specified, it is possible to tell the proxy server whether to try to pass the
request to the parent proxy or to resolve it connecting to the requested server directly. Direct Access
List is managed just like Proxy Access List described in the previous chapter except the action
argument.
• allow - always resolve matched requests directly bypassing the parent router
• deny - resolve matched requests through the parent proxy. If no one is specified this has the
same effect as allow
Page 557 of 695


Notes
Unlike the access list, the direct proxy access list has default action equal to deny. It takes place
when no rules are specified or a particular request did not match any rule.
Cache Management
Home menu level: /ip web-proxy cache
Description
Cache access list specifies, which requests (domains, servers, pages) have to be cached locally by
web proxy, and which not. This list is implemented exactly the same way as web proxy access list.
Default action is to cache object (if no matching rule is found).
• allow - cache objects from matched request
• deny - do not cache objects from matched request
Complementary Tools
Description
Web proxy has additional commands to handle non-system drive used for caching purposes and to
recover the proxy from severe file system errors.
Command Description
check-drive - checks non-system cache drive for errors
clear-cache - deletes existing cache and creates new cache directories
Page 558 of 695


format-drive - formats non-system cache drive and prepairs it for holding the cache
Transparent Mode
Description
Transparent proxy feature performs request caching invisibly to the end-user. This way the user
does not notice that his connection is being processed by the proxy and therefore does not need to
perform any additional configuration of the software he is using.
This feature may as well be combined with bridge to simplify deployment of web proxy in the
existing infrastructure.
To enable the transparent mode, place a firewall rule in destination NAT, specifying which
connections, id est traffic coming to which ports should be redirected to the proxy.
Notes
Only HTTP traffic is supported in transparent mode of the web proxy. HTTPS and FTP protocols
are not going to work this way.
Example
To configure the router to transparently redirect all connections coming from ether1 interface to
port 80 to the web proxy listening on port 8080, then add the following destination NAT rule:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall nat add in-interface=ether1 dst-port=80 \
\... protocol=tcp action=redirect to-ports=8080 chain=dstnat
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip firewall nat print
0 chain=dstnat protocol=tcp in-interface=ether1 dst-port=80 action=redirect
to-ports=8080
[admin@MikroTik] >
Be aware, that you will not be able to access the router's web page after addition of the rule above
unless you will change the port for the www service under /ip service submenu to a different value
or explicitly exclude router's IP address from those to be matched, like:
It is assumed that the router's address is 1.1.1.1/32.
HTTP Methods
Description
OPTIONS
This method is a request of information about the communication options available on the chain
between the client and the server identified by the Request-URI. The method allows the client to
determine the options and (or) the requirements associated with a resource without initiating any
resource retrieval
Page 559 of 695


GET
This method retrieves whatever information identified by the Request-URI. If the Request-URI
refers to a data processing process than the response to the GET method should contain data
produced by the process, not the source code of the process procedure(-s), unless the source is the
result of the process.
The GET method can become a conditional GET if the request message includes an
If-Modified-Since, If-Unmodified-Since, If-Match, If-None-Match, or If-Range header field.
The conditional GET method is used to reduce the network traffic specifying that the transfer of the
entity should occur only under circumstances described by conditional header field(-s).
The GET method can become a partial GET if the request message includes a Range header field.
The partial GET method intends to reduce unnecessary network usage by requesting only parts of
entities without transferring data already held by client.
The response to a GET request is cacheable if and only if it meets the requirements for HTTP
caching.
HEAD
This method shares all features of GET method except that the server must not return a
message-body in the response. This retrieves the metainformation of the entity implied by the
request which leads to a wide usage of it for testing hypertext links for validity, accessibility, and
recent modification.
The response to a HEAD request may be cacheable in the way that the information contained in the
response may be used to update previously cached entity identified by that Request-URI.
POST
This method requests that the origin server accept the entity enclosed in the request as a new
subordinate of the resource identified by the Request-URI.
The actual action performed by the POST method is determined by the origin server and usually is
Request-URI dependent.
Responses to POST method are not cacheable, unless the response includes appropriate
Cache-Control or Expires header fields.
PUT
This method requests that the enclosed entity be stored under the supplied Request-URI. If another
entity exists under specified Request-URI, the enclosed entity should be considered as updated
(newer) version of that residing on the origin server. If the Request-URI is not pointing to an
existing resource, the origin server should create a resource with that URI.
If the request passes through a cache and the Request-URI identifies one or more currently cached
entities, those entries should be treated as stale. Responses to this method are not cacheable.
TRACE
Page 560 of 695


This method invokes a remote, application-layer loop-back of the request message. The final
recipient of the request should reflect the message received back to the client as the entity-body of a
200 (OK) response. The final recipient is either the origin server or the first proxy or gateway to
receive a Max-Forwards value of 0 in the request. A TRACE request must not include an entity.
Responses to this method MUST NOT be cached.
Page 561 of 695


Certificate Management
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Description
Certificates
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
SSL (Secure Socket Layer) is a security technology to ensure encrypted transactions over a public
network. To protect the data, an encryption key should be negotiated. SSL protocol is using
Certificates to negotiate a key for data encryption.
Specifications
Home menu level: /certificate
Standards and Technologies: SSLv2 , SSLv3 , TLS
Hardware usage: high CPU usage
Description
SSL technology was first introduced by Netscape to ensure secure transactions between browsers
and web servers. When a browser requests a secure web page (usually on TCP port 443), a web
server first sends a Certificate, which contains a public key for the encryption key negotiation to
take place. After the encryption key is negotiated, the web server will send the requested page
encrypted using this key to the browser (and also the browser will be able to submit its data
securely to the server)
SSL Certificate confirms the web server identity. The Certificate contains information about its
holder (like DNS name and Country), issuer (the entity has signed the Certificate) and also the
public key used to negotiate the encryption key. In order a Certificate to play its role, it should be
signed by a third party (Certificate Authority) which both parties trust. Modern browsers that
support SSL protocol have a list of the Certificate Authorities they trust (the most known and
trusted CA is VeriSign, but that is not the only one)
Page 562 of 695


To use a Certificate (which contain a public key), server needs a private key. One of the keys is
used for encryption, and the other - for decryption. It is important to understand, that both keys can
encrypt and decrypt, but what is encrypted by one of them can be decrypted only by the another.
Private key must be kept securely, so that nobody else can get it and use this certificate. Usually
private key is encrypted with a passphrase.
Most trusted Certificate Authorities sell the service of signing Certificates (Certificates also have a
finite validity term, so you will have to pay regularly). It is also possible to create a self-signed
Certificate (you can create one on most UNIX/Linux boxes using openssl toolkit; all Root
Certificate Authorities have self-signed Certificates), but if it is not present in a browser's database,
the browser will pop up a security warning, saying that the Certificate is not trusted (note also that
most browsers support importing custom Certificates to their databases).
Certificates
Home menu level: /certificate
Description
MikroTik RouterOS can import Certificates for the SSL services it provides (only HotSpot for
now). This submenu is used to manage Certificates for this services.
name ( name ) - reference name
subject ( read-only: text ) - holder (subject) of the certificate
issuer ( read-only: text ) - issuer of the certificate
serial-number ( read-only: text ) - serial number of the certificate
invalid-before ( read-only: date ) - date the certificate is valid from
invalid-after ( read-only: date ) - date the certificate is valid until
ca ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether the certificate is used for building or verifying certificate
chains (as Certificate Authority)
Command Description
import - install new certificates
• file-name - import only this file (all files are searched for certificates by default)
• passphrase - passphrase for the found encrypted private key
• certificates-imported - how many new certificates were successfully imported
• private-keys-imported - how many private keys for existing certificates were successfully
imported
• files-imported - how many files contained at least one item that was successfully imported
• decryption-failures - how many files could not be decrypted
• keys-with-no-certificate - how many public keys were successfully decrypted, but did not have
matching certificate already installed
reset-certificate-cache - delete all cached decrypted public keys and rebuild the certificate cache
Page 563 of 695


decrypt - decrypt and cache public keys
• passphrase - passphrase for the found encrypted private key
• keys-decrypted - how many keys were successfully decrypted and cached
create-certificate-request - creates an RSA certificate request to be signed by a Certificate
Authority. After this, download both private key and certificate request files from the router. When
you receive your signed certificate from the CA, upload it and the private key (that is made by this
command) to a router and use /certificate import command to install it
• certificate request file name - name for the certificate request file (if it already exists, it will be
overwritten). This is the original certificate that will be signed by the Certificate Authority
• file name - name of private key file. If such file does not exist, it will be created during the next
step. Private key is used to encrypt the certificate
• passphrase - the passphrase that will be used to encrypt generated private key file. You must
enter it twice to be sure you have not made any typing errors
• rsa key bits - number of bits for RSA (encryption) key. Longer keys take more time to
generate. 4096 bit key takes about 30 seconds on Celeron 800 system to generate
• country name - (C) ISO two-character country code (e.g., LV for Latvia)
• state or province name - (ST) full name of state or province
• locality name - (L) locality (e.g. city) name
• organization name - (O) name of the organization or company
• organization unit name - (OU) organization unit name
• common name - (CN) the server's common name. For SSL web servers this must be the fully
qualified domain name (FQDN) of the server that will use this certificate (like
www.example.com). This is checked by web browsers
• email address - (Email) e-mail address of the person responsible for the certificate
• challenge password - the challenge password. It's use depends on your CA. It may be used to
revoke this certificate
• unstructured address - unstructured address (like street address). Enter only if your CA
accepts or requires it
Notes
Server certificates may have ca property set to no, but Certificate Authority certificates must have it
set to yes
Certificates and encrypted private keys are imported from and exported to the router's FTP server.
Public keys are not stored on a router in unencrypted form. Cached decrypted private keys are
stored in encrypted form, using key that is derived from the router ID. Passphrases are not stored on
router.
Configuration backup does not include cached decrypted private keys. After restoring backup all
certificates with private keys must be decrypted again, using decrypt command with the correct
passphrase.
No other certificate operations are possible while generating a key.
When making a certificate request, you may leave some of the fields empty. CA may reject your
certificate request if some of these values are incorrect or missing, so please check what are the
Page 564 of 695


requirements of your CA
Example
To import a certificate and the respective private key already uploaded on the router:
[admin@MikroTik] certificate> import

passphrase: xxxx
certificates-imported: 1
private-keys-imported: 1
files-imported: 2
decryption-failures: 0
keys-with-no-certificate: 1
[admin@MikroTik] certificate> print
Flags: K - decrypted-private-key, Q - private-key, R - rsa, D - dsa
0 QR name="cert1" subject=C=LV,ST=.,O=.,CN=cert.test.mt.lv
issuer=C=LV,ST=.,O=.,CN=third serial-number="01"
invalid-before=sep/17/2003 11:56:19 invalid-after=sep/16/2004 11:56:19
ca=yes
[admin@MikroTik] certificate> decrypt
passphrase: xxxx
keys-decrypted: 1
[admin@MikroTik] certificate> print
Flags: K - decrypted-private-key, Q - private-key, R - rsa, D - dsa
0 KR name="cert1" subject=C=LV,ST=.,O=.,CN=cert.test.mt.lv
issuer=C=LV,ST=.,O=.,CN=third serial-number="01"
invalid-before=sep/17/2003 11:56:19 invalid-after=sep/16/2004 11:56:19
ca=yes
[admin@MikroTik] certificate>
Now the certificate may be used by HotSpot servlet:

0 telnet 23 0.0.0.0/0
1 ftp 21 0.0.0.0/0
2 www 8081 0.0.0.0/0
3 hotspot 80 0.0.0.0/0
4 ssh 22 0.0.0.0/0
5 hotspot-ssl 443 0.0.0.0/0 none
[admin@MikroTik] ip service> set hotspot-ssl certificate=
cert1 none
[admin@MikroTik] ip service> set hotspot-ssl certificate=cert1
0 telnet 23 0.0.0.0/0
1 ftp 21 0.0.0.0/0
2 www 8081 0.0.0.0/0
3 hotspot 80 0.0.0.0/0
4 ssh 22 0.0.0.0/0
5 hotspot-ssl 443 0.0.0.0/0 cert1
Page 565 of 695


DDNS Update Tool
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Dynamic DNS Update
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
Dynamic DNS Update Tool gives a way to keep domain name pointing to dynamic IP address. It
works by sending domain name system update request to name server, which has a zone to be
updated. Secure DNS updates are also supported.
The DNS update tool supports only one algorithm - hmac-md5. It's the only proposed algorithm for
signing DNS messages.
Specifications
Packages required: advanced-tools
Command name: /tool dns-update
Standards and Technologies: Dynamic Updates in the DNS (RFC 2136) , Secure DNS Dynamic
Update (RFC 3007)
Related Documents
Description
Dynamic DNS Update is a tool that should be manually run to update dynamic DNS server.
Note that you have to have a DNS server that supports DNS updates properly configured.
Page 566 of 695


• DNS related RFCs
Dynamic DNS Update

Command name: /tool dns-update
address ( IP address ) - defines IP address associated with the domain name
dns-server ( IP address ) - DNS server to send update to
key ( text ; default: "" ) - authorization key (password of a kind) to access the server
key-name ( text ; default: "" ) - authorization key name (username of a kind) to access the server
name ( text ) - name to attach with the IP address
ttl ( integer ; default: 0 ) - time to live for the item (in seconds)
zone ( text ) - DNS zone where to update the domain name in
Notes
Example
To tell 23.34.45.56 DNS server to (re)associate mydomain name in the myzone.com zone with
68.42.14.4 IP address specifying that the name of the key is dns-update-key and the actual key is
update:
[admin@MikroTik] tool> dns-update dns-server=23.34.45.56 name=mydomain \
\... zone=myzone.com address=68.42.14.4 key-name=dns-update-key key=update
Page 567 of 695


GPS Synchronization
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Synchronizing with a GPS Receiver
Notes
Example
GPS Monitoring
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver can be used by MikroTik RouterOS to get the precise
location and time (which may be used as NTP time source)
Specifications
Packages required: gps
Home menu level: /system gps
Standards and Technologies: GPS , NMEA 0183 , Simple Text Output Protocol
Related Documents
• NTP (Network Time Protocol)
Description
Global Positioning System (GPS) is used for determining precise location of a GPS receiver. There
are two types of GPS service:
Page 568 of 695


• Precise Positioning Service (PPS) that is used only by U. S. and Allied military, certain U. S.
Government agencies, and selected civil users specifically approved by the U. S. Government.
Its accuracy is 22m horizontally, 27.7m vertically and 200ns of time
• Standard Positioning Service (SPS) can be used by civil users worldwide without charge or
restrictions except that SPS accuracy is intentionally degradated to 100m horizontally, 156m
vertically and 340ns of time
GPS system is based on 24 satellites rotating on 6 different orbital planes with 12h orbital period. It
makes that at least 5, but usually 6 or more satellites are visible at any time anywhere on the Earth.
GPS receiver calculates more or less precise position (latitude, longitude and altitude) and time
based on signals received from 4 satellites (three are used to determine position and fourth is used
to correct time), which are broadcasting their current positions and UTC time.
MikroTik RouterOS can communicate with many GPS receivers which are able to send the
positioning and time via asynchronous serial line using NMEA 0183, NMEA/RTCM or Simple
Text Output Protocol. Note that you might need to configure the router's serial port in order to work
with your device. For example, many GPS receivers work on 4800bit/s bitrate, to the same should
be set in the /port menu for the respective serial port.
Precise time is mainly intended to be used by built-in NTP server, which can use it as a time source
without any additional configuration if GPS is configured to set system time.
• Global Positioning System - How it Works
Synchronizing with a GPS Receiver

Home menu level: /system gps
enabled ( yes | no ) - whether the router will communicate with a GPS receiver or not
port ( name ) - the port that will be used to communicate with a GPS receiver
set-system-time ( time ) - whether to set the system time to the value received from a GPS receiver
or not
Notes
If you are synchronizing system time with a GPS device, you should correctly choose time zone if it
is different from GMT as satellites are broadcasting GMT (a.k.a. UTC) time.
Example
To enable GPS communication through serial0 port:
[admin@MikroTik] system gps> print
enabled: no
port: (unknown)
set-system-time: yes
[admin@MikroTik] system gps> set enabled=yes port=serial0
Page 569 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] system gps> print
enabled: yes
port: serial0
set-system-time: yes
[admin@MikroTik] system gps>
GPS Monitoring
Home menu level: /system gps monitor
Description
This command is used for monitoring the data received from a GPS receiver.
date-and-time ( read-only: text ) - date and time received from GPS server
longitude ( read-only: text ) - longitude of the current location
latitude ( read-only: text ) - latitude of the current location
altitude ( read-only: text ) - altitude of the current location
speed ( read-only: text ) - mean velocity
valid ( read-only: yes | no ) - whether the received information is valid or not (e.g. you can set a
GPS receiver to the demo mode to test the connection, in which case you will receive information,
but it will not be valid)
Example
[admin@MikroTik] system gps> monitor
date-and-time: jul/23/2003 12:25:00
longitude: "E 24 8' 17''"
latitude: "N 56 59' 22''"
altitude: "-127.406400m"
speed: "0.001600 km/h"
valid: yes
[admin@MikroTik] system gps>
Page 570 of 695


LCD Management
Document revision 2.5 (July 9, 2007, 9:36 GMT)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Configuring the LCD's Settings
Example
LCD Information Display Configuration
Description
Notes
Example
LCD Troubleshooting
Description
General Information
Summary
LCDs are used to display system information.
The MikroTik RouterOS supports the following LCD hardware:
• Crystalfontz ( http://www.crystalfontz.com ) Intelligent Serial LCD Module 632 (16x2
characters) and 634 (20x4 characters)
• Powertip ( http://www.powertip.com.tw ) PC1602 (16x2 characters), PC1604 (16x4
characters), PC2002 (20x2 characters), PC2004 (20x4 characters), PC2402 (24x2 characters)
and PC2404 (24x4 characters)
• Portwell ( http://www.portwell.com.tw ) EZIO-100 (16x2 characters)
Specifications
Packages required: lcd
Home menu level: /system lcd
Related Documents
Page 571 of 695


Description
How to Connect PowerTip LCD to a Parallel Port

Data signals are connected that way:
DB25m Signal LCD Panel

1 Enable (Strobe) 6
2 Data 0 7
3 Data 1 8
4 Data 2 9
5 Data 3 10
6 Data 4 11
7 Data 5 12
8 Data 6 13
9 Data 7 14
14 Register Select 4
18-25, GND Ground 1, 5, 16
Powering:
As there are only 16 pins for the PC1602 modules, you need not connect power to the 17th pin.
GND and +5V can be taken from computer's internal power supply (use black wire for GND and
red wire for +5V)
WARNING! Be very careful connecting power supply. We do not recommend using external
power supplies. In no event shall MikroTik liable for any hardware damages.
Note that there are some PowerTip PC2404A modules that have different pin-out. Compare:
Page 572 of 695


• From www.powertip.com.tw (probably newer one)
• From www.actron.de (probably older one)
Some LCDs may be connected without resistors:
DB25m Signal LCD Panel

18-25, GND Ground 1, 3, 4, 16
+5V Power 2, 15
Crystalfontz LCD Installation Notes

Before connecting the LCD, please check the availability of ports, their configuration, and free the
desired port resource, if required:
[admin@MikroTik] port> print
1 serial1 9600
The baud rate should be set to 9600 for use with the Crystalfontz serial LCD modules.
Portwell Installation Notes

The baud rate should be set to 2400 for Portwell LCD modules. The flow control should be set to
none. Make sure you use V2.9.44 or later of RouterOS. The wiring for the DB9 to 10-pin female
header cable is:
DB9 female 10-pin female header

2 2
3 3
5 5
Please note that the actual traces may not correspond to any of the documents coming from the
manufacturer. It seems that all pin numbers of J2 are printed on the silkscreen in a "mirrored" way.
Thus, the #1 pin is where the "5" is printed (the wiring above lists actual pin numbers, not the ones
printed on the board).
Configuring the LCD's Settings

Home menu level: /system lcd
contrast ( integer : 0 ..255 ; default: 0 ) - contrast setting, sent to the LCD, if it supports contrast
regulations
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - turns the LCD on or off
port ( name | parallel ; default: parallel ) - name of the port where the LCD is connected. May be
Page 573 of 695


either one of the serial ports, or the first parallel
type ( 16x2 | 16x4 | 20x2 | 20x4 | 24x2 | 24x4 | mtb-134 ; default: 24x4 ) - sets the type of the LCD
• mtb-134 - Portwell EZIO-100
Example
To enable Powertip parallel port LCD:
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd> print
enabled: no
type: 24x4
port: parallel
contrast: 0
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd> set enabled=yes
enabled: yes
type: 24x4
port: parallel
contrast: 0
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd>
To enable Crystalfontz serial LCD on serial1:

[admin@MikroTik] system lcd> set port=serial1
enabled: yes
type: 24x4
port: serial1
contrast: 0
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd>
LCD Information Display Configuration

Home menu level: /system lcd page
Description
The submenu is used for configuring LCD information display: what pages and how long will be
shown.
description ( read-only: text ) - page description
display-time ( time ; default: 5s ) - how long to display the page
Notes
You cannot neither add your own pages (they are created dynamically depending on the
configuration) nor change pages' description.
Example
To enable displaying all the pages:
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd page> print
Flags: X - disabled
Page 574 of 695


# DISPLAY-TIME DESCRIPTION
0 X 5s System date and time
1 X 5s System resources - cpu and memory load
2 X 5s System uptime
3 X 5s Aggregate traffic in packets/sec
4 X 5s Aggregate traffic in bits/sec
5 X 5s Software version and build info
6 X 5s ether1
7 X 5s prism1
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd page> enable [find]
Flags: X - disabled
0 5s System date and time
1 5s System resources - cpu and memory load
2 5s System uptime
3 5s Aggregate traffic in packets/sec
4 5s Aggregate traffic in bits/sec
5 5s Software version and build info
6 5s ether1
7 5s prism1
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd page>
To set "System date and time" page to be displayed for 10 seconds:

[admin@MikroTik] system lcd page> set 0 display-time=10s
Flags: X - disabled
0 10s System date and time
1 5s System resources - cpu and memory load
2 5s System uptime
3 5s Aggregate traffic in packets/sec
4 5s Aggregate traffic in bits/sec
5 5s Software version and build info
6 5s ether1
7 5s prism1
[admin@MikroTik] system lcd page>
LCD Troubleshooting
Description
LCD doesn't work, cannot be enabled by the '/system lcd set enabled=yes' command.
Probably the selected serial port is used by PPP client or server, or by the serial console. Check the
availability and use of the ports by examining the output of the /port print command. Alternatively,
select another port for connecting the LCD, or free up the desired port by disabling the related
resource
LCD doesn't work, does not show any information.
Probably none of the information display items have been enabled. Use the /system lcd page set
command to enable the display.
Page 575 of 695


MNDP
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Setup
Example
Neighbour List
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik Neighbor Discovery Protocol (MNDP) eases network configuration and management
by enabling each MikroTik router to discover other connected MikroTik routers and learn
information about the system along with features which are enabled. The MikroTik routers can
automatically use learned information to set up some features with minimal or no configuration.
MNDP features:
• works on IP level connections
• works on all non-dynamic interfaces
• distributes basic information on the software version
• distributes information on configured features that should interoperate with other MikroTik
routers
MikroTik RouterOS is able to discover both MNDP and CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) devices.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip neighbor
Standards and Technologies: MNDP
Related Documents
Page 576 of 695


• M3P
Description
MNDP basic function is to assist with automatic configuration of features that are only available
between MikroTik routers. Currently this is used for the 'Packet Packer' feature. The 'Packet Packer'
may be enabled on a per interface basis. The MNDP protocol will then keep information about what
routers have enabled the 'unpack' feature and the 'Packet Packer' will be used for traffic between
these routers.
Specific features
• works on interfaces that support IP protocol and have at least one IP address and on all
ethernet-like interfaces even without IP addresses
• is enabled by default for all new Ethernet-like interfaces -- Ethernet, wireless, EoIP, IPIP
tunnels, PPTP-static-server
• when older versions on the RouterOS are upgraded from a version without discovery to a
version with discovery, current Ethernet like interfaces will not be automatically enabled for
MNDP
• uses UDP protocol port 5678
• a UDP packet with router info is broadcasted over the interface every 60 seconds
• every 30 seconds, the router checks if some of the neighbor entries are not stale
• if no info is received from a neighbor for more than 180 seconds the neighbor information is
discarded
Setup
Home menu level: /ip neighbor discovery
name ( read-only: name ) - interface name for reference
discover ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - specifies whether the neighbour discovery is enabled or not
Example
To disable MNDP protocol on Public interface:
[admin@MikroTik] ip neighbor discovery> set Public discover=no
[admin@MikroTik] ip neighbor discovery> print
# NAME DISCOVER
0 Public no
1 Local yes
Neighbour List
Home menu level: /ip neigbor
Page 577 of 695


Description
This submenu allows you to see the list of neighbours discovered
interface ( read-only: name ) - local interface name the neighbour is connected to
address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address of the neighbour router
mac-address ( read-only: MAC address ) - MAC address of the neighbour router
identity ( read-only: text ) - identity of the neighbour router
version ( read-only: text ) - operating system or firmware version of the neighbour router
unpack ( read-only: none | simple | compress-headers | compress-all ) - identifies if the interface of
the neighbour router is unpacking packets packed with M3P
platform ( read-only: text ) - hardware/software platworm type of neighbour router
age ( read-only: time ) - specifies the record's age in seconds (time from last update)
Example
To view the table of discovered neighbours:
[admin@MikroTik] ip neighbor> pri
# INTERFACE ADDRESS MAC-ADDRESS IDENTITY VERSION
0 ether2 10.1.0.113 00:0C:42:00:02:06 ID 2.9beta5
1 ether2 1.1.1.3 00:0C:42:03:02:ED MikroTik 2.9beta5
[admin@MikroTik] ip neighbor>
Page 578 of 695


System Clock and NTP
Document revision NaN (Mon Jul 10 13:21:55 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
System Clock
Summary
Notes
Example
System Clock DST adjustment
Description
Example
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Client
Example
Server
Notes
Example
Time Zone
Notes
Example
System Clock
Summary
System clock allows router to track current date and time.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system clock
date ( text ) - date in format "mm/DD/YYY"
dst-active ( read-only: yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the Daylight Saving Time is currently
acitve
Page 579 of 695


time ( time ) - time in format "HH:MM:SS"
time-zone ( text ) - UTC timezone in format "+HH:MM" or "-HH:MM"
Notes
It is recommended that you reboot the router after time change to obviate the possible errors in time
measurments and logging.
Date and time settings become permanent and effect BIOS settings.
If NTP update gives time shifted by 1 hour, although the time zone is set correctly, you may want to
adjust the DST setting in /system clock dst menu.
Example
To view the current date and time settings:
[admin@Local] system clock> print
time: 08:26:37
date: nov/18/2004
time-zone: +00:00
dst-active: no
[admin@Local] system clock>
To set the system date and time:

[admin@Local] system clock> set date=nov/22/2022 time=11:10:21 time-zone=+0
time: 11:10:25
date: nov/22/2022
time-zone: +00:00
dst-active: no
System Clock DST adjustment

Home menu level: /system clock dst
Description
In most countries, a Daylight Saving Time regime is activated in spring and deactivated in autumn.
This configuration menu provides DST adjustment facility, to drift the timezone according to your
local legislation and practice.
dst-delta ( text ; default: +01:00 ) - UTC timezone drift in format "+HH:MM" or "-HH:MM" to be
added to the local timezone during DST period
dst-end ( date | time ) - date and time when DST ends (when the delta is to be dropped).
dst-start ( date | time ) - date and time when DST begins (when the delta is to be applied).
Example
To make DST zonechange active from mar/27/2005 03:00:00 till oct/30/2005 03:00:00:
Page 580 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] system clock dst> set dst-start="mar/27/2005 03:00:00"
dst-end="oct/30/2005 03:00:00"
[admin@MikroTik] system clock dst> print
dst-delta: +01:00
dst-start: mar/27/2005 03:00:00
dst-end: oct/30/2005 03:00:00
[admin@MikroTik] system clock dst>
General Information
Summary
NTP protocol allows synchronizing time among computers in network. It is good if there is an
internet connection available and local NTP server is synchronized to correct time source. List of
publec NTP servers is available at http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~mills/ntp/servers.html
Specifications
Packages required: ntp
Home menu level: /system ntp
Standards and Technologies: NTP version 3 (RFC 1305)
Related Documents

Description
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize time with some NTP servers in a network.
MikroTik RouterOS provides both - NTP client and NTP server.
NTP server listens on UDP port 123
NTP client synchronizes local clock with some other time source (NTP server). There are 4 modes
in which NTP client can operate at:
• unicast (Client/Server) mode - NTP client connects to specified NTP server. IP address of
NTP server must be set in ntp-server and/or second-ntp-server parameters. At first client
synchronizes to NTP server. Afterwards client periodically (64..1024s) sends time requests to
NTP server. Unicast mode is the only one which uses ntp-server and second-ntp-server
parameters.
• broadcast mode - NTP client listens for broadcast messages sent by NTP server. After
receiving first broadcast message, client synchronizes local clock using unicast mode, and
afterwards does not send any packets to that NTP server. It uses received broadcast messages
to adjust local clock.
• multicast mode - acts the same as broadcast mode, only instead of broadcast messages (IP
Page 581 of 695


address 255.255.255.255) multicast messages are received (IP address 224.0.1.1).
• manycast mode - actually is unicast mode only with unknown IP address of NTP server. To
discover NTP server, client sends multicast message (IP 239.192.1.1). If NTP server is
configured to listen for these multicast messages (manycast mode is enabled), it replies. After
client receives reply, it enters unicast mode and synchronizes to that NTP server. But in
parallel client continues to look for more NTP servers by sending multicast messages
periodically.
Client
Home menu level: /system ntp client
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the NTP client is enabled or not
mode ( unicast | broadcast | multicast | manycast ; default: unicast ) - NTP client mode
primary-ntp ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - specifies IP address of the primary NTP server
secondary-ntp ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - specifies IP address of the secondary NTP server
status ( read-only: text ) - status of the NTP client:
• stopped - NTP is not running (NTP is disabled)
• error - there was some internal error starting NTP service (please, try to restart (disable and
enable) NTP service)
• started - NTP client service is started, but NTP server is not found, yet
• failed - NTP server sent invalid response to our NTP client (NTP server is not synchronized to
some other time source)
• reached - NTP server contacted. Comparing local clock to NTP server's clock (duration of this
phase is approximately 30s)
• timeset - local time changed to NTP server's time (duration of this phase is approximately 30s)
• synchronized - local clock is synchronized to NTP server's clock. NTP server is activated
• using-local-clock - using local clock as time source (server enabled while client disabled)
Example
To enable the NTP client to synchronize with the 159.148.60.2 server:
[admin@MikroTik] system ntp client> set enabled=yes primary-ntp=159.148.60.2
[admin@MikroTik] system ntp client> print
enabled: yes
mode: unicast
primary-ntp: 159.148.60.2
secondary-ntp: 0.0.0.0
status: synchronized
[admin@MikroTik] system ntp client>
Server
Home menu level: /system ntp server
Page 582 of 695


broadcast ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether NTP broadcast message is sent to 255.255.255.255
every 64s
enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the NTP server is enabled
manycast ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether NTP server listens for multicast messages sent to
239.192.1.1 and responds to them
multicast ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether NTP multicast message is sent to 224.0.1.1 every 64s
Notes
NTP server activities only when local NTP client is in synchronized or using-local-clock mode.
If NTP server is disabled, all NTP requests are ignored.
If NTP server is enabled, all individual time requests are answered.
CAUTION! Using broadcast, multicast and manycast modes is dangerous! Intruder (or simple
user) can set up his own NTP server. If this new server will be chosen as time source for your
server, it will be possible for this user to change time on your server at his will.
Example
To enable NTP server to answer unicast requests only:
[admin@MikroTik] system ntp server> set manycast=no enabled=yes
[admin@MikroTik] system ntp server> print
enabled: yes
broadcast: no
multicast: no
manycast: no
[admin@MikroTik] system ntp server>
Time Zone
Notes
NTP changes local clock to UTC (GMT) time by default.
Example
Time zone is specified as a difference between local time and GMT time. For example, if GMT
time is 10:24:40, but correct local time is 12:24:40, then time-zone has to be set to +2 hour:
[admin@MikroTik] system clock> print
time: dec/24/2003 10:24:40
time-zone: +00:00
[admin@MikroTik] system clock> set time-zone=+02:00
time: dec/24/2003 12:24:42
time-zone: +02:00
[admin@MikroTik] system clock>
Page 583 of 695


If local time is before GMT time, time-zone value will be negative. For example, if GMT is
18:00:00, but correct local time is 15:00:00, time-zone has to be set to -3 hours:
[admin@MikroTik] system clock> set time-zone=-3
time: sep/24/2004 08:13:28
time-zone: -03:00
Page 584 of 695


RouterBoard-specific functions
Document revision 3 (Wed Jul 06 11:26:35 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
BIOS upgrading
Description
Command Description
Example
BIOS Configuration
Description
Example
System Health Monitoring
Description
Notes
Example
LED Management or RB200
Description
Notes
Example
LED Management on RB500
Description
Fan voltage control
Description
Console Reset Jumper
Description
General Information
Summary
There are some features used to configure specific functions exist only in RouterBOARD series
embedded routers:
• BIOS upgrading
• BIOS configuration
Page 585 of 695


• Health monitoring (RouterBOARD 200 series only)
• LED control (may be used in scripting)
• Fan voltage control (on/off) (RouterBOARD 200 series only)
• Console reset jumper (RouterBOARD 200 series only)
Specifications
Packages required: routerboard
Home menu level: /system routerboard , /system health
Hardware usage: works only on RouterBOARD platform
BIOS upgrading
Home menu level: /system routerboard
Description
The BIOS is needed to recognize all the hardware and boot the system up. Newer BIOS versions
might have support for more hardware, so it's generally a good idea to upgrade the BIOS once a
newer version is available.
The newest versions of BIOS firmware is included in the newest routerboard software package.
BIOS firmware may also be uploaded to router's FTP server (the file is called wlb-bios.rom). This
way, for example, BIOS firmware may be transferred from one router to an another.
current-firmware ( read-only: text ) - the version and build date of the BIOS already flashed
model ( read-only: text ) - RouterBOARD model
routerboard ( read-only: yes | no ) - whether the motherboard has been detected as a
RouterBOARD
serial-number ( read-only: text ) - RouterBOARD serial number
upgrade-firmware ( read-only: text ) - the version and build date of the BIOS that is available for
flashing
Command Description
upgrade - write the uploaded firmware to the BIOS (asks confirmation, and then reboots the router)
Example
To check the current and available firmware version numbers:
[admin@MikroTik] system routerboard> print

routerboard: yes
model: 230
serial-number: 8524983
current-firmware: 1.3.4beta7 (Nov/12/2004 17:12:58)
Page 586 of 695


upgrade-firmware: 1.3.4beta7 (Nov/16/2004 17:02:35)
[admin@MikroTik] system routerboard>
To upgrade the BIOS version:
[admin@MikroTik] > system routerboard upgrade

Firmware upgrade requires reboot of the router. Continue? [y/n] y
Firmware upgrade can take up to 20s. Do NOT turn off the power!
BIOS Configuration
Home menu level: /system routerboard bios
Description
In addition to BIOS own setup possibilities, it is possible to configure BIOS parameters in
RouterOS condole
baud-rate ( 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 ; default: 9600 ) - initian
bitrate of the onboard serial port
beep-on-boot ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to beep during boot procedure (to indicate that it
has succeeded)
boot-delay ( time : 0s ..10s ; default: 1s ) - how much time to wait for a key storke while booting
boot-device ( etherboot-ide | etherboot-only | ide-only | try-etherboot-once ) - specifies from which
device the RouterBoard will boot
• etherboot-ide - boot from etherboot, if it fails, boot from ide
• etherboot-only - boot only from etherboot
• ide-only - boot only from ide
• try-etherboot-once - boot from etherboot once, then returns to previous settings
cpu-mode ( power-save | regular ; default: power-save ) - whether to enter CPU suspend mode in
HTL instruction. Most OSs use HLT instruction during CPU idle cycle. When CPU is in suspend
mode, it consumes less power, but in low-temperatire conditions it is recommended to choose
regular mode, so that overall system temperature would be greater
debug-level ( none | low | high ) - BIOS output debug level
• none - no debugging output
• low - show only some debugging information
• high - show all debugging information about the boot process
enter-setup-on ( any-key | delete-key ; default: any-key ) - which key will cause the BIOS to enter
configuration mode during boot delay. Note that in some serial terminal programs, it is impossible
to use Delete key to enter the setup - in this case it might be possible to do this with the Backspace
key
etherboot-timeot ( time ; default: 1m ) - how much time to wait for booting from ethernet
memory-settings ( fail-safe | optimal ; default: auto ) - SDRAM memory speed
Page 587 of 695


• optimal - the BIOS tries to determine the correct memory settings by itself
• fail-safe - use if you have memory-related errors (generally random, not reproducible errors and
freezes). In this case, minimal timing parametrs are used, so most memory modules will work
reliably
memory-test ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to testall the RAM during boot procedure.
Regardless of the choice, hte first megabyte of the RAM will be tested anyway. Enabling this
option may cause longer boot process
pci-backoff ( enabled | disabled ; default: enabled ) - when enabled, external PCI masters can
access system memory even when a CPU cycle has been retried. If you are experiencing uncommon
problems with PCI/PCMCIA/CardBUS interfaces (including RouterBOARD is rebooting or
hanging up once in a while), try to disable it
vga-to-serial ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to map VGA output to the serial console. Should
be enabled if working via serial terminal (gives much more output)
Example
To set high debug level with RAM test:
[admin@MikroTik] system routerboard bios> print

baud-rate: 9600
debug-level: low
boot-delay: 00:00:01
enter-setup-on: any-key
beep-on-boot: yes
boot-device: ide-only
etherboot-timeout: 00:01:00
vga-to-serial: yes
memory-settings: optimal
memory-test: no
cpu-mode: power-save
pci-backoff: enabled
[admin@MikroTik] system routerboard bios> set debug-level=high
[admin@MikroTik] system routerboard bios> print
baud-rate: 9600
debug-level: high
boot-delay: 00:00:01
enter-setup-on: any-key
beep-on-boot: yes
boot-device: ide-only
etherboot-timeout: 00:01:00
vga-to-serial: yes
memory-settings: optimal
memory-test: no
cpu-mode: power-save
pci-backoff: enabled
[admin@MikroTik] system routerboard bios>
System Health Monitoring

Home menu level: /system health
Description
LM87 health controller chip provides some measurments of temperature and voltage on
RouterBOARD 200 series computers. Information becomes available not sooner than 2 minutes
after boot up. It is not available if LM87 chip is not detected successfully. All values are 10 second
Page 588 of 695


averages, with short peak values ignored as likely read errors
3.3v - +3.3V power line voltage
5v - +5V power line voltage
board-temp - temperature of the PCI area
core - CPU core voltage
cpu-temp - temperature of the CPU area
lm87-temp - temperature of the LM87 chip
state ( read-only: enabled | disabled ; default: disabled ) - the current state of health monitoring
(whether it is enabled or not)
state-after-reboot ( enabled | disabled ; default: disabled ) - the state of the health monitor after
the reboot
Notes
You cannot change state on the fly, just control, whether the health control will be enabled after
reboot
All themperature values are in Celsius degrees
Example
To check system health:
[admin@MikroTik] system health> print

core: 1.32
3.3v: 3.26
5v: 4.97
lm87-temp: -0.9
cpu-temp: -0.9
board-temp: -0.9
state: enabled
state-after-reboot: enabled
[admin@MikroTik] system routerboard health>
LED Management or RB200

Command name: :led
Description
The four user LEDs of the RouterBOARD 200 series can be controlled from user-space scripts.
led1 ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the LED1 is on
Page 589 of 695


length ( time ; default: 0s ) - how long to hold the given combination
• 0s - no limit
Notes
The command does not imply a pause in execution. It works asynchronously, allowing execution to
continue just after the command was entered, not waiting for LEDs to switch off.
After the given time (length property) the LEDs will return to the default (off) condition.
Any new :led command overrides the the previous state and resets the LED state after the length
time interval.
Example
To turn LED1 on for a minute:
[admin@MikroTik] > :led led1=yes length=1m

[admin@MikroTik] >
LED Management on RB500

Command name: /blink
Description
It is possible to blink with the only user LED (the red one, near the blue power LED) of
ROuterBOARD 500 series boards
duration ( time ; default: 10s ) - how long to flash the red LED
Fan voltage control

Command name: /system routerboard fan-control
Description
On RouterBOARD 200 series you can control, whether the J11 fan 5V voltage output is enabled.
This feature will only work with newest BIOS versions. This is useful in scripts to control some
devices attached to the J11 connector.
length ( time ; default: 0 ) - how long to hold the set state value, and then return to the prevoius
Page 590 of 695


state
• 0 - leave the state in the set mode until restart
state ( yes | no ) - whether to enable the 5V output on pins 1-2 of the J11 header
Console Reset Jumper
Description
The J16 jumper on the RouterBOARD 200 may be used as serial console reset pin. If it held short
for at least 10 seconds, then:
• Serial console configuration is reset
• Serial port that serial console will pick by default (usually serial0) is set to 9600 baud 8 bit 1
stop bit no parity (default settings after installation)
• Special flag that prevents any other program except serial console to acquire this port is set
• Router is rebooted
Page 591 of 695


Support Output File
Document revision 2.1.0 (Wed Mar 03 16:11:16 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Generating Support Output File
Example
General Information
Summary
The support file is used for debugging MikroTik RouterOS and to solve the support questions
faster. All MikroTik Router information is saved in a binary file, which is stored on the router and
can be downloaded from the router using ftp.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system
Generating Support Output File

Command name: /system sup-output
Example
To make a Support Output File:
[admin@MikroTik] > system sup-output
creating supout.rif file, might take a while
...................
Done!
[admin@MikroTik] >

0 supout.rif unknown 108787 dec/24/2003 10:12:38
[admin@MikroTik] >
Connect to the router using FTP and download the supout.rif file using BINARY file transfer mode.
Send the supout.rif file to MikroTik Support [email protected] with detailed description of the
problem.
Page 592 of 695


System Resource Management
Document revision 2.3 (Thu Jul 13 16:45:28 GMT 2006)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
System Resource
Notes
Example
IRQ Usage Monitor
Description
Example
IO Port Usage Monitor
Description
Example
USB Port Information
Description
Example
PCI Information
Example
Reboot
Description
Notes
Example
Shutdown
Description
Notes
Example
Router Identity
Description
Example
Date and Time
Notes
Example
System Clock Manual Adjustment
Description
Configuration Change History
Description
Command Description
Page 593 of 695


Notes
Example
System Note
Description
Notes
General Information
Summary
MikroTik RouterOS offers several features for monitoring and managing the system resources.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system
Related Documents

• System Clock and NTP
System Resource
Home menu level: /system resource
Notes
In monitor command priotout the values for cpu usage and free memory are in percentage and
kilobytes, respectively.
Example
To view the basic system resource status:
[admin@MikroTik] system resource> print
uptime: 04:32:41
free-memory: 46488 kB
total-memory: 62672 kB
model: RouterBOARD 230
cpu: Geode
cpu-load: 0
free-hdd-space: 35873 kB
total-hdd-space: 61972 kB
write-sect-since-reboot: 2678
write-sect-total: 408130
[admin@MikroTik] system resource>
To view the current system CPU usage and free memory:
Page 594 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] > system resource monitor
cpu-used: 0
free-memory: 115676
[admin@MikroTik] >
IRQ Usage Monitor

Command name: /system resource irq print
Description
IRQ usage shows which IRQ (Interrupt requests) are currently used by hardware.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > system resource irq print
Flags: U - unused
IRQ OWNER
1 keyboard
2 APIC
U 3
4 serial port
5 [Ricoh Co Ltd RL5c476 II (#2)]
U 6
U 7
U 8
U 9
U 10
11 ether1
12 [Ricoh Co Ltd RL5c476 II]
U 13
14 IDE 1
[admin@MikroTik] >
IO Port Usage Monitor

Command name: /system resource io print
Description
IO usage shows which IO (Input/Output) ports are currently used by hardware.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > system resource io print
PORT-RANGE OWNER
0x20-0x3F APIC
0x40-0x5F timer
0x60-0x6F keyboard
0x80-0x8F DMA
0xA0-0xBF APIC
0xC0-0xDF DMA
0xF0-0xFF FPU
0x1F0-0x1F7 IDE 1
0x3C0-0x3DF VGA
0x3F6-0x3F6 IDE 1
0xCF8-0xCFF [PCI conf1]
Page 595 of 695


0x4C00-0x4CFF [PCI CardBus #04]
0x5000-0x500F [Intel Corp. 82801BA/BAM SMBus]
0xC000-0xC0FF [Realtek Semiconductor Co., Ltd. RTL-8139/8139C/8139C+]
0xC000-0xC0FF [8139too]
0xC400-0xC407 [Cologne Chip Designs GmbH ISDN network controller [HFC-PCI]
0xC800-0xC87F [Cyclades Corporation PC300/TE (1 port)]
0xF000-0xF00F [Intel Corp. 82801BA IDE U100]
[admin@MikroTik] >
USB Port Information

Command name: /system resource usb print
Description
Shows all USB ports available for the router.
device ( read-only: text ) - number of device
name ( read-only: text ) - name of the USB port
speed ( read-only: integer ) - bandwidth speed at which the port works
vendor ( read-only: text ) - vendor name of the USB device
Example
To list all available USB ports:
[admin@MikroTik] system resource usb> print
# DEVICE VENDOR NAME SPEED
0 1:1 USB OHCI Root Hub 12 Mbps
[admin@MikroTik] system resource usb>
PCI Information
Command name: /system resource pci print
device ( read-only: text ) - number of device
irq ( read-only: integer ) - IRQ number which this device uses
name ( read-only: text ) - name of the USB port
vendor ( read-only: text ) - vendor name of the USB device
Example
To see PCI slot details:
[admin@MikroTik] system resource pci> print
# DEVICE VENDOR NAME IRQ
Page 596 of 695


0 00:13.0 Compaq ZFMicro Chipset USB (rev... 12
1 00:12.5 National Semi SC1100 XBus (rev: 0)
2 00:12.4 National Semi SC1100 Video (rev: 1)
3 00:12.3 National Semi SCx200 Audio (rev: 0)
4 00:12.2 National Semi SCx200 IDE (rev: 1)
5 00:12.1 National Semi SC1100 SMI (rev: 0)
6 00:12.0 National Semi SC1100 Bridge (rev: 0)
7 00:0e.0 Atheros Communications AR5212 (rev: 1) 10
8 00:0d.1 Texas Instruments PCI1250 PC card Cardbus ... 11
9 00:0d.0 Texas Instruments PCI1250 PC card Cardbus ... 11
10 00:0c.0 National Semi DP83815 (MacPhyter) Ethe... 10
11 00:0b.0 National Semi DP83815 (MacPhyter) Ethe... 9
12 00:00.0 Cyrix Corporation PCI Master (rev: 0)
[admin@MikroTik] system resource pci>
Reboot
Command name: /system reboot
Description
The system reboot is required when upgrading or installing new software packages. The packages
are installed during the system shutdown.
The reboot process sends termination signal to all running processes, unmounts the file systems,
and reboots the router.
Notes
Only users, which are members of groups with reboot privileges are permitted to reboot the router.
Reboot can be called from scripts, in which case it does not prompt for confirmation.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > system reboot
Reboot, yes? [y/N]: y
system will reboot shortly
[admin@MikroTik] >
Shutdown
Command name: /system shutdown
Description
Before turning the power off for the router, the system should be brought to halt. The shutdown
process sends termination signal to all running processes, unmounts the file systems, and halts the
router.
For most systems, it is necessary to wait approximately 30 seconds for a safe power down.
Notes
Only users, which are members of groups with reboot privileges are permitted to shutdown the
Page 597 of 695


router.
Shutdown can be called from scripts, in which case it does not prompt for confirmation.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] > system shutdown
Shutdown, yes? [y/N]: y
system will shutdown promptly
[admin@MikroTik] >
Router Identity
Home menu level: /system identity
Description
The router identity is displayed before the command prompt. It is also used for DHCP client as 'host
name' parameter when reporting it to the DHCP server.
Example
To view the router identity:
[admin@MikroTik] > system identity print
name: "MikroTik"
[admin@MikroTik] >
To set the router identity:

[admin@MikroTik] > system identity set name=Gateway
[admin@Gateway] >
Date and Time

date ( text ) - date in format "mm/DD/YYY"
dst-active ( read-only: yes | no ; default: no ) - whether the Daylight Saving Time is currently
acitve
gmt-offset ( read-only: text ) - the current effective GMT timezone in format "+HH:MM" or
"-HH:MM"
time ( time ) - time in format "HH:MM:SS"
time-zone-name ( name ; default: manual ) - timezone code (for example, Europe/Riga or
America/Chicago). Used for configuring time zone and DST adjustments
• manual - adjust all time zone and DST settings manally
Notes
Page 598 of 695


It is recommended that you reboot the router after time change to avoid the possible inconsistencies
in time measurments and logging.
Date and time settings become permanent and effect BIOS settings.
If NTP update gives time shifted by 1 hour, although the time zone is set correctly, you may want
either to change the timezone, or to use manual DST control and adjust the DST delta setting in
/system clock manual menu.
Example
To view the current date and time settings:
time: 20:19:47
date: jul/13/2006
time-zone-name: "Europe/Riga"
gmt-offset: +03:00
dst-active: yes
To set the system date and time:

[admin@Local] system clock> set date=nov/22/2022 time=11:10:21 time-zone=+0
time: 11:10:25
date: nov/22/2022
time-zone-name: "Europe/Riga"
gmt-offset: +03:00
dst-active: yes
System Clock Manual Adjustment

Home menu level: /system clock manual
Description
In most countries, a Daylight Saving Time regime is activated in spring and deactivated in autumn.
This configuration menu provides DST adjustment facility, to drift the timezone according to your
local legislation and practice in case it does not match any of the presets that it is possible to choose
in /system clock menu from.
dst-delta ( text ; default: +01:00 ) - UTC timezone drift in format "+HH:MM" or "-HH:MM" to be
added to the local timezone during DST period
dst-end ( date | time ) - date and time when DST ends (when the delta is to be dropped).
dst-start ( date | time ) - date and time when DST begins (when the delta is to be applied).
time-zone - GMT timezone in format "+HH:MM" or "-HH:MM"
Configuration Change History

Home menu level: Command name: /system history , /undo , /redo
Page 599 of 695


Description
The history of system configuration changes is held until the next router shutdown. The invoked
commands can be 'undone' (in reverse order they have been invoked). The 'undone' commands may
be 'redone' (in reverse order they have been 'undone').
Command Description
/redo - undoes previous '/undo' command
/system history print - print a list of last configuration changes, specifying whether the action can
be undone or redone
/undo - undoes previous configuration changing command (except another '/undo' command)
Notes
Floating-undo actions are created within the current SAFE mode session. They are automatically
converted to undoable and redoable when SAFE mode terminated successfully, and are all undone
irreverively when SAFE mode terminated insuccessfully.
Undo command cannot undo commands past start of the SAFE mode.
Example
To show the list of configuration changes:
[admin@MikroTik] system history> print
ACTION BY POLICY
U system time zone changed admin write
U system identity changed admin write
What the /undo command does:

[admin@MikroTik] system history> print
ACTION BY POLICY
R system time zone changed admin write
U system identity changed admin write
System Note
Home menu level: /system note
Description
System note feature allows you to assign arbitrary text notes or messages that will be displayed on
each login right after banner. For example, you may distribute warnings between system
administrators this way, or describe what does that particular router actually do. To configure
Page 600 of 695


system note, you may upload a plain text file named sys-note.txt on the router's FTP server, or,
additionally, edit the settings in this menu
note ( text ; default: "" ) - the note
show-at-login ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to show system note on each login
Notes
If you want to enter or edit multiline system note, you may need to use embedded text editor:
/system note edit note
Page 601 of 695


Bandwidth Test
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Server Configuration
Notes
Example
Client Configuration
Example
General Information
Summary
The Bandwidth Tester can be used to monitor the throughput only to a remote MikroTik router
(either wired or wireless) and thereby help to discover network "bottlenecks".
Specifications
Home menu level: /tool
Standards and Technologies: TCP (RFC 793) , UDP (RFC768)
Hardware usage: significant
Related Documents
Description
Protocol Description
The TCP test uses the standard TCP protocol with acknowledgments and follows the TCP
algorithm on how many packets to send according to latency, dropped packets, and other features in
the TCP algorithm. Please review the TCP protocol for details on its internal speed settings and how
Page 602 of 695


to analyze its behavior. Statistics for throughput are calculated using the entire size of the TCP
packet. As acknowledgments are an internal working of TCP, their size and usage of the link are not
included in the throughput statistics. Therefore this statistic is not as reliable as the UDP statistic
when estimating throughput.
The UDP tester sends 110% or more packets than currently reported as received on the other side of
the link. To see the maximum throughput of a link, the packet size should be set for the maximum
MTU allowed by the links which is usually 1500 bytes. There is no acknowledgment required by
UDP; this implementation means that the closest approximation of the throughput can be seen.
Usage Notes
Caution! Bandwidth Test uses all available bandwidth (by default) and may impact network
usability.
Bandwidth Test uses much resources. If you want to test real throughput of a router, you should run
bandwidth test through it not from or to it. To do this you need at least 3 routers connected in chain:
the Bandwidth Server, the given router and the Bandwidth Client:
Note that if you use UDP protocol then Bandwidth Test counts IP header+UDP header+UDP data.
In case if you use TCP then Bandwidth Test counts only TCP data (TCP header and IP header are
not included).
Server Configuration
Home menu level: /tool bandwidth-server
allocate-udp-ports-from - allocate UDP ports from
authenticate ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - communicate only with authenticated (by valid username
and password) clients
enable ( yes | no ; default: no ) - enable client connections for bandwidth test
max-sessions - maximal number of bandwidth-test clients
Notes
The list of current connections can be obtained in session submenu
Example
Bandwidth Server:
[admin@MikroTik] tool bandwidth-server> print
enabled: no
authenticate: yes
allocate-udp-ports-from: 2000
max-sessions: 10
[admin@MikroTik] tool>
Active sessions:
Page 603 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] tool> bandwidth-server session print
# CLIENT PROTOCOL DIRECTION USER
0 35.35.35.1 udp send admin
To enable bandwidth-test server without client authentication:

[admin@MikroTik] tool bandwidth-server> set enabled=yes authenticate=no
[admin@MikroTik] tool bandwidth-server> print
enabled: yes
authenticate: no
allocate-udp-ports-from: 2000
max-sessions: 10
Client Configuration
Command name: /tool bandwidth-test
address ( IP address ) - IP address of destination host
assume-lost-time ( time ; default: 0s ) - assume that connection is lost if Bandwidth Server is not
responding for that time
direction ( receive/ transmit/ both ; default: receive ) - the direction of the test
do ( name | string ; default: "" ) - script source
duration ( time ; default: 0s ) - duration of the test
• 0s - test duration is not limited
interval ( time : 20ms ..5s ; default: 1s ) - delay between reports (in seconds)
local-tx-speed ( integer ; default: 0 ) - transfer test maximum speed (bits per second)
• 0 - no speed limitations
local-tx-size ( integer : 40 ..64000 ) - local transmit packet size in bytes
password ( text ; default: "" ) - password for the remote user
protocol ( udp | tcp ; default: udp ) - protocol to use
random-data ( yes | no ; default: no ) - if random-data is set to yes, the payload of the bandwidth
test packets will have incompressible random data so that links that use data compression will not
distort the results (this is CPU intensive and random-data should be set to no for low speed CPUs)
remote-tx-speed ( integer ; default: 0 ) - receive test maximum speed (bits per second)
• 0 - no speed limitations
remote-tx-size ( integer : 40 ..64000 ) - remote transmit packet size in bytes
user ( name ; default: "" ) - remote user
Example
To run 15-second long bandwidth-test to the 10.0.0.211 host sending and receiving 1000-byte UDP
packets and using username admin to connect
Page 604 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] tool> bandwidth-test 10.0.0.211 duration=15s direction=both \
\... size=1000 protocol=udp user=admin
status: done testing
duration: 15s
tx-current: 3.62Mbps
tx-10-second-average: 3.87Mbps
tx-total-average: 3.53Mbps
Page 605 of 695


ICMP Bandwidth Test
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
ICMP Bandwidth Test
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
The ICMP Bandwidth Tester (Ping Speed) can be used to approximately evaluate the throughput to
any remote computer and thereby help to discover network 'bottlenecks'.
Specifications
Standards and Technologies: ICMP (RFC792)
Related Documents

• Log Management
ICMP Bandwidth Test
Description
The ICMP test uses two standard echo-requests per second. The time between these pings can be
changed. Ping packet size variation makes it possible to approximately evaluate connection
parameters and speed with different packet sizes. Statistics for throughput is calculated using the
size of the ICMP packet, the interval between ICMP echo-request and echo-reply and the
differences between parameters of the first and the second packet.
Page 606 of 695


do ( name ) - assigned name of the script to start
first-ping-size ( integer : 32 ..64000 ; default: 32 ) - first ICMP packet size
second-ping-size ( integer : 32 ..64000 ; default: 1500 ) - second ICMP packet size
time-between-pings ( integer ) - the time between the first and the second ICMP echo-requests in
seconds. A new ICMP-packet pair will never be sent before the previous pair is completely sent and
the algorithm itself will never send more than two requests in one second
once - specifies that the ping will be performed only once
interval ( time : 20ms ..5s ) - time interval between two ping repetitions
Example
In the following example we will test the bandwidth to a host with IP address 159.148.60.2. The
interval between repetitions will be 1 second.
[admin@MikroTik] tool> ping-speed 159.148.60.2 interval=1s
current: 2.23Mbps
average: 2.61Mbps
Page 607 of 695


Packet Sniffer
Document revision 1.5 (Thu May 20 14:56:46 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Packet Sniffer Configuration
Notes
Example
Running Packet Sniffer
Description
Example
Sniffed Packets
Description
Example
Packet Sniffer Protocols
Description
Example
Packet Sniffer Host
Description
Example
Packet Sniffer Connections
Description
Example
Sniff MAC Address
General Information
Summary
Packet sniffer is a feature that catches all the data travelling over the network, that it is able to get
(when using switched network, a computer may catch only the data addressed to it or is forwarded
through it).
Specifications
Page 608 of 695


Home menu level: /tool sniffer
Related Documents
Description
It allows you to "sniff" packets going through the router (and any other traffic that gets to the router,
when there is no switching in the network) and view them using specific software.
Packet Sniffer Configuration

Home menu level: /tool sniffer
interface ( name | all ; default: all ) - the name of the interface that receives the packets
only-headers ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to save in the memory packets' headers only (not
the whole packet)
memory-limit ( integer ; default: 10 ) - maximum amount of memory to use. Sniffer will stop after
this limit is reached
file-name ( text ; default: "" ) - the name of the file where the sniffed packets will be saved to
file-limit ( integer ; default: 10 ) - the limit of the file in KB. Sniffer will stop after this limit is
reached
streaming-enabled ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to send sniffed packets to a remote server
streaming-server ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - Tazmen Sniffer Protocol (TZSP) stream
receiver
filter-stream ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether to ignore sniffed packets that are destined to the
stream server
filter-protocol ( all-frames | ip-only | mac-only-no-ip ; default: ip-only ) - specific protocol group
to filter
• all-frames - sniff all packets
• ip-only - sniff IP packets only
• mac-only-no-ip - sniff non-IP packets only
filter-address1 ( IP address/mask:port ; default: 0.0.0.0/0:0-65535 ) - criterion of choosing the
packets to process
filter-address2 ( IP address/mask:port ; default: 0.0.0.0/0:0-65535 ) - criterion of choosing the
packets to process
running ( read-only: yes | no ; default: no ) - if the sniffer is started then the value is yes otherwise
no
Page 609 of 695


Notes
filter-address1 and filter-address2 are used to specify the two participients in communication (i.e.
they will match only in the case if one of them matches the source address and the other one
matches the destination address of a packet). These properties are taken in account only if
filter-protocol is ip-only.
Not only Ethernal ( http://www.ethereal.com ) and Packetyzer ( http://www.packetyzer.com ) can
receive the sniffer's stream but also MikroTik's program trafr (
http://www.mikrotik.com/download.html ) that runs on any IA32 Linux computer and saves
received packets libpcap file format.
Example
In the following example streaming-server will be added, streaming will be enabled, file-name
will be set to test and packet sniffer will be started and stopped after some time:
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer>set streaming-server=10.0.0.241 \
\... streaming-enabled=yes file-name=test
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> prin
interface: all
only-headers: no
memory-limit: 10
file-name: "test"
file-limit: 10
streaming-enabled: yes
streaming-server: 10.0.0.241
filter-stream: yes
filter-protocol: ip-only
filter-address1: 0.0.0.0/0:0-65535
filter-address2: 0.0.0.0/0:0-65535
running: no
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer>start
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer>stop
Running Packet Sniffer

Command name: /tool sniffer start , /tool sniffer stop , /tool sniffer save
Description
The commands are used to control runtime operation of the packet sniffer. The start command is
used to start/reset sniffering, stop - stops sniffering. To save currently sniffed packets in a specific
file save command is used.
Example
In the following example the packet sniffer will be started and after some time - stopped:
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> start
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> stop
Below the sniffed packets will be saved in the file named test:
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> save file-name=test
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> /file print
Page 610 of 695


0 test unknown 1350 apr/07/2003 16:01:52
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer>
Sniffed Packets
Home menu level: /tool sniffer packet
Description
The submenu allows to see the list of sniffed packets.
data ( read-only: text ) - specified data inclusion in packets
dst-address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP destination address
fragment-offset ( read-only: integer ) - IP fragment offset
identification ( read-only: integer ) - IP identification
ip-header-size ( read-only: integer ) - the size of IP header
ip-packet-size ( read-only: integer ) - the size of IP packet
ip-protocol ( ip | icmp | igmp | ggp | ipencap | st | tcp | egp | pup | udp | hmp | xns-idp | rdp | iso-tp4 |
xtp | ddp | idrp-cmtp | gre | esp | ah | rspf | vmtp | ospf | ipip | encap ) - the name/number of IP
protocol
• ip - Internet Protocol
• icmp - Internet Control Message Protocol
• igmp - Internet Group Management Protocol
• ggp - Gateway-Gateway Protocol
• ipencap - IP Encapsulated in IP
• tcp - Transmission Control Protocol
• egp - Exterior Gateway Protocol
• pup - Parc Universal packet Protocol
• udp - User Datagram Protocol
• hmp - Host Monitoring Protocol
• xns-idp - Xerox ns idp
• rdp - Reliable Datagram Protocol
• iso-tp4 - ISO Transport Protocol class 4
• xtp - Xpress Transfer Protocol
• ddp - Datagram Delivery Protocol
• idpr-cmtp - idpr Control Message Transport
• gre - General Routing Encapsulation
• esp - IPsec ESP protocol
Page 611 of 695


• ah - IPsec AH protocol
• rspf - Radio Shortest Path First
• vmtp - Versatile Message Transport Protocol
• ospf - Open Shortest Path First
• ipip - IP encapsulation (protocol 4)
• encap - IP encapsulation (protocol 98)
protocol ( read-only: ip | arp | rarp | ipx | ipv6 ) - the name/number of ethernet protocol
• arp - Address Resolution Protocol
• rarp - Reverse Address Resolution Protocol
• ipx - Internet Packet exchange protocol
• ipv6 - Internet Protocol next generation
size ( read-only: integer ) - size of packet
src-address ( IP address ) - source address
time ( read-only: time ) - time when packet arrived
tos ( read-only: integer ) - IP Type Of Service
ttl ( read-only: integer ) - IP Time To Live
Example
In the example below it's seen, how to get the list of sniffed packets:
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer packet> pr
# TIME INTERFACE SRC-ADDRESS DST-ADDRESS IP-.. SIZE
0 0.12 ether1 10.0.0.241:1839 10.0.0.181:23 (telnet) tcp 46
1 0.12 ether1 10.0.0.241:1839 10.0.0.181:23 (telnet) tcp 40
2 0.12 ether1 10.0.0.181:23 (telnet) 10.0.0.241:1839 tcp 78
3 0.292 ether1 10.0.0.181 10.0.0.4 gre 88
4 0.32 ether1 10.0.0.241:1839 10.0.0.181:23 (telnet) tcp 40
5 0.744 ether1 10.0.0.144:2265 10.0.0.181:22 (ssh) tcp 76
6 0.744 ether1 10.0.0.144:2265 10.0.0.181:22 (ssh) tcp 76
7 0.744 ether1 10.0.0.181:22 (ssh) 10.0.0.144:2265 tcp 40
8 0.744 ether1 10.0.0.181:22 (ssh) 10.0.0.144:2265 tcp 76
-- more
Packet Sniffer Protocols

Home menu level: /tool sniffer protocol
Description
In this submenu you can see all kind of protocols that have been sniffed.
bytes ( integer ) - total number of data bytes
protocol ( read-only: ip | arp | rarp | ipx | ipv6 ) - the name/number of ethernet protocol
Page 612 of 695


• arp - Address Resolution Protocol
• rarp - Reverse Address Resolution Protocol
• ipx - Internet Packet exchange protocol
• ipv6 - Internet Protocol next generation
ip-protocol ( ip | icmp | igmp | ggp | ipencap | st | tcp | egp | pup | udp | hmp | xns-idp | rdp | iso-tp4 |
xtp | ddp | idrp-cmtp | gre | esp | ah | rspf | vmtp | ospf | ipip | encap ) - the name/number of IP
protocol
• icmp - Internet Control Message Protocol
• igmp - Internet Group Management Protocol
• ggp - Gateway-Gateway Protocol
• ipencap - IP Encapsulated in IP
• tcp - Transmission Control Protocol
• egp - Exterior Gateway Protocol
• pup - Parc Universal packet Protocol
• udp - User Datagram Protocol
• hmp - Host Monitoring Protocol
• xns-idp - Xerox ns idp
• rdp - Reliable Datagram Protocol
• iso-tp4 - ISO Transport Protocol class 4
• xtp - Xpress Transfer Protocol
• ddp - Datagram Delivery Protocol
• idpr-cmtp - idpr Control Message Transport
• gre - General Routing Encapsulation
• esp - IPsec ESP protocol
• ah - IPsec AH protocol
• rspf - Radio Shortest Path First
• vmtp - Versatile Message Transport Protocol
• ospf - Open Shortest Path First
• ipip - IP encapsulation
• encap - IP encapsulation
packets ( integer ) - the number of packets
port ( name ) - the port of TCP/UDP protocol
share ( integer ) - specific type of traffic compared to all traffic in bytes
Example
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer protocol> print
# PROTOCOL IP-PR... PORT PACKETS BYTES SHARE
0 ip 77 4592 100 %
Page 613 of 695


1 ip tcp 74 4328 94.25 %
2 ip gre 3 264 5.74 %
3 ip tcp 22 (ssh) 49 3220 70.12 %
4 ip tcp 23 (telnet) 25 1108 24.12 %
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer protocol>
Packet Sniffer Host

Home menu level: /tool sniffer host
Description
The submenu shows the list of hosts that were participating in data excange you've sniffed.
address ( read-only: IP address ) - IP address of the host
peek-rate ( read-only: integer/integer ) - the maximum data-rate received/transmitted
rate ( read-only: integer/ integer ) - current data-rate received/transmitted
total ( read-only: integer/ integer ) - total packets received/transmitted
Example
In the following example we'll see the list of hosts:
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer host> print
# ADDRESS RATE PEEK-RATE TOTAL
0 10.0.0.4 0bps/0bps 704bps/0bps 264/0
1 10.0.0.144 0bps/0bps 6.24kbps/12.2kbps 1092/2128
2 10.0.0.181 0bps/0bps 12.2kbps/6.24kbps 2994/1598
3 10.0.0.241 0bps/0bps 1.31kbps/4.85kbps 242/866
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer host>
Packet Sniffer Connections

Home menu level: /tool sniffer connection
Description
Here you can get a list of the connections that have been watched during the sniffing time.
active ( read-only: yes | no ) - if yes the find active connections
bytes ( read-only: integer ) - bytes in the current connection
dst-address ( read-only: IP address ) - destination address
mss ( read-only: integer ) - Maximum Segment Size
resends ( read-only: integer ) - the number of packets resends in the current connection
src-address ( read-only: IP address ) - source address
Page 614 of 695


Example
The example shows how to get the list of connections:
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer connection> print
Flags: A - active
# SRC-ADDRESS DST-ADDRESS BYTES RESENDS MSS
0 A 10.0.0.241:1839 10.0.0.181:23 (telnet) 6/42 60/0 0/0
1 A 10.0.0.144:2265 10.0.0.181:22 (ssh) 504/252 504/0 0/0
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer connection>
Sniff MAC Address

You can also see the source and destination MAC Addresses. To do so, at first stop the sniffer if it
is running, and select a specific interface:
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> stop
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> set interface=bridge1
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> start
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer> print
interface: bridge1
only-headers: no
memory-limit: 10
file-name:
file-limit: 10
streaming-enabled: no
streaming-server: 0.0.0.0
filter-stream: yes
filter-protocol: ip-only
filter-address1: 0.0.0.0/0:0-65535
filter-address2: 0.0.0.0/0:0-65535
running: yes
[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer>
Now you have the source and destination MAC Addresses:

[admin@MikroTik] tool sniffer packet> print detail
0 time=0 src-mac-address=00:0C:42:03:02:C7 dst-mac-address=00:30:4F:08:3A:E7
interface=bridge1 src-address=10.5.8.104:1125
dst-address=10.1.0.172:3987 (winbox-tls) protocol=ip ip-protocol=tcp
size=146 ip-packet-size=146 ip-header-size=20 tos=0 identification=5088
fragment-offset=0 ttl=126
1 time=0 src-mac-address=00:30:4F:08:3A:E7 dst-mac-address=00:0C:42:03:02:C7
interface=bridge1 src-address=10.1.0.172:3987 (winbox-tls)
dst-address=10.5.8.104:1125 protocol=ip ip-protocol=tcp size=253
ip-packet-size=253 ip-header-size=20 tos=0 identification=41744
fragment-offset=0 ttl=64
2 time=0.071 src-mac-address=00:0C:42:03:02:C7
dst-mac-address=00:30:4F:08:3A:E7 interface=bridge1
src-address=10.5.8.104:1125 dst-address=10.1.0.172:3987 (winbox-tls)
protocol=ip ip-protocol=tcp size=40 ip-packet-size=40 ip-header-size=20
tos=0 identification=5089 fragment-offset=0 ttl=126
3 time=0.071 src-mac-address=00:30:4F:08:3A:E7
dst-mac-address=00:0C:42:03:02:C7 interface=bridge1
src-address=10.1.0.172:3987 (winbox-tls) dst-address=10.5.8.104:1125
protocol=ip ip-protocol=tcp size=213 ip-packet-size=213 ip-header-size=20
tos=0 identification=41745 fragment-offset=0 ttl=64
-- [Q quit|D dump|down]
Page 615 of 695


Ping
Document revision 1 (Mon Jul 19 09:36:24 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
The Ping Command
Notes
Example of ping command
Resolve IP address:
'Ping', using arp requests:
MAC Ping Server
Example
General Information
Summary
Ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Echo messages to determine if a remote host
is active or inactive and to determine the round-trip delay when communicating with it.
Specifications
Home menu level: / , /tool mac-server ping
Standards and Technologies: ICMP
Related Documents
Description
Ping sends ICMP echo (ICMP type 8) message to the host and waits for the ICMP echo-reply
(ICMP type 0) from that host. The interval between these events is called round trip. If the response
(that is called pong) has not come until the end of the interval, we assume it has timed out. The
second significant parameter reported is ttl (Time to Live). Is is decremented at each machine in
Page 616 of 695


which the packet is processed. The packet will reach its destination only when the ttl is greater than
the number of routers between the source and the destination.
The Ping Command

Command name: /ping
arp-interface ( name ) - ping, using ARP requests on this interface, instead of ICMP requests.
( IP address | MAC address ) - IP or MAC address for destination host
count ( integer ; default: 0 ) - how many times ICMP packets will be sent
• 0 - Ping continues till [Ctrl]+[C] is pressed
do-not-fragment - if added, packets will not be fragmented
interval ( time : 10ms ..5s ; default: 1s ) - delay between messages
size ( integer : 28 ..65535 ; default: 64 ) - size of the IP packet (in bytes, including the IP and ICMP
headers)
ttl ( integer : 1 ..255 ; default: 255 ) - time To Live (TTL) value of the ICMP packet
src-address ( IP address ) - Source address for ping
Notes
If DNS service is configured, it is possible to ping by DNS address. To do it from Winbox, you
should resolve DNS address first, pressing right mouse button over its address and choosing
Lookup Address.
You cannot ping with packets larger that the MTU of that interface, so the packet size should
always be equal or less than MTU. If 'pinging' by MAC address, minimal packet size iz 50 bytes.
Only neighbour MikroTik RouterOS routers with MAC-ping feature enabled can be 'pinged' by
MAC address.
Example of ping command

An example of Ping command:
/pi 159.148.95.16 count=5 interval=500ms
[admin@MikroTik] >
Resolve IP address:
To resolve IP address from a DNS name, type the command:
/ping www.google.lv
Page 617 of 695


and press the [Tab] key:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ping 66.102.11.104
The DNS name www.google.lv changed to IP address 66.102.11.104!
'Ping', using arp requests:

To ping a host in our local network, using ARP requests instead of ICMP:
/ping 10.5.8.130 arp-interface=local
10.5.8.130 with hw-addr 00:30:4F:14:AB:58 ping time=1 ms
[admin@MikroTik] >
MAC Ping Server

Home menu level: /tool mac-server ping
enabled ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether MAC pings to this router are allowed
Example
To disable MAC pings:
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server ping> set enabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server ping> print
enabled: no
[admin@MikroTik] tool mac-server ping>
Page 618 of 695


Torch (Realtime Traffic Monitor)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
The Torch Command
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
Realtime traffic monitor may be used to monitor the traffic flow through an interface.
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Realtime Traffic Monitor called also torch is used for monitoring traffic that is going through an
interface. You can monitor traffic classified by protocol name, source address, destination address,
port. Torch shows the protocols you have chosen and mean transmitted and received data rate for
each of them.
The Torch Command

Command name: /tool torch
Page 619 of 695


interface ( name ) - the name of the interface to monitor
protocol ( any | any-ip | ddp | egp | encap | ggp | gre | hmp | icmp | idpr-cmtp | igmp | ipencap | ipip |
ipsec-ah | ipsec-esp | iso-tp4 | ospf | pup | rdp | rspf | st | tcp | udp | vmtp | xns-idp | xtp ) - the name or
number of the protocol
• any - any ethernet or IP protocol
• any-ip - any IP protocol
port ( name | integer ) - the name or number of the port
src-address ( IP address/mask ) - source address and network mask to filter the traffic only with
such an address, any source address: 0.0.0.0/0
dst-address ( IP address/mask ) - destination address and network mask to filter the traffic only
with such an address, any destination address: 0.0.0.0/0
average-seconds ( integer : 1 ..10 ) - the average speed will be shown in the last average seconds
freeze-frame-interval ( time ) - time in seconds for which the screen output is paused
Notes
If there will be specific port given, then only tcp and udp protocols will be filtered, i.e., the name of
the protocol can be any, any-ip, tcp, udp.
Except TX and RX, there will be only the field you've specified in command line in the command's
output (e.g., you will get PROTOCOL column only in case if protocol property is explicitly
specified).
Example
The following example monitors the traffic that goes through the ether1 interface generated by
telnet protocol:
[admin@MikroTik] tool> torch ether1 port=telnet
SRC-PORT DST-PORT TX RX
1439 23 (telnet) 1.7kbps 368bps
To see what IP protocols are going through the ether1 interface:

[admin@MikroTik] tool> torch ether1 protocol=any-ip
PRO.. TX RX
tcp 1.06kbps 608bps
udp 896bps 3.7kbps
icmp 480bps 480bps
ospf 0bps 192bps
To see what IP protocols are interacting with 10.0.0.144/32 host connected to the ether1 interface:
[admin@MikroTik] tool> torch ether1 src-address=10.0.0.144/32 protocol=any
PRO.. SRC-ADDRESS TX RX
tcp 10.0.0.144 1.01kbps 608bps
icmp 10.0.0.144 480bps 480bps
To see what tcp/udp protocols are going through the ether1 interface:
Page 620 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] tool> torch ether1 protocol=any-ip port=any
PRO.. SRC-PORT DST-PORT TX RX
tcp 3430 22 (ssh) 1.06kbps 608bps
udp 2812 1813 (radius-acct) 512bps 2.11kbps
tcp 1059 139 (netbios-ssn) 248bps 360bps
Page 621 of 695


Traceroute
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
The Traceroute Command
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
Traceroute determines how packets are being routed to a particular host.
Specifications
Standards and Technologies: ICMP , UDP , Traceroute
Related Documents

• Firewall Filters
• Ping
Description
Traceroute is a TCP/IP protocol-based utility, which allows user to determine how packets are
being routed to a particular host. Traceroute works by increasing the time-to-live value of packets
and seeing how far they get until they reach the given destination; thus, a lengthening trail of hosts
passed through is built up.
Traceroute shows the number of hops to the given host address of every passed gateway. Traceroute
Page 622 of 695


utility sends packets three times to each passed gateway so it shows three timeout values for each
gateway in ms.
The Traceroute Command

Command name: /tool traceroute
( IP address ) - IP address of the host you are tracing route to
port ( integer : 0 ..65535 ) - UDP port number
protocol ( UDP | ICMP ) - type of protocol to use. If one fails (for example, it is blocked by a
firewall), try the other
size ( integer : 28 ..1500 ; default: 64 ) - packet size in bytes
timeout ( time : 1s ..8s ; default: 1s ) - response waiting timeout, i.e. delay between messages
tos ( integer : 0 ..255 ; default: 0 ) - Type Of Service - parameter of IP packet
use-dns ( yes | no ; default: no ) - specifies whether to use DNS server, which can be set in /ip dns
menu
src-address ( IP address ) - change the source address of the packet
max-hops ( integer ) - utmost hops through which packet can be reached
Notes
Traceroute session may be stopped by pressing [Ctrl]+[C].
Example
To trace the route to 216.239.39.101 host using ICMP protocol with packet size of 64 bytes, setting
ToS field to 8 and extending the timeout to 4 seconds:
[admin@MikroTik] tool> traceroute 216.239.39.101 protocol=icmp size=64 tos=8 timeout=4s
ADDRESS STATUS
1 159.148.60.227 3ms 3ms 3ms
2 195.13.173.221 80ms 169ms 14ms
3 195.13.173.28 6ms 4ms 4ms
4 195.158.240.21 111ms 110ms 110ms
5 213.174.71.49 124ms 120ms 129ms
6 213.174.71.134 139ms 146ms 135ms
7 213.174.70.245 132ms 131ms 136ms
8 213.174.70.58 211ms 215ms 215ms
9 195.158.229.130 225ms 239ms 0s
10 216.32.223.114 283ms 269ms 281ms
11 216.32.132.14 267ms 260ms 266ms
12 209.185.9.102 296ms 296ms 290ms
13 216.109.66.1 288ms 297ms 294ms
14 216.109.66.90 297ms 317ms 319ms
15 216.239.47.66 137ms 136ms 134ms
16 216.239.47.46 135ms 134ms 134ms
17 216.239.39.101 134ms 134ms 135ms
Page 623 of 695


Network Monitor
Document revision 1 (Thu Oct 27 11:43:46 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Network Watching Tool
Specifications
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
The Netwatch tool monitors network host by means of ping and generates events on status change.
Specifications
Home menu level: /tool netwatch
Related Documents

••
Scripting Host
Network Watching Tool
Specifications
Home menu level: /tool netwatch
Page 624 of 695


Description
Netwatch monitors state of hosts on the network. It does so by sending ICMP pings to the list of
specified IP addresses. For each entry in netwatch table you can specify IP address, ping interval
and console scripts. The main advantage of netwatch is it's ability to issue arbitrary console
commands on host state changes.
down-script ( name ) - a console script that is executed once when state of a host changes from
unknown or up to down
host ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address of host that should be monitored
interval ( time ; default: 1s ) - the time between pings. Lowering this will make state changes more
responsive, but can create unnecessary traffic and consume system resources
since ( read-only: time ) - indicates when state of the host changed last time
status ( read-only: up | down | unknown ) - shows the current status of the host
• up - the host is up
• down - the host is down
• unknown - after any properties of this list entry were changed, or the item is enabled or
disabled
timeout ( time ; default: 1s ) - timeout for each ping. If no reply from a host is received during this
time, the host is considered unreachable (down)
up-script ( name ) - a console script that is executed once when state of a host changes from
unknown or down to up
Example
This example will run the scripts gw_1 or gw_2 which change the default gateway depending on
the status of one of the gateways:
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=gw_1 source={/ip route set
{... [/ip route find dst 0.0.0.0] gateway 10.0.0.1}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=gw_2 source={/ip route set
{.. [/ip route find dst 0.0.0.0] gateway 10.0.0.217}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> /tool netwatch
[admin@MikroTik] tool netwatch> add host=10.0.0.217 interval=10s timeout=998ms \
\... up-script=gw_2 down-script=gw_1
[admin@MikroTik] tool netwatch> print
Flags: X - disabled
# HOST TIMEOUT INTERVAL STATUS
0 10.0.0.217 997ms 10s up
[admin@MikroTik] tool netwatch> print detail
Flags: X - disabled
0 host=10.0.0.217 timeout=997ms interval=10s since=feb/27/2003 14:01:03
status=up up-script=gw_2 down-script=gw_1
[admin@MikroTik] tool netwatch>
Without scripts, netwatch can be used just as an information tool to see which links are up, or which
specific hosts are running at the moment.
Let's look at the example above - it changes default route if gateway becomes unreachable. How it's
Page 625 of 695


done? There are two scripts. The script "gw_2" is executed once when status of host changes to up.
In our case, it's equivalent to entering this console command:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip route set [/ip route find dst 0.0.0.0] gateway 10.0.0.217
The /ip route find dst 0.0.0.0 command returns list of all routes whose dst-address value is
0.0.0.0. Usually, that is the default route. It is substituted as first argument to /ip route set
command, which changes gateway of this route to 10.0.0.217
The script "gw_1" is executed once when status of host becomes down. It does the following:
[admin@MikroTik] > /ip route set [/ip route find dst 0.0.0.0] gateway 10.0.0.1
It changes the default gateway if 10.0.0.217 address has become unreachable.

Here is another example, that sends e-mail notification whenever the 10.0.0.215 host goes down:
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=e-down source={/tool e-mail send
{... from="[email protected]" server="159.148.147.198" body="Router down"
{... subject="Router at second floor is down" to="[email protected]"}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=e-up source={/tool e-mail send
{... from="[email protected]" server="159.148.147.198" body="Router up"
{.. subject="Router at second floor is up" to="[email protected]"}
[admin@MikroTik] system script>
[admin@MikroTik] system script> /tool netwatch
[admin@MikroTik] system netwatch> add host=10.0.0.215 timeout=999ms \
\... interval=20s up-script=e-up down-script=e-down
[admin@MikroTik] tool netwatch> print detail
Flags: X - disabled
0 host=10.0.0.215 timeout=998ms interval=20s since=feb/27/2003 14:15:36
status=up up-script=e-up down-script=e-down
[admin@MikroTik] tool netwatch>
Page 626 of 695


Serial Port Monitor
Document revision 1 (Mon Jul 11 10:17:08 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Sigwatch
Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
Serial port monitoring utility monitors state of attached asynchronous serial ports and generates
system events upon state change.
Specifications
Home menu level: /tool sigwatch
Related Documents

•• Scripting Host
Sigwatch
Description
Sigwatch monitors state of the serial port pins.
count ( read-only: integer ) - how many times the event for this item was triggered. Count is reset
Page 627 of 695


on reboot and on most item configuration changes
log ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to add a message in form of name-of-sigwatch-item: signal
changed [to high | to low] to System-Info facility whenever this sigwatch item is triggered
name ( name ) - name of the sigwatch item
on-condition ( on | off | change ; default: on ) - on what condition to trigger action of this item
• on - trigger when state of pin changes to high
• off - trigger when state of pin changes to low
• change - trigger whenever state of pin changes. If state of pin changes rapidly, there might be
triggered only one action for several state changes
port ( name ) - serial port name to monitor
script ( name ) - script to execute when this item is trigered
signal ( dtr | rts | cts | dcd | ri | dsr ; default: rts ) - name of signal of number of pin (for standard
9-pin connector) to monitor
• dtr - Data Terminal Ready (pin #4)
• rts - Request To Send (pin #7)
• cts - Clear To Send (pin #8)
• dcd - Data Carrier Detect (pin #1)
• ri - Ring Indicator (pin #9)
• dsr - Data Set Ready (pin #6)
state ( read-only: text ) - last remembered state of monitored signal
Notes
You can type actual script source instead of the script name from /system script list.
Example
In the following example we will add a new sigwatch item that monitors whether the port serial1
has cts signal.
[[email protected]] tool sigwatch> pr
Flags: X - disabled
# NAME PORT SIGNAL ON-CONDITION LOG
0 test serial1 cts change no
[admin@MikroTik] tool sigwatch>
By typing a command print detail interval=1s, we can check whether a cable is connected or it is
not. See the state argument - if the cable is connected to the serial port, it shows on, otherwise it
will be off.
[admin@MikroTik] tool sigwatch> print detail
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="test" port=serial1 signal=cts on-condition=change log=no script=""
count=1 state=on
Flags: X - disabled
count=1 state=on
Page 628 of 695


Flags: X - disabled
count=2 state=off
Flags: X - disabled
count=2 state=off
[admin@MikroTik] tool sigwatch>
In the port menu you can see what signal is used by serial cable. For example, without any cables it
looks like this:
[admin@MikroTik] port> print stats
0 name="serial0" line-state=dtr,rts
But after adding a serial cable to the serial port:

[admin@MikroTik] port> print stats
1 name="serial1" line-state=dtr,rts,cts
This means that the line-state besides the dtr and rts signals has also cts when a serial cable is
connected.
The example below will execute a script whenever on-condition changes to off:
[[email protected]] tool sigwatch> pr detail
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="cts_rest" port=serial1 signal=cts on-condition=off log=no
script=/system shutdown count=0 state=on
[[email protected]] tool sigwatch>
It means that if a serial cable is connected to the serial port, all works fine, but as soon as it is
disconnected, the router shuts down. It will continue all the time until the serial cable will not be
connected again.
Page 629 of 695


Scripting Host
Document revision 2.7 (Thu Sep 22 13:33:55 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Console Command Syntax
Description
Notes
Example
Expression Grouping
Description
Notes
Example
Variables
Description
Notes
Example
Command Substitution and Return Values
Description
Example
Operators
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
Data types
Description
Command Reference
Description
Command Description
Special Commands
Description
Notes
Example
Additional Features
Description
Script Repository
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
Page 630 of 695


Task Management
Description
Example
Script Editor
Description
Command Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
This manual provides introduction to RouterOS built-in powerful scripting language.
Scripting host provides a way to automate some router maintenance tasks by means of executing
user-defined scripts bounded to some event occurence. A script consists of configuration commands
and expressions (ICE - internal console expression). The configuration commands are standard
RouterOS commands, e.g. /ip firewall filter add chain=forward protocol=gre action=drop
that are described in the relevant manuals, while expressions are prefixed with : and are accessible
from all submenus.
The events used to trigger script execution include, but are not limited to the System Scheduler, the
Traffic Monitoring Tool, and the Netwatch Tool generated events.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system script
Related Documents

••
System Scheduler
• Network Monitor
• Traffic Monitor
• Serial Port Monitor
Console Command Syntax
Description
Page 631 of 695


Console commands are made of the following parts, listed in the order you type them in console:
• prefix - indicates whether the command is an ICE, like : in :put or that the command path
starts from the root menu level, like / in
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> /ping 10.0.0.1
• path - a relative path to the desired menu level, like .. filter in

[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> .. filter print
• path_args - this part is required to select some menu levels, where the actual path can vary
across different user inputs, like mylist in
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> /routeing prefix-list list mylist
• action - one of the actions available at the specified menu level, like add in
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> /ip firewall filter add chain=forward action=drop
• unnamed parameter - these are required by some actions and should be entered in fixed order
after the action name, like in 10.0.0.1 in
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall mangle> /ping 10.0.0.1
• name[=value] - a sequence of parameter names followed by respective values, if required, like

ssid=myssid in
/interface wireless set wlan1 ssid=myssid
Notes
Variable substitution, command substitution and expressions are allowed only for path_args and
unnamed parameter values. prefix, path, action and name[=value] pairs can be given only
directly, as a word. Therefore, :put (1 + 2) is valid and :("pu" . "t") 3 is not.
Example
The parts of internal console commands are futher explained in the following examples:
/ping 10.0.0.1 count=5
prefix /
action ping
unnamed parameter 10.0.0.1
name[=value] count=5
.. ip firewall rule input
path .. ip firewall rule

path_args input
:for i from=1 to=10 do={:put $i}
Page 632 of 695


prefix :
action for
unnamed parameter i
pname[=value] from=1 to=10 do={:put $i}
/interface monitor-traffic ether1,ether2,ipip1
prefix /
path interface
action monitor-traffic
unnamed parameter ether1,ether2,ipip1
Expression Grouping
Description
This feature provides an easy way to execute commands from within one command level, by
enclosing them in braces '{ }'.
Notes
Subsequent script commands are executed from the same menu level as the entire script. Consider
the following example:
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> /user {
{... /ip route
{... print}
Flags: X - disabled
1 uuu full 0.0.0.0/0
Although the current command level is changed to /ip route, it has no effect on next commands
entered from prompt, therefore print command is still considered to be /user print.
Example
The example below demonstrates how to add two users to the user menu.
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> /user {
{... add name=x password=y group=write
{... add name=y password=z group=read
{... print}
Flags: X - disabled
1 x write 0.0.0.0/0
2 y read 0.0.0.0/0
Page 633 of 695


Variables
Description
RouterOS scripting language suports two types of variables, which are global (system wide) and
local (accessible only within the current script), respectively. A variable can be referenced by '$'
(dollar) sign followed by the name of the variable with the exception of set and unset commands
that take variable name without preceding dollar sign. Variable names should be composed of
contain letters, digits and '-' character. A variable must be declared prior to using it in scripts. There
are four types of declaration available:
• global - defined by global keyword, global variables can be accessed by all scripts and console
logins on the same router. However, global variables are not kept across reboots.
• local - defined by local keyword, local variables are not shared with any other script, other
instance of the same script or other console logins. The value of local variable value is lost
when script finishes.
• loop index variables - defined within for and foreach statements, these variables are used only
in do block of commands and are removed after command completes.
• monitor variables - some monitor commands that have do part can also introduce variables.
You can obtain a list of available variables by placing :environment print statement inside the
do block of commands.
You can assign a new value to variable using set action. It takes two unnamed parameters: the name
of the variable and the new value of the variable. If a variable is no longer needed, it's name can be
freed by :unset command. If you free local variable, it's value is lost. If you free global variable, it's
value is still kept in router, it just becomes inaccessible from current script.
Notes
Loop variables "shadows" already introduced variables with the same name.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> /
[admin@MikroTik] > :global g1 "this is global variable"
[admin@MikroTik] > :put $g1
this is global variable
[admin@MikroTik] >
Command Substitution and Return Values
Description
Some console commands are most useful if their output can be feed to other commands as an
argument value. In RouterOS console this is done by using the return values from commands.
Return values are not displayed on the screen. To get the return value from a command, it should be
enclosed in square brackets '[ ]'. Upon execution the return value of the the command will become
the value of these brackets. This is called command substitution.
Page 634 of 695


The commands that produce return values are, but not limited to: find, which returns a reference to
a particular item, ping, which returns the number of sucessful pings, time, which returns the
measured time value, incr and decr, which return the new value of a variable, and add, which
returns the internal number of newly created item.
Example
Consider the usage of find command:
[admin@MikroTik] > /interface
[admin@MikroTik] interface> find type=ether
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put [find type=ether]
*1,*2
This way you can see internal console numbers of items. Naturally, you can use them as arguments
in other commands:
[admin@MikroTik] interface> enable [find type=ether]
Operators
Description
RouterOS console can do simple calculations with numbers, time values, IP addresses, strings and
lists. To get result from an expression with operators, enclose it in parentheses '(' and ')'. The
expression result serves as a return value for the parentheses.
Command Description
- - unary minus. Inverts given number value.
- - binary minus. Substracts two numbers, two time values, two IP addresses or an IP address and a
number
! - logical NOT. Unary operator, which inverts given boolean value
/ - division. Binary operator. Divides one number by another (gives number) or a time value by a
number (gives time value).
. - concatenation. Binary operator, concatenates two string or append one list to another or appends
an element to a list.
^ - bitwise XOR. The argumens and the result are both IP addresses
~ - bit inversion. Unary operator, which inverts bits in IP address
* - multiplication. Binary operator, which can multiply two numbers or a time value by a number.
& - bitwise AND The argumens and the result are both IP addresses
&& - logical AND. Binary operator. The argumens and the result are both logical values
+ - binary plus. Adds two numbers, two time values or a number and an IP address.
< - less. Binary operator which compares two numbers, two time values or two IP addresses.
Returns boolean value
Page 635 of 695


<< - left shift. Binary operator, which shifts IP address by a given amount of bits. The first
argument is an IP address, the second is an integer and the result is an IP address.
<= - less or equal. Binary operator which compares two numbers, two time values or two IP
addresses. Returns boolean value
> - greater. Binary operator which compares two numbers, two time values or two IP addresses.
Returns boolean value
>= - greater or equal. Binary operator which compares two numbers, two time values or two IP
addresses. Returns boolean value
>> - right shift. Binary operator, which shifts IP address by a given amount of bits. The first
argument is an IP address, the second is an integer and the result is an IP address.
| - bitwise OR. The argumens and the result are both IP addresses
|| - logical OR. Binary operator. The argumens and the result are both logical values
Notes
When comparing two arrays note, that two arrays are equal only if their respective elements are
equal.
Example
Operator priority and evaluation order
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall rule forward> :put (10+1-6*2=11-12=2+(-3)=-1)
false
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall rule forward> :put (10+1-6*2=11-12=(2+(-3)=-1))
true
[admin@MikroTik] ip firewall rule forward
logical NOT
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (!true)
false
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (!(2>3))
true
unary minus
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (-1<0)
true
[admin@MikroTik] >
1
bit inversion
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (~255.255.0.0)
0.0.255.255
sum
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (3ms + 5s)
00:00:05.003
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (10.0.0.15 + 0.0.10.0)
cannot add ip address to ip address
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (10.0.0.15 + 10)
10.0.0.25
Page 636 of 695


subtraction
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (15 - 10)
5
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (10.0.0.15 - 10.0.0.3)
12
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (10.0.0.15 - 12)
10.0.0.3
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (15h - 2s)
14:59:58
multiplication
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (12s * 4)
00:00:48
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (-5 * -2)
10
division
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (10s / 3)
00:00:03.333
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (5 / 2)
2
[admin@MikroTik] > :put (0:0.10 / 3)
00:00:02
[admin@MikroTik] >
comparison
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (10.0.2.3<=2.0.3.10)
false
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (100000s>27h)
true
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (60s,1d!=1m,3600s)
true
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (bridge=routing)
false
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (yes=false)
false
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (true=aye)
false
logical AND, logical OR

[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put ((yes && yes) || (yes && no))
true
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put ((no || no) && (no || yes))
false
bitwise AND, bitwise OR, bitwise XOR

[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (10.16.0.134 & ~255.255.255.0)
0.0.0.134
shift operators
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (~((0.0.0.1 << 7) - 1))
255.255.255.128
Concatenation
Page 637 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (1 . 3)
13
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (1,2 . 3)
1,2,3
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (1 . 3,4)
13,4
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put (1,2 . 3,4)
1,2,3,4
[admin@MikroTik] interface> :put ((1 . 3) + 1)
14
Data types
Description
The RouterOS console differentiates between several data types, which are string, boolean, number,
time interval, IP address, internal number and list. The console tries to convert any value to the
most specific type first, backing if it fails. The order in which the console attempts to convert an
entered value is presented below:
• list
• internal number
• number
• IP address
• time
• boolean
• string
Internal scripting language supplies special functions to explicitly control type conversion. The
toarray, tobool, toid, toip, tonum, tostr and totime functions convert a value accordingly to list,
boolean, internal number, IP address, number, string or time.
The number type is internally represented as 64 bit signed integer, so the value a number type
variable can take is in range from -9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807. It is possible
to input number value in hexadecimal form, by prefixing it with 0x, e.g.:
[admin@MikroTik] > :global MyVar 0x10
[admin@MikroTik] > :put $MyVar
16
[admin@MikroTik] >
Lists are treated as comma separated sequence of values. Putting whitespaces around commas is not
recommended, because it might confuse console about words' boundaries.
Boolean values can be either true or false. Console also accepts yes for true, and no for false.
Internal numbers are preceided * sign.
Time intervals can be entered either using HH:MM:SS.MS notation, e.g.:
[admin@MikroTik] > :put 01:12:1.01
01:12:01.010
[admin@MikroTik] >
Page 638 of 695


or as sequence of numbers, optionally followed by letters specifying the units of time measure (d
dor days, h for hours, m for minutes, s for seconds and ms for milliseconds), e.g.:
[admin@MikroTik] > :put 2d11h12
2d11:00:12
[admin@MikroTik] >
As can bee seen, time values with omitted unit specificators are treated as expressed in seconds.
• d, day, days - one day, or 24 hours
• h, hour, hours - one hour
• m, min - one minute
• s - one second
• ms - one millisecond, id est 0.001 second
Possible aliases for time units:
The console also accepts time values with decimal point:

[admin@MikroTik] > :put 0.1day1.2s
02:24:01.200
[admin@MikroTik] >
Command Reference
Description
RouterOS has a number of built-in console commands and expressions (ICE) that do not depend on
the current menu level. These commands do not change configuration directly, but they are useful
for automating various maintenance tasks. The full ICE list can be accessed by typing '?' after the ':'
prefix (therefore it can be safely assumed that all ICE have ':' prefix), for example:
[admin@MikroTik] > :
beep execute global list pick time toip typeof
delay find if local put toarray tonum while
do for led log resolve tobool tostr
environment foreach len nothing set toid totime
[admin@MikroTik] >
Command Description
beep - forces the built-in PC beeper to produce a signal for length seconds at frequency Hz. (
integer ; default: 1000 ) - signal frequency measured in Hz ( time ; default: 100ms ) - signal length
[admin@MikroTik] > :beep length=2s frequency=10000
[admin@MikroTik] >
delay - does nothing for a given amount of time. ( time ) - amount of time to wait
• omitted - delay forever
do - executes commands repeatedly until given conditions are met. If no parameters are given, do
just executes its payload once, which does not make much use. If a logical condition is specified for
the while parameter, it will be evaluated after executing commands, and in case it is true, do
statement is executed again and again until false. The if parameter, if present, is evaluated only once
Page 639 of 695


before doing anything else, and if it is false then no action is taken ( text ) - actions to execute
repeatedly ( yes | no ) - condition, which is evaluated each time after the execution of enclosed
statements ( yes | no ) - condition, which is evaluated once before the execution of enclosed
statements
[admin@MikroTik] > {:global i 10; :do {:put $i; :set i ($i - 1);} \
\... while (($i < 11) && ($i > 0)); :unset i;}
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
[admin@MikroTik] >
environment print - prints information about variables that are currently initialised. All global
variables in the system are listed under the heading Global Variables. All variables that are
introduced in the current script (variables introduced by :local or created by :for or :foreach
statements) are listed under the heading Local Variables.
Creating variables and displaying a list of them
[admin@MikroTik] > :local A "This is a local variable"
[admin@MikroTik] > :global B "This is a global one"
[admin@MikroTik] > :environment print
Global Variables
B=This is a global one
Local Variables
A=This is a local variable
[admin@MikroTik] >
find - searches for substring inside a string or for an element with particular value inside an array,
depending on argument types and returns position at which the value is found. The elements in list
and characters in string are numbered from 0 upwards ( text | ) - the string or value list the search
will be performed in ( text ) - value to be searched for ( integer ) - position after which the search is
started
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server> :put [:find "13sdf1sdfss1sfsdf324333" ]
0
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server> :put [:find "13sdf1sdfss1sfsdf324333" 3 ]
1
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server> :put [:find "13sdf1sdfss1sfsdf324333" 3 3]
17
[admin@MikroTik] interface pppoe-server> :put [:find "1,1,1,2,3,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0,1,2,3"
3 ]
4
3 3]
4
3 4]
5
3 5]
15
[admin@MikroTik]
for - executes supplied commands over a given number of iterations, which is explicity set through
from and to parameters ( name ) - the name of the loop counter variable ( integer ) - start value of
the loop counter variable ( integer ) - end value of the loop counter variable ( integer ; default: 1 ) -
increment value. Depending on the loop counter variable start and end values, step parameter can be
treated also as decrement ( text ) - contains the command to be executed repeatedly
Page 640 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] > :for i from=1 to=100 step=37 do={:put ($i . " - " . 1000/$i)}
1 - 1000
38 - 26
75 - 13
[admin@MikroTik] >
foreach - executes supplied commands for each element in list ( name ) - the name of the loop
counter variable ( ) - list of values over which to iterate ( text ) - contains the command to be
executed repeatedly
Printing a list of available interfaces with their respective IP addresses
:foreach i in=[/interface find type=ether ] \
\... do={:put ("+--" . [/interface get $i name]); \
\... :foreach j in=[/ip address find interface=$i]
\... do={:put ("| `--" . [/ip address get $j address])}}
+--ether1
| `--1.1.1.3/24
| `--192.168.50.1/24
| `--10.0.0.2/24
+--ether2
| `--10.10.0.2/24
[admin@MikroTik] >
global - declares global variable ( name ) - name of the variable ( text ) - value, which should be
assigned to the variable
[admin@MikroTik] > :global MyString "This is a string"
[admin@MikroTik] > :global IPAddr 10.0.0.1
[admin@MikroTik] > :global time 0:10
Global Variables
IPAddr=10.0.0.1
time=00:10:00
MyString=This is a string
Local Variables
[admin@MikroTik] >
if - conditional statement. If a given logical condition evaluates to true then the do block of
commands is executed. Otherwice an optional else block is executed. ( yes | no ) - logical condition,
which is evaluated once before the execution of enclosed statements ( text ) - this block of
commands is executed if the logical condition evaluates to true ( text ) - this block of commands is
executed if the logical condition evaluates to false
Check if the firewall has any rules added
[admin@MikroTik] > :if ([:len [/ip firewall filter find]] > 0) do={:put true}
else={:put false}
true
[admin@MikroTik] >
Check whether the gateway is reachable. In this example, the IP address of the gateway is
10.0.0.254
[admin@MikroTik] > :if ([/ping 10.0.0.254 count=1] = 0) do {:put "gateway unreachable"}
gateway unreachable
[admin@MikroTik] >
led - allows to control the LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) of the RouterBOARD 200 series
embedded boards. This command is available only on RouterBoard 200 platform with the
routerboard package installed ( yes | no ) - controls first LED ( yes | no ) - controls second LED (
yes | no ) - controls third LED ( yes | no ) - controls fourth LED ( time ) - specifies the length of the
action
Page 641 of 695


• omitted - altar LED state forever
Switch on LEDs 2 and 3 for 5 seconds
[admin@MikroTik] > :led led2=yes led3=yes length=5s
len - returns the number of characters in string or the number of elements in list depending on the
type of the argument ( name ) - string or list the length of which should be returned
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:len gvejimezyfopmekun]
17
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:len gve,jim,ezy,fop,mek,un]
6
[admin@MikroTik] >
list - displays a list of all available console commands that match given search key(s) ( text ) - first
search key ( text ) - second search key ( text ) - third search key
Display console commands that have hotspot, add and user parts in the command's name and path
[admin@MikroTik] > :list user hotspot "add "
List of console commands under "/" matching "user" and "hotspot" and "add ":
ip hotspot profile add name= hotspot-address= dns-name= \
\... html-directory= rate-limit= http-proxy= smtp-server= \
\... login-by= http-cookie-lifetime= ssl-certificate= split-user-domain= \
\... use-radius= radius-accounting= radius-interim-update= copy-from=
ip hotspot user add server= name= password= address= mac-address= \
\... profile= routes= limit-uptime= limit-bytes-in= limit-bytes-out= \
\... copy-from= comment= disabled=
ip hotspot user profile add name= address-pool= session-timeout= \
\... idle-timeout= keepalive-timeout= status-autorefresh= \
\... shared-users= rate-limit= incoming-filter= outgoing-filter= \
\... incoming-mark= outgoing-mark= open-status-page= on-login= on-logout= copy-from=
[admin@MikroTik] >
local - declares local variable ( name ) - name of the variable ( text ) - value, which should be
assigned to the variable
[admin@MikroTik] > :local MyString "This is a string"
[admin@MikroTik] > :local IPAddr 10.0.0.1
[admin@MikroTik] > :local time 0:10
Global Variables
Local Variables
IPAddr=10.0.0.1
time=00:10:00
MyString=This is a string
[admin@MikroTik] >
log - adds a message specified by message parameter to the system logs. ( name ) - name of the
logging facility to send message to ( text ) - the text of the message to be logged
Send message to info log
[admin@MikroTik] > :log info "Very Good thing happened. We have received our first
packet!"
[admin@MikroTik] > /log print follow
...
19:57:46 script,info Very Good thing happened. We have received our first packet!
...
nothing - has no action, and returns value of type "nothing". In conditions nothing behaves as
"false"
Pick a symbol that does not exist from a string
[admin@MikroTik] > :local string qwerty
[admin@MikroTik] > :if ([:pick $string 10]=[:nothing]) do={
Page 642 of 695


{... :put "pick and nothing commands return the same value"}
pick and nothing commands return the same value
[admin@MikroTik] >
pick - returns a range of elements or a substring depending on the type of input value ( text | ) - the
string or value list from which a substring or a subrange should be returned ( integer ) - start
position of substring or subrange ( integer ) - end position for substring or subrange
[admin@MikroTik] > :set a 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:len $a]
8
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:pick $a]
1
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:pick $a 0 4]
1,2,3,4
3,4
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:pick $a 2]
3
6,7,8
[admin@MikroTik] > :set a abcdefghij
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:len $a]
10
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:pick $a]
a
abcd
cd
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:pick $a 2]
c
fghij
put - echoes supplied argument to the console ( text ) - the text to be echoed to the console
Display the MTU of ether1 interface
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [/interface get ether1 mtu]
1500
[admin@MikroTik] >
resolve - returns IP address of the host resolved from the DNS name. The DNS settings should be
configured on the router (/ip dns submenu) prior to using this command. ( text ) - domain name to
be resolved into an IP address
DNS configuration and resolve command example
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> /ip dns set primary-dns=159.148.60.2
[admin@MikroTik] ip route> :put [:resolve www.example.com]
192.0.34.166
set - assigns new value to a variable ( name ) - the name of the variable ( text ) - the new value of
the variable
Measuring time needed to resolve www.example.com
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:time [:resolve www.example.com ]]
00:00:00.006
[admin@MikroTik] >
time - measures the amount of time needed to execute given console commands ( text ) - the
console commands to measure execution time of
Measuring time needed to resolve www.example.com
[admin@MikroTik] > :put [:time [:resolve www.example.com ]]
Page 643 of 695


00:00:00.006
[admin@MikroTik] >
while - executes given console commands repeatedly while the logical conditions is true ( yes | no )
- condition, which is evaluated each time before the execution of enclosed statements ( text ) -
console commands that should be executed repeatedly
[admin@MikroTik] > :set i 0; :while ($i < 10) do={:put $i; :set i ($i + 1)};
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
[admin@MikroTik] >
Special Commands
Description
Monitor
It is possible to access values that are shown by most monitor actions from scripts. A monitor
command that has a do parameter can be supplied either script name (see /system scripts), or
console commands to execute.
Get
Most print commands produce values that are accessible from scripts. Such print commands have
a corresponding get command on the same menu level. The get command accepts one parameter
when working with regular values or two parameters when working with lists.
Notes
Monitor command with do argument can also be called directly from scripts. It will not print
anything then, just execute the given script.
The names of the properties that can be accessed by get are the same as shown by print command,
plus names of item flags (like the disabled in the example below). You can use [T ab] key
completions to see what properties any particular get action can return.
Example
In the example below monitor action will execute given script each time it prints stats on the
screen, and it will assign all printed values to local variables with the same name:
[admin@MikroTik] interface> monitor-traffic ether2 once do={:environment print}
received-packets-per-second: 0
received-bits-per-second: 0bps
sent-packets-per-second: 0
Page 644 of 695


sent-bits-per-second: 0bps
Global Variables
i=1
Local Variables
sent-bits-per-second=0
received-packets-per-second=0
received-bits-per-second=0
sent-packets-per-second=0
Additional Features
Description
To include comment in the console script prefix it with '#'. In a line of script that starts with '#' all
characters until the newline character are ignored.
To put multiple commands on a single line separate them with ';'. Console treats ';' as the end of line
in scripts.
Any of the {}[]"'\$ characters should be escaped in a reqular string with '\' character. Console takes
any character following '\' literally, without assigning any special meaning to it, except for such
cases:
\a bell (alarm), character code 7
\b backspace, character code 8
\f form feed, character code 12
\n newline, character code 10
\r carriage return, character code 13
\t tabulation, character code 9
\v vertical tabulation, character code 11
\_ space, character code 32
Note that '\', followed by any amount of whitespace characters (spaces, newlines, carriage returns,
tabulations), followed by newline is treated as a single whitespace, except inside quotes, where it is
treated as nothing. This is used by console to break up long lines in scripts generated by export
commands.
Script Repository
Home menu level: /system script
Description
All scripts are stored in the /system script menu along with some service information such as script
name, script owner, number of times the script was executed and permissions for particular script.
In RouterOS, a script may be automatically started in three different ways:
• via the scheduler
• on event occurence - for example, the netwatch tool generates an event if a network host it is
configured to monitor becomes unaccessible
• by another script
It is also possible to start a script manually via /system script run command.
Page 645 of 695


last-started ( time ) - date and time when the script has been last invoked. The argument is shown
only if the run-count!=0.
owner ( name ; default: admin ) - the name of the user who created the script
policy ( multiple choice: ftp | local | policy | read | reboot | ssh | telnet | test | web | write ; default:
reboot,read,write,policy,test ) - the list of the policies applicable:
• ftp - user can log on remotely via ftp and send and retrieve files from the router
• local - user can log on locally via console
• policy - manage user policies, add and remove user
• read - user can retrieve the configuration
• reboot - user can reboot the router
• ssh - user can log on remotely via secure shell
• telnet - user can log on remotely via telnet
• test - user can run ping, traceroute, bandwidth test
• web - user can log on remotely via http
• write - user can retrieve and change the configuration
run-count ( integer ; default: 0 ) - script usage counter. This counter is incremented each time the
script is executed. The counter will reset after reboot.
source ( text ; default: "" ) - the script source code itself
Command Description
run ( name ) - executes a given script ( name ) - the name of the script to execute
Notes
You cannot do more in scripts than you are allowed to do by your current user rights, that is, you
cannot use disabled policies. For example, if there is a policy group in /user group which allows
you ssh,local,telnet,read,write,policy,test,web and this group is assigned to your user name, then
you cannot make a script that reboots the router.
Example
The following example is a script for writing message "Hello World!" to the info log:
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name="log-test" source={:log info "Hello World!"}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> run log-test
[admin@MikroTik] system script> print
0 name="log-test" owner="admin"
policy=ftp,reboot,read,write,policy,test,winbox,password last-started=mar/20/2001
22:51:41
run-count=1 source=:log info "Hello World!"
Task Management
Page 646 of 695


Home menu level: /system script job
Description
This facility is used to manage the active or scheduled tasks.
name ( read-only: name ) - the name of the script to be referenced when invoking it
owner ( text ) - the name of the user who created the script
source ( read-only: text ) - the script source code itself
Example
[admin@MikroTik] system script> job print
# SCRIPT OWNER STARTED
0 DelayeD admin dec/27/2003 11:17:33
You can cancel execution of a script by removing it from the job list
[admin@MikroTik] system script> job remove 0
[admin@MikroTik] system script> job print
Script Editor
Command name: /system script edit
Description
RouterOS console has a simple full-screen editor for scripts with support for multiline script
writing.
Keyboard Shortcuts
• Delete - deletes character at cursor position
• Ctrl+h, backspase - deletes character before cursor. Unindents line
• Tab - indents line
• Ctrl+b, LeftArrow - moves cursor left
• Ctrl+f, RightArrow - moves cursor right
• Ctrl+p, UpArrow - moves cursor up
• Ctrl+n, DownArrow - moves cursor down
• Ctrl+a, Home - moves cursor to the beginning of line or script
• Ctrl+e, End - moves cursor to the end of line or script
• Ctrl+y - inserts contents of buffer at cursor position
• Ctrl+k - deletes characters from cursor position to the end of line
Page 647 of 695


• Ctrl+u - undoes last action
• Ctrl+o - exits editor accepting changes
• Ctrl+x - exits editor discarding changes
Command Description
edit ( name ) - opens the script specified by the name argument in full-screen editor
Notes
All characters that are deleted by backspace, delete or Ctrl+k keys are accumulated in the buffer.
Pressing any other key finishes adding to this buffer (Ctrl+y can paste it's contents), and the next
delete operation will replace it's contents. Undo doesn't change contents of cut buffer.
Script editor works only on VT102 compatible terminals (terminal names "vt102", "linux", "xterm",
"rxvt" are recognized as VT102 at the moment). Delete, backspace and cursor keys might not work
with all terminal programs, use 'Ctrl' alternatives in such cases.
Example
The following example shows the script editor window with a sample script open:
This script is used for writing message "hello" and 3 messages "kuku" to the system log.
Page 648 of 695


Scheduler
Document revision 0.9 (Wed Nov 24 12:48:55 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Scheduler Configuration
Description
Notes
Example
General Information
Summary
System Scheduler executes scripts at designated time.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system scheduler
Related Documents
• Scripting Examples
• Scripting Examples
Scheduler Configuration
Description
The scheduler can trigger script execution at a particular time moment, after a specified time
interval, or both.
Page 649 of 695


interval ( time ; default: 0s ) - interval between two script executions, if time interval is set to zero,
the script is only executed at its start time, otherwise it is executed repeatedly at the time interval is
specified
name ( name ) - name of the task
on-event ( name ) - name of the script to execute. It must be presented at /system script
run-count ( read-only: integer ) - to monitor script usage, this counter is incremented each time the
script is executed
start-date ( date ) - date of the first script execution
start-time ( time ) - time of the first script execution
• startup - execute the script 3 seconds after the system startup.
Notes
Rebooting the router will reset run-count counter.
If more than one script has to be executed simultaneously, they are executed in the order they
appear in the scheduler configuration. This can be important if one scheduled script is used to
disable another one. The order of scripts can be changed with the move command.
If a more complex execution pattern is needed, it can usually be done by scheduling several scripts,
and making them enable and disable each other.
if scheduler item has start-time set to startup, it behaves as if start-time and start-date were set to
time 3 seconds after console starts up. It means that all scripts having start-time=startup and
interval=0 will be executed once each time router boots.
Example
We will add a task that executes the script log-test every hour:
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=log-test source=:log message=test
0 name="log-test" source=":log messgae=test" owner=admin run-count=0
[admin@MikroTik] system script> .. scheduler
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> add name=run-1h interval=1h
on-event=log-test
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> print
Flags: X - disabled
# NAME ON-EVENT START-DATE START-TIME INTERVAL RUN-COUNT
0 run-1h log-test mar/30/2004 06:11:35 1h 0
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler>
In another example there will be two scripts added that will change the bandwidth setting of a queue
rule "Cust0". Every day at 9AM the queue will be set to 64Kb/s and at 5PM the queue will be set to
128Kb/s. The queue rule, the scripts, and the scheduler tasks are below:
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple> add name=Cust0 interface=ether1 \
\... dst-address=192.168.0.0/24 limit-at=64000
0 name="Cust0" target-address=0.0.0.0/0 dst-address=192.168.0.0/24
interface=ether1 limit-at=64000 queue=default priority=8 bounded=yes
[admin@MikroTik] queue simple> /system script
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=start_limit source={/queue simple set \
\... Cust0 limit-at=64000}
Page 650 of 695


[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=stop_limit source={/queue simple set \
\... Cust0 limit-at=128000}
0 name="start_limit" source="/queue simple set Cust0 limit-at=64000"
owner=admin run-count=0
1 name="stop_limit" source="/queue simple set Cust0 limit-at=128000"
owner=admin run-count=0
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> add interval=24h name="set-64k" \
\... start-time=9:00:00 on-event=start_limit
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> add interval=24h name="set-128k" \
\... start-time=17:00:00 on-event=stop_limit
Flags: X - disabled
0 set-64k start... oct/30/2008 09:00:00 1d 0
1 set-128k stop_... oct/30/2008 17:00:00 1d 0
The following example schedules a script that sends each week a backup of router configuration by
e-mail.
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=e-backup source={/system backup
{... save name=email; /tool e-mail send to="[email protected]" subject=([/system
{... identity get name] . " Backup") file=email.backup}
0 name="e-backup" source="/system backup save name=ema... owner=admin
run-count=0
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> add interval=7d name="email-backup" \
\... on-event=e-backup
Flags: X - disabled
0 email-... e-backup oct/30/2008 15:19:28 7d 1
Do not forget to set the e-mail settings, i.e., the SMTP server and From: address under /tool e-mail.
For example:
[admin@MikroTik] tool e-mail> set server=159.148.147.198 [email protected]
[admin@MikroTik] tool e-mail> print
server: 159.148.147.198
from: [email protected]
[admin@MikroTik] tool e-mail>
Example below will put 'x' in logs each hour from midnight till noon:
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=enable-x source={/system scheduler
{... enable x}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=disable-x source={/system scheduler
{... disable x}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=log-x source={:log message=x}
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> add name=x-up start-time=00:00:00 \
\... interval=24h on-event=enable-x
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> add name=x-down start-time=12:00:00
\... interval=24h on-event=disable-x
[admin@MikroTik] system scheduler> add name=x start-time=00:00:00 interval=1h \
\... on-event=log-x
Flags: X - disabled
0 x-up enable-x oct/30/2008 00:00:00 1d 0
1 x-down disab... oct/30/2008 12:00:00 1d 0
2 x log-x oct/30/2008 00:00:00 1h 0
Page 651 of 695


Traffic Monitor
Document revision 1 (Thu Jul 07 08:34:34 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Traffic Monitor
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
Traffic monitor executes scripts on a specific datarate throough an interface.
Specifications
Home menu level: /tool traffic-monitor
Related Documents

•• Scripting Host
Traffic Monitor
Home menu level: /tool traffic-monitor
Description
The traffic monitor tool is used to execute console scripts when interface traffic crosses a given
threshold. Each item in traffic monitor list consists of its name (which is useful if you want to
disable or change properties of this item from another script), some parameters, specifying traffic
condition, and the pointer to a script or scheduled event to execute when this condition is met.
Page 652 of 695


interface ( name ) - interface to monitor
name ( name ) - name of the traffic monitor item
on-event ( name ) - script source. Must be present under /system script
threshold ( integer ; default: 0 ) - traffic threshold
traffic ( transmitted | received ; default: transmitted ) - type of traffic to monitor
• transmitted - transmitted traffic
• received - received traffic
trigger ( above | always | below ; default: above ) - condition on which to execute the script
• above - the script will be run each time the traffic exceeds the threshold
• always - triggers scripts on both - above and below condition
• below - triggers script in the opposite condition, when traffic reaches a value that is lower than
the threshold
Example
In this example the traffic monitor enables the interface ether2, if the received treffic exceeds
15kbps on ether1, and disables the interface ether2, if the received traffic falls below 12kbps on
ether1.
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=eth-up source={/interface enable ether2}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> add name=eth-down source={/interface disable
{... ether2}
[admin@MikroTik] system script> /tool traffic-monitor
[admin@MikroTik] tool traffic-monitor> add name=turn_on interface=ether1 \
\... on-event=eth-up threshold=15000 trigger=above traffic=received
[admin@MikroTik] tool traffic-monitor> add name=turn_off interface=ether1 \
\... on-event=eth-down threshold=12000 trigger=below traffic=received
[admin@MikroTik] tool traffic-monitor> print
# NAME INTERFACE TRAFFIC TRIGGER THRESHOLD ON-EVENT
0 turn_on ether1 received above 15000 eth-up
1 turn_off ether1 received below 12000 eth-down
[admin@MikroTik] tool traffic-monitor>
Page 653 of 695


IP Telephony
Document revision 2.2 (Mon Apr 26 12:53:19 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Notes
General Voice port settings
Description
Notes
Voicetronix Voice Ports
Command Description
Notes
LineJack Voice Ports
Command Description
Notes
PhoneJack Voice Ports
Command Description
Zaptel Voice Ports
Command Description
ISDN Voice Ports
Command Description
Notes
Voice Port for Voice over IP (voip)
Description
Numbers
Description
Notes
Example
Regional Settings
Description
Notes
Page 654 of 695


Audio CODECs
Description
Example
AAA
Description
Notes
Gatekeeper
Description
Example
Example
Troubleshooting
Description
A simple example
Description
Setting up the MikroTik IP Telephone
Setting up the IP Telephony Gateway
Setting up the Welltech IP Telephone
Setting up MikroTik Router and CISCO Router
Setting up PBX to PBX Connection over an IP Network
General Information
Summary
The MikroTik RouterOS IP Telephony feature enables Voice over IP (VoIP) communications using
routers equipped with the following voice port hardware:
• Quicknet LineJACK or PhoneJACK analog telephony cards
• ISDN cards
• Voicetronix OpenLine4 (was V4PCI) - 4 analog telephone lines cards
• Zaptel Wildcard X100P IP telephony card - 1 analog telephone line
Specifications
Packages required: telephony
Home menu level: /ip telephony
Standards and Technologies: RTP
Hardware usage: Pentium MMX level processor recommended
Related Documents
• ISDN
• AAA
Page 655 of 695


Description
IP telephony, known as Voice over IP (VoIP), is the transmission of telephone calls over a data
network like one of the many networks that make up the Internet. There are four ways that you
might talk to someone using VoIP:
• Computer-to-computer - This is certainly the easiest way to use VoIP, and you don't have to
pay for long-distance calls.
• Computer-to-telephone - This method allows you to call anyone (who has a phone) from your
computer. Like computer-to-computer calling, it requires a software client. The software is
typically free, but the calls may have a small per-minute charge.
• Telephone-to-computer - Allows a standard telephone user to initiate a call to a computer user.
• Telephone-to-telephone - Through the use of gateways, you can connect directly with any
other standard telephone in the world.
Suppoted hardware:
• Quicknet Technologies cards:
• Internet PhoneJACK (ISA or PCI) for connecting an analog telephone (FXS port)
• Internet LineJACK (ISA) for connecting an analog telephone line (FXO port) or a
telephone (FXS port)
• ISDN client cards (PCI) for connecting an ISDN line. See Device Driver List for the list of
supported PCI ISDN cards
• Voicetronix OpenLine4 card for connecting four (4) analog telephone lines (FXO ports)
• Zaptel Wildcard X100P IP telephony card (from Linux Support Services ) for connecting one
analog telephone line (FXO port)
Supported standards:
• MikroTik RouterOS supports IP Telephony in compliance with the International
Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications (ITU-T) specification H.323v4. H.323 is a
specification for transmitting multimedia (voice, video, and data) across an IP network.
H.323v4 includes: H.245, H.225, Q.931, H.450.1, RTP(real-time protocol)
• The followong audio codecs are supported: G.711 (the 64 kbps Pulse code modulation (PCM)
voice coding), G.723.1 (the 6.3 kbps compression technique that can be used for compressing
audio signal at very low bit rate), GSM-06.10 (the 13.2 kbps coding), LPC-10 (the 2.5 kbps
coding), G.729 and G.729a (the 8 kbps CS-ACELP software coding), G.728 (16 kbps coding
technique, supported only on Quicknet LineJACK cards)
In PSTN lines there is a known delay of the signal caused by switching and signal compressing
devices of the telephone network (so, it depends on the distance between the peers), which is
generally rather low. The delay is also present in IP networks. The main difference between a PSTN
and an IP network is that in IP networks that delay is more random. The actual packet delay may
vary in order of magnutude in congested networks (if a network becomes congested, some packets
may even be lost). Also packet reordering may take place. To prevent signal loss, caused by random
jitter of IP networks and packet reordering, to corrupt audio signal, a jitter buffer is present in IP
telephony devices. The jitter buffer is delaying the actual playback of a received packet forming
Page 656 of 695


The larger the jitter buffer, the larger the total delay, but fewer packets get lost due to timeout.
The total delay from the moment of recording the voice signal till its playback is the sum of
following three delay times:
• delay time at the recording point (approx. 38ms)
• delay time of the IP network (1..5ms and up)
• delay time at the playback point (the jitter delay)
Notes
Each installed Quicknet card requires IO memory range in the following sequence: the first card
occupies addresses 0x300-0x31f, the second card 0x320-0x33f, the third 0x340-0x35f, and so on.
Make sure there is no conflict in these ranges with other devices, e.g., network interface cards, etc.
Use the telephony logging feature to debug your setup.
General Voice port settings

Home menu level: /ip telephony voice-port
Description
This submenu is used for managing all IP telephony voice ports (linejack, phonejack, isdn, voip,
voicetronix, zaptel)
name ( name ) - assigned name of the voice port
type ( read-only: phonejack | linejack | phonejack-lite | phonejack-pci | voip | isdn | voicetronix |
zaptel ) - type of the installed telephony voice port:
• phonejack - Quicknet PhoneJACK (ISA)
• linejack - Quicknet LineJACK (ISA)
• phonejack-lite - Quicknet PhoneJACK Lite Linux Edition (ISA)
• phonejack-pci - Quicknet PhoneJACK (PCI)
• voip - generic Voice over IP port
• isdn - ISDN cards
• voicetronix - Voicetronix OpenLine4
• zaptel - Zaptel Wildcard X100P
autodial ( integer ; default: "" ) - number to be dialed automatically, if call is coming in from this
voice port
Notes
Page 657 of 695


If autodial does not exactly match an item in /ip telephony numbers, there can be two
possibilities:
• if autodial is incomplete, rest of the number is asked (local voice port) or incoming call is
denied (VoIP)
• if autodial is invalid, line is hung up (PSTN line), busy tone is played (POTS) or incoming
call is denied (VoIP)
Voicetronix Voice Ports

Home menu level: /ip telephony voice-port voicetronix
name ( name ) - name given by the user or the default one
autodial ( integer ; default: "" ) - phone number which will be dialed immediately after the
handset has been lifted. If this number is incomplete, then the remaining part has to be dialed on the
dial-pad. If the number is incorrect, the line is hung up. If the number is correct, then the
appropriate number is dialed (the direct-call mode is used - the line is picked up only after the
remote party answers the call)
playback-volume ( integer : -48 ..48 ; default: 0 ) - playback volume in dB
• 0 - 0dB meand no change to signal level
record-volume ( integer : -48 ..48 ; default: 0 ) - record volume in dB
region ( name ; default: us ) - regional setting for the voice port. This setting is used for setting the
parameters of PSTN line, as well as for detecting and generating the tones
agc-on-playback ( yes | no ; default: no ) - automatic gain control on playback (can not be used
together with hardware voice codecs)
agc-on-record ( yes | no ; default: no ) - automatic gain control on record (can not be used together
with hardware voice codecs)
detect-cpt ( yes | no ; default: no ) - automatically detect call progress tones
balance-registers ( integer : 0 ..255 ; default: 199 ) - registers which depend on telephone line
impedance. Can be adjusted to get best echo cancellation. Should be changed only if echo
cancellation on voicetronix card does not work good enough. Echo cancellation problems can imply
DTMF and busy-tone detection failures. The value has to be in format bal1[,bal3[,bal2]], where
bal1, bal2, bal3 - balance registers. bal1 has to be in interval 192..248 (0xC0..0xF8). The others
should be in interval 0..255 (0x00..0xFF)
balance-status ( read-only: integer ; default: unknown ) - shows quality of hardware echo
cancellation in dB
loop-drop-detection ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - automatically clear call when loop drop is detected
Command Description
test-balance - current balance-registers value is tested once. Result is placed in balance-status
parameter. Balance can be tested only when line is off-hook. It won't work if line is on-hook or
there is an established connection ( name ) - port name to test balance of
Page 658 of 695


find-best-balance - series of test-balance is executed with different balance-registers values.
During the tests balance-registers are updated to the best values found ( name ) - port name to find
best balance of
clear-call - terminate a current call established with the specified voice port ( name ) - port name to
clear call with
show-stats - show voice port statistics ( name ) - port name show statistics of ( time ) - maximal
time of packet round trip ( integer ) - number of packets sent by this card (these packets are
digitalized input of the voice port) ( integer ) - number of bytes sent by this card (these packets are
digitalized input of the voice port) ( text ) - minimal/average/maximal intervals between packets
sent ( integer ) - number of packets received by this card (these packets form analog output of the
voice port) ( integer ) - number of bytes received by this card (these packets form analog output of
the voice port) ( text ) - minimal/average/maximal intervals between packets received ( time ) -
approximate delay time from the moment of receiving an audio packet from the IP network till it is
played back over the telephony voice port. The value shown is never less than 30ms, although the
actual delay time could be less. If the shown value is >40ms, then it is close (+/-1ms) to the actual
delay time.
monitor - monitor status of the voice port ( name ) - port name to monitor ( on-hook | off-hook |
ring | connection | busy ) - current state of the port:
• on-hook - the handset is on-hook, no activity
• off-hook - the handset is off-hook, the number is being dialed
• ring - call in progress, direction of the call is shown by the direction property
• connection - the connection has been established
• busy - the connection has been terminated, the handset is still off-hook
( ip-to-port | port-to-ip ) - direction of the call
• ip-to-port - call from the IP network to the voice card
• port-to-ip - call from the voice card to an IP address
( integer ) - the phone number being dialed ( text ) - name and IP address of the remote party (
name ) - CODEC used for the audio connection ( time ) - duration of the phone call
Notes
As some Voicetronix cards fail to detect loop drop correctly, with loop-drop-detection you can
manage whether loop drop detection feature is enabled. The effect of not working loop-drop
detection is call terminated at once when connection is established.
Some tips for testing balance registers:
• test is sensitive to noise from the phone, so it's recommended to cover mouth piece during it;
• find-best-balance can be interrupted by clear-call command;
• once best balance-registers value is known, it can be set manually to this best value for all
voicetronix voice ports, which will use the same telephone line.
LineJack Voice Ports

Home menu level: /ip telephony voice-port linejack
Page 659 of 695


dial-pad. If the number is incorrect, the line is hung up (FXO "line" port) or busy tone is played
(FXS "phone" port). If the number is correct, then the appropriate number is dialed. If it is an
incomming call from the PSTN line, then the direct-call mode is used - the line is picked up only
after the remote party answers the call
ring-cadence ( text ) - a 16-symbol ring cadence for the phone, each symbol lasts 0.5 seconds, +
means ringing, - means no ringing
aec ( yes | no ) - whether echo detection and cancellation is enabled
aec-tail-length ( short | medium | long ; default: short ) - size of the buffer of echo detection
aec-nlp-threshold ( off | low | medium | high ; default: low ) - level of cancellation of silent sounds
aec-attenuation-scaling ( integer : 0 ..10 ; default: 4 ) - factor of additional echo attenuation
aec-attenuation-boost ( integer : 0 ..90 ; default: 0 ) - level of additional echo attenuation
software-aec ( yes | no ) - software echo canceller (experimental, for most of the cards)
Command Description
blink - blink the LEDs of the specified voice port for five seconds after it is invoked. This
command can be used to locate the respective card from several linejack cards ( name ) - card name
to blink the LED of
clear call with
Page 660 of 695


delay time.
( phone | line ) - the active port of the card
• phone - telephone connected to the card (POTS FXS port)
• line - line connected to the card (PSTN FXO port)
( plugged | unplugged ) - state of the PSTN line
• plugged - the telephone line is connected to the PSTN port of the card
• unplugged - there is no working line connected to the PSTN port of the card
Notes
When telephone line is connected to the 'line' port, green LED next to the port should be lit in some
seconds. If telephone line disappear, the LED next to the 'line' port will change its state to red in an
hour or when the line is activated (i.e. when somebody calls to/from it). When telephone line is
plugged in the 'phone' port before the router is turned on, red LED next to the port will be lit.
WARNING: do not plug telephone line into the 'phone' port when the router is running and green
LED next to the port is lit - this might damage the card. The status of the 'phone' port is only
detected on system startup.
PhoneJack Voice Ports

Home menu level: /ip telephony voice-port phonejack
type ( read-only: phonejack | phonejack-lite | phonejack-pci ) - type of the card
dial-pad. If the number is incorrect, busy tone is played. If the number is correct, then the
appropriate number is dialed
Page 661 of 695


ring-cadence ( text ) - a 16-symbol ring cadence for the phone, each symbol lasts 0.5 seconds, +
means ringing, - means no ringing
region ( name ; default: us ) - regional setting for the voice port. This setting is used for generating
the dial tones
aec ( yes | no ) - wheteher echo detection and cancellation is enabled
Command Description
clear call with
delay time.
( phone | line ) - the active port of the card
Page 662 of 695


• phone - telephone connected to the card (POTS FXS port)
• line - line connected to the card (PSTN FXO port)
Zaptel Voice Ports

Home menu level: /ip telephony voice-port zaptel
dial-pad. If the number is incorrect, the line is hung up. If the number is correct, then the
appropriate number is dialed (the direct-call mode is used - the line is picked up only after the
remote party answers the call)
Command Description
Page 663 of 695


clear call with
delay time.
ISDN Voice Ports

Home menu level: /ip telephony voice-port isdn
msn ( integer ) - telephone number of the ISDN voice port (ISDN MSN number)
lmsn ( text ) - msn pattern to listen on. It determines which calls from the ISDN line this voice port
should answer. If left empty, msn is used
autodial ( integer ; default: "" ) - phone number which will be dialed immediately on each
incoming ISDN call. If this number contains 'm', then it will be replaced by originally called (ISDN)
telephone number. If this number is incomplete, then the remaining part has to be dialed by the
caller. If the number is incorrect, call is refused. If the number is correct, then the appropriate
number is dialed. For that direct-call mode is used - the line is picked up only after the remote party
answers the call
Page 664 of 695


Command Description
clear call with
time of packet round trip ( integer ) - number of packets sent by this card (these packets are input of
the voice port) ( integer ) - number of bytes sent by this card (these packets are input of the voice
port) ( text ) - minimal/average/maximal intervals between packets sent ( integer ) - number of
packets received by this card (these packets form output of the voice port) ( integer ) - number of
bytes received by this card (these packets form output of the voice port) ( text ) -
minimal/average/maximal intervals between packets received ( time ) - approximate delay time
from the moment of receiving an audio packet from the IP network till it is played back over the
telephony voice port. The value shown is never less than 30ms, although the actual delay time could
be less. If the shown value is >40ms, then it is close (+/-1ms) to the actual delay time.
Notes
In contrary to analog voice ports phonejack, linejack, voicetronix, zaptel), which are as many as the
number of cards installed, the isdn ports can be added as many as desired.
Page 665 of 695


• ; - separates pattern entries (more than one pattern can be specified this way)
• ? - matches one character
• * - matches zero or more characters
• [ ] - matches any single character from the set in brackets
• [^ ] - matches any single character not from the set in brackets
There is a possibility to enter some special symbols in lmsn property. Meaning of the special
symbols:
Voice Port for Voice over IP (voip)

Home menu level: /ip telephony voice-port voip
Description
The voip voice ports are virtual ports, which designate a voip channel to another host over the IP
network. You must have at least one voip voice port to be able to make calls to other H.323 devices
over IP network.
remote-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address of the remote party (IP telephone or
gateway) associated with this voice port. If the call has to be performed through this voice port, then
the specified IP address is called. If there is an incoming call from the specified IP address, then the
parameters of this voice port are used. If there is an incoming call from an IP address, which is not
specified in any of the voip voice port records, then the default record is used. If there is no default
record, then default values are used
• 0.0.0.0 - the record with this IP address will specify the default values for an incomming call
autodial ( integer ) - phone number which will be added in front of the telephone number received
over the IP network. In most cases it should be blank
jitter-buffer ( time : 0 ..1000ms ; default: 100ms ) - size of the jitter buffer
• 0 - the size of it is adjusted automatically during the conversation, to keep amount of lost
packets under 1%
silence-detection ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether silence is detected and no audio data is sent
over the IP network during the silence period
prefered-codec ( name ; default: none ) - the preferred codec to be used for this voip voice port. If
possible, the specified codec will be used
• none - there is no preferred codec defined for this port, so whichever codec advised by the
remote peer will be used (if it is supported)
fast-start ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - allow or disallow the fast start. The fast start allows
establishing the audio connection in a shorter time. However, not all H.323 endpoints support this
feature. Therefore, it should be turned off, if there are problems to establish telephony connection
using the fast start mode
Numbers
Page 666 of 695

Description
This is the so-called "routing table" for voice calls. This table assigns numbers to the voice
ports.The main function of the numbers routing table is to determine:
• to which voice port route the call
• what number to send over to the remote party
dst-pattern ( integer ) - pattern of the telephone number. Symbol '.' designate any digit, symbol '_'
(only as the last one) designate any symbols (i.e. any number of characters can follow, ended with
'#' button)
voice-port ( name ) - voice port to be used when calling the specified telephone number
prefix ( integer ) - prefix, which will be used to substitute the known part of the dst-pattern, i.e., the
part containing digits. The dst-pattern argument is used to determine which voice port to be used,
whereas the prefix argument designates the number to dial over the voice port (be sent over to the
remote party). If the remote party is an IP telephony gateway, then the number will be used for
making the call
Notes
More than one entry can be added with exactly the same dst-pattern. If first one of them is already
busy, next one with the same dst-pattern is used. Telephony number entries can be moved, to
select desired order.
Example
Let us consider the following example for the number table:
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony numbers> print

Flags: I - invalid, X - disabled, D - dynamic, R - registered
# DST-PATTERN VOICE-PORT PREFIX
0 12345 XX
1 1111. YY
2 22... ZZ 333
3 ... QQ 55
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony numbers>
We will analyze the Number Received (nr) - number dialed at the telephone, or received over the
line, the Voice Port (vp) - voice port to be used for the call, and the Number to Call (nc) - number to
be called over the Voice Port.
• If nr=55555, it does not match any of the destination patterns, therefore it is rejected
• If nr=123456, it does not match any of the destination patterns, therefore it is rejected
• If nr=1234, it does not match any of the destination patterns (incomplete for record #0),
therefore it is rejected
• If nr=12345, it matches the record #0, therefore number "" is dialed over the voice port XX
Page 667 of 695


• If nr=11111, it matches the record #1, therefore number "1" is dialed over the voice port YY
• If nr=22987, it matches the record #2, therefore number "333987" is dialed over the voice port
ZZ
• If nr=22000, it matches the record #2, therefore number "333000" is dialed over the voice port
ZZ
• If nr=444, it matches the record #3, therefore number "55444" is dialed over the voice port QQ
Let us add a few more records:

0 12345 XX
1 1111. YY
2 22... ZZ 333
3 ... QQ 55
4 222 KK 44444
5 3.. LL 553
• If nr=222 => the best match is the record #4 => nc=44444, vp=KK (note: the 'best match'
means that it has the most coinciding digits between the nr and destination pattern).
• If nr=221 => incomplete record #2 => call is rejected
• If nr=321 => the best match is the record #5 => nc=55321, vp=LL
• If nr=421 => matches the record #3 => nc=55421, vp=QQ
• If nr=335 => the best match is the record #5 => nc=55321, vp=LL
Let us add a few more records:

0 12345 XX
1 1111. YY
2 22... ZZ 333
3 ... QQ 55
4 222 KK 44444
5 3.. LL 553
6 33... MM 33
7 11. NN 7711
• If nr=335 => incomplete record #6 => the call is rejected. The nr=335 fits perfectly both the
record #3 and #5. The #5 is chosen as the 'best match' candidate at the moment. Furthermore,
there is record #6, which has two matching digits (more than for #3 or #5). Therefore the #6 is
chosen as the 'best match'. However, the record #6 requires five digits, but the nr has only
three. Two digits are missing, therefore the number is incomplete. Two additional digits would
be needed to be entered on the dialpad. If the number is sent over from the network, it is
rejected.
• If nr=325 => matches the record #5 => nc=55325, vp=LL
Page 668 of 695


• If nr=33123 => matches the record #6 => nc=33123, vp=MM
• If nr=112 => matches the record #7 => nc=77112, vp=NN
• If nr=121 => matches the record #3 => nc=55121, vp=QQ
It is impossible to add the following records:

reason:
11 DD conflict with record # 1
and # 7
11.. DD conflict with record # 7
111 DD conflict with record # 1
22. DD conflict with record # 2
..... DD conflict with record # 3
Regional Settings
Home menu level: /ip telephony region
Description
Regional settings are used to adjust the voice port properties to the PSTN system or the PBX. For
example, to detect hang-up from line, there has to be correct regional setting (correct
busy-tone-frequency and busy-tone-cadence). Without that, detect-cpt parameter the voice port has
to be enabled.
name ( name ) - name of the regional setting
busy-tone-cadence ( integer : 0 ..30000 ; default: 500,500 ) - busy tone cadence in ms
• 0 - end of cadence
busy-tone-frequency ( integer : 20 ..2000 | integer : -24 ..6 ; default: 440x0 ) - frequency and
volume gain of busy tone, Hz x dB
data-access-arrangement ( australia | france | germany | japan | uk | us ; default: us ) - ring
voltage, impedance setting for line-jack card
dial-tone-frequency ( integer : 20 ..2000 | integer : -24 ..6 ; default: 440x0 ) - frequency and
volume gain of dial tone, Hz x dB
dtmf-tone-cadence ( integer : 0 ..30000 ; default: 180,60 ) - Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone
cadence in ms
dtmf-tone-volume ( integer : -24 ..6 ; default: -3,-3 ) - Dual Tone Multi Frequency tone volume in
dB
ring-tone-cadence ( integer : 0 ..30000 ; default: 1000,2000 ) - Ring tone cadence in ms
Page 669 of 695


ring-tone-frequency ( integer : 20 ..2000 | integer : -24 ..6 ; default: 440x0 ) - frequency and
volume gain of busy tone, Hz x dB
Notes
To generate a tone, frequency and cadence arguments are used. The dialtone always is continuous
signal, therefore it does not have the cadence argument. In order to detect dialtone, it should be at
least 100ms long.
There are 10 pre-defined regions, which can not be deleted (but may be changed)
Audio CODECs
Home menu level: /ip telephony codec
Description
CODECs are listed according to their priority of use. The highest priority is at the top. CODECs can
be enabled, disabled and moved within the list. When connecting with other H.323 systems, the
protocol will negotiate the CODEC which both of them support according to the priority order.
The hardware codecs (/hw) are built-in CODECs supported by some cards.
The choice of the CODEC type is based on the throughput and speed of the network. Better audio
quality can be achieved by using CODEC requiring higher network throughput. The highest audio
quality can be achieved by using the G.711-uLaw CODEC requiring 64kb/s throughput for each
direction of the call. It is used mostly within a LAN. The G.723.1 CODEC is the most popular one
to be used for audio connections over the Internet. It requires only 6.3kb/s throughput for each
direction of the call.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony codec> print

Flags: X - disabled
# NAME
0 G.723.1-6.3k/sw
1 G.728-16k/hw
2 G.711-ALaw-64k/hw
3 G.711-uLaw-64k/hw
4 G.711-uLaw-64k/sw
5 G.711-ALaw-64k/sw
6 G.729A-8k/sw
7 GSM-06.10-13.2k/sw
8 LPC-10-2.5k/sw
9 G.723.1-6.3k/hw
10 G.729-8k/sw
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony codec>
AAA
Home menu level: /ip telephony aaa
Description
Page 670 of 695


AAA (Authentication Authorization Accounting) can be used to configure the RADIUS accounting
feature.
• NAS-Identifier - router name (from /system identity print)
• NAS-IP-Address - router's local IP address which the connection was established to (if exist)
• NAS-Port-Type - always Async
• Event-Timestamp - data and time of the event
• Acct-Session-Time - current connection duration (only in INTERIM-UPDATE and STOP
records)
• Acct-Output-Packets - sent RTP (Real-Time Transport Protocol) packet count (only in
INTERIM-UPDATE and STOP records)
• Acct-Output-Packets - sent RTP (Real-Time Transport Protocol) packet count (only in
• Acct-Input-Packets - received RTP (Real-Time Transport Protocol) packet count (only in
• Acct-Output-Octets - sent byte count (only in INTERIM-UPDATE and STOP records)
• Acct-Input-Octets - received byte count (only in INTERIM-UPDATE and STOP records)
• Acct-Session-Id - unique session participient ID
• h323-disconnect-cause - session disconnect reason (only in STOP records):
• h323-disconnect-time - session disconnect time (only in INTERIM-UPDATE and STOP
records)
• h323-connect-time - session establish time (only in INTERIM-UPDATE and STOP records)
• h323-gw-id - name of gateway emitting message (should be equal to NAS-Identifier)
• h323-call-type - call leg type (should be VoIP)
• h323-call-origin - indicates origin of call relatively to the gateway (answer for calls from IP
network, originate - to IP network)
• h323-setup-time - call setup time
• h323-conf-id - unique session ID
• h323-remote-address - the remote address of the session
• NAS-Port-Id - voice port ID
• Acct-Status-Type - record type (START when session is established; STOP when session is
closed; INTERIM-UPDATE (ALIVE)session is alive). The time between the interim-update
messages is defined by the interim-update-interval parameter (if it is set to 0s, there will be no
such messages)
The contents of the CDR (Call Detail Record) are as follows:
• • 0 - Local endpoint application cleared call
• 1 - Local endpoint did not accept call
• 2 - Local endpoint declined to answer call
• 3 - Remote endpoint application cleared call
• 4 - Remote endpoint refused call
• 5 - Remote endpoint did not answer in required time
Page 671 of 695


• 6 - Remote endpoint stopped calling
• 7 - Transport error cleared call
• 8 - Transport connection failed to establish call
• 9 - Gatekeeper has cleared call
• 10 - Call failed as could not find user (in GK)
• 11 - Call failed as could not get enough bandwidth
• 12 - Could not find common capabilities
• 13 - Call was forwarded using FACILITY message
• 14 - Call failed a security check and was ended
• 15 - Local endpoint busy
• 16 - Local endpoint congested
• 17 - Remote endpoint busy
• 18 - Remote endpoint congested
• 19 - Could not reach the remote party
• 20 - The remote party is not running an endpoint
• 21 - The remote party host off line
• 22 - The remote failed temporarily app may retry
use-radius-accounting ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to use radius accounting or not
interim-update ( integer ; default: 0 ) - defines time interval between communications with the
router. If this time will exceed, RADIUS server will assume that this connection is down. This
value is suggested not to be less than 3 minutes
• 0 - no interim-update messages are sent at all
Notes
All the parameters, which names begin with h323, are CISCO vendor specific Radius attributes
Gatekeeper
Home menu level: /ip telephony gatekeeper
Description
For each H.323 endpoint gatekeeper stores its telephone numbers. So, gatekeeper knows all
telephone numbers for all registered endpoints. And it knows which telephone number is handled
by which endpoint. Mapping between endpoints and their telephone numbers is the main
functionality of gatekeepers.
If endpoint is registered to endpoint, it does not have to know every single endpoint and every
single telephone number, which can be called. Instead, every time some number is dialed, endpoint
asks gatekeeper for destination endpoint to call by providing called telephone number to it.
Page 672 of 695


MikroTik IP telephony package includes a very simple gatekeeper. This gatekeeper can be activated
by setting gatekeeper parameter to local. In this case the local endpoint automatically is registered
to the local gatekeeper. And any other endpoint can register to this gatekeeper too.
Registered endpoints are added to the /ip telephony voice-port voip table. Those entries are
marked as dynamic and can not be removed or changed. If there already was an voip entry with the
same IP address, it is marked as registred. Remote-address can not be changed for these entries too,
but registered voip voice ports can be removed - they will stay as dynamic ones. If there already is a
dynamic voip voice port and a static one with the same IP address is added, then instead of dynamic
entry, registered will appear.
Dynamic entries disappear when corresponding endpoint unregisters itself from the gatekeeper.
Registered entries are static and will stay even after that endpoint will be unregistered from this
gatekeeper.
Registered telephone numbers are added to /ip telephony numbers table. Here is exactly the same
idea behind dynamic and registered telephone numbers as it is with voip voice ports.
When an endpoint registers to the gatekeeper, it sends its own telephone numbers (aliases and
prefixes) within this registration request. /ip telephony numbers entry is registered to the endpoint
only if voice-port for that entry is local (not voip). If dst-pattern contains '.' or '_', it is sent as
prefix, otherwise - as alias. The known part of the dst-pattern is sent as prefix. If there is no known
part (dst-pattern is "_" or "...", for example), then this entry is not sent at all.
gatekeeper ( none | local | remote ; default: none ) - Gatekeeper type to use
• none - don't use any gatekeeper at all
• local - start and use local gatekeeper
• remote - use some other gatekeeper
remote-address ( IP address ; default: 0.0.0.0 ) - IP address of remote gatekeeper to use. If set to
0.0.0.0, broadcast gatekeeper discovery is used
remote-id ( name ) - name of remote gatekeeper to use. If left empty, first available gatekeeper will
be used. Name of locally started gatekeeper is the same as system identity
registered ( read-only: yes | no ) - shows whether local H.323 endpoint is registered to any
gatekeeper
registered-with ( read-only: name ) - name of gatekeeper to which local H.323 endpoint is
registered
Example
In most simple case with one phonejack card and some remote gatekeeper, configuration can be as
follows:
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony voice-port> print

Flags: X - disabled
# NAME TYPE AUTODIAL
0 phonejack1 phonejack
1 voip1 voip
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony voice-port voip> print
Page 673 of 695


Flags: X - disabled, D - dynamic, R - registered
# NAME AUTODIAL REMOTE-ADDRESS JITTER-BUFFER PREFERED-CODEC SIL FAS
0 voip1 0.0.0.0 0s none no yes
0 11 phonejack1
1 _ voip1
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony gatekeeper> print
gatekeeper: remote
remote-id: ""
remote-address: 10.0.0.98
registered: yes
registered-with: "[email protected]"
In this case this endpoint will register to gatkeeper with the IP address of 10.0.0.98 and telephone
number 11. Every call to telephone number 11 will be transfered from gatekeeper to this endpoint.
And this endpoint will route this call to phonejack1 voice port. On any other telephone number
gatekeeper will be asked for real destination. From this endpoint it will be possible to call all the
endpoints, which are registered to the same gatekeeper. If that gatekeeper has static entries about
endpoints, which are not registered to gatekeeper, it still will be possible to call those endpoints by
those statically defined telephone numbers at gatekeeper.
Example
For example, if numbers table is like this:

0 1. phonejack1
1 128 voip1 128
2 78 voip2 78
3 77 phonejack1
4 76 phonejack1 55
5 _ voip1
then entries 0, 3 and 4 will be sent to the gatekeeper, others are voip voice ports and are ignored.
Entry 0 will be sent as prefix 1, entry 3 - as alias 77, and entry 4 - as alias 76.
If IP address of local endpoint is 10.0.0.100, then gatekeeper voip and numbers tables will look as
follows:
[admin@MikroTik] ip telephony voice-port voip> print

0 tst-2.5 10.0.0.101 0s none no yes
1 D local 127.0.0.1 100ms none no yes
2 D 10.0.0... 10.0.0.100 100ms none no yes
0 78 linejack1
1 3... vctx1
2 33_ voip1
3 5.. voip1
4 XD 78 local 78
5 XD 3_ local 3
6 D 76 10.0.0.100 76
Page 674 of 695


7 D 77 10.0.0.100 77
8 D 1_ 10.0.0.100 1
Here we can see how aliases and prefixes are added to numbers table. Entries 0..3 are static. Entries
4 and 5 are added by registering the local endpoint to the local gatekeeper. Entries 6..8 are added by
registering endpoint (with IP address 10.0.0.100) to the local gatekeeper.
For prefixes, '_' is added at the end of dst-pattern to allow any additional digits to be added at the
end.
Local endpoint is registered to the local gatekeeper too. So, local aliases and prefixes are added as
dynamic numbers too. Only, as they are local and corresponding number entries already exist in the
number table, then these dynamically added entries are disabled by default.
If any registered telephone number will conflict with some existing telephone numbers entry, it will
be added as disabled and dynamic.
If in gatekeeper's numbers table there already exists exactly the same dst-pattern as some other
endpoint is trying to register, this gatekeeper registration for that endpoint will fail.
Troubleshooting
Description
• The IP Telephony does not work after upgrading from 2.5.x version - You need to
completely reinstall the router using any installation procedure. You may keep the
configuration using either the installation program option or the backup file.
• The IP Telephony gateway does not detect the drop of the line when connected to some
PBXs - Different regional setting should be used to match the parameters of the PBX. For
example, try using uk for Meridian PBX.
• The IP Telephone does not call the gateway, but gives busy signal - Enable the logging of IP
telephony events under /system logging facility. Use the monitoring function for voice ports to
debug your setup while making calls.
• The IP telephony is working without NAT, but sound goes only in one direction - Disable
H323 service port in firewall: /ip firewall service-port set h323 disabled=yes
• The IP Telephony does not work through NAT - Enable H323 service port in firewall: /ip
firewall service-port set h323 disabled=no
A simple example
Description
The following describes examples of some useful IP telephony applications using MikroTik
RouterOS.
Let us consider the following example of IP telephony gateway, one MikroTik IP telephone, and
one Welltech LAN Phone 101 setup:
Page 675 of 695


Setting up the MikroTik IP Telephone
If you pick up the handset, a dialtone should be heard.
The basic telephony configuration should be as follows:
• Add a voip voice port to the /ip telephony voice-port voip for each of the devices you want to
call, or want to receive calls from, i.e., (the IP telephony gateway 10.1.1.12 and the Welltech
IP telephone 10.5.8.2):
[admin@Joe] ip telephony voice-port voip> add name=gw remote-address=10.1.1.12
[admin@Joe] ip telephony voice-port voip> add name=rob remote-address=10.5.8.2
[admin@Joe] ip telephony voice-port voip> print Flags: X - disabled, D - dynamic, R
- registered # NAME AUTODIAL REMOTE-ADDRESS JITTER-BUFFER PREFERED-CODEC SIL FAS 0
gw 10.1.1.12 100ms none no yes 1 rob 10.5.8.2 100ms none no yes [admin@Joe] ip
telephony voice-port voip>
You should have three vioce ports now:
[admin@Joe] ip telephony voice-port> print Flags: X - disabled # NAME TYPE AUTODIAL
0 linejack1 linejack 1 gw voip 2 rob voip [admin@Joe] ip telephony voice-port>
• Add at least one unique number to the /ip telephony numbers for each voice port. This
number will be used to call that port:
[admin@Joe] ip telephony numbers> add dst-pattern=31 voice-port=rob [admin@Joe] ip
telephony numbers> add dst-pattern=33 voice-port=linejack1 [admin@Joe] ip telephony
numbers> add dst-pattern=1. voice-port=gw prefix=1 [admin@Joe] ip telephony numbers>
print Flags: I - invalid, X - disabled, D - dynamic, R - registered # DST-PATTERN
VOICE-PORT PREFIX 0 31 rob 31 1 33 linejack1 2 1. gw 1 [admin@Joe] ip telephony
numbers>
Here, the dst-pattern=31 is to call the Welltech IP Telephone, if the number 31 is dialed on
the dialpad. The dst-pattern=33 is to ring the local telephone, if a call for number 33 is
received over the network. Anything starting with digit '1' would be sent over to the IP
Telephony gateway.
Making calls from the IP telephone 10.0.0.224:
• To call the IP telephone 10.5.8.2, it is enough to lift the handset and dial the number 31
• To call the PBX extension 13, it is enough to lift the handset and dial the number 13
After establishing the connection with 13, the voice port monitor shows:
[admin@Joe] ip telephony voice-port linejack> monitor linejack status: connection
port: phone direction: port-to-ip line-status: unplugged phone-number: 13
remote-party-name: PBX_Line [10.1.1.12] codec: G.723.1-6.3k/hw duration: 16s
[admin@Joe] ip telephony voice-port linejack>
Setting up the IP Telephony Gateway

The IP telephony gateway [voip_gw] requires the following configuration:
• Set the regional setting to match our PBX. The mikrotik region will be used in thisn example:
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port linejack> set linejack1 region=mikrotik

[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port linejack> print
Flags: X - disabled
0 name="linejack1" autodial="" region=mikrotik playback-volume=0
Page 676 of 695


record-volume=0 ring-cadence="++-++--- ++-++---" agc-on-playback=no
agc-on-record=no aec=yes aec-tail-length=short aec-nlp-threshold=low
aec-attenuation-scaling=4 aec-attenuation-boost=0 software-aec=no
detect-cpt=yes
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port linejack>
• Add a voip voice port to the /ip telephony voice-port voip for each of the devices you want to
call, or want to receive calls from, i.e., (the IP telephone 10.0.0.224 and the Welltech IP
telephone 10.5.8.2):
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port voip> add name=joe \

[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port voip> add name=rob \
\... remote-address=10.5.8.2 prefered-codec=G.723.1-6.3k/hw
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port voip> print
0 joe 10.0.0.224 100ms none no yes
1 rob 10.5.8.2 100ms G.723.1-6.3k/hw no yes
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port voip>
• Add number records to the /ip telephony numbers, so you are able to make calls:
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony numbers> add dst-pattern=31 voice-port=rob prefix=31

[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony numbers> add dst-pattern=33 voice-port=joe prefix=33
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony numbers> add dst-pattern=1. voice-port=linejack1 \
\... prefix=1
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony numbers> print
0 31 rob 31
1 33 joe 33
2 1. linejack1 1
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony numbers>
Making calls through the IP telephony gateway:

• To dial the IP telephone 10.0.0.224 from the office PBX line, the extension number 19 should
be dialed, and, after the dial tone has been received, the number 33 should be entered. Thus,
the telephone [Joe] is ringed.
After establishing the voice connection with '33' (the call has been answered), the voice port
monitor shows:
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port linejack> monitor linejack1 status:
connection port: line direction: port-to-ip line-status: plugged phone-number: 33
remote-party-name: linejack1 [10.0.0.224] codec: G.723.1-6.3k/hw duration: 1m46s
[admin@voip_gw] ip telephony voice-port linejack>
• To dial the IP telephone 10.5.8.2 from the office PBX line, the extension number 19 should be
dialed, and, after the dial tone has been received, the number 31 should be entered.
Setting up the Welltech IP Telephone

Please follow the documentation from www.welltech.com.tw on how to set up the Welltech LAN
Phone 101. Here we give just brief recommendations:
1. We recommend to upgrade the Welltech LAN Phone 101 with the latest application software.
Page 677 of 695


Telnet to the phone and check what you have, for example:
usr/config$ rom -print

Download Method : TFTP
Server Address : 10.5.8.1
Hardware Ver. : 4.0
Boot Rom : nblp-boot.102a
Application Rom : wtlp.108h
DSP App : 48302ce3.127
DSP Kernel : 48302ck.127
DSP Test Code : 483cbit.bin
Ringback Tone : wg-ringbacktone.100
Hold Tone : wg-holdtone10s.100
Ringing Tone1 : ringlow.bin
Ringing Tone2 : ringmid.bin
Ringing Tone3 : ringhi.bin
usr/config$
2. Check if you have the codecs arranged in the desired order:
usr/config$ voice -print

Voice codec setting relate information
Sending packet size :
G.723.1 : 30 ms
G.711A : 20 ms
G.711U : 20 ms
G.729A : 20 ms
G.729 : 20 ms
Priority order codec :
g7231 g711a g711u g729a g729
Volume levels :
voice volume : 54
input gain : 26
dtmf volume : 23
Silence suppression & CNG:
G.723.1 : Off
Echo canceller : On
JitterBuffer Min Delay : 90
JitterBuffer Max Delay : 150
usr/config$
3. Make sure you have set the H.323 operation mode to phone to phone (P2P), not gatekeeper
(GK):
usr/config$ h323 -print

H.323 stack relate information
RAS mode : Non-GK mode
Registered e164 : 31
Registered H323 ID : Rob
RTP port : 16384
H.245 port : 16640
Allocated port range :
start port : 1024
end port : 65535
Response timeOut : 5
Connect timeOut : 5000
usr/config$
4. Add the gateway's address to the phonebook:
usr/config$ pbook -add name gw ip 10.1.1.12

usr/config$
Page 678 of 695


This may take a few seconds, please wait....
Commit to flash memory ok!
usr/config$ pbook -print
index Name IP E164
======================================================================
1 gw 10.1.1.12
----------------------------------------------------------------------
usr/config$
Making calls from the IP telephone 10.5.8.2:

• Just lift the handset and dial '11', or '13' fo the PBX extensions.
• Dial '33' for [Joe]. The call request will be sent to the gateway 10.1.1.12, where it will be
forwarded to [Joe]. If you want to call [Joe] directly, add a phonebook record for it:
usr/config$ pbook -add name Joe ip 10.0.0.224 e164 33
Use the telephony logging feature on the gateway to debug your setup.
Setting up MikroTik Router and CISCO Router

Let's try a different example.
Here are some hints on how to get working configuration for telephony calls between CISCO and
MikroTik router.
Configuration on the MikroTik side
• G.729a codec MUST be disabled (otherwise connections are not possible at all!!!)
/ip telephony codec disable G.729A-8k/sw
• G.711-ALaw codec should not be used (in some cases there is no sound)
/ip telephony codec disable "G.711-ALaw-64k/sw G.711-ALaw-64k/hw"
• Fast start has to be used (otherwise no ring-back tone and problems with codec negotiation)
/ip telephony voice-port set cisco fast-start=yes
• Telephone number we want to call to must be sent to Cisco, for example

/ip telephony numbers add destination-pattern=101 voice-port=cisco prefix=101
• Telephone number, cisco will call us, must be assigned to some voice port, for example,
/ip telephony numbers add destination-pattern=098 voice-port=linejack
Configuration on the CISCO side:

• IP routing has to be enabled
ip routing
• Default values for fast start can be used:

voice service pots default h323 call start exit voice service voip default h323 call
start exit
• Enable opening of RTP streams:

voice rtp send-recv
• Assign some E.164 number for local telephone, for example, 101 to port 0/0
dial-peer voice 1 pots destination-pattern 101 port 0/0 exit
Page 679 of 695


• create preferred codec listing:
voice class codec codec_class_number codec preference 1 g711ulaw codec preference 2
g723r63 exit
NOTE: g723r53 codec can be used, too
• Tell, that some foreign E.164 telephone number can be reached by calling to some IP address,
for example, 098 by calling to 10.0.0.98
dial-peer voice 11 voip destination-pattern 098 session target ipv4:10.0.0.98
voice-class codec codec_class_number exit
NOTE: instead of codec class, one specified codec could be specified:
codec g711ulaw
For reference, following is an exported CISCO configuration, that works:
!
version 12.1
no service single-slot-reload-enable
service timestamps debug uptime
service timestamps log uptime
no service password-encryption
!
hostname Router
!
logging rate-limit console 10 except errors
enable secret 5 $1$bTMC$nDGl9/n/pc3OMbtWxADMg1
enable password 123
!
memory-size iomem 25
ip subnet-zero
no ip finger
!
call rsvp-sync
voice rtp send-recv
!
voice class codec 1
codec preference 1 g711ulaw
codec preference 2 g723r63
!
interface FastEthernet0
ip address 10.0.0.101 255.255.255.0
no ip mroute-cache
speed auto
half-duplex
!
ip classless
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.0.0.1
no ip http server
!
dialer-list 1 protocol ip permit
dialer-list 1 protocol ipx permit
!
voice-port 0/0
!
voice-port 0/1
!
voice-port 2/0
!
voice-port 2/1
!
dial-peer voice 1 pots
destination-pattern 101
port 0/0
!
dial-peer voice 97 voip
session target ipv4:10.0.0.97
codec g711ulaw
!
Page 680 of 695


dial-peer voice 98 voip
voice-class codec 1
session target ipv4:10.0.0.98
!
!
line con 0
transport input none
line aux 0
line vty 0 4
password 123
login
!
end
Setting up PBX to PBX Connection over an IP Network

To interconnect two telephone switchboards (PBX) over an IP network, two IP telephony gateways
should be configured. The setup is shown in the following diagram:
We want to be able to use make calls from local telephones of one PBX to local telephones or
external lines of the other PBX.
Assume that:
• The IP telephony gateway #1 has IP address 10.0.0.182, and the name of the Voicetronix first
line is 'vctx1'.
• The IP telephony gateway #2 has IP address 10.0.0.183, and the name of the Voicetronix first
line is 'vctx1'.
The IP telephony configuration should be as follows:
• IP telephony gateway #1 should have:
/ip telephony voice-port voip add name=gw2 remote-address=10.0.0.183 /ip telephony
numbers add dst-pattern=1.. voice-port=gw2 prefix=2 add dst-pattern=2..
voice-port=vctx1 prefix=1
• IP telephony gateway #2 should have

/ip telephony voice-port voip add name=gw1 remote-address=10.0.0.182 /ip telephony
numbers add dst-pattern=2.. voice-port=vctx1 prefix=1 add dst-pattern=1..
voice-port=gw1 prefix=2
The system works as follows:

To dial from the main office PBX#1 any extension of the remote office PBX#2, the extension with
the connected gateway at PBX#1 should be dialed first. Then, after the dial tone of the gateway#1 is
received, the remote extension number should be dialed.
To dial from the main office PBX#2 any extension of the remote office PBX#1, the actions are the
same as in first situation.
Page 681 of 695


System Watchdog
Document revision 1.2 (Tue Mar 09 08:45:49 GMT 2004)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Hardware Watchdog Management
Description
Example
General Information
Summary
System watchdog feature is needed to reboot the system in case of software failures.
Specifications
Home menu level: /system watchdog
Hardware Watchdog Management

Home menu level: /system watchdog
Description
This menu allows to configure system to reboot on kernel panic, when an IP address does not
respond, or in case the system has locked up. Software watchdog timer is used to provide the last
option, so in very rare cases (caused by hardware malfunction) it can lock up by itself. There is a
hardware watchdog device available in RouterBOARD hardware, which can reboot the system in
any case.
reboot-on-failure ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to reboot on kernel panic
watch-address ( IP address ; default: none ) - if set, the system will reboot in case 6 sequental
pings to the given IP address (sent once per 10 seconds) will fail
• none - disable this option
watchdog-timer ( yes | no ; default: no ) - whether to reboot if system is unresponsive for a minute
Page 682 of 695


no-ping-delay ( time ; default: 5m ) - specifies how long after reboot not to test and ping
watch-address. The default setting means that if watch-address is set and is not reachable, the router
will reboot about every 6 minutes.
automatic-supout ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - when software failure happens, a file named
"autosupout.rif" is generated automatically. The previous "autosupout.rif" file is renamed to
"autosupout.old.rif"
auto-send-supout ( yes | no ; default: no ) - after the support output file is automatically generated,
it can be sent by email
send-email-from ( text ; default: "" ) - e-mail address to send the support output file from. If not
set, the value set in /tool e-mail is used
send-email-to ( text ; default: "" ) - e-mail address to send the support output file to
send-smtp-server ( text ; default: "" ) - SMTP server address to send the support output file
through. If not set, the value set in /tool e-mail is used
Example
To make system generate a support output file and sent it automatically to [email protected]
throught the 192.0.2.1in case of a software crash:
[admin@MikroTik] system watchdog> set auto-send-supout=yes \

\... [email protected] send-smtp-server=192.0.2.1
[admin@MikroTik] system watchdog> print
reboot-on-failure: yes
watch-address: none
watchdog-timer: yes
no-ping-delay: 5m
automatic-supout: yes
auto-send-supout: yes
send-smtp-server: 192.0.2.1
send-email-to: [email protected]
[admin@MikroTik] system watchdog>
Page 683 of 695


UPS Monitor
Document revision 2.2 (Thu Jul 07 17:18:54 GMT 2005)
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
UPS Monitor Setup
Notes
Example
Runtime Calibration
Description
Notes
Example
UPS Monitoring
Example
General Information
Summary
The UPS monitor feature works with APC UPS units that support “smart” signaling over serial
RS232 or USB connection. This feature enables the network administrator to monitor the UPS and
set the router to ‘gracefully’ handle any power outage with no corruption or damage to the router.
The basic purpose of this feature is to ensure that the router will come back online after an extended
power failure. To do this, the router will monitor the UPS and set itself to hibernate mode when the
utility power is down and the UPS battery is has less than 10% of its battery power left. The router
will then continue to monitor the UPS (while in hibernate mode) and then restart itself after when
the utility power returns. If the UPS battery is drained and the router loses all power, the router will
power back to full operation when the ‘utility’ power returns.
The UPS monitor feature on the MikroTik RouterOS supports
• hibernate and safe reboot on power and battery failure
• UPS battery test and run time calibration test
• monitoring of all "smart" mode status information supported by UPS
• logging of power changes
Specifications
Page 684 of 695


Packages required: ups
Home menu level: /system ups
Standards and Technologies: APC's smart protocol
Related Documents
Description
Cabling
The APC UPS (BackUPS Pro or SmartUPS) requires a special serial cable. If no cable came with
the UPS, a cable may be ordered from APC or one can be made "in-house". Use the following
diagram:
Router Side (DB9f) Signal Direction UPS Side (DB9m)

2 Receive IN 2
3 Send OUT 1
5 Ground 4
7 CTS IN 6
Note that you may also connect with USB if available.
UPS Monitor Setup

Home menu level: /system ups
alarm-setting ( delayed | immediate | low-battery | none ; default: immediate ) - UPS sound alarm
setting:
• delayed - alarm is delayed to the on-battery event
• immediate - alarm immediately after the on-battery event
• low-battery - alarm only when the battery is low
• none - do not alarm
load ( read-only: percentage ) - the UPS's output load as a percentage of full rated load in Watts.
The typical accuracy of this measurement is ±3% of the maximum of 105%
manufacture-date ( read-only: text ) - the UPS's date of manufacture in the format "mm/dd/yy"
(month, day, year)
min-runtime ( time ; default: 5m ) - minimal run time remaining. After a 'utility' failure, the router
will monitor the runtime-left value. When the value reaches the min-runtime value, the router will
go to hibernate mode
Page 685 of 695


• 0 - the router will go to hibernate mode when the "battery low" signal is sent indicating that the
battery power is below 10%
model ( read-only: text ) - less than 32 ASCII character string consisting of the UPS model name
(the words on the front of the UPS itself)
nominal-battery-voltage ( read-only: integer ) - the UPS's nominal battery voltage rating (this is
not the UPS's actual battery voltage)
offline-time ( time ; default: 5m ) - how long to work on batteries. The router waits that amount of
time and then goes into hibernate mode until the UPS reports that the 'utility' power is back
• 0 - the router will go into hibernate mode according the min-runtime setting and 10% of battery
power event. In this case, the router will wait until the UPS reports that the battery power is
below 10%
port ( name ) - communication port of the router
serial ( read-only: text ) - a string of at least 8 characters directly representing the UPS's serial
number as set at the factory. Newer SmartUPS models have 12-character serial numbers
version ( read-only: text ) - UPS version, consists of three fields: SKU number, firmware revision,
country code. The county code may be one of the following:
• I - 220/230/240 Vac
• D - 115/120 Vac
• A - 100 Vac
• M - 208 Vac
• J - 200 Vac
Notes
In order to enable UPS monitor, the serial port should be available.
Example
To enable the UPS monitor for port serial1:
[admin@MikroTik] system ups> add port=serial1 disabled=no
[admin@MikroTik] system ups> print
0 name="ups" port=serial1 offline-time=5m min-runtime=5m
alarm-setting=immediate model="SMART-UPS 1000" version="60.11.I"
serial="QS0030311640" manufacture-date="07/18/00"
nominal-battery-voltage=24V
[admin@MikroTik] system ups>
Runtime Calibration
Command name: /system ups rtc
Description
The rtc command causes the UPS to start a run time calibration until less than 25% of full battery
capacity is reached. This command calibrates the returned run time value.
Page 686 of 695


Notes
The test begins only if the battery capacity is 100%.
Example
[admin@MikroTik] system ups> rtc 0
UPS Monitoring
Command name: /system ups monitor
battery-charge ( percentage ) - the UPS's remaining battery capacity as a percent of the fully
charged condition
battery-voltage - the UPS's present battery voltage. The typical accuracy of this measurement is
±5% of the maximum value (depending on the UPS's nominal battery voltage)
frequency ( percentage ) - when operating on-line, the UPS's internal operating frequency is
synchronized to the line within variations within 3 Hz of the nominal 50 or 60 Hz. The typical
accuracy of this measurement is ±1% of the full scale value of 63 Hz
line-voltage - the in-line utility power voltage
load ( percentage ) - the UPS's output load as a percentage of full rated load in Watts. The typical
accuracy of this measurement is ±3% of the maximum of 105%
low-battery - only shown when the UPS reports this status
on-battery ( yes | no ) - Whether UPS battery is supplying power
on-line ( yes | no ) - whether power is being provided by the external utility (power company)
output-voltage - the UPS's output voltage
overloaded-output - only shown when the UPS reports this status
replace-battery - only shown when the UPS reports this status
runtime-calibration-running - only shown when the UPS reports this status
runtime-left ( time ) - the UPS's estimated remaining run time in minutes. You can query the UPS
when it is operating in the on-line, bypass, or on-battery modes of operation. The UPS's remaining
run time reply is based on available battery capacity and output load
smart-boost-mode - only shown when the UPS reports this status
smart-ssdd-mode - only shown when the UPS reports this status
transfer-cause ( text ) - the reason for the most recent transfer to on-battery operation (only shown
when the unit is on-battery)
Example
When running on utility power:
[admin@MikroTik] system ups> monitor 0
on-line: yes
Page 687 of 695


on-battery: no
RTC-running: no
runtime-left: 20m
battery-charge: 100%
battery-voltage: 27V
line-voltage: 226V
output-voltage: 226V
load: 45%
temperature: 39C
frequency: 50Hz
replace-battery: no
smart-boost: no
smart-trim: no
overload: no
low-battery: no
When running on battery:

[admin@MikroTik] system ups> monitor 0
on-line: no
on-battery: yes
transfer-cause: "Line voltage notch or spike"
RTC-running: no
runtime-left: 19m
offline-after: 4m46s
battery-charge: 94%
battery-voltage: 24V
line-voltage: 0V
output-voltage: 228V
load: 42%
temperature: 39C
frequency: 50Hz
replace-battery: no
smart-boost: no
smart-trim: no
overload: no
low-battery: no
Page 688 of 695


VRRP
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Information
Summary
Specifications
Related Documents
Description
Notes
VRRP Routers
Description
Notes
Virtual IP addresses
Notes
A simple example of VRRP fail over
Description
Configuring Master VRRP router
Configuring Backup VRRP router
Testing fail over
General Information
Summary
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) implementation in the MikroTik RouterOS is
RFC2338 compliant. VRRP protocol is used to ensure constant access to some resources. Two or
more routers (referred as VRRP Routers in this context) create a highly available cluster (also
referred as Virtual routers) with dynamic fail over. Each router can participate in not more than 255
virtual routers per interface. Many modern routers support this protocol.
Network setups with VRRP clusters provide high availability for routers without using clumsy
ping-based scripts.
Specifications
Home menu level: /ip vrrp
Standards and Technologies: VRRP , AH , HMAC-MD5-96 within ESP and AH
Page 689 of 695


Related Documents

Description
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol is an election protocol that provides high availability for
routers. A number of routers may participate in one or more virtual routers. One or more IP
addresses may be assigned to a virtual router. A node of a virtual router can be in one of the
following states:
• MASTER state, when the node answers all the requests to the instance's IP addresses. There
may only be one MASTER node in a virtual router. This node sends VRRP advertisement
packets to all the backup routers (using multicast address) every once in a while (set in
interval property).
• BACKUP state, when the VRRP router monitors the availability and state of the Master
Router. It does not answer any requests to the instance's IP addresses. Should master become
unavailable (if at least three sequential VRRP packets are lost), election process happens, and
new master is proclaimed based on its priority. For more details on virtual routers, see
RFC2338.
Notes
VRRP does not currently work on VLAN interfaces, as it is impossible to have the MAC address of
a VLAN interface different from the MAC address of the physical interface it is put on.
VRRP Routers
Home menu level: /ip vrrp
Description
A number of VRRP routers may form a virtual router. The maximal number of clusters on one
network is 255 each having a unique VRID (Virtual Router ID). Each router participating in a
VRRP cluster must have it priority set to a valid value.
authentication ( none | simple | ah ; default: none ) - authentication method to use for VRRP
advertisement packets
• none - no authentication
• ah - Authentication Header using HMAC-MD5-96 algorithm
interface ( name ) - interface name the instance is running on
interval ( integer : 1 ..255 ; default: 1 ) - VRRP update interval in seconds. Defines how frequently
Page 690 of 695


the master of the given cluster sends VRRP advertisement packets
name ( name ) - assigned name of the VRRP instance
on-backup ( name ; default: "" ) - script to execute when the node switch to backup state
on-master ( name ; default: "" ) - script to execute when the node switch to master state
password ( text ; default: "" ) - password required for authentication depending on method used
can be ignored (if no authentication used), 8-character long text string (for plain-text authentication)
or 16-character long text string (128-bit key required for AH authentication)
preemption-mode ( yes | no ; default: yes ) - whether preemption mode is enabled
• no - a backup node will not be elected to be a master until the current master fail even if the
backup node has higher priority than the current master
• yes - the master node always has the priority
priority ( integer : 1 ..255 ; default: 100 ) - priority of the current node (higher values mean higher
priority)
• 255 - RFC requires that the router that owns the IP addresses assigned to this instance had the
priority of 255
vrid ( integer : 0 ..255 ; default: 1 ) - Virtual Router Identifier (must be unique on one interface)
Notes
All the nodes of one cluster must have the same vrid, interval, preemption-mode, authentication
and password.
As said before, priority of 255 is reserved for the real owner of the virtual router's IP addresses.
Theoretically, the owner should have the IP address added statically to its IP address list and also to
the VRRP virtual address list, but you should never do this! Any addresses that you are using as
virtual addresses (i.e. they are added in /ip vrrp address) must not appear in /ip address list as they
otherwise can cause IP address conflict, which will not be resolved automatically.
Also You must have an IP address (no matter what) on the interface you want to run VRRP on.
Example
To add a VRRP instance on ether1 interface, forming (because priority is 255) a virtual router with
vrid of 1:
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp> add interface=ether1 vrid=1 priority=255
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp> print
Flags: X - disabled, I - invalid, M - master, B - backup
0 I name="vr1" interface=ether1 vrid=1 priority=255 interval=1
preemption-mode=yes authentication=none password="" on-backup=""
on-master=""
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp>
Virtual IP addresses
Home menu level: /ip vrrp address
Page 691 of 695


address ( IP address ) - IP address belongs to the virtual router
broadcast ( IP address ) - broadcasting IP address
interface ( name ; default: default ) - interface, where to put the address on (may be different form
the interface this VRRP instance is running on)
• default - put this address on the interface the given VRRP instane is working on
network ( IP address ) - IP address of the network
virtual-router ( name ) - VRRP router's name the address belongs to
Notes
The virtual IP addresses should be the same for each node of a virtual router.
Example
To add a virtual address of 192.168.1.1/24 to the vr1 VRRP router:
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp> address add address=192.168.1.1/24 \

\... virtual-router=vr1
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp> address print
Flags: X - disabled, A - active
# ADDRESS NETWORK BROADCAST INSTANCE INTERFACE
0 192.168.1.1/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 vr1 default
A simple example of VRRP fail over
Description
Page 692 of 695


VRRP protocol may be used to make a redundant Internet connection with seamless fail-over. Let
us assume that we have 192.168.1.0/24 network and we need to provide highly available Internet
connection for it. This network should be NATted (to make fail-over with public IPs, use such
dynamic routing protocols as BGP or OSPF together with VRRP). We have connections to two
different Internet Service Providers (ISPs), and one of them is preferred (for example, it is cheaper
or faster).
This example shows how to configure VRRP on the two routers shown on the diagram. The routers
must have initial configuration: interfaces are enabled, each interface have appropriate IP address
(note that each of the two interfaces should have an IP address), routing table is set correctly (it
should have at least a default route). SRC-NAT or masquerading should also be configured before.
See the respective manual chapters on how to make this configuration.
We will assume that the interface the 192.168.1.0/24 network is connected to is named local on
both VRRP routers
Configuring Master VRRP router

First of all we should create a VRRP instance on this router. We will use the priority of 255 for this
router as it should be preferred router.
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp> add interface=local priority=255
0 M name="vr1" interface=local vrid=1 priority=255 interval=1
on-master=""
Page 693 of 695


Next the virtual IP address should be added to this VRRP instance

0 192.168.1.1/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 vr1 default
Now this address should appear in /ip address list:

0 10.0.0.1/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 public
1 192.168.1.2/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 local
2 D 192.168.1.1/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 local
Configuring Backup VRRP router

Now we will create VRRP instance with lower priority (we can use the default value of 100), so this
router will back up the preferred one:
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp> add interface=local
0 B name="vr1" interface=local vrid=1 priority=100 interval=1
on-master=""
Now we should add the same virtual address as was added to the master node:

0 192.168.1.1/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 vr1 default
Note that this address will not appear in /ip address list:
0 10.1.0.1/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 public
1 192.168.1.3/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 local
Testing fail over

Now, when we will disconnect the master router, the backup one will switch to the master state:
Page 694 of 695


0 M name="vr1" interface=local vrid=1 priority=100 interval=1
on-master=""
[admin@MikroTik] ip vrrp> /ip address print
0 10.1.0.1/24 10.0.0.0 10.0.0.255 public
1 192.168.1.3/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 local
2 D 192.168.1.1/24 192.168.1.0 192.168.1.255 local
Page 695 of 695

Mikrotik Routeros™ V2.9: Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mikrotik Routeros™ V2.9: Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mikrotik Routeros™ V2.9: Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MikroTik RouterOS™ v2.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

IA32 Hardware requirements

MIPS Hardware requirements

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Hardware needed for installation time only

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3Com 509 Series

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DEC 21x4x 'Tulip'

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

National Semiconductor DP83810

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

National Semiconductor DP83820

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Sundance ST201 'Alta'

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

VIA vt612x 'Velocity'

VIA vt86c100 'Rhine'

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• FarSync PCI V.35/X.21 (8.448 Mbit/s)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• Standard Communication Ports Com1 and Com2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• Vadem VG-469 PCMCIA-ISA adapter (one or two PCMCIA ports)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• NWH 1600 GPRS Modem (Benq M32 chip)

• Audiovox PC5220 CDMA Dual Band 1XEV-DO PC Card for VerizonWireless

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

• Software Package Management

Setting up MikroTik RouterOS™

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloading and Installing the MikroTik RouterOS™